Installation and Administration Guide SEP14

Symantec Endpoint
Protection 14 Installation
and Administration Guide
Symantec Endpoint Protection Installation and
Administration Guide
Product version 14
Documentation version: 3
This document was last updated on: December 14, 2016
Legal Notice
Copyright 2016 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Symantec, the Symantec Logo, the Checkmark Logo, LiveUpdate, and Norton are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other
countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This Symantec product may contain third party software for which Symantec is required to
provide attribution to the third party (Third Party Programs). Some of the Third Party Programs
are available under open source or free software licenses. The License Agreement
accompanying the Software does not alter any rights or obligations you may have under those
open source or free software licenses. Please see the Third Party Legal Notice Appendix to
this Documentation or TPIP ReadMe File accompanying this Symantec product for more
information on the Third Party Programs.
The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying,
distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be
reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Symantec
Corporation and its licensors, if any.
THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH
DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION
WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE
INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE
WITHOUT NOTICE.
The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer software
as defined in FAR 12.212 and subject to restricted rights as defined in FAR Section 52.227-19
"Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights" and DFARS 227.7202, et seq.
"Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as
applicable, and any successor regulations, whether delivered by Symantec as on premises
or hosted services. Any use, modification, reproduction release, performance, display or
disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation by the U.S. Government shall be
solely in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.
Symantec Corporation
350 Ellis Street
Mountain View, CA 94043
http://www.symantec.com
Technical Support
Symantec Technical Support maintains support centers globally. Technical Supports
primary role is to respond to specific queries about product features and functionality.
The Technical Support group also creates content for our online Knowledge Base.
The Technical Support group works collaboratively with the other functional areas
within Symantec to answer your questions in a timely fashion. For example, the
Technical Support group works with Product Engineering and Symantec Security
Response to provide alerting services and virus definition updates.
Symantecs support offerings include the following:
A range of support options that give you the flexibility to select the right amount
of service for any size organization
Telephone and/or Web-based support that provides rapid response and
up-to-the-minute information
Upgrade assurance that delivers software upgrades
Global support purchased on a regional business hours or 24 hours a day, 7
days a week basis
Premium service offerings that include Account Management Services
For information about Symantecs support offerings, you can visit our website at
the following URL:
www.symantec.com/business/support/
All support services will be delivered in accordance with your support agreement
and the then-current enterprise technical support policy.
Contacting Technical Support

Customers with a current support agreement may access Technical Support
information at the following URL:
Before contacting Technical Support, make sure you have satisfied the system
requirements that are listed in your product documentation. Also, you should be at
the computer on which the problem occurred, in case it is necessary to replicate
the problem.
When you contact Technical Support, please have the following information
available:
Product release level
Hardware information
Available memory, disk space, and NIC information
Operating system
Version and patch level
Network topology
Router, gateway, and IP address information
Problem description:
Error messages and log files
Troubleshooting that was performed before contacting Symantec
Recent software configuration changes and network changes
Licensing and registration

If your Symantec product requires registration or a license key, access our technical
support Web page at the following URL:
Customer service
Customer service information is available at the following URL:
Customer Service is available to assist with non-technical questions, such as the
following types of issues:
Questions regarding product licensing or serialization
Product registration updates, such as address or name changes
General product information (features, language availability, local dealers)
Latest information about product updates and upgrades
Information about upgrade assurance and support contracts
Information about the Symantec Buying Programs
Advice about Symantec's technical support options
Nontechnical presales questions
Issues that are related to CD-ROMs, DVDs, or manuals
Support agreement resources
If you want to contact Symantec regarding an existing support agreement, please
contact the support agreement administration team for your region as follows:
Asia-Pacific and Japan customercare_apj@symantec.com
Europe, Middle-East, and Africa semea@symantec.com
North America and Latin America supportsolutions@symantec.com

Contents
Technical Support ............................................................................................... 4

Chapter 1 Introduction to Symantec Endpoint Protection ............ 28
What is Symantec Endpoint Protection? ............................................ 28
How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses layers to protect
computers ....................................................................... 29
How does Symantec Endpoint Protection enforce
compliance? .................................................................... 32
Components of Symantec Endpoint Protection ................................... 33
Optional components for Symantec Endpoint Protection ....................... 34
Where to get more information ........................................................ 35
Chapter 2 Getting Started with Symantec Endpoint

Protection ....................................................................... 36
Getting up and running on Symantec Endpoint Protection for the first

time ..................................................................................... 36
Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager ............................... 43
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager after
installation ...................................................................... 44
Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager with a custom
configuration ......................................................................... 45
Logging on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console ................................................................................ 48
Activating or importing your Symantec Endpoint Protection product
license ................................................................................. 51
Installing clients with Save Package ................................................. 53
Installing the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac .............. 55
Installing the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux ............ 57
Installing clients with Remote Push .................................................. 59
Installing clients with Web Link and Email .......................................... 61
What do I do after I install the management server? ............................ 63
Contents 8
Section 1 Installing Symantec Endpoint

Protection ................................................................... 67
Chapter 3 Planning the installation ................................................... 68
System requirements for Symantec Endpoint Protection ....................... 68
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager system
requirements ................................................................... 69
Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows system
requirements ................................................................... 71
Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows Embedded
system requirements ......................................................... 74
Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac system
requirements ................................................................... 76
Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux system
requirements ................................................................... 76
Internationalization requirements ............................................... 77
Product license requirements .......................................................... 78
Supported virtual installations and virtualization products ...................... 80
Network architecture considerations ................................................. 81
About choosing a database type ...................................................... 82
About basic management server settings .......................................... 83
Management server ports .............................................................. 85
About SQL Server configuration settings ........................................... 85
About SQL Server database authentication modes .............................. 89
Uninstalling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager ........................... 90
Uninstalling Symantec Endpoint Protection with the CleanWipe
utility .................................................................................... 90
Chapter 4 Managing product licenses ............................................... 92

Licensing Symantec Endpoint Protection ........................................... 92
About the trial license .................................................................... 94
About purchasing licenses ............................................................. 95
Required licensing contact information .............................................. 96
About the Symantec Licensing Portal ............................................... 97
About product upgrades and licenses ............................................... 97
About renewing your Symantec Endpoint Protection license .................. 98
Checking the license status in Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager ............................................................................... 98
About the licensing enforcement rules .............................................. 99
Backing up your license files ......................................................... 100
Recovering a deleted license ........................................................ 101
Contents 9
Purging obsolete clients from the database to make more licenses

available ............................................................................. 101
About multi-year licenses ............................................................. 102
Licensing an unmanaged Windows client ........................................ 103
Chapter 5 Managing the client installation .................................... 104

Preparing for client installation ....................................................... 105
Preparing Windows and Mac computers for remote
deployment ................................................................... 108
About the communication ports that Symantec Endpoint Protection
uses ............................................................................ 110
About Windows client installation packages ................................ 114
Choosing a method to install the client using the Client Deployment
Wizard ................................................................................ 115
Deciding which features to install on the client .................................. 116
Exporting client installation packages .............................................. 118
About the Windows client installation settings ................................... 119
Creating custom client installation settings ....................................... 120
Configuring Windows client installation feature sets ........................... 120
Configuring client packages to uninstall existing security software ......... 121
About the Symantec Endpoint Protection client preinstall removal
feature .......................................................................... 123
Restarting the client computers from Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager ............................................................................. 124
About managed and unmanaged clients .......................................... 126
Downloading an unmanaged client installation package ................ 127
Installing an unmanaged Windows client ......................................... 127
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for
Windows ............................................................................. 129
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac .............. 130
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux ............. 130
Managing client installation packages ............................................. 131
Importing client installation packages into Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager ............................................................... 133
Chapter 6 Upgrading Symantec Endpoint Protection .................. 135

Upgrading to a new release .......................................................... 135
Upgrade resources for Symantec Endpoint Protection ........................ 138
............................................................................................... 138
Increasing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager available disk
space before an upgrade ....................................................... 141
Upgrading a management server ................................................... 143
Contents 10
Upgrading an environment that uses multiple embedded databases

and management servers ....................................................... 145
Stopping and starting the management server service ........................ 145
Disabling replication and restoring replication before and after an
upgrade .............................................................................. 147
Choosing which method to upgrade the client software ....................... 148
Upgrading client software with AutoUpgrade .................................... 150
Applying upgrade settings to other groups ................................. 153
Upgrading Group Update Providers ................................................ 153
Section 2 Managing client-server communication

and updating content ........................................ 155
Chapter 7 Managing client-server communication ....................... 156
Managing the client-server connection ............................................ 157
Checking whether the client is connected to the management server
and is protected .................................................................... 158
Symantec Endpoint Protection client status icons .............................. 160
How the client computer and the management server
communicate ....................................................................... 161
Configuring push mode or pull mode to update client policies and
content ............................................................................... 162
Using the policy serial number to check client-server
communication ..................................................................... 163
Why do I need to replace the client-server communications file on the
client computer? ................................................................... 164
How do I replace the client-server communications file on the client
computer? ........................................................................... 165
Restoring client-server communications with Communication Update
Package Deployment ............................................................ 167
Exporting the client-server communications file (Sylink.xml)
manually ............................................................................. 168
Importing client-server communication settings into the Windows
client .................................................................................. 169
Importing client-server communication settings into the Linux
client .................................................................................. 169
Chapter 8 Updating content on the clients ..................................... 171

How to update content and definitions on the clients .......................... 172
Choose a distribution method to update content on clients ............ 173
Contents 11
Choose a distribution method to update content on clients based

on the platform ............................................................... 178
Downloading content from LiveUpdate to the Symantec Endpoint
Making sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager has the latest
content ............................................................................... 184
Mitigating network overloads for client update requests ...................... 184
Checking LiveUpdate server activity ............................................... 185
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to connect to a
proxy server to access the Internet and download content from
Symantec LiveUpdate ............................................................ 186
Specifying a proxy server that clients use to communicate to Symantec
LiveUpdate or an internal LiveUpdate server .............................. 186
Choosing which content and which content revision to update on client
computers ........................................................................... 187
Configuring the LiveUpdate download schedule to Windows client
computers ........................................................................... 189
Configuring the amount of control that users have over
LiveUpdate .......................................................................... 191
About randomization of simultaneous content downloads .................... 191
Randomizing content downloads from the default management server
or a Group Update Provider .................................................... 192
Randomizing content downloads from a LiveUpdate server ................. 193
Configuring Windows client updates to run when client computers are
idle .................................................................................... 194
Configuring Windows client updates to run when definitions are old or
the computer has been disconnected ........................................ 195
Configuring clients to download content from the Symantec Endpoint
Configuring clients to download content from an external LiveUpdate
server ................................................................................. 197
Configuring clients to download content from an internal LiveUpdate
server ................................................................................. 197
Using Group Update Providers to distribute content to clients .............. 201
About the types of Group Update Providers ................................ 202
Configuring clients to download content from Group Update
Providers ...................................................................... 205
Searching for the clients that act as Group Update Providers ......... 207
About the effects of configuring more than one type of Group
Update Provider in your network ........................................ 207
Using Intelligent Updater files to update content on Windows
computers ........................................................................... 209
Using third-party distribution tools to update client computers .............. 210
Contents 12
Configuring a LiveUpdate Settings policy to allow third-party

content distribution to managed clients ................................ 211
Preparing unmanaged clients to receive updates from third-party
distribution tools ............................................................. 212
Distributing the content using third-party distribution tools ............. 213
Downloading Endpoint Protection security patches to Windows
clients ................................................................................ 216
Section 3 Managing groups, clients, and

administrators ....................................................... 219
Chapter 9 Managing groups of client computers .......................... 220
Managing groups of clients ........................................................... 220
How you can structure groups ....................................................... 222
Adding a group .......................................................................... 223
Importing existing groups and computers from an Active Directory or
an LDAP server .................................................................... 223
About importing organizational units from the directory
server ........................................................................... 225
Connecting Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to a directory
server ........................................................................... 226
Connecting to a directory server on a replicated site .................... 227
Importing organizational units from a directory server ................... 228
Searching for and importing specific accounts from a directory
server ........................................................................... 229
Disabling a group's inheritance ...................................................... 230
Blocking client computers from being added to groups ....................... 231
Moving a client computer to another group ....................................... 231
Chapter 10 Managing clients ............................................................... 233

Managing client computers ........................................................... 234
Viewing the protection status of client computers ............................... 236
Searching for the clients that do not have the client software
installed .............................................................................. 237
Searching for information about client computers .............................. 238
About enabling and disabling protection when you need to troubleshoot
problems ............................................................................ 239
What are the commands that you can run on client computers? ........... 241
Running commands on client computers from the console .................. 244
Ensuring that a client does not restart ............................................. 245
Contents 13
Switching a Windows client between user mode and computer

mode ................................................................................. 245
Configuring a client to detect unmanaged devices ............................. 247
Preventing users from disabling protection on client computers ............ 248
Preventing and allowing users to change the client's user
interface ............................................................................. 250
Collecting user information ........................................................... 252
Password-protecting the client ....................................................... 253
Chapter 11 Managing remote clients ................................................. 254

Managing remote clients .............................................................. 254
Managing locations for remote clients ............................................. 256
Enabling location awareness for a client .......................................... 259
Adding a location to a group .......................................................... 260
Changing a default location .......................................................... 261
Setting up Scenario One location awareness conditions ..................... 262
Setting up Scenario Two location awareness conditions ...................... 264
Configuring communication settings for a location ............................. 266
About strengthening your security policies for remote clients ................ 267
Best practices for Firewall policy settings for remote clients ........... 268
About turning on notifications for remote clients ................................ 269
About monitoring remote clients ..................................................... 269
Chapter 12 Managing administrator accounts and

passwords ..................................................................... 271
Managing administrator accounts ................................................... 272
About administrator accounts and access rights ................................ 274
Adding an administrator account .................................................... 276
Changing the authentication method for administrator accounts ........... 276
Configuring the management server to authenticate administrators
who use RSA SecurID to log on ......................................... 278
Using RSA SecurID authentication with Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager ......................................................... 279
Checking the authentication to a directory server ............................... 282
Changing the password for an administrator account and the embedded
database ............................................................................ 286
Resetting a forgotten Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
password ............................................................................ 287
Displaying the Forgot your password? link so that administrators
can reset lost passwords .................................................. 289
Enabling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon passwords to
never expire ........................................................................ 289
Contents 14
About accepting the self-signed server certificate for Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager .................................................. 290
Displaying a message for administrators to see before logging on to
the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console .................... 291
Displaying the Remember my user name and Remember my password
check boxes on the logon screen ............................................. 291
Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager consoles ................................................................ 292
Unlocking an administrator's account after too many logon
attempts ............................................................................. 294
Changing the time period for staying logged on to the console ............. 295
Chapter 13 Managing domains ............................................................ 296

About domains ........................................................................... 296
Adding a domain ........................................................................ 298
Switching to the current domain ..................................................... 298
Section 4 Managing protection with security

policies ....................................................................... 300
Chapter 14 Using policies to manage security ................................. 301
Manually updating policies on the client ........................................... 302
Performing the tasks that are common to all policies .......................... 302
The types of security policies ........................................................ 305
Adding a policy ........................................................................... 307
Editing a policy ........................................................................... 307
Copying and pasting a policy on the Policies page ............................. 308
Copying and pasting a policy on the Clients page .............................. 309
Assigning a policy to a group or location .......................................... 310
Replacing a policy ...................................................................... 311
Exporting and importing individual policies ....................................... 312
About shared and non-shared policies ............................................ 314
Converting a shared policy to a non-shared policy ............................ 315
Unassigning a policy from a group or location ................................... 316
Locking and unlocking Virus and Spyware Protection policy
settings ............................................................................... 317
Monitoring the applications and services that run on client
computers ........................................................................... 318
Configuring the management server to collect information about
the applications that the client computers run ....................... 319
Contents 15
Searching for information about the applications that the computers

run .................................................................................... 320
Chapter 15 Managing firewall protection .......................................... 323

Managing firewall protection .......................................................... 323
How a firewall works .............................................................. 324
About the Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall ......................... 325
Creating a firewall policy .............................................................. 326
Enabling and disabling a firewall policy ...................................... 329
Enabling communications for network services instead of adding
a rule ........................................................................... 329
Configuring firewall settings for mixed control ............................. 330
Automatically blocking connections to an attacking computer ......... 331
Detecting potential attacks and spoofing attempts ....................... 332
Preventing outside stealth attacks on computers ......................... 333
Disabling Windows Firewall .................................................... 334
Managing firewall rules ................................................................ 335
About firewall server rules and client rules ................................. 337
About the firewall rule, firewall setting, and intrusion prevention
processing order ............................................................ 338
About inherited firewall rules ................................................... 339
Changing the order of firewall rules .......................................... 341
How the firewall uses stateful inspection .................................... 341
About firewall rule application triggers ....................................... 342
About firewall rule host triggers ................................................ 347
About firewall rule network services triggers ............................... 350
About firewall rule network adapter triggers ................................ 352
Setting up firewall rules ................................................................ 353
Adding a new firewall rule ....................................................... 354
Importing and exporting firewall rules ........................................ 355
Customizing firewall rules ....................................................... 356
Chapter 16 Managing intrusion prevention and Generic Exploit

Mitigation ...................................................................... 367
Managing intrusion prevention ....................................................... 367
How intrusion prevention works ..................................................... 370
About Symantec IPS signatures ..................................................... 371
About custom IPS signatures ........................................................ 373
Enabling network intrusion prevention or browser intrusion
prevention ........................................................................... 373
Creating exceptions for IPS signatures ............................................ 374
Setting up a list of excluded computers ........................................... 376
Contents 16
Configuring client intrusion prevention notifications ............................ 377

Managing custom intrusion prevention signatures ............................. 378
Creating a custom IPS library .................................................. 379
Adding signatures to a custom IPS library .................................. 380
Assigning multiple custom IPS libraries to a group ....................... 382
Changing the order of custom IPS signatures ............................. 382
Defining variables for custom IPS signatures .............................. 383
Testing custom IPS signatures ................................................. 384
Using Generic Exploit Mitigation .................................................... 385
Chapter 17 Managing Virus and Spyware Protection ..................... 387

Preventing and handling virus and spyware attacks on client
computers ........................................................................... 388
Removing viruses and security risks ............................................... 390
Identifying the infected and at-risk computers ............................. 393
Checking the scan action and rescanning the identified
computers ..................................................................... 393
Ransomware removal and protection with Symantec Endpoint
Protection ........................................................................... 394
Preventing ransomware attacks with Download Insight ................. 397
How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses the Intelligent Threat Cloud
Service ............................................................................... 398
Managing scans on client computers .............................................. 402
About the types of scans and real-time protection ........................ 404
About the types of Auto-Protect ............................................... 407
About virus and security risks .................................................. 409
About the files and folders that Symantec Endpoint Protection
excludes from virus and spyware scans ............................... 410
About the default Virus and Spyware Protection policy scan
settings ......................................................................... 414
How Symantec Endpoint Protection handles detections of viruses
and security risks ............................................................ 417
How Symantec Endpoint Protection handles detections on
Windows 8 computers ..................................................... 419
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Windows computers ............... 419
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Mac computers ...................... 421
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Linux computers .................... 422
Running on-demand scans on client computers ................................ 423
Adjusting scans to improve computer performance ............................ 424
Adjusting scans to increase protection on your client computers ........... 427
Managing Download Insight detections ........................................... 429
Contents 17
How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses Symantec Insight to make

decisions about files .............................................................. 434
Managing the Quarantine ............................................................. 435
Specifying a local Quarantine folder .......................................... 437
Specifying when repaired files, backup files, and quarantined files
are automatically deleted .................................................. 438
Configuring clients to submit quarantined items to a Central
Quarantine Server or Symantec Security Response ............... 439
Configuring how the Quarantine handles the rescanning of files
after new definitions arrive ................................................ 439
Using the Risk log to delete quarantined files on your client
computers ..................................................................... 440
Managing the virus and spyware notifications that appear on client
computers ........................................................................... 441
About the pop-up notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients .......... 443
Enabling or disabling Symantec Endpoint Protection pop-up
notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients ............................ 444
Managing early launch anti-malware (ELAM) detections ..................... 444
Adjusting the Symantec Endpoint Protection early launch anti-malware
(ELAM) options .................................................................... 446
Configuring a site to use a private Insight server for reputation
queries ............................................................................... 447
Configuring client groups to use private servers for reputation queries
and submissions .................................................................. 448
Chapter 18 Customizing scans ............................................................ 451

Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Windows
computers ........................................................................... 452
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Mac
computers ........................................................................... 453
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Linux
computers ........................................................................... 454
Customizing Auto-Protect for Windows clients .................................. 455
Customizing Auto-Protect for Mac clients ......................................... 456
Customizing Auto-Protect for Linux clients ....................................... 457
Customizing Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows
computers ........................................................................... 459
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on
Windows computers .............................................................. 460
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Mac
computers ........................................................................... 461
Contents 18
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Linux

computers ........................................................................... 463
Randomizing scans to improve computer performance in virtualized
environments on Windows clients ............................................ 464
Modifying global scan settings for Windows clients ............................ 465
Modifying log handling and notification settings on Windows
computers ........................................................................... 466
Modifying log handling settings on Linux computers ........................... 466
Customizing Download Insight settings ........................................... 467
Changing the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when
it makes a detection .............................................................. 468
Allowing users to view scan progress and interact with scans on
Windows computers .............................................................. 470
Configuring Windows Security Center notifications to work with
Symantec Endpoint Protection clients ....................................... 472
Chapter 19 Managing the information that the management

server and clients send to Symantec ...................... 474
Understanding server data collection and client submissions and their
importance to the security of your network ................................. 474
Managing the anonymous or non-anonymous data that clients send
to Symantec ........................................................................ 477
How Symantec Endpoint Protection minimizes the impact of client
submissions on your network bandwidth .................................... 478
Specifying a proxy server for client submissions and other external
communications ................................................................... 479
Chapter 20 Managing SONAR and Tamper Protection ................... 481

About SONAR ............................................................................ 481
Managing SONAR ...................................................................... 483
Handling and preventing SONAR false positive detections .................. 485
Adjusting SONAR settings on your client computers .......................... 486
Monitoring SONAR detection results to check for false positives ........... 488
Changing Tamper Protection settings .............................................. 489
Chapter 21 Managing application control, device control, and

system lockdown ......................................................... 490
About application control, system lockdown, and device control ............ 490
Setting up application control ........................................................ 492
Enabling and testing default application rules ................................... 493
Contents 19
About the structure of an Application Control and Device Control

policy ................................................................................. 494
Adding custom rules to Application Control ...................................... 496
Best practices for adding application control rules ........................ 499
Best practices for choosing which condition to use for a rule .......... 501
Testing application control rules ..................................................... 503
Configuring system lockdown ........................................................ 504
Creating a file fingerprint list with checksum.exe .......................... 511
Importing or merging file fingerprint lists in Symantec Endpoint
Manually updating a file fingerprint list in Symantec Endpoint
Interaction between system lockdown and Symantec ATP blacklist
rules ............................................................................ 515
Creating an application name list to import into the system
lockdown configuration .................................................... 516
Automatically updating whitelists or blacklists for system
lockdown ...................................................................... 517
Setting up and testing the system lockdown configuration before
you enable system lockdown ............................................ 521
Running system lockdown in whitelist mode ............................... 524
Running system lockdown in blacklist mode ............................... 525
Testing selected items before you add or remove them when
system lockdown is already enabled ................................... 526
Managing device control .............................................................. 528
Allowing or blocking devices on client computers ......................... 529
About the hardware devices list ............................................... 530
Obtaining a device vendor or model for Windows computers with
DevViewer .................................................................... 531
Adding a hardware device to the Hardware Devices list ................ 532
Chapter 22 Managing exceptions ........................................................ 534

Managing exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection ...................... 534
About exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection to Virus and
Spyware scans ..................................................................... 536
Creating exceptions for Virus and Spyware scans ............................. 537
Excluding a file or a folder from scans ....................................... 541
Excluding known risks from virus and spyware scans on Windows
clients .......................................................................... 543
Excluding file extensions from virus and spyware scans on
Windows clients and Linux clients ...................................... 544
Contents 20
Monitoring an application to create an exception for the application

on Windows clients ......................................................... 545
Specifying how Symantec Endpoint Protection handles monitored
applications on Windows clients ......................................... 545
Excluding a trusted Web domain from scans on Windows
clients .......................................................................... 546
Creating a Tamper Protection exception on Windows clients .......... 547
Creating an exception for an application that makes a DNS or host
file change .................................................................... 548
Restricting the types of exceptions that users can configure on client
computers ........................................................................... 549
Creating exceptions from log events ............................................... 549
Chapter 23 Testing security policies .................................................. 552

Testing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager policies ..................... 552
Testing a Virus and Spyware Protection policy .................................. 553
Blocking a process from starting on client computers ......................... 554
Preventing users from writing to the registry on client computers .......... 555
Preventing users from writing to a particular file ................................ 556
Adding and testing a rule that blocks a DLL ..................................... 557
Adding and testing a rule that terminates a process ........................... 558
Testing a default IPS policy ........................................................... 560
Section 5 Monitoring, reporting, and enforcing

compliance .............................................................. 561
Chapter 24 Managing Host Integrity to enforce security
policies ........................................................................... 562
How Host Integrity works .............................................................. 563
Setting up Host Integrity ............................................................... 564
About Host Integrity requirements .................................................. 566
Adding predefined requirements to a Host Integrity policy ................... 567
Enabling and disabling Host Integrity requirements ...................... 568
Setting up remediation for a predefined Host Integrity
requirement ......................................................................... 568
Allowing users to delay or cancel Host Integrity remediation .......... 569
Configuring the frequency of Host Integrity check settings ................... 571
Allowing the Host Integrity check to pass if a requirement fails ............. 571
Configuring notifications for Host Integrity checks .............................. 572
Creating a Quarantine policy for a failed Host Integrity check ............... 573
Contents 21
Blocking a remote computer by configuring peer-to-peer

authentication ...................................................................... 574
Adding a custom requirement from a template .................................. 575
Writing a customized requirement script .......................................... 576
About registry conditions ........................................................ 578
Writing a custom requirement to run a script on the client .............. 579
Writing a custom requirement to set the timestamp of a file ........... 580
Writing a custom requirement to increment a registry DWORD
value ............................................................................ 581
Creating a test Host Integrity policy with a custom requirement
script .................................................................................. 581
Chapter 25 Monitoring protection with reports and logs ............... 584

Monitoring endpoint protection ...................................................... 584
Viewing a daily or weekly status report ...................................... 588
Viewing system protection ...................................................... 588
Finding offline computers ....................................................... 589
Finding unscanned computers ................................................. 589
Viewing risks ....................................................................... 590
Running a report on the deployment status of clients .................... 591
Viewing attack targets and sources .......................................... 592
Generating a list of the Symantec Endpoint Protection versions
installed in your network ................................................... 593
Configuring reporting preferences .................................................. 593
Logging on to reporting from a standalone web browser ..................... 594
About the types of reports ............................................................. 595
Running and customizing quick reports ........................................... 597
Saving and deleting custom reports ................................................ 599
How to generate scheduled reports ................................................ 600
Editing the filter used for a scheduled report ..................................... 601
Printing and saving a copy of a report ............................................. 602
Viewing logs .............................................................................. 603
About log types .................................................................... 605
Saving and deleting custom logs by using filters .......................... 607
Viewing logs from other sites ................................................... 608
Chapter 26 Managing notifications .................................................... 610

Managing notifications ................................................................. 610
How notifications work ........................................................... 611
What are the types of notifications and when are they sent? .......... 612
About partner notifications ...................................................... 617
Contents 22
Establishing communication between the management server and

email servers ....................................................................... 618
Viewing and acknowledging notifications ......................................... 618
Saving and deleting administrative notification filters .......................... 619
Setting up administrator notifications ............................................... 620
How upgrades from another version affect notification conditions .......... 622
Section 6 Protecting clients in virtual

environments ......................................................... 624
Chapter 27 Overview of Symantec Endpoint Protection and
virtual infrastructures ................................................ 625
Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in virtual infrastructures .............. 625
About Shared Insight Cache ......................................................... 627
About the Virtual Image Exception tool ............................................ 627
Chapter 28 Installing and using a network-based Shared Insight

Cache ............................................................................. 629
What do I need to do to use a network-based Shared Insight

Cache? .............................................................................. 629
System requirements for implementing a network-based Shared Insight
Cache ................................................................................ 630
Installing and uninstalling a network-based Shared Insight Cache ......... 631
Enabling or disabling the use of a network-based Shared Insight
Cache ................................................................................ 633
Customizing Shared Insight Cache settings ...................................... 634
About stopping and starting the network-based Shared Insight Cache
service ............................................................................... 638
Viewing network-based Shared Insight Cache log events .................... 638
Monitoring network-based Shared Insight Cache performance
counters ............................................................................. 640
Troubleshooting issues with Shared Insight Cache ........................... 641
Chapter 29 Using Virtual Image Exception ....................................... 642

Using the Virtual Image Exception tool on a base image ..................... 642
System requirements for the Virtual Image Exception tool ................... 643
Running the Virtual Image Exception tool ......................................... 644
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection to bypass the scanning of
base image files ................................................................... 644
Contents 23
Chapter 30 Non-persistent virtual desktop infrastructures .......... 646

Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in non-persistent virtual desktop
infrastructures ...................................................................... 646
Setting up the base image for non-persistent guest virtual machines
in VDIs ............................................................................... 647
Counting the number of licenses for non-persistent VDI clients ............. 648
Purging obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to free up licenses ............ 648
Section 7 Configuring and managing the

management server ........................................... 650
Chapter 31 Configuring the connection between the
management server and the clients ........................ 651
Setting up HTTPS communications between a Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and the clients ........................................... 651
Verifying port availability ......................................................... 652
Changing the HTTPS port for Apache for client
communication ............................................................... 653
Enabling HTTPS client-server communications ........................... 654
Improving client and server performance ......................................... 656
About server certificates ............................................................... 659
Best practices for updating server certificates and maintaining the
client-server connection ......................................................... 660
Enabling or disabling secure communications between the
management server and the client ...................................... 661
Updating or restoring a server certificate .................................... 662
Chapter 32 Configuring the management server ............................ 664

Managing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager servers and
third-party servers ................................................................. 664
About the types of Symantec Endpoint Protection servers ................... 666
Exporting and importing server settings ........................................... 667
Chapter 33 Managing databases ......................................................... 669

Maintaining the database ............................................................. 669
Scheduling automatic database backups ......................................... 673
Scheduling automatic database maintenance tasks ........................... 674
Increasing the Microsoft SQL Server database file size ................. 675
Exporting data to a Syslog server ................................................... 676
Contents 24
Exporting log data to a text file ....................................................... 677

Specifying client log size and which logs to upload to the management
server ................................................................................. 678
Specifying the log size and how long to keep log entries in the
database ............................................................................ 679
About increasing the disk space on the server for client log data ........... 680
Clearing log data from the database manually .................................. 681
Chapter 34 Managing failover and load balancing .......................... 683

Setting up failover and load balancing ............................................. 683
About failover and load balancing .................................................. 684
Installing a management server for failover or load balancing ............... 686
Configuring a management server list for load balancing ..................... 688
Assigning a management server list to a group and location ................ 689
Chapter 35 Managing sites and replication ...................................... 691

Setting up sites and replication ...................................................... 691
What are sites and how does replication work? ................................. 693
How to resolve data conflicts between sites during
replication ..................................................................... 695
Deciding whether or not to set up multiple sites and replication ............ 696
Determining how many sites you need ............................................ 698
How to install a second site for replication ........................................ 700
Replicating data immediately ......................................................... 702
Deleting sites ............................................................................. 703
Chapter 36 Preparing for disaster recovery ...................................... 704

Disaster recovery best practices .................................................... 704
Backing up the database and logs .................................................. 706
Backing up a server certificate ....................................................... 708
Reinstalling or reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager ............................................................................. 708
Generating a new server certificate ................................................ 710
Restoring the database ................................................................ 710
Contents 25
Section 8 Troubleshooting Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager ............................................ 712
Chapter 37 Troubleshooting installation and communication
problems ....................................................................... 713
Troubleshooting Symantec Endpoint Protection ................................ 713

Troubleshooting computer issues with the Symantec Diagnostic Tool
(SymDiag) ........................................................................... 715
Identifying the point of failure of an installation .................................. 715
Troubleshooting connectivity problems between Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and the Symantec Endpoint Protection
client .................................................................................. 716
Checking the connection to the management server on the client
computer ...................................................................... 719
Investigating protection problems using the troubleshooting file
on the client ................................................................... 720
Enabling and viewing the Access log to check whether the client
connects to the management server ................................... 720
Stopping and starting the Apache Web server ............................ 721
Using the ping command to test the connectivity to the
management server ........................................................ 722
Using a browser to test the connectivity to Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager on the Symantec Endpoint Protection
client ............................................................................ 722
Checking the debug log on the client computer ........................... 723
Checking the inbox logs on the management server .................... 723
Restoring client-server communication settings by using the
SylinkDrop tool ............................................................... 724
Troubleshooting communication problems between Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and the console or the database ................... 726
Verifying the connection with the database ................................. 727
Client and server communication files ............................................. 729
Enabling the management server to send information to Symantec
about a client that crashed ...................................................... 729
Chapter 38 Troubleshooting reporting issues .................................. 731

Troubleshooting reporting issues ................................................... 731
Changing timeout parameters for reviewing reports and logs ............... 732
Accessing reporting pages when the use of loopback addresses is
disabled .............................................................................. 734
Contents 26
Chapter 39 Using Power Eraser to troubleshoot difficult and

persistent threats ........................................................ 736
What you should know before you run Power Eraser from the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager console ....................................... 736
Tasks to perform when you need to run Power Eraser from the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console ......................... 739
Starting Power Eraser analysis from Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager ............................................................................. 743
Responding to Power Eraser detections .......................................... 745
Appendix A Client feature comparison tables ................................... 748

Feature dependencies on Windows clients ....................................... 748
Client protection features based on platform ..................................... 751
Management features based on platform ......................................... 752
AutoUpgrade differences based on platform ............................... 756
Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings based on platform ........... 757
Intrusion Prevention policy settings based on platform ........................ 761
LiveUpdate policy settings based on platform ................................... 762
Exceptions policy settings based on platform .................................... 763
Device Control differences based on platform ................................... 764
Comparison of Symantec Endpoint Protection Windows client type
versions .............................................................................. 766
Appendix B Customizing and deploying the Windows client

installation by using third-party tools .................... 767
Installing Windows client software using third-party tools ..................... 768
About client installation features and properties ................................. 769
About configuring MSI command strings .................................... 769
About configuring Setaid.ini .................................................... 770
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client installation
properties ........................................................................... 771
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client features ............... 772
Windows Installer parameters ....................................................... 773
Windows Security Center properties ............................................... 775
Command-line examples for installing the Windows client ................... 777
Installing Windows clients with Microsoft SCCM/SMS ......................... 777
Installing Windows clients with an Active Directory Group Policy Object
(GPO) ................................................................................ 778
Creating a GPO software distribution ........................................ 780
Adding computers to an organizational unit to install
software ........................................................................ 782
Contents 27
Copying a Sylink.xml file to make a managed installation

package ....................................................................... 782
Uninstalling client software with an Active Directory Group Policy
Object ................................................................................ 783
Appendix C Command-line options for the Windows client ........... 785

Windows commands for the client service smc .................................. 785
smc command error codes ............................................................ 790
Appendix D Symantec Endpoint Protection tools ............................. 791

What are the tools included with Symantec Endpoint Protection? .......... 791
Appendix E Command-line options for the Virtual Image

Exception tool .............................................................. 800
vietool ...................................................................................... 801
Index ................................................................................................................... 803

Chapter 1
Introduction to Symantec
Endpoint Protection
This chapter includes the following topics:
What is Symantec Endpoint Protection?
Components of Symantec Endpoint Protection
Optional components for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Where to get more information

Symantec Endpoint Protection is a client-server solution that protects laptops,
desktops, and servers in your network against malware, risks, and vulnerabilities.
Symantec Endpoint Protection combines virus protection with advanced threat
protection to proactively secure your client computers against known and unknown
threats, such as viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and adware. Symantec Endpoint
Protection provides protection against even the most sophisticated attacks that
evade traditional security measures, such as rootkits, zero-day attacks, and spyware
that mutates.
Providing low maintenance and high power, Symantec Endpoint Protection
communicates over your network to automatically safeguard both physical systems
and virtual systems against attacks. Symantec Endpoint Protection provides
management solutions that are efficient and easy to deploy and use.
Symantec Endpoint Protection protects your network by accomplishing the following
key tasks:
Protects your endpoints from malware and maximizes system uptime.
Introduction to Symantec Endpoint Protection 29
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses layers to protect computers

on page 29.
Enforces protection policies and compliance on the endpoint.
See How does Symantec Endpoint Protection enforce compliance? on page 32.
Responds to threats and incidents effectively by quickly quarantining and
removing malware from endpoints.
See Managing the Quarantine on page 435.
Monitors and tracks risk exposure across platforms, devices, remote locations,
and in physical, virtual or hybrid environments.
See Monitoring endpoint protection on page 584.
See Components of Symantec Endpoint Protection on page 33.
How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses layers to protect computers

Symantec's core protection against known and unknown threats uses a layered
approach to defense. The layered approach protects the network before, during,
and after an attack. Symantec Endpoint Protection reduces your risk of exposure
by providing tools to increase your security posture ahead of any attack.
Table 1-1 The layers of protection that are integrated into Symantec Endpoint
Protection
Layer of protection Description Symantec Endpoint Protection

technology name
1: Network-based protection The firewall and the intrusion prevention system Network Threat Protection:
block over 60% of malware as it travels over
Firewall
the network and before it arrives at the
Protocol-aware IPS
computer.
Virus and Spyware Protection:
This primary defense protects against drive-by
downloads, social engineering, fake antivirus Browser protection
programs, individual system vulnerabilities,
See Managing firewall protection
rootkits, botnets, and more. Stopping malware
on page 323.
before it reaches your computer is definitely
preferred to identifying a vulnerability that has See Managing intrusion prevention
already been exploited. on page 367.
See Modifying log handling and

notification settings on Windows
computers on page 466.
Protection (continued)

technology name
2: File-based protection This traditional signature-based antivirus Virus and Spyware Protection:
protection looks for and eradicates the malware
Antivirus engine
that has already taken up residence on a
Auto-Protect
system. Virus and Spyware Protection blocks
and removes the malware that arrives on the Bloodhound
computer by using scans. See Managing scans on client
Unfortunately, many companies leave computers on page 402.
themselves exposed through the belief that
antivirus alone keeps their systems protected.
3: Reputation-based Insight establishes information about entities, Virus and Spyware Protection:
protection such as websites, files, and IP addresses to be
Domain reputation score
used in effective security.
File reputation (Insight)
Download Insight determines the safety of files
See Managing Download Insight
and websites by using the wisdom of the
detections on page 429.
community. Sophisticated threats require
leveraging the collective wisdom of over 200
million systems to identify new and mutating
malware. Symantecs Insight gives companies
access to the largest global intelligence network
available to allow them to filter every file on the
internet based on reputation.
4: Behavioral-based SONAR looks at processes as they execute Proactive Threat Protection (Virus
protection and use malicious behaviors to indicate the and Spyware Protection policy):
presence of malware. SONAR
SONAR watches programs as they run, and See Managing SONAR on page 483.
blocks suspicious behaviors. SONAR catches
targeted and unknown threats by aggressively
monitoring file processes as they execute and
identify malicious behavior. SONAR uses
artificial intelligence, behavior signatures, and
policy lockdown to monitor nearly 1,400 file
behaviors as they execute in real time. When
SONAR is combined with Insight, this
technology is able to aggressively stop zero-day
threats without increasing false-positives.
Protection (continued)

technology name
5: Repair and remediation When malware does get through, Power Eraser Power Eraser:
tools scrubs hard-to-remove infections and gets your
Boot to clean operating system
system back online as quickly as possible.
Power Eraser uses aggressive
Power Eraser uses aggressive remediation on
heuristics
hard-to-remove infections.
Threat-specific tools
See What you should know before

you run Power Eraser from the
Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager console on page 736.
6: Exploit mitigation Symantec Endpoint Protection mitigates attacks Generic Exploit Mitigation
on vulnerabilities in operating systems and
See Using Generic Exploit Mitigation
memory.
on page 385.
Symantec Endpoint Protection extends and enhances security with the following
additional technologies:
System Lockdown
System Lockdown lets you limit the applications that can run. System Lockdown
operates in either a whitelisting or a blacklisting mode. In either mode, System
Lockdown uses checksum and file location parameters to verify whether an
application is approved or unapproved. System Lockdown is useful for kiosks
where you want to run a single application only.
See Configuring system lockdown on page 504.
Application control
Application control monitors and controls an application's behavior.
Application control protects against unauthorized access and attack by controlling
what applications can run. Application control blocks or terminates processes,
limits file and folder access, protects the Windows registry, and controls module
and DLL loading. Application control includes predefined templates that block
application behaviors known to be malicious.
See About application control, system lockdown, and device control on page 490.
See Setting up application control on page 492.
Device control
Device control restricts and enables the access to the hardware that can be
used on the client computer. You can block and control the devices that are
connected to your systems, such as USB devices, FireWire, serial, and parallel
ports. Device control can prevent all access to a port or allow access only from
certain devices with a specific vendor ID.
See Allowing or blocking devices on client computers on page 529.
See How does Symantec Endpoint Protection enforce compliance? on page 32.
How does Symantec Endpoint Protection enforce compliance?

Symantec Endpoint Protection also ensures that the client computers meet
compliance requirements. You may need to enforce the company's security policy,
such as blocking computers from opening certain applications or websites. Or, you
may need to prevent security breaches and enforce security and privacy-related
regulations. For example, Symantec solutions help healthcare organizations to
enforce healthcare data provisions against medical identity theft.
Symantec Endpoint Protection uses the following tools to enforce compliance
requirements:
Host Integrity
The Host Integrity policy ensures that the endpoints are protected and compliant.
For example, you can make sure that every computer is running a firewall or a
particular operating system security patch.
See How Host Integrity works on page 563.
Reporting and analytics
Symantec Endpoint Protection provides multi-dimensional analysis, robust
graphical reporting, and an easy-to-use Dashboard. You can use reports and
logs to check that the computers in your network are connected, protected, and
compliant with company policy.
on page 29.

Table 1-2 Main product components
Component Description
Symantec Endpoint Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager is a management server that manages the
Protection Manager client computers that connect to your company's network.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager includes the following subcomponents:
The management server software provides secure communication to and from the
client computers and the console.
The console is the interface to the management server. The console software
coordinates and manages security policies, client computers, reports, logs, roles
and access, administrative functions, and security. You can also install a remote
console and use it to log on to the management server from any computer with a
network connection.
The embedded database stores security policies and events and is installed with
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. You can also install a SQL Server database
to use instead of the embedded database.
See Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on page 43.
Symantec Endpoint The Symantec Endpoint Protection client runs on the following platforms:
Protection client
The Windows client protects computers by using virus and spyware scans, SONAR,
Download Insight, a firewall, an intrusion prevention system, and other protection
technologies. It runs on the servers, desktops, and portable computers that you
want to protect.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Mac client protects computers by using virus
and spyware scans and an intrusion prevention system.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Linux client protects computers by using virus
and spyware scans.
See What is Symantec Endpoint Protection? on page 28.
See Optional components for Symantec Endpoint Protection on page 34.

on page 29.
Optional components for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Optional components for Symantec Endpoint

Protection
Symantec Endpoint Protection also comes with multiple tools to help you increase
security and manage the product. For a list of these tools, where to get them, and
when to use them, see:
What are the tools included in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Tools folder?
Table 1-3 Optional components and their function
Component Description
LiveUpdate Administrator LiveUpdate Administrator downloads definitions, signatures, and other content from
an internal LiveUpdate server and distributes the updates to client computers. You can
use an internal LiveUpdate server in very large networks to reduce the load on the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. You should also use the internal LiveUpdate
server if your organization runs multiple Symantec products that also use LiveUpdate
to update client computers.
You can get LiveUpdate Administrator from Download LiveUpdate Administrator (LUA).
See Choose a distribution method to update content on clients on page 173.
See Configuring clients to download content from an internal LiveUpdate server

on page 197.
Group Update Provider The Group Update Provider helps distribute content within the organization, particularly
(GUP) useful for groups at remote locations with minimal bandwidth. Organizations that have
a lot of clients may want to use Group Update Providers (GUPs) for Windows clients.
GUPs reduce the load on the management server and are easier to set up than an
internal LiveUpdate server.
See Using Group Update Providers to distribute content to clients on page 201.
IT Analytics server The IT Analytics tool expands upon the built-in reports in Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager by enabling you to create custom reports and custom queries. The tool also
offloads the reporting burden from the management server to another server. IT
Analytics keeps information for a longer period of time, enforces compliance, reduces
costs, and provides summaries.
The IT Analytics tool and documentation is located in the Tools\ITAnalytics folder.
See Components of Symantec Endpoint Protection on page 33.


Table 1-4 displays the websites where you can get best practices, troubleshooting
information, and other resources to help you use the product.
Table 1-4 Symantec website information
Types of information Website link
Trial versions Trialware
Manuals and documentation English: Product guides for all versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection
updates
Other languages:
Brazilian Portuguese
Chinese (simplified)
Chinese (traditional)
Czech
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Polish
Russian
Spanish
Technical Support Endpoint Protection Technical Support
Includes knowledge base articles, product release details, updates and patches,
and contact options for support.
Threat information and updates Symantec Security Center
Training SymantecTV
For free online technical training.
Symantec Education Services
Access the training courses, the eLibrary, and more.
Symantec Connect forums Endpoint Protection

Chapter 2
Getting Started with
Symantec Endpoint
Protection
Getting up and running on Symantec Endpoint Protection for the first time
Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager with a custom configuration
Logging on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
Activating or importing your Symantec Endpoint Protection product license
Installing clients with Save Package
Installing clients with Remote Push
Installing clients with Web Link and Email
What do I do after I install the management server?
Getting up and running on Symantec Endpoint

Protection for the first time
You should assess your security requirements and decide if the default settings
provide the balance of performance and security that you require. Some performance
enhancements can be made immediately after you install Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
Getting Started with Symantec Endpoint Protection 37
Perform the following tasks to install and protect the computers in your network
immediately:
Step 1: Plan your installation structure
Step 2: Prepare for and then install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Step 3: Add groups, policies, and locations
Step 4: Change communication settings to increase performance
Step 5: Activate the product license
Step 6: Decide on a client deployment method
Step 7: Prepare the client for installation
Step 8: Deploy and install the client software
Step 9: Check that the computers are listed in the groups that you expected and
that the clients communicate with the management server
See What do I do after I install the management server? on page 63.
Step 1: Plan your installation structure

Before you install the product, consider the size and geographical distribution of
your network to determine the installation architecture.
To ensure good network and database performance, you need to evaluate several
factors. These factors include how many computers need protection, whether any
of those computers connect over a wide-area network, or how often to schedule
content updates.
If your network is small, is located in one geographic location, and has fewer
than 500 clients, you need to install only one Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
If the network is very large, you can install additional sites with additional
databases and configure them to share data with replication. To provide
additional redundancy, you can install additional sites for failover or load
balancing support. Failover and load balancing can only be used with Microsoft
SQL Server databases.
If your network is geographically dispersed, you may need to install additional
management servers for load balancing and bandwidth distribution purposes.
To help you plan medium to large-scale installations, see: Symantec Endpoint
Protection Sizing and Scalability Best Practices White Paper.
See Network architecture considerations on page 81.
See Setting up sites and replication on page 691.
See Setting up failover and load balancing on page 683.
Step 2: Prepare for and then install Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager
1. Make sure the computer on which you install the management server meets
the minimum system requirements.
See: Release notes, new fixes, and system requirements for all versions of
Endpoint Protection
2. To install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you must be logged on with
an account that grants local administrator access.
3. Decide on whether to install the embedded database or use a Microsoft SQL
Server database.
If you use a Microsoft SQL Server database, the installation requires additional
steps. These include, but are not limited to, configuring or creating a database
instance that is configured to use mixed mode or Windows authentication mode.
You also need to provide database server administration credentials to create
the database and the database user. These are specifically for use with the
management server.
See About SQL Server configuration settings on page 85.
4. You install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager first. After you install, you
immediately configure the installation with the Management Server Configuration
Wizard.
Decide on the following items when you configure the management server:
A password for your logon to the management console
An email address where you can receive important notifications and reports
An encryption password, which may be needed depending on the options
that you select during installation
See About basic management server settings on page 83.
See Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager after installation
on page 44.
Step 3: Add groups, policies, and locations

1. You use groups to organize the client computers, and apply a different level
of security to each group. You can use the default groups, import groups if
your network uses Active Directory or an LDAP server, or add new groups.
If you add new groups, you can use the following group structure as a basis:
Desktops
Laptops
Servers
See Importing existing groups and computers from an Active Directory or an
LDAP server on page 223.
See How you can structure groups on page 222.
See Adding a group on page 223.
2. You use locations to apply different policies and settings to computers based
on specific criteria. For example, you can apply different security policies to
the computers based on whether they are inside or outside the company
network. In general, the computers that connect to your network from outside
of your firewall need stronger security than those that are inside your firewall.
A location can allow the mobile computers that are not in the office to update
their definitions automatically from Symantec's LiveUpdate servers.
See Best Practices for Symantec Endpoint Protection Location Awareness.
See Adding a location to a group on page 260.
3. Disable inheritance for the groups or locations for which you want to use
different policies or settings.
By default, groups inherit their policies and settings from the default parent
group, My Company. If you want to assign a different policy to child groups,
or want to add a location, you must first disable inheritance. Then you can
change the policies for the child groups, or you can add a location.
See Disabling a group's inheritance on page 230.
4. For each type of policy, you can accept the default policies, or create and
modify new policies to apply to each new group or location. You must add
requirements to the default Host Integrity policy for the Host Integrity check to
have an effect on the client computer.
Step 4: Change communication settings to increase

performance
You can improve network performance by modifying the following client-server
communication settings in each group:
Use pull mode instead of push mode to control when clients use network
resources to download policies and content updates.
Increase the heartbeat interval. For fewer than 100 clients per server, increase
the heartbeat to 15-30 minutes. For 100 to 1,000 clients, increase the heartbeat
to 30-60 minutes. Larger environments might need a longer heartbeat interval.
Symantec recommends that you leave Let clients upload critical events
immediately checked.
Increase the download randomization to between one and three times the
heartbeat interval.
See Randomizing content downloads from the default management server or a
Group Update Provider on page 192.
See Configuring push mode or pull mode to update client policies and content
on page 162.
Step 5: Activate the product license

Purchase and activate a license within 60 days of product installation.
See Licensing Symantec Endpoint Protection on page 92.
See Product license requirements on page 78.
See Activating or importing your Symantec Endpoint Protection product license
on page 51.
Step 6: Decide on a client deployment method

Determine which client deployment method would work best to install the client
software on your computers in your environment.
See Choosing a method to install the client using the Client Deployment Wizard
on page 115.
For Linux clients, you can use either Save Package or Web Link and Email,
but not Remote Push.
For Windows and Mac clients, if you use Remote Push, you may need to do
the following tasks:
Make sure that administrator access to remote client computers is available.
Modify any existing firewall settings (including ports and protocols) to allow
remote deployment between Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and
the client computers.
See About the communication ports that Symantec Endpoint Protection
uses on page 110.
You must be logged on with an account that grants local administrator access.
If the client computers are part of an Active Directory domain, you must be
logged on to the computer that hosts Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
with an account that grants local administrator access to the client computers.
You should have administrator credentials available for each client computer
that is not part of an Active Directory domain.
See Preparing Windows and Mac computers for remote deployment
on page 108.
See Preparing for client installation on page 105.
Step 7: Prepare the client for installation

1. Make sure that the computers on which you install the client software meet the
minimum system requirements. You should also install the client on the
computer that hosts Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
See: Release notes, new fixes, and system requirements for all versions of
Endpoint Protection
2. Manually uninstall any third-party security software programs from Windows
computers that the Symantec Endpoint Protection client installer cannot
uninstall.
For a list of products that this feature removes, see: Third-party security
software removal support in Symantec Endpoint Protection
You must uninstall any existing security software from Linux computers or from
Mac computers.
Some programs may have special uninstallation routines, or may need to have
a self-protection component disabled. See the documentation for the third-party
software.
3. As of 14, you can configure the installation package to remove a Windows
Symantec Endpoint Protection client that does not uninstall through standard
methods. When that process completes, it then installs Symantec Endpoint
Protection.
See Configuring client packages to uninstall existing security software
on page 121.
Step 8: Deploy and install the client software

1. For Windows clients, do the following tasks:
Create a custom client install feature set that determines which components
you install on the client computers. You can also use one of the default
client install feature sets.
See Importing existing groups and computers from an Active Directory or
an LDAP server on page 223.
For client installation packages for workstations, check the email scanner
protection option that applies to the mail server in your environment. For
example, if you use a Microsoft Exchange mail server, check Microsoft

Outlook Scanner.
Update custom client install settings to determine installation options on
the client computer. These options include the target installation folder, the
uninstallation of third-party security software, and the restart behavior after
installation completes. You can also use the default client install settings.
See Configuring Windows client installation feature sets on page 120.
2. With the Client Deployment Wizard, create a client installation package with
selections from the available options, and then deploy it to your client
computers. You can only deploy to Mac or Windows computers with the Client
Deployment Wizard.
See Installing clients with Web Link and Email on page 61.
See Installing clients with Remote Push on page 59.
See Installing clients with Save Package on page 53.
See Exporting client installation packages on page 118.
Symantec recommends that you do not perform third-party installations simultaneous
to the installation of Symantec Endpoint Protection. The installation of any third-party
programs that make network- or system-level changes may cause undesirable
results when you install Symantec Endpoint Protection. If possible, restart the client
computers before you install Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Step 9: Check that the computers are listed in the groups that
you expected and that the clients communicate with the
management server
In the management console, on the Clients > Clients page:
1. Change the view to Client status to make sure that the client computers in
each group communicate with the management server.
Look at the information in the following columns:
The Name column displays a green dot for the clients that are connected
to the management server.
See Checking whether the client is connected to the management server
and is protected on page 158.
The Last Time Status Changed column displays the time that each client
last communicated with the management server.
The Restart Required column displays whether or not the client computers
need to be restarted to be protected.
See Restarting the client computers from Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager on page 124.
The Policy Serial Number column displays the most current policy serial
number. The policy might not update for one to two heartbeats. You can
manually update the policy on the client if the policy does not update
immediately.
See Using the policy serial number to check client-server communication
on page 163.
See Manually updating policies on the client on page 302.
2. Change to the Protection technology view and ensure that the status is set
to On in the columns between and including AntiVirus Status and Tamper
Protection Status.
See Viewing the protection status of client computers on page 236.
3. On the client, check that the client is connected to a server, and check that the
policy serial number is the most current one.
See Checking the connection to the management server on the client
computer on page 719.
See Checking whether the client is connected to the management server and is
protected on page 158.
See Troubleshooting connectivity problems between Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager and the Symantec Endpoint Protection client on page 716.

You perform several tasks to install the management server and the console. In
the installation wizard, a green check mark appears next to each completed task.
For the most current system requirements, see: Release notes, new fixes, and
system requirements for all versions of Endpoint Protection
Some Symantec products may cause conflicts with Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager when they are installed on the same server. For information about any
necessary configuration changes in those products, see: Software compatibility
with Symantec Endpoint Protection
In addition, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager installation and configuration
checks the security policies for the required rights to allow the virtual service
accounts to run correctly. Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager automatically
changes local security policies, and alerts you to changes you need to make to
domain security policies. You can also change your security policies before
installation. See How to assign user rights to the Windows Security Policies for
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager services.
To install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

1 If you downloaded the product, extract the entire installation file to a physical
disk, such as a hard disk. Run Setup.exe from the physical disk.
If you have a product disc, insert it into the optical drive. The installation should
start automatically. If it does not start, open the disc, and then double-click
Setup.exe.
2 In the Symantec Endpoint Protection Installation Program dialog box, click
Install Symantec Endpoint Protection, and then click Install Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager.
3 Review the sequence of installation events, and then click Next to begin.
4 In the License Agreement panel, click I accept the terms in the license
agreement, and then click Next.
5 In the Destination Folder panel, accept the default destination folder or specify
another destination folder, and then click Next.
6 Click Install.
The installation process begins for the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
management server and console. When the installation is complete, click Next.
7 After the initial installation completes, you configure the server and database.
Click Next.
The Management Server Configuration Wizard starts.
on page 44.
See Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager with a custom
configuration on page 45.
on page 115.
See Getting up and running on Symantec Endpoint Protection for the first time
on page 36.
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager after installation

The Management Server Configuration Wizard automatically starts after the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager installation. You configure the management
server according to your requirements.
You can also start the Management Server Configuration Wizard at any time after
installation from Start > All Programs > Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
> Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Tools.
To configure Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager after installation
1 See Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on page 43.
2 With the Default Configuration selected, click Next.
3 Enter company name, a password for the default administrator admin, and an
email address.
Alternately, you can add details to use a specified mail server.
4 Click Send Test Email.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager sends password recovery information
and other important notifications to this email account, so you should not
proceed with configuration if you do not receive the email.
5 Once you verify that you receive the test email, click Next.
6 Indicate whether you want to run LiveUpdate as part of the installation. If you
run LiveUpdate as part of a new installation, content is more readily available
for the clients you deploy. Click Next
You can also add the optional Partner Information, if a partner manages your
Symantec licenses.
7 Indicate whether you want Symantec to receive anonymous data, and then
click Next to begin the database creation.
8 When the database creation completes, click Finish to complete the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager configuration.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console logon screen appears if
you leave the option checked to launch Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Once you log on, you can begin client deployment.
See Logging on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
on page 48.
See About choosing a database type on page 82.

with a custom configuration
When you want to install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager with a Microsoft
SQL Server database and have more than 500 clients, you should choose Custom
configuration in the Management Server Configuration Wizard. When you select

this option, additional settings become available for configuration.
Note: To provide connectivity to the database, you must install SQL Server client
tools on the server that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.

To install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager with a custom configuration
1 See Installing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on page 43.
2 In the Management Server Configuration Wizard, click Custom
configuration, and then click Next.
If you have fewer than 500 clients, Symantec recommends that you click Default
configuration.
on page 44.
3 Click Install my first site, and then click Next.
The following options are for advanced installations and do not apply to first-time
installations of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager:
For Install an additional management server to an existing site, see
Setting up failover and load balancing.
For Install an additional site, see:
Setting up sites and replication
How replication works
4 On this screen, you can customize the following settings, and then click Next:
Site name
Server name
Port numbers
You should contact your network administrator before you make changes
to the default Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager port configurations.
The location of the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server data
folder
If there is not enough available free space on the drive on which Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager is installed, relocate the server data folder to
an alternate drive.
5 On the database selection screen, click Microsoft SQL Server database and
then click Next.
You can select the embedded database with a custom configuration.

However, this step assumes that you select the SQL Server database.
Check with your SQL database administrator to confirm whether or not the
automatic database maintenance tasks should be enabled.
Symantec recommends that you host SQL Server and Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager on separate physical servers.
For information on supported versions of Microsoft SQL Server, see the
system requirements for Symantec Endpoint Protection.
6 Click Create a new database, and then click Next.
Note: Using an existing database is considered an advanced installation option,

and typically does not apply to new installations.
7 On the Step One: Database Server Authentication screen, fill in the details
for the SQL Server to which Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager connects,
and then click Connect to database.
If the database connection is successful, the Step Two: New Database
Creation section becomes available.
8 Under Step Two: New Database Creation, fill in the details to create a new
database, and then click Next.
For questions regarding either Database Server Authentication or Database
Creation, contact your SQL Server database administrator.
9 Enter company name, a password for the default administrator admin, and an
email address.
Alternately, you can add details to use a specified mail server.
10 Click Send Test Email. Once you verify that you receive the test email, click
Next.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager sends password recovery information
and other important notifications to this email account, so you should not
proceed with configuration if you do not receive the email.
11 Create an encryption password, or choose to use a random password, and
then click Next.
This password is used to protect the communication between clients and
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, and is stored in the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager recovery file.
12 Indicate whether you want to run LiveUpdate as part of the installation. If you
run LiveUpdate as part of a new installation, content is more readily available
for the clients you deploy. Click Next
You can also add the optional Partner Information, if a partner manages your
Symantec licenses.
13 Indicate whether you want Symantec to receive anonymous data, and then
click Next to begin the database creation.
14 After the database is created and initialized (which may take several minutes),
click Finish.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console logon screen appears if
you leave the option checked to launch Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Once you log on, you can begin client deployment.
on page 48.
Logging on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager console
You can log on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console after you
install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. You can log on to the console in
either of two ways:
Locally, from the computer on which you installed the management server.
Remotely, from any computer that meets the system requirements for a remote
console and has network connectivity to the management server. You can log
on to the remote web console or the remote Java console.
To log on remotely, you need to know the IP address or the host name of the
computer on which the management server is installed. You should also ensure
that your web browser Internet options let you view content from the server you
log on to.
Note: For Windows Server 2016, use the host name of the computer on which
the management server is installed.
When you log on remotely, you can perform the same tasks as administrators
who log on locally. What you can view and do from the console depends on the
type of administrator you are. Most administrators in smaller organizations log
on as a system administrator.
Note: If you installed the remote Java console with an earlier version of the
product, you must reinstall it when you upgrade to a later version.
You can also access the reporting functions from a standalone web browser that
is connected to your management server.
See Logging on to reporting from a standalone web browser on page 594.
For security, the console logs you out after a maximum of one hour. You can
decrease this period of time. In version 12.1.4 and earlier, you can disable the
timeout period.
See Changing the time period for staying logged on to the console on page 295.
To log on to the console locally
1 Go to Start > Programs > Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager >
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
2 In the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon dialog box, type the
user name (admin by default) and the password that you configured during the
installation.
If the console has more than one domain, click Options and type the domain
name.
3 Optionally check Remember my user name, Remember my password or
both, if available, and then click Log On.
See Displaying the Forgot your password? link so that administrators can reset
lost passwords on page 289.
To log on to the console remotely

1 Open a supported web browser and type the following address in the address
box:
http://SEPMServer:9090
where SEPMServer is the host name or IP address of the management server.
For a list of supported web browsers, see Release notes, new fixes, and system
requirements for all versions of Endpoint Protection.
2 On the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console Web Access page,
click the desired console type.
If you click Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Web Console, a secure
webpage loads so you log on remotely without the use of the Java Runtime
Environment (JRE).
If you click Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Console, the computer
from which you log on must have the JRE installed to run the Java client. If it
does not, you must download and install it. Follow the prompts to install the
JRE, and follow any other instructions provided.
The other option is not a remote management solution. You can click Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager Certificate to prompt you to download the
management console's certificate file. You can then import this file into your
web browser if needed.
3 If a host name message appears, click Yes.
This message means that the remote console URL that you specified does not
match the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager certificate name. This
problem occurs if you log on and specify an IP address rather than the computer
name of the management server.
If the webpage security certificate warning appears, click Continue to this
website (not recommended) and add the self-signed certificate.
4 Follow the prompts to complete the logon process.

When you log on for the first time after installation, use the account name
admin.
Depending on the logon method, you may need to provide additional
information. For instance, if the console has multiple domains, click Options
and provide the name of the domain to which you want to log on.
5 If you use the Java-based console, you may have the option to save the user
name and password. Click Log On.
You may receive one or more security warning messages as the remote console
starts up. If you do, click Yes, Run, Start, or their equivalent, and continue
until the console appears.
You may need to accept the self-signed certificate that the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager console requires.
See Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
consoles on page 292.
See Displaying a message for administrators to see before logging on to the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console on page 291.
See About accepting the self-signed server certificate for Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager on page 290.
Activating or importing your Symantec Endpoint

Protection product license
You can use the License Activation Wizard workflow to perform the following tasks:
Activating a new paid license.
Converting a trial license to a paid license.
Renewing a license.
Activating an additional paid license in response to an over-deployment status.
You can import and activate a license with a file or serial number that you received
from the following sources:
Symantec Licensing Portal
Symantec partner or preferred reseller
Symantec sales team
Symantec Business Store
You can start the License Activation Wizard in the following ways:
The Getting Started screen that appears after you install the product.
You can also access the Getting Started screen through Help > Getting Started
Page.
The Admin page of the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console.
If you activate or import your license from the Getting Started screen, you can skip
to step 3.
To activate or import your Symantec Endpoint Protection product license
1 In Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, click Admin > Licenses.
2 Under Tasks, click Activate license.
3 Click Activate a new license, and then click Next. If you do not see this panel,
continue to the next step.
4 On the License Activation panel, select the option that matches your situation,
and then click Next.
The following table describes each option:
Option Description
I have a serial number You may receive a license serial number when you or
your Symantec Partner purchased the license. If you
have a license serial number, select this option.
If you are an eFlex (Symantec Enterprise Options)

customer and have an eFlex-generated serial number,
select I have a Symantec License File.
I have a Symantec License In most cases, you receive a Symantec license file (.slf
File (.slf) file) in an email from Symantec shortly after you
complete the purchase process. The file arrives attached
to the notification email as a .zip file. If you have
received a .slf file, select this option.
Note: You must extract the .slf file from the .zip file
before you can use it to activate your product license.
Warning: The .slf file contains the information that is

unique to your license. To avoid corrupting the license
file, do not alter its contents. You may copy the file for
your records.
You can find information about eFlex at the following webpage:

Enterprise Options
5 Do one of the following tasks based on the selection that you made in the
previous step:
If you selected I have a serial number, enter the serial number, and then
click Submit. Review the information about the license you added, and
then click Next.
Note: To activate a license with a serial number, you must have an active
internet connection and be able to reach the Symantec Licensing Server.
If the connection succeeds, the Symantec home page loads. If the
connection fails, see the following:
How to test connectivity with Insight and Symantec Licensing servers
If you selected I have a Symantec License File (.slf), click Add File.
Browse to and select the .slf file you extracted from the .zip file that came
with your Symantec notification email. Click Open, and then click Next.
6 Enter information about your technical contacts and primary contacts, and
about your company. Click to acknowledge the disclosure statement, and then
click Submit.
If you provided this information when you purchased your license, this panel
does not display.
7 Click Finish.
See About the trial license on page 94.
See About renewing your Symantec Endpoint Protection license on page 98.
See About purchasing licenses on page 95.

If you have a small number of clients, use the Save Package method to deploy and
install the installation package on the clients.
Save Package creates the installation packages that you can install manually, with
third-party deployment software, or with a login script.
Save Package comprises the following tasks:
You make your configuration selections and then create the client installation
packages.
You save the installation package to a folder on the computer that runs Symantec
For Windows, the installation package can be for 32- or 64-bit operating systems.
The installation package comprises one setup.exe file or a collection of files that
includes a setup.exe file. Computer users often find one setup.exe file easier
to use.
Note: The Mac and Linux client install packages automatically export a .zip archive
file format. To correctly preserve the file permissions, you should expand the archive
file with a native archive program, such as the Mac Archive Utility or the ditto
command. You cannot use the Mac unzip command, a third-party application, or
any Windows application to expand the files for these operating systems.
To install clients with Save Package

1 In the console, on the Home page, launch the Client Deployment Wizard.
Click Help > Getting Started Page and then under Required tasks, click
Install the client software on your computers.
2 In the Client Deployment Wizard, do one of the following tasks:
Click New Package Deployment, and then click Next. Save Package only
installs a new installation package.
Click Communication Update Package Deployment if you want to update
Windows or Mac client communication settings on the computers that
already have the Symantec Endpoint Protection client installed. Follow the
on-screen instructions, and then go to step 4.
3 Make selections from the available options, which vary depending on the
installation package type, and then click Next.
Note: To uninstall existing security software on the Windows client, you must
configure custom Client Install Settings before launching the Client Deployment
Wizard.
on page 121.
See About the Windows client installation settings on page 119.

4 Click Save Package, and then click Next.
5 Click Browse and specify the folder to receive the package.

For Communication Update Package Deployment, or for Mac and Linux
packages, go to step 6.
For new Windows packages, check Single .exe file (default) or Separate
files (required for .MSI).
Note: Use Single .exe file unless you require separate files for a third-party
deployment program.
6 Click Next.
7 Review the settings summary, click Next, and then click Finish.
8 Provide the exported package to the computer users.
Provide the exported package to the users in the following ways: email, save
the package to a secure shared network location, or use a third-party program.
9 Confirm that the user downloads and installs the client software, and confirm
the installation status of the clients.
For new Symantec Endpoint Protection installations, the client computers may
not appear within Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager until after they restart,
either automatically or by action you or the user takes. Mac clients automatically
prompt a restart when installation completes. Linux clients do not require a
restart.
See Running a report on the deployment status of clients on page 591.
See Deciding which features to install on the client on page 116.
on page 115.
Installing the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac

You can directly install an unmanaged or managed Symantec Endpoint Protection
client on a Mac computer if you cannot use or do not want to use Remote Push.
The steps are similar whether the client is unmanaged or managed.
The only way to install a managed client is with a package you create with Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. You can convert an unmanaged client to a managed
client at any time by importing client-server communication settings into the Mac
client.
Note: To prepare the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac for use with
third-party remote deployment software, see Exporting and Deploying a Symantec
Endpoint Protection client via Apple Remote Desktop or Casper.
If you downloaded the installation file or received a product disc

1 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you downloaded the installation file, extract the contents to a folder on a Mac
computer, and then open the folder.
If you received a disc, insert it into a computer.
2 Open SEP_MAC.
3 Copy Symantec Endpoint Protection.dmg to the desktop of the Mac
computer.
4 Double-click Symantec Endpoint Protection.dmg to mount the file as a virtual
disk. You then install the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac.
If you have a client installation package .zip
1 If you exported the installation package or downloaded the client installer
package from FileConnect, copy the file to the desktop of the Mac computer.
The file may be named Symantec Endpoint Protection.zip or
Symantec_Endpoint_Protection_version_Mac_Client.zip, where version
is the product version.
2 Right-click Open With > Archive Utility to extract the file's contents.
3 Open the resulting folder. You then install the Symantec Endpoint Protection
client for Mac.
Note: The resulting virtual disk image or folder contains the application installer and
a folder called Additional Resources. Both items must be present in the same
location for a successful installation. If you copy the installer to another location,
you must also copy Additional Resources.
To install the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac

1 Double-click Symantec Endpoint Protection Installer.
2 To acknowledge the required restart, click Continue.
3 To review the license agreement, click View License Agreement.

To begin the installation, click Agree & Install.
4 Enter the user name and password for the Mac administrative account when
prompted, and then click Install Helper.
5 Click Close & Restart to complete the installation.
When you log back on to the Mac computer, LiveUpdate launches to update
the definitions. LiveUpdate runs silently in the background, and does not display
its progress onscreen.
See Restoring client-server communications with Communication Update Package
Deployment on page 167.
Installing the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux

You install an unmanaged or managed Symantec Endpoint Protection client directly
on a Linux computer. You cannot deploy the Linux client from Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager remotely. The installation steps are similar whether the client
is unmanaged or managed.
The only way to install a managed client is with an installation package that you
create in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. You can convert an unmanaged
client to a managed client at any time by importing client-server communication
settings into the Linux client.
If the Linux operating system kernel is incompatible with the pre-compiled
Auto-Protect kernel module, the installer tries to compile a compatible Auto-Protect
kernel module. The auto-compile process automatically launches if it is needed.
However, the installer might be unable to compile a compatible Auto-Protect kernel
module. In this case, Auto-Protect installs but is disabled. For more information,
see:
Supported Linux kernels for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Note: You must have superuser privileges to install the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client on the Linux computer. The procedure uses sudo to demonstrate
this elevation of privilege.
To install the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux

1 Copy the installation package that you created to the Linux computer. The
package is a .zip file.
2 On the Linux computer, open a terminal application window.
3 Navigate to the installation directory with the following command:
cd /directory/
Where directory is the name of the directory into which you copied the .zip file.
4 Extract the contents of the .zip file into a directory named tmp with the following
command:
unzip "InstallPackage" -d sepfiles
Where InstallPackage is the full name of the .zip file, and sepfiles represents
a destination folder into which the extraction process places the installation
files.
If the destination folder does not exist, the extraction process creates it.
5 Navigate to sepfiles with the following command:
cd sepfiles
6 To correctly set the execute file permissions on install.sh, use the following
command:
chmod u+x install.sh
7 Use the built-in script to install Symantec Endpoint Protection with the following
command:
sudo ./install.sh -i
Enter your password if prompted.

This script initiates the installation of the Symantec Endpoint Protection
components. The default installation directory is as follows:.
/opt/Symantec/symantec_antivirus
The default work directory for LiveUpdate is as follows:

/opt/Symantec/LiveUpdate/tmp
The installation completes when the command prompt returns. You do not
have to restart the computer to complete the installation.
To verify the client installation, click or right-click the Symantec Endpoint Protection
yellow shield and then click Open Symantec Endpoint Protection. The location
of the yellow shield varies by Linux version. The client user interface displays
information about program version, virus definitions, server connection status, and
management.
See Importing client-server communication settings into the Linux client
on page 169.

Remote Push pushes the client software to the computers that you specify, either
by IP address or by computer names. Once the package copies to the target
computer, the package installs automatically. The computer user does not need to
begin the installation or to have administrator privileges.
Remote Push comprises the following tasks:
You select an existing client installation package, create a new installation
package, or create a package to update communication settings.
For new installation packages, you configure and create the installation package.
You specify the computers on your network to receive a package from Symantec
Remote Push locates either specific computers for which you provide an IP
number or range, or all computers that are visible by browsing the network.
Note: To push the client installation package to Mac clients in the Browse
Network tab, you must install the Bonjour service on the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager server. See the following article:
Installing the Bonjour Service for Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager 12.1.5
or later
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager pushes the client software to the

specified computers.
The installation automatically begins on the computers once the package
successfully copies to the target computer.
Note: You cannot install the Linux client with Remote Push.
To install clients with Remote Push

2 In the Client Deployment Wizard, do one of the following tasks:
Click New Package Deployment to create a new installation package, and
then click Next.
Click Existing Package Deployment to use a package that was previously
created, and then click Browse to locate the package to install.
The Client Deployment Wizard uploads the package and directs you to the
Computer Selection panel (step 5).
Under Communication Update Package Deployment, choose whether
to update Windows or Mac client communication settings on the computers
that already have the Symantec Endpoint Protection client installed. Follow
the on-screen instructions, and then go to step 4.
Use this option to convert an unmanaged client to a managed client.
See Restoring client-server communications with Communication Update
Package Deployment on page 167.
3 For a new package, in the Select Group and Install Feature Sets panel, make
selections from the available options, which vary depending on the installation
package type. Click Next.
configure custom Client Install Settings before you launch the Client Deployment
Wizard. You can also use an existing client install package that is configured
to enable this function.
on page 121.

4 Click Remote Push, and then click Next.
5 In the Computer Selection panel, locate the computers to receive the software
using one of the following methods:
To browse the network for computers, click Browse Network.
To find computers by IP address or computer name, click Search Network,
and then click Find Computers.
You can set a timeout value to constrain the amount of time that the server
applies to a search.
6 Click > > to add the computers to the list, and authenticate with the domain or
workgroup if the wizard prompts you.
The remote push installation requires elevated privileges. If the client computer
is part of an Active Directory domain, you should use a domain administrator
account.
7 Click Next, and then click Send to push the client software to the selected
computers.
Once the Deployment Summary panel indicates a successful deployment,
the installation starts automatically on the client computers.
The installation takes several minutes to complete.
8 Click Next, and then click Finish.
9 Confirm the status of the installed clients on the Clients page.
For new Symantec Endpoint Protection installations, the client computers may
not appear within Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager until after they restart,
either automatically or by action you or the user takes.
See Preparing Windows and Mac computers for remote deployment on page 108.
on page 115.

The Web Link and Email option creates the installation package and the URL for
the installation package. The users receive the URL in an email to download the
package and install the Symantec Endpoint Protection client. Users must have
administrator privileges to install the package.
Web Link and Email comprises the following tasks:
You select, configure, and then create the client installation package.
You choose from the options that appear for the configuration of Windows, Mac,
and Linux client installation packages. All client installation packages are stored
on the computer that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Email from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager notifies the computer users
that they can download the client installation package.
You provide a list of users to receive an email message, which contains
instructions to download and install the client installation package. Users follow
the instructions to install the client software.
Note: The Mac and the Linux client install packages automatically export a .zip
archive file format. To correctly preserve the file permissions, you should expand
the archive file with a native archive program, such as the Mac Archive Utility
or the ditto command. You cannot use the Mac unzip command, a third-party
application, or any Windows application to expand the files for these operating
systems.
Before you use Web Link and Email, make sure that you correctly configure the
connection from the management server to the mail server.
See Establishing communication between the management server and email
servers on page 618.
To install clients with Web Link and Email
2 In the Client Deployment Wizard, click New Package Deployment, and then
click Next. Web Link and Email only sends a new installation package.
3 Make selections from the available options, which vary depending on the
installation package type, and then click Next.
configure custom Client Install Settings before launching the Client Deployment
Wizard.
on page 121.

4 Click Web Link and Email, and then click Next.
5 In the Email Recipients and Message panel, specify the email recipients and
the subject.
To specify multiple email recipients, type a comma after each email address.
A management console system administrator automatically receives a copy
of the message.
You can accept the default email subject and body, or edit the text. You can
also copy the URL and post it to a convenient and secure online location, like
an intranet page.
6 To create the package and deliver the link by email, click Next, and then click
Finish.
7 Confirm that the computer users received the email message and installed the
client software.
Client computers may not appear within Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
until after they restart, either automatically or by action you or the user takes.
Mac clients automatically prompt a restart when installation completes. Linux
clients do not require a restart.
on page 115.

Table 2-1 displays the tasks to perform after you install and configure the product
to assess whether the client computers have the correct level of protection.
Table 2-1 Tasks to perform two weeks after you install
Action Description
Modify the Virus and Spyware Change the following default scan settings:
Protection policy
If you create a group for servers, change the scheduled scan time to a time when
most users are offline.
See Setting up scheduled scans that run on Windows computers on page 419.
Enable Risk Tracer in Auto-Protect.
For more information, see the article: What is Risk Tracer?
Risk Tracer has the following prerequisites:
Network Threat Protection is enabled.
See Running commands on client computers from the console on page 244.
Windows File and Printer Sharing is enabled.
See Customizing Auto-Protect for Windows clients on page 455.
Modify the Firewall policy for Increase the security for remote computers by making sure that the following default
the remote computers group firewall rules for an off-site location are enabled:
and the servers group Block Local File Sharing to external computers
Block Remote Administration
Decrease the security for the servers group by making sure that the following firewall
rule is enabled: Allow Local File Sharing to local computers. This firewall rule
ensures that only local traffic is allowed.
See Customizing firewall rules on page 356.
See Managing locations for remote clients on page 256.

Table 2-1 Tasks to perform two weeks after you install (continued)
Action Description
Exclude applications and files You can increase performance by configuring the client not to scan certain folders and
from being scanned files. For example, the client scans the mail server directory every time a scheduled
scan runs. You should exclude mail server program files and directories from being
scanned.
For more information, see the article: About the automatic exclusion of files and folders
for Microsoft Exchange server and Symantec products.
You can improve performance by excluding the folders and files that are known to
cause problems if they are scanned. For example, Symantec Endpoint Protection
should not scan the proprietary Microsoft SQL Server files. You should add an exception
that prevents scanning of the folders that contain the SQL Server database files. These
exceptions improve performance and avoid corruption or files being locked when SQL
Server must use them.
For more information, see the knowledge base article: How to exclude MS SQL files
and folders using Centralized Exceptions.
You can also exclude files by extension for Auto-Protect scans on Windows computers.
See Creating exceptions for Virus and Spyware scans on page 537.
See Customizing Auto-Protect for Mac clients on page 456.
Run a quick report and Run the quick reports and scheduled reports to see whether the client computers have
scheduled report after the the correct level of security.
scheduled scan
See About the types of reports on page 595.
See Running and customizing quick reports on page 597.
See How to generate scheduled reports on page 600.
Check to ensure that Review monitors, logs, and the status of client computers to make sure that you have
scheduled scans have been the correct level of protection for each group.
successful and clients operate
as expected
Table 2-1 Tasks to perform two weeks after you install (continued)
Action Description
Assess your content storage As of 12.1.5, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager no longer stores multiple full
and client communication content versions. Instead, only the latest full version plus incremental deltas are stored.
bandwidth requirements This approach means that clients almost always download deltas, not full packages.
Only in the rare case where a client is extremely out of date (more than three months),
is a full download of the latest content required.
If your environment must control network bandwidth precisely, you can also throttle
client communication. For more information, see the article: Symantec Endpoint
Protection Bandwidth Control for Client Communication
See How to update content and definitions on the clients on page 172.
For more information about calculating storage and bandwidth needs, see the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Sizing and Scalability Best Practices White Paper.
Configure notifications for a Create a notification for a Single risk event and modify the notification for Risk
single risk outbreak and when Outbreak.
a new risk is detected
For these notifications, Symantec recommends that you do the following actions:
1 Change the Risk severity to Category 1 (Very Low and above) to avoid receiving
emails about tracking cookies.
2 Keep the Damper setting at Auto.
Notifications are critical to maintaining a secure environment and can also save you
time.
See Setting up administrator notifications on page 620.
See Managing notifications on page 610.
on page 36.
See: Symantec Endpoint Protection Recommended Best Practices for Securing an
Enterprise Environment
Section 1
Installing Symantec Endpoint
Protection
Chapter 3. Planning the installation
Chapter 4. Managing product licenses
Chapter 5. Managing the client installation
Chapter 6. Upgrading Symantec Endpoint Protection

Chapter 3
Planning the installation
System requirements for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Product license requirements
Supported virtual installations and virtualization products
Network architecture considerations
About choosing a database type
About basic management server settings
Management server ports
About SQL Server configuration settings
About SQL Server database authentication modes
Uninstalling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Uninstalling Symantec Endpoint Protection with the CleanWipe utility
System requirements for Symantec Endpoint

Protection
In general, the system requirements for Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
and the Symantec Endpoint Protection clients are the same as those of the operating
systems on which they are supported.
For the most current system requirements, see:
See Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager system requirements on page 69.
Planning the installation 69
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows system requirements

on page 71.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows Embedded system
requirements on page 74.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac system requirements
on page 76.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux system requirements
on page 76.
on page 36.
See Supported virtual installations and virtualization products on page 80.
See Internationalization requirements on page 77.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager system requirements

The following tables describe the software and hardware requirements for Symantec
Table 3-1 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager software system

requirements
Component Requirements
Operating system Windows Server 2008 (64-bit)

Windows Server 2008 R2
Windows Server 2012
Windows Server 2016
Note: Desktop operating systems are not supported.

Windows Server Core edition is not supported. Windows Server Core does not include
Internet Explorer, which Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager requires to work.
Web browser The following browsers are supported for web console access to Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and for viewing the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Help:
Microsoft Edge
Note: The 32-bit version Windows 10 does not support web console access on the
Edge browser.
Microsoft Internet Explorer 11
Mozilla Firefox 5.x through 50.x
Google Chrome 55.0.x
Table 3-1 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager software system

requirements (continued)
Database The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager includes an embedded database. You may
instead choose to use a database from one of the following versions of Microsoft SQL
Server:
SQL Server 2008, SP4

SQL Server 2008 R2, SP3
SQL Server 2012, RTM - SP3
SQL Server 2014, RTM - SP2
SQL Server 2016
Note: The SQL Server Express Edition database is not supported.
Table 3-2 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager hardware system

requirements
Processor Intel Pentium Dual-Core or equivalent minimum, 8-core or greater recommended

Note: Intel Itanium IA-64 processors are not supported.
Physical RAM 2 GB RAM available minimum; 8 GB or more available recommended

Note: Your Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server may require additional RAM
depending on the RAM requirements of other applications that are already installed.
For example, if Microsoft SQL Server is installed on the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager server, the server should have a minimum of 8 GB available.
Display 1024 x 768 or larger
Hard drive when installing With an embedded database or a local SQL Server database:
to the system drive
40 GB available minimum (200 GB recommended) for the management server and
database
With a remote SQL Server database:
40 GB available minimum (100 GB recommended) for the management server

Additional available disk space on the remote server for the database
Table 3-2 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager hardware system

Hard drive when installing With an embedded database or a local SQL Server database:
to an alternate drive
The system drive requires 15 GB available minimum (100 GB recommended)
The installation drive requires 25 GB available minimum (100 GB recommended)
With a remote SQL Server database:
The system drive requires 15 GB available minimum (100 GB recommended)

The installation drive requires 25 GB available minimum (100 GB recommended)
Additional available disk space on the remote server for the database
Note: If you use a SQL Server database, you may need to make more disk space
available. The amount and location of additional space depends on which drive
SQL Server uses, database maintenance requirements, and other database settings.
Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows system

requirements
Table 3-3 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows software system
requirements
Operating system Windows Vista (32-bit, 64-bit)

(desktop) Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit; RTM and SP1)
Windows Embedded 7 Standard, POSReady, and Enterprise (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)
Windows Embedded 8 Standard (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows 8.1 (32-bit, 64-bit), including Windows To Go
Windows 8.1 update for April 2014 (32-bit, 64-bit)
Windows 8.1 update for August 2014 (32-bit, 64-bit)
Windows Embedded 8.1 Pro, Industry Pro, and Industry Enterprise (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows 10 (32-bit, 64-bit; RTM, November Update (2015), and Anniversary Update)
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows Embedded system requirements
on page 74.
Table 3-3 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows software system
Operating system (server) Windows Server 2008 (32-bit, 64-bit; R2, SP1, and SP2)
Windows Small Business Server 2008 (64-bit)
Windows Essential Business Server 2008 (64-bit)
Windows Small Business Server 2011 (64-bit)
Windows Server 2012
Windows Server 2012 R2 update for April 2014
Windows Server 2012 R2 update for August 2014
Windows Server 2016
Table 3-4 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows hardware system
requirements
Processor 32-bit processor: 1 GHz Intel Pentium III or equivalent minimum (Intel Pentium 4 or
equivalent recommended)
64-bit processor: 2 GHz Pentium 4 with x86-64 support or equivalent minimum
Note: Itanium processors are not supported.
Physical RAM 512 MB (1 GB recommended) or higher if required by the operating system
Display 800 x 600 or larger
Hard drive Disk space requirements depend on the type of client you install, which drive you install
to, and where the program data file resides. The program data folder is usually on the
system drive in the default location C:\ProgramData.
Available disk space is always required on the system drive, regardless of which installation
drive you choose.
Hard drive system requirements:
Table 3-5 describes the hard drive system requirements when Symantec Endpoint
Protection is installed to the system drive.
Table 3-6 describes the hard drive system requirements when Symantec Endpoint
Protection is installed to an alternate drive.
Note: Space requirements are based on NTFS file systems. Additional space is also
required for content updates and logs.
Table 3-5 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows available hard
drive system requirements when installed to the system drive
Client type Requirements
Standard With the program data folder located on the system drive:
395 MB*
With the program data folder located on an alternate drive:
System drive: 180 MB

Alternate installation drive: 350 MB
Embedded / VDI With the program data folder located on the system drive:
245 MB*

Dark network With the program data folder located on the system drive:
545 MB*

* An additional 135 MB is required during installation.
drive system requirements when installed to an alternate drive
Standard With the program data folder located on the system drive:

Alternate installation drive: 15 MB*
With the program data folder located on an alternate drive:**
System drive: 30 MB
Program data drive: 350 MB
drive system requirements when installed to an alternate drive
(continued)
Embedded / VDI With the program data folder located on the system drive:

System drive: 30 MB
Dark network With the program data folder located on the system drive:

System drive: 30 MB
* An additional 135 MB is required during installation.

** If the program data folder is the same as the alternate installation drive, add 15
MB to the program data drive for your total. However, the installer still needs the
full 150 MB to be available on the alternate installation drive during installation.
Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows Embedded system

requirements
Table 3-7 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows Embedded system
requirements
Processor 1 GHz Intel Pentium
Physical RAM 256 MB

Table 3-7 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows Embedded system
Hard drive The Symantec Endpoint Protection Embedded / VDI client requires the following available
hard disk space:
Installed to the system drive: 245 MB

Installed to an alternate drive: 230 MB on system drive, and 15 MB on the alternate
drive
An additional 135 MB is needed during installation.
These figures assume that the program data folder is on the system drive. For more
detailed information, or for the requirements of the other client types, see the Symantec
Endpoint Protection client for Windows system requirements.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows system requirements on page 71.
Embedded operating Windows Embedded Standard 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)

system Windows Embedded POSReady 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Embedded Enterprise 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Embedded 8 Standard (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Pro (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Embedded 8.1 Industry Enterprise (32-bit and 64-bit)
Windows Embedded 8.1 Pro (32-bit and 64-bit)
Required minimum Filter Manager (FltMgr.sys)

components Performance Data Helper (pdh.dll)
Windows Installer Service
Templates Application Compatibility (Default)

Digital Signage
Industrial Automation
IE, Media Player, RDP
Set Top Box
Thin Client
The Minimum Configuration template is not supported.
The Enhanced Write Filter (EWF) and the Unified Write Filter (UWF) are not supported.
The recommended write filter is the File Based Write Filter (FBWF) installed along with
the Registry Filter.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection support for Windows Embedded.

Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac system requirements

Table 3-8 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac system requirements
Processor 64-Bit Intel Core 2 Duo or later
Physical RAM 2 GB of RAM
Hard drive 500 MB of available hard disk space for the installation
Display 800 x 600
Operating system Mac OS X 10.9, 10.10, 10.11, and macOS 10.12
Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux system requirements

Table 3-9 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux system requirements
Hardware Intel Pentium 4 (2 GHz) or higher processor

1 GB of RAM
7 GB of available hard disk space
Operating systems CentOS 6U4, 6U5; 32-bit and 64-bit

Debian 6.0.5 Squeeze, Debian 8 Jessie; 32-bit and 64-bit
Fedora 16, 17; 32-bit and 64-bit
Oracle Linux (OEL) 6U2, 6U4, 6U5, 7
Red Hat Enterprise Linux Server (RHEL) 6U2 - 6U8, 7, 7.1, 7.2
SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES) 11 SP1 - 11 SP3, 32-bit and 64-bit; 12
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop (SLED) 11 SP1 - 11 SP3; 32-bit and 64-bit
Ubuntu 12.04, 14.04, 16.04; 32-bit and 64-bit
For a list of supported operating system kernels, see Supported Linux kernels for Symantec
Endpoint Protection.
Graphical desktop You can use the following graphical desktop environments to view the Symantec Endpoint
environments Protection for Linux client:
KDE
Gnome
Unity
Table 3-9 Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux system requirements
(continued)
Other environmental Glibc

requirements Any operating system that runs glibc earlier than 2.6 is not supported.
i686-based dependent packages on 64-bit computers
Many of the executable files in the Linux client are 32-bit programs. For 64-bit
computers, you must install the i686-based dependent packages before you install
the Linux client.
If you have not already installed the i686-based dependent packages, you can install
them by command line. This installation requires superuser privileges, which the
following commands demonstrate with sudo:
For Red Hat-based distributions: sudo yum install glibc.i686 libgcc.i686
libX11.i686
For Debian-based distributions: sudo apt-get install ia32-libs
For Ubuntu-based distributions: sudo apt-get install libx11-6:i386
libgcc1:i386 libc6:i386
net-tools or iproute2
Symantec Endpoint Protection uses one of these two tools, depending on what is
already installed on the computer.
Internationalization requirements
Certain restrictions apply when you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
in a non-English or mixed-language environment.
Table 3-10 Internationalization requirements
Computer names, Non-English characters are supported with the following limitations:
server names, and
Network audit may not work for a host or user that uses a double-byte character set or a
workgroup names
high-ASCII character set.
Double-byte character set names or high-ASCII character set names may not appear
properly on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console or on the client user
interface.
A long double-byte or high-ASCII character set host name cannot be longer than what
NetBIOS allows. If the host name is longer than what NetBIOS allows, the Home, Monitors,
and Reports pages do not appear on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console.
Table 3-10 Internationalization requirements (continued)
English characters English characters are required in the following situations:

Deploy a client package to a remote computer.
Define the server data folder in the Management Server Configuration Wizard.
Define the installation path for Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Define the credentials when you deploy the client to a remote computer.
Define a group name.
You can create a client package for a group name that contains non-English characters.
You might not be able to deploy the client package using the Push Deployment Wizard
when the group name contains non-English characters, however.
Push non-English characters to the client computers.
Some non-English characters that are generated on the server side may not appear
properly on the client user interface.
For example, a double-byte character set location name does not appear properly on
non-double-byte character set named client computers.
User Information client Do not use double-byte or high-ASCII characters when you provide feedback in the User
computer dialog box Information client computer dialog box after you install the exported package.
See Collecting user information on page 252.
License Activation Do not use double-byte characters in the following fields:

wizard
First name
Last name
Company name
City
State/province
See Activating or importing your Symantec Endpoint Protection product license on page 51.

If you want to use Symantec Endpoint Protection after the trial period expires, you
must purchase and then activate a product license.
Table 3-11 Product license requirements
Product Requirement
Paid license installation of A 60-day trial license is included with Symantec

Symantec Endpoint Protection 14 Endpoint Protection.
You must purchase a license that covers each

deployed client when the trial license expires. One
license covers all clients regardless of platform and
version.
See About the licensing enforcement rules

on page 99.
Paid license installation of Symantec Endpoint Protection accepts the license file
Symantec Endpoint Protection 12.1 from your previous Symantec virus protection software.
You must purchase a new license when the previous
license expires.
The following terminology applies to Symantec product licenses:
Serial number A license contains a serial number that uniquely identifies your
license and associates the license with your company. The serial
number can be used to activate your Symantec Endpoint Protection
license.
See Activating or importing your Symantec Endpoint Protection

product license on page 51.
Deployed Deployed refers to the endpoint computers that are under the
protection of the Symantec Endpoint Protection client software. For
example, "We have 50 deployed seats" means that 50 endpoints
have client software installed on them.
Activate You activate your Symantec Endpoint Protection product license

to enable unrestricted access to all program functionality. You use
the License Activation wizard to complete the activation process.
See Activating or importing your Symantec Endpoint Protection

product license on page 51.
Seat A seat is a single endpoint computer that the Symantec Endpoint

Protection client software protects. A license is purchased and is
valid for a specific number of seats. "Valid seats" refers to the total
number of seats that are specified in all of your active licenses.
Supported virtual installations and virtualization products
Trial license A trial license refers to a fully functioning installation of Symantec

Endpoint Protection operating within the free evaluation period. If
you want to continue using Symantec Endpoint Protection beyond
the evaluation period, you must purchase and activate a license
for your installation. You do not need to uninstall the software to
convert from trialware to a licensed installation.
The evaluation period is 60 days from the initial installation of

Over-deployed A license is over-deployed when the number of deployed clients

exceeds the number of licensed seats.
Understanding license requirements is part of planning your Symantec Endpoint

Protection installation and managing your product licenses after installation.
on page 36.
on page 51.
Supported virtual installations and virtualization

products
You can install Symantec Endpoint Protection on supported operating systems that
run in virtual environments. Install Symantec Endpoint Protection on the guest
operating system, and not the host.
Except where noted, the following virtualization products support the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager, console, and embedded database components, and
Symantec Endpoint Protection client software for Windows and Linux:
Windows Azure
Amazon WorkSpaces
VMware WS 5.0 (workstation) or later
VMware GSX 3.2 (enterprise) or later
VMware ESX 2.5 (workstation) or later
VMware ESXi 4.1 - 5.5
VMware ESXi 6.0

VMware ESXi 6.0 Update 1 and 2
Microsoft Virtual Server 2005
Windows Server 2008 Hyper-V
Windows Server 2012 Hyper-V
Windows Server 2012 R2 Hyper-V
Citrix XenServer 5.6 or later
Virtual Box, supplied by Oracle
See Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in virtual infrastructures on page 625.
See Randomizing scans to improve computer performance in virtualized
environments on Windows clients on page 464.

You can install Symantec Endpoint Protection for testing purposes without
considering your company network architecture. You can install Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager with a few clients, and become familiar with the features and
functions.
When you are ready to install the production clients, you should plan your
deployment based on your organizational structure and computing needs.
You should consider the following elements when you plan your deployment:
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Administrators use Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to manage security
policies and client computers. You may want to consider the security and
availability of the computer on which Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
is installed.
Remote console
Administrators can use a remote computer that runs the console software to
access Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. Administrators may use a
remote computer when they are away from the office. You should ensure that
remote computers meet the remote console requirements.
Local and remote computers
Remote computers may have slower network connections. You may want to
use a different installation method than the one you use to install to local
computers.
Portable computers such as notebook computers
Portable computers may not connect to the network on a regular schedule. You
may want to make sure that portable computers have a LiveUpdate policy that
enables a LiveUpdate schedule. Any portable computers that do not check in
regularly do not get other policy updates.
Computers that are located in secure areas
Computers that are located in secure areas may need different security settings
from the computers that are not located in secure areas.
You identify the computers on which you plan to install the client. Symantec
recommends that you install the client software on all unprotected computers,
including the computer that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
on page 36.

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses a database to store information about
clients and settings. The database is created as part of the configuration process.
You must decide which database to use before you install the management server.
You cannot use the console until you have configured the management server to
use a database.
Table 3-12 Databases that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses
Database type Description
Embedded database The embedded database is included with Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager. The embedded database does not
require configuration and is easier to install. The embedded
database supports up to 5,000 clients.

Table 3-12 Databases that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses

(continued)
Database type Description
SQL Server database If you choose to use this option, you must install SQL Server
and SQL Server Native Client before you install Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. For optimal compatibility, you
install the version of SQL Server Native Client equal to your
version of SQL Server.
You should consider purchasing and installing SQL Server

for the following reasons:
You must support more than 5,000 clients. Each

management server that uses SQL Server can support
up to 50,000 clients. If your organization has more than
50,000 clients, you can install another management server.
You want to support failover and load balancing.
You want to set up additional management servers as site
partners.
See Determining how many sites you need on page 698.
If you create a SQL Server database, you must first install an

instance of SQL Server. You must then configure it for
communication with the management server.

The following values represent the default settings when you install the Symantec
You can configure some of the following values only when you install the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager using a custom configuration.
See Management server ports on page 85.
Table 3-13 Basic server settings
Setting Default Description
Site Name My Site (default) The name of the site as it appears in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. Site name is the highest level container
Site local host name (custom)
under which all features are configured and run within
Table 3-13 Basic server settings (continued)
Server name local host name The name of the computer that runs Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
Server data folder C:\Program Files The directory in which the Symantec Endpoint Protection
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Manager places data files including backups, replicated
Endpoint Protection logs, and other files. The installer creates this directory if it
Manager\data (64-bit operating does not exist.
system)
Encryption password None This password encrypts communication between Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager and clients.
If you choose the default configuration, the system

automatically generates the encryption password for you.
From the summary screen, you can print or copy this
information to the clipboard.
If you choose a custom configuration, you can have the

system automatically generate a random password, or you
can create your own password. The password can be from
6-32 alphanumeric characters.
Document this password and put it in a secure location. You

cannot change or recover the password after you create the
database. You must also enter this password for disaster
recovery purposes if you do not have a backed-up database
to restore.
See Disaster recovery best practices on page 704.
User name admin The name of the default user that is used to log on to the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console for the first
time. This value is not configurable.
Password None The password that is specified for the admin account during
server configuration.
You need the original admin password to reconfigure the

management server at a later time. Document this password
and put it in a secure location.
Email address None System notifications are sent to the email address specified.

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses the following ports by default. To
change the default ports, choose the custom installation type when you run the
Management Server Configuration Wizard.
All communication over these ports is sent over TCP.
Table 3-14 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager ports
Server port 8443 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager listens on this port.
Web console port 9090 Remote HTTP console connections use this port.
Client communications 8014 The clients communicate with the management server on this port.
port
Remote management 8446 Remote Monitoring and Management (RMM) uses this port to send Web services
Web services port traffic over HTTPS.
Server control port 8765 The Tomcat Web service uses this port.
Reporting port 8445 The Apache Web service uses this port for reporting.
Process launcher port 8447 The process launcher service uses this port to start those processes that require
higher privileges on the management server.

If you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager with a SQL Server database,
there are specific configuration requirements for SQL Server.
Before you create the database, Symantec recommends that you install a new
instance of SQL Server that conforms to Symantec installation and configuration
requirements. You can install a database in an existing instance, but the instance
must be configured properly or your database installation fails. For example, if you
select a case-sensitive SQL collation, your installation fails.
Warning: To maximize the security posture of remote SQL Server communications,

place both servers in the same secure subnet.
Table 3-15 Required SQL Server configuration settings
Configuration setting Installation requirement
Instance name Do not use the default instance name. Create a name such as
SEPM.
By default, a database named Sem5 is created in the SQL

Server instance when you install Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager. The default name is supported, but can cause
confusion if you install multiple instances on one computer.
Authentication configuration Mixed mode or Windows Authentication mode
See About SQL Server database authentication modes

on page 89.
sa password Set this password when you set Mixed Mode authentication.
Enabled protocol TCP/IP
IP addresses for TCP/IP Enable IP1 and IP2
TCP/IP port numbers for Set TCP Dynamic Ports to blank, and specify a TCP port
IP1, IP2, and IPALL number. The default port is typically 1433. You specify this port
number when you create the database.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager database does

not support dynamic ports.
Remote connections Must be enabled. TCP/IP protocol must also be specified.
If your database is located on a remote server, you must also install SQL Server
client components on the computer that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager. SQL Server client components include BCP.EXE. The version number of
the SQL Server client components should be the same as the version number of
SQL Server that you use. Refer to your SQL Server documentation for installation
instructions.
During the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager database configuration phase
of the installation, you select and enter various database values. Understand the
decisions you must make to correctly configure the database.
Table 3-16 displays the settings that you might need to know before you begin the
installation process.
Table 3-16 SQL Server database settings
Server name local host name Name of the computer that runs Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
Server data folder C:\Program Files Folder in which the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
(x86)\Symantec Endpoint places data files including backups, replication, and other
Protection Manager\data Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager files. The installer
creates this folder if it does not exist.
Encryption password None The password that encrypts communication between

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and clients. The
password can be from 6-32 alphanumeric characters and
is required.
Document this password and put it in a secure location. You

cannot change or recover the password after you create the
database. You must also enter this password for disaster
recovery purposes if you do not have a backed-up database
to restore.
Database server local host name Name of the computer where SQL Server is installed, and
the optional instance name. If the database server was
installed with the default instance, which is no name, type
either host name or the host's IP address. If the database
server was installed with a named instance, type either host
name\instance_name or IP address\instance_name. The
use of host name only works with properly configured DNS.
If you install to a remote database server, you must first

install the SQL Server client components on the computer
that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
SQL Server Port 1433 The port that is used to send and receive traffic to the SQL
Server.
The use of port 0 is not supported. Port 0 specifies a

random, negotiated port.
Database Name sem5 Name of the database that is created.

Table 3-16 SQL Server database settings (continued)
Database user name sem5 Name of the database user account that is created. The
user account has a standard role with read and write access.
The name can be a combination of alphanumeric values
and the special characters ~ # % _ + = | : .. The
special characters ` ! @ ' $ ^ & * ( ) - { } [ ]
" \ / < ; > , ? are not allowed. The following names
are also not allowed: sysadmin, server admin, setupadmin,
securityadmin, processadmin, dbcreator, diskadmin,
bulkadmin.
Database password None The password that is associated with the database user
account. The name can be a combination of alphanumeric
values and the special characters ~ # % _ + = | : .
/. The special characters ! @ * ( ) { } [ ] ; , ?
are not allowed.
SQL Server client SQL Server 2008: Install Location of the local SQL Client Utility directory that contains
folder directory\100\Tools\Binn bcp.exe.
SQL Server 2012: Install The installation paths that are shown represent the default
directory\110\Tools\Binn paths for Microsoft SQL Server. Install directory represents
the installation drive and directory for Microsoft SQL Server.
SQL Server 2014 / 2016:
Install
directory\Client
SDK\ODBC\110\Tools\Binn
Server user name None Name of the database server administrator account, which
is typically sa.
Server password None The password that is associated with the database server
administrator account, which is typically sa.
Table 3-16 SQL Server database settings (continued)
Database data folder Automatically detected after you Location of the SQL Server data folder. If you install to a
click Default. remote server, the volume identifier must match the identifier
on the remote server.
SQL Server 2008: Install
directory\ The installation paths shown represent the default paths for
MSSQL10.MSSQLSERVER\ Microsoft SQL Server.
MSSQL\Data If you install to a named instance on SQL Server 2008,
SQL Server 2008 R2: Install the instance name is appended to MSSQL10. For
directory\ example, \MSSQL10.instance name\MSSQL\Data
MSSQL10_50.MSSQLSERVER\ If you install to a named instance on SQL Server 2008
MSSQL\Data R2, the instance name is appended to MSSQL10_50.
For example, \MSSQL10_50.instance
name\MSSQL\Data
directory\
If you install to a named instance on SQL Server 2012,
MSSQL11.MSSQLSERVER\
the instance name is appended to MSSQL11. For
MSSQL\Data example, \MSSQL11.instance name\MSSQL\Data
SQL Server 2014: Install If you install to a named instance on SQL Server 2014,
directory\ the instance name is appended to MSSQL12. For
MSSQL12.MSSQLSERVER\ example, \MSSQL12.instance name\MSSQL\Data
MSSQL\Data If you install to a named instance on SQL Server 2016,
the instance name is appended to MSSQL13. For
example, \MSSQL13.instance name\MSSQL\Data
directory\
MSSQL13.MSSQLSERVER\ Note: Clicking Default displays the correct installation folder
MSSQL\Data if you entered the database server and instance name
correctly. If you click Default and the correct installation
folder does not appear, your database creation fails.

The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager supports two modes of SQL Server
database authentication:
Windows Authentication mode
Mixed mode
SQL Server can be configured to use either Windows Authentication or mixed mode
authentication. Mixed mode authentication allows the use of either Windows or SQL
Server credentials. When SQL Server is configured to use mixed mode, Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager may be set to use either Windows Authentication or
mixed mode authentication. When SQL Server is set to use Windows Authentication
mode, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager must also be configured to use
Windows Authentication mode.
For the remote database connections that use the Windows Authentication mode,
be aware of the following requirements:
For deployments in an Active Directory environment, Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and SQL Server must be located in the same Windows
domain.
For deployments in a Workgroup environment, the Windows account credentials
must be the same for the local computers and the remote computers.

Uninstalling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uninstalls the server and
console. You can optionally remove the database and the database backup files
during uninstallation. To uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you use
the Windows control panel for removing, repairing, or changing an application,
typically Programs and Features.
If you plan to reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you should back up
the database before you uninstall it.
In some cases, you may have to uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
using other methods, such as the CleanWipe utility. See:
Uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection.
See Backing up the database and logs on page 706.
Uninstalling Symantec Endpoint Protection with the

CleanWipe utility
You can use several methods to uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection product
components, such as through the Windows Control Panel. If these common methods
fail, you can use the CleanWipe utility.
Warning: Symantec Technical Support does not recommend using CleanWipe the
first time you have uninstallation trouble. You should only use CleanWipe as a last
resort when the usual uninstallation methods are unsuccessful.
Uninstalling Symantec Endpoint Protection with the CleanWipe utility
You should always use the latest version of CleanWipe to remove Symantec
Endpoint Protection. CleanWipe can remove older installations of Symantec Endpoint
Protection. However, you should not use an older version of CleanWipe to remove
a newer version of Symantec Endpoint Protection. This action can have unexpected
results.
As of 14, you can also incorporate CleanWipe functionality directly into the Symantec
Endpoint Protection client package. You can enable this option with client installation
settings. For more information, see About the Symantec Endpoint Protection client
preinstall removal feature.
If you need help with CleanWipe, you can contact Technical Support directly.
To uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection with the CleanWipe utility
1 Copy the folder that contains Cleanwipe.exe to the computer on which you
want to run it.
2 Double-click Cleanwipe.exe, and then click Next.
3 Accept the license agreement, and then click Next.
4 Select the Symantec products you want to remove, and then click Next twice.
5 When the tool finishes running, you may be prompted to restart the computer.
After the computer restarts, CleanWipe reopens and continues to run.
6 Click Next.
7 Click Finish.
The Symantec products you selected are now uninstalled.
For information on recommended uninstallation methods, see:
Uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection
About Symantec Endpoint Protection client installation failures and Cleanwipe
Chapter 4
Managing product licenses
Licensing Symantec Endpoint Protection
About the trial license
About purchasing licenses
Required licensing contact information
About the Symantec Licensing Portal
About product upgrades and licenses
About renewing your Symantec Endpoint Protection license
Checking the license status in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
About the licensing enforcement rules
Backing up your license files
Recovering a deleted license
Purging obsolete clients from the database to make more licenses available
About multi-year licenses
Licensing an unmanaged Windows client

Symantec Endpoint Protection requires a paid license after the trial period expires
or when your current license expires. You can apply an existing license to a product
upgrade. After you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you have 60
days to purchase enough license seats to cover all of your deployed clients.
Managing product licenses 93
To administer licenses, you must log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

with a management server system administrator account, such as the default
account admin. You use the License Activation Wizard to activate new or renewed
licenses, or when you convert a trial license to a paid license. You license Symantec
Endpoint Protection according to the number of clients that you need to protect the
endpoints at your site.
See About administrator accounts and access rights on page 274.
Table 4-1 Licensing tasks
Task Description
Check the product license Understand the importance of the license requirements for the computers that you
requirements want to protect. A license lets you install the Symantec Endpoint Protection client on
a specified number of computers. A license lets you download virus and spyware
definitions and other security content from LiveUpdate.
See About the licensing enforcement rules on page 99.
See About multi-year licenses on page 102.
Purchase a license and save it You need to purchase a license in the following situations:
to the management server
You want to purchase Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Your trial license expired.
Your paid license expired.
Your license is over-deployed.
After you purchase your license, you receive an email with a Symantec license file
(.slf) or a license serial number. You can use the serial number to activate the
installation. You can also use the serial number to download a copy of the .slf file
from the Licensing Portal. You do not need to manually download a license file.
See Checking the license status in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

on page 98.
See About the trial license on page 94.
See About the Symantec Licensing Portal on page 97.

Table 4-1 Licensing tasks (continued)
Task Description
Activate your purchased license You use the License Activation Wizard in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console to import and activate your Symantec product license.
Before you activate the license, you must have one of the following items:
A Symantec license serial number

A Symantec license file (.slf)
You receive one or the other of these when you purchase a license.

on page 51.
Back up your license files Back up your license files to preserve them in case the database or the computer's
hard disk becomes damaged.
See Backing up your license files on page 100.
See Recovering a deleted license on page 101.
Review the preconfigured Preconfigured license notifications alert administrators about expired licenses and
license notifications other license issues.
See What are the types of notifications and when are they sent? on page 612.
Keep track of when your Check the status for each license that you imported into the console to see whether
licenses expire, and renew your you need to renew a license or purchase more licenses.
licenses
See Checking the license status in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
on page 98.
See About renewing your Symantec Endpoint Protection license on page 98.

The trial license lets you evaluate and test Symantec Endpoint Protection in your
environment.
The trial license applies to the following Symantec Endpoint Protection components:
The Symantec Endpoint Protection client
Access to LiveUpdate content
After the trial license expires, you must activate a paid license to retain full product
functionality. You do not have to uninstall the trial-licensed version to convert your
Symantec Endpoint Protection installation to a fully licensed installation.
The trial license expires 60 days after you install Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.

You need to purchase a license in the following situations:
Your trial license expired. Symantec Endpoint Protection comes with a trial
license that lets you install and evaluate the product in your environment.
Your current license is expired.
Your current license is over-deployed. Over-deployed means that you have
deployed more clients than your current license allows.
Depending upon how you purchase your license, you receive by email either a
product license serial number or a Symantec License file. The license file uses the
file extension .slf. When you receive the license file by email, it is attached to the
email as a .zip file. You must extract the .slf file from the .zip file.
Save the license file to a computer that can be accessed from the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager console. Many users save the license on the computer
that hosts Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. Many users also save a copy
of the license to a different computer or removable storage media for safekeeping.
Warning: To prevent corruption of the license file, do not open or alter the file
contents in any way. However, you may copy and store the license as desired.
Table 4-2 Purchasing license tasks
Task Description
Determine your licensing See Product license requirements on page 78.

requirements
See About the licensing enforcement rules on page 99.
Table 4-2 Purchasing license tasks (continued)
Task Description
Find out where to buy product You can purchase a Symantec product license from the following sources:
licenses
The Symantec online store:
http://store.symantec.com/
Your preferred Symantec reseller:
To find a reseller, use the Partner locator.
To find out more about Symantec partners, go to
http://www.symantec.com/partners/index.jsp
The Symantec sales team:
Visit the Symantec Ordering website for sales contact information.
Learn more about upgrading from See About the trial license on page 94.
the trial license that comes with
Get help with purchasing licenses http://customercare.symantec.com/

or learn more about licenses

The activation process prompts you to provide any missing license contact
information. Privacy statements are provided in the wizard to describe how this
information is used. You must indicate that the privacy conditions are acceptable
before you can complete the activation process.
Table 4-3 Licensing contact information
Type of information Description
Technical Contact Contact information for the person who is in charge of the
technical activities that are concerned with installing or
maintaining your endpoint security infrastructure. The
contact's name, email address, and phone number are
required.
Primary Contact Contact information for the person who represents your
company. The contact's name, email address, and phone
number are required.
Note: Click the check box to indicate when the Technical
Contact and Primary Contact are the same person.
Table 4-3 Licensing contact information (continued)
Type of information Description
Company Information Includes the company name, location, phone number, and
email address.

You can use the Symantec Licensing Portal to activate product licenses. However,
you can activate licenses from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console,
which is simpler and faster.
The Symantec Licensing Portal is now part of MySymantec. You can access the
Licensing Portal through the following website:
https://licensing.symantec.com
Note: If you have existing credentials for MySymantec, you can use those credentials
to access licensing information. If you do not have a MySymantec account, you
must create one before you can use the Licensing Portal. To create an account,
go to the Licensing Portal website and then click Register Now.
The Symantec Customer Care website has additional information about using the
Symantec Licensing Portal to manage licenses:
http://customersupport.symantec.com/
on page 51.
About product upgrades and licenses

When Symantec releases a new version of Symantec Endpoint Protection, you
may apply your existing active license to the new version. You receive an email
notification that a new release is available that includes instructions for downloading
the new version of Symantec Endpoint Protection.
In some cases you may not receive the notification email and missed any important
information that is required to activate your new upgrade. For more information
About renewing your Symantec Endpoint Protection license
about licensing and product upgrades, see the section pertaining to on-premises
software upgrades on the Upgrading Products page.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager context-sensitive Help provides additional
assistance about the application of an upgrade license specific to the version of
Symantec Endpoint Protection that you use.
See Upgrading to a new release on page 135.
About renewing your Symantec Endpoint Protection

license
When your current license is about to expire, the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager sends license expiration notifications to the Symantec Endpoint Protection
administrator. Symantec highly recommends that you renew your license before it
expires.
When you renew a license, the management server removes and replaces the
expired license with a new license. To purchase renewal licenses, visit the Symantec
Store, or contact your Symantec partner or preferred Symantec reseller.
In the event that you accidentally delete a license, you can recover it from the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console.
on page 51.
Checking the license status in Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager
You can find out whether the management server uses a trial license or a paid
license. You can also obtain the following license information for each paid license
that you imported into the console:
License serial number, total seat count, expiration date
Number of valid seats
Number of deployed seats
Number of expired seats
Number of over-deployed clients

The trial license status only provides limited information that is related to the
expiration date.
To check whether you have a paid license or trial license
In the console, do one of the following tasks:
Click Admin > Licenses.
Click Home > Licensing Details.
To check the license expiration date

In the console, click Admin > Licenses.
on page 51.

Symantec Endpoint Protection licenses are enforced according to the following
rules:
Table 4-4 Licensing enforcement rules
Where applies Rule
Term of license The term of the license starts from the time and date of
activation until midnight of the last day of the licensing
term.
If you have multiple sites, the license expires on the day

and the time of the westernmost Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager database.
License coverage: Symantec A Symantec Endpoint Protection license applies to the

Endpoint Protection components Symantec Endpoint Protection clients. For instance, in
a network with 50 endpoints, the license must provide
for a minimum of 50 seats. Instances of Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager do not require a license.
Table 4-4 Licensing enforcement rules (continued)
Where applies Rule
License coverage: sites and A Symantec Endpoint Protection product license is

domains applied to an entire installation regardless of the number
of replicated sites or domains that compose the
installation. For instance, a license for 100 seats covers
a two-site installation where each site has 50 seats.
If you have not implemented replication, you may deploy

the same .slf file to multiple Symantec Endpoint
Protection management servers. The number of clients
reporting to your management servers must not exceed
the total number of licensed seats.
License coverage: platforms Licensing seats apply to clients running on any platform,
whether the platform is Windows, Mac, or Linux.
License coverage: products and License seats apply equally across product versions.
versions

Symantec recommends that you back up your license files. Backing up the license
files preserves the license files in case the database or the console computer's
hard disk becomes damaged.
By default, when you import the license file using the Licensing Activation Wizard,
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager places a copy of the license file in the
following default location: C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager\Inetpub\license
If you misplaced the license files you originally downloaded or received by email,
you can download the files again from the Symantec Licensing Portal website.
To back up your license files
Using Windows, copy the .slf license files from the directory where you saved
the files to another computer of your choice.
See your company's procedure for backing up files.
on page 51.

If you accidentally delete a license file, you can recover it from the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager console.
To recover a deleted license
1 On the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console Admin page, click
Licenses and then under Tasks, click Recover a deleted license.
2 On the License recovery panel, check the box next to the deleted license you
want to recover, and then click Submit.
Purging obsolete clients from the database to make

more licenses available
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager can incorrectly display an over-deployed
license status due to obsolete clients. These are database entries for the clients
that no longer communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager in the
protected environment. Clients can be rendered obsolete for many reasons, such
as when you upgrade the operating system, decommission a computer, or change
the hardware configuration.
If your license reports show more seats are licensed than known to be deployed,
you should purge the database of obsolete clients. Obsolete clients count against
the product license, so it is important to purge obsolete clients as soon as they are
created. By default, purging occurs every 30 days. You can shorten the interval
between purge cycles to more quickly purge the obsolete clients. You reset the
interval as needed to suit your long-term needs after the purge cycle completes.
In non-persistent Virtual Desktop Infrastructures (VDIs), you can set a separate
time period for purging the non-persistent clients. This setting purges the offline
clients that have not connected during the time period that you set. Non-persistent
offline clients do not affect the license count.
To purge obsolete clients from the database to make more licenses available
1 In the console, on the Admin page, click Domains, right-click the domain, and
click Edit Domain Properties.
2 On the General tab, change the Delete clients that have not connected for
specified time setting from the default of 30 to 1.
You do not need to set the option to purge the non-persistent clients for licensing
purposes. The non-persistent clients that are offline do not count toward the
license total.
3 Click OK.
4 Wait 24 hours and then revert the settings to 30 days or to another interval that
suits your requirements.
See Purging obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to free up licenses on page 648.

When you purchase a multi-year license, you receive a set of license files equal to
the number of years your license is valid. For instance, a three-year license consists
of three separate license files. When you activate a multi-year license, you import
all of the license files during the same activation session. Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager merges the separate license files into a single activated license
that is valid for the purchased duration.
While not recommended, it is possible for you to activate fewer than the full
complement of license files. In this case, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
merges the files and applies the duration of the license file that expires last. For
instance, a three-year license that is activated with only the first two files indicates
a duration of only two years. When you activate the third file at a later date,
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager accurately reports the full duration of the
license as three years. In all cases, the number of seats remains consistent with
the number of seats that you purchased.
When Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager merges files, it deletes the shortest
duration files and keeps the longest duration file for internal license-keeping
functions. If you think that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager inappropriately
deleted a license, recover and reactivate the deleted license.
You can see the license serial numbers of shorter duration that are associated with
the active license. On the Admin page, click Licenses and then click the activated
license. The associated licenses appear in the Associated Licenses column.

No unmanaged clients require the manual installation of a license file. However, to
enable the submission of reputation data from an unmanaged Windows client, you
must install a paid license on the unmanaged client. Unmanaged Mac clients and
Linux clients do not submit reputation data.
To license an unmanaged Windows client
1 Locate and create a copy of your current Symantec Licensing File (.slf).
Use the same file that you used to activate your license on Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
2 On the client computer, place the copied license file into the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client inbox. By default, the folder in which the inbox appears is
hidden, so use Folder Options to enable the showing of hidden files and folders.
On the clients that use Vista or a later version of Windows, the inbox is
located by default at C:\ProgramData\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection\CurrentVersion\inbox\
On the clients that run 12.1.x on a pre-Vista version of Windows, the inbox
is located by default at C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection\CurrentVersion\inbox
If the license file is invalid or the license installation failed, a folder named
Invalid is created and the invalid license is placed into the folder. If the file is
valid, it is automatically removed from the inbox after it is processed.
3 To verify that you applied the license correctly, check that no files appear in
the inbox folder.
4 Check that the .slf file is in either one of the following folders:
For the clients that run on Vista or a later version of Windows:
C:\ProgramData\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection\CurrentVersion\Data\Config
For the clients that run 12.1.x on a pre-Vista version of Windows:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection\CurrentVersion\Data\Config
You can also include the .slf file as part of a third-party deployment package.
See Understanding server data collection and client submissions and their
importance to the security of your network on page 474.
Chapter 5
Managing the client
installation
Preparing for client installation
Choosing a method to install the client using the Client Deployment Wizard
Deciding which features to install on the client
Exporting client installation packages
About the Windows client installation settings
Creating custom client installation settings
Configuring Windows client installation feature sets
Configuring client packages to uninstall existing security software
Restarting the client computers from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
About managed and unmanaged clients
Installing an unmanaged Windows client
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux
Managing client installation packages
Importing client installation packages into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

Managing the client installation 105

You must install a Symantec Endpoint Protection client on every computer you want
to protect, whether the computer is physical or virtual.
Table 5-1 Client computer installation tasks
Action Description
Identify client computers Identify the computers on which you want to install the client software. Check that all
the computers run a supported operating system.
Note: Symantec recommends that you also install the client on the computer that hosts
For the most current system requirements, see: Release notes, new fixes, and system
requirements for all versions of Endpoint Protection
Identify computer groups Identify the computer groups to which you want the clients to belong. For example,
(optional) you can group clients based on type of computer, to conform to your corporate
organization, or to the security level required. You can create these groups before or
after you install the client software.
You can also import an existing group structure such as an Active Directory structure.
See Managing groups of clients on page 220.
See Importing existing groups and computers from an Active Directory or an LDAP
server on page 223.
Table 5-1 Client computer installation tasks (continued)
Action Description
Prepare client computers for If your users do not have administrative rights for their computers, then you should
deployment and installation remotely install the client software using Remote Push. The Remote Push installation
requires you to enter the credentials that have local administrative rights for the
computers.
Prepare the computers for remote client deployment and for successful communication
with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager after installation.
Modify or disable any existing firewall settings to allow communication during Remote
Push deployment, and between Symantec Endpoint Protection components after
installation.
See About the communication ports that Symantec Endpoint Protection uses
on page 110.
Uninstall third-party security software on all operating systems. For Windows
operating systems, you can configure client packages to automatically uninstall
existing third-party security software when you prepare to deploy clients.
Some programs may have special uninstallation routines, or may need to have a
self-protection component disabled. See the documentation for the third-party
software.
As of 14, you can also uninstall an existing installation of the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client, before the installation of Symantec Endpoint Protection. You
should only use this option if the existing Symantec Endpoint Protection installation
is corrupted or malfunctioning.
See Configuring client packages to uninstall existing security software on page 121.
Uninstall any unsupported Symantec virus protection software, such as Symantec
AntiVirus or Symantec Client Security. You must also uninstall any
consumer-branded Symantec security products, such as Norton Internet Security.
Migration directly from these products is not supported.
Table 5-1 Client computer installation tasks (continued)
Action Description
Determine features and You deploy the client software using one of the available methods. You can also export
deploy client software a customized client package to deploy later or with a third-party tool.
Note: Symantec recommends that you do not perform third-party installations
simultaneous to the installation of Symantec Endpoint Protection. The installation of
any third-party programs that make network- or system-level changes may cause
undesirable results when you install Symantec Endpoint Protection. If possible, restart
the client computers before you install Symantec Endpoint Protection.
on page 115.
See Installing Windows client software using third-party tools on page 768.
You decide which features to install to the client computers. You configure custom
client feature sets and installation settings before you export or deploy an installation
package. Installation settings include the installation folder and the restart settings.
You can also use the default client install feature sets and installation settings.
For Windows clients, you can choose to automatically uninstall existing third-party
security software when you configure client installation settings.
Verify installation status Confirm that the client installation succeeded and that clients communicate with
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. Managed clients may not appear in the console
until after they are restarted.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client status icons on page 160.
See Restarting the client computers from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
on page 124.
After installation, you can take additional steps to secure unmanaged computers
and optimize the performance of your Symantec Endpoint Protection installation.
on page 36.
Preparing Windows and Mac computers for remote deployment

Before you deploy Symantec Endpoint Protection from Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager, you must take steps to prepare the computers to ensure a successful
remote installation.
Table 5-2 lists the tasks that you must perform on all computers to which you plan
to remotely deploy the Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
Table 5-3 lists the additional tasks that you must perform on Windows computers.
See your Windows documentation for more information on any tasks you do not
know how to perform.
Table 5-4 lists the additional tasks that you must do on Mac computers. See your
Mac documentation for more information on any tasks you do not know how to
perform.
Note: You cannot deploy the Symantec Endpoint Protection client to Linux computers
remotely from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Table 5-2 Tasks to prepare all computers for remote deployment
Task Details
Have administrative rights to If the client computer is part of an Active Directory domain, you should use domain
your client computers administrator account credentials for a remote push installation. Otherwise, have the
administrator credentials available for each computer to which you deploy.
Disable or modify firewall Disable the firewall, or modify firewall settings to allow communication between
settings Symantec Endpoint Protection components.
on page 110.
Uninstall existing third-party Uninstall any third-party security software currently in use. For Windows computers,
security software Symantec Endpoint Protection version 12.1 RU1 MP1 and later includes a tool to help
automatically uninstall select third-party security software. You must separately uninstall
any security software that this tool does not uninstall.
Note: Some programs may have special uninstallation routines, or may need to have
a self-protection component disabled. See the documentation for the third-party
software.
You configure this tool before you deploy, and the uninstallation occurs before Symantec
Endpoint Protection installs.
Table 5-2 Tasks to prepare all computers for remote deployment (continued)
Task Details
Uninstall Symantec Endpoint As of 14, you can uninstall an existing installation of the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Protection clients that do not client for Windows. You should only use this option if the existing Symantec Endpoint
uninstall normally Protection installation does not uninstall normally. You should not use this option as
part of a standard deployment.
You configure this tool before you deploy, and the uninstallation occurs before Symantec
Endpoint Protection installs.
Uninstall unsupported or Uninstall any unsupported Symantec security software, such as Symantec AntiVirus
consumer Symantec security or Symantec Client Security. Migration directly from these products is not supported.
software
You must also uninstall any consumer-branded Symantec security products, such as
Norton Internet Security.
See the documentation for your Symantec software for information about uninstallation.
See on page 138.
Table 5-3 Windows remote deployment preparation tasks
Operating system Tasks
Prepare Windows Vista, Windows User Account Control blocks local administrative accounts from remotely
Windows 7, or Windows accessing remote administrative shares such as C$ and Admin$. You do not need to
Server 2008 / 2008 R2 fully disable User Account Control on the client computers during the remote deployment
computers if you disable the registry key LocalAccountTokenFilterPolicy.
To disable UAC remote restrictions, see:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/951016
If the Windows client computer is part of an Active Directory domain, use domain
administrator account credentials with local administrator privileges for remote push.
Perform the following tasks:
Disable the Sharing Wizard.

Enable network discovery by using the Network and Sharing Center.
Enable the built-in administrator account and assign a password to the account.
Verify that the account has administrator privileges.
Disable or remove Windows Defender.
Table 5-3 Windows remote deployment preparation tasks (continued)
Prepare Windows 8 / 8.1 or Before you deploy, perform the following tasks:
later, or Windows Server
Disable the registry key LocalAccountTokenFilterPolicy.
2012 / 2012 R2 or later
To disable UAC remote restrictions, see:
computers
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/951016
Enable and start the Remote Registry service.
Disable or remove Windows Defender.
Table 5-4 Mac remote deployment preparation tasks
Prepare the Mac computers Before you deploy, perform the following tasks on the Mac computers:
on any supported operating
Click System Preferences > Sharing > Remote Login and either allow access
system
for all users, or only for specific users, such as Administrators.
If you use the Mac firewall, disable stealth mode. With stealth mode enabled, the
remote push installation cannot discover the client through Search Network.
To disable stealth mode on the Mac, see the following article that applies to your
version of the Mac operating system.
OS X Mavericks: Prevent others from discovering your Mac (10.9)
OS X Yosemite: Prevent others from discovering your Mac (10.10)
OS X El Capitan: Prevent others from discovering your Mac (10.11)
macOS Sierra: Prevent others from discovering your Mac (10.12)
Ensure that the firewall does not block the port that Secure Shell (SSH) uses. By
default, this port is TCP port 22. This port allows the required communication for
remote logon.
on page 110.
About the communication ports that Symantec Endpoint Protection

uses
If the computers that run Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and the Symantec
Endpoint Protection client also run third-party firewall software or hardware, you
must open certain ports. These ports are for remote deployment and for
communication between the management server and clients. See your firewall
product documentation for instructions to open ports or allow applications to use

ports.
By default, the firewall component of Symantec Endpoint Protection already allows
traffic on these ports.
Warning: The firewall in the Symantec Endpoint Protection client is disabled by

default at initial installation until the computer restarts. To ensure firewall protection,
leave the Windows firewall enabled on the clients until the software is installed and
the client is restarted. The Symantec Endpoint Protection client firewall automatically
disables the Windows firewall when the computer restarts.
Table 5-5 Ports for client and server installation and communication
Protocol and Used for Listening Description

port number process
TCP 139, 445 Push deployment from svchost.exe Initiated by Symantec Endpoint
Symantec Endpoint Protection Protection Manager (clientremote.exe)
UDP 137, 138
Manager to Windows Not configurable
computers
Also uses TCP ephemeral ports.
TCP 22 Push deployment from launchd Initiated by Symantec Endpoint

Symantec Endpoint Protection Protection Manager (clientremote.exe)
Manager to Mac computers Not configurable
TCP 2967 Group Update Provider (GUP) ccSvcHst.exe Initiated by Symantec Endpoint
web-caching proxy functionality Protection clients
Configurable
TCP 2638 Communication between the dbsrv16.exe Initiated by Symantec Endpoint

embedded database and Protection Manager
Symantec Endpoint Protection Configurable
Manager
TCP 1433 Communication between a sqlserver.exe Initiated by Symantec Endpoint

remote SQL Server database Protection Manager
and Symantec Endpoint Configurable
Protection Manager
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
management server also uses TCP
ephemeral ports.
(continued)

port number process
TCP 8443 Server communication SemSvc.exe Initiated by the Java-based remote

(HTTPS) console or web-based remote console,
or by replication partners
Configurable
All logon information and administrative

communication takes place using this
secure port.
TCP 9090 Web console communication SemSvc.exe Initiated by the remote Web console
Configurable
Also uses TCP ephemeral ports.
This port is used only for initial

communication between the remote
management console and Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. This initial
communication includes installation, and to
display the logon screen only.
TCP 8014 Communication between httpd.exe (Apache) Initiated by Symantec Endpoint

Symantec Endpoint Protection Protection clients
client and Symantec Endpoint Configurable
Protection Manager (HTTP)
Clients also use TCP ephemeral ports.
TCP 443 Communication between httpd.exe (Apache) Optional

Symantec Endpoint Protection Initiated by Symantec Endpoint
client and Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
Protection Manager (HTTPS) Configurable
Clients also use TCP ephemeral ports.
TCP 8445 Used by the remote reporting httpd.exe (Apache) Initiated by the reporting console
console Configurable
TCP 8446 Symantec Endpoint Protection semapisrv.exe Initiated by remote management

Manager web services applications
Configurable
(continued)

port number process
TCP 8447 Process launcher semlaunchsrv.exe Initiated by Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager (SemSvc.exe)
Configurable
Virtual service account launches those

processes that require higher privileges so
that other Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager services do not need to have them.
Only honors requests from localhost.
TCP 8765 Server control SemSvc.exe Initiated by Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager
Configurable
Used by Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager for Tomcat shutdown.
TCP 1100 Remote object registry SemSvc.exe Initiated by AjaxSwing

Not configurable
Tells Ajax Swing on which port to run RMI

Registry
Windows Vista and later contain a firewall that is enabled by default. If the firewall
is enabled, you might not be able to install or deploy the client software remotely.
If you have problems deploying the client to computers running these operating
systems, configure their firewalls to allow the required traffic.
If you decide to use the Windows firewall after deployment, you must configure
it to allow file and printer sharing (port 445).
For more information about configuring Windows firewall settings, see the Windows
documentation.
See Enabling and disabling a firewall policy on page 329.
About Windows client installation packages

Symantec Endpoint Protection 14 introduces new cloud-enabled options for Windows
client installation. The options replace legacy standard-size and reduced-size client
installation packages. The cloud-enabled options include a standard client and an
embedded/VDI client. Symantec Endpoint Protection also includes a dark network
installation for clients that are not connected to the cloud.
Standard client
Uses virus and spyware definitions in the cloud.
Installs only the latest virus and spyware definitions.
The standard client is approximately 80 percent to 90 percent smaller on disk
than dark network Windows clients because they download only the latest
definitions.
Handles AutoUpgrade with deltas rather than full installation.
Embedded or VDI client

Uses virus and spyware definitions in the cloud.
Installs only the latest virus and spyware definitions.
The client is approximately 80 percent to 90 percent smaller on disk than dark
network Windows clients because they download only the latest definitions
The embedded/VDI client includes more size optimizations than the standard
client:
The installer cache does not save after installation completes. This change
means you cannot remove or modify the installation through the Control
Panel unless you first copy the installation package to the client computer.
The embedded client employs NTFS compression on more folders than the
standard client.
Handles AutoUpgrade with full installation packages; cannot use deltas.

For any embedded clients that are not connected to the cloud, Symantec
recommends that you install and enable all protection technologies. These
protection technologies include the firewall, Download Insight, intrusion
prevention, and SONAR. Symantec also recommends that you use system
lockdown to ensure the highest level of security.
Choosing a method to install the client using the Client Deployment Wizard
Note: If you configure embedded images for Windows Embedded Standard 7 and
later with templates, all templates except for Minimum Configuration work well
with Symantec Endpoint Protection. The supported write filter is the File Based
Write Filter (FBWF) with the Registry Filter. If the write filter status is incompatible
with the installation, the Symantec Endpoint Protection installer alerts you to the
changes you need to make.
Symantec Endpoint Protection support for Windows Embedded

See Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows Embedded system
requirements on page 74.
Dark network client

Cannot use definitions in the cloud.
Installs the full set of virus and spyware definitions.
on page 115.
See Downloading content from LiveUpdate to the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Choosing a method to install the client using the

Client Deployment Wizard
After you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you install the Symantec
Endpoint Protection client with the Client Deployment Wizard.
Table 5-6 Client installation methods
Options Description
Save Package This installation option creates an executable installation

package that you save on the management server and then
distribute to the client computers. The users then install the
client software, so they must have local administrator rights
to their computers.
You can install Windows, Mac, and Linux clients using this
option.

Table 5-6 Client installation methods (continued)
Options Description
Remote Push Remote push installation pushes the client software to the
computers that you specify. The installation begins
automatically on the client computers. Remote push
installation does not require the user to have local
administrator rights to their computers.
You can install Windows and Mac clients using this option.
See Preparing Windows and Mac computers for remote

deployment on page 108.
Web Link and Email Users receive an email message that contains a link to
download and install the client software. The users then install
the client software, so they must have local administrator
rights to their computers.
You can install Windows, Mac, and Linux clients using this
option.
See Installing clients with Web Link and Email on page 61.
Before you run the Client Deployment Wizard, you review the installation options,
optionally customize them, and then select those options during installation.
Installation options include the protection technologies to install, the installation
destination folder, and the restart behavior after installation.

When you deploy the Windows client installation package with the Client Deployment
Wizard, you must choose the feature set. The feature set includes multiple protection
components that are installed on the client. You can select a default feature set or
customize the feature set. Decide which feature set to install based on the role of
the computers, and the level of security or performance that the computers need.
After installation, you can enable or disable some features within of the protection
components in the security policies. However, it is recommended to keep all
protections enabled.
Table 5-7 Client installation feature sets (Windows)
Feature set Description
Full Protection for Clients Recommended for workstations, desktop, and laptop
computers.
Includes all protection technologies. Appropriate for

laptops, workstations, and desktops. Includes the full
download protection and mail protocol protection.
Whenever possible, use Full Protection for maximum

security.
Full Protection for Servers Recommended for servers.
Includes all protection technologies except email scanner

protection. Appropriate for any servers that require
maximum network security, including the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager server.
Basic Protection for Servers Recommended for high-throughput servers.
Includes Virus and Spyware Protection and Basic

Download Protection. Since intrusion prevention may
cause performance issues on high-throughput servers,
this option is appropriate for any servers that require
maximum network performance.
The Mac client installation package installs Virus and Spyware Protection and
intrusion prevention. You cannot customize the features for the Mac client installation
package.
The Linux client installation package only installs Virus and Spyware Protection.
on page 29.
See About enabling and disabling protection when you need to troubleshoot
problems on page 239.
on page 115.

You might want to export a client install package if you need those options that are
not available when you use Save Package in the Client Deployment Wizard. For
example, you may only need 32-bit or 64-bit installation packages for Windows, or
only need DPKG or RPM installation packages for Linux. You also may need to create
an unmanaged client with custom policies.
Once you export the client install package, you deploy it. Remote Push in the Client
Deployment Wizard can deploy the Windows and Mac packages that you export.
Alternately, you can install an exported package directly on to the client, or use a
third-party program to deploy it.
You can create an installation package for managed clients or unmanaged clients.
Both types of packages have the features, policies, and settings that you assign.
If you create a package for managed clients, you can manage them with the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console. If you create a package for
unmanaged clients, you cannot manage them from the console. You can convert
an unmanaged Windows or Mac client to a managed client at any time with
Communication Update Package Deployment through the Client Deployment
Wizard.
Note: If you export client installation packages from a remote console, the packages
are created on the computer from which you run the remote console. Furthermore,
if you use multiple domains, you must export the packages for each domain, or the
clients do not appear in the correct domain groups.
To export client installation packages

1 In the console, click Admin, and then click Install Packages.
2 Under Install Packages, click Client Install Package.
3 In the Client Install Package pane, under Package Name, right-click the
package you want to export and then click Export.
4 Click Browse to navigate to and select the folder to contain the exported
package, and then click OK.
Note: Export Package does not support directories with double-byte or

high-ASCII characters, and blocks their selection.
5 Set the other options according to your installation goals. The options vary
depending on the type of installation package you export.
For details about the export options in this dialog box, click Help.
6 Click OK.
See Importing client installation packages into Symantec Endpoint Protection

The Client Deployment Wizard prompts you to specify the client installation settings
for Windows clients. The client installation settings define the options of the
installation process itself. You can define the target installation folder, whether to
disable installation logging, and the post-installation restart settings, among other
options.
You can choose the default client installation settings, or you can add a custom
Client Install Settings under Admin > Install Packages > Client Install Settings.
The contextual Help provides details about the settings that you can configure.
You should use silent installations for remote deployment to minimize user disruption.
When you use a silent deployment, you must restart the applications that plug into
Symantec Endpoint Protection, such as Microsoft Outlook and Lotus Notes.
If you use unattended installations (Show progress bar only), Windows may
display to users one or more pop-up windows. However, the installation should not
fail even if the user does not notice them.
You should not use an interactive installation for remote deployment. This installation
type fails unless the user interacts with it. Security features (such as Windows
Session 0 isolation) on some operating systems may cause the interactive installation
wizard to not appear. You should only use the interactive installation type for local
installations. These recommendations apply to both 32- and 64-bit operating
systems.
See Creating custom client installation settings on page 120.

on page 29.

You can create the custom client installation settings that you apply to a client
installation package and for AutoUpgrade.
For example, if you want to install the client to a custom installation folder, or reset
the client-server communication settings, you create custom client installation
settings. You then apply this custom setting when you export or deploy a package,
or set up AutoUpgrade.
To create a custom client install setting
1 In the console, click Admin > Install Packages > Client Install Settings.
2 Under Tasks, click Add Client Install Settings.
The default client install settings files cannot be modified.
3 Choose the operating system for which the setting file applies.
4 Enter a name and a description.
5 Make your selections from the available options on these tabs:
Windows: Basic Settings and Restart Settings
Mac: Restart Settings and Upgrade Settings
Note: Mac client restart and upgrade settings apply only to AutoUpgrade.
For detailed information on these options, click Help.

6 Click OK to save these settings.
When you run the Client Deployment Wizard or configure AutoUpgrade, select the
settings that you created from the drop-down menu next to Install Settings.
Configuring Windows client installation feature sets

Client installation feature sets define the client protection components that you
install on Windows computers. For example, if you create Symantec Endpoint
Protection packages you can select a feature set to only install Virus and Spyware
Protection and Network and Host Exploit Mitigation.
You can also create and name a custom feature set. You then select a default or
a custom client feature set when you export client software packages.
The Mac client installation package installs Virus and Spyware Protection, and
intrusion prevention. The Linux client installation package only installs Virus and
Spyware Protection. You cannot customize the features for the Mac or Linux client
installation package.
To configure a Windows client installation feature set
2 Under Install Packages, click Client Install Feature Set.
3 Under Tasks, click Add Client Install Feature Set.
4 In the Add Client Install Feature Set dialog box, in the Name box, type a
name.
5 In the Description box, type a description of the client installation feature set.
For details about setting other options in this dialog box, click Help.
6 Click OK.
on page 29.
Configuring client packages to uninstall existing

security software
You can configure and deploy new installation packages to uninstall existing security
software before the installation of the Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
Uninstalling existing security software allows the Symantec Endpoint Protection
client to run more efficiently. You can remove existing third-party security software
or an existing Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
You enable the security software removal feature by creating or modifying a custom
client installation settings configuration. You then select this custom configuration
during deployment.
You can use this feature to uninstall third-party security software. To see which
third-party software the client package removes, see: Third-party security software
removal support in Symantec Endpoint Protection. Some programs may have
special uninstallation routines, or may need to have a self-protection component

disabled. See the documentation for the third-party software.
You cannot remove third-party security software with Mac or Linux client packages.
You can remove third-party security software with Windows client packages as of
version 12.1.1 MP1. You must uninstall third-party security software before you
deploy the Symantec Endpoint Protection client package.
As of 14, you can also remove existing installations of Symantec Endpoint Protection
that you cannot uninstall through standard methods, such as Windows Control
Panel. This feature appears as a separate option in the client installation settings.
Only the packages you create using the following procedure can remove existing
security software.
To configure client packages to uninstall existing security software
1 In the console, on the Admin page, click Install Packages, and then click
Client Install Settings.
Note: If you have previously created a custom client installation settings

configuration, you can modify it under Tasks, and then click Edit Client Install
Settings. Modifying an existing custom configuration does not modify previously
exported install packages.
3 On the Basic Settings tab, click one of the following:

Automatically uninstall existing third-party security software
To see which third-party software the client package removes, see
Third-party security software removal in Endpoint Protection.
Remove existing Symantec Endpoint Protection client software that
cannot be uninstalled
See About the Symantec Endpoint Protection client preinstall removal
feature on page 123.
4 Read the information about the option you chose, and then click OK.
You can also modify other options for this configuration. Click Help for more
information about these options.
5 Click OK to save the configuration.
To deploy client packages to uninstall existing security software

2 In the Client Deployment Wizard, click New Package Deployment, and then
click Next.
You can use Existing Package Deployment to deploy install packages you
previously created. However, you must have exported these packages using
a custom client installation settings configuration like the one described in the
previous procedure.
3 In Select Group and Install Feature Set, select a Windows install package.
In the Install Settings drop-down list, select the custom client installation
settings configuration that you created or modified in the previous procedure.
Click Next.
4 Click the deployment method that you want to use, and then click Next to
proceed with and complete your chosen deployment method.
on page 115.
About the Symantec Endpoint Protection client preinstall removal

feature
As of 14, you can uninstall the existing client installation on the client computer
before the installation of Symantec Endpoint Protection begins. This feature is
comparable to the CleanWipe utility, so you should not enable it for all deployments.
Instead, you should only use this feature to remove corrupted or malfunctioning
installations of the Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
Before you use this feature, be aware of this important information:
This feature can remove all Symantec Endpoint Protection versions up to and
including the version of the installation package you create.
It also removes all versions of Symantec Network Access Control, and the
unsupported products Symantec Endpoint Protection 11.x, Symantec AntiVirus
10.x, and Symantec Client Security 3.x.
Although this feature removes versions earlier than 14, you cannot enable it
when you create an installation package for an earlier version. For example,
you cannot create a package for version 12.1.6 MP4 that enables this feature.
This feature cannot uninstall a version of Symantec Endpoint Protection that is

later than the installation package with which you include it. For example, you
cannot use this feature during a planned rollback.
If you deploy the wrong package type with this feature enabled, it does not
perform the removal. For example, if you deploy a 32-bit package to a 64-bit
computer, it cannot install. Therefore, it does not remove the existing Symantec
Endpoint Protection installation.
You cannot use this feature with an installation that uses the .MSI file directly,
such as through a GPO deployment.
This feature does not work with AutoUpgrade.
This feature does not remove Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
This option only removes Windows LiveUpdate if no other Symantec products
use it.
On the client computer, this feature runs silently, and does not display a status
screen or user interface.
This option forces the installation type to Show progress bar only if the client
installation settings otherwise define the installation type as Interactive.
The computer restarts automatically after the removal completes. You cannot
configure this restart to be postponed or skipped.
Restarting the client computers from Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager
You need to restart the Windows client computers after you install the client software.
By default, the Windows client computers restart automatically after installation,
though the user can delay it until a pre-scheduled time overnight. Before you export
or deploy the installation package, you can configure the Windows client installation
settings to customize the restart after installation. You can configure the restart
options on a group to control how the client computers restart after a risk remediation
or a new client download.
Mac client computers prompt for a restart after installation. If you push the client
package and no one is logged on to the Mac computer, a hard restart occurs
automatically when the installation completes. You cannot customize this setting.
Linux client computers do not require a restart and do not automatically restart after
installation.
You can also restart the Mac and Windows client computers at any time by running
a restart command from the management server. You cannot restart the Linux client
with a restart command from the management server. You have the option to
schedule the Windows client computers to restart during a time that is convenient
for users. You can force an immediate restart, or give the users an option to delay.
When you send a restart command to a Mac client computer, it always performs a
hard restart.
To configure risk remediation and new client download restart options on Windows
client computers
1 In the console, click Clients.
2 On the Clients page, select a group, and then click Policies.
3 On the Policies tab, click General Settings.
4 In the General Settings dialog box, on the Restart Settings tab, select the
restart method and schedule.
Some restart options apply only to Windows clients. For details, see the
context-sensitive Help.
You can also add a notification that appears on the client computer before the
restart occurs. The default message tells the user that a security risk
remediation or a new content download requires a restart.
5 Click OK.
To restart a selected client computer
1 In the console, click Clients
2 On the Clients page, on the Clients tab, select a group.
3 On the Clients tab, select a client, right-click Run command on computers,
and then click Restart Client Computers.
4 Click Yes, specify the restart options that you require, and then click OK.
To restart the client computers in a selected group
2 On the Clients page, on the Clients tab, select a group, click Run a command
on the group, and then click Restart Client Computers.
3 Click Yes, specify the restart options that you require, and then click OK.

See What are the commands that you can run on client computers? on page 241.

You can install the client software as a managed client or as an unmanaged client.
In most cases, you should install a managed client. You may want to install an
unmanaged client if you want the user to have more control over the computer,
such as a test computer. Make sure that the unmanaged client users have the
appropriate level of knowledge to configure any security settings that are different
from the default settings.
You can convert an unmanaged client to a managed client at a later time by replacing
the client-server communications file on the client computer.
Table 5-8 Differences between a managed and an unmanaged client
Type Description
Managed client You administer the clients from the console. Managed client
computers connect to your network. You use the console to
update the client software, security policies, and virus
definitions on the managed client computers.
In most cases, you install the client software as a managed

client.
You can install a managed client in one of the following ways:
During initial product installation

From the console after installation
Unmanaged client The primary computer user must administer the client
computer. An unmanaged client does not connect to
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and cannot be
administered from the console. In most cases, unmanaged
clients connect to your network intermittently or not at all.
The primary computer user must update the client software,
security policies, and virus definitions on the unmanaged
client computer.
See Downloading an unmanaged client installation package

on page 127.
See Installing an unmanaged Windows client on page 127.

See Why do I need to replace the client-server communications file on the client
computer? on page 164.
See How do I replace the client-server communications file on the client computer?
on page 165.
Downloading an unmanaged client installation package

You can get the unmanaged Symantec Endpoint Protection client installation
package in one of the following ways:
A standalone installer you download from FileConnect.
Download the latest version of Symantec Endpoint Protection
From within the installation file, whether you downloaded it from FileConnect,
or received a physical disc.
The folder SEP contains the unmanaged Windows client, SEP_MAC contains
the unmanaged Mac client, and SEP_LINUX contains the unmanaged Linux
client.
Exported an unmanaged client from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager,
with the default policies or with the policies from a group or groups
You cannot export an unmanaged Mac client with group policies.
You copy the client installer package to the client computer for installation. If the
file is a .zip file, you must extract all contents before you install.
See About managed and unmanaged clients on page 126.

You install an unmanaged Symantec Endpoint Protection client directly on to a
Windows computer. This type of installation usually requires user input. However,
you can export an unmanaged package through Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager with custom installation settings.
If you install a managed Windows client directly, only an Interactive installation
requires user input. In this situation, the steps to install are similar to those of the
unmanaged client. Show progress bar only or Silent installations do not require
user input.
To install an unmanaged Windows client

1 Copy the installation file or folder to the client computer, and then double-click
Setup.exe. Click Next.
If you purchased a physical disc and want to install an unmanaged client, insert
the disc. The installation should start automatically. If it does not start
automatically, double-click Setup.exe. Click Install an unmanaged client.
2 On the License Agreement Panel, click I accept the terms in the license
agreement, and then click Next.
3 The installer selects Unmanaged client by default. Click Next. If you click
Managed client, the installer advises you to install using a managed client
installation package, and then quits.
This panel appears when you install the client software for the first time on a
computer.
4 On the Setup Type panel, click one of the following options:
Click Typical for the most common options, and then click Next.
Click Custom to configure your installation, click Next, select the protection
types, and then click Next.
5 If the installation wizard prompts you, click Enable Auto-Protect and Run
LiveUpdate, and then click Next
6 On the File Reputation Data Submission panel, uncheck the box if you do
not want to provide anonymous file reputation data to Symantec, and then click
Next.
An unmanaged client does not submit reputation data without a paid license,
even if you leave the box checked.
See Licensing an unmanaged Windows client on page 103.
7 On the Ready to Install the Program panel, click Install.
8 On the Wizard Complete panel, click Finish.
See Installing the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac on page 55.
See Installing the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux on page 57.
See Downloading an unmanaged client installation package on page 127.
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client

for Windows
You can uninstall the Windows client in the following ways:
By using the Windows Control Panel to remove an application, typically
Programs and Features.
By configuring and deploying a custom client installation package that removes
the Symantec Endpoint Protection client (as of 14). Only use this method if
uninstalling with the Windows Control Panel does not work.
See About the Symantec Endpoint Protection client preinstall removal feature
on page 123.
For alternative methods to uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
and other components, see Uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection.
If the Symantec Endpoint Protection client software uses a policy that blocks
hardware devices, the policy blocks the devices after you uninstall the software. If
you do not disable the device control by policy before you uninstall, use the Windows
Device Manager to unblock the devices.
To uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows
1 In the console, on the Admin page, click Install Packages, and then click
Client Install Settings.
Note: If you have previously created a custom client installation settings

configuration, you can modify it under Tasks, and then click Edit Client Install
Settings. Modifying an existing custom configuration does not modify previously
exported install packages.
3 On the Basic Settings tab, check Remove existing Symantec Endpoint

Protection client software that cannot be uninstalled.
4 Read the message, and then click OK.
5 Click OK.
See Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac on page 130.
See Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux on page 130.
Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac

for Mac
You uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac through the client
icon on the menu bar. Uninstallation of the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for
Mac requires administrative user credentials.
Note: After you uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection client, you are prompted
to restart the client computer to complete the uninstallation. Make sure that you
save any unfinished work or close all open applications before you begin.
To uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac

1 On the Mac client computer, click the Symantec Endpoint Protection client icon
on the menu bar, and then click Uninstall.
2 Click Uninstall again to begin the uninstallation.
3 When you are prompted, authenticate with your Mac's administrative user
name and password.
4 Once the uninstallation completes, click Restart Now.
If the uninstallation fails, you may have to use an alternate method to uninstall. See:
Uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection.

for Linux
You uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux with the script that
the installation provides.
Note: You must have superuser privileges to uninstall the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client on the Linux computer. The procedure uses sudo to demonstrate
this elevation of privilege.
To uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux

1 On the Linux computer, open a terminal application window.
2 Navigate to the Symantec Endpoint Protection installation folder with the
following command:
cd /opt/Symantec/symantec_antivirus
The path is the default installation path.

3 Use the built-in script to uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection with the
following command:
sudo ./uninstall.sh
Enter your password if prompted.

This script initiates the uninstallation of the Symantec Endpoint Protection
components.
4 At the prompt, type Y and then press Enter.
Uninstallation completes when the command prompt returns.
Note: On some operating systems, if the only contents of the /opt folder are
the Symantec Endpoint Protection client files, the uninstaller script also deletes
/opt. To recreate this folder, enter the following command: sudo mkdir /opt
To uninstall using a package manager or software manager, see the documentation

specific to your Linux distribution.

To manage clients with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you must export
a managed client installation package, and then install the package files onto client
computers. You can deploy the client with either Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager or a third-party deployment tool.
Symantec occasionally provides updated packages of installation files, usually when
a new product version releases. You can automatically update the client software
on all managed Windows and Mac clients in a group with the AutoUpgrade feature.
You do not need to redeploy software with installation deployment tools.
Table 5-9 Client installation package-related tasks
Task Description
Configure client installation You can select specific client protection technologies to install and you can specify
packages how the installation interacts with end users.
Export client installation You can export packages for managed clients or unmanaged clients.
packages
You can export the packages as a single executable file or as a series of files in a
directory. The method that you choose depends on your deployment method and
whether you want to upgrade client software in groups. Typically, if you use Active
Directory Group Policy Object, you do not choose to export to a single executable file.
See Downloading an unmanaged client installation package on page 127.
Import client installation You can add updated client installation packages to the database to make them
package updates available for distribution from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. You can
optionally export the packages during this procedure to make the package available
for deployment to computers that do not have the client software.
See Importing client installation packages into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
on page 133.
Upgrade Windows and Mac You can install the exported packages to computers one at a time, or deploy the
clients in one or more groups exported files to multiple computers simultaneously.
When Symantec provides updates to client installation packages, you first add them
to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and make them available for exporting.
However, you do not have to reinstall them with client deployment tools. The easiest
way to update Windows and Mac clients with the latest software is to use AutoUpgrade.
You should first update a group with a small number of test computers.
See Upgrading client software with AutoUpgrade on page 150.
You can also update clients with LiveUpdate if you permit clients to run LiveUpdate
and if the LiveUpdate Settings policy permits updates.
Delete client installation You can delete older client installation packages to save disk space. However,
packages AutoUpgrade sometimes uses the older Windows client installation packages to build
upgrade packages. The upgrade packages result in smaller downloads by clients.

Importing client installation packages into Symantec

You may need to import a client installation package into Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager for the following reasons:
You want to add a newer version of a client installation package to an older
version of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, without upgrading to the
new version of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
You upgrade to a newer version of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
using a database that you have restored from a previous version. The database
includes older client installation packages, and you need to import the newer
packages.
Note: You can import an executable package such as .exe or .zip file packages
directly, but it is not recommended. The .info file contains the information that
describes the package and ensures proper migration to future builds of the Symantec
Endpoint Protection client through delta updates. On the other hand, the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager web console does not import the .info file format. In
the web console, you can only import or export packages in a single file, such as
in the .zip or .exe file format.
To import client installation packages into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

1 Copy the installation package that you import to a directory on the computer
that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
The client installation package consists of two files. One file is named
product_name.dat, and the other file is named product_name.info. These files
automatically import during the installation or upgrade of Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. You can also get the packages from the SEPM/Packages
folder of the installation file.
2 In the console, click Admin > Install Packages.
3 Under Tasks, click Add a Client Install Package.
4 In the Add a Client Install Package dialog box, type a name and a description
for the package.
5 Click Browse.
6 In the Select Folder dialog box, locate and select the product_name.info file
for the new package you copied in step 1, and then click Select.
7 When the Completed successfully prompt appears, click Close.
To export the installation files and make them available for deployment, click
Export this Package, and then complete this procedure.
After you successfully import the package, you can see a "Package is created"
event in the System > Administrative log. The event is described with text
similar to "Successfully imported the SEP 12.1 RU5 32-bit package by Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. This package is now available for deployment."
See Viewing logs on page 603.
Chapter 6
Upgrading Symantec
Endpoint Protection
Upgrading to a new release
Upgrade resources for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Increasing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager available disk space before

an upgrade
Upgrading a management server
Upgrading an environment that uses multiple embedded databases and

management servers
Stopping and starting the management server service
Disabling replication and restoring replication before and after an upgrade
Choosing which method to upgrade the client software
Upgrading client software with AutoUpgrade
Upgrading Group Update Providers

You can upgrade to the newest release of the product to take advantage of new
features. To install a new version of the software, you must perform certain tasks
to ensure a successful upgrade. You should also check the known issues that
appear in the release notes for any late-breaking information relating to upgrades.
Upgrading Symantec Endpoint Protection 136
This section is specific to upgrading the software in environments where a compatible

version of the product is already installed.
Before you upgrade, review the following information:
System requirements
New features in this version
What's new in all versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection
Compatible Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and Symantec Endpoint
Protection client upgrade paths
See on page 138.
Symantec recommends that you do not perform third-party installations simultaneous
to the upgrade of Symantec Endpoint Protection. The installation of any third-party
programs that make network- or system-level changes may cause undesirable
results when you upgrade Symantec Endpoint Protection. If possible, restart the
client computers before you upgrade Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Table 6-1 Process for upgrading Symantec Endpoint Protection
Task Description
Step 1: Back up the database Back up the database that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses
to ensure the integrity of your client information.
Step 2: Break the replication relationship If the management server you want to update replicates with other
(optional) management servers, break the replication relationship. If the second
management server, or replication partner, launches replication during the
upgrade, it may have unpredictable results.
Note: Breaking the relationship between the management servers is not
the same as removing the replication partner. You do not want to delete
the replication partner entirely.
See Disabling replication and restoring replication before and after an

upgrade on page 147.
Step 3: Stop the Symantec Endpoint You must stop the management server service before you install a newer
Protection Manager service version.
See Stopping and starting the management server service on page 145.
Table 6-1 Process for upgrading Symantec Endpoint Protection (continued)
Task Description
Step 4: Upgrade the Symantec Endpoint Install the new version of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on all
Protection Manager software sites in your network. The existing version is detected automatically, and
all settings are saved during the upgrade.
See Upgrading a management server on page 143.
Step 5: Restore the replication relationship If the management server you updated replicates with other management
after upgrade (optional) servers, restore the replication relationship.

Step 6: Upgrade Symantec client software Prepare then upgrade your client software to the latest version. If you use
Group Update Providers, they must be upgraded first.
See Choosing which method to upgrade the client software on page 148.
See Upgrading Group Update Providers on page 153.
When Symantec provides updates to client installation packages, you add

the updates to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and make them
available for exporting. You do not, however, have to reinstall the client
with client deployment tools. The easiest way to update Windows and Mac
clients in groups with the latest software is to use AutoUpgrade. You should
first update a group with a small number of test computers before you
update your entire production network.
See Logging on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console on page 48.

Table 6-2 Upgrade resources
Item Resource
Client installation package settings You can configure client installation packages with a variety of settings and
and features protection features.
See The types of security policies on page 305.
See Client protection features based on platform on page 751.
Feature and policy descriptions See How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses layers to protect computers
on page 29.
Feature dependencies See Feature dependencies on Windows clients on page 748.
Manage product licenses Symantec Endpoint Protection is licensed according to the number of clients that
are needed to protect the computers at your site.
See About product upgrades and licenses on page 97.
Additional resources See the following articles:
Best practices for upgrading to the latest version of Symantec Endpoint

Protection
Download the latest version of Symantec Endpoint Protection
Release notes, new fixes, and system requirements for all versions of Endpoint
Protection
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and Windows client

The following versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and Symantec
Endpoint Protection Windows client can upgrade directly to 14:
11.x and Small Business Edition 12.0 (Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
only, for supported operating systems)
For details, see: Supported upgrade and migration paths to Symantec Endpoint
Protection
12.1.671.4971 (RTM)
12.1.1000.157 - Release Update 1 (RU1)
12.1.1101.401 - Release Update 1, Maintenance Patch 1 (RU1 MP1)

12.1.4023.4080 - Release Update 4a (RU4a)
12.1.4104.4130 - Release Update 4, Maintenance Patch 1a (RU4 MP1a)
12.1.4112.4156 - Release Update 4, Maintenance Patch 1b (RU4 MP1b)
12.1.6318.6100 - Release Update 6, Maintenance Patch 1a (RU6 MP1a)
12.1.7061.6600 -Release Update 6, Maintenance Patch 6 (RU6 MP6)
Note: Symantec Endpoint Protection no longer ships with Small Business Edition,
which reached end of life (EOL) in May 2015. Small Business Edition 12.1.x
customers can upgrade to Symantec Endpoint Protection, or they can use a tool
to migrate to the cloud-based Symantec Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition.
See Migrating to Symantec Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition.
Mac client
The following versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac can upgrade
directly to 14:

Note: The Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac was not updated for 12.1.3,
12.1.6 MP1 / MP1a, 12.1.6 MP3, and 12.1.6 MP5.
Linux client
The following versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux can upgrade
directly to 14:
Symantec AntiVirus for Linux 1.0.14 is the only version that you can migrate directly
to Symantec Endpoint Protection. You must first uninstall all other versions of
Symantec AntiVirus for Linux. You cannot migrate a managed client to an
unmanaged client.
Unsupported upgrade paths

You cannot migrate to Symantec Endpoint Protection from all Symantec products.
You must uninstall the following products before you install the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client:
The unsupported Symantec products Symantec AntiVirus and Symantec Client
Security
All Symantec Norton products
Symantec Endpoint Protection for Windows XP Embedded 5.1
Versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection for Mac earlier than 12.1.4
You cannot upgrade Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager 11.0.x or Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager Small Business Edition 12.0.x directly to Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager 14. You must first uninstall these versions, or perform
an upgrade to 12.1.x before an upgrade to 14.
Increasing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager available disk space before an upgrade
Downgrade paths are not supported. For example, if you want to migrate from
Symantec Endpoint Protection 14 to 12.1.6 MP7, you must first uninstall Symantec
Endpoint Protection 14.
Increasing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

available disk space before an upgrade
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager installation requires a minimum amount
of available disk space. Make sure that any current servers or new hardware meet
the minimum hardware requirements. However, additional available disk space
may be needed during an upgrade to allow for the creation of temporary files.
Make a backup of the database before making configuration changes.
Increasing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager available disk space before an upgrade
Table 6-3 Tasks to increase disk space on the management server
Task Description
Change the LiveUpdate settings 1 Go to Admin > Servers and right-click Local Site. Select Edit Site
to reduce space requirements Properties.
2 On the LiveUpdate tab, uncheck Store client packages unzipped to provide

better network performance for upgrades.
Note: This option was removed in version 12.1.5 because content storage
on the management server is improved. You should still set it appropriately
for an upgrade from a version earlier than 12.1.5, however.
3 On the LiveUpdate tab, reduce the number of content revisions to keep. For
an upgrade, you can lower the setting to 10. Allow time for Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager to purge the extra revisions. However, for versions later
than 12.1.5, the reduction of revision numbers may trigger full update
downloads from the clients that check in. An increase in these full update
requests may negatively affect network performance.
Note: The default values and recommended values for content storage have
also changed as of version 12.1.5. To upgrade, however, you need to work
with the values that are appropriate for the version from which you upgrade.
Returning the revision setting to its previous value after the upgrade completes
is not necessary. Improvements to the way Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager stores and manages content means that a larger number of revisions
takes up less disk space than in earlier versions.
Make sure that unused virus 1 Go to Admin > Servers, right-click the database server, and then select Edit
definitions are deleted from the Database Properties.
For the embedded database, right-click localhost. For a Microsoft SQL Server
Manager database
database, the database server name varies based on the location of your
database.
2 On the Log Settings tab, under Risk Log Settings, make sure that Delete
unused virus definitions is checked.
Table 6-3 Tasks to increase disk space on the management server (continued)
Task Description
Relocate or remove co-existing If other programs are installed on the same computer with Symantec Endpoint
programs and files Protection Manager, consider relocating them to another server. You can remove
unused programs.
If storage-intensive programs are installed on the same computer with Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager, consider dedicating a computer to support only
Remove temporary Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager files.
For a list of temporary files that you can remove, see the article, Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager directories contain many .TMP folders consuming
large amounts of disk space.
Note: Defragment the hard drive after removing programs and files.
Use an external database If the Symantec Endpoint Protection database resides on the same computer with
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, consider installing a Microsoft SQL Server
database on another computer. Significant disk space is saved and in most cases,
performance is improved.
Note: Make sure that the client computers also have enough disk space before an
upgrade. Check the system requirements and as needed, remove unnecessary
programs and files, and then defragment the client computer hard drive.
Low Disk Space issues encountered on systems running either the Symantec
Endpoint Protection client or the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Low disk space on a Symantec Endpoint Protection client

You must upgrade all management servers before you upgrade any clients.
If you upgrade management servers in an environment that supports load balancing,
failover, or replication, you must prepare and upgrade them in a specific order.
Warning: You must follow the scenario that applies to your type of installation, or
your upgrade can fail.
Table 6-4 Upgrade tasks
Task Description
Upgrade the management server Review the system requirements and supported upgrade paths, upgrade the
management server, and then configure it with the Management Server
Configuration Wizard.
As of 14, the following applies to a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

upgrade:
Windows Server 2003, all desktop operating systems, and 32-bit operating
systems are no longer supported.
SQL Server 2005 is no longer supported for the database. Support is also
dropped for SQL Server 2008 earlier than SP4, and SQL Server 2008 R2
earlier than SP3.
You must now enter SQL Server system administrator credentials during the
upgrade.
Note: You may need to edit the domain security policies to allow the virtual
service accounts to run correctly for Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 or later.
See:
How to assign user rights to the Windows Security Policies for Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager services
See on page 138.
See Upgrading an environment that uses multiple embedded databases and

management servers on page 145.
Log onto the management server When the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon panel appears, you
can log on to the console by using your logon credentials.

on page 48.
Note: You are not required to restart the computer after the upgrade, but you may
notice performance improvements if you restart the computer and log on.

Upgrading an environment that uses multiple embedded databases and management servers
Upgrading an environment that uses multiple

embedded databases and management servers
Upgrading an environment that uses multiple embedded database and management
servers has the following implications:
The management servers do not use failover or load balancing for Symantec
Endpoint Protection because the embedded database does not support failover
or load balanced servers.
The management servers are Symantec Endpoint Protection replication partners.
All sites have a computer on which you first installed the management server. You
must upgrade this management server first, because it contains critical site
information such as the encryption key or encryption password. You then upgrade
the other management servers that you installed for replication.
To upgrade an environment that uses multiple embedded databases and
management servers
1 Authenticate to and log on to the computer on which you installed the first
Do not log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. If you use replication,
you do not need to disable it first. Symantec Endpoint Protection does not allow
replication if the product versions do not match.
2 Upgrade the management server.
3 Upgrade all additional management servers one by one.

Before you upgrade, you must manually stop the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager service on every management server in your site. After you upgrade, the
service starts automatically.
Warning: If you do not stop the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager service
before you upgrade the server, you risk corrupting your existing Symantec Endpoint
Protection database.
Note: If you stop the management server service, the clients can no longer connect
to it. If clients are required to communicate with the management server to connect
to the network, they are denied access until this service is restarted.
For example, a client must communicate with the management server to pass a
Host Integrity check.

To stop the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager service
1 Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
2 In the Services window, under Name, scroll to and right-click Symantec
3 Click Stop.
4 Close the Services window.
Warning: Close the Services window or your upgrade can fail.
5 Repeat this procedure for all installations of Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager.
Note: To start the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager service, follow this
procedure again, but click Start instead of Stop.
To stop the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager service using the command
line
From a command prompt, type:
net stop semsrv
To start the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager service using the command
line
net start semsrv

Disabling replication and restoring replication before and after an upgrade
Disabling replication and restoring replication before

and after an upgrade
Before you upgrade the management server, you should temporarily disconnect
the partnership with all management servers that are configured as replication
partners. If a replication partner launches replication during the upgrade, it may
have unpredictable results.
Warning: Disabling replication is not the same as permanently deleting the replication
partnership. If you delete the relationship and then reinstall the management server,
the management servers perform a full replication instead of an incremental
replication. See Deleting sites on page 703.
Disabling replication
You must log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and disable replication
at a minimum of two sites.
To disable replication
1 In the console, click Admin > Servers.
2 Under Local Site > Servers, expand Replication Partners and select the
management server.
3 Right-click the management server, and then click Delete Replication Partner.
4 Click Yes.
5 Repeat this procedure at all sites that replicate data.
Restoring a replication partner when a site has already been

replicated
After you upgrade all management servers that had a replication relationship, you
add the replication partner back. You must also re-add the management servers
that were configured for failover and load balancing.
You only re-add replication partners on the computer on which you first upgraded
the management server. The upgraded management server must also have
previously been a replication partner in the same site farm.
After you add the replication partner back, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
makes the databases consistent. However, some changes may collide.
See How to resolve data conflicts between sites during replication on page 695.
If you have two separate, non-replicating sites, you can also use this option to
convert one of the sites into a site which replicates with the other site.
To restore replication after an upgrade

1 On the console, click Admin > Servers.
2 Under Servers, expand Local Site, and under Tasks, click Add Existing
Replication Partner.
3 In the welcome panel, click Next.
4 In the Remote Site Information panel, type the IP address or host name for
the second management server, the system administrator's logon information,
The system administrator's user name is admin by default.
5 Set the replication schedule and click Next.
6 Check which items to replicate, and then click Next.
Client package replication uses large amounts of traffic and hard disk space.
If you click Yes, the management server performs a full replication of data
between the two replication partners.
7 When a message appears asking whether or not you have restored the
database on the partner site, click one of the following options:
Click No to replicate only the data that changed since this partner
relationship was disabled. Symantec recommends this option, especially
if your network has low bandwidth.
Click Yes to perform a full replication of data between the two replication
partners.
8 Click Finish.
9 Repeat this procedure for all computers that replicate data with this computer.
See How to install a second site for replication on page 700.
Best practices for upgrading to the latest version of Endpoint Protection
Choosing which method to upgrade the client

software
You can upgrade the client using multiple ways. The method you should use
depends on your environment and goals. For example, you might have a large
number of clients or groups, or computers that run different versions of the client.
Some methods can take up to 30 minutes. Therefore, you may want to upgrade
client software when most users are not logged on to their computers.
Table 6-5 Methods to upgrade the client software
Method When to use When not to use
AutoUpgrade When you have a smaller number of clients, When you have a larger number
(Recommended for such as 5,000 clients or fewer. of clients. This method does not
smaller environments) When you need to schedule the upgrade to scale well.
occur when the upgrade does not interrupt the When you have a lot of groups,
users' work. because it is time-consuming to
When you use Symantec Endpoint Protection click each group individually in the
Manager and not a third-party application to wizard.
deploy the client installation package. When you have a complicated
When you need to upgrade either Windows or upgrade schedule where you need
Mac clients, but not Linux clients. a lot of granularity.
When you want a simple upgrade method. When you need to upgrade Linux
clients.
See Upgrading client software with AutoUpgrade
How to deploy the Symantec
on page 150.
Endpoint Protection Linux client as
part of a cloned drive image
Export a client installation When you deploy the client installation package When you normally use Symantec
package (Recommended manually instead of with Symantec Endpoint Endpoint Protection Manager to
for larger environments) Protection Manager. update the clients.
When you deploy the client installation package
with an existing third-party deployment
application instead of with Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. To use this method, you
should have this infrastructure already in place.
When you need to upgrade Windows clients,
Mac clients, and Linux clients.
See Exporting client installation packages

on page 118.
See Installing Windows client software using

third-party tools on page 768.
Table 6-5 Methods to upgrade the client software (continued)
Method When to use When not to use
Client Deployment Wizard When you have a smaller number of clients, When you have a large network
such as fewer than 250 clients. environment, as this method does
When you deploy the client using Symantec not scale well.
Endpoint Protection Manager and not a
third-party application.
When you want a simpler upgrade method.
Use the New Package Deployment.
See Installing clients with Remote Push

on page 59.
Download client When you want to upgrade a few clients at a If you upgrade the client on computers
installation files from time in a few specific cases. For example: with existing managed clients, the
FileConnect If an issue occurs on a few computers with clients stay managed. However, if you
an older version of the client, and the newer deploy to new computers without an
version fixes the issue. existing client, this method installs an
If you have a smaller number of clients to unmanaged client only. You must
upgrade and do not want to upgrade the convert the client to a managed client
management server. later to connect to the management
When you need to upgrade Windows, Mac, and server.
Linux clients. See How do I replace the
When you must deploy the client directly on client-server communications file on
the computer or by using a third-party the client computer? on page 165.
deployment application instead of Symantec
See Exporting the client-server
communications file (Sylink.xml)
You download the standalone All Clients manually on page 168.
installation file from: FileConnect
A guide to Endpoint Protection files on FileConnect
See Installing an unmanaged Windows client

on page 127.

AutoUpgrade lets you automatically upgrade the Symantec Endpoint Protection
client software on all of the Windows or Mac clients in a group.
With AutoUpgrade, Windows standard clients receive a delta upgrade package that
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager creates. This package is smaller than the
full installation package. Windows embedded or VDI clients always receive the full
installation package. These clients do not maintain a copy of the installer in the
installer cache. Mac clients always receive the full installation package.
Use the following best practices for using AutoUpgrade:
Test the AutoUpgrade process before you attempt to upgrade a large number
of clients in your production network. If you do not have a test network, you can
create a test group within your production network. For this kind of test, you add
a few non-critical clients to the test group and then upgrade them by using
AutoUpgrade.
To reduce bandwidth during peak hours, schedule AutoUpgrade for after hours
in the Upgrade Clients with Package wizard, especially for client groups with
reduced-size clients. For wide area networks, you should also set up the remote
clients to receive the upgrade package from a remote web server.
Since AutoUpgrade was first included in the Mac client with Symantec Endpoint
Protection 14, you cannot upgrade with AutoUpgrade from a version earlier than
14.
To upgrade client software with AutoUpgrade
1 In the console, click Admin > Install Packages.
2 Under Tasks, click Upgrade Clients with Package.
3 In the Upgrade Clients Wizard panel, click Next, select the appropriate client
installation package, and then click Next.
4 Select the group or groups that contain the client computers that you want to
upgrade, and then click Next.
5 Select from where the client should download the package from the following
options:
To download from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server, click
Download from the management server.
To download from a web server that is local to the computers that need to
update, click Download from the following URL (http or https). Enter
the URL of the client installation package into the provided field.
6 Click Upgrade Settings to specify upgrade options.

7 On the General tab, under Client Settings, choose from the following options,
depending on the client operating system:
For Windows, use the drop-down menus to select options for Maintain
existing client features when updating and Install Settings.
Note: If you deselect Maintain existing client features when updating,

you can optionally add or remove features when upgrading.
For Mac, use the drop-down menu to select options for Install Settings.
For either Windows or Mac, Content Selection lets you include content in
the installation package. If you include content, the package is larger, but
the client has up-to-date content immediately after installation. If you do
not include content, the package is smaller, but the client must get content
updates after installation.
You can also add an optional upgrade schedule. Without a schedule, the
AutoUpgrade process begins after the wizard completes.
8 On the Notification tab, customize the user notification settings.
You can customize the message that is displayed on the client computer during
the upgrade. You can also allow the user to postpone the upgrade.
9 Click OK, and then click Next.
10 In the Upgrade Clients Wizard Complete panel, click Finish.
To confirm the version number of the client software
After the upgrade completes, you can check the version to confirm a successful
upgrade in one of the following ways:
In the console, click Clients > Clients, select the appropriate group, and
change the view to Client Status.
On the Windows client, in the Symantec Endpoint Protection client interface,
click Help > About.
On the Mac client, open the Symantec Endpoint Protection client interface.
In the menu bar, click Symantec Endpoint Protection > About Symantec
The client computer must restart after the upgrade. By default, the clients restart
after installation. You can configure the restart options in the group's general settings
to control how the clients in a group restart after AutoUpgrade. You can also restart
the clients at any time by running a restart command from the management server.
on page 124.
See Applying upgrade settings to other groups on page 153.
Applying upgrade settings to other groups

You can copy existing AutoUpgrade client installation package upgrade settings
from one group to another group. If you copy upgrade settings, you don't have to
create the package settings for each group individually.
This option copies the following client install package settings:
The client feature set
Whether Maintain existing client features when updating is enabled or
disabled
The client installation settings
The content selection
The download source
The upgrade schedule
The settings and message text from the Notifications tab
The Windows settings apply to Windows clients and the Mac settings apply to Mac
clients during AutoUpgrade. They also apply to any new client that joins the group.
If you apply the copied settings to a package that is already assigned to a target
group, the copied settings override the target group's existing settings. If the target
group has no assigned package, this option adds a client install package with the
copied settings.
To apply upgrade settings to other groups
1 In the console, do one of the following tasks:
Click Clients > Install Packages, select the group, and under Tasks, click
Apply current deployment settings to other groups.
Click Clients, right-click a group, and then click Copy Deployment
Settings.
2 In the Copy Deployment Settings dialog box, click the new groups, click OK,
and then click Yes.

Use this procedure to upgrade the clients that are Group Update Providers.
To upgrade Group Update Provider clients

1 Upgrade the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server to the new version
of the software.
2 Upgrade the clients that are Group Update Providers to the new version of the
client software.
3 Update the rest of the clients to the new version of the client software.
Section 2
Managing client-server
communication and updating
content
Chapter 7. Managing client-server communication
Chapter 8. Updating content on the clients

Chapter 7
Managing client-server
communication
Managing the client-server connection
Checking whether the client is connected to the management server and is

protected
Symantec Endpoint Protection client status icons
How the client computer and the management server communicate
Configuring push mode or pull mode to update client policies and content
Using the policy serial number to check client-server communication
Why do I need to replace the client-server communications file on the client

computer?
How do I replace the client-server communications file on the client computer?
Restoring client-server communications with Communication Update Package

Deployment
Exporting the client-server communications file (Sylink.xml) manually
Importing client-server communication settings into the Windows client
Importing client-server communication settings into the Linux client

Managing client-server communication 157

After you install the client, the management server automatically connects to the
client computer.
Table 7-1 Tasks to manage connections between the management server and
the clients
Action Description
Check whether the client is You can check the client status icon in the client and in the management console.
connected to the management The status icon shows whether the client and the server communicate.
server
A computer may have the client software installed, but does not have the correct
communications file.
on page 165.
Check that the client gets policy Check that the client computers get the most current policy updates by checking
updates the policy serial number in the client and in the management console. The policy
serial number should match if the client can communicate with the server and
receives regular policy updates.
You can perform a manual policy update and then check the policy serial numbers
against each other.

on page 163.
Change which method you use to You can configure the management server to push down policies to the client or
download policies and content to for the clients to pull the policies from the management server.
the clients
on page 162.
Decide whether to use the default You can work with an alternative list of management servers for failover and load
management server list balancing. The management server list provides a list of multiple management
servers that clients can connect to.
See Configuring a management server list for load balancing on page 688.
Configure communication settings You can configure separate communication settings for locations and for groups.
for a location
See Configuring communication settings for a location on page 266.
Checking whether the client is connected to the management server and is protected
Table 7-1 Tasks to manage connections between the management server and
the clients (continued)
Action Description
Troubleshoot management server If the management server and the client do not connect, you can troubleshoot
connectivity problems connection problems.

For more information on the ports that Symantec Endpoint Protection uses, see
the following article: Which Communications Ports does Symantec Endpoint
Protection use?
Checking whether the client is connected to the

management server and is protected
After you install the client, check whether the clients are online and connected to
the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. You can check the connection status
on both the console and on the client.
To check the client-management server connection on the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client
On the client computer, do one of the following tasks:
The client shield in the computer's taskbar has a green dot.
Open the client and look on the Status screen, which states that Your
computer is protected and displays a green check mark.
Open the client and click Help > Troubleshooting.

Checking whether the client is connected to the management server and is protected
To check the client-management server connection in Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager
1 In the console, click Clients and select the target group.
2 On the Clients tab, clients that are connected display an icon with a green dot
in the Name column and display a health state of Online.
Version 14 Version 12.1.x
Table 7-2 displays what the following icons in the Name column mean.
Table 7-2 Client status icons in the management console
14 12.1.x Description
The client software installation failed.
The client can communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. The
health state is Online.
The client is in computer mode.
The client cannot communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.

The health state is Offline.
The client may have been added from the console, and may not have any
Symantec client software installed.
The client can communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.

The client is an unmanaged detector.

The client can communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.

The client is in user mode.

The client may have been added from the console, and may not have any
Symantec client software installed.
Table 7-2 Client status icons in the management console (continued)
14 12.1.x Description
The client can communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager at

another site.

another site.

another site.

You can check the notification area icon on the client to determine whether the
client is connected to a management server and adequately protected. The
notification area icon is sometimes referred to as the system tray icon.
The icon is located in the lower-right hand corner of the client computer desktop.
You can also right-click this icon to display frequently used commands.
Table 7-3 Client status icons
Icon Description
The client runs with no problems. It is either offline or unmanaged. Unmanaged

clients are not connected to a management server.
The client runs with no problems. It is connected to and communicates with the
server. All components of the security policy protect the computer.
The client has a minor problem. For example, the virus definitions may be out of
date.
The client does not run, has a major problem, has an expired license, or has at
least one protection technology disabled. For example, Network Threat Protection
may be disabled.
How the client computer and the management server communicate
You can also check the management server to view the connection status of the
computers.
See Managing the client-server connection on page 157.
How the client computer and the management server

communicate
When you configure policies on the management server, you need to have the
updated policies downloaded to the client computers. In the console, you can
configure client computers to use either of the following update methods:
Pull mode The client computer connects to the management server periodically,
depending on the frequency of the heartbeat setting. The client computer
checks the status of the management server when the client connects.
Push mode The client computer establishes a constant HTTP connection to the
management server. Whenever a change occurs in the management
server status, it notifies the client computer immediately.
In either mode, the client computer takes the corresponding action, based on the
change in the status of the management server. Because it requires a constant
connection, push mode requires a large amount of network bandwidth. Client
computers that are configured to use pull mode require less bandwidth.
on page 162.
The heartbeat protocol defines the frequency at which client computers upload data
such as log entries and download policies. The first heartbeat occurs immediately
after the client starts. The next heartbeat occurs at the heartbeat frequency that
you set.
The heartbeat frequency is a key factor in the number of clients that each Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager can support. If you set a heartbeat frequency to 30
minutes or less, it limits the total number of clients that Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager can support. For deployments of 1,000 clients or more, Symantec
recommends that you set the heartbeat frequency to the maximum length of time
possible. Symantec recommends that you use the longest interval that still meets
your companys security requirements. For example, if you want to update policies
and gather logs on a daily basis, then you might set the heartbeat frequency to 24
Configuring push mode or pull mode to update client policies and content
hours. Consult Symantec Professional Services and Symantec Enterprise Support

to assess the proper configuration, hardware, and network architecture necessary
for your network environment.
Note: You can also update polices manually on a client computer.

on page 163.
Configuring push mode or pull mode to update client

policies and content
You can specify whether Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager pushes the policy
down to the clients or that the clients pull the policy from Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. The default setting is push mode. If you select pull mode, then
by default, clients connect to the management server every 5 minutes, but you can
change this default heartbeat interval.
See How the client computer and the management server communicate
on page 161.
See Performing the tasks that are common to all policies on page 302.
You can set the mode for a group or for a location.
Note: Windows XP supports a limited number of concurrent users if the clients are
in push mode. It is a best practice to use pull mode when you deploy policies to up
to 100 clients.
To configure push mode or pull mode for a group

2 Under Clients, select the group for which you want to specify whether to push
or pull policies.
3 Click Policies.
4 Uncheck Inherit policies and setting from the parent group "group name".
5 Under Location-independent Policies and Settings pane, under Settings,
click Communications Settings.
6 In the Communications Settings for group name dialog box, under
Download, verify that Download policies and content from the management
server is checked.
Using the policy serial number to check client-server communication
7 Do one of the following tasks:

Click Push mode.
Click Pull mode and under Heartbeat Interval, set the number of minutes
or hours.
8 Click OK.
To specify push mode or pull mode for a location
2 Under Clients, select the group for which you want to specify whether to push
or pull policies.
3 Click Policies.
4 Uncheck Inherit policies and setting from the parent group "group name".
5 Under Location-specific Policies and Settings, under Location-specific
Policies for the location you want to modify, expand Location-specific
Settings.
6 Under Location-specific Settings, to the right of Communications Settings,
click Tasks and uncheck Use Group Communications Settings.
7 To the right of Communications Settings, click Local - Push or (Local - Pull).
Click Push mode.
Click Pull mode and under Heartbeat Interval, set the number of minutes
or hours.
9 Click OK.
Using the policy serial number to check client-server

communication
To check whether the server and client communicate, check the policy serial number
on the console and on the client. If the client communicates with the management
server and receives regular policy updates, the serial numbers should match.
If the policy serial numbers do not match, you can try to manually update the policies
on the client computer and check the troubleshooting logs.
Why do I need to replace the client-server communications file on the client computer?
on page 161.
To view the policy serial number in the console
2 Under Clients, select the relevant group.
The policy serial number and policy date appear in the upper right corner of
the program window.
Note: The policy serial number and the policy date also appear at the bottom
of the details list on the Details tab.
To view the policy serial number on the client computer

On the client computer, in the client, click Help > Troubleshooting.
On the Management tab, look at the policy serial number.
The serial number should match the serial number on the console for the group
that the client computer is in.
Why do I need to replace the client-server

communications file on the client computer?
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager connects to the client with a communications
file called Sylink.xml. The Sylink.xml file includes the communication settings such
as the IP address of the management server and the heartbeat interval. After you
install a client installation package on to the client computers, the client and the
server automatically communicate.
Normally you do not need to replace the Sylink.xml file. However, you may need
to replace the existing Sylink.xml file on the client computer in the following
situations:
The client and the server do not communicate. If the clients have lost the
communication with the management server, you must replace the old Sylink.xml
file with a new file.
See Checking the connection to the management server on the client computer
on page 719.
You want to convert an unmanaged client to a managed client. If a user installs

a client from the installation file, the client is unmanaged and does not
communicate with the management server. You can also reinstall the client
software on the computer as a managed computer.
You want to manage a previously orphaned client. For example, if the hard drive
that the management server is installed on gets corrupted, you must reinstall
the management server. You can update the Sylink.xml file to re-establish
communication with all your orphaned clients.
See Enabling or disabling secure communications between the management
server and the client on page 661.
See Exporting the client-server communications file (Sylink.xml) manually
on page 168.
You want to move a large number of clients from multiple groups to a single
group. For example, you might want to move the client computers in a remote
group and a laptop group to a test group. Typically, you need to move the client
computers one group at a time.
See Moving a client computer to another group on page 231.
on page 165.
How do I replace the client-server communications

file on the client computer?
If you need to replace the client-server communications file (Sylink.xml) on the client
computer, you can use the following methods:
Create a new client installation package and deploy it on the client computers.
Use this method if manually importing the Sylink.xml on large environment is
physically not possible and requires administrative access.
See Restoring client-server communications with Communication Update
Package Deployment on page 167.
Write a script that runs the SylinkDrop tool, which is located in the \Tools folder
of the installation file. Symantec recommends this method for a large number
of clients. You should also use the SylinkDrop tool if you use a software
management tool to download the client software to computers. The advantage
of the software management tool is that it downloads the Sylink.xml file as soon
as the end user turns on the client computer. In comparison, the client installation
package downloads the new Sylink.xml file only after the client computer
connects to the management server.
See Restoring client-server communication settings by using the SylinkDrop
tool on page 724.
Export the Sylink.xml file to the client computer and import it on the client
computer manually. Symantec recommends this method if you want to use a
software management tool. With a software management tool, the job is queued
up and completed whenever the users turn on their computer. With the other
methods, the client computer must be online.
Table 7-4 displays the process for exporting and importing the Sylink.xml file
into the client computer.
Table 7-4 Steps for exporting and importing the communications file
Step Description
Step 1: Export a file that includes all the The default file name is group name_sylink.xml.
communication settings for the group
that you want the client to be in.
on page 168.
Step 2: Deploy the file to the client You can either save the file to a network location or send it to an individual
computer. user on the client computer.
Step 3: Import the file on the client Either you or the user can import the file on the client computer.
computer.
See Importing client-server communication settings into the Windows client
on page 169.
Unmanaged clients are not password-protected, so you do not need a

password on the client. However, if you try to import a file into a managed
client that is password-protected, then you must enter a password. The
password is the same one that is used to import or export a policy.
See Password-protecting the client on page 253.
You do not need to restart the client computer.
Step 4: Verify client and server The client immediately connects to the management server. The management
communication on the client. server places the client in the group that is specified in the communication
file. The client is updated with the group's policies and settings. After the
client and the management server communicate, the notification area icon
with the green dot appears in the client computer's taskbar.
See Checking whether the client is connected to the management server

and is protected on page 158.
See Client and server communication files on page 729.

Restoring client-server communications with Communication Update Package Deployment
Restoring client-server communications with

Communication Update Package Deployment
If the client-server communications break, you can quickly restore communications
by replacing the Sylink.xml file on the client computer. You can replace the Sylink.xml
file by deploying a communication update package. Use this method for a large
number of computers, for the computers that you cannot physically access easily,
or the computers that require administrative access.
To restore client-server communication settings with Communication Update
Package Deployment
2 In the Client Deployment Wizard, under Communication Update Package
Deployment, select whether you want a package for Windows or Mac clients,
3 Select the group on which you want to apply the policy, and then click Next.
For Windows clients only, you can set password protection.
4 Choose one of the following deployment methods, and then click Next:
Click Remote Push and go to the Computer Selection step in the following
procedure.
Save Package and go to the Browse step in the following procedure.
5 After the communication update package is applied, confirm that the computers
successfully communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
See Checking whether the client is connected to the management server and
is protected on page 158.
Exporting the client-server communications file (Sylink.xml) manually
Exporting the client-server communications file

(Sylink.xml) manually
If the client and the server do not communicate, you may need to replace the
Sylink.xml file on the client computer to restore communications. You can manually
export the Sylink.xml file from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on a group
basis.
The most common reasons for replacing the Sylink.xml on the client are:
To convert an unmanaged client into a managed client.
To reconnect a previously orphaned client to the management server.
If you need to update client-server communications for a large number of clients,
deploy the Communication Update Package instead of using this method.
To export the client-server communications file manually
2 Under Clients, select the group in which you want the client to appear.
3 Right-click the group, and then click Export Communication Settings.
4 In the Export Communication Settings for group name dialog box, click
Browse.
5 In the Select Export File dialog box, locate the folder to where you want to
export the .xml file, and then click OK.
6 Under Preferred Policy Mode, make sure that Computer Mode is checked.
7 Click Export.
If the file name already exists, click OK to overwrite it or Cancel to save the
file with a new file name.
To finish the conversion, you or a user must import the communications setting
on the client computer.
See Importing client-server communication settings into the Windows client
on page 169.
Importing client-server communication settings into the Windows client
Importing client-server communication settings into

the Windows client
Once you have exported client-server communication settings, you can import them
into a Windows client. You can use it to convert an unmanaged client into a managed
client or to reconnect a previously orphaned client with Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
To import the client-server communications settings file into the Windows client
1 Open Symantec Endpoint Protection on the computer that you want to convert
to a managed client.
2 In the upper right, click Help, and then click Troubleshooting.
3 In the Troubleshooting dialog box, in the Management pane, click Import.
4 In the Import Group Registration Settings dialog box, locate the group
name_sylink.xml file, and then click Open.
5 Click Close to close the Troubleshooting dialog box.
After you import the communications file, and the client and the management
server communicate, the notification area icon appears with a green dot in the
computer's taskbar. The green dot indicates that the client and the management
server are in communication with each other.
on page 168.
Importing client-server communication settings into

the Linux client
After you install an unmanaged Symantec Endpoint Protection for Linux client, you
can convert it to a managed client to centrally manage the client's policies and
status with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. A managed client communicates
with and reports its status and other information to Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
You can also use this procedure to reconnect a previously orphaned client with
Importing client-server communication settings into the Linux client
Note: You must have superuser privileges to perform this procedure. The procedure
uses sudo to demonstrate this elevation of privilege as required.
To import the client-server communication settings file into the Linux client
1 You or the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager administrator must first
export the communication settings file from Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager and copy it to the Linux computer. Ensure that the file name is
sylink.xml.

on page 168.
2 On the Linux computer, open a terminal window and enter the following
command:
sudo ./sav manage -i path-to/sylink.xml
Where path-to represents the path to which you copied sylink.xml.

For example, if you copied it to your user profile's desktop, enter:
sudo ./sav manage -i ~/Desktop/sylink.xml
3 A successful import returns OK. To further verify the managed status, enter
the followed command, which displays the policy serial number for a successful
import:
./sav manage -p
See Installing the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux on page 57.
Chapter 8
Updating content on the
clients
How to update content and definitions on the clients
Downloading content from LiveUpdate to the Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager
Making sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager has the latest content
Mitigating network overloads for client update requests
Checking LiveUpdate server activity
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to connect to a proxy server

to access the Internet and download content from Symantec LiveUpdate
Specifying a proxy server that clients use to communicate to Symantec

LiveUpdate or an internal LiveUpdate server
Choosing which content and which content revision to update on client computers
Configuring the LiveUpdate download schedule to Windows client computers
Configuring the amount of control that users have over LiveUpdate
About randomization of simultaneous content downloads
Randomizing content downloads from the default management server or a Group

Update Provider
Randomizing content downloads from a LiveUpdate server
Configuring Windows client updates to run when client computers are idle
Updating content on the clients 172
Configuring Windows client updates to run when definitions are old or the
computer has been disconnected
Configuring clients to download content from the Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager
Configuring clients to download content from an external LiveUpdate server
Configuring clients to download content from an internal LiveUpdate server
Using Group Update Providers to distribute content to clients
Using Intelligent Updater files to update content on Windows computers
Using third-party distribution tools to update client computers
Downloading Endpoint Protection security patches to Windows clients

By default, the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager downloads content updates
from the public Symantec LiveUpdate servers. Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
then download these updates from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
The content includes virus definitions, intrusion prevention signatures, and Host
Integrity templates, among others.
Table 8-1 Steps to update content on the Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
Task Description
Make sure that the By default, LiveUpdate runs as part of the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager installation.
management server You may need to run LiveUpdate manually in the following situations:
has the latest content
You skipped LiveUpdate during installation.
from LiveUpdate
You must run LiveUpdate to download the Host Integrity templates and intrusion prevention
(Recommended)
signatures.
You want to run LiveUpdate before the next scheduled update.
See Making sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager has the latest content
on page 184.
Change how client By default, Windows client computers get content updates from the management server.
computers get updates You may need to change the delivery method to support different client platforms, large
(Optional) numbers of clients, or network limitations.
See Choose a distribution method to update content on clients based on the platform
on page 178.
Table 8-1 Steps to update content on the Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
(continued)
Task Description
Change the LiveUpdate You can customize the frequency of LiveUpdate sessions, the protection components that
settings for the are downloaded, and more.
management server
See Downloading content from LiveUpdate to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
(Optional)
on page 179.
Reduce network If the management server receives too many concurrent requests for full definition packages
overloads from the clients, the network may become overloaded. You can mitigate the risk of these
(Recommended) overloads, and stop clients from downloading full definitions.
See Mitigating network overloads for client update requests on page 184.
Improve performance To help mitigate the effect of downloads on network bandwidth, download content randomly
(Recommended) so that not all clients get updates at the same time.
See About randomization of simultaneous content downloads on page 191.
See Randomizing content downloads from the default management server or a Group Update
Provider on page 192.
See Randomizing content downloads from a LiveUpdate server on page 193.
To mitigate the effect of downloads on client computers' performance, you can have the client
computers download content updates when the client computers are idle.
See Configuring Windows client updates to run when client computers are idle on page 194.
Let your endpoint users By default, users on the client computer can run LiveUpdate at any time. You can decide
manage their own how much control to give your users over their content updates.
updates (Optional)
See Configuring the amount of control that users have over LiveUpdate on page 191.
Choose a distribution method to update content on clients

You may need to change the default update method to the clients, depending on
the client platform, network configuration, number of clients, or your company's
security policies and access policies.
See Choose a distribution method to update content on clients based on the
platform on page 178.
Table 8-2 Content distribution methods and when to use them
Method Description When to use it
Symantec Endpoint The default management server Symantec recommends that you use this
Protection Manager to automatically updates the client computers method unless network constraints or your
client computers (default) that it manages. company's policies require an alternative.
(Windows, Mac, Linux) You do not define the schedule for the If you have a large number of clients or
updates from the management server to the bandwidth issues, you might use this method,
clients. The clients download content from along with Group Update Providers.
the management server based on the
For Mac or Linux computers to receive
communication mode and heartbeat
content updates from the management
frequency.
server, you must configure the Apache web
See Configuring clients to download content server.
from the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Enabling Mac and Linux clients to download
LiveUpdate content using the Apache Web
See Configuring push mode or pull mode to server as a reverse proxy
update client policies and content
See Downloading content from LiveUpdate
on page 162.
to the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Group Update Provider A Group Update Provider is a client computer A Group Update Provider lets you reduce the
to client computers that receives updates from a management load on the management server, and is
server. The Group Update Provider then easier to configure than an internal
(Windows only)
forwards the updates to the other client LiveUpdate server.
computers in the group. A Group Update
Use a Group Update Provider for groups at
Provider can update multiple groups.
remote locations with minimal bandwidth.
Group Update Providers can distribute all
See Using Group Update Providers to
types of LiveUpdate content except client
distribute content to clients on page 201.
software updates. Group Update Providers
also cannot be used to update policies. See Deciding whether or not to set up
multiple sites and replication on page 696.
Table 8-2 Content distribution methods and when to use them (continued)
Internal LiveUpdate Client computers can download updates An internal LiveUpdate server lets you reduce
server to client computers directly from an internal LiveUpdate server the load on the management server in very
that receives its updates from a Symantec large networks. In smaller networks, consider
(Windows, Mac, Linux)
LiveUpdate server. whether Group Update Providers would meet
your organization's needs.
If necessary, you can set up several internal
LiveUpdate servers and distribute the list to Consider using an internal LiveUpdate server
client computers. in the following situations:
You can change the download schedule from If you manage a large network (more than
the LiveUpdate server to the management 10,000 clients)
server. If you manage Mac or Linux clients that
should not connect to an external
See Configuring the LiveUpdate download
LiveUpdate server
schedule to Windows client computers
on page 189. If your organization deploys multiple
Symantec products that also use
For more information about setting up an LiveUpdate to distribute content to client
internal LiveUpdate server, see the computers
LiveUpdate Administrator User's Guide at:
Note: You should not install the management
Downloading LiveUpdate Administrator server and an internal LiveUpdate server on
the same physical hardware or virtual
machine. Installation on the same computer
can result in significant server performance
problems.
For more information see:
LiveUpdate Administrator 2.x and Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager on the same
computer
See Configuring clients to download content

from an internal LiveUpdate server
on page 197.
Table 8-2 Content distribution methods and when to use them (continued)
External Symantec Client computers can receive updates directly Use an external Symantec LiveUpdate server
LiveUpdate server to from a Symantec LiveUpdate server. if you need to schedule when clients update
client computers over the content or if the available bandwidth between
Internet the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
and the clients is limited.
(Windows, Mac, Linux)
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and
scheduled updates are enabled by default.
With the default settings, clients always get
updates from the management server unless
management server is unresponsive for a
long period of time.
Note: Do not configure large numbers of
managed, networked clients to pull updates
from an external Symantec LiveUpdate
server. This configuration consumes
unnecessary bandwidth.
See Configuring clients to download content

from an external LiveUpdate server
on page 197.
Third-party tool Third-party tools like Microsoft SMS let you This method lets you test update files before
distribution distribute specific update files to clients. you distribute them. It may also make sense
if you have a third-party tool distribution
(Windows only)
infrastructure in place.
See Distributing the content using third-party

distribution tools on page 213.
Intelligent Updater Intelligent Updater files contain the virus and You can use Intelligent Updater files if
security risk content and intrusion prevention LiveUpdate is not available.
(Windows only)
content that you can use to manually update
See Using Intelligent Updater files to update
clients.
content on Windows computers on page 209.
You can download the Intelligent Updater
To update other kinds of content, you must
self-extracting files from the Symantec Web
set up and configure a management server
site.
to download and to stage the update files.
See Using third-party distribution tools to

update client computers on page 210.
Figure 8-1 shows an example distribution architecture for smaller networks.

Figure 8-1 Example distribution architecture for smaller networks
Symantec LiveUpdate
Management server Management server

Client group
Group Update
Provider (Client)
Client groups
Clients
Client group
Figure 8-2 shows an example distribution architecture for larger networks.

Figure 8-2 Example distribution architecture for larger networks
Symantec LiveUpdate
Internal Internal
LiveUpdate server LiveUpdate server
Management server
Client groups
Client groups
Choose a distribution method to update content on clients based on

the platform
The methods that you can use to distribute virus definitions and other content to
the client computers depends on the client platform.
Downloading content from LiveUpdate to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Table 8-3 Content distribution method based on Windows, Mac, and Linux
clients
Platform Method
Windows By default, the Windows client gets content from the management server.
Windows clients can also get updates from the following sources:
A LiveUpdate server (external or internal)

See Configuring clients to download content from an internal LiveUpdate server on page 197.
See Configuring clients to download content from an external LiveUpdate server on page 197.
A Group Update Provider
Third-party distribution tools
See Distributing the content using third-party distribution tools on page 213.
Intelligent Updater
See Using Intelligent Updater files to update content on Windows computers on page 209.
For Windows clients, you can also customize the following settings:
The content types that the client receives

Whether the client can get definitions from multiple sources
Whether the client can get smaller packages (deltas) from LiveUpdate if the management
server can provide only full definition packages
Full definition packages are very large. Too many downloads of full packages can overload
your network. Deltas are typically much smaller, and affect your network bandwidth much less.
See Mitigating network overloads for client update requests on page 184.
Mac or Linux A LiveUpdate server (external or internal)

An Apache Web server that you configure as a reverse proxy
Enabling Mac or Linux clients to download LiveUpdate content using the Apache Web server
as a reverse proxy

Downloading content from LiveUpdate to the

When you configure the management server to download LiveUpdate content, you
have to make a number of decisions. When you download content to Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager, you download the content for all the management
servers in the site.
Frequently asked about downloading content

Table 8-4 Decisions about content downloads
Decision Description
What LiveUpdate server You can specify either an external Symantec LiveUpdate server (recommended), or
should serve the content to one or more internal LiveUpdate servers that have previously been installed and
the site? configured.
You should not install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and an internal
LiveUpdate server on the same physical hardware or virtual machine. Installation on
the same computer can result in significant server performance problems.
If you decide to use one or more internal LiveUpdate servers, you may want to add
the Symantec public LiveUpdate server as the last entry. If your clients cannot reach
any server on the list, then they are still able to update from the Symantec LiveUpdate
server.
Note: Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager no longer includes legacy support for
LiveUpdate Administrator 1.x. To continue using an internal LiveUpdate server, you
should upgrade to the latest version of LiveUpdate Administrator.
Downloading LiveUpdate Administrator
See Configuring clients to download content from an external LiveUpdate server

on page 197.

on page 197.

Table 8-4 Decisions about content downloads (continued)
How many content revisions LiveUpdate content revisions are stored differently on the management server than in
should the site store? Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager versions earlier than 12.1.5. Earlier releases
stored full content for every revision. Now, the server stores only the most recent full
content package, plus incremental deltas for as many revisions as you specify here.
This approach reduces the disk space that is required to store multiple content revisions
on the server.
The number of clients you select during the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
installation defines the number of revisions the server stores.
For each LiveUpdate content type, the default values are as follows:
For 14:
If you do not check Management server will manage fewer than 500 clients,
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager stores 21 revisions.
If you check Management server will manage fewer than 500 clients, Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager stores 90 revisions.
For versions earlier than 14 but later than 12.1.5, or for upgrades from versions earlier
than 14:
If you select fewer than 100 clients, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager stores
12 revisions.
If you select 100 to 500 clients, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager stores 21
revisions.
If you select 500 to 1,000 clients, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager stores
42 revisions.
If you select more than 1,000 clients, then Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
stores 90 revisions.
In most instances during an upgrade, the installation increases the number of revisions
to match these new defaults. This increase occurs if the number of revisions you had
before the upgrade is less than the new minimum default, based on the above criteria.
See Choosing which content and which content revision to update on client computers
on page 187.
How often should my site The default schedule of having Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager run LiveUpdate
check for LiveUpdate content every four hours is a best practice.
updates?
What operating systems am LiveUpdate only downloads the content for the specified operating systems.
I downloading content to?
Table 8-4 Decisions about content downloads (continued)
What content types should I Make sure that the site downloads all content updates that are specified in your client
download to the site and to LiveUpdate Content policies.
the clients?
See Choosing which content and which content revision to update on client computers
on page 187.
What languages should be This setting applies to product updates only; the content updates are downloaded
downloaded for product automatically for all languages.
updates?
What content size should be Version 14 standard and embedded/VDI clients use a reduced-size set of definitions
downloaded for definitions? (only the latest) that is cloud-enabled. Scans on these clients automatically use the
extended definitions set in the cloud.
14 also includes a dark network client that downloads the entire set of definitions.
12.1.x standard clients require legacy standard-size content, which includes the entire
set of definitions.
12.1.6.x embedded/VDI clients require legacy reduced-size content.

Warning: Your management server must download the correct content for the client
types in your network. If the management server does not download the content that
your installed clients require, the clients cannot get updates from the management
server.
Downloading content from a LiveUpdate server to the Symantec

When you download content to a management server, you download it for all the
management servers within the site.
To configure a site to download content
1 In the console, click Admin, and then click Servers.
2 Under Servers, right-click Local Site, and then click Edit Site Properties.
3 On the LiveUpdate tab, make choices from the following available options.
4 Under LiveUpdate Source Servers, click Edit Source Servers and then
inspect the current LiveUpdate server that is used to update the management
server. This server is Symantec LiveUpdate server by default. Then do one of
the following:
To use the existing LiveUpdate Source server, click OK.
To use an internal LiveUpdate server, click Use a specified internal
LiveUpdate server and then click Add.
If you selected Use a specified internal LiveUpdate server, in the Add

LiveUpdate Server dialog box, complete the boxes with the information that
identifies the LiveUpdate server, and then click OK.
You can add more than one server for failover purposes. If one server goes
offline, the other server provides support. You can also add the Symantec
public LiveUpdate server as the last server in the list. If you add the public
server, use http://liveupdate.symantecliveupdate.com as the URL.
Note: If you use a UNC server, then LiveUpdate requires that you use the
domain or workgroup as part of the user name.
If the computer is in a domain, use the format domain_name\user_name.
If the computer is in a workgroup, use the format computer_name\user_name.
In the LiveUpdate Servers dialog box, click OK.

5 Under Disk Space Management for Downloads, type the number of
LiveUpdate content revisions to keep.
6 In the Download Schedule group box, click Edit Schedule, set the options
for how often the server should check for updates. Click OK.
7 Under Platforms to Download, click Change Platforms and then inspect the
platforms list. Uncheck the platforms that you do not want to download content
to.
8 Under Content Types to Download, inspect the list of update types that are
downloaded.
To add or delete an update type, click Change Selection, modify the list, and
then click OK.
The list should match the list of content types that you include in the LiveUpdate
Content policy for your client computers.
9 Under Content to Download for Client Types, decide whether to download
and store content for standard and embedded/VDI clients or dark network
clients. You should also download and store reduced-size content or
standard-size content if you run 12.1.x clients in your network.
Warning: You must download content for the client types in your network. If
you do not download the content that your installed clients require, the clients
cannot get updates from the management server.
To modify the setting, click Change Selection, modify the selection, and then
click OK.
Making sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager has the latest content
10 Under Languages to Download, inspect the list of languages of the update

types that are downloaded.
To add or delete a language, click Change Selection, modify the list, and then
click OK.
11 Click OK to save your selections and close the window.
Making sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager has the latest content
LiveUpdate downloads definitions and other content to Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager on a schedule. However, you can download content at any time if Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager does not have the latest version. The default
LiveUpdate policy then downloads this content to the client computers.
To make sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager has the latest content
1 In the console, click Home.
2 In the Endpoint Status group box, under Windows Definitions, compare the
dates for Latest on Manager and Latest from Symantec.
3 If the dates do not match, click Admin > Servers > Local Site (My Site).
4 Under Tasks, click Download LiveUpdate content > Download.
Mitigating network overloads for client update

requests
You must manage your networks for the critical but infrequent situation when too
many clients simultaneously request a full set of virus and spyware definitions from
the management server or from a Group Update Provider. This situation can occur
if the management server encounters an error or runs out of disk space, so that
the download and update of the definitions on the client then fails. This situation
can also occur if the management server does not download a definitions package
and a client then requests this specific delta. In either case, the client then must
request a package with a full set of definitions from either the management server
or from the Group Update Provider.
To help prevent overloads on your network, the management server provides the
following features:
A notification when the management server receives a specified number of
requests for a full set of definitions within a specified period of time.
You set the conditions for this notification based on what constitutes an overload
for your environment. To configure the notification, add a Network load:
requests for virus and spyware full definitions notification condition.
The ability to let clients get deltas for virus and spyware definitions from a
LiveUpdate server if the management server can provide only a full set. In a
LiveUpdate Settings policy, click Advanced Settings > Download smaller
client installation packages from a LiveUpdate server.
The ability to block clients from downloading a full set of virus and spyware
definitions from the management server.
If you receive a notification of a network overload, you can block any further
downloads of full packages from the management server. You cannot, however,
stop any downloads that are already in progress. Configure this option by clicking
Admin > Servers > server_name > Edit the server properties > Full
Definitions Download > Prevent clients from downloading full definition
packages.

You can list the events that concern Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and
LiveUpdate. From these events, you can determine when content was updated.
To check LiveUpdate server activity
1 In the console, click Admin.
2 On the Admin page, under Tasks, click Servers and select the site.
3 Click Show the LiveUpdate Status.
4 Click Close.
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to connect to a proxy server to access the Internet and download
content from Symantec LiveUpdate
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

to connect to a proxy server to access the Internet
and download content from Symantec LiveUpdate
If you want Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to go through a proxy server
to connect to the Internet, you must configure Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager to connect to the proxy server. A proxy server can add a layer of security
because only the proxy server is connected directly to the Internet.
To configure Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to connect to a proxy server
to access the Internet and download content from Symantec LiveUpdate
2 Under Servers, select the management server to which you want to connect
a proxy server.
3 Under Tasks, click Edit the server properties.
4 On the Proxy Server tab, under either HTTP Proxy Settings or FTP Proxy
Settings, for Proxy usage, select Use custom proxy settings.
5 Type in the proxy settings.
For more information on these settings, click Help.
6 Click OK.
Specifying a proxy server that clients use to

communicate to Symantec LiveUpdate or an internal
LiveUpdate server
You can specify a proxy server that your clients use to communicate with an internal
LiveUpdate server. The proxy settings do not affect any settings for Group Update
Providers.
Note: You configure proxy settings for other client communications separately.
To specify a proxy server that clients on Windows or computers or Linux computers

use to communicate to Symantec LiveUpdate or an internal LiveUpdate server
1 In the console, click Policies.
2 Under Policies, click LiveUpdate, and then click the LiveUpdate Settings
tab.
3 Right-click the policy that you want and then select Edit.
4 Under Windows Settings or under Linux Settings, click Server Settings.
5 Under LiveUpdate Proxy Configuration, click Configure Proxy Options.
6 Do one of the following:
For Windows clients, on the HTTP or HTTPS tab, select the desired options.
You can also specify proxy settings for FTP.
For Linux clients, on the HTTP tab, select the desired options.
See the online Help for more information about the options.
7 Click OK in the dialog box.
8 Click OK.
To specify a proxy server that clients on Mac computers use to communicate to
Symantec LiveUpdate or an internal LiveUpdate server
1 In the console, click Clients > Policies.
2 Under Location-independent Policies and Settings, under Settings, click
External Communication Settings.
3 On the Proxy Server (Mac) tab, select the desired options.
See the online Help for more information about the options.
4 Click OK.
Choosing which content and which content revision

to update on client computers
Some of the content that is downloaded from a LiveUpdate server to the
management server is automatically downloaded to the clients. The LiveUpdate
policy specifies the type of content that clients are permitted to check for and install.
In addition, you can rollback content to an old revision can be useful in
troubleshooting situations.
In some cases, the revision that is specified in the policy does not match the
revisions that are stored on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. For
example, you might import a policy that references a revision that does not exist
on the server. Or, you might replicate policies but not LiveUpdate content from
another site. In both cases, the policy shows that the revision is not available. Even
though the revision is not available on the server, the clients that use the policy are
still protected. The clients use the latest revision of the content.
You do not need to restart the client computer to install the content.
Note: Use this feature very carefully. Unchecking a content type means that the
feature is not kept up-to-date on the client. This can potentially put your clients at
greater risk.
To choose which content to update on client computers

1 In the console, click Policies > LiveUpdate, and open the default LiveUpdate
policy.
2 Under Windows Settings, click Security Definitions.
3 Check the types of content updates that you want clients to download and
install, and uncheck the types that you don't want.
Note: If you have Mac clients, they can install only updates to virus and spyware
definitions and intrusion prevention signatures. These options, under Mac
Settings, Security Definitions, are enabled by default.
4 For the type of content that you want to roll back, click Select a revision >
Edit, and choose the revision number.
5 Click OK.
6 To download security patches to client computers, open a LiveUpdate Settings
policy.
7 Under Windows Settings, click Advanced Settings, and make sure that
Download security patches to fix the vulnerabilities in the latest version
of the Symantec Endpoint Protection client is checked.
If you have not already assigned this policy to groups and locations, then you must
assign the policy to have it take effect.
Configuring the LiveUpdate download schedule to

Windows client computers
The LiveUpdate client schedule settings are defined in the LiveUpdate Settings
policy. These settings apply to LiveUpdate sessions that get the latest updates from
either a Symantec LiveUpdate server or an internal LiveUpdate server.
See Configuring clients to download content from an external LiveUpdate server
on page 197.
on page 197.
To save bandwidth, you can let your clients run scheduled LiveUpdate sessions
only if either of the following conditions is met:
Virus and spyware definitions on a client computer are more than 2 days old.
A client computer is disconnected from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
for more than 8 hours.
Note: To make sure that any client computers that connect to your network
infrequently get the latest updates, let these computers get updates from a Symantec
LiveUpdate server. These servers are public, and the client therefore does not
depend on a connection to your network to get updates.
To configure the schedule for LiveUpdate downloads to Windows client computers

1 Click Policies and then click LiveUpdate.
2 On the LiveUpdate Settings tab, right-click the policy that you want, and then
click Edit.
3 Under Windows Settings, click Schedule.
4 Make sure that Enable LiveUpdate Scheduling is checked. This option is
enabled by default.
5 Specify the frequency.
If you select Daily, also set the time of day to run. If you select Weekly, also
set the time of day to run and the day of the week to run.
6 If you select any frequency other than Continuously, specify the Retry
Window.
The Retry Window is the number of hours or days that the client computer
tries to run LiveUpdate if the scheduled LiveUpdate fails for some reason.
7 Set any additional options, if required. Symantec recommends that you keep
the default values for running LiveUpdate if the definitions are out of date, or
if the client has not connected recently to the management server.
8 Click OK.
To configure the schedule for LiveUpdate downloads to Mac client computers
1 Click Policies and then click LiveUpdate.
2 On the LiveUpdate Settings Policy tab, right-click the policy that you want,
and then click Edit.
3 Under Mac Settings, click Schedule.
5 Click OK when finished.
To configure the schedule for LiveUpdate downloads to Linux client computers
1 On the LiveUpdate Settings Policy tab, right-click the policy that you want,
2 Under Linux Settings, click Schedule.
3 Check Enable LiveUpdate Scheduling. This option is enabled by default.
Note: You should not uncheck this box. If you disable LiveUpdate Scheduling,
Linux clients do not get the latest updates.

5 If you select any frequency other than Continuously, specify the Retry
Window.
The Retry Window is the number of hours or days that the client computer
tries to run LiveUpdate if the scheduled LiveUpdate fails.
You can also randomize content downloads.
6 Click OK.
Configuring the amount of control that users have over LiveUpdate
Configuring the amount of control that users have

over LiveUpdate
You may want to allow users who travel to use an Internet connection to get updates
directly from a Symantec LiveUpdate server. You can also allow users to modify
the LiveUpdate schedule you set up for content downloads.
Note: If an unmanaged client has a LiveUpdate Settings policy assigned to it when

an install package is created, the policy settings always take precedence over a
user's changes once the user restarts the computer. To install an unmanaged client
that retains a user's changes to LiveUpdate settings after the computer is restarted,
install the client from the installation file. Do not use a client install package that
has been exported from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
To configure the amount of control that users have over LiveUpdate

2 Under Policies, click LiveUpdate.
3 On the LiveUpdate Settings tab, right-click the policy that you want, and then
click Edit.
4 Under Windows Settings, click Advanced Settings.
5 Under User Settings pane, check Allow the user to manually launch
LiveUpdate.
6 Optionally, check Allow the user to modify the LiveUpdate schedule.
7 Click OK.
See Choosing which content and which content revision to update on client
See Configuring the LiveUpdate download schedule to Windows client computers
on page 189.
About randomization of simultaneous content

downloads
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager supports randomization of simultaneous
content downloads to your clients from the default management server or a Group
Update Provider. It also supports the randomization of the content downloads from
a LiveUpdate server to your clients. Randomization reduces peak network traffic
and is on by default.
Randomizing content downloads from the default management server or a Group Update Provider
You can enable or disable the randomization function. The default setting is enabled.
You can also configure a randomization window. The management server uses the
randomization window to stagger the timing of the content downloads. Typically,
you should not need to change the default randomization settings.
In some cases, however, you might want to increase the randomization window
value. For example, you might run the Symantec Endpoint Protection client on
multiple virtual machines on the same physical computer that runs the management
server. The higher randomization value improves the performance of the server
but delays content updates to the virtual machines.
You also might want to increase the randomization window when you have many
physical client computers that connect to a single server that runs the management
server. In general, the higher the client-to-server ratio, the higher you might want
to set the randomization window. The higher randomization value decreases the
peak load on the server but delays content updates to the client computers.
In a scenario where you have very few clients and want rapid content delivery, you
can set the randomization window to a lower value. The lower randomization value
increases the peak load on the server but provides faster content delivery to the
clients.
For downloads from the default management server or a Group Update Provider,
you configure the randomization settings in the Communication Settings dialog
box for the selected group. The settings are not part of the LiveUpdate Settings
policy.
For downloads from a LiveUpdate server to your clients, you configure the
randomization setting as part of the LiveUpdate Settings policy.
on page 197.
Randomizing content downloads from the default

management server or a Group Update Provider
Your default management server or Group Update Providers might experience
reduced performance when multiple client computers attempt to download content
from them simultaneously. You can set a randomization window in the
communication settings for the group to which the client computers belong. Each
Randomizing content downloads from a LiveUpdate server
client computer attempts to download content at a random time that occurs within
that window.
Note: The communication settings do not control the randomization settings for the
client computers that download content from a LiveUpdate server. You can change
the randomization settings for those computers in the LiveUpdate Settings policy.
To randomize content downloads from the default management server or a Group

Update Provider
2 Under Clients, click the group that you want.
3 On the Policies tab, under Location-independent Policies and Settings,
under Settings, click Communication Settings.
4 In the Communication Settings dialog box, under Download Randomization,
check Enable randomization.
5 Optionally, change the randomization window duration.
6 Click OK.
on page 197.
Randomizing content downloads from a LiveUpdate

server
Your network might experience traffic congestion when multiple client computers
attempt to download content from a LiveUpdate server. You can configure the
update schedule to include a randomization window on Windows or Linux clients.
Each client computer attempts to download content at a random time that occurs
within that window.
Configuring Windows client updates to run when client computers are idle
Note: The schedule settings in the LiveUpdate Settings policy do not control
randomization for the client computers that download content from the default
management server or from a Group Update provider. You can change the
randomization settings for those computers in the Communication Settings dialog
box for the group to which they belong.
To randomize content downloads from a LiveUpdate server

1 Click Policies.
3 On the LiveUpdate Settings tab, right-click the policy that you want to edit,
4 Under Windows Settings, Mac Settings, or Linux Settings, click Schedule.
5 Under Download Randomization Options, check Randomize the start time
to be + or - (in hours).
Note: This setting is in days, if you select Weekly updates.
6 Optionally, change the duration for the randomized start time.

7 Click OK.
on page 197.
Configuring Windows client updates to run when

client computers are idle
To ease Windows client computer performance issues, you can configure content
downloads to run when client computers are idle. This setting is on by default.
Several criteria, such as user, CPU, and disc actions, are used to determine when
the computer is idle.
If Idle Detection is enabled, once an update is due, the following conditions can
delay the session:
The user is not idle.
Configuring Windows client updates to run when definitions are old or the computer has been disconnected
The computer is on battery power.

The CPU is busy.
The disk I/O is busy.
No network connection is present.
After one hour, the blocking set is reduced to CPU busy, Disk I/O busy, or no network
connection exists. Once the scheduled update is overdue for two hours, as long as
a network connection exists, the scheduled LiveUpdate runs regardless of idle
status.
To configure Windows client updates to run when client computers are idle
1 Click Policies.
5 Check Delay scheduled LiveUpdate until the computer is idle. Overdue
sessions will run unconditionally.
6 Click OK.
on page 189.
See Configuring Windows client updates to run when definitions are old or the
computer has been disconnected on page 195.
Configuring Windows client updates to run when

definitions are old or the computer has been
disconnected
You can ensure that Windows clients update when definitions are old or the computer
has been disconnected from the network for a specified amount of time.
Note: If you check both available options, the client computer must meet both
conditions.
Configuring clients to download content from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
To configure Windows client updates when definitions are old or the computers is
disconnected from the manager
1 Click Policies.
5 Check LiveUpdate runs only if Virus and Spyware definitions are older
than: and then set the number of hours or days.
6 Check LiveUpdate runs only if the client is disconnected from Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager for more than: and then set the number of
minutes or hours.
7 Click OK.
on page 189.
See Configuring Windows client updates to run when client computers are idle
on page 194.
Configuring clients to download content from the

The default method for downloading content to clients is by using the management
server.
You do not define the schedule for the updates from the management server to the
clients. The clients download content from the management server based on the
communication mode and heartbeat frequency.
To configure clients to download content from the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager
1 In the console, open a LiveUpdate policy, and click Edit
2 Under Windows Settings, click Server Settings.
3 Make sure that Use the default management server is checked.
4 Click OK.
on page 162.
Configuring clients to download content from an external LiveUpdate server
Configuring clients to download content from an

external LiveUpdate server
By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager provides updates to Windows
clients. To help mitigate network overloads for Windows client updates, you should
also let clients get updates from a LiveUpdate server. Linux and Mac clients must
get updates from a LiveUpdate server, or you can set up the Apache web server
as a reverse proxy to download updates from the management server.
Enabling Mac and Linux clients to download LiveUpdate content using the Apache
Web server as a reverse proxy
Note: You may also want to establish communication between a proxy server and
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager so that it can connect with Symantec
subscription services. A proxy server can provide an additional level of protection
between your site and an external Symantec LiveUpdate server.
See Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to connect to a proxy
server to access the Internet and download content from Symantec LiveUpdate
on page 186.
To configure clients to download content from an external LiveUpdate server

1 In the console, open a LiveUpdate policy, and click Edit
2 Under Windows Settings, Mac Settings, or Linux Settings, click Server
Settings.
3 Click Use the default Symantec LiveUpdate server or specify another
LiveUpdate server. If needed, specify your proxy configuration.
4 Click OK.
Configuring clients to download content from an

internal LiveUpdate server
By default, your Windows clients get their updates from the management server.
If you select the default management server and your environment includes Mac
and Linux computers, Mac and Linux clients get their updates from the default
LiveUpdate server.
If you manage a large number of clients, you may want to use Group Update
Providers (GUPs) for Windows clients. GUPs reduce the load on the management
server and are easier to set up than an internal LiveUpdate server.
If you don't want to use the default management server or Group Update Providers
for client updates, you can:
Set up an internal LiveUpdate server.
Use a Symantec LiveUpdate server that is external to your network.
To use an internal LiveUpdate server, you must perform the following tasks:
Install the internal LiveUpdate server.
For more information about using an internal LiveUpdate server, refer to the
LiveUpdate Administrator's Guide.
Note: Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager no longer includes legacy support

for LiveUpdate Administrator 1.x. To continue using an internal LiveUpdate
server, you should upgrade to the latest version of LiveUpdate Administrator.
Support for LiveUpdate Administrator 2.x and later is always enabled.
Use the LiveUpdate Settings policy to configure your clients to use that internal
LiveUpdate server.
Note: You can specify proxy settings for the clients that connect to an internal
LiveUpdate server for updates. The proxy settings are for updates only. They do
not apply to other types of external communication that clients use. You configure
the proxy for other types of client external communication separately.
See Specifying a proxy server that clients use to communicate to Symantec
LiveUpdate or an internal LiveUpdate server on page 186.
To configure Windows clients to use an internal LiveUpdate server

2 On the LiveUpdate Settings tab, right-click the policy that you want and then
click Edit.
4 In the Server Settings pane, check Use a LiveUpdate server.
5 Click Use a specified internal LiveUpdate server, and then click Add.
6 In the Add LiveUpdate Server dialog box, type the information that you need
to identify and communicate with the server that you want to use.
For example, for the URL:
If you use the FTP method (recommended), type the FTP address for the
server. For example: ftp://myliveupdateserver.com
If you use the HTTP method, type the URL for the server. For example:
Domain name: http://myliveupdateserver.com
IPv4 address: http://192.168.133.11/Export/Home/LUDepot
If you use the LAN method, type the server UNC path name. For example,
\\myliveupdateserver\LUDepot
7 If required, type in a user name and password for the server.
Note: If you use a UNC server, then LiveUpdate requires that you use the
domain or workgroup in addition to the user name. If the computer is part of a
domain, use the format domain_name\user_name
If the computer is part of a workgroup, use the format
computer_name\user_name.
8 Under LiveUpdate Policy, click Schedule to set up a schedule for updates

through LiveUpdate.
See Configuring the LiveUpdate download schedule to Windows client
9 Click OK.
10 Click Advanced Settings.
Decide whether to keep or change the default user settings, product update
settings, and non-standard header settings. Generally, you do not want users
to modify update settings. You may, however, want to let users manually launch
a LiveUpdate session if you do not support hundreds or thousands of clients.
See Configuring the amount of control that users have over LiveUpdate
on page 191.
11 Click OK.
To configure Mac clients to use an internal LiveUpdate server
click Edit.
3 Under Mac Settings, click Server Settings.

server. For example: ftp://myliveupdateserver.com
6 If required, type in a user name and password for the server and then click
OK.
7 If your server uses FTP, click Advanced Server Settings.
8 Click the FTP mode that the server uses, either Active or Passive, and then
click OK.
9 Under Mac Settings, click Advanced Settings.
If you want to let client computers get product update settings through
LiveUpdate, click Download Symantec Endpoint Protection product updates
using a LiveUpdate server.
10 Click OK.
To configure Linux clients to use an internal LiveUpdate server
click Edit.
3 Under Linux Settings, click Server Settings.
server. For example: ftp://myliveupdateserver.com.
6 If your server uses FTP or HTTPS, click Advanced Server Settings.

7 Select the FTP or HTTPS mode that the server uses, and then click OK.
8 Click OK.
on page 194.
Using Group Update Providers to distribute content

to clients
A Group Update Provider is a client computer that you designate to locally distribute
content updates to clients. A Group Update Provider downloads content updates
from the management server and distributes the updates to itself and other clients.
The advantage of the Group Update Provider is that it conserves bandwidth by
offloading processing power from the management server to the Group Update
Provider.
Group Update Providers are ideal for delivering content updates to clients that have
limited network access to the server. You can use a Group Update Provider for
clients in a remote location over a slow link.
Table 8-5 Tasks to use Group Update Providers
Step Description
Step 1: Understand the differences You can set up single, multiple, or cross-subnet Group Update Providers.
between the types of Group Update The type of Group Update Provider that you set up depends on your network
Providers that you can configure and the clients on that network. The types of Group Update Provider are not
mutually exclusive. You can configure one or more types of Group Update
Provider per policy.
See About the types of Group Update Providers on page 202.
See About the effects of configuring more than one type of Group Update
Provider in your network on page 207.
Table 8-5 Tasks to use Group Update Providers (continued)
Step Description
Step 2: Verify client communication Before you configure Group Update Providers, verify that the client computers
can receive content updates from the server. Resolve any client-server
communication problems.
You can view client-server activity in the System logs on the Logs tab of the
Monitors page.
See Troubleshooting connectivity problems between Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager and the Symantec Endpoint Protection client on page 716.
Step 3: Configure Group Update You configure Group Update Providers in the LiveUpdate Settings policy.
Providers in one or more LiveUpdate
See Configuring clients to download content from Group Update Providers
Settings policies
on page 205.
Step 4: Assign the LiveUpdate Settings You assign the LiveUpdate Settings policy to the groups that use the Group
policy to groups Update Providers. You also assign the policy to the group in which the Group
Update Provider resides.
For a single Group Update Provider, you assign one LiveUpdate Settings
policy per group per site.
For multiple Group Update Providers and explicit lists of Group Update
Providers, you assign one LiveUpdate Settings policy to multiple groups
across subnets.
See Assigning a policy to a group or location on page 310.
Step 5: Verify that clients are designated To view the client computers that are designated as Group Update Providers,
as Group Update Providers do one of the following tasks:
Click Clients > Clients tab > right-click the client, and then click Edit
Properties. The Group Update Provider field is True or False.
See Searching for the clients that act as Group Update Providers
on page 207.
About the types of Group Update Providers

You can configure several types of Group Update Providers in a LiveUpdate Settings
policy. The types of Group Update Providers that you use depend on how your
network is set up. You can configure one or more types of Group Update Provider
per policy; they are not mutually exclusive.
Table 8-6 When to use a particular type of Group Update Provider
Group Update When to use

Provider Type
Single A single Group Update Provider is a dedicated client computer that provides content for one
or more groups of clients. Configuring a single Group Update Provider turns a single client
into a Group Update Provider. A single Group Update Provider can be a client computer in
any group.
Use a single Group Update Provider when you want to use the same Group Update Provider
for all your client computers.
You use a single LiveUpdate Settings policy to specify a static IP address or host name for
a single Group Update Provider. However, if the client that serves as a single Group Update
Provider changes location, you must change the IP address in the policy.
If you want to use different single Group Update Providers in different groups, you must
create a separate LiveUpdate Settings policy for each group.
Multiple Multiple Group Update Providers use a set of rules, or criteria, to elect themselves to serve
groups of clients in their own subnets. All client computers are on the same subnet.
You specify the criteria that client computers must meet to qualify as a Group Update
Provider. If a client computer meets the criteria, the management server adds the client to
a global list of Group Update Providers. The management server then makes the global list
available to all the clients in the network. Clients check the list and choose the Group Update
Providers that are located in their own subnet.
Configuring multiple Group Update Providers turns multiple clients into Group Update
Providers.
Use multiple Group Update Providers for any of the following scenarios:
You have multiple groups and want to use different Group Update Providers for each
group.
You can use one policy that specifies rules for the election of multiple Group Update
Providers. If clients change locations, you do not have to update the LiveUpdate Settings
policy. The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager combines multiple Group Update
Providers across sites and domains. It makes the list available to all clients in all groups
in your network.
Multiple Group Update Providers can function as a failover mechanism. The use of
Multiple Group Update Providers ensures a higher probability that at least one Group
Update Provider is available in each subnet.
Table 8-6 When to use a particular type of Group Update Provider (continued)
Group Update When to use

Provider Type
Explicit list Use an explicit list of Group Update Providers when you want clients to be able to connect
to Group Update Providers that are on subnets other than the client's subnet. Clients that
change location can roam to the closest Group Update Provider on the list.
An explicit Group Update Providers list does not turn clients into Group Update Providers.
When you configure an explicit list, you can specify that the clients with IP addresses that
fall on a particular subnet should use a particular Group Update Provider. A client may have
multiple IP addresses, and the management server considers all of the client's IP addresses
when it matches which Group Update Provider to use. So, the IP address that the policy
matches to is not necessarily bound to the interface that the client uses to communicate
with the Group Update Provider.
For example, suppose that a client has IP address A, which it uses to communicate with
the management server and with the Group Update Provider. This same client also has IP
address B, which is the one that matches the Explicit Group Update Provider that you have
configured in the LiveUpdate Settings policy for this client. The client can choose to use a
Group Update Provider based on the address B, even though that is not the address that it
uses to communicate with the Group Update Provider.
Configuring single or multiple Group Update Providers in a LiveUpdate Settings

policy performs the following functions:
It specifies which clients with this policy are to act as Group Update Providers.
It specifies which Group Update Providers the clients with this policy should use
for content updates.
Configuring an explicit Group Update Provider list performs only one function:
It specifies which Group Update Providers the clients with this policy should use
for content updates.
Although it does not turn clients into Group Update Providers, you can still
configure and apply a policy that contains only an explicit provider list. However,
you must then have a single Group Update Provider or multiple Group Update
Providers configured in another policy in the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager. Or, you can have both types configured in other policies.
If a client cannot obtain its update through any of the Group Update Providers, it
can then optionally try to update from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
See About the effects of configuring more than one type of Group Update Provider
in your network on page 207.

on page 205.
Configuring clients to download content from Group Update Providers

You use the LiveUpdate Settings policy so that clients get updates from the Group
Update Provider only and never from the management server. You can set up
single, multiple, or cross-subnet Group Update Providers. The type of Group Update
Provider that you set up depends on your network and the clients on that network.
To configure clients to download content from Group Update Providers
click Edit.
4 In the LiveUpdate Settings Policy window, click Server Settings.
5 Under Internal or External LiveUpdate Server, check Use the default
management server.
6 Under Group Update Provider, check Use a Group Update Provider.
7 Click Group Update Provider.
Follow the steps in To configure a single Group Update Provider.
Follow the steps in To configure multiple Group Update Providers.
Follow the steps in To configure an explicit list of Group Update Providers.
9 Under Group Update Provider Settings, configure the options to control how
content is downloaded and stored on the Group Update Provider computer.
Click Help for information about content downloads.
10 Click OK.
To configure a single Group Update Provider

1 In the Group Update Provider dialog box, check Single Group Update
Provider IP address or host name, and type the IP address or host name of
the client computer that acts as the single Group Update Provider.
Click Help for information about the IP address or host name.
2 Return to the procedure to configure a Group Update Provider.
To configure multiple Group Update Providers
1 In the Group Update Provider dialog box, check Multiple Group Update
Providers, and then click Configure Group Update Provider List.
2 In the Group Update Provider List dialog box, select the tree node Group
Update Provider, and then click Add to add a rule set.
3 In the Specify Group Update Provider Rule Criteria dialog box, in the Check
drop-down list, select one of the following options:
Computer IP Address or Host Name
Registry Keys
Operating System
4 If you selected Computer IP Address or Host Name or Registry Keys, click

Add.
5 Type or select the IP address or host name, Windows registry key, or operating
system information.
Click Help for information on configuring rules.
6 Click OK until you return to the Group Update Provider List dialog box, where
you can optionally add more rule sets.
7 Click OK.
8 Return to the procedure to configure a Group Update Provider.
To configure an explicit list of Group Update Providers
1 In the Group Update Provider dialog box, check Explicit Group Update
Providers for roaming clients, and then click Configure Explicit Group
Update Provider List.
2 Click Add.
3 In the Add Explicit Group Update Provider dialog box, type the client subnet
that you want to map these Group Update Providers to.
Click Specify Client Subnet Mask to add multiple client subnets at one time.
4 Select the Type of mapping you want to set up: based on the IP address, the
host name, or the Group Update Provider's network address.
Type in the necessary settings for the type of mapping you selected.
5 Click OK.
Searching for the clients that act as Group Update Providers

You can verify that clients are available as Group Update Providers. You can view
a list of Group Update Providers by searching for them on the Clients tab.
Note: You can also check a client's properties. The properties include a field that
indicates whether or not the client is a Group Update Provider.
To search for the clients that act as Group Update Providers

2 On the Clients tab, in the View box, select Client status.
3 In the Tasks pane, click Search clients.
4 In the Find drop-down list, select Computers.
5 In the In Group box, specify the group name.
6 Under Search Criteria, click in the Search Field column and select Group
Update Provider.
7 Under Search Criteria, click in the Comparison Operator column and select
=.
8 Under Search Criteria, click in the Value column and select True.
Click Help for information on the search criteria.
9 Click Search.
About the effects of configuring more than one type of Group Update
Provider in your network
When you configure single or multiple Group Update Providers in policies, then
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager constructs a global list of all the providers
that have checked in. By default, this file is:
64-bit operating systems: C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager\data\outbox\agent\gup\globallist.xml
32-bit operating systems: C:\Program Files\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager\data\outbox\agent\gup\globallist.xml.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager provides this global list to any client that
asks for it so that the client can determine which Group Update Provider it should
use. Because of this process, clients that have policies with only multiple or explicit
Group Update Providers configured can also use single Group Update Providers,
if the single provider meets the explicit mapping criterion. This phenomenon can
occur because single providers are a part of the global list of providers that the
clients get from their Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
So, all of the Group Update Providers that are configured in any of the policies on
a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager are potentially available for clients' use.
If you apply a policy that contains only an explicit Group Update Provider list to the
clients in a group, all of the clients in the group attempt to use the Group Update
Providers that are in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager global Group
Update Provider list that meet the explicit mapping criteria.
Note: A Symantec Endpoint Protection client may have multiple IP addresses.

Symantec Endpoint Protection considers all IP addresses when it matches to a
Group Update Provider. So, the IP address that the policy matches is not always
bound to the interface that the client uses to communicate with the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager and the Group Update Provider.
If all types of Group Update Providers are configured in the policies on a Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager, then clients try to connect to Group Update Providers
in the global list in the following order:
Providers on the Multiple Group Update Providers list, in order
Providers on the Explicit Group Update Providers list, in order
The Provider that is configured as a Single Group Update Provider
You can configure the following types of explicit mapping criteria:
IP address: Clients in subnet A should use the Group Update Provider that has
the IP address x.x.x.x.
Host name: Clients in subnet A should use the Group Update Provider that has
the host name xxxx.
Subnet network address: Clients in subnet A should use any Group Update
Provider that resides on subnet B.
Using Intelligent Updater files to update content on Windows computers
Multiple mapping criteria can be used in an explicit Group Update Provider list in a
single policy. Symantec recommends that you be very careful how you configure
multiple mapping criteria to avoid unintended consequences. For example, you can
strand your clients without a means of obtaining updates if you misconfigure an
explicit mapping.
Consider a scenario with the following multiple explicit mapping criteria configured
in a single policy:
If a client is in subnet 10.1.2.0, use the Group Update Provider that has IP
address 10.2.2.24
If a client is in subnet 10.1.2.0, use the Group Update Provider that has IP
address 10.2.2.25
If a client is in subnet 10.1.2.0, use the Group Update Provider that has host
name SomeMachine
If a client is in subnet 10.1.2.0, use any Group Update Provider on subnet
10.5.12.0
If a client is in subnet 10.6.1.0, use any Group Update Provider on subnet
10.10.10.0
With this explicit Group Update Provider policy, if a client is in subnet 10.1.2.0, the
first four rules apply; the fifth rule does not. If the client is in a subnet for which no
mapping is specified, such as 10.15.1.0, then none of the rules apply to that client.
That client's policy says to use an explicit Group Update Provider list, but there is
no mapping that the client can use based on these rules. If you also disabled that
client's ability to download updates from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
and the Symantec LiveUpdate server, then that client has no usable update method.
on page 205.
Using Intelligent Updater files to update content on

Windows computers
Symantec recommends that client computers use LiveUpdate to update content
on clients. However, if you do not want to use LiveUpdate or if LiveUpdate is not
available, you can use an Intelligent Updater file to update Windows clients with
some types of content. The Intelligent Updater .exe files are designed to update
clients only. Intelligent Updater files do not contain the information that a Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager needs to update its managed clients.
An Intelligent Updater file is a self-executing file that contains virus and spyware
definitions, SONAR definitions, and intrusion prevention signatures.
An Intelligent Updater file does not provide updates for any other type of content.
After you download the file, you can use your preferred distribution method to
distribute the updates to your clients.
Note: Intelligent Updater does not support the Extended file attributes and signatures,
the Auto-Protect portal list, Power Eraser definitions, or reduced-size definitions.
To download an Intelligent Updater file

1 Using your web browser, go to the following site:
ftp://ftp.symantec.com/AVDEFS/symantec_antivirus_corp/
2 On the FTP site, click the appropriate product file with the .exe extension.
3 When you are prompted for a location in which to save the file, select a folder
on your hard drive.
4 Distribute the file to the client computers using your preferred distribution
method.
To install the virus and security risk definitions files on a client computer
1 On the client computer, locate the Intelligent Updater file that was distributed
to the client.
2 Double-click the .exe file and follow the on-screen instructions.
Using third-party distribution tools to update client

computers
Some large enterprises rely on third-party distribution tools like IBM Tivoli or
Microsoft SMS to distribute content updates to client computers. Symantec Endpoint
Protection supports the use of third-party distribution tools to update the managed
and unmanaged clients that run Windows operating systems. Mac and Linux clients
can only receive content updates from internal or external LiveUpdate servers.
Before you set up the use of third-party distribution tools, you must have already
installed Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and the client computers that you
want to update.
Table 8-7 Tasks to set up the use of third-party distribution tools for updates
Task Description
Configure Symantec Endpoint You can configure the management server either to receive content updates
Protection Manager to receive automatically or manually.
content updates.
Configure the group's If you want to use third-party distribution tools to update managed clients, you must
LiveUpdate Settings policy to configure the group's LiveUpdate Settings policy to allow it.
allow third-party content
See Configuring a LiveUpdate Settings policy to allow third-party content distribution
update distribution.
to managed clients on page 211.
Prepare unmanaged clients If you want to use third-party distribution tools to update unmanaged clients, you must
to receive updates from first create a registry key on each unmanaged client.
third-party distribution tools.
See Preparing unmanaged clients to receive updates from third-party distribution tools
on page 212.
Locate, copy, and distribute Each Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager client group has an index2.dax file that
the content. is located on the computer that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. These
files are located by default in subfolders under the C:\Program Files
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\data\outbox\agent folder. To
update clients, you need to use the index2.dax files.

Configuring a LiveUpdate Settings policy to allow third-party content

distribution to managed clients
If you want to use third-party distribution tools to update managed clients, you must
configure the client group's LiveUpdate Settings policy to allow it. You can choose
whether to disable the ability of client users to manually perform LiveUpdate.
When you are finished with this procedure, a folder appears on the group's client
computers in the following locations:
Vista and later operating systems
C:\ProgramData\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection\CurrentVersion\inbox
Pre-Vista operating systems (for legacy 12.1.x clients)
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Symantec\CurrentVersion\inbox
To enable third-party content distribution to managed clients with a LiveUpdate

policy
3 On the LiveUpdate Settings tab, under Tasks, click Add a LiveUpdate Setting
Policy.
4 In the LiveUpdate Policy window, in the Policy name and Description text
boxes, type a name and description.
6 Under Third Party Management, check Enable third party content
management.
7 Uncheck all other LiveUpdate source options.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Assign Policy dialog box, click Yes.
Optionally, you can cancel out of this procedure and assign the policy at a later
time.
10 In the Assign LiveUpdate Policy dialog box, check one or more groups to
which to assign this policy, and then click Assign.
on page 197.
Preparing unmanaged clients to receive updates from third-party

distribution tools
If you install unmanaged clients from the installation file, you cannot immediately
use third-party distribution tools to distribute LiveUpdate content or policy updates
to them. As a security measure, by default these client computers do not trust or
process the content that third-party distribution tools deliver to them.
To successfully use third-party distribution tools to deliver updates, you must first
create a Windows registry key on each of the unmanaged clients. The key lets you
use the inbox folder on unmanaged clients to distribute LiveUpdate content and
policy updates by using third-party distribution tools.
The inbox folder appears on unmanaged clients in the following locations:
Vista and later operating systems
C:\ProgramData\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection\CurrentVersion\inbox
Pre-Vista operating systems (for legacy 12.1.x clients)
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Symantec\

CurrentVersion\inbox
Once you create the registry key, you can use a third-party distribution tool to copy
content or policy updates to this folder. The Symantec Endpoint Protection client
software then trusts and processes the updates.
To prepare unmanaged clients to receive updates from third-party distribution
tools
1 On each client computer, use regedit.exe or another Windows registry editing
tool to add one of the following Windows registry keys:
On 12.1.5 and later clients on a 64-bit computer, add
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection\SMC\SPE\TPMState
On 12.1.5 and later clients on a 32-bit computer, and all other 12.1 clients,
add HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection\SMC\SPE\TPMState
2 Set the value type of the registry key to DWORD (32-bit) or QWORD (64-bit)
and the value to hexadecimal 80 as follows:
0x00000080 (128)
3 Save the registry key, and then exit the registry editing tool.
See Using third-party distribution tools to update client computers on page 210.
Distributing the content using third-party distribution tools

To use third-party distribution tools to distribute content to client computers, you
need to use the index2.dax file. The LiveUpdate-related content in the index2 file
includes a set of GUIDs called content monikers and their associated sequence
numbers. Each content moniker corresponds to a particular content type. Each
sequence number in the index2 file corresponds to a revision of a particular content
type. Depending on the protection features that you have installed, you need to
determine which of the content types you need.
Note: Content monikers typically change with each major release. At times, they
may also change for a minor release. Symantec does not typically change the
monikers for Release Updates or Maintenance Patches.
You can see a mapping of the moniker to its content type by opening the
ContentInfo.txt file. By default, the ContentInfo.txt file is located in C:\Program Files
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\Inetpub\content\.
For example, you might see the following entry:
{535CB6A4-441F-4e8a-A897-804CD859100E}: SEPC Virus Definitions

Win32 12.1 RU6 - MicroDefsB.CurDefs - SymAllLanguages
Each Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager client group has its own index2 file.
The index2 file for each client group is found in a folder for that group. By default,
the folders for client groups are found in C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager\data\outbox\agent\. The folder name for a client group
corresponds to the group policy serial number. You can find the serial number in
the Group Properties dialog box or on the Clients page Details tab. The first four
hexadecimal values of each group policy serial number match the first four
hexadecimal values of that group's folder.
The index2.dax file that managed clients use is encrypted. To look at the contents
of the file, open the index2.xml file that is available in the same folder. The
index2.xml file provides a list of the content monikers and their sequence (revision)
numbers. For example, you might see the following entry:
<File Checksum="D5ED508E8CF7A8A4450B0DBA39BCCB25" DeltaFlag="1"

FullSize="625203112" LastModifiedTime="1425983765211" Moniker=
"{535CB6A4-441F-4e8a-A897-804CD859100E}" Seq="150309034"/>
The LiveUpdate Content policy for a group specifies either a particular revision of
content or the latest content. The sequence number in the index2 file must match
the sequence number that corresponds to the content specification in the group's
LiveUpdate Content policy. For example, if the policy is configured to Use latest
available for all content types, then the sequence number for each type is the latest
available content. In this example, the distribution only works if the index2 file calls
out the sequence numbers (revisions) that correspond to the latest content revision.
The distribution fails if the sequence numbers correspond to any other revisions.
Note: You must use the Copy command to place files into the client's \inbox folder.
Using the Move command does not trigger update processing, and the update fails.
If you compress content into a single archive for distribution, you should not unzip
it directly into the \inbox folder.
To distribute content to clients with third-party distribution tools

1 On the computer that runs the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, create
a working folder such as \Work_Dir.
2 Do one of the following actions:
For a managed client, in the console, on the Clients tab, right-click the
group to update, and then click Properties.
For an unmanaged client, in the console, on the Clients tab, right-click My
Company, and then click Properties.
3 Write down the first four hexadecimal values of the Policy Serial Number,
such as 7B86.
4 Navigate to one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager\data\outbox\agent (64-bit operating systems)
C:\Program Files\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager\data\outbox\agent (32-bit operating systems)
5 Locate the folder that contains the first four hexadecimal values that match the
Policy Serial Number.
6 Open that folder, and then copy the index2.dax file to your working folder.
7 Navigate to one of the following folders:
Manager\Inetpub\content (64-bit operating systems)
C:\Program Files\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager\Inetpub\content (32-bit operating systems)
8 Open and read ContentInfo.txt to discover the content that each target
moniker folder contains.
The contents of each directory is target moniker\sequence number\full.zip|full.
9 Copy the contents of each \target moniker folder to your working folder such
as \Work_Dir.
10 Delete all files and folders from each \target moniker so that only the following
folder structure and file remain in your working folder:
\\Work_Dir\target moniker\latest sequence number\full.zip
Your working folder now contains the folder structure and files to distribute to
your clients.
11 Use your third-party distribution tools to distribute the content of your working
folder to the \\Symantec Endpoint Protection\inbox\ folder on each of the clients.
The end result must look like the following:
\\Symantec Endpoint Protection\inbox\index2.dax
\\Symantec Endpoint Protection\inbox\target moniker\latest sequence
number\full.zip
Files that are processed successfully are then deleted. Files that are not
processed successfully are moved to a subfolder named Invalid. If you see
files in an Invalid folder under the inbox folder, then you must try again with
those files.
See Preparing unmanaged clients to receive updates from third-party distribution
tools on page 212.
Downloading Endpoint Protection security patches

to Windows clients
What are security patches and how do they work?
A security patch is a software patch for Symantec Endpoint Protection clients that
corrects a vulnerability that exists in the client code. As new vulnerabilities become
known, Symantec delivers a security patch to fix the vulnerability and uploads it to
a LiveUpdate server. Starting in version 14, you can download security patches
from the LiveUpdate server to the management server. You then download the
patches to clients in the same way as other content, using a LiveUpdate server,
the management server, or a Group Update Provider.
Note: In versions earlier than 14, security patches are only available as part of a
new release, and only as part of a client deployment package using AutoUpgrade.
In 14, you can use AutoUpgrade to install the security patches on the clients when
both Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and the clients have the same version
installed.

If the client and the management server versions match, the clients can get the
security patches from a LiveUpdate server, a management server, or a GUP. If the
client and the management server versions do not match, the clients get the security
patches from a LiveUpdate server only, as in the case when a management server
manages clients with multiple versions. If you want to use the management server
or a GUP to download patches, you must update either the client or the management
server version so that they are the same version.
Table 8-8 displays examples of whether or not the client can receive security patches
from the management server, based on the version number of Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and the Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
Note: These are examples only and not true versions.
Table 8-8 Examples of which client versions download which security patches
Management server Client version Does the client download

version patches from the
management server?
14 14 Yes
14 RU1 14 No
14 RU1 14 RU1 Yes
14 RU1 MP1 14 RU1 No
14 14 RU1 No
Security patches are not available for 12.1.x clients. In addition, the language for
the client must match the management server. For example, a French management
server that manages French, German, and simplified Chinese clients provides
security patches to the French clients only.
Installing security patches on Windows clients

By default, LiveUpdate downloads security patches to Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager, which in turn installs the patches on the clients based on the distribution
method you have configured for the other content types.
After a client downloads and installs a security patch, it continues to run the previous,
unpatched version of the client until the client is restarted. You must restart the
client to run the latest patch. Either the client end user must restart the computer,
or you must run the restart command from the management server. The
management server sends you a notification that indicates which clients require a
restart.
To install security patches on Windows clients
1 In the console, verify that LiveUpdate is configured to download the security
patches to the management server.
In the Content Types to Download dialog box, make sure that Client security
patches is checked.
See Downloading content from LiveUpdate to the Symantec Endpoint
2 To run a report to find out which release is installed on the client computers,
run a Protection Content Versions report.
See Generating a list of the Symantec Endpoint Protection versions installed
in your network on page 593.
3 Verify that the LiveUpdate Settings policy is configured to download the patches
to the clients.
In a LiveUpdate Settings policy, under Windows Settings, click Advanced
Settings. Make sure Download security patches to fix the vulnerabilities
in the latest version of the Symantec Endpoint Protection client is checked.
4 When notified, restart the client computers.
Section 3
Managing groups, clients,
and administrators
Chapter 9. Managing groups of client computers
Chapter 10. Managing clients
Chapter 11. Managing remote clients
Chapter 12. Managing administrator accounts and passwords
Chapter 13. Managing domains

Chapter 9
Managing groups of client
computers
Managing groups of clients
How you can structure groups
Adding a group
Importing existing groups and computers from an Active Directory or an LDAP

server
Disabling a group's inheritance
Blocking client computers from being added to groups
Moving a client computer to another group

In Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, groups function as containers for the
endpoints that run the client software. These endpoints can be either computers,
or users. You organize the clients that have similar security needs into groups to
make it easier to manage network security.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager contains the following default groups:
The My Company group is the top-level, or parent, group. It contains a flat tree
of child groups.
The Default Group is a subgroup of My Company. Clients are first assigned
to the Default Group when they first register with Symantec Endpoint Protection
Managing groups of client computers 221
Manager, unless they belong to a predefined group. You cannot create subgroups
under the Default Group.
Note: You cannot rename or delete the default groups.
Table 9-1 Group management actions
Task Description
Add groups See How you can structure groups on page 222.
Import existing groups If your organization already has an existing group structure,
you can import the groups as organizational units.
Note: You cannot manage imported organizational units in
the same ways that you can manage the groups that you
create in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
See Importing existing groups and computers from an Active

Directory or an LDAP server on page 223.
Disable inheritance for The subgroups inherit the same security settings from the
subgroups parent group by default. You can disable inheritance.
Create locations within You can set up the clients to switch automatically to a different
groups security policy if the physical location of the client changes.
Some security settings are group-specific and some settings

are location-specific. You can customize any settings that
are location-specific.
See Configuring communication settings for a location

on page 266.
Manage security policies for You can create security policies based on the needs of each
groups group. You can then assign different policies to different
groups or locations.
See Adding a policy on page 307.
See Performing the tasks that are common to all policies

on page 302.
Table 9-1 Group management actions (continued)
Task Description
Perform group maintenance You can move groups for easier management and move
clients between groups. You can also block clients from being
added to a particular group.
See Blocking client computers from being added to groups

on page 231.

You can create multiple groups and subgroups to match the organizational structure
and security of your company. You can base your group structure on function, role,
geography, or a combination of criteria.
Table 9-2 Criteria for creating groups
Criterion Description
Function You can create groups based on the types of computers to be managed, such
as laptops, desktops, and servers. Alternatively, you can create multiple
groups that are based on usage type. For example, you can create a remote
group for the client computers that travel and a local group for the client
computers that remain in the office.
Role You can create groups for department roles, such sales, engineering, finance,
and marketing.
Geography You can create groups based on the offices, cities, states, regions, or countries
where the computers are located.
Combination You can create groups based on a combination of criteria. For example, you
can use the function and the role.
You can add a parent group by role and add child subgroups by function, as
in the following scenario:
Sales, with subgroups of laptops, desktops, and servers.

Engineering, with subgroups of laptops, desktops, and servers.
After you organize the client computers into groups, you can apply the appropriate
amount of security to that group.
For example, suppose that a company has telemarketing and accounting
departments. These departments have staff in the company's New York, London,
Adding a group
and Frankfurt offices. All computers in both departments are assigned to the same
group so that they receive virus and security risk definitions updates from the same
source. However, IT reports indicate that the telemarketing department is more
vulnerable to risks than the accounting department. As a result, the system
administrator creates separate telemarketing and accounting groups. Telemarketing
clients share configuration settings that strictly limit how users can interact with
their virus and security risk protection.
Best Practices for Creating Group Structure
Adding a group
You can add groups after you define the group structure for your organization.
Group descriptions may be up to 1024 characters long. Group names may contain
any character except the following characters: [ / \ * ? < > | :] Group descriptions
are not restricted.
Note: You cannot add groups to the Default Group.
See How you can structure groups on page 222.

To add a group
2 Under Clients, select the group to which you want to add a new subgroup.
3 On the Clients tab, under Tasks, click Add Group.
4 In the Add Group for group name dialog box, type the group name and a
description.
5 Click OK.
Importing existing groups and computers from an

Active Directory or an LDAP server
If your company uses either Active Directory or an LDAP server to manage groups,
you can import the group structure into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
You can then manage the groups and computers from the management console.
Importing existing groups and computers from an Active Directory or an LDAP server
Table 9-3 lists the tasks you should perform to import the group structure before
you can manage them.
Table 9-3 Importing existing groups and computers
Step Description
Step 1: Connect Symantec Endpoint You can connect Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to either Active
Protection Manager to your company's Directory or an LDAP-compatible server. When you add the server, you
directory server should enable synchronization.
See About importing organizational units from the directory server

on page 225.
See Connecting Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to a directory

server on page 226.
See Connecting to a directory server on a replicated site on page 227.
Step 2: Import either entire You can either import the existing group structure, or import individual
organizational units or specific computer computer accounts or user accounts into the Symantec Endpoint Protection
accounts or user accounts Manager groups that you create.
See Importing organizational units from a directory server on page 228.
If you want to use the group structure of Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager and not the directory server, import individual accounts.
See Searching for and importing specific accounts from a directory server
on page 229.
Step 3: Either keep imported computer After you import organizational units, you can do either of the following
or user accounts in their own group or actions:
copy imported accounts to existing
Keep the imported organizational units or accounts in their own groups.
groups
After you import organizational units or individual accounts, you assign
policies to the organizational unit or group.
Copy the imported accounts to existing Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager groups. The copied accounts follow the policy of the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager group and not the imported organizational
unit.

Table 9-3 Importing existing groups and computers (continued)
Step Description
Step 4: Change the authentication For the administrator accounts that you added in Symantec Endpoint
method for administrator accounts Protection Manager, change the authentication method to use directory
(optional) server authentication instead of the default Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager authentication. You can use the administrator accounts to
authenticate the accounts that you imported. When an administrator logs on
to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, the management server retrieves
the user name from the database and the password from the directory server.
See Changing the authentication method for administrator accounts

on page 276.
See Checking the authentication to a directory server on page 282.
About importing organizational units from the directory server

Microsoft Active Directory and LDAP servers use organizational units to manage
accounts for computers and users. You can import an organizational unit and its
account data into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, and manage the account
data in the management console. Because Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
treats the organizational unit as a group, you can then assign a security policy to
the organizational unit group.
You can also move accounts from the organizational units into a Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager group by copying the accounts. The same account then exists
in both the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager group and the organizational
unit. Because the priority of the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager group is
higher than the organizational unit, the copied accounts adopt the policy of the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager group.
If you delete an account from the directory server that you copied to a Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager group, the account name still remains in the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager group. You must remove the account from the
management server manually.
If you need to modify the account data in the organizational unit, you perform this
task on the directory server, and not in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
For example, you can delete an organizational unit from the management server,
which does not permanently delete the organizational unit in the directory server.
You must synchronize Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager with the Active
Directory server so that these changes get automatically updated in Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. You enable synchronization when you set up the
connection to the directory server.
Note: Synchronization is only possible for Active Directory Servers. Symantec

Endpoint Protection does not support synchronization with LDAP servers.
You can also import selected users to a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
group rather than importing the entire organizational unit.
See Connecting Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to a directory server
on page 226.
server on page 223.
on page 229.
Connecting Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to a directory

server
You must first connect Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to your company's
directory server before you can import the organizational units that contain computer
accounts or user accounts.
You cannot modify the accounts in organizational units in the management server,
only in the directory server. However, you can synchronize the account data between
an Active Directory server and the management server. Any changes you make in
the Active Directory server are automatically updated in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. Any changes that you make on the Active Directory server do
not appear immediately in the organizational unit that was imported into the
management server. The latency period depends on the synchronization frequency.
You enable synchronization and set the synchronization frequency when you
configure the connection.
If you delete a directory server connection from Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager, you must first delete any organizational units that you imported that are
associated with that connection. Then you can synchronize data between the
servers.

To connect Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to a directory server

2 Under Servers and Local Site, select the management server.
4 In the Server Properties dialog box, on the Directory Servers tab, click Add.
5 In the Add Directory Server dialog box, type a name for the directory server.
6 Check Active Directory or LDAP and type the IP address, host name, or
domain name.
If you add an LDAP server, change the port number of the LDAP server if it
should be different than the default value.
7 If you want an encrypted connection, check Use Secure Connection.
8 Click OK.
9 On the Directory Servers tab, check Synchronize with Directory Servers
and under Schedule, set up the synchronization schedule.
10 Click OK.
on page 229.
server on page 223.
Connecting to a directory server on a replicated site

If a site uses a replicated Active Directory or LDAP server, you can connect
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to both the primary directory server and
the replicated server. If the primary directory server gets disconnected, the
management server stays connected to the replicated directory server.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager can then authenticate administrator
accounts and synchronize organizational units on all the Active Directory servers
of the local site and the replicated sites.

To connect to a directory server on a replicated site

2 Under Servers, select the management server.
4 In the Server Properties dialog box, on the Directory Servers tab, click Add.
5 In the Add Directory Server dialog box, on the Replication Servers tab, click
Add.
6 In the Add Replication Server dialog box, type the IP address, host name, or
domain name for the directory server, and then click OK.
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK.
on page 226.
Importing organizational units from a directory server

When you import computer accounts or user accounts from an Active Directory or
LDAP server, you import these accounts as organizational units. You can then
apply a security policy to the organizational unit. You can also copy these accounts
to an existing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager group.
You can import the organizational unit as a subgroup of either the My Company
group or a group you create, but not the Default Group. You cannot create groups
as a subgroup of an organizational unit. You cannot place an organizational unit in
more than one Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager group.
If you do not want to import all computer accounts or user accounts within a group,
then you can select and import specific accounts.
on page 229.
Note: Before you import organizational units into Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager, you must convert some of the special characters that precede a computer
name or user name. You perform this task in the directory server. If you do not
convert special characters, the management server does not import these accounts.
You must convert the following special characters:

A space or a hash character (#) that occurs at the beginning of an entry.
A space character that occurs at the end of an entry.

A comma (,), plus sign (+), double quotation mark (), less than or greater than
symbols (< or >), equals sign (=), semi-colon (;), backslash (\).
To allow a name that includes these characters to be imported, you must precede
each character with a backslash character (\).
To import organizational units from a directory server
1 Connect Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to a directory server.
on page 226.
2 In the console, click Clients, and under Clients, select the group to which you
want to add the organizational unit.
3 Under Tasks, click Import Organizational Unit or Container.
4 In the Domain drop-down list, choose the directory server name you created
in step 1.
5 Select either the domain or a subgroup.
6 Click OK.
server on page 223.
See About importing organizational units from the directory server on page 225.
Searching for and importing specific accounts from a directory server

You can import specific computer accounts or user accounts rather than an entire
group structure from a directory server into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
groups. You should import specific accounts if you want to apply different security
policies for the accounts in an organizational unit.
For example, you might want to maintain remote computers in one group. You
would create a group for remote computers and assign a group policy that is tailored
for remote computers in that group. You can then search for and import computers
from the organizational unit directly to the remote group.
If you do not want to import specific accounts, then you can import all accounts
within an organizational unit.
To search for and import specific accounts from a directory server

1 Connect to a directory server.
on page 226.
3 On the Clients tab, under Tasks, click Import Active Directory or LDAP
Users.
4 In the Import Active Directory or LDAP Users dialog box, select the server
name in the Directory Server drop-down list.
The user name and password of the server automatically appears.
If Only show users that are not added in any group is checked, only those
accounts appear that have not already been added.
5 Click List Users.
In the LDAP Filter field, you can also type an LDAP query to locate the names
of accounts that you want to import.
For more information, click Help.
6 To select specific accounts, click Add, or click Add All.

7 Click Close.

In the group structure, subgroups initially and automatically inherit the locations,
policies, and settings from their parent group. By default, inheritance is enabled for
every group. You can disable inheritance so that you can configure separate security
settings for a subgroup. If you make changes and later enable inheritance, any
changes that you made in the subgroup's settings are overwritten.
To disable a group's inheritance

2 On the Clients page, under Clients, select the group for which you want to
disable or enable inheritance.
You can select any group except the top-level group, My Company.
3 In the group name pane, on the Policies tab, uncheck Inherit policies and
settings from parent group "group name".

You can set up client installation packages with their group membership already
defined. If you define a group in the package, the client computer automatically is
added to the appropriate group. The client is added the first time it makes a
connection to the management server.
See Managing client installation packages on page 131.
You can block a client if you do not want clients to be added automatically to a
specific group when they connect to the network. You can block a new client from
being added to the group to which they were assigned in the client installation
package. In this case, the client gets added to the default group. You can manually
move a computer to a blocked group.
To block client computers from being added to groups
2 Under Clients, right-click a group, and click Properties.
3 On the Details tab, under Tasks, click Edit Group Properties.
4 In the Group Properties for group name dialog box, click Block New Clients.
5 Click OK.

If your client computers are not in the correct group, you can move them to another
group.
To move client from multiple groups into a single group, you can redeploy the client
installation package.
To move a client computer to another group

2 On the Clients page, select a group.
3 On the Clients tab, in the selected group, select the computer, and then
right-click Move.
Use the Shift key or the Control key to select multiple computers.
4 In the Move Clients dialog box, select the new group.
5 Click OK.
Chapter 10
Managing clients
Managing client computers
Viewing the protection status of client computers
Searching for the clients that do not have the client software installed
Searching for information about client computers
About enabling and disabling protection when you need to troubleshoot problems
What are the commands that you can run on client computers?
Running commands on client computers from the console
Ensuring that a client does not restart
Switching a Windows client between user mode and computer mode
Configuring a client to detect unmanaged devices
Preventing users from disabling protection on client computers
Preventing and allowing users to change the client's user interface
Collecting user information
Password-protecting the client

Managing clients 234

Table 10-1 Tasks to manage client computers
Task Description
Check that the client You can display the computers in each group that do not have the client software
software is installed on your installed yet.
computers See Searching for the clients that do not have the client software installed
on page 237.
You can configure a client computer to detect that other devices do not have the
client software installed. Some of these devices might be unprotected computers.
You can then install the client software on these computers.
See Configuring a client to detect unmanaged devices on page 247.
You can add a client to a group and install the client software later.
on page 115.
Check whether the client is You can check the client status icons in the management console and in the client. The
connected to the status icon shows whether the client and the server communicate.
management server
A computer may have the client software installed, but is an unmanaged client. You
cannot manage an unmanaged client. Instead, you can convert the unmanaged client
to a managed client.
Configure the connection After you install the client software client computers automatically connect to the
between the client and the management server at the next heartbeat. You can change how the server
server communicates with the client computer.
You can troubleshoot any connection issues.
See Troubleshooting communication problems between Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager and the console or the database on page 726.
Table 10-1 Tasks to manage client computers (continued)
Task Description
Check that client computers You can view the status of each protection technology on your client computers.
have the right level of See Viewing the protection status of client computers on page 236.
protection See Checking whether the client is connected to the management server and is
You can run reports or view logs to see whether you need to increase protection or
improve performance. For example, the scans may cause false positives. You can
also identify the client computers that need protection.
You can modify protection based on specific attributes of the client software or the
client computers.
See Searching for information about client computers on page 238.
Adjust the protection on If you decide that clients do not have the right level of protection, you can adjust the
client computers protection settings.
You can increase or decrease each type of protection based on the results in the
reports and logs.
on page 29.
You can temporarily disable protection on the client computers if you need to
diagnose a problem or improve performance.
You can require a password on the client.
Move endpoints from one To change a client computer's level of protection, you can move it to a group that
group to another to modify provides more protection or less protection.
protection (optional)
When you deploy a client installation package, you specify which group the client goes
in. You can move the client to a different group. But if the client gets deleted or
disconnected and then gets added again and reconnected, the client returns to the
original group. To keep the client with the group it was last moved to, configure the
reconnection preferences. You configure these settings in the Communications
Settings dialog box on the Clients > Policies tab.
Table 10-1 Tasks to manage client computers (continued)
Task Description
Let users control computer You can specify the kind of control that users have over the protection on client
protection (optional) computers.
For Virus and Spyware Protection and Proactive Threat Protection, you can lock or
unlock a check box to specify whether users can change individual settings.
See Locking and unlocking Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings
on page 317.
For the Firewall policy and the IPS policy and for some client user interface settings,
you can change the user control level more generally.
See Preventing users from disabling protection on client computers on page 248.
If users need full control of the client, you can install an unmanaged client.
Remove the Symantec If you decommissioned a client computer and you want to use the license for a different
Endpoint Protection client computer, you can uninstall the Symantec Endpoint Protection client software. For the
software from managed clients that do not connect, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager deletes
decommissioned computers clients from the database after 30 days by default.
(optional)
You can change the period of time after which Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
deletes the client from the database. By deleting a client, you also save space in the
database.
See Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows on page 129.
See Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Mac on page 130.
See Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Linux on page 130.
See Purging obsolete clients from the database to make more licenses available
on page 101.

You can view information about the real-time operational and protection status of
the clients and the computers in your network.
You can view:
A list of managed client computers that do not have the client installed.
You can view the computer name, the domain name, and the name of the user
who is logged on.
Which protections are enabled and disabled.
Which client computers have the latest policies and definitions.
Searching for the clients that do not have the client software installed
The group's policy serial number and the client's version number.
The information about the client computer's network components, such as the
MAC address of the network card that the computer uses.
The system information about the client computer, such as the amount of
available disk space and the operating system version number.
After you know the status of a particular client, you can resolve any security issues
on the client computers. You can resolve many issues by running commands on
groups. For example, you can update content, or enable Auto-Protect.
Note: If you manage any clients that run an earlier version of Symantec Endpoint
Protection, some newer protection technologies may be listed as not reporting.
This behavior is expected. It does not mean that you need to take action on these
clients.
See Searching for the clients that do not have the client software installed
on page 237.
To view the protection status of client computers
2 On the Clients page, under Clients, locate the group that contains the clients
that you want information about.
3 On the Clients tab, click the View drop-down list. Then, select a category.
You can go directly to a particular page by typing the page number in the text
box at the bottom right-hand corner.
Searching for the clients that do not have the client

software installed
You can search for clients in a group based on the following criteria:
Client software is installed.
Clients run on Windows, Mac, or Linux computers
Windows clients are in computer mode or user mode.
Clients are non-persistent and offline in Virtual desktop infrastructures.

To search for the clients that do not have the client software installed
2 In the Clients pane, choose the group you want to search on.
3 On the Clients tab, under Tasks, click Set display filter.
4 In the Set Display Filter dialog box, check New users or computers that
have been created but that don't yet have the client software installed.
5 Click OK.

You can search for information about the clients, client computers, and users to
make informed decisions about the security of your network.
For example, you can find which computers in the Sales group run the latest
operating system. You can find out which client computers in the Finance group
need the latest virus definitions installed.
Note: To search for most of the information about the users, you must collect user
information either during the client software installation or later. This user information
is also displayed on the General tab and the User Info tab in the client's Edit
Properties dialog box.
See Collecting user information on page 252.

To search for information about client computers
2 Under Tasks, click Search clients.
3 In the Search clients dialog box, in the Find drop-down list, click either
Computers or Users.
4 Click Browse to select a group other than the default group. Click to select the
group, and then click OK.
5 Under Search Criteria, click in the Search Field to see the drop-down list,
and then select the criteria by which you want to search.
To find embedded clients, you can search for the type of write filters in use.
Click Enhanced Write Filter, File Based Write Filter, or Unified Write Filter
to search for whether they are installed, enabled, or both. You can also search
for the reduced-size client. Click Install Type to search for a value of Reduced
Size.
6 Click the Comparison Operator drop-down list, and then select a comparison
operator.
You can use standard Boolean operators in your search criteria. Click Help
for more information on the options.
7 In the Value cell, type the search string.
8 Click Search.
You can export the results into a text file.
9 Click Close.
You can export the data that is contained in the query into a text file.
About enabling and disabling protection when you

need to troubleshoot problems
In general, you should always keep the protection technologies enabled on a client
computer.
You might need to temporarily disable either all the protection technologies or
individual protection technologies if you have a problem with the client computer.
For example, if an application does not run or does not run correctly, you might
want to disable Network Threat Protection. If you still have the problem after you
disable all protection technologies, completely uninstall the client. If the problem
persists, you know that the problem is not due to Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Warning: Be sure to enable again any of the protections when you have completed
your troubleshooting task to ensure that the computer remains protected.
Table 10-2 Purpose for disabling a protection technology
Protection technology Purpose for disabling the protection technology
Virus and Spyware If you disable this protection, you disable Auto-Protect only.
Protection
If you disable Auto-Protect, you also disable Download Insight, even if Download Insight
is enabled. SONAR also cannot detect heuristic threats. SONAR detection of host file
and system changes continues to function.
The scheduled or startup scans still run if you or the user has configured them to do so.
You might disable Auto-Protect for the following reasons:
Auto-Protect might block you from opening a document. For example, if you open a
Microsoft Word that has a macro, Auto-Protect may not let you open it. If you know
that the document is safe, you can disable Auto-Protect.
Auto-Protect may warn you about a virus-like activity that you know is not the work
of a virus. For example, you might get a warning when you install new computer
applications. If you plan to install more applications and you want to avoid the warning,
you can temporarily disable Auto-Protect.
Auto-Protect may interfere with Windows driver replacement.
Auto-Protect might slow down the client computer.
If Auto-Protect causes a problem with an application, it is better to create an exception

than to permanently disable the protection.
Proactive Threat Protection You might want to disable Proactive Threat Protection for the following reasons:
You see too many warnings about the threats that you know are not threats.
Proactive Threat Protection might slow down the client computer.
See Adjusting SONAR settings on your client computers on page 486.

Table 10-2 Purpose for disabling a protection technology (continued)
Protection technology Purpose for disabling the protection technology
Network Threat Protection You might want to disable Network Threat Protection for the following reasons:
You install an application that might cause the firewall to block it.
The firewall or the intrusion prevention system causes network connectivity-related
issues.
The firewall might slow down the client computer.
You cannot open an application.
If you are not sure that Network Threat Protection causes the problem, you might need
to disable all the protection technologies.
You can configure Network Threat Protection so that users cannot enable or disable it.
You can also set the following limits for when and how long the protection is disabled:
Whether the client allows either all traffic or all outbound traffic only.
The length of time the protection is disabled.
How many times you can disable protection before you restart the client.
See Enabling network intrusion prevention or browser intrusion prevention on page 373.
See Preventing and allowing users to change the client's user interface on page 250.
Generic Exploit Mitigation Typically, you should keep Generic Exploit Mitigation enabled.
You might want to disable Generic Exploit Mitigation if some of your applications become
unstable.
See Using Generic Exploit Mitigation on page 385.
Tamper Protection Typically, you should keep Tamper Protection enabled.
You might want to disable Tamper Protection temporarily if you get an extensive number
of false positive detections. For example, some third-party applications might make the
changes that inadvertently try to modify Symantec settings or processes. If you are sure
that an application is safe, you can create a Tamper Protection exception for the
application.
See Changing Tamper Protection settings on page 489.
What are the commands that you can run on client

computers?
You can run commands remotely on individual clients or an entire group from the
console.
To see the results of any of the commands, click Monitors page > Logs >
Command Status.
Table 10-3 Commands that you can run on client computers
Commands Description
Scan Runs an on-demand scan on the client computers.
If you run a scan command, and select a Custom scan, the scan uses the command scan
settings that you configured on the Administrator-defined Scans page. The command uses
the settings that are in the Virus and Spyware Protection policy that is applied to the selected
client computers.
See Running on-demand scans on client computers on page 423.
Update Content Updates content on clients by initiating a LiveUpdate session on the client computers. The
clients receive the latest content from Symantec LiveUpdate.
on page 179.
Update Content and Updates content by initiating a LiveUpdate session and runs an on-demand scan on client
Scan computers.
Start Power Eraser Runs a Power Eraser analysis on the selected computers. You should typically run Power
Analysis Eraser only on a single computer or a small number of computers. You should only run Power
Eraser when computers exhibit instability or have persistent problems. Unlike other scans,
Power Eraser does not automatically remediate any potential threats. You must review the
detections in the logs and specify which risks you want to remove or leave alone.
Note: Mac and Linux client computers do not process this command.
See Starting Power Eraser analysis from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
on page 743.
Restart Client Restarts the client computers.

Computers
If users are logged on to the client, they are warned based on the restart options that the
administrator has configured for that client. You can configure client restart options on the
General Settings page.
Note: Restart options apply only to Windows client computers. Mac client computers always
perform a hard restart. Linux client computers ignore this command.
on page 124.
Note: You can ensure that a Windows client does not restart. You can add a registry key on
the client that keeps it from restarting even if an administrator issues a restart command.
See Ensuring that a client does not restart on page 245.

Table 10-3 Commands that you can run on client computers (continued)
Commands Description
Enable Auto-Protect Enables Auto-Protect for the file system on the client computers.
By default, Auto-Protect for the file system is enabled. You might need to enable Auto-Protect
from the console if you have allowed users to change the setting or if you disable Auto-Protect.
You can lock the setting so that users on client computers cannot disable Auto-Protect.
If you want to enable or disable Auto-Protect for email, you must include the setting in the
Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
Enable Network Enables or disables the firewall and enables intrusion prevention on the client computers.
Threat Protection and
Note: Linux client computers do not process this command.
Disable Network
Threat Protection See Managing firewall protection on page 323.
Enable Download Enables or disables Download Insight on the client computers.

Insight and Disable
Download Insight
See Managing Download Insight detections on page 429.
Delete From Deletes all files from Quarantine.

Quarantine
To access this command, click Admin > Admin > Add an Administrator > Access Rights.
Collect file fingerprint Generates a non-editable file fingerprint list from the selected clients. The collected fingerprint
list list appears on the Policies tab under Policy Components > File Fingerprint Lists. Typically,
you run this command on a single computer or small group of computers. If you select multiple
computers, the command collects a separate list for each computer.
For the commands that enable or disable a protection, you disable the protection
to troubleshoot problems on the client computer.
You can configure a limited administrator to have rights to some or none of these
commands.
See Adding an administrator account on page 276.
See Management features based on platform on page 752.
Running commands on client computers from the console
Running commands on client computers from the

console
You can run commands at any time on a client or a group, such as starting a scan.
On managed clients, the commands that you run from the management server
override the commands that the user runs. The order in which commands are
processed on the client computer differs from command to command. Regardless
of where the command is initiated, the commands are processed in the same way.
You run these commands from the following locations:
The Clients page.
The Computer Status log.
If you start a scan, you can also cancel it immediately.
To run commands on the client computer from the Clients page
In the left pane, under Clients, right-click the group for which you want to
run the command, and then click Run a command on the group >
command
In the right pane, on the Clients tab, right-click the computers or users and
then click Run command on computers > command
3 In the message that appears, click Yes.

To run a command from the Computer Status log
1 Click Monitors > Logs > the Computer Status log type, and then click View
Log.
2 Select a command from the Command list box, select the computers, and
then click Start.
To cancel a scan in progress, click Cancel All Scans from the command list.
3 If there are settings choices for the command that you selected, a message
appears where you can configure the appropriate settings.
4 When you have finished configuration, click Yes or OK.
5 In the command confirmation message box that appears, click Yes.

6 In the Message dialog box, click OK.
If the command is not queued successfully, you may need to repeat this
procedure. You can check to see if the server is down. If the console has lost
connectivity with the server, you can log off the console and then log back on
to see if that helps.
To view the command results
1 Click Monitors.
2 On the Command Status tab, select a command in the list, and then click
Details.
Note: You can also cancel a scan in progress by clicking the Cancel Scan icon
in the Command column of the scan command.

You can use the following procedure to ensure that any Symantec Endpoint
Protection client computer does not restart. For example, you may want to set this
value on the servers that run the Symantec Endpoint Protection client. Setting this
registry key ensures that the server does not restart if an administrator issues a
Restart computer command on its group from the console.
To ensure that a client does not restart
1 On the client computer, open the registry editor.
2 Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection\SMC.
3 Add the following line to the registry:
DisableRebootCommand REG_DWORD 1
Switching a Windows client between user mode and

computer mode
You add Windows clients to be in either user mode or computer mode, based on
how you want to apply policies to the clients in groups. After a user or a computer
is added to a group, it assumes the policies that were assigned to the group.
Switching a Windows client between user mode and computer mode
When you add a client, it defaults to computer mode, which takes precedence over
user mode. Symantec recommends that you use computer mode. Linux clients are
only installed in computer mode.
Mode Description
Computer mode The client computer gets the policies from the group of which the
computer is a member. The client protects the computer with the same
policies, regardless of which user is logged on to the computer. The
policy follows the group that the computer is in. Computer mode is the
default setting. Many organizations configure a majority of clients in
computer mode. Based on your network environment, you might want
to configure a few clients with special requirements as users.
You cannot switch from user mode to computer mode if the computer
name is already in another group. Switching to computer mode deletes
the user name of the client from the group and adds the computer name
of the client into the group.
Clients that you add in computer mode can be enabled as unmanaged

detectors, and used to detect unauthorized devices.
See Configuring a client to detect unmanaged devices on page 247.
User mode The client computer gets the policies from the group of which the user
is a member. The policies change, depending on which user is logged
on to the client. The policy follows the user.
If you import your existing group structure into Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager from Microsoft Active Directory or LDAP directory
servers to organize clients by user, use user mode.
You cannot switch from computer mode to user mode if the user's logon
name and the computer name are already contained in any group.
Switching to user mode deletes the computer name of the client from
the group. It then adds the user name of the client into the group.
See Importing existing groups and computers from an Active Directory

or an LDAP server on page 223.
When you deploy a client installation package, you specify which group the client
goes in. You can later specify the client to be in user mode or computer mode. If
the client later gets deleted or disconnected and then gets added again and
reconnected, the client returns to the original group. However, you can configure
the client to stay with the group it was last moved to in user mode or computer
mode. For example, a new user might log on to a client that is configured in user
mode. The client then stays in the group that the previous user was in.
You configure these settings by clicking Clients > Policies, and then
Communications Settings.
To switch a Windows client between user mode and computer mode

2 On the Clients page, under Clients, select the group that contains the user
or computer.
3 On the Clients tab, right-click the computer or the user name in the table, and
then select either Switch to Computer Mode or Switch to User Mode.
This mode is a toggle setting so one or the other always displays. The
information in the table changes to reflect the new setting.

Unauthorized devices can connect to the network in many ways, such as physical
access in a conference room or rogue wireless access points. To enforce policies
on every endpoint, you must be able to quickly detect the presence of new devices
in your network. You must determine whether the devices are secure. You can
enable any client as an unmanaged detector to detect the unknown devices.
Unknown devices are unmanaged devices that do not run Symantec Endpoint
Protection client software. If the unmanaged device is a computer, you can install
the Symantec Endpoint Protection client software on it.
When a device starts up, its operating system sends ARP traffic to the network to
let other computers know of the device's presence. A client that is enabled as an
unmanaged detector collects and sends the ARP packet information to the
management server. The management server searches the ARP packet for the
device's MAC address and the IP address. The server compares these addresses
to the list of existing MAC and IP addresses in the server's database. If the server
cannot find an address match, the server records the device as new. You can then
decide whether the device is secure. Because the client only transmits information,
it does not use additional resources.
You can configure the unmanaged detector to ignore certain devices, such as
printers. You can also set up email notifications to notify you when the unmanaged
detector detects an unknown device.
To configure the client as an unmanaged detector, you must do the following actions:
Enable Network Threat Protection.
Switch the client to computer mode.
See Switching a Windows client between user mode and computer mode
on page 245.
Install the client on a computer that runs all the time.
To configure a client to detect unauthorized devices

2 Under Clients, select the group that contains the client that you want to enable
as an unmanaged detector.
3 On the Clients tab, right-click the client that you want to enable as an
unmanaged detector, and then click Enable as Unmanaged Detector.
4 To specify one or more devices to exclude from detection by the unmanaged
detector, click Configure Unmanaged Detector.
5 In the Unmanaged Detector Exceptions for client name dialog box, click
Add.
6 In the Add Unmanaged Detector Exception dialog box, click one of the
following options:
Exclude detection of an IP address range, and then enter the IP address
range for several devices.
Exclude detection of a MAC address, and then enter the device's MAC
address.
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK.
To display the list of unauthorized devices that the client detects
2 On the Home page, in the Security Status section, click More Details.
3 In the Security Status Details dialog box, scroll to the Unknown Device
Failures table.
4 Close the dialog box.
Preventing users from disabling protection on client

computers
You can prevent users from disabling protection on the client computer by setting
the user control level. The user control level also determines whether the client
user interface can be completely invisible, display a partial set of features, or display
a full user interface.
To prevent users from disabling Virus and Spyware Protection, you lock the settings.
See Locking and unlocking Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings
on page 317.
For the Windows client, you can configure all the options. For the Mac client, only
the notification area icon and some IPS options are available in server control and
client control.
What are the user control levels?
Changing the user control level
What are the user control levels?

Table 10-4 User control levels
User control level Description
Server control Gives the users the least control over the client. Server control locks the managed
settings so that users cannot configure them. In Server control, changes can be made
to unlocked settings, but they are overwritten when the next policy is applied.
Client control Gives the users the most control over the client. Client control unlocks the managed
settings so that users can configure them. Client-modified settings take precedence
over server settings. They are not overwritten when the new policy is applied, unless
the setting has been locked in the new policy.
Client control is useful for employees who work in a remote location or a home location.
Note: The end user must be in a Windows administrators group to change any of the
settings in client mode or mixed mode.
Mixed control Gives the user a mixture of control over the client. You determine which options you
let users configure by setting the option to server control or to client control. In client
control, only the user can enable or disable the setting. In server control, only you can
enable or disable the setting.
Clients that run in client control or mixed control switch to server control when the
server applies a Quarantine policy.
Changing the user control level

Some managed settings have dependencies. For example, users may have
permission to configure firewall rules, but cannot access the client user interface.
Because users do not have access to the Configure Firewall Rules dialog box, they
cannot create rules.
To change the user control level
2 Under View Clients, select the group, and click the Policies tab.
3 Under Location-specific Policies and Settings, under the location you want
to modify, expand Location-specific Settings.
4 To the right of Client User Interface Control Settings, click Tasks > Edit
Settings.
5 In the Client User Interface Control Settings dialog box, do one of the
following options:
Click Server control, and then click Customize.
Configure any of the settings, and then click OK.
Click Client control.
Click Mixed control, and then click Customize.
Configure any of the settings, and then click OK.
6 Click OK.
Preventing and allowing users to change the client's

user interface
What can users change on the client user interface?
You set the user control level to determine whether the client user interface can be
completely invisible, display a partial set of features, or display a full user interface.
The user interface features that users can change are called managed settings.
The user does not have access to all the client features, such as password
protection.
How do I configure user interface settings?

You can configure user interface settings on the client if you do either of the following
tasks:
Set the client's user control level to server control.
Set the client's user control level to mixed control and set the parent feature on
the Client/Server Control Settings tab to Server.
For example, you can set the Show/Hide notification area icon option to
Client. The notification area icon appears on the client and the user can choose
to show or hide the icon. If you set the Show/Hide notification area icon option
to Server, you can choose whether to display the notification area icon on the
client.
Note: Most of these settings apply to the Windows client only. You can configure
a few options on the Mac client in server control only.
To configure user interface settings in mixed control

1 Click Clients > Policies tab.
See Preventing users from disabling protection on client computers
on page 248.
2 In the Client User Interface Control Settings for location name dialog box,
next to Mixed control, click Customize.
3 In the Client User Interface Mixed Control Settings dialog box, on the
Client/Server Control Settings tab, do one of the following actions:
Lock an option so that you can configure it only from the server. For the
option you want to lock, click Server.
Any Virus and Spyware Protection settings that you set to Server here
override the settings on the client.
Unlock an option so that the user can configure it on the client. For the
option you want, click Client. Client is selected by default for all settings
except the virus and spyware settings.
4 For some of the options that you set to Server, click the Client User Interface
Settings tab to configure them:
For information on where in the console you configure the remaining options
that you set to Server, click Help. For example, to enable firewall settings,
configure them in the Firewall policy.
See Enabling communications for network services instead of adding a rule
on page 329.
See Detecting potential attacks and spoofing attempts on page 332.
See Enabling network intrusion prevention or browser intrusion prevention
on page 373.
5 On the Client User Interface Settings tab, check the option's check box so
that the option is available on the client.
6 Click OK.
7 Click OK.
To configure user interface settings in server control

1 Change the user control level to server control.
on page 248.
2 In the Client User Interface Settings dialog box, check the options that you
want to appear on the client.
3 Click OK.
4 Click OK.
See Configuring firewall settings for mixed control on page 330.

You can prompt users on the client computers to type information about themselves
during the client software installation process or during policy updates. You can
collect information such as the employee's mobile phone number, job title, and
email address. After you collect this information, you must maintain and update it
manually.
Note: After you enable the message to appear on the client computer for the first
time, and the user responds with the requested information, the message does not
appear again. Even if you edit any of the fields or disable and enable the message
again, the client does not display a new message. However, the user can edit the
information at any time, and the management server retrieves that information.
See Managing client installation packages on page 131.

To collect user information
2 In the Install Packages pane, click Client Install Packages.
3 Under Tasks, click Set User Information Collection.
4 In the Set User Information Collection dialog box, check Collect User
Information.
5 In the Pop-up Message text box, type the message that you want users to
read when they are prompted for information.
6 If you want the user to have the ability to postpone user information collection,
check Enable Remind Me Later, and then set a time in minutes.
7 Under Select the fields that will be displayed for the user to provide input,
choose the type of information to collect, and then click Add.
You can select one or more fields simultaneously by pressing the Shift key or
the Control key.
8 In the Optional column, check the check box next to any fields that you want
to define as optional for the user to complete.
9 Click OK.

You can increase corporate security by requiring password protection on the client
computer whenever users perform certain tasks.
You can require the users to type a password when users try to do one of the
following actions:
Open the client's user interface.
Stop the client.
Uninstall the client.
Import and export the security policy.
You can modify the password protection settings for any child group that does not
inherit its settings from a parent.
To password-protect the client
2 Under Clients, select the group for which you want to set up password
protection.
click Password Settings.
4 On the Password Settings tab, check any or all of the check boxes.
5 In the Password and Confirm password text boxes, type the same password.
The password is limited to 15 characters or less.
6 Click OK.
Chapter 11
Managing remote clients
Managing locations for remote clients
Enabling location awareness for a client
Adding a location to a group
Changing a default location
Setting up Scenario One location awareness conditions
Setting up Scenario Two location awareness conditions
Configuring communication settings for a location
About strengthening your security policies for remote clients
About turning on notifications for remote clients
About monitoring remote clients

Your network may include some clients that connect to the network from different
locations. You may need to manage these clients differently from the clients that
connect only from within the network. You may need to manage some clients that
always connect remotely over a VPN, or clients that connect from multiple locations
because employees travel. You may also need to manage security for some
computers that are outside your administrative control. For example, you may allow
customers, contractors, vendors, or business partners to have limited access to
Managing remote clients 255
your network. Some employees may connect to your network using their own
personal computers, and you may need to manage these clients differently.
In all these cases, you must deal with greater security risk. Connections may be
less secure, or the client computers may be less secure, and you may have less
control over some clients. To minimize these risks to your overall network security,
you should assess the different kinds of remote access that clients have to your
network. You can then apply more stringent security policies based on your
assessment.
To manage the clients that connect to your network differently because of the
security risks that they pose, you can work with Symantec Endpoint Protection's
location awareness.
You apply different policies to clients that pose a greater risk to your network based
on their location. A location in Symantec Endpoint Protection is defined as the type
of connection that a client computer uses to connect to your network. A location
can also include information about whether the connection is located inside or
outside your corporate network.
You define locations for a group of clients. You then assign different policies to
each location. Some security settings can be assigned to the entire group regardless
of location. Some settings are different depending on location.
Table 11-1 Managing remote clients
Task Description
Set up groups based on See Managing groups of clients on page 220.

assessment of security risk
Set up locations for groups of See Managing locations for remote clients on page 256.
remote clients
Configure communication settings See Configuring communication settings for a location

for locations on page 266.
Strengthen your security policies See About strengthening your security policies for remote
clients on page 267.
Turn on client notifications See About turning on notifications for remote clients
on page 269.
Table 11-1 Managing remote clients (continued)
Task Description
Customize client log management Customize the log settings for remote clients, especially
settings if clients are offline for several days. To reduce bandwidth
and the load on your management servers, make the
following changes:
Set clients to not upload their logs to the management

server.
Set clients to upload only the client security logs.
Set filter log events to upload only specified events.
Suggested events to upload include definition updates,
or side effect repair failures.
Make the log retention time longer.
Longer retention times let you review more antivirus
and antispyware event data.
Monitor remote clients See About monitoring remote clients on page 269.

You add locations after you set up the groups that you need to manage. Each group
can have different locations if your security strategy requires it. In the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager console, you set up the conditions that trigger
automatic policy switching based on location. Location awareness automatically
applies the security policy that you specify to a client, based on the location
conditions that the client meets.
Location conditions can be based on a number of different criteria. These criteria
include IP addresses, type of network connection, whether the client computer can
connect to the management server, and more. You can allow or block client
connections based on the criteria that you specify.
A location applies to the group you created it for and to any subgroups that inherit
from the group. A best practice is to create the locations that any client can use at
the My Company group level. Then, create locations for a particular group at the
subgroup level.
It is simpler to manage your security policies and settings if you create fewer groups
and locations. The complexity of your network and its security requirements,
however, may require more groups and locations. The number of different security
settings, log-related settings, communications settings, and policies that you need
determines how many groups and locations you create.
Some of the configuration options that you may want to customize for your remote
clients are location-independent. These options are either inherited from the parent
group or set independently. If you create a single group to contain all remote clients,
then the location-independent settings are the same for the clients in the group.
The following settings are location-independent:
Custom intrusion prevention signatures
System Lockdown settings
Network application monitoring settings
LiveUpdate content policy settings
Client log settings
Client-server communications settings
General security-related settings, including location awareness and Tamper
Protection
To customize any of these location-independent settings, such as how client logs
are handled, you need to create separate groups.
Some settings are specific to locations.
As a best practice, you should not allow users to turn off the following protections:
Auto-Protect
SONAR
Tamper Protection
The firewall rules that you have created
Table 11-2 Location awareness tasks that you can perform
Tasks Description
Plan locations You should consider the different types of security policies that
you need in your environment to determine the locations that you
should use. You can then determine the criteria to use to define
each location. It is a best practice to plan groups and locations
at the same time.
You may find the following examples helpful:
See Setting up Scenario One location awareness conditions

on page 262.
See Setting up Scenario Two location awareness conditions

on page 264.
Enable location To control the policies that are assigned to clients contingent on
awareness the location from which the clients connect, you can enable
location awareness.
See Enabling location awareness for a client on page 259.
Add locations You can add locations to groups.
Assign default locations All groups must have a default location. When you install the
console, there is only one location, called Default. When you
create a new group, its default location is always Default. You
can change the default location later after you add other locations.
The default location is used if one of the following cases occurs:
One of the multiple locations meets location criteria and the

last location does not meet location criteria.
You use location awareness and no locations meet the criteria.
The location is renamed or changed in the policy. The client
reverts to the default location when it receives the new policy.
See Changing a default location on page 261.
Configure You can also configure the communication settings between a

communications settings management server and the client on a location basis.
for locations
See Configuring communication settings for a location
on page 266.
See the article Best Practices for Symantec Endpoint Protection Location Awareness.
See Configuring communication settings for a location on page 266.
See Managing remote clients on page 254.

To make the policies that are assigned to clients contingent on the client's connection
location, you can enable location awareness for the client.
If you check Remember the last location, then when a client connects to the
network, it is assigned the policy from the last-used location. If location awareness
is enabled, then the client automatically switches to the appropriate policy after a
few seconds. The policy that is associated with a specific location determines a
client's network connection. If location awareness is disabled, the client can manually
switch between any of the locations even when it is under server control. If a
quarantine location is enabled, the client may switch to the quarantine policy after
a few seconds.
If you uncheck Remember the last location, then when a client connects to the
network, it is assigned the policy from the default location. The client cannot connect
to the last-used location. If location awareness is enabled, then the client
automatically switches to the appropriate policy after a few seconds. The policy
that is associated with a specific location determines a client's network connection.
If location awareness is disabled, the user can manually switch between any of the
locations even when the client is under server control. If a quarantine location is
enabled, the client may switch to the Quarantine Policy after a few seconds.
To enable location awareness for a client
implement automatic switching of locations.
3 On the Policies tab, uncheck Inherit policies and settings from parent
group "group name".
4 Under Location-independent Policies and Settings, click General Settings.
5 In the General Settings dialog box, on the General Settings tab, under
Location Settings, check Remember the last location.
By default, this option is enabled. The client is initially assigned to the policy
that is associated with the location from which the client last connected to the
network.
6 Check Enable Location Awareness.

By default, location awareness is enabled. The client is automatically assigned
to the policy that is associated with the location from which the user tries to
connect to the network.
7 Click OK.

When you add a location to a group, you specify the conditions that trigger the
clients in the group to switch to the location. Location awareness is effective only
if you also apply appropriate policies and settings to each location.
To add a location to a group
2 In the Clients page, under Clients, select the group for which you want to add
one or more locations.
group "group name".
You can add locations only to groups that do not inherit policies from a parent
group.
You can also click Add Location to run the Add Location wizard.
4 In the Client page, under Tasks, click Manage Locations.
5 In the Manage Locations dialog box, under Locations, click Add.
6 In the Add Location dialog box, type the name and description of the new
location, and then click OK.
7 To the right of the Switch to this location when box, click Add.
8 In the Type list, select a condition, and then select the appropriate definition
for the condition.
A client computer switches to the location if the computer meets the specified
criteria.
9 Click OK.
10 To add more conditions, click Add, and then select either Criteria with AND
relationship or Criteria with OR relationship.
11 Repeat steps 8 through 9.

12 Click OK.
See About strengthening your security policies for remote clients on page 267.

When the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager is initially installed, only one
location, called Default, exists. At that time, every groups default location is Default.
Every group must have a default location. When you create a new group, the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console automatically makes its default
location Default.
You can specify another location to be the default location for a group after you add
other locations. You may prefer to designate a location like Home or Road as the
default location.
A group's default location is used if one of the following cases occurs:
One of the multiple locations meets location criteria and the last location does
not meet location criteria.
You use location awareness and no locations meet the criteria.
The location is renamed or changed in the policy. The client reverts to the default
location when it receives the new policy.
To change a default location
2 On the Clients page, under Clients, click the group to which you want to assign
a different default location.
group "group name".
4 Under Tasks, click Manage Locations.
5 In the Manage Locations dialog box, under Locations, select the location
that you want to be the default location.
6 Under Description, check Set this location as the default location in case
of conflict.
The Default location is always the default location until you assign another one
to the group.
7 Click OK.
Setting up Scenario One location awareness

conditions
If you have remote clients, in the simplest case, it is a common practice to use the
My Company group and three locations. This is Scenario One.
To manage the security of the clients in this scenario, you can create the following
locations under the My Company group to use:
Office clients that log on in the office.
The remote clients that log on to the corporate network remotely over a VPN.
The remote clients that log on to the Internet remotely, but not over a VPN.
Because the remote location with no VPN connection is the least secure, it has the
most secure policies. It is a best practice to always make this location the default
location.
Note: If you turn off My Company group inheritance and then you add groups, the
added groups do not inherit the locations that you set up for the My Company group.
The following suggestions represent the best practices for Scenario One.
To set up the office location for the clients located in the office
1 On the Clients page, select the group that you want to add a location for.
2 On the Policies tab, under Tasks, click Add Location.
3 In the Add Location Wizard, click Next.
4 Type a name for the location and optionally, add a description of it, and then
click Next.
5 In the list box, click Client can connect to management server from the list,
6 Click Finish, and then click OK.
7 Under Tasks, click Manage Locations, and then select the location you
created.
8 Click Add, and then click Criteria with AND relationship.
9 In the Specify Location Criteria dialog box, from the Type list, click Network
Connection Type.
10 Click If the client computer does not use the network connection type
specified below.
11 In the bottom list box, select the name of the VPN client that your organization
uses, and then click OK.
12 Click OK to exit the Manage Locations dialog box.
To set up the remote location for the clients logging in over a VPN
4 Type a name for the location and optionally, add a description of it, and then
click Next.
5 In the list box, click Network connection type.
6 In the Connection Type list box, select the name of the VPN client that your
organization uses, and then click Next.
7 Click Finish.
8 Click OK.
To set up the remote location for the clients not logging on over a VPN
4 Type a name for the location, optionally add a description of it, and then click
Next.
5 In the list box, leave No specific condition, and then click Next.
By using these settings, this location's policies, which should be the strictest
and most secure, are used as the default location policies.
6 Click Finish, and then click OK.
See Setting up Scenario Two location awareness conditions on page 264.
Setting up Scenario Two location awareness

conditions
In Scenario Two, you use the same two remote locations as specified in Scenario
One and two office locations, for a total of four locations.
You would add the following office locations:
Clients in the office that log on over an Ethernet connection.
Clients in the office that log on over a wireless connection.
It simplifies management to leave all clients under the default server control mode.
If you want granular control over what your users can and cannot do, an experienced
administrator can use mixed control. A mixed control setting gives the end user
some control over security settings, but you can override their changes, if necessary.
Client control allows users a wider latitude in what they can do and so constitutes
a greater risk to network security.
We suggest that you use client control only in the following situations:
If your users are knowledgeable about computer security.
If you have a compelling reason to use it.
Note: You may have some clients that use Ethernet connections in the office while
other clients in the office use wireless connections. For this reason, you set the last
condition in the procedure for wireless clients in the office. This condition lets you
create an Ethernet location Firewall policy rule to block all wireless traffic when both
kinds of connections are used simultaneously.
To set up the office location for the clients that are logged on over Ethernet
2 Under Tasks, click Add Location.
Next.
5 In the list box, select Client can connect to management server, and then
click Next.
6 Click Finish.
7 Click OK.
8 Under Tasks, click Manage Locations, and then select the location you
created.
9 Beside Switch to this location when, click Add, and then select Criteria with
AND relationship.
Connection Type.
specified below.
13 Click Add and then click Criteria with AND relationship.
Connection Type.
15 Click If the client computer uses the network connection type specified
below.
16 In the bottom list box, select Ethernet, and then click OK.
To set up the office location for the clients that are logged on over a wireless
connection
2 Under Tasks, click Add Location.
Next.
5 In the list box, click Client can connect to management server, and then
click Next.
6 Click Finish.
7 Click OK.
8 Under Tasks, click Manage Locations, and then select the location that you
created.
9 Beside Switch to this location when, click Add, and then click Criteria with
AND relationship.
Connection Type.
specified below.
Connection Type.
specified below.
16 In the bottom list box, click Ethernet, and then click OK.
Connection Type.
19 Click If the client computer uses the network connection type specified
below.
20 In the bottom list box, click Wireless, and then click OK.
See Setting up Scenario One location awareness conditions on page 262.

By default, you configure communication settings between the management server
and the client at the level of the group. However, you can also configure these
settings for individual locations in a group. For example, you can use a separate
management server for a location where the client computers connect through the
VPN. To minimize the number of clients that connect to the management server at
the same time, you can specify a different heartbeat for each location.
You can configure the following communication settings for locations:
The control mode in which the clients run.
The management server list that the clients use.
The download mode in which the clients run.
Whether to collect a list of all the applications that are executed on clients and
send the list to the management server.
The heartbeat interval that clients use for downloads.
Whether the management server randomizes content downloads from the default
management server or a Group Update Provider.
Note: Only some of these settings can be configured for Mac clients.
To configure communication settings for a location

2 On the Clients page, select a group.
3 On the Policies tab, under Location-specific Policies and Settings, under
a location, expand Location-specific Settings.
4 To the right of Communications Settings, click Tasks, and then uncheck
Use Group Communications Settings.
5 Click Tasks again, and then click Edit Settings.
6 In the Communications Settings for location name dialog box, modify the
settings for the specified location only.
7 Click OK.
on page 162.
About strengthening your security policies for remote

clients
When you manage remote users, you essentially take one of the following positions:
Leave the default policies in place, so that you do not impede remote users in
the use of their computers.
Strengthen your default security policies to provide more protection for your
network, even if it restricts what remote users can do.
In most situations, the best practice is to strengthen your security policies for remote
clients.
Policies may be created as shared or unshared and assigned either to groups or
to locations. A shared policy is one that applies to any group and location and can
be inherited. A non-shared policy is one that only applies to a specific location in a
group. Typically, it is considered a best practice to create shared policies because
it makes it easier to change policies in multiple groups and locations. However,

when you need unique location-specific policies, you need to create them as
non-shared policies or convert them to non-shared policies.
Best practices for Firewall policy settings for remote clients

Table 11-3 describes scenarios and best-practice recommendations.
Table 11-3 Firewall policy best practices
Scenario Recommendation
Remote location where users Assign the strictest security policies to clients that log on remotely without using
log on without a VPN a VPN.
Enable NetBIOS protection.
Note: Do not enable NetBIOS protection for the location where a remote client is
logged on to the corporate network through a VPN. This rule is appropriate only
when remote clients are connected to the Internet, not to the corporate network.
Block all local TCP traffic on the NetBIOS ports 135, 139, and 445 to increase
security.
Remote location where users Leave as-is all the rules that block traffic on all adapters. Do not change those
log on through a VPN rules.
Leave as-is the rule that allows VPN traffic on all adapters. Do not change that
rule.
Change the Adapter column from All Adapters to the name of the VPN adapter
that you use for all rules that use the action Allow.
Enable the rule that blocks all other traffic.
Note: You need to make all of these changes if you want to avoid the possibility of
split tunneling through the VPN.
Office locations where users Use your default Firewall policy. For the wireless connection, ensure that the rule to
log on through Ethernet or allow wireless EAPOL is enabled. 802.1x uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol
wireless connections over LAN (EAPOL) for connection authentication.
See Creating a firewall policy on page 326.

on page 329.

For your remote clients that are not logged on over VPN, it is a best practice to turn
on client notifications for the following situations:
Intrusion detections
You can turn on these notifications by using the location-specific server or, you
can select the Mixed control option in the Client User Interface Control
Settings. You can customize the settings on the Client User Interface Settings
tab.
Virus and security risks
You can turn on these notifications in the Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
Turning on notifications helps to ensure that remote users are aware when a security
problem occurs.

Notifications and logs are essential to maintain a secure environment. In general,
you should monitor your remote clients in the same way that you monitor your other
clients. You should always check to see that your protections are up to date and
that your network is not currently under attack. If your network is under attack, then
you want to find out who is behind the attack and how they attacked.
Your Home page preference settings determine the time period for which Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager displays data. By default, the data on the Home page
represents only the clients that connected in the past 12 hours. If you have many
clients that are frequently offline, your best monitoring option is to go to the logs
and reports. In the logs and reports, you can filter the data to include offline clients.
Even if you restrict some of the client log data that mobile clients upload, you can
check the following displays.
Table 11-4 Displays to monitor remote client security
Display Description
Home > Endpoint Status Displays whether the content is up to date or to see if any of the protections
are turned off.
You can check the following status conditions:
Content dates and version numbers

Client connections
Enabled and disabled protections
You can click Details to see the status for each client.
Home > Security Status Displays the system security overview. View the Virus and Risks Activity
Summary to see if your network is under attack.
You can click Details to see the status for each security protection
technology.
Home > Virus and Risks Activity Displays the detected virus and risk activity, and the actions taken, such as
Summary cleaned, blocked, or quarantined.
Monitors > Summary Type > Network Displays the information about attack types and sources.
Threat Protection

Chapter 12
Managing administrator
accounts and passwords
Managing administrator accounts
About administrator accounts and access rights
Adding an administrator account
Changing the authentication method for administrator accounts
Checking the authentication to a directory server
Changing the password for an administrator account and the embedded database
Resetting a forgotten Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager password
Enabling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon passwords to never

expire
About accepting the self-signed server certificate for Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager
Displaying a message for administrators to see before logging on to the

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
Displaying the Remember my user name and Remember my password check

boxes on the logon screen
Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

consoles
Unlocking an administrator's account after too many logon attempts
Changing the time period for staying logged on to the console

Managing administrator accounts and passwords 272

You can use administrator accounts to manage Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager datacenters. Administrators log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager to change policy settings, manage groups, run reports, and install client
software, as well as other management tasks.
The default account is a system administrator account, which provides access to
all features. You can also add a more limited administrator account, for
administrators who need to perform a subset of tasks.
For a small company, you may only need one administrator and one domain. For
a large company with multiple sites and Windows domains, you most likely need
multiple administrators, some of whom have more access rights than others. You
may also need to add multiple domains within Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
You manage domains and administrator accounts and their passwords on the
Admin page.
Table 12-1 Account administration
Task Description
Decide whether to add Decide whether to add domains.

multiple domains
See About domains on page 296.
See Adding a domain on page 298.
See Switching to the current domain on page 298.
Add administrator Add accounts for administrators who need access to the Symantec Endpoint Protection
accounts Manager console.
Learn about the administrator account roles that are available.

Add the types of administrator accounts that you need.
Change the method that is used to authenticate administrator accounts (optional).
By default, the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager database authenticates the
administrator's credentials. You can also use RSA SecurID or an LDAP server or a
Microsoft Active Directory Server for authentication.
See Changing the authentication method for administrator accounts on page 276.
Table 12-1 Account administration (continued)
Task Description
Unlock or lock an By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager locks out an administrator after a user
administrator account tries to log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager using the administrator account too
many times. You can configure these settings to increase the number of tries or time the
administrator is locked out.
If an administrator is locked out of their account, they must wait the specified time before
logging on again. You cannot unlock an account during the lockout interval.
See Unlocking an administrator's account after too many logon attempts on page 294.
Change and reset lost Change the password for your account or another administrator's account.
passwords See Changing the password for an administrator account and the embedded database
on page 286.
Reset a lost password using the Forgot your password? link that appears on the
management server logon screen. The administrator receives an email that contains a
link to activate a temporary password.
See Resetting a forgotten Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager password on page 287.
See Displaying the Forgot your password? link so that administrators can reset lost
passwords on page 289.
Allow administrators to save their user name and password on the management server
logon screen.
See Displaying the Remember my user name and Remember my password check boxes
on the logon screen on page 291.
Force the administrator's logon password to expire after a certain number of days.
See Displaying the Remember my user name and Remember my password check boxes
on the logon screen on page 291.
Configure logon You can configure the following logon options for each type of administrator:
options for Symantec
Display a message for administrators to read before they log on.
Endpoint Protection
See Displaying a message for administrators to see before logging on to the Symantec
Manager
Endpoint Protection Manager console on page 291.
Allow or block log on access to the management console, so that certain administrators
can, or cannot, log on remotely.
See Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
consoles on page 292.
Changing how long an administrator can stay logged on to the management server.
See Changing the time period for staying logged on to the console on page 295.

When you install the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, a default system
administrator account is created, called admin. The system administrator account
gives an administrator access to all the features in Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
To help you manage security, you can add additional system administrator accounts,
domain administrator accounts, and limited administrator accounts. Domain
administrators and limited administrators have access to a subset of Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager features.
You choose which accounts you need based on the types of roles and access rights
you need in your company. For example, a large company may use the following
types of roles:
An administrator who installs the management server and the client installation
packages. After the product is installed, an administrator in charge of operations
takes over. These administrators are most likely system administrators.
An operations administrator maintains the servers, databases, and installs
patches. If you have a single domain, the operations administrator could be a
domain administrator who is fully authorized to manage sites.
An antivirus administrator, who creates and maintains the Virus and Spyware
Protection policies and LiveUpdate policies on the clients. This administrator is
most likely to be a limited administrator.
A desktop administrator, who is in charge of security and creates and maintains
the Firewall policies and Intrusion Prevention policies for the clients. This
administrator is most likely to be a domain administrator.
A help desk administrator, who creates reports and has read-only access to the
policies. The antivirus administrator and desktop administrator read the reports
that the help desk administrator sends. The help desk administrator is most
likely to be a limited administrator who is granted reporting rights and policy
rights.
Table 12-2 Administrator roles and responsibilities
Administrator role Responsibilities
System administrator System administrators can log on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
with complete, unrestricted access to all features and tasks.
A system administrator can create and manage other system administrator accounts, domain
administrator accounts, and limited administrator accounts.
A system administrator can perform the following tasks:
Manage all domains.

Administer licenses.
View and manage all console settings.
Manage the databases and management servers.
Administrator Administrators are domain administrators who can view and manage a single domain. A
domain administrator has the same privileges as a system administrator, but for a single
domain only.
By default, the domain administrator has full system administrator rights to manage a domain,
but not a site. You must explicitly grant site rights within a single domain. Domain
administrators can modify the site rights of other administrators and limited administrators,
though they cannot modify the site rights for themselves.
A domain administrator can perform the following tasks:
Create and manage administrator accounts and limited administrator accounts within a
single domain.
Domain administrators cannot modify their own site rights. System administrators must
perform this function.
Run reports, manage sites, and reset passwords. You must explicitly configure reporting
rights to groups that are migrated from Symantec AntiVirus 10.x.
Cannot administer licenses. Only system administrators can administer licenses.
Limited administrator Limited administrators can log on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
with restricted access. Limited administrators do not have access rights by default. A system
administrator role must explicitly grant access rights to allow a limited administrator to perform
tasks.
Parts of the management server user interface are not available to limited administrators
when you restrict access rights. For example:
Limited administrators without reporting rights cannot view the Home, Monitors, or
Reports pages.
Limited administrators without policy rights cannot view or modify the policy. In addition,
they cannot apply, replace, or withdraw a policy.

See Managing administrator accounts on page 272.

As a system administrator, you can add another system administrator, administrator,
or limited administrator. As an administrator within a domain, you can add other
administrators with access rights equal to or less restrictive than your own.
Administrators can add limited administrators and configure their access rights.
To add an administrator account
1 In the console, click Admin > Administrators.
2 Under Tasks, click Add an administrator.
3 In the Add Administrator dialog box, on the General tab, enter the user name
and email address.
4 On the Access Rights tab, specify the type of administrator account.
If you add an account for a limited administrator, you must also specify the
administrator's access rights. Limited administrator accounts that are not granted
any access rights are created in a disabled state and the limited administrator
cannot log on to the management server.
5 On the Authentication tab, specify the type of authentication that an
administrator account requires.
When the administrator logs on to the management server, the management
server verifies with the database that the user name and password are correct.
on page 276.
6 Click OK.
Changing the authentication method for administrator

accounts
After you add an administrator account, the user name and password are stored
in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager database. When the administrator
logs on to the management server, the management server verifies with the
database that the user name and password are correct. However, if your company
uses a third-party server to authenticate existing user names and passwords, you
can configure Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to authenticate with the

server.
Table 12-3 displays the authentication methods the management server can use
to authenticate administrator accounts.
Table 12-3 Authentication methods
Symantec Endpoint Authenticates the administrators with the administrator's the

Protection Manager credentials that are stored in the Symantec Endpoint
authentication (default) Protection Manager database.
You can display the Password never expires option so that

an administrator's account does not expire.
See Enabling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon

passwords to never expire on page 289.
RSA SecurID authentication Authenticates the administrators by using RSA SecurID token
(not software RSA tokens), RSA SecurID card, or RSA
keypad card (not RSA smart cards).
Directory server Authenticates the administrators with an LDAP server or the

authentication Microsoft Active Directory server.
For the third-party authentication methods, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

has an entry in the database for the administrator account, but the third-party server
validates the user name and password.
To change the authentication method for administrator accounts
1 Add an administrator account.
2 On the Authentication tab, select the authentication method.
To authenticate administrators who use an RSA SecurID mechanism, first
install the RSA Authentication Manager server and enable encrypted
authentication for RSA SecurID.
See Configuring the management server to authenticate administrators
who use RSA SecurID to log on on page 278.
See Using RSA SecurID authentication with Symantec Endpoint Protection
To authenticate administrators using an Active Directory or LDAP directory
server, you need to set up an account on the directory server. You must
also establish a connection between the directory server and Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. If you do not establish a connection, you

cannot import users from an Active Directory server or synchronize with it.
Note: Synchronization is only possible for Active Directory Servers.

Synchronization with LDAP servers is not supported.
You can check whether the directory server authenticates the account name
by clicking Check Account.
See Connecting Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to a directory
server on page 226.
See Checking the authentication to a directory server on page 282.
3 Click OK.
4 In the Confirm Change dialog box, type the password that you use to log on
to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, and then click OK.
When you switch between authentication methods, you must type the
administrator account's password.
Configuring the management server to authenticate administrators

who use RSA SecurID to log on
If your corporate network includes an RSA server, you need to install the software
for an RSA ACE Agent on the computer on which you installed Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and configure it as a SecurID Authentication client.
To configure the management server to authenticate administrators who use RSA
SecurID to log on
1 Install the software for the RSA ACE Agent on the same computer on which
you installed the management server. You can install the software by running
the Windows .msi file from the RSA Authentication Agent installation file.
2 Copy the nodesecret.rec, sdconf.rec, and agent_nsload.exe files from the RSA
ACE server to the computer on which you installed the management server.
3 At the command prompt, type the following command:
agent_nsload -f nodesecret.rec -p password
where password is the password for the nodesecret file.

5 Under Servers, select the management server to which you want to connect
an RSA server.
6 Under Tasks, click Configure SecurID authentication.
7 In the Welcome to the Configure SecurID Authentication Wizard panel,

click Next.
8 In the Qualification panel of the Configure SecurID Authentication Wizard
panel, read the prerequisites so that you can meet all the requirements.
9 Click Next.
10 In the Upload RSA File panel of the Configure SecurID Authentication
Wizard panel, browse for the folder in which the sdconf.rec file resides.
You can also type the path name.
11 Click Next.
12 Click Test to test your configuration.
13 In the Test Configuration dialog box, type the user name and password for
your SecurID, and then click Test.
It now authenticates successfully.
See Using RSA SecurID authentication with Symantec Endpoint Protection
Using RSA SecurID authentication with Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager
Configure RSA SecurID to authenticate Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager administrators
If you want to authenticate administrators who use the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager with RSA SecurID, you must first enable encrypted authentication by
configuring a connection to an RSA Authentication Manager server.
To configure RSA SecurID to authenticate Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
administrators
1 Install an RSA Authentication Manager server, if necessary.
As of version 12.1.6 MP5, use RSA Authentication Manager 8.1.
2 Install and properly configure the RSA Authentication Agent on the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager server to connect to the RSA server.
As of version 12.1.6 MP5, use RSA Authentication Agent 7.x.
See the section called Configure RSA SecurID to authenticate Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager administrators on page 279.
3 Ensure that the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server registers as a
valid host on the RSA Authentication Manager server.
4 Ensure that the sdconf.rec file on the RSA Authentication Manager server is
accessible on the network.
5 Assign a synchronized SecurID card or key fob to a management server
account; activate the logon name on the RSA Authentication Manager server.
6 Ensure that the administrator has the RSA PIN or password available.
Symantec supports the following types of RSA logons:
RSA SecurID token (not software RSA tokens)
RSA SecurID card
RSA keypad card (not RSA smart cards)
To log on to the management server with the RSA SecurID, an administrator needs
a logon name, the token (hardware), and a PIN.
Install the RSA Authentication Agent and configure the

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server to use RSA
SecurID authentication
To use RSA SecureID with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you must install
the RSA Authentication Agent on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server
and configure it as a SecurID Authentication client.
To install the RSA Authentication Agent
1 Install the software for the RSA Authentication Agent on the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager server. You can install the software by running the Windows
.msi file from the RSA Authentication Agent installation file or CD.
2 Copy the sdconf.rec file from the RSA Authentication server to the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager server.
For earlier versions of RSA Authentication Agent, copy nodesecret.rec,
sdconf.rec, and agent_nsload.exe.
To configure the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server to use RSA SecurID
authentication
1 Log on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console, and then click
Admin > Servers.
2 Under Servers, under Local Site, click the management server.
3 Under Tasks, click Configure SecurID authentication.
4 In the Welcome to the Configure SecurID Authentication Wizard panel,
click Next.
5 In the Qualification panel of the Configure SecurID Authentication Wizard

panel, read the prerequisites and verify that you meet them all.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Upload RSA File panel of the Configure SecurID Authentication
Wizard panel, browse for the folder in which the sdconf.rec file resides.
You can also type the path name.
8 Click Next, and then click Test to test your configuration.
9 In the Test Configuration dialog box, type the user name and password for
your SecurID, and then click Test.
It now authenticates successfully.
Add Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager administrators

that use RSA SecureID authentication
To add Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager administrators that use RSA SecureID
authentication
1 Add an administrator account.
2 On the Authentication tab, click RSA SecurID Authentication.
If this option is unavailable, review the configuration guidelines.
See the section called Configure RSA SecurID to authenticate Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager administrators on page 279.
3 Click OK.
You can also change an existing administrator account to use RSA SecurID
authentication, though this practice is not recommended, especially for default
administrator account, admin. If you provide invalid information when you edit an
existing user, it is more difficult to recover that user.
However, if you modify an existing administrator account, in the Confirm Change
dialog box, type the password that you use to log on to Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager, and then click OK.
When you switch between authentication methods, you must type the administrator
account's password.

You can check that an Active Directory or LDAP server authenticates the user name
and password for an administrator account that you create. The check evaluates
whether you added the user name and password correctly, and whether or not the
account name exists on the directory server.
You use the same user name and password for an administrator account in
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager as you do in the directory server. When
the administrator logs on to the management server, the directory server
authenticates the administrator's user name and password. The management server
uses the directory server configuration that you added to search for the account on
the directory server.
You can also check whether an Active Directory or LDAP server authenticates an
administrator account with no user name and password. An account with no user
name or password is anonymous access. You should create an administrator
account with anonymous access so that the administrators are never locked out if
the password changes on the directory server.
Note: In Windows 2003 Active Directory server, anonymous authentication is

disabled by default. Therefore, when you add a directory server without a user
name to an administrator account and click Check Account, an Account
Authentication Failed error message appears. To work around this issue, create
two directory server entries, one for testing, and one for anonymous access. The
administrator can still log on to the management server using a valid user name
and password.
Table 12-4 Steps to test directory server authentication for an administrator

account
Step Task Description
Step 1 Add multiple directory To make testing easier for anonymous access, add at least two directory
server connections server entries. Use one entry to test the authentication, and the second entry
to test anonymous access. These entries all use the same directory server
with different configurations.
By default, most users reside in CN=Users unless moved to different

organizational unit. Users in the LDAP directory server are created under
CN=Users, DC=<sampledomain>, DC=local. To find out where a user resides
in LDAP, use ADSIEdit.
Use the following information to set up the directory servers for this example:
CN=John Smith
OU=test
DC=<sampledomain>
DC=local
The example uses the default Active Directory LDAP (389) but can also use
Secure LDAP (636).
Step 2 Add multiple You add multiple system administrator accounts. The account for anonymous
administrator accounts access does not have a user name or password.
See To add the administrator accounts using the directory server entries
on page 284.
To add the directory server connections to check Active Directory and LDAP server
authentication
1 On the console, click Admin > Servers, select the default server, and click
Edit the server properties.
2 On the Directory Servers tab, click Add.
3 On the General tab, add the following directory server configurations, and then
click OK.
Directory server 1:
Name: <sampledomain> Active Directory
Server Type: Active Directory
Server IP Address or Name: server01.<sampledomain>.local
User Name: <sampledomain>\administrator
Password: <directory server password>
Directory server 2:
Name: <sampledomain> LDAP with User Name
Server Type: LDAP
LDAP Port: 389
LDAP BaseDN: DC=<sampledomain>, DC=local
User Name: <sampledomain>\administrator
Password: <directory server password>
Directory server 3 (for anonymous authentication):
Name: <sampledomain> LDAP without User Name
Server Type: LDAP
LDAP Port: 389
LDAP BaseDN: <empty>
Leave this field empty when you use anonymous access.
User Name: <empty>
Password: <empty>
After you click OK, a warning appears. But the directory server is valid.
When you try to add a BaseDN without a user name and password, the
warning appears.
To add the administrator accounts using the directory server entries

1 On the console, click Admin > Administrators, and on the General tab, add
the administrator accounts in step 2.
on page 276.
2 After you add each administrator account and click the Check Account option,
you see a message. In some cases, the message appears to invalidate the
account information. The administrator can still log on to Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager, however.
Administrator account 1:
On the General tab, enter the following information:
User Name: john
Full Name: John Smith

Email Address: john@<sampledomain>.local
On the Access Rights tab, click System Administrator.
On the Authentication tab, click Directory Authentication.
In the Directory Server drop-down list, select <sampledomain> Active
Directory.
In the Account Name field, type john.
Click Check Account.
The system administrator john can log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager with directory authentication.
User Name: john
In the Directory Server drop-down list, select <sampledomain> LDAP with
User Name.
In the Account Name field, type john.
The system administrator john cannot log on into Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager with directory authentication.
User Name: john
In the Directory Server drop-down list, select <sampledomain> LDAP with
User Name.
In the Account Name field, type John Smith.
Changing the password for an administrator account and the embedded database
The system administrator john can log on into Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager with directory authentication.
Administrator account 4, for anonymous access:
User Name: john
In the Directory Server drop-down list, select <sampledomain> LDAP
without User Name.
In the Account Name field, type John Smith.
The account authentication fails, but the system administrator John Smith
can log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.

on page 226.
Changing the password for an administrator account

and the embedded database
For security purposes, you may need to change the password for your account or
another administrator's account.
The following rules apply to changing passwords:
System administrators can change the password for all administrators.
Domain administrators can change the password for other domain administrators
and limited administrators within the same domain.
Limited administrators can change their own passwords only.
Note: When you configure the management server and select the embedded
database, the password you enter for the default administrator account, admin, also
becomes the database password. If you change the default administrator's password,
the database password does not change automatically. As of 14, you can change
the database password by rerunning the Management Server Configuration Wizard
and reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
See Reinstalling or reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
on page 708.
If you change the password to fix an administrator account lockout, the administrator
must still wait for the lockout period to expire.
See Unlocking an administrator's account after too many logon attempts
on page 294.
To change the password for an administrator account
2 Under Administrators, select the administrator account, and then click Change
password.
Press F1 to see the password restrictions.
3 Type both your password and the administrator's new password.
4 Click Change.
See Resetting a forgotten Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager password
on page 287.
Resetting a forgotten Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager password
If you have a system administrator account, you can reset your own password and
allow other administrators to reset their own passwords.
To reset a lost password, make sure that the following items are enabled:
Administrators must have the ability to reset their own passwords.
Enable the Forgot your password? link to appear on the management server
logon screen. By default, this link appears.
See Displaying the Remember my user name and Remember my password

check boxes on the logon screen on page 291.
The mail server must be configured so that the mail server sends the notification.
Use this method for the administrator accounts that authenticate by using Symantec
Management Server authentication but not by either RSA SecurID authentication
or directory authentication.
To reset a forgotten Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager password
1 On the management server computer, click Start > All Programs > Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager > Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
By default, the Forgot your password? link appears on the management
server logon screen.
2 In the Logon screen, click Forgot your password?
3 In the Forgot Password dialog box, type the user name for the account for
which to reset the password.
For domain administrators and limited administrators, type the domain name
for the account. If you did not set up domains, leave the domain field blank.
4 Click Temporary Password.
The administrator receives an email that contains a link to activate a temporary
password. An administrator can request a temporary password from the
management console only once per minute.
5 The administrator must change the temporary password immediately after
logging on.
To verify whether the administrator successfully reset the password, check that the
administrator received the email message.
See Changing the password for an administrator account and the embedded
database on page 286.
When you cannot reset your password

If you cannot recover your administrator password with the Forgot your password?
functionality, Symantec cannot assist with the recovery of your password. You must
perform disaster recovery to rebuild Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Therefore, it is critical that you configure your email settings correctly when you set
up the management server and when you audit administrator account information.
Enabling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon passwords to never expire
Resetting the password for 12.1.1 and earlier with the

ResetPass.bat script
In versions 12.1 RU1 (12.1.1) and earlier, you can use the ResetPass.bat script,
found in the \Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\Tools installation folder.
This script forcefully resets the default administrator account password to admin if
it is not linked to an Active Directory account.
Symantec no longer supports the script. In versions 12.1 RU1 MP1 (12.1.1.1) and
later, the script has not been tested and may cause damage to Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager or the database.
Displaying the Forgot your password? link so that administrators can

reset lost passwords
If you have a system administrator account, you can enable other administrators
to reset their forgotten passwords. You enable a Forgot your password? link on
the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon screen so that administrators
can request a temporary password.
To allow administrators to reset forgotten passwords
2 On the Admin page, click Servers.
3 Under Servers, select the local site.
You control this setting only for the local site.
4 Click Edit Site Properties.
5 On the Passwords tab, check Allow administrators to reset the passwords.
6 Click OK.
on page 287.
See Displaying the Remember my user name and Remember my password check
boxes on the logon screen on page 291.
Enabling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

logon passwords to never expire
If you use Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager authentication, the default option
for passwords is set to expire after 60 days.
About accepting the self-signed server certificate for Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
For 12.1.5 and later, you can display an option for administrators to use a password
that never expires. This option is disabled by default to increase security, so you
must enable it first. After you enable the option, the option appears on the
Authentication tab for an administrator account.
To enable Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon passwords to never expire
2 On the Admin page, click Domains.
3 Under Domains, select the domain for which to allow administrators to save
logon credentials.
4 Click Edit Domain Properties.
5 On the Passwords tab, click Allow never expiring passwords for
administrators.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Admin > Administrators, and open the administrator account.
8 On the Authentication tab, click Password never expires, and then click OK.
on page 287.
See Unlocking an administrator's account after too many logon attempts
on page 294.
About accepting the self-signed server certificate for

When you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, a self-signed certificate
for the pages that are rendered in a browser is included as part of the installation.
When you first access these pages from a remote console, you must accept the
self-signed certificate for the pages to display.
The certificates are stored separately for each user. Each administrator account
must accept the certificate for each remote location from which they connect to the
management server.
For instructions to add the security certificate to the web browser, see the article,
How to install the certificate for Endpoint Protection Manager for Web console
access.
Displaying a message for administrators to see before logging on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console
Displaying a message for administrators to see before

logging on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager console
You can create and display a customizable message that all administrators see
before they can log on to the console. The main purpose is to display a legal notice
to tell the administrators that they are about to log on to a proprietary computer.
The message appears in the console after administrators type their user name and
password and click Log On. After administrators have read the message, they can
acknowledge the notice and click OK, which logs on the administrators. If
administrators click Cancel, the logon process is canceled, and the administrator
is taken back to the logon window.
The message also appears if the administrator runs the reporting functions from a
standalone web browser that is connected to the management server.
To display a message for administrators to see before logging on to the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager console
1 In the console, click Admin, and then click Domains.
2 Select the domain for which you want to add a logon banner.
3 Under Tasks, click Edit Domain Properties.
4 On the Logon Banner tab, check Provide a legal notice to administrators
when they log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
5 Type the banner title and text.
Click Help for more information.
6 Click OK.
Displaying the Remember my user name and

Remember my password check boxes on the logon
screen
A system administrator can enable the Remember my user name and Remember
my password check boxes to appear on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
logon screen for another administrator account. The administrator's user name and
password is prepopulated on the logon screen.
Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager consoles
To display the Remember my user name and Remember my password check boxes
on the logon screen
3 Under Domains, select the domain for which to allow administrators to save
logon credentials.
4 Click Edit Domain Properties.
5 On the Passwords tab, check Allow users to save credentials when logging
on.
6 Click OK.
on page 287.
Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager consoles
By default, all consoles are granted access. Administrators can log on to the main
console locally or remotely from any computer on the network.
You can secure a management console from remote connections by denying access
to certain computers.
You may want to grant or deny access from the following types of users or
computers:
You should deny access to anyone on the Internet. Otherwise, the console is
exposed to Internet attacks.
You should deny access to limited administrators who use consoles on a different
network than the network they manage.
You should grant access to system administrators and IT administrators.
You should grant access to lab computers, such as a computer that is used for
testing.
In addition to globally granting or denying access, you can specify exceptions by
IP address. If you grant access to all remote consoles, the management server
denies access to the exceptions. Conversely, if you deny access to all remote
consoles, you automatically grant access to the exceptions. When you create an
exception, the computer that you specified must have a static IP address. You can
also create an exception for a group of computers by specifying a subnet mask.
Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager consoles
For example, you may want to grant access in all areas that you manage. However,
you may want to deny access to a console that is located in a public area.
To grant or deny access to a remote console
2 Under Servers, select the server for which you want to change the remote
console access permission.
4 On the General tab, click Granted Access or Denied Access.
5 If you want to specify IP addresses of the computers that are exempt from this
console access permission, click Add.
Computers that you add become exceptions. If you click Granted Access, the
computers that you specify are denied access. If you click Denied Access,
the computers that you specify are granted access. You can create an exception
for a single computer or a group of computers.
6 In the Deny Console Access dialog box, click one of the following options:
Single Computer
For one computer, type the IP address.
Group of Computers
For several computers, type both the IP address and the subnet mask for
the group.
7 Click OK.
The computers now appear in the exceptions list. For each IP address and
mask, its permission status appears.
If you change Granted Access to Denied Access or vice versa, all exceptions
change as well. If you have created exceptions to deny access, they now have
access.
8 Click Edit All to change the IP addresses or host names of those computers
that appear on the exceptions list.
The IP Address Editor appears. The IP Address Editor is a text editor that
lets you edit IP addresses and subnet masks.
9 Click OK.
10 When you finish adding exceptions to the list or editing the list, click OK.
Unlocking an administrator's account after too many logon attempts
Unlocking an administrator's account after too many

logon attempts
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager locks out an administrator for a certain
length of time after a number of unsuccessful logon attempts. By default, the
management server locks out an administrator for 15 minutes after five failed
attempts.
You cannot unlock the administrator account without waiting for the specified period
of time to pass. However, you can disable the administrator account from locking,
though this action does not unlock the account. You can also change the number
of unsuccessful logon attempts and wait the time that is permitted before the account
is locked. A password change does not reset or otherwise affect the lockout interval.
For added security in 12.1.5 and later, after the first lockout the lockout interval
doubles with each additional lockout. Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
reinstates the original lockout interval after a successful logon occurs or after 24
hours pass since the first lockout. For example, if the original lockout interval is 15
minutes, the second lockout triggers a 30-minute lockout interval. The third lockout
triggers a 60-minute lockout interval. If the first lockout occurs at 2:00 P.M. on
Thursday, then the 24-hour period ends 2:00 P.M. Friday, and Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager resets the lockout interval to 15 minutes.
To unlock an administrator's account after too many logon attempts
2 Under Administrators, select the administrator account that is locked.
3 Under Tasks, click Edit the administrator.
4 On the General tab, uncheck Lock the account after the specified number
of unsuccessful logon attempts.
on page 287.
See Changing the password for an administrator account and the embedded
database on page 286.
See Enabling Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logon passwords to never
expire on page 289.
Changing the time period for staying logged on to the console
Changing the time period for staying logged on to the

console
To help protect the console, the console requires you to reenter your user name
and password after one hour. To increase security, you can decrease the timeout
period before you must log on to the management console.
In version 12.1.4 and earlier, you can set the time period to Never.
To change the time period for staying logged on to the console
2 Click Local Site or a remote site and click Edit Site Properties.
3 On the General tab, click the Console Timeout drop-down list and select one
of the available options for length of time.
4 Click OK.
Chapter 13
Managing domains
About domains
Adding a domain
Switching to the current domain
About domains
When you install a management server, the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console includes one domain, which is called Default. A domain is a structural
container in the console that you use to organize a hierarchy of groups, clients,
computers, and policies. You set up additional domains to manage your network
resources.
Note: The domains in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager are not equivalent
to Windows domains or other network domains.
Each domain that you add shares the same management server and database,
and it provides an additional instance of the console. All data in each domain is
completely separate. This separation prevents administrators in one domain from
viewing data in other domains. You can add an administrator account so that each
domain has its own administrator. These administrators can view and manage only
the contents of their own domain.
If your company is large, with sites in multiple regions, you may need to have a
single view of management information. You can delegate administrative authority,
physically separate security data, or have greater flexibility in how users, computers,
and policies are organized. If you are a managed service provider (MSP), you may
need to manage multiple independent companies, as well as Internet service
Managing domains 297
About domains
providers. To meet these needs, you can create multiple domains. For example,
you can create a separate domain for each country, region, or company.
Figure 13-1 Overview of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager domains

Customer A
Customer B
Customer C
SEPM database
(segregated by domain
https https https and customer)
SEPM SEPM SEPM

Console Console Console
Domain A Domain B Domain C
When you add a domain, the domain is empty. You must set the domain to be the
current domain. You then add administrators, groups, clients, computers, and
policies to this domain.
You can copy policies from one domain to another. To copy policies between
domains, you export the policy from the originating domain and you import the policy
into the destination domain.
You can also move clients from one domain to another. To move clients between
domains, the administrator of the old domain must delete the client from the client
group. You then replace the Communication Settings file on the client with one from
the new domain.
You can disable a domain if you no longer need it. Ensure that it is not set as the
current domain when you attempt to disable it.
See Switching to the current domain on page 298.
See Restoring client-server communication settings by using the SylinkDrop tool
on page 724.
Adding a domain
Adding a domain
You create a domain to organize a hierarchy of groups, users, clients, and policies
in your organization. For example, you may want to add domains to organize users
by division.
Note: You can use a domain ID for disaster recovery. If all the management servers
in your organization fail, you need to rebuild the management server by using the
same ID as the old server. You can get the old domain ID from the sylink.xml file
on any client.
To add a domain
3 Under Tasks, click Add Domain.
4 In the Add Domain dialog box, type a domain name, an optional company
name, and optional contact information.
5 If you want to add a domain ID, click Advanced and then type the value in the
text box.
6 Click OK.

The default domain name is Default, and it is set as the current domain. When you
add a new domain in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console, the
domain is empty. To add groups, clients, policies, and administrators to a new
domain, you must first set it as the current domain. When a domain is designated
as the current domain, the text Current Domain follows the domain name in the
title. If you have many domains, you must scroll through the Domains list to display
which domain is the current one.
If you logged on to the console as a system administrator, you can see all domains
no matter which domain is the current one. However, you can only see the
administrators and limited administrators that were created in the current domain.
If you logged on to the console as either an administrator or a limited administrator,
you only see the domain to which you have access.
If you remove the current domain, the management server logs you out. You can
only remove a domain if it is not the current domain and not the only domain.
To switch to the current domain

3 Under Domains, click the domain that you want to make the current domain.
4 Under Tasks, click Administer Domain.
5 In the Administer Domain dialog box, to confirm, click Yes.
6 Click OK.
Section 4
Managing protection with
security policies
Chapter 14. Using policies to manage security
Chapter 15. Managing firewall protection
Chapter 16. Managing intrusion prevention and Generic Exploit Mitigation
Chapter 17. Managing Virus and Spyware Protection
Chapter 18. Customizing scans
Chapter 19. Managing the information that the management server and clients
send to Symantec
Chapter 20. Managing SONAR and Tamper Protection
Chapter 21. Managing application control, device control, and system lockdown
Chapter 22. Managing exceptions
Chapter 23. Testing security policies

Chapter 14
Using policies to manage
security
Manually updating policies on the client
Performing the tasks that are common to all policies
The types of security policies
Adding a policy
Editing a policy
Copying and pasting a policy on the Policies page
Copying and pasting a policy on the Clients page
Assigning a policy to a group or location
Replacing a policy
Exporting and importing individual policies
About shared and non-shared policies
Converting a shared policy to a non-shared policy
Unassigning a policy from a group or location
Locking and unlocking Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings
Monitoring the applications and services that run on client computers
Searching for information about the applications that the computers run
Using policies to manage security 302

You can manually update the policies on the client computer if you do not think you
have the latest policy on the client. If the client does not receive the update, there
might be a communication problem.
Check the policy serial number to check whether your managed client computers
can communicate with the management server.
You can only manually update the policy on the client computer.
on page 163.
To manually update policies on the client
1 On the client computer, click Help > Troubleshooting.
2 In the Troubleshooting dialog box, in the left column, click Management.
3 On the Management panel, under Policy Profile, click Update.

Your security policies define how the protection technologies protect your computers
from known and unknown threats.
You can manage your Symantec Endpoint Protection security policies in many
ways. For example, you can create copies of the security policies and then customize
the copies for your specific needs. You can lock and unlock certain settings so that
users cannot change them on the client computer.
Table 14-1 Tasks common to all policies
Task Description
Add a policy If you do not want to use one of the default policies, you can add
a new policy.
You can add shared policies or non-shared policies.

Note: If you add or edit shared policies in the Policies page, you
must also assign the policies to a group or location. Otherwise
those policies are not effective.
See About shared and non-shared policies on page 314.

Table 14-1 Tasks common to all policies (continued)
Task Description
Lock and unlock policy You can lock and unlock some Virus and Spyware Protection
settings policy settings. Computer users cannot change locked policy
settings. A padlock icon appears next to a lockable policy setting.
See Locking and unlocking Virus and Spyware Protection policy

settings on page 317.
Edit a policy If you want to change the settings in an existing policy, you can
edit it. You can increase or decrease the protection on your
computers by modifying its security policies. You do not have to
reassign a modified policy unless you change the group
assignment.
See Editing a policy on page 307.
Assign a policy To put a policy into use, you must assign it to one or more groups
or locations.
Test a policy Symantec recommends that you always test a new policy before
you use it in a production environment.
Update the policies on Based on the available bandwidth, you can configure a client to
clients use push mode or pull mode as its policy update method.
See How the client computer and the management server

communicate on page 161.
See Configuring push mode or pull mode to update client policies

and content on page 162.
Replace a policy You can replace a shared policy with another shared policy. You
can replace the shared policy in either all locations or for one
location.
See Replacing a policy on page 311.

Task Description
Copy and paste a policy Instead of adding a new policy, you may want to copy an existing
policy to use as the basis for the new policy.
You can copy and paste policies on either the Policies page or
the Policies tab on the Clients page.
Note: You can also copy all the policies in a group and paste
them into another group, from the Policies tab on the Clients
page.
See Copying and pasting a policy on the Clients page

on page 309.
See Copying and pasting a policy on the Policies page

on page 308.
Convert a shared policy You can copy the content of a shared policy and create a
to a non-shared policy non-shared policy from that content.
A copy enables you to change the content of a shared policy in

one location and not in all other locations. The copy overrides the
existing non-shared policy.
You can convert a shared policy to a non-shared policy if the

policy no longer applies to all the groups or all the locations. When
you finish the conversion, the converted policy with its new name
appears under Location-specific Policies and Settings.
See Converting a shared policy to a non-shared policy

on page 315.
Export and import a You can export an existing policy if you want to use it at a different
policy site or management server. You can then import the policy and
apply it to a group or to a specific location.
See Exporting and importing individual policies on page 312.
Withdraw a policy If you delete a policy, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

removes the policy from the database. If you do not want to delete
a policy, but you no longer want to use it, you can withdraw the
policy instead.
You can withdraw any type of policy except a Virus and Spyware
Protection policy and a LiveUpdate Settings policy.
See Unassigning a policy from a group or location on page 316.

Task Description
Delete a policy If a policy is assigned to one or more groups and locations, you
cannot delete it until you have unassigned it from all the groups
and locations. You can also replace the policy with another policy
Check that the client has You can check whether the client has the latest policy. If not, you
the latest policy can manually update the policy on the client.
See How the client computer and the management server

communicate on page 161.
See Using the policy serial number to check client-server

communication on page 163.

You use several different types of security policies to manage your network security.
Most types of policies are automatically created during the installation. You can
use the default policies or you can customize policies to suit your specific
environment.
Table 14-2 Security policy types
Policy type Description
Virus and Spyware The Virus and Spyware Protection policy provides the
Protection policy following protection:
Detects, removes, and repairs the side effects of virus

and security risks by using signatures.
Detects the threats in the files that users try to download
by using reputation data from Download Insight.
Detect the applications that exhibit suspicious behavior
by using SONAR heuristics and reputation data.
The Virus and Spyware Protection policy finds behavior
anomalies through its SONAR technology.
Note: Download Insight and SONAR technology are available

only on Windows clients.
See Managing scans on client computers on page 402.

Table 14-2 Security policy types (continued)
Firewall policy The Firewall policy provides the following protection:
Blocks the unauthorized users from accessing the

computers and networks that connect to the Internet.
Detects the attacks by hackers.
Eliminates the unwanted sources of network traffic.
Note: Firewall policies can be applied only to Windows

clients.
See Managing firewall protection on page 323.
Intrusion Prevention policy The Intrusion Prevention policy automatically detects and
blocks network attacks and attacks on browsers as well as
protects applications from vulnerabilities.
See Managing intrusion prevention on page 367.
See Using Generic Exploit Mitigation on page 385.
LiveUpdate policy The LiveUpdate Content policy and the LiveUpdate

Settings policy contain the settings that determine how and
when client computers download content updates from
LiveUpdate. You can define the computers that clients contact
to check for updates and schedule when and how often client
computers check for updates.
See How to update content and definitions on the clients

on page 172.
Application and Device The Application and Device Control policy protects a
Control system's resources from applications and manages the
peripheral devices that can attach to computers.
Application Control policy can be applied only to Windows

clients. The Device Control policy applies to Windows and
Mac computers.
Host Integrity The Host Integrity policy provides the ability to define,
enforce, and restore the security of client computers to keep
enterprise networks and data secure. You use this policy to
verify that the clients that access your network run the
antivirus software, patches, and other application criteria that
you define.
See Setting up Host Integrity on page 564.

Adding a policy
Table 14-2 Security policy types (continued)
Exceptions policy The Exceptions policy provides the ability to exclude

applications and processes from detection by the virus and
spyware scans and by SONAR.
You can also exclude applications from application control.
See Managing exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection

on page 534.
Adding a policy
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager comes with a default policy for each type
of protection. If you need to customize a policy, you add one and edit it. You can
create multiple versions of each type of policy.
Symantec recommends that you test all new policies before you use them in a
production environment.
To add a new policy
2 On the Policies page, select a policy type, and then click the link to add a new
policy.
3 Modify the policy settings to increase or decrease protection.
4 Click OK to save the policy.
5 Optionally assign the new policy to a group.
You can assign a new policy to a group during or after policy creation. The
new policy replaces the currently assigned policy of the same protection type.
Editing a policy
You can edit shared and non-shared policies on the Policies tab on the Clients
page as well as on the Policies page.
Locations as well as groups can share the same policy. You must assign a shared
policy after you edit it.
To edit a policy on the Policies page

2 On the Policies page, under Policies, click the policy type.
3 In the policy type Policies pane, click the specific policy that you want to edit
4 Under Tasks, click Edit the Policy.
5 In the policy type Policy Overview pane, edit the name and description of
the policy, if necessary.
6 To edit the policy, click any of the policy type Policy pages for the policies.
To edit a policy on the Clients page
edit a policy.
group "group name".
You must disable inheritance for this group. If you do not uncheck inheritance,
you cannot edit a policy.
4 Under Location-specific Policies and Settings, scroll to find the name of the
location whose policy you want to edit.
5 Locate the specific policy for the location that you want to edit.
6 To the right of the selected policy, click Tasks, and then click Edit Policy.
To edit a non-shared policy, go to step 8.
To edit a shared policy, in the Edit Policy dialog box, click Edit Shared to
edit the policy in all locations.
8 You can click a link for the type of policy that you want to edit.

You can copy and paste a policy on the Policies page. For example, you may want
to edit the policy settings slightly to apply to another group.
To copy a policy in the Policies page
2 On the Policies page, under Policies, click the type of policy that you want to
copy.
3 In the policy type Policies pane, click the specific policy that you want to copy.
4 On the Policies page, under Tasks, click Copy the Policy.
5 In the Copy Policy dialog box, check Do not show this message again if
you no longer want to be notified about this process.
To redisplay the Do not show this message again check box, click Admin
> Administrators, select your administrator account, and click Reset Copy
Policy Reminder.
6 Click OK.
To paste a policy in the Policies page
paste.
3 In the policy type Policies pane, click the specific policy that you want to
paste.
4 On the Policies page, under Tasks, click Paste a Policy.
See Copying and pasting a policy on the Clients page on page 309.

You can copy and paste a policy instead of having to add a new policy. You can
copy a shared or a non-shared policy on the Clients page.
To copy a policy in the Clients page
copy a policy.
3 On the Policies tab, under Location-specific Policies and Settings, scroll
to find the name of the location from which you want to copy a policy.
4 Locate the specific policy for the location that you want to copy.
5 To the right of the policy, click Tasks, and then click Copy.
6 Click OK.
To paste a policy on the Clients page

paste a policy.
group "group name".
you cannot paste a policy.
location whose policy you want to paste.
5 Locate the specific policy for the location that you want to paste.
6 To the right of the policy, click Tasks, and then click Paste.
7 When you are prompted to overwrite the existing policy, click Yes.

You assign a policy to a client computer through a group. Every group has exactly
one policy of each protection type that is assigned to it at all times. Typically, you
create separate groups for the clients that run different platforms. If you put the
clients that run different platforms into the same group, each client platform ignores
any settings that do not apply to it.
Unassigned policies are not downloaded to the client computers in groups and
locations. If you do not assign the policy when you add the policy, you can assign
it to groups and locations later. You can also reassign a policy to a different group
or location.
Policies are assigned to computer groups as follows:
At initial installation, the Symantec default security policies are assigned to the
My Company parent group.
The security policies in the My Company parent group are automatically
assigned to each newly created child group. Newly created child groups inherit
from My Company by default.
New groups always inherit from their immediate parent group. If you create a
hierarchy of child groups, each one inherits from its immediate parent, not from
the top-level parent.
You replace a policy in a group by assigning another policy of the same type.
You can replace a policy that is assigned to the My Company parent group or
to any child group.
Replacing a policy
The icons display the following information:
Table 14-3 Policy icons
Icon Description
A group without a policy that is assigned to it.
A group with a policy assigned to it. The text is bold.
A location without a policy that is assigned to it.
A location with a policy assigned to it. The text is bold.
A location that inherits from a parent group and has no policy that is assigned
to it.
A location that inherits from a parent group and has a policy that is assigned
to it
To assign a policy to a group or location

1 In the console, click Policies > policy type.
2 On the Policies page, select a policy, and then click Assign the policy.
3 In the Assign policy dialog box, select the groups or locations, and then click
Assign.
4 Click OK to confirm.
See Unassigning a policy from a group or location on page 316.
Replacing a policy
You may want to replace one shared policy with another shared policy. You can
replace the shared policy in either all locations or for individual locations.
When you replace a policy for all locations, the management server replaces the
policy only for the locations that have it. For example, suppose the Sales group
uses the Sales policy for three of its four locations. If you replace the Sales policy
with the Marketing policy, only those three locations receive the Marketing policy.
You may want a group of clients to use the same settings no matter what location
they are in. In this case, you can replace a non-shared policy with a shared policy.
You replace a non-shared policy with a shared policy for each location individually.
To replace a shared policy for all locations
replace.
3 In the policy type Policies pane, click the policy.
4 In the Policies page, under Tasks, click Replace the Policy.
5 In the Replace policy type Policy dialog box, in the New policy type Policy
list box, select the shared policy that replaces the old one.
6 Select the groups and locations for which you want to replace the existing
policy.
7 Click Replace.
8 When you are prompted to confirm the replacement of the policy for the groups
and locations, click Yes.
To replace a shared policy or non-shared policy for one location
2 In the Clients page, under Clients, select the group for which you want to
replace a policy.
group "group name".
you cannot replace a policy.
4 Under Location-specific Policies and Settings, scroll to find the location that
contains the policy.
5 Next to the policy that you want to replace, click Tasks, and then click Replace
Policy.
6 In the Replace Policy dialog box, in the New policy list box, select the
replacement policy.
7 Click OK.

You can export and import policies rather than recreating the policies. All the settings
that are associated with the policy are automatically exported.
You may need to export a policy for the following reasons:
You update the management server from an older release to a newer release.
You want to update the new management server with the policies that you
previously customized.
You want to export a policy for use at a different site.
You export and import each policy one at a time. Once you export a file, you import
it and apply it to a group or only to a location. You can export a shared or non-shared
policy for a specific location in the Clients page.
To export a single policy from the Policies page
export.
export.
4 In the Policies page, under Tasks, click Export the Policy.
5 In the Export Policy dialog box, locate the folder where you want to export
the policy file to, and then click Export.
To export a shared or non-shared policy from the Clients page
2 Under Clients, select the group for which you want to export a policy.
group "group name".
you cannot export a policy.
location whose policy you want to export.
5 Locate the specific policy for the location that you want to export.
6 To the right of the policy, click Tasks, and then click Export Policy.
7 In the Export Policy dialog box, browse to the folder into which you want to
export the policy.
8 In the Export Policy dialog box, click Export.
To import a single policy

import.
3 In the policy type Policies pane, click the policy that you want to import.
4 On the Policies page, under Tasks, click Import a policy type Policy.
5 In the Import Policy dialog box, browse to the policy file that you want to
import, and then click Import.

Policies are either shared or non-shared. A policy is shared if you apply it to more
than one group or location. If you create shared policies, you can easily edit and
replace a policy in all groups and locations that use it. You can apply shared policies
at the My Company group level or a lower group level and subgroups can inherit
policies. You can have multiple shared policies.
If you need a specialized policy for a particular group or location, you create a policy
that is unique. You assign this unique, non-shared policy to one specific group or
location. You can only have one policy of each policy type per location.
For example, here are some possible scenarios:
A group of users in Finance needs to connect to an enterprise network by using
different locations when at the office and for home. You may need to apply a
different Firewall policy with its own set of rules and settings to each location
for that one group.
You have remote users who typically use DSL and ISDN, for which they may
need a VPN connection. You have other remote users who want to dial up when
they connect to the enterprise network. However, the sales and marketing groups
also want to use wireless connections. Each of these groups may need its own
Firewall policy for the locations from which they connect to the enterprise network.
You want to implement a restrictive policy regarding the installation of
non-certified applications on most employee workstations to protect the enterprise
network from attacks. Your IT group may require access to additional
applications. Therefore, the IT group may need a less restrictive security policy
than typical employees. In this case, you can create a different Firewall policy
for the IT group.
You typically add any policy that groups and locations share in the Policies page
on the Policies tab. However, you add any policy that is not shared between groups
and that applies only to a specific location in the Clients page. If you decide to add
a policy in the Clients page, you can add a new policy by using any of the following
methods:
Add a new policy.
Copy an existing policy to base the new policy on.
See Copying and pasting a policy on the Policies page on page 308.
See Copying and pasting a policy on the Clients page on page 309.
Import a policy that was previously exported from another site.
See Exporting and importing individual policies on page 312.
See Converting a shared policy to a non-shared policy on page 315.

You can copy the content of a shared policy and create a non-shared policy from
that content. A copy enables you to change the content of a shared policy in one
location and not in all other locations. The copy overrides the existing shared policy.
When you finish the conversion, the converted policy with its new name appears
under Location-specific Policies and Settings.
To convert a shared policy to a non-shared policy
2 In the Clients page, under Clients, select the group for which you want to
convert a policy.
3 In the pane that is associated with the group that you selected in the previous
step, click Policies.
group group_name.
you cannot replace a policy.
location and the specific policy that you want to convert.
6 Beside the specific policy, click Tasks, and then click Convert to Non-shared
Policy.
7 In the Overview dialog box, edit the name and description of the policy.
8 Modify the other policy settings as desired.
9 Click OK.

You may want to unassign a policy from a group or a location if you want to delete
the policy permanently or save the policy to use for a later time.
For example, a specific group may have experienced problems after you introduced
a new policy. If you want the policy to remain in the database, you can withdraw
the policy instead of deleting it. If you withdraw a policy, it is automatically withdrawn
from the groups and locations that you assigned it to. The number of locations that
a policy is used for appears on the policy type Policies pane on the Policies page.
Note: You must withdraw a policy or replace a policy from all groups and locations
before you can delete it.
You can withdraw all policies in the Policies page from a location or group except
for the following policies:
Virus and Spyware Protection
LiveUpdate Settings
You can only replace them with another Virus and Spyware Protection policy or
LiveUpdate policy.
See Replacing a policy on page 311.
To unassign a shared policy in the Policies page
withdraw.
withdraw.
4 On the Policies page, under Tasks, click Withdraw the Policy.
5 In the Withdraw Policy dialog box, check the groups and locations from which
you want to withdraw the policy.
Locking and unlocking Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings
6 Click Withdraw.
7 When you are prompted to confirm the withdrawal of the policy from the groups
and locations, click Yes.
To unassign a shared or non-shared policy in the Clients page
withdraw a policy.
group "group name".
you cannot withdraw a policy.
location for which you want to withdraw a policy.
5 Locate the policy for the location that you want to withdraw.
6 Click Tasks, and then click Withdraw Policy.
7 In the Withdraw Policy dialog box, click Yes.
Locking and unlocking Virus and Spyware Protection

policy settings
You can lock and unlock some Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings. End
users cannot change locked settings. A padlock icon appears next to a lockable
setting.
To lock or unlock a policy setting
1 In the console, open a Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
2 Select one of the pages, such as Auto-Protect.
3 Click a padlock icon to lock or unlock the corresponding setting.
4 Click OK.
You can also lock and unlock Tamper Protection settings, Submissions settings,
and intrusion prevention settings.
Monitoring the applications and services that run on

client computers
The Windows client monitors and collects information about the applications and
the services that run on each computer. You can configure the client to collect the
information in a list and send the list to the management server. The list of
applications and their characteristics is called learned applications.
You can use this information to find out what applications your users run. You can
also use the information when you need information about applications in the
following areas:
Firewall policies
Application and Device Control policies
SONAR technology
Host Integrity policies
Network application monitoring
File fingerprint lists
Note: The Mac and Linux clients do not monitor the applications and the services
that run on those computers.
You can perform several tasks to set up and use learned applications.
Table 14-4 Steps to monitor the applications
Steps Description
Enable learned Configure the management server to collect information about

applications the applications that the client computers run.
See Configuring the management server to collect information

about the applications that the client computers run on page 319.
Search for applications You can use a query tool to search for the list of applications that
the client computers run. You can search on application-based
criteria or computer-based criteria. For example, you can find out
the version of Internet Explorer that each client computer uses.
See Searching for information about the applications that the

computers run on page 320.
You can save the results of an application search for review.

Note: In some countries, it may not be permissible under local law to use the learned
applications tool under certain circumstances, such as to gain application use
information from a laptop when the employee logs on to your office network from
home using a company laptop. Before your use of this tool, please confirm that use
is permitted for your purposes in your jurisdiction. If it is not permitted, please follow
instructions for disabling the tool.
Configuring the management server to collect information about the

applications that the client computers run
You can enable learned applications for a group or a location. The clients then keep
track of every application that runs and send that data to the management server.
Note: The Mac and Linux clients do not monitor the applications and the services
that run on those computers.
You can set up a notification to be sent to your email address when each client in
a group or location runs an application.
Note: You can modify this setting only for the subgroups that do not inherit their
policies and settings from a parent group.
To send the learned applications list to the management server for a group
2 Under View Clients, select a group.
3 On the Policies tab, click Communications Settings.
4 In the Communications Settings for group name dialog box, make sure
Learn applications that run on the client computers is checked.
5 Click OK.
To send learned applications to the management server for a location
2 Under View Clients, select a group.
3 Under Location-specific Policies and Settings, select the location, and then
expand Location-specific Settings.
4 To the right of Communications Settings, click Tasks, and then uncheck

Use Group Communications Settings.
Checking this setting enables you to create a location setting rather than a
group setting.
5 Click Tasks, and then click Edit Settings.
6 In the Communications Settings for location name dialog box, check Learn
applications that run on the client computers.
7 Click OK.
See Monitoring the applications and services that run on client computers
on page 318.
Searching for information about the applications that

the computers run
After the management server receives the list of applications from the clients, you
can run queries to find out details about the applications. For example, you can find
all the client computers that use an unauthorized application. You can then create
a firewall rule to block the application on the client computer. Or you may want to
upgrade all the client computers to use the most current version of Microsoft Word.
You can use the Search for Applications task from any type of policy.
Note: The Mac client does not monitor the applications and the services that run
on Mac computers.
You can search for an application in the following ways:

By application.
You can limit the search to specific applications or application details such as
its name, file fingerprint, path, size, version, or last modified time.
By client or client computer.
You can search for the applications that either a specific user runs or a specific
computer runs. For example, you can search on the computers IP address.
You can also search for application names to add to a firewall rule, directly within
the Firewall policy.
See Defining information about applications on page 343.
Note: The information in the Search box is not collected until you enable the feature
that keeps track of all the applications that clients run. You can go to the Clients
page, Communications Settings dialog box for each group or location to enable
this feature.
To search for information about the applications that the computers run
2 On the Policies page, under Tasks, click Search for Applications.
3 In the Search for Applications dialog box, to the right of the Search for
applications in field, click Browse.
4 In the Select Group or Location dialog box, select a group of clients for which
you want to view the applications, and then click OK.
You can specify only one group at a time.
5 Make sure that Search subgroups is checked.
To search by user or computer information, click Based on client/computer
information.
To search by application, click Based on applications.
7 Click the empty cell under Search Field, and then select the search criterion
from the list.
The Search Field cell displays the criteria for the option that you selected. For
details about these criteria, click Help.
8 Click the empty cell under Comparison Operator, and then select one of the
operators.
9 Click the empty cell under Value, and then select or type a value.
The Value cell may provide a format or a value from the drop-down list,
depending on the criterion you selected in the Search Field cell.
10 To add an additional search criterion, click the second row, and then enter
information in the Search Field, Comparison Operator, and Value cells.
If you enter more than one row of search criteria, the query tries to match all
conditions.
11 Click Search.
12 In the Query Results table, do any of the following tasks:
Click the scroll arrows to view additional rows and columns.
Click Previous and Next to see additional screens of information.

Select a row, and then click View Details to see additional information
about the application.
The results are not saved unless you export them to a file.
13 To remove the query results, click Clear All.
14 Click Close.
on page 318.
Chapter 15
Managing firewall
protection
Managing firewall protection
Creating a firewall policy
Managing firewall rules
Setting up firewall rules

The firewall allows the incoming network traffic and outgoing network traffic that
you specify in firewall policy. The Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall policy
contains rules and protection settings, most of which you can enable or disable and
configure.
Table 15-1 Optional tasks to manage firewall protection
Task Description
Read about firewall protection Before you configure your firewall protection, you should familiarize yourself with
the firewall.
See How a firewall works on page 324.
See About the Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall on page 325.

Managing firewall protection 324
Table 15-1 Optional tasks to manage firewall protection (continued)
Task Description
Create a firewall policy Symantec Endpoint Protection installs with a default firewall policy. You can modify
the default policy or create new ones.
You must create a policy first before you configure firewall rules and firewall
protection settings for that policy.
Create and customize firewall Firewall rules are the policy components that control how the firewall protects client
rules computers from malicious attacks.
The default firewall policy contains default firewall rules. And when you create a
new policy, Symantec Endpoint Protection provides default firewall rules. However,
you can modify the default rules or create new ones.
See Managing firewall rules on page 335.
See Setting up firewall rules on page 353.
Enable firewall protection settings After the firewall has completed certain operations, control is passed to a number
of components. Each component is designed to perform a different type of packet
analysis.

on page 329.
See Automatically blocking connections to an attacking computer on page 331.
See Preventing outside stealth attacks on computers on page 333.
See Disabling Windows Firewall on page 334.
See Blocking a remote computer by configuring peer-to-peer authentication

on page 574.
Monitor firewall protection Regularly monitor the firewall protection status on your computers.
How a firewall works

A firewall does all of the following tasks:
Prevents any unauthorized users from accessing the computers and networks
in your organization that connect to the Internet
Monitors the communication between your computers and other computers on
the Internet
Creates a shield that allows or blocks attempts to access the information on
your computer
Warns you of connection attempts from other computers
Warns you of connection attempts by the applications on your computer that
connect to other computers
The firewall reviews the packets of data that travel across the Internet. A packet is
a discrete unit of data that is part of the information flow between two computers.
Packets are reassembled at their destination to appear as an unbroken data stream.
Packets include the following information about the data:
The originating computer
The intended recipient or recipients
How the packet data is processed
Ports that receive the packets
Ports are the channels that divide the stream of data that comes from the Internet.
Applications that run on a computer listen to the ports. The applications accept
the data that is sent to the ports.
Network attacks exploit weaknesses in vulnerable applications. Attackers use these
weaknesses to send the packets that contain malicious programming code to ports.
When vulnerable applications listen to the ports, the malicious code lets the attackers
gain access to the computer.
See About the Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall on page 325.
About the Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall

The Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall uses firewall policies and rules to allow
or block network traffic. The Symantec Endpoint Protection includes a default
Firewall policy with default firewall rules and firewall settings for the office
environment. The office environment is normally under the protection of corporate
firewalls, boundary packet filters, or antivirus servers. Therefore, it is normally more
secure than most home environments, where limited boundary protection is available.
Firewall rules control how the client protects the client computer from malicious
inbound traffic and malicious outbound traffic. The firewall automatically checks all
the inbound and the outbound packets against these rules. The firewall then allows
or blocks the packets based on the information that is specified in rules. When a
computer tries to connect to another computer, the firewall compares the type of
connection with its list of firewall rules. The firewall also uses stateful inspection of
all network traffic.
When you install the console for the first time, it adds a default Firewall policy to
each group automatically.
Every time you add a new location, the console copies a Firewall policy to the default
location automatically.
You determine the level of interaction that you want users to have with the client
by permitting or blocking their ability to configure firewall rules and firewall settings.
Users can interact with the client only when it notifies them of new network
connections and possible problems. Or they can have full access to the user
interface.
You can enable or disable the firewall protection as needed.
You can install the client with default firewall settings. In most cases you do not
have to change the settings. However, if you have a detailed understanding of
networks, you can make many changes in the client firewall to fine-tune the client
computer's protection.
See How the firewall uses stateful inspection on page 341.

The Symantec Endpoint Protection includes a default Firewall policy with default
firewall rules and default firewall settings for the office environment. The office
environment is normally under the protection of corporate firewalls, boundary packet
filters, or antivirus servers. Therefore, it is normally more secure than most home
environments, where limited boundary protection is available.
When you install the console for the first time, it adds a default Firewall policy to
each group automatically.
Every time you add a new location, the console copies a Firewall policy to the default
location automatically. If the default protection is not appropriate, you can customize
the Firewall policy for each location, such as for a home site or customer site. If
you do not want the default Firewall policy, you can edit it or replace it with another
shared policy.
When you enable firewall protection, the policy allows all inbound IP-based network
traffic and all outbound IP-based network traffic, with the following exceptions:
The default firewall protection blocks inbound and outbound IPv6 traffic with all
remote systems.
Note: IPv6 is a network layer protocol that is used on the Internet. If you install
the client on the computers that run Microsoft Vista, the Rules list includes
several default rules that block the Ethernet protocol type of IPv6. If you remove
the default rules, you must create a rule that blocks IPv6.
The default firewall protection restricts the inbound connections for a few
protocols that are often used in attacks (for example, Windows file sharing).
Internal network connections are allowed and external networks are blocked.
Table 15-2 describes the tasks that you can perform to configure a new firewall
policy. You must add a firewall policy first, but thereafter, the remaining tasks are
optional and you can complete them in any order.
Table 15-2 How to create a firewall policy
Task Description
Add a firewall policy When you create a new policy, you give it a name and a description. You also
specify the groups to which the policy is applied.
A firewall policy is automatically enabled when you create it. But you can disable if
you need to.
Create firewall rules Firewall rules are the policy components that control how the firewall protects client
computers from malicious incoming traffic and applications. The firewall automatically
checks all incoming packets and outgoing packets against these rules. It allows or
blocks the packets based on the information that is specified in rules. You can modify
the default rules, create new rules, or disable the default rules.
When you create a new Firewall policy, Symantec Endpoint Protection provides
default firewall rules.
The default firewall rules are enabled by default.
Enable and customize You can send users a notification that an application that they want to access is
notifications to users that access blocked.
to an application is blocked
These settings are disabled by default.
See Notifying the users that access to an application is blocked on page 346.
Table 15-2 How to create a firewall policy (continued)
Task Description
Enable automatic firewall rules You can enable the options that automatically permit communication between certain
network services. These options eliminate the need to create the rules that explicitly
allow those services. You can also enable traffic settings to detect and block the
traffic that communicates through NetBIOS and token rings.
Only the traffic protocols are enabled by default.

on page 329.
If the Symantec Endpoint Protection client detects a network attack, it can

automatically block the connection to ensure that the client computer is safe. The
client activates an Active Response, which automatically blocks all communication
to and from the attacking computer for a set period of time. The IP address of the
attacking computer is blocked for a single location.
This option is disabled by default.
See Automatically blocking connections to an attacking computer on page 331.
Configure protection and stealth You can enable settings to detect and log potential attacks on the client and block
settings spoofing attempts.
You can enable the settings that prevent outside attacks from detecting information
about your clients.
See Preventing outside stealth attacks on computers on page 333.
All of the protection options and stealth options are disabled by default.
Integrate the Symantec Endpoint You can specify the conditions in which Symantec Endpoint Protection disables the
Protection firewall with the Windows firewall. When Symantec Endpoint Protection is uninstalled, Symantec
Windows firewall Endpoint Protection restores the Windows firewall setting to the state it was in before
Symantec Endpoint Protection was installed.
The default setting is to disable the Windows firewall once only and to disable the
Windows firewall disabled message.
See Disabling Windows Firewall on page 334.
Configure peer-to-peer You can use peer-to-peer authentication to allow a remote client computer (peer)
authentication to connect to another client computer (authenticator) within the same corporate
network. The authenticator temporarily blocks inbound TCP and UDP traffic from
the remote computer until the remote computer passes the Host Integrity check.
This option is disabled by default.

on page 574.

See Best practices for Firewall policy settings for remote clients on page 268.
Enabling and disabling a firewall policy

Firewall policies are automatically enabled when you create them. You can disable
a firewall policy as needed, and then enable it again. You must enable a firewall
policy for it to be active.
You might want to disable the firewall for any of the following reasons:
You install an application that might cause the firewall to block it.
A firewall rule or firewall setting blocks an application due to an administrator's
mistake.
The firewall causes network connectivity-related issues.
The firewall might slow down the client computer.
You should enable at least the default firewall protection to keep your computers
protected during remote client installation.
To enable or disable a firewall policy
2 On the Policies page, select the Firewall policy, and then right-click Edit.
3 In the policy, on the Overview page, check Enable this policy to enable the
policy; uncheck it to disable it.
4 Click OK.
Enabling communications for network services instead of adding a

rule
You can enable the options that automatically allow communication between certain
network services so you do not have to define the rules that explicitly allow those
services. You can also enable traffic settings to detect and block the traffic that
communicates through NetBIOS and token rings.
You can allow outbound requests and inbound replies for the network connections
that are configured to use DHCP, DNS, and WINS traffic.
The filters allow DHCP, DNS, or WINS clients to receive an IP address from a
server. It also protects the clients against attacks from the network with the following
conditions:
If the client sends a request The client waits for five seconds to allow an inbound
to the server response.
If the client does not send a Each filter does not allow the packet.
request to the server
When you enable these options, Symantec Endpoint Protection permits the packet
if a request was made; it does not block packets. You must create a firewall rule to
block packets.
Note: To configure these settings in mixed control, you must also enable these
settings in the Client User Interface Mixed Control Settings dialog box.
To enable communications for network services instead of adding a rule

1 In the console, open a Firewall policy.
2 On the Firewall Policy page, click Built-in Rules.
3 Check the options that you want to enable.
4 Click OK.
5 If you are prompted, assign the policy to a location.
Configuring firewall settings for mixed control

You can configure the client so that users have no control, full control, or limited
control over which firewall settings they can configure.
Use the following guidelines when you configure the client:
Server control The user cannot create any firewall rules or enable firewall
settings.
Client control The user can create firewall rules and enable all firewall
settings.
Mixed control The user can create firewall rules. You decide which firewall
settings the user can enable.
To configure firewall settings for mixed control

2 Under Clients, select the group with the user control level that you want to
modify.
4 To the right of Client User Interface Control Settings, click Tasks > Edit
Settings.
5 In the Control Mode Settings dialog box, click Mixed control, and then click
Customize.
6 On the Client/Server Control Settings tab, under the Firewall Policy category,
do one of the following tasks:
To make a client setting available for the users to configure, click Client.
To configure a client setting, click Server.
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK.
9 For each firewall setting that you set to Server, enable or disable the setting
in the Firewall policy.
on page 329.
Automatically blocking connections to an attacking computer

If the Symantec Endpoint Protection client detects a network attack, it can
automatically block the connection to ensure that the client computer is safe. The
client activates an Active Response, which automatically blocks all communication
to and from the attacking computer for a set period of time. The IP address of the
attacking computer is blocked for a single location.
The attackers IP address is recorded in the Security log. You can unblock an attack
by canceling a specific IP address or canceling all Active Response.
If you set the client to mixed control, you can specify whether the setting is available
on the client for the user to enable. If it is not available, you must enable it in the
Client User Interface Mixed Control Settings dialog box.
Updated IPS signatures, updated denial-of-service signatures, port scans, and MAC
spoofing also trigger an Active Response.
To automatically block connections to an attacking computer
2 On the Firewall Policy page in the left pane, click Protection and Stealth.
3 Under Protection Settings, check Automatically block an attacker's IP
address.
4 In the Number of seconds during which to block IP address ... seconds
text box, specify the number of seconds to block potential attackers.
You can enter a value from 1 to 999,999.
5 Click OK.
Detecting potential attacks and spoofing attempts

You can enable the various settings that enable Symantec Endpoint Protection to
detect and log potential attacks on the client and block spoofing attempts. All of
these options are disabled by default.
The settings that you can enable are as follows:
Enable port scan detection When this setting is enabled, Symantec Endpoint Protection
monitors all incoming packets that any security rule blocks.
If a rule blocks several different packets on different ports in
a short period of time, Symantec Endpoint Protection creates
a Security log entry.
Port scan detection does not block any packets. You must
create a security policy to block traffic when a port scan
occurs.
Enable denial of service Denial of service detection is a type of intrusion detection.

detection When enabled, the client blocks traffic if it detects a pattern
from known signatures, regardless of the port number or type
of Internet protocol.
Enable anti-MAC spoofing When enabled, Symantec Endpoint Protection allows

incoming and outgoing address resolution protocol (ARP)
traffic if an ARP request was made to that specific host. All
other unexpected ARP traffic is blocked and an entry is
generated to the Security log.
To detect potential attacks and spoofing attempts

2 In the Firewall Policy page, click Protection and Stealth.
3 Under Protection Settings, check any of the options that you want to enable.
4 Click OK.
Preventing outside stealth attacks on computers

You can enable the settings that prevent outside attacks from detecting information
about your clients. These settings are disabled by default.
To prevent outside stealth attacks on computers

2 In the Firewall Policy page, click Protection and Stealth.
3 Under Stealth Settings, check any of the options that you want to enable.
4 Click OK.
Disabling Windows Firewall

You can specify the conditions in which Symantec Endpoint Protection disables
Windows Firewall. Symantec Endpoint Protection restores the Windows Firewall
settings to the state it was in before Symantec Endpoint Protection was installed
when the following occurs:
Symantec Endpoint Protection is uninstalled.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall is disabled.
Note: Symantec Endpoint Protection does not modify any existing Windows Firewall
policy rules or exclusions.
Typically, a Windows user receives a notification when their computer restarts if

Windows Firewall is disabled. Symantec Endpoint Protection disables this notification
by default so that it does not alarm your users when Windows Firewall is disabled.
However, you can enable the notification, if desired.
To disable Windows Firewall
2 Under Policies, click Firewall.
Create a new firewall policy.
In the Firewall Policies list, double-click on the firewall policy that you want
to modify.
4 Under Firewall Policy, click Windows Integration.

5 In the Disable Windows Firewall drop-down list, specify when you want
Windows Firewall disabled.
The default setting is Disable Once Only.
Click Help for more information on the options.
6 In the Windows Firewall Disabled Message drop-down list, specify whether

you want to disable the Windows message on startup to indicate that the firewall
is disabled.
The default setting is Disable, which means the user does not receive a
message upon a computer startup that Windows Firewall is disabled.
7 Click OK.

Firewall rules control how the firewall protects computers from malicious incoming
traffic and applications. The firewall checks all incoming packets and outgoing
packets against the rules that you enable. It allows or blocks the packets based on
the conditions that you specify in the firewall rule.
Symantec Endpoint Protection installs with a default firewall policy that contains
default rules. When you create a new firewall policy, Symantec Endpoint Protection
provides default firewall rules. You can modify any of the default rules or create
new firewall rules if your administrator permits it, or if your client is unmanaged.
You must have at least one rule in a policy. But you can have as many rules as you
need. You can enable or disable rules as needed. For example, you might want to
disable a rule to perform troubleshooting and enable it when you are done.
Table 15-3 describes what you need to know to manage firewall rules.
Table 15-3 Managing firewall rules
Task Description
Learn how firewall rules work and Before you modify the firewall rules, you should understand the following
what makes up a firewall rule information about how firewall rules work:
The relationship between the client's user control level and the user's
interaction with the firewall rules. The relationship between server rules and
client rules. See About firewall server rules and client rules on page 337.
How to order rules to ensure that the most restrictive rules are evaluated first
and the most general rules are evaluated last
See About the firewall rule, firewall setting, and intrusion prevention
processing order on page 338.
The implications of inheriting rules from a parent group and how inherited
rules are processed
See About inherited firewall rules on page 339.
That the client uses stateful inspection, which keeps track of the state of the
network connections
The firewall components that make up the firewall rule
When you understand about these triggers and how you can best use them,
you can customize your firewall rules to protect your clients and servers.
See About firewall rule application triggers on page 342.
See About firewall rule host triggers on page 347.
See About firewall rule network services triggers on page 350.
See About firewall rule network adapter triggers on page 352.
Add a new firewall rule You can perform the following tasks to manage firewall rules:
Add new firewall rules through the console using several methods
One method lets you add a blank rule that has default settings. The other
method offers a wizard that guides you through creating a new rule.
See Adding a new firewall rule on page 354.
Customize a rule by changing any of the firewall rule criteria
Export and import firewall rules from another firewall policy
See Importing and exporting firewall rules on page 355.
Copy and paste firewall rules
You can save time creating a new firewall rule by copying an existing rule
that is similar to the rule that you want to create. Then you can modify the
copied rule to meet your needs.
Enable or disable a firewall rule Firewall rules are automatically enabled. However, you may need to temporarily
disable a firewall rule to test the rule. The firewall does not inspect disabled rules.
Table 15-3 Managing firewall rules (continued)
Task Description
Customize a firewall rule After you create a new rule, or if you want to customize a default rule, you can
modify any of the firewall rule criteria.
About firewall server rules and client rules

Rules are categorized as either server rules or client rules. Server rules are the
rules that you create in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and that are
downloaded to the Symantec Endpoint Protection client. Client rules are the rules
that the user creates on the client.
Table 15-4 describes the relationship between the client's user control level and
the user's interaction with the firewall rules.
Table 15-4 User control level and rule status
User control level User interaction
Server control The client receives server rules but the user cannot view them.
The user cannot create client rules.
Mixed control The client receives server rules. The user can create client rules,
which are merged with server rules and client security settings.
Client control The client does not receive server rules. The user can create
client rules. You cannot view client rules.
Table 15-5 lists the order that the firewall processes server rules, client rules, and
client settings.
Table 15-5 Server rules and client rules processing priority
Priority Rule type or setting
First Server rules with high priority levels (rules above the blue line in
the Rules list)
Second Client rules

Table 15-5 Server rules and client rules processing priority (continued)
Priority Rule type or setting
Third Server rules with lower priority levels (rules under the blue line
in the Rules list)
On the client, server rules under the blue line are processed after
client rules.
Fourth Client security settings
Fifth Client application-specific settings
On the client, users can modify a client rule or security setting, but users cannot
modify a server rule.
Warning: If the client is in mixed control, users can create a client rule that allows
all traffic. This rule overrides all server rules under the blue line.

See Changing the order of firewall rules on page 341.
About the firewall rule, firewall setting, and intrusion prevention

processing order
Firewall rules are ordered sequentially, from highest to lowest priority in the rules
list. If the first rule does not specify how to handle a packet, the firewall inspects
the second rule. This process continues until the firewall finds a match. After the
firewall finds a match, the firewall takes the action that the rule specifies. Subsequent
lower priority rules are not inspected. For example, if a rule that blocks all traffic is
listed first, followed by a rule that allows all traffic, the client blocks all traffic.
You can order rules according to exclusivity. The most restrictive rules are evaluated
first, and the most general rules are evaluated last. For example, you should place
the rules that block traffic near the top of the rules list. The rules that are lower in
the list might allow the traffic.
The Rules list contains a blue dividing line. The dividing line sets the priority of rules
in the following situations:
When a subgroup inherits rules from a parent group.
When the client is set to mixed control. The firewall processes both server rules
and client rules.
Table 15-6 shows the order in which the firewall processes the rules, firewall settings,
and intrusion prevention settings.
Table 15-6 Processing order
Priority Setting
First Custom IPS signatures
Second Intrusion Prevention settings, traffic settings, and stealth settings
Third Built-in rules
Fourth Firewall rules
Fifth Port scan checks
Sixth IPS signatures that are downloaded through LiveUpdate
See Changing the order of firewall rules on page 341.

See How intrusion prevention works on page 370.
About inherited firewall rules

A subgroup's policy can inherit only the firewall rules that are enabled in the parent
group. When you have inherited the rules, you can disable them, but you cannot
modify them. As the new rules are added to the parent group's policy, the new rules
are automatically added to the inheriting policy.
When the inherited rules appear in the Rules list, they are shaded in italics (version
14) or purple (version 12.1.x). Above the blue line, the inherited rules are added
above the rules that you created. Below the blue line, the inherited rules are added
below the rules that you created.
A Firewall policy also inherits default rules, so the subgroup's Firewall policy may
have two sets of default rules. You may want to delete one set of default rules.
If you want to remove the inherited rules, you remove the inheritance rather than
delete them. You have to remove all the inherited rules rather than the selected
rules.
The firewall processes inherited firewall rules in the Rules list as follows:
Above the blue dividing line The rules that the policy inherits take precedence over the
rules that you create.
Below the blue dividing line The rules that you create take precedence over the rules that
the policy inherits.
Figure 15-1 shows how the Rules list orders rules when a subgroup inherits rules
from a parent group. In this example, the Sales group is the parent group. The
Europe Sales group inherits from the Sales group.
Figure 15-1 An example of how firewall rules inherit from each other
Sales Europe Sales Europe Sales

group group group
Europe Sales inherits
firewall rules from Sales Rule 1 Takes precedence
Rule 1 Rule 3
Rule 3
Blue line Blue line Blue line
Rule 4 Takes precedence

Rule 2 Rule 4
Rule 2

See Adding inherited firewall rules from a parent group on page 340.
Adding inherited firewall rules from a parent group

You can add firewall rules to a firewall policy by inheriting rules from a parent group.
To inherit the rules from a parent group, the subgroup's policy must be a non-shared
policy.
Note: If the group inherits all of its policies from a parent group, this option is
unavailable.
To add inherited firewall rules from a parent group

2 On the Firewall Policy page, click Rules.
3 On the Rules tab, check Inherit Firewall Rules from Parent Group.
To remove the inherited rules, uncheck Inherit Firewall Rules from Parent
Group.
4 Click OK.
See About inherited firewall rules on page 339.
Changing the order of firewall rules

The firewall processes the list of firewall rules from the top down. You can determine
how the firewall processes firewall rules by changing their order.
If the Symantec Endpoint Protection client uses location switching, when you change
the firewall rule order, the change affects the order for the current location only.
Note: For better protection, place the most restrictive rules first and the least
restrictive rules last.
See About the firewall rule, firewall setting, and intrusion prevention processing
order on page 338.
To change the order of firewall rules
2 In the Firewall Policy page, click Rules, and then select the rule that you want
to move.
To process this rule before the previous rule, click Move Up.
To process this rule after the rule below it, click Move Down.
4 Click OK.
How the firewall uses stateful inspection

Firewall protection uses stateful inspection to track current connections. Stateful
inspection tracks source and destination IP addresses, ports, applications, and
other connection information. Before the client inspects the firewall rules, it makes
the traffic flow decisions that are based on the connection information.
For example, if a firewall rule allows a computer to connect to a Web server, the
firewall logs the connection information. When the server replies, the firewall
discovers that a response from the Web server to the computer is expected. It
permits the Web server traffic to flow to the initiating computer without inspecting
the rule base. A rule must permit the initial outbound traffic before the firewall logs
the connection.
Stateful inspection eliminates the need to create new rules. For the traffic that is
initiated in one direction, you do not have to create the rules that permit the traffic
in both directions. The client traffic that is initiated in one direction includes Telnet
(port 23), HTTP (port 80), and HTTPS (port 443). The client computers initiate this
outbound traffic; you create a rule that permits the outbound traffic for these
protocols. Stateful inspection automatically permits the return traffic that responds
to the outbound traffic. Because the firewall is stateful in nature, you only need to
create the rules that initiate a connection, not the characteristics of a particular
packet. All packets that belong to an allowed connection are implicitly allowed as
being an integral part of that same connection.
Stateful inspection supports all rules that direct TCP traffic.
Stateful inspection does not support the rules that filter ICMP traffic. For ICMP
traffic, you must create the rules that permit the traffic in both directions. For
example, for the clients to use the ping command and receive replies, you must
create a rule that permits ICMP traffic in both directions.
The state table that maintains the connection information may be periodically cleared.
For example, it is cleared when a Firewall policy update is processed or if Symantec
Endpoint Protection services are restarted.
About firewall rule application triggers

When the application is the only trigger you define in a rule that allows traffic, the
firewall allows the application to perform any network operation. The application is
the significant value, not the network operations that the application performs. For
example, suppose you allow Internet Explorer and you define no other triggers.
Users can access the remote sites that use HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, Gopher, and any
other protocol that the Web browser supports. You can define additional triggers
to describe the particular network protocols and hosts with which communication
is allowed.
Application-based rules may be difficult to troubleshoot because an application may

use multiple protocols. For example, if the firewall processes a rule that allows
Internet Explorer before a rule that blocks FTP, the user can still communicate with
FTP. The user can enter an FTP-based URL in the browser, such as
ftp://ftp.symantec.com.
For example, suppose you allow Internet Explorer and define no other triggers.
Computer users can access the remote sites that use HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, Gopher,
and any other protocol that the Web browser supports. You can define additional
triggers to describe the network protocols and hosts with which communication is
allowed.
You should not use application rules to control traffic at the network level. For
example, a rule that blocks or limits the use of Internet Explorer would have no
effect should the user use a different Web browser. The traffic that the other Web
browser generates would be compared against all other rules except the Internet
Explorer rule. Application-based rules are more effective when the rules are
configured to block the applications that send and receive traffic.
See Blocking networked applications that might be under attack on page 344.
Defining information about applications

You can define information about the applications that clients run and include this
information in a firewall rule.
You can define applications in the following ways:
Type the information manually.
See To define information about applications manually on page 343.
Search for the application in the learned applications list.
Applications in the learned applications list are the applications that client
computers in your network run.
See To search for applications from the learned applications list on page 344.
To define information about applications manually
2 On the Firewall Policies page, click Rules.
3 On the Rules tab, in the Rules list, right-click the Application field for the rule
you want to change, and then click Edit.
4 In the Application List dialog box, click Add.

5 In the Add Application dialog box, enter one or more of the following fields:
File name, which can include the file path
File description
This field is used for display purposes only. It does not function as a
matching condition.
File size, in bytes
Date that the application was last changed
File fingerprint
Note: Network Application Monitoring must be enabled to define a firewall rule

by file size, date last modified, or file fingerprint. If Network Application
Monitoring is disabled, rule processing ignores all fields except for File Name.
6 Click OK to add the application conditions.

7 Click OK to save the application list.
To search for applications from the learned applications list
2 On the Rules tab, select a rule, right-click the Application field, and then click
Edit.
3 In the Application List dialog box, click Add From.
4 In the Search for Applications dialog box, search for an application.
5 Under the Query Results table, to add the application to the Applications
list, select the application, click Add, and then click OK.
6 Click Close.
7 Click OK.
Blocking networked applications that might be under attack

Network application monitoring tracks an application's behavior in the security log.
If an application's content is modified too frequently, it is likely that a Trojan horse
attacked the application and the client computer is not safe. If an application's
content is modified on an infrequent basis, it is likely that a patch was installed and
the client computer is safe. You can use this information to create a firewall rule
that allows or blocks an application.
You can configure the client to detect and monitor any application that runs on the
client computer and that is networked. Network applications send and receive traffic.
The client detects whether an application's content changes.
If you suspect that a Trojan horse has attacked an application, you can use network
application monitoring to configure the client to block the application. You can also
configure the client to ask users whether to allow or block the application.
An application's content changes for the following reasons:
A Trojan horse attacked the application.
The application was updated with a new version or an update.
You can add applications to a list so that the client does not monitor them. You may
want to exclude the applications that you think are safe from a Trojan horse attack,
but that have frequent and automatic patch updates.
You may want to disable network application monitoring if you are confident that
the client computers receive adequate protection from antivirus and antispyware
protection. You may also want to minimize the number of notifications that ask users
to allow or block a network application.
To block networked applications that might be under attack
2 Under Clients, select a group, and then click Policies.
click Network Application Monitoring.
4 In the Network Application Monitoring for group name dialog box, click
Enable Network Application Monitoring.
5 In the When an application change is detected drop-down list, select the
action that the firewall takes on the application that runs on the client as follows:
Ask Asks the user to allow or block the application.
Block the traffic Blocks the application from running.
Allow and Log Allows the application to run and records the information
in the security log.
The firewall takes this action on the applications that

have been modified only.
6 If you selected Ask, click Additional Text.

7 In the Additional Text dialog box, type the text that you want to appear under
the standard message, and then click OK.
8 To exclude an application from being monitored, under Unmonitored
Application List, do one of the following tasks:
To define an application Click Add, fill out one or more fields, and then click OK.
manually
To define an application from Click Add From.

a learned applications list
The learned applications list monitors both networked
and non-networked applications. You must select
networked applications only from the learned
applications list. After you have added applications to
the Unmonitored Applications List, you can enable,
disable, edit, or delete them.
9 Check the box beside the application to enable it; uncheck it to disable it.
10 Click OK.
See Searching for information about the applications that the computers run
on page 320.
See Configuring the management server to collect information about the applications
that the client computers run on page 319.
Notifying the users that access to an application is blocked

You can send users a notification that an application that they want to access is
blocked. This notification appears on the users' computers.
Note: Enabling too many notifications can not only overwhelm your users, but can
also alarm them. Use caution when enabling notifications.
To notify the users that access to an application is blocked

3 On the Notifications tab, check the following options that you want to apply:
Display notification on the A notification appears when the client blocks an

computer when the client application.
blocks an application
Add additional text to Click Set Additional Text and customize the
notification notification.
Customizing the notification text is optional.
4 Click OK.
See Blocking networked applications that might be under attack on page 344.
About firewall rule host triggers

You specify the host on both sides of the described network connection when you
define host triggers.
Traditionally, the way to express the relationship between hosts is referred to as
being either the source or destination of a network connection.
You can define the host relationship in either one of the following ways:
Source and destination The source host and destination host is dependent on the
direction of traffic. In one case the local client computer might be
the source, whereas in another case the remote computer might
be the source.
The source and the destination relationship are more commonly

used in network-based firewalls.
Local and remote The local host is always the local client computer, and the remote
host is always a remote computer that is positioned elsewhere
on the network. This expression of the host relationship is
independent of the direction of traffic.
The local and the remote relationship is more commonly used in

host-based firewalls, and is a simpler way to look at traffic.
You can define multiple source hosts and multiple destination hosts.
Figure 15-2 illustrates the source relationship and destination relationship with
respect to the direction of traffic.
Figure 15-2 The relationship between source and destination hosts
Source Destination
` HTTP
Symantec.com
SEP client
Destination Source
` RDP
`
SEP client
Other client
Figure 15-3 illustrates the local host and remote host relationship with respect to
the direction of traffic.
Figure 15-3 The relationship between local and remote hosts
Local Remote
` HTTP
Symantec.com
SEP client
Local Remote
` RDP
`
SEP client
Other client
Relationships are evaluated by the following types of statements:

The hosts that you define on either side of the connection OR statement
(between the source and the destination)
Selected hosts AND statement
For example, consider a rule that defines a single local host and multiple remote
hosts. As the firewall examines the packets, the local host must match the relevant
IP address. However, the opposing sides of the address may be matched to any
remote host. For example, you can define a rule to allow HTTP communication
between the local host and either Symantec.com, Yahoo.com, or Google.com. The
single rule is the same as three rules.
See Adding host groups on page 349.
See Blocking traffic to or from a specific server on page 360.
Adding host groups

A host group is a collection of: DNS domain names, DNS host names, IP addresses,
IP ranges, MAC addresses, or subnets that are grouped under one name. The
purpose of host groups is to eliminate the retyping of host addresses and names.
For example, you can add multiple IP addresses one at a time to a firewall rule. Or,
you can add multiple IP addresses to a host group, and then add the group to the
firewall rule.
As you incorporate host groups, you must describe where the groups are used. If
you decide later to delete a host group, you must first remove the host group from
all the firewall rules that reference the group.
When you add a host group, it appears at the bottom of the Hosts list. You can
access the Hosts list from the Host field in a firewall rule.
To add host groups
2 Expand Policy Components, and then click Host Groups.
3 Under Tasks, click Add a Host Group.
4 In the Host Group dialog box, type a name, and then click Add.
5 In the Host dialog box, in the Type drop-down list, select a host.
6 Type the appropriate information for each host type.
7 Click OK.
8 Add additional hosts, if necessary.

9 Click OK.
Defining DNS queries based on location

You can define how frequently you want a specific location to perform a DNS query.
This feature lets you configure one location to query the DNS server more often
than other locations.
For example, assume that you have a policy to block all traffic outside of your
corporate network except VPN traffic. And assume that your users travel and must
access your network through a VPN from a hotel network. You can create a policy
for a VPN connection that uses DNS resolution. Symantec Endpoint Protection
continues to send the DNS query every 5 seconds until it switches to this location.
This way, your users can more quickly access your network.
Caution: Use caution when you configure this setting to a very low value. You run
the possibility of bringing down your DNS server if all of your systems access the
server every 5 seconds, for example.
To define DNS queries based on location

2 Under Clients, select the group for which the feature applies.
3 Under Tasks, click Manage Locations.
4 Ensure DNS Query Loop in is checked.
5 Click the time setting and increments and modify as desired.
You can set the value in seconds, minutes, or hours.
The default value is 30 minutes.
6 Click OK.
About firewall rule network services triggers

Network services let networked computers send and receive messages, share files,
and print. A network service uses one or more protocols or ports to pass through
a specific type of traffic. For example, the HTTP service uses ports 80 and 443 in
the TCP protocol. You can create a firewall rule that allows or blocks network
services. A network service trigger identifies one or more network protocols that
are significant in relation to the described network traffic.
When you define TCP-based or UDP-based service triggers, you identify the ports
on both sides of the described network connection. Traditionally, ports are referred
to as being either the source or the destination of a network connection.
See Adding network services to the default network services list on page 351.
See Permitting clients to browse for files and printers in the network on page 362.
Adding network services to the default network services list

Network services let networked computers send and receive messages, share files,
and print. You can create a firewall rule that allows or blocks network services.
The network services list eliminates the need to retype protocols and ports for the
firewall rules that you create to block or allow network services. When you create
a firewall rule, you can select a network service from a default list of commonly
used network services. You can also add network services to the default list.
However, you need to be familiar with the type of protocol and the ports that it uses.
Note: IPv4 and IPv6 are the two network layer protocols that are used on the Internet.
The firewall blocks the attacks that travel through IPv4, but not through IPv6. If you
install the client on the computers that run Windows Vista, the Rules list includes
several default rules that block the Ethernet protocol type of IPv6. If you remove
the default rules, you must create a rule that blocks IPv6.
Note: You can add a custom network service through a firewall rule. However, that
network service is not added to the default list. You cannot access the custom
network service from any other rule.
To add network services to the default network services list

2 Expand Policy Components, and then click Network Services.
3 Under Tasks, click Add a Network Service.
4 In the Network Service dialog box, type a name for the service, and then click
Add.
5 Select a protocol from the Protocol drop-down list.

The options change based on which protocol you select.
6 Type in the appropriate fields, and then click OK.
7 Add one or more additional protocols, as necessary.
8 Click OK.
See Controlling whether networked computers can share messages, files, and
printing on page 362.
See Permitting clients to browse for files and printers in the network on page 362.
About firewall rule network adapter triggers

You can define a firewall rule that blocks or allows traffic that passes through
(transmitted or received) a network adapter.
When you define a particular type of adapter, consider how that adapter is used.
For example, if a rule allows outbound HTTP traffic from Ethernet adapters, then
HTTP is allowed through all the installed adapters of the same type. The only
exception is if you also specify local host addresses. The client computer may use
multi-NIC servers and the workstations that bridge two or more network segments.
To control traffic relative to a particular adapter, the address scheme of each
segment must be used rather than the adapter itself.
The network adapter list eliminates the need to retype types of adapters for firewall
rules. Instead, when you create a firewall rule, you can select a network adapter
from a default list of commonly used network adapters. You can also add network
adapters to the default list.
You can select a network adapter from a default list that is shared across firewall
policies and rules. The most common adapters are included in the default list in the
Policy Components list.
Note: You can add a custom network adapter through a firewall rule. However, that
network adapter is not added to the default list. You cannot access the custom
network adapter from any other rule.

See Adding a custom network adapter to the network adapter list on page 353.
See Controlling the traffic that passes through a network adapter on page 365.
Adding a custom network adapter to the network adapter list

You can apply a separate firewall rule to each network adapter. For example, you
may want to block traffic through a VPN at an office location, but not at a home
location.
You can select a network adapter from a default list that is shared across firewall
policies and rules. The most common adapters are included in the default list in the
Policy Components list. Use the default list so that you do not have to retype each
network adapter for every rule that you create.
The network adapter list eliminates the need to retype adapters for firewall rules.
When you create a firewall rule, you can select a network adapter from a default
list of commonly used network adapters. You can also add network adapters to the
default list.
Note: You can add a custom network adapter through a firewall rule. However, that
network adapter is not added to the default list. You cannot access the custom
network adapter from any other rule.
To add a custom network adapter to the network adapter list

1 In the console, click Policies > Policy Components > Network Adapters.
2 Under Tasks, click Add a Network Adapter.
3 In the Network Adapter dialog box, in the Adapter Type drop-down list, select
an adapter.
4 In the Adapter Name field, optionally type a description.
5 In the Adapter Identification text box, type the case-sensitive brand name of
the adapter.
To find the brand name of the adapter, open a command line on the client, and
then type the following text:
ipconfig/all
6 Click OK.

Table 15-7 describes how to set up new firewall rules.
Table 15-7 How to setup firewall rules
Step Description
Step 1: Add a new firewall rule You can add new firewall rules through the console using several methods.
One method lets you add a blank rule that has default settings. The other
method offers a wizard that guides you through creating a new rule.
See Adding a new firewall rule on page 354.
Another way that you can add a firewall rule is to export existing firewall rules
from another Firewall policy. You can then import the firewall rules and
settings so that you do not have to re-create them.
See Importing and exporting firewall rules on page 355.
You can save time creating a new firewall rule by copying an existing rule
that is similar to the rule that you want to create. Then you can modify the
copied rule to meet your needs.
Step 2: Customize the firewall rule After you create a new rule, or if you want to customize a default rule, you
criteria (Optional) can modify any of the firewall rule criteria.
Adding a new firewall rule

You can create new firewall rules using either of the following methods:
Blank rule A blank rule allows all traffic.
See To add a new blank firewall rule on page 355.
Add Firewall Rule If you add rules with the Add Firewall Rule wizard, ensure that you
wizard configure the rule. The wizard does not configure new rules with
multiple criteria.
See To add a new firewall rule using a wizard on page 355.
You should specify both the inbound and the outbound traffic in the rule whenever
possible. You do not need to create inbound rules for traffic such as HTTP. The
Symantec Endpoint Protection client uses stateful inspection for TCP traffic.
Therefore, it does not need a rule to filter the return traffic that the clients initiate.
When you create a new firewall rule, it is automatically enabled. You can disable
a firewall rule if you need to allow specific access to a computer or application. The
rule is disabled for all inherited policies.
The rule is also disabled for the all locations if it is a shared policy and only one
location if it is a location-specific policy.
Note: Rules must be enabled for the firewall to process them.
To add a new blank firewall rule

3 On the Rules tab, under the Rules list, click Add Blank Rule.
4 Optionally, you can customize the firewall rule criteria as needed.
5 If you are done with the configuration of the rule, click OK.
To add a new firewall rule using a wizard
3 On the Rules tab, under the Rules list, click Add Rule.
4 In the Add Firewall Rule Wizard, click Next.
5 In the Select Rule Type panel, select one of the types of rules.
6 Click Next.
7 Enter data on each panel to create the type of rule you selected.
8 For applications and hosts, click Add More to add additional applications and
services.
9 When you are done, click Finish.
10 Optionally, you can customize the firewall rule criteria as needed.
Importing and exporting firewall rules

You can export and import firewall rules and settings from another Firewall policy
so that you do not have to re-create them. For example, you can import a partial
rule set from one policy into another. To import rules, you first have to export the
rules to a .dat file and have access to the file.
The rules are added in the same order that they are listed in the parent policy with
respect to the blue line. You can then change their processing order.
To export firewall rules
3 In the Rules list, select the rules you want to export, right-click, and then click
Export.
4 In the Export Policy dialog box, locate a directory to save the .dat file, type a
file name, and then click Export.
To import firewall rules
3 Right-click the Rules list, and then click Import.
4 In the Import Policy dialog box, locate the .dat file that contains the firewall
rules to import, and then click Import.
5 In the Input dialog box, type a new name for the policy, and then click OK.
6 Click OK.
See About the firewall rule, firewall setting, and intrusion prevention processing
order on page 338.
Customizing firewall rules

When you create a new Firewall policy, the policy includes several default rules.
You can modify one or multiple rule components as needed.
The components of a firewall rule are as follows:
Actions The action parameters specify what actions the firewall takes when it
successfully matches a rule. If the rule matches and is selected in response
to a received packet, the firewall performs all actions. The firewall either
allows or blocks the packet and logs or does not log the packet. If the firewall
allows traffic, it lets the traffic that the rule specifies access the network. If
the firewall blocks traffic, it blocks the traffic that the rule specifies so that
it does not access the network.
The actions are as follows:
Allow
The firewall allows the network connection.
Block
The firewall blocks the network connection.
Triggers When the firewall evaluates the rule, all the triggers must be true for a
positive match to occur. If any one trigger is not true in relation to the current
packet, the firewall cannot apply the rule. You can combine the trigger
definitions to form more complex rules, such as to identify a particular
protocol in relation to a specific destination address.
The triggers are as follows:
Application
When the application is the only trigger you define in an allow-traffic
rule, the firewall allows the application to perform any network operation.
The application is the significant value, not the network operations that
the application performs. You can define additional triggers to describe
the particular network protocols and hosts with which communication is
allowed.
Host
When you define host triggers, you specify the host on both sides of the
described network connection.
Traditionally, the way to express the relationship between hosts is
referred to as being either the source or destination of a network
connection.
Network services
A network services trigger identifies one or more network protocols that
are significant in relation to the described traffic.
The local host computer always owns the local port, and the remote
computer always owns the remote port. This expression of the port
relationship is independent of the direction of traffic.
Network adapter
If you define a network adapter trigger, the rule is relevant only to the
traffic that is transmitted or received by using the specified type of
adapter. You can specify either any adapter or the one that is currently
associated with the client computer.
Conditions Rule conditions consist of the rule schedule and screen saver state.
The conditional parameters do not describe an aspect of a network
connection. Instead, the conditional parameters determine the active state
of a rule. You may define a schedule or identify a screen saver state that
dictates when a rule is considered to be active or inactive. The conditional
parameters are optional and if not defined, not significant. The firewall does
not evaluate inactive rules.
Notifications The Log settings let you specify whether the server creates a log entry or
sends an email message when a traffic event matches the criteria that are
set for this rule.
The Severity setting lets you specify the severity level of the rule violation.
Customizing firewall rules

3 On the Rules tab, in the Rules list, in the Enabled field, ensure that the box
is checked to enable the rule; uncheck the box to disable the rule.
Symantec Endpoint Protection only processes the rules that you enable. All
rules are enabled by default.
4 Double-click the Name field and type a unique name for the firewall rule.
5 Right-click the Action field and select the action that you want Symantec
Endpoint Protection to take if the rule is triggered.
6 In the Application field, define an application.
7 In the Host field, specify a host trigger.
8 In addition to specifying a host trigger, you can also specify the traffic that is
allowed to access your local subnet.
See Allowing only specific traffic to the local subnet on page 361.
9 In the Service field, specify a network service trigger.
See Controlling whether networked computers can share messages, files,
and printing on page 362.
10 In the Log field, specify when you want Symantec Endpoint Protection to send
an email message to you when this firewall rule is violated.
See Setting up notifications for firewall rule violations on page 364.
11 Right-click the Severity field and select the severity level for the rule violation.
12 In the Adapter column, specify an adapter trigger for the rule.
13 In the Time column, specify the time periods in which this rule is active.
See Scheduling when a firewall rule is active on page 366.
14 Right-click the Screen Saver field and specify the state that the client
computer's screen saver must be in for the rule to be active.
The Created At field is not editable. If the policy is shared, the term Shared
appears. If the policy is not shared, the field shows the name of the group to
which that the non-shared policy is assigned.
15 Right-click the Description field, click Edit, type an optional description for the
rule, and then click OK.
Blocking traffic to or from a specific server

To block traffic to or from a specific server, you can block the traffic by IP address
rather than by domain name or host name. Otherwise, the user may be able to
access the IP address equivalent of the host name.
To block traffic to or from a specific server
3 On the Rules tab, in the Rules list, select the rule you want to edit, right-click
the Host field, and then click Edit.
4 In the Host List dialog box, do one of the following actions:
Click Source/Destination.
Click Local/Remote.
To select a host type Do all of the following tasks:

from the Type
In the Source and Destination or Local and Remote tables,
drop-down list
click Add.
In the Host dialog box, select a host type from the Type
drop-down list, and type the appropriate information for each
host type.
Click OK.
The host that you created is automatically enabled.
To select a host In the Host List dialog box, do one of the following actions:
group
Click Source/Destination.
Click Local/Remote.
Then in the Host List dialog box, check the box in the Enabled
column for any host group that you want to add to the rule.
6 Add additional hosts, if necessary.

7 Click OK to return to the Rules list.
See Adding host groups on page 349.
Allowing only specific traffic to the local subnet

You can create a firewall rule that permits only specific traffic to your local subnet.
This firewall rule always applies to your local subnet IP address, regardless of what
the address is. Therefore, even if you change your local subnet IP address, you
never have to modify this rule for the new address.
For example, you can create this rule to permit traffic to port 80 only on the local
subnet, regardless of what the local subnet IP address is.
To allow only specific traffic to the local subnet
3 On the Rules tab, in the Rules list, select the rule that you want to edit.
4 In the Firewall Rules table, in the Host column, double-click on the rule for
which you want to create a local subnet traffic condition.
5 Under the type of hosts for which this rule applies (Local or Remote), click Add.
6 Click the Address Type drop-down list and select Local Subnet.
7 Click OK, and then click OK again to close out of the Host List dialog box.
Controlling whether networked computers can share messages,

files, and printing
Network services let networked computers send and receive messages, shared
files, and print. You can create a firewall rule that allows or blocks network services.
You can add a custom network service through a firewall rule. However, that network
service is not added to the default list. You cannot access the custom service from
any other rule.
To control whether networked computers can share messages, files, and printing
the Service field, and then click Edit.
4 In the Service List dialog box, check box beside each service that you want
to trigger the rule.
5 To add an additional service for the selected rule only, click Add.
6 In the Protocol dialog box, select a protocol from the Protocol drop-down list.
7 Fill out the appropriate fields.
8 Click OK.
9 Click OK.
10 Click OK.
See Adding network services to the default network services list on page 351.
Permitting clients to browse for files and printers in the

network
You can enable the client to either share its files or to browse for shared files and
printers on the local network. To prevent network-based attacks, you may not want
to enable network file and printer sharing.
You enable network file and print sharing by adding firewall rules. The firewall rules
allow access to the ports to browse and share files and printers. You create one
firewall rule so that the client can share its files. You create a second firewall rule
so that the client can browse for other files and printers.
The settings work differently based on the type of control that you specify for your
client, as follows:
Client control or mixed Users on the client can enable these settings automatically by
control configuring them in Network and Host Exploit Mitigation.
Mixed control A server firewall rule that specifies this type of traffic can override
these settings.
Server control These settings are not available on the client.
To permit clients to browse for files and printers in the network

the Service field, and then click Edit.
4 In the Service List dialog box, click Add.
5 In the Protocol dialog box, in the Protocol drop-down list, click TCP, and then
click Local/Remote.
To permit clients to In the Remote port drop-down list, type 88, 135, 139, 445.
browse for files and
printers in the
network
To enable other In the Local Port drop-down list, type 88, 135, 139, 445.
computers to browse
files on the client
7 Click OK.
8 In the Service List dialog box, click Add.
9 In the Protocol dialog box, in the Protocol drop-down list, click UDP.
To permit clients to In the Local Port drop-down list, type 137, 138.
browse for files and
In the Remote Port drop-down list, type 88.
printers in the
network
To enable other In the Local Port drop-down list, type 88, 137, 138.
computers to browse
files on the client
11 Click OK.
12 In the Service List dialog box, make sure that the two services are enabled,
and then click OK.
13 On the Rules tab, make sure the Action field is set to Allow.
14 If you are done with the configuration of the policy, click OK.
Setting up notifications for firewall rule violations

You can configure Symantec Endpoint Protection to send you an email message
each time the firewall detects a rule violation, attack, or event. For example, you
may want to know when a client blocks the traffic that comes from a particular IP
address.
To set up notifications for firewall rule violations
3 On the Rules tab, select a rule, right-click the Logging field, and do one or
more of the following tasks:
To send an email message Check Send Email Alert.

when a firewall rule is
triggered
To generate a log event when Check both Write to Traffic Log and Write to Packet
a firewall rule is triggered Log.
4 When you are done with the configuration of this policy, click OK.
5 Configure a security alert.
6 Configure a mail server.
7 Click OK.
Controlling the traffic that passes through a network adapter

When you define a network adapter trigger, the rule is relevant only to the traffic
that the specified adapter transmits or receives.
You can add a custom network adapter from a firewall rule. However, that adapter
is not added to the shared list. You cannot access the custom adapter from any
other rule.
To control the traffic that passes through a network adapter
the Adapter field, and then click More Adapters.
4 In the Network Adapter dialog box, do one of the following actions:
To trigger the rule for any adapter (even if Click Apply the rule to all adapters, and
it is not listed) then go to step 7.
To trigger the rule for selected adapters Click Apply the rule to the following
adapters.
Then check the box beside each adapter

that you want to trigger the rule.
5 To add a custom adapter for the selected rule only, do the following tasks:
Click Add.
In the Network Adapter dialog box, select the adapter type and type the
adapter's brand name in the Adapter Identification text field.
6 Click OK.
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK.
Scheduling when a firewall rule is active

You can specify a time period when a firewall rule is active.
To schedule when a firewall rule is active
3 On the Rules tab, select the rule you want to edit, right-click the Time field,
4 In the Schedule List dialog box, click Add.
5 In the Add Schedule dialog box, configure the start time and end time that
you want the rule to be active or not active.
6 In the Month drop-down list, select either All or a specific month.
7 Check the box for the time frame that you want.
If you check Specify days, check one or more of the listed days.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Schedule list, do one of the following actions:
To keep the rule active during Uncheck the box in the Any Time Except column.
this time
To make the rule inactive Check the box in the Any Time Except column.
during this time
10 Click OK.
Chapter 16
Managing intrusion
prevention and Generic
Exploit Mitigation
Managing intrusion prevention
How intrusion prevention works
About Symantec IPS signatures
About custom IPS signatures
Enabling network intrusion prevention or browser intrusion prevention
Creating exceptions for IPS signatures
Setting up a list of excluded computers
Configuring client intrusion prevention notifications
Managing custom intrusion prevention signatures
Using Generic Exploit Mitigation

The default intrusion prevention settings protect client computers against a wide
variety of threats. You can change the default settings for your network.
If you run Symantec Endpoint Protection on servers, intrusion prevention might
affect server resources or response time. For more information, see:
Managing intrusion prevention and Generic Exploit Mitigation 368
Best practices for Endpoint Protection on Windows Servers
Note: The Linux client does not support intrusion prevention.
Table 16-1 Managing intrusion prevention
Task Description
Learn about intrusion prevention Learn how intrusion prevention detects and blocks network and browser
attacks.
See How intrusion prevention works on page 370.
See About Symantec IPS signatures on page 371.
Enable intrusion prevention To keep your client computers secure, you should keep intrusion prevention
enabled.
You can enable the following types of intrusion prevention:
Network intrusion prevention

Browser intrusion prevention (Windows computers only)
You can also configure browser intrusion prevention to only log detections,
but not block them. You should use this configuration on a temporary
basis as it lowers the client's security profile. For example, you would
configure log-only mode only while you troubleshoot blocked traffic on
the client. After you review the attack log to identify and exclude the
signatures that block traffic, you disable log-only mode.

on page 373.
See Creating exceptions for IPS signatures on page 374.
You can also enable or disable both types of intrusion prevention, as well
as the firewall, when you run the Enable Network Threat Protection or
Disable Network Threat Protection command. You might want to disable
intrusion prevention for troubleshooting purposes or if client computers detect
excessive false positives.
Table 16-1 Managing intrusion prevention (continued)
Task Description
Create exceptions to change the default You might want to create exceptions to change the default behavior of the
behavior of Symantec network intrusion default Symantec network intrusion prevention signatures. Some signatures
prevention signatures block the traffic by default and other signatures allow the traffic by default.
Note: You cannot change the behavior of browser intrusion prevention
signatures.
You might want to change the default behavior of some network signatures
for the following reasons:
Reduce consumption on your client computers.

For example, you might want to reduce the number of signatures that
block traffic. Make sure, however, that an attack signature poses no threat
before you exclude it from blocking.
Allow some network signatures that Symantec blocks by default.
For example, you might want to create exceptions to reduce false positives
when benign network activity matches an attack signature. If you know
the network activity is safe, you can create an exception.
Block some signatures that Symantec allows.
For example, Symantec includes signatures for peer-to-peer applications
and allows the traffic by default. You can create exceptions to block the
traffic instead.
Use audit signatures to monitor certain types of traffic (Windows only)
Audit signatures have a default action of Not log for certain traffic types,
such as traffic from instant message applications. You can create an
exception to log the traffic so that you can view the logs and monitor this
traffic in your network. You can then use the exception to block the traffic,
create a firewall rule to block the traffic, or leave the traffic alone.
You can also create an application rule for the traffic.
You can use application control to prevent users from running peer-to-peer
applications on their computers.
See Adding custom rules to Application Control on page 496.
If you want to block the ports that send and receive peer-to-peer traffic, use
a Firewall policy.

Table 16-1 Managing intrusion prevention (continued)
Task Description
Create exceptions to ignore browser You can create exceptions to exclude browser signatures from browser
signatures on client computers intrusion prevention on Windows computers.
(Windows only) You might want to ignore browser signatures if browser intrusion prevention
causes problems with browsers in your network.
Exclude specific computers from You might want to exclude certain computers from network intrusion
network intrusion prevention scans prevention. For example, some computers in your internal network may be
set up for testing purposes. You might want Symantec Endpoint Protection
to ignore the traffic that goes to and from those computers.
When you exclude computers, you also exclude them from the denial of
service protection and port scan protection that the firewall provides.
See Setting up a list of excluded computers on page 376.
Configure intrusion prevention By default, messages appear on client computers for intrusion attempts. You
notifications can customize the message.
See Configuring client intrusion prevention notifications on page 377.
Create custom intrusion prevention You can write your own intrusion prevention signature to identify a specific
signatures (Windows only) threat. When you write your own signature, you can reduce the possibility
that the signature causes a false positive.
For example, you might want to use custom intrusion prevention signatures
to block and log websites.
See Managing custom intrusion prevention signatures on page 378.
You must have the firewall installed and enabled to use custom IPS
signatures.
Monitor intrusion prevention Regularly check that intrusion prevention is enabled on the client computers
in your network.

Intrusion prevention is part of Network Threat Protection.
As of 14, Network Threat Protection and Generic Exploit Mitigation comprise Network
and Host Exploit Mitigation.
Intrusion prevention automatically detects and blocks network attacks. On Windows

computers, intrusion prevention also detects and blocks browser attacks on
supported browsers. Intrusion prevention is the second layer of defense after the
firewall to protect client computers. Intrusion prevention is sometimes called the
intrusion prevention system (IPS).
Intrusion prevention intercepts data at the network layer. It uses signatures to scan
packets or streams of packets. It scans each packet individually by looking for the
patterns that correspond to network attacks or browser attacks. Intrusion prevention
detects attacks on operating system components and the application layer.
Table 16-2 Types of intrusion prevention
Type Description
Network intrusion prevention Network intrusion prevention uses signatures to identify attacks on client computers.
For known attacks, intrusion prevention automatically discards the packets that
match the signatures.
You can also create your own custom network signatures in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. You cannot create custom signatures on the client directly;
however, you can import custom signatures on the client. Custom signatures are
supported on Windows computers only.
See About Symantec IPS signatures on page 371.
Browser intrusion prevention Browser intrusion prevention monitors attacks on Internet Explorer and Firefox.
(Windows only) Browser intrusion prevention is not supported on any other browsers.
Firefox might disable the Symantec Endpoint Protection plug-in, but you can turn
it back on.
This type of intrusion prevention uses attack signatures as well as heuristics to

identify attacks on browsers.
For some browser attacks, intrusion prevention requires that the client terminate
the browser. A notification appears on the client computer.
For the latest information about the browsers that browser intrusion prevention
protects, see: Supported browser versions for browser intrusion prevention.

Symantec intrusion prevention signatures are installed on the client by default.
Intrusion prevention uses the Symantec signatures to monitor individual packets
or streams of packets. For streams of packets, intrusion prevention can remember
the list of patterns or partial patterns from previous packets. It can then apply this
information to subsequent packet inspections.
Symantec signatures include signatures for network intrusion prevention, which are
downloaded to the client as part of LiveUpdate content. For Mac computers, there
are some additional network intrusion prevention signatures that are built into the
software.
On Windows computers, LiveUpdate content also includes signatures for browser
intrusion prevention.
Network intrusion prevention Network signatures match patterns of an attack that can crash
signatures applications or exploit the operating systems on your client
computers.
You can change whether a Symantec network signature

blocks or allows traffic. You can also change whether or not
Symantec Endpoint Protection logs a detection from a
signature in the Security log.
Browser intrusion prevention Browser signatures match patterns of attack on supported

signatures (Windows only) browsers, such as script files that can crash the browser.
You cannot customize the action or log setting for browser

signatures, but you can exclude a browser signature.
You can configure browser intrusion prevention to log the

browser detections but not block them. This action helps you
identify those browser signatures that you may need to
exclude. After you create the signature exclusions, you
disable log-only mode.
The Symantec Security Response team supplies the attack signatures. The intrusion
prevention engine and the corresponding set of signatures are installed on the client
by default. The signatures are part of the content that you update on the client.
You can view information about IPS signatures on the following Symantec website
page:
Attack Signatures
For information about the built-in IPS signatures for Mac clients, see the following
article:
Built-in signatures for Symantec Endpoint Protection IPS for Mac

You can create your own IPS network signatures. These signatures are
packet-based.
Unlike Symantec signatures, custom signatures scan single packet payloads only.
However, custom signatures can detect attacks in the TCP/IP stack earlier than
the Symantec signatures.
Packet-based signatures examine a single packet that matches a rule. The rule is
based on various criteria, such as port, protocol, source or destination IP address,
TCP flag number, or an application. For example, a custom signature can monitor
the packets of information that are received for the string phf in GET / cgi-bin/phf?
as an indicator of a CGI program attack. Each packet is evaluated for that specific
pattern. If the packet of traffic matches the rule, the client allows or blocks the
packet.
You can specify whether or not Symantec Endpoint Protection logs a detection from
custom signatures in the Packet log.
Note: You must have the firewall installed and enabled to use custom IPS signatures.
Custom signatures are supported on Windows computers only.

Enabling network intrusion prevention or browser

intrusion prevention
Intrusion prevention is enabled by default. Typically, you should not disable either
type of intrusion prevention.
You can enable a log-only mode for browser intrusion prevention to record what
traffic it blocks without affecting the client user. You can then use the Network and
Host Exploit Mitigation attack logs in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to
create exceptions in the Intrusion Prevention policy to ignore specific browser
signatures. You would then disable log-only mode.
To enable network intrusion prevention or browser intrusion prevention

1 In the console, open an Intrusion Prevention policy.
2 On the policy page, click Intrusion Prevention.
3 Make sure the following options are checked:
Enable Network Intrusion Prevention
You can also exclude particular computers from network intrusion
prevention.
See Setting up a list of excluded computers on page 376.
Enable Browser Intrusion Prevention for Windows
4 Click OK.

You use exceptions to change the behavior of Symantec IPS signatures.
For Windows and Mac computers, you can change the action that the client takes
when the IPS recognizes a network signature. You can also change whether the
client logs the event in the Security log.
For Windows computers, you cannot change the behavior of Symantec browser
signatures; unlike network signatures, browser signatures do not allow custom
action and logging settings. However, you can create an exception for a browser
signature so that clients ignore the signature.
Note: When you add a browser signature exception, Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager includes the signature in the exceptions list and automatically sets the
action to Allow and the log setting to Do Not Log. You cannot customize the action
or the log setting.
Note: To change the behavior of a custom IPS signature that you create or import,
you edit the signature directly. Custom signatures are supported on Windows
computers only.
To create an exception for IPS signatures

2 Under Windows Settings or Mac Settings, click Exceptions, and then click
Add.
Note: The signatures list populates with the latest LiveUpdate content that the
management console downloaded. For Windows computers, the list appears
blank if the management server has not yet downloaded the content. For Mac
computers, the list always contains at least the built-in signatures, which are
installed automatically on your Mac clients.
3 In the Add Intrusion Prevention Exceptions dialog box, do the following

actions to filter the signatures:
(Windows only) To display only the signatures in a particular category,
select an option from the Show category drop-down list. If you select
Browser Protection, the signature action options automatically change to
Allow and Do Not Log.
(Windows and Mac) To display the signatures that are classified with a
particular severity, select an option from the Show severity drop-down list.
4 Select one or more signatures.

To make the behavior for all signatures the same, click Select All.
5 Click Next.
6 In the Signature Action dialog box, set the following options and then click
OK.
Set Action to Block or Allow
Set Log to Log the traffic or Do not log the traffic.
Note: These options only apply to network signatures. For browser signatures,
click OK.
If you want to revert the signature's behavior back to the original behavior,
select the signature in the Exceptions list, and then click Delete.
7 Click OK to save the policy changes.
See Managing exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection on page 534.

Excluded hosts are supported for network intrusion prevention only.
You can set up a list of computers for which the client does not match attack
signatures or check for port scans or denial-of-service attacks. Network intrusion
prevention and peer-to-peer authentication allow any source traffic from hosts in
the excluded hosts list. However, network intrusion prevention and peer-to-peer
authentication continue to evaluate any destination traffic to hosts in the list. The
list applies to both inbound traffic and outbound traffic, but only to the source of the
traffic. The list also applies only to remote IP addresses.
For example, you might exclude computers to allow an Internet service provider to
scan the ports in your network to ensure compliance with their service agreements.
Or, you might have some computers in your internal network that you want to set
up for testing purposes.
Note: You can also set up a list of computers that allows all inbound traffic and
outbound traffic unless an IPS signature detects an attack. In this case, you create
a firewall rule that allows all hosts.
To set up a list of excluded computers

2 On the policy page, click Intrusion Prevention.
3 If not checked already, check Enable excluded hosts and then click Excluded
Hosts.
4 In the Excluded Hosts dialog box, check Enabled next to any host group that
you want to exclude from network intrusion prevention.
5 To add the hosts that you want to exclude, click Add.
6 In the Host dialog box, in the drop-down list, select one of the following host
types:
IP address
IP range
Subnet
7 Enter the appropriate information that is associated with the host type you
selected.
For more information about these options, click Help.
8 Click OK.
9 Repeat 5 and 8 to add additional devices and computers to the list of excluded
computers.
10 To edit or delete any of the excluded hosts, select a row, and then click Edit
or Delete.
11 Click OK.
12 When you finish configuring the policy, click OK.

By default, notifications appear on client computers when the client detects intrusion
protection events. When these notifications are enabled, they display a standard
message. You can add customized text to the standard message.
To configure client intrusion prevention notifications
1 In the console, click Clients and under Clients, select a group.
3 To the right of Client User Interface Control Settings, click Tasks, and then
click Edit Settings.
4 In the Client User Interface Control Settings for group name dialog box,
click either Server control or Mixed control.
5 Beside Mixed control or Server control, click Customize.
If you click Mixed control, on the Client/Server Control Settings tab, beside
Show/Hide Intrusion Prevention notifications, click Server. Then click the
Client User Interface Settings tab.
6 In the Client User Interface Settings dialog box or tab, click Display Intrusion
Prevention notifications.
7 To enable a sound when the notification appears, click Use sound when
notifying users.
8 Click OK.
9 Click OK.

You can write your own network intrusion prevention signatures to identify a specific
intrusion and reduce the possibility of signatures that cause a false positive. The
more information you can add to a custom signature, the more effective the signature
is.
Warning: You should be familiar with the TCP, UDP, or ICMP protocols before you
develop intrusion prevention signatures. An incorrectly formed signature can corrupt
the custom signature library and damage the integrity of the clients.
Note: You must have the firewall installed and enabled to use custom IPS signatures.
Table 16-3 Managing custom intrusion prevention signatures
Task Description
Create a custom library with a signature You must create a custom library to contain your custom signatures. When
group you create a custom library, you use signature groups to manage the
signatures more easily. You must add at least one signature group to a
custom signature library before you add the signatures.
See About custom IPS signatures on page 373.
See Creating a custom IPS library on page 379.
Add custom IPS signatures to a custom You add custom IPS signatures to a signature group in a custom library.
library
See Adding signatures to a custom IPS library on page 380.
Assign libraries to client groups You assign custom libraries to client groups rather than to a location.
See Assigning multiple custom IPS libraries to a group on page 382.

Table 16-3 Managing custom intrusion prevention signatures (continued)
Task Description
Change the order of signatures Intrusion prevention uses the first rule match. Symantec Endpoint Protection
checks the signatures in the order that they are listed in the signatures list.
For example, if you add a signature group to block TCP traffic in both
directions on destination port 80, you might add the following signatures:
Block all traffic on port 80.

Allow all traffic on port 80.
If the Block all traffic signature is listed first, the Allow all traffic signature is
never enacted. If the Allow all traffic signature is listed first, the Block all
traffic signature is never enacted, and all HTTP traffic is always allowed.
Note: Firewall rules take precedence over intrusion prevention signatures.
See Changing the order of custom IPS signatures on page 382.
Copy and paste signatures You can copy and paste signatures between groups and between libraries.
Define variables for signatures When you add a custom signature, you can use variables to represent
changeable data in signatures. If the data changes, you can edit the variable
instead of editing the signatures throughout the library.
See Defining variables for custom IPS signatures on page 383.
Test custom signatures You should test the custom intrusion prevention signatures to make sure
that they work.
See Testing custom IPS signatures on page 384.
Creating a custom IPS library

You create a custom IPS library to contain your custom IPS signatures.
To create a custom IPS library
1 In the console, on the Policies page, under Policies, click Intrusion
Prevention.
2 Click the Custom Intrusion Prevention tab.
3 Under Tasks, click Add Custom Intrusion Prevention Signatures.
4 In the Custom Intrusion Prevention Signatures dialog box, type a name and
optional description for the library.
The NetBIOS Group is a sample signature group with one sample signature.
You can edit the existing group or add a new group.
5 To add a new group, on the Signatures tab, under the Signature Groups list,
click Add.
6 In the Intrusion Prevention Signature Group dialog box, type a group name
and optional description, and then click OK.
The group is enabled by default. If the signature group is enabled, all signatures
within the group are enabled automatically. To retain the group for reference
but to disable it, uncheck Enable this group.
7 Add a custom signature.
See Adding signatures to a custom IPS library on page 380.
Adding signatures to a custom IPS library

You add custom intrusion prevention signatures to a new or existing custom IPS
library.
To add a custom signature
1 Create a custom IPS library.
See Creating a custom IPS library on page 379.
2 On the Signatures tab, under Signatures for this Group, click Add.
3 In the Add Signature dialog box, type a name and optional description for the
signature.
4 In the Severity drop-down list, select a severity level.
Events that match the signature conditions are logged with this severity.
5 In the Direction drop-down list, specify the traffic direction that you want the
signature to check.
6 In the Content field, type the syntax of the signature.

For example, signatures for some common protocols use the following syntax:
HTTP rule tcp, dest=(80,443), saddr=$LOCALHOST,

msg="MP3 GET in HTTP detected",
regexpcontent="[Gg][Ee][Tt] .*[Mm][Pp]3 .*"
FTP rule tcp, dest=(21), tcp_flag&ack, saddr=$LOCALHOST,

msg="MP3 GET in FTP detected",
regexpcontent="[Rr][Ee][Tt][Rr] .*[Mm][Pp]3\x0d\x0a"
For more information about the syntax, click Help.
7 If you want an application to trigger the signature, click Add.

8 In the Add Application dialog box, type the file name and an optional
description for the application.
For example, to add the application Internet Explorer, type the file name as
iexplore or iexplore.exe. If you do not specify a file name, any application can
trigger the signature.
9 Click OK.
The added application is enabled by default. If you want to disable the
application until a later time, uncheck the check box in the Enabled column.
10 In the Action group box, select the action you want the client to take when the
signature detects the event:
Block Identifies and blocks the event or attack and records it in the Security Log
Allow Identifies and allows the event or attack and records it in the Security Log
11 To record the event or attack in the Packet Log, check Write to Packet Log.
12 Click OK.
The added signature is enabled by default. If you want to disable the signature
until a later time, uncheck the check box in the Enabled column.
13 You can add additional signatures. When you are finished, click OK.
14 If you are prompted, assign the custom IPS signatures to a group.
You can also assign multiple custom IPS libraries to a group.
See Assigning multiple custom IPS libraries to a group on page 382.
Assigning multiple custom IPS libraries to a group

After you create a custom IPS library, you assign it to a group rather than an
individual location. You can later assign additional custom IPS libraries to the group.
To assign multiple custom IPS libraries to a group
2 Under Clients, select the group to which you want to assign the custom
signatures.
click Custom Intrusion Prevention.
4 In the Custom Intrusion Prevention for group name dialog box, check the
check box in the Enabled column for each custom IPS library you want to
assign to that group.
5 Click OK.
Changing the order of custom IPS signatures

The IPS engine for custom signatures checks the signatures in the order that they
are listed in the signatures list. Only one signature is triggered per packet. When a
signature matches an inbound traffic packet or outbound traffic packet, the IPS
engine stops checking other signatures. So that the IPS engine executes signatures
in the correct order, you can change the order of the signatures in the signatures
list. If multiple signatures match, move the higher priority signatures to the top.
For example, if you add a signature group to block TCP traffic in both directions on
destination port 80, you might add the following signatures:
Block all traffic on port 80.
Allow all traffic on port 80.
If the Block all traffic signature is listed first, the Allow all traffic signature is never
enacted. If the Allow all traffic signature is listed first, the Block all traffic signature
is never enacted, and all HTTP traffic is always allowed.
Note: Firewall rules take precedence over intrusion prevention signatures.

To change the order of custom IPS signatures

1 Open a custom IPS library.
2 On the Signatures tab, in the Signatures for this Group table, select the
signature that you want to move, and then do one of the following actions:
To process this signature before the signature above it, click Move Up.
To process this signature after the signature below it, click Move Down.
3 When you finish configuring this library, click OK.
Defining variables for custom IPS signatures

When you add a custom IPS signature, you can use variables to represent
changeable data in signatures. If the data changes, you can edit the variable instead
of editing the signatures throughout the library.
Before you can use the variables in the signature, you must define them. The
variables that you define in the custom signature library can then be used in any
signature in that library.
You can copy and paste the content from the existing sample variable to start as
a basis for creating content.
To define variables for custom IPS signatures
1 Create a custom IPS library.
2 In the Custom Intrusion Prevention Signatures dialog box, click the Variables
tab.
3 Click Add.
4 In the Add Variable dialog box, type a name and optional description for the
variable.
5 Add a content string for the variable value of up to 255 characters.
When you enter the variable content string, follow the same syntax guidelines
that you use for entering values into signature content.
6 Click OK.
After the variable is added to the table, you can use the variable in any signature
in the custom library.
To use variables in custom IPS signatures

1 On the Signatures tab, add or edit a signature.
2 In the Add Signature or Edit Signature dialog box, in the Content field, type
the variable name with a dollar sign ($) in front of it.
For example, if you create a variable named HTTP for specifying HTTP ports,
type the following:
$HTTP
3 Click OK.
4 When you finish configuring this library, click OK.
Testing custom IPS signatures

After you create custom IPS signatures, you should test them to make sure that
they function correctly.
Table 16-4 Testing custom IPS signatures
Step Description
Step 1: Make sure that clients use the The next time that the client receives the policy, the client applies the new
current policy custom signatures.
on page 161.
Step 2: Test the signature content on You should test the traffic that you want to block on the client computers.
the client
For example, if your custom IPS signatures should block MP3 files, try to
download some MP3 files to the client computers. If the download does not
occur, or times out after many tries, the custom IPS signature is successful.
You can click Help for more information about the syntax that you can use
in custom IPS signatures.
Step 3: View blocked events in You can view events in the Network and Host Exploit Mitigation Attack logs.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager The message you specify in the custom IPS signature appears in the log


As of 14, Symantec Endpoint Protection includes Generic Exploit Mitigation, which
stops vulnerability attacks on Windows client computers. Generic Exploit Mitigation
is enabled by default in the Intrusion Prevention policy.
Note: If you have installed and configured the Windows Enhanced Mitigation
Experience Toolkit (EMET) on your computers, Generic Exploit Mitigation does not
protect processes that EMET protects.
Types of exploits
Generic Exploit Mitigation includes the following types of protection on Windows
computers:
Java exploit protection
Generic Exploit Mitigation blocks Java Applets that try to disable Windows
Security Manager. Some exploit attacks use a Java Applet to turn off Security
Manager to allow Java code to execute privileged actions.
Heap spray mitigation
A heap spray attack occurs when the attacker tries to place its attack code to a
predetermined memory location. Generic Exploit Mitigation reserves the
commonly used memory locations to prevent an attacker from using them.
Structured exception handling overwrite protection (SEHOP)
Generic Exploit Mitigation provides structured exception handling overwrite
protection. Windows provides the protection but some Windows operating
systems have the protection disabled by default. An exploit attack can control
the execution flow of software toward the attackers shellcode by using an
overwrite exception handler function. The exception handler function address
is stored in stack memory and can easily be overwritten when a stack buffer
overflow exists.
Generic Exploit Mitigation requirements

Generic Exploit Mitigation is only available if you have installed intrusion prevention.
Generic Exploit Mitigation has its own set of separate signatures that are downloaded
along with intrusion prevention content. In addition, if you disable the Intrusion
Prevention policy on the Overview tab, you disable Generic Exploit Mitigation. If
the policy is enabled, you can enable or disable intrusion prevention and Generic
Exploit Mitigation independently.
on page 373.
Changing the default configuration for troubleshooting

The policy includes a list of rules for the applications that Generic Exploit Mitigation
protects. By default, Generic Exploit Mitigation is enabled for all applications that
appear in the policy.
The application list is downloaded to the management server when you run
LiveUpdate. You must run LiveUpdate at least once for the application list to appear
in the console.
See Making sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager has the latest
content on page 184.
You might want to disable an application to troubleshoot instability with a particular
application. Symantec recommends disabling a particular rule rather than disabling
the protection entirely. If you disable the protection, after you resolve the issue you
should re-enable the protection.
To change the default Generic Exploit Mitigation configuration
1 In the console, on the Policies page, open an Intrusion Prevention policy.
2 In the policy, click Generic Exploit Mitigation.
3 Check or uncheck Enable Generic Exploit Mitigation.
4 If you need to troubleshoot a problem with an application, uncheck it in the list.
5 Click OK.
To view see information about Generic Exploit Mitigation events on client computers,
see the Network and Host Exploit Mitigation logs and reports.
Chapter 17
Managing Virus and
Spyware Protection
Preventing and handling virus and spyware attacks on client computers
Removing viruses and security risks
Ransomware removal and protection with Symantec Endpoint Protection
How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses the Intelligent Threat Cloud Service
Managing scans on client computers
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Windows computers
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Mac computers
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Linux computers
Running on-demand scans on client computers
Adjusting scans to improve computer performance
Adjusting scans to increase protection on your client computers
Managing Download Insight detections
How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses Symantec Insight to make decisions

about files
Managing the Quarantine
Managing the virus and spyware notifications that appear on client computers
About the pop-up notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients

Managing Virus and Spyware Protection 388
Enabling or disabling Symantec Endpoint Protection pop-up notifications that

appear on Windows 8 clients
Managing early launch anti-malware (ELAM) detections
Adjusting the Symantec Endpoint Protection early launch anti-malware (ELAM)

options
Configuring a site to use a private Insight server for reputation queries
Configuring client groups to use private servers for reputation queries and
submissions
Preventing and handling virus and spyware attacks

on client computers
You can prevent and handle virus and spyware attacks on client computers by
following some important guidelines.
Table 17-1 Protecting computers from virus and spyware attacks
Task Description
Make sure that your computers All computers in your network and all your servers should have Symantec Endpoint
have Symantec Endpoint Protection installed. Make sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection is functioning
Protection installed correctly.
Keep definitions current Make sure that the latest definitions are installed on client computers.
You can check the definitions date on the Clients tab. You can run a command to
update the definitions that are out of date.
You can also run a computer status report to check the latest definitions date.
Table 17-1 Protecting computers from virus and spyware attacks (continued)
Task Description
Run regular scans By default, Auto-Protect and SONAR run on client computers. A default scheduled
active scan also runs on client computers.
You can run scans on demand. You can customize the scan settings.
You might want to create and customize scheduled scans.
Typically, you might want to create a full scheduled scan to run once a week, and
an active scan to run once per day. By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection
generates an active scan that runs at 12:30 P.M. On unmanaged computers,
Symantec Endpoint Protection also includes a default startup scan that is disabled.
You should make sure that you run an active scan every day on the computers in
your network. You might want to schedule a full scan once a week or once a month
if you suspect that you have an inactive threat in your network. Full scans consume
more computer resources and might affect computer performance.
See Setting up scheduled scans that run on Mac computers on page 421.
See Setting up scheduled scans that run on Linux computers on page 422.
Let clients upload critical events Make sure that clients (Windows only) can bypass the heartbeat interval and send
immediately critical events to the management server immediately. Critical events include any
risk found (except cookies) and any intrusion event. You can find this option in
Clients > Policies > Communications Settings. The option is enabled by default.
Administrator notifications can alert you right away when the damper period for
relevant notifications is set to None.

Note: Only 12.1.4 and newer clients can send critical events immediately. Earlier
clients send events at the heartbeat interval only.
Check or modify scan settings for By default, virus and spyware scans detect, remove, and repair the side effects of
increased protection viruses and security risks.
The default scan settings optimize your client computers' performance while still
providing a high level of protection. You can increase the level of protection,
however.
For example, you might want to increase the Bloodhound heuristic protection.
You also might want to enable scans of network drives.
See Adjusting scans to increase protection on your client computers on page 427.
Table 17-1 Protecting computers from virus and spyware attacks (continued)
Task Description
Allow clients to submit information Clients can submit information about detections to Symantec. The submitted
about detections to Symantec information helps Symantec address threats.
Run intrusion prevention Symantec recommends that you run intrusion prevention on your client computers
as well as Virus and Spyware Protection.
Remediate infections if necessary After scans run, client computers might still have infections. For example, a new
threat might not have a signature, or Symantec Endpoint Protection was not able
to completely remove the threat. In some cases client computers require a restart
for Symantec Endpoint Protection to complete the cleaning process.
See Removing viruses and security risks on page 390.

You remediate risks as part of handling virus and spyware attacks on your
computers.
You use the Reports and Monitors features in the console to determine what
computers are infected and to view the results of remediation.
Table 17-2 Removing viruses and security risks
Step Description
Step 1: Identify infected and at-risk You can get information about infected and at-risk computers from Symantec
computers Endpoint Protection Manager. On the Home page, check the Newly Infected
and the Still Infected counts in the Virus and Risks Activity Summary. The
Newly Infected count is a subset of the Still Infected count. The Newly
Infected count shows the number of infected and at-risk computers during
the time interval that you specify in the summary.
Note: Unremediated SONAR detections are not counted as Still Infected.
They are part of the Suspicious count in the summary.
Computers are considered still infected if a subsequent scan detects them

as infected. For example, a scheduled scan might partially clean a file.
Auto-Protect subsequently detects the file as a risk.
Files that are considered "still infected" are rescanned when new definitions
arrive or as soon as the client computer is idle.
See Identifying the infected and at-risk computers on page 393.
Step 2: Update definitions and rescan You should make sure that clients use the latest definitions.
For legacy clients that run on Windows computers, you should also make
sure that your scheduled and on-demand scans use the Insight Lookup
feature. As of 14, scheduled and on-demand scans always use Insight
Lookup.
You can check the definitions date in the Infected and At Risk Computers
report. You can run the Update Content and Scan command from the Risk
log.
When the Virus and Risks Activity Summary on the Home page shows the
Still Infected and the Newly Infected counts are zero, then all risks are
eliminated.
Step 3: Check scan actions and rescan Scans might be configured to leave the risk alone. You might want to edit
the Virus and Spyware Protection policy and change the action for the risk
category. The next time the scan runs, Symantec Endpoint Protection applies
the new action.
You set the action on the Actions tab for the particular scan type
(administrator-defined or on-demand scan, or Auto-Protect). You can also
change the detection action for Download Insight and SONAR.
See Checking the scan action and rescanning the identified computers
on page 393.
Table 17-2 Removing viruses and security risks (continued)
Step Description
Step 4: Restart computers if necessary Computers may still be at risk or infected because they need to be restarted
to complete remediation to finish the remediation of a virus or security risk.
You can view the Risk log to determine if any computers require a restart.
You can run a command from the Computer Status log to restart computers.
Step 5: Investigate and clean remaining If any risks remain, you should investigate them further.
risks
You can check the Symantec Security Response webpage for up-to-date
information about viruses and security risks.
http://securityresponse.symantec.com
On the client computer, you can also access the Security Response website
from the scan results dialog box.
You can also run Power Eraser from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
to analyze and remediate difficult, persistent threats. Power Eraser is an
aggressive analysis that you should run on one computer or a small number
of computers only when the computers are unstable or heavily infected.
See What you should know before you run Power Eraser from the Symantec
Symantec Technical Support also offers a Threat Expert tool that quickly
provides detailed analysis of threats. You can also run a load point analysis
tool that can help you troubleshoot problems. You run these tools directly
See Troubleshooting computer issues with the Symantec Diagnostic Tool

(SymDiag) on page 715.
Step 6: Check the Computer Status log View the Computer Status log to make sure that risks are remediated or
removed from client computers.
For more information, see Virus removal and troubleshooting on a network.

See Preventing and handling virus and spyware attacks on client computers
on page 388.
Identifying the infected and at-risk computers

You can use the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Home page and a Risk
report to identify the computers that are infected and at risk.
To identify infected computers
1 In the console, click Home and view the Virus and Risks Activity Summary.
If you are a system administrator, you see counts of the number of Newly
Infected and Still infected computers in your site. If you are a domain
administrator, you see counts of the number of Newly Infected and Still infected
computers in your domain.
Still Infected is a subset of Newly Infected, and the Still Infected count goes
down as you eliminate the risks from your network. Computers are still infected
if a subsequent scan would report them as infected. For example, Symantec
Endpoint Protection might have been able to clean a risk only partially from a
computer, so Auto-Protect still detects the risk.
2 In the console, click Reports.
3 In the Report type list box, click Risk.
4 In the Select a report list box, click Infected and At Risk Computers.
5 Click Create Report and note the lists of the infected and at-risk computers
that appear.
Checking the scan action and rescanning the identified computers

If you have infected and at-risk computers, you should identify why the computers
are still infected or at risk. Check the action that was taken for each risk on the
infected and at risk computers. It may be that the action that was configured and
taken was Left Alone. If the action was Left Alone, you should either clean the risk
from the computer, remove the computer from the network, or accept the risk. For
Windows clients, you might want to edit the Virus and Spyware Protection policy
and change the scan action.
To identify the actions that need to be changed and rescan the identified computers
1 In the console, click Monitors.
2 On the Logs tab, select the Risk log, and then click View Log.
From the Risk log event column, you can see what happened and the action
that was taken. From the Risk Name column, you can see the names of the
risks that are still active. From the Domain Group User column you can see
which group the computer is a member of.
If a client is at risk because a scan took the action Left Alone, you may need
to change the Virus and Spyware Protection policy for the group. In the
Computer column, you can see the names of the computers that still have
active risks on them.
See Changing the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it
makes a detection on page 468.
If your policy is configured to use Push mode, it is pushed out to the clients in
the group at the next heartbeat.
on page 161.
3 Click Back.
4 On the Logs tab, select the Computer Status log, and then click View Log.
5 If you changed an action and pushed out a new policy, select the computers
that need to be rescanned with the new settings.
6 In the Command list box, select Scan, and then click Start to rescan the
computers.
You can monitor the status of the Scan command from the Command Status
tab.
Ransomware removal and protection with Symantec

Endpoint Protection
What is ransomware?
Ransomware is a category of malware that restricts users from accessing their
devices or data. Ransomware attackers force their victims to pay the ransom through
specifically noted payment methods after which they grant the victims access to
their computers or to their data. With ransomlockers, the attacker pretends to be
local law enforcement, demanding a "fine" to let victims avoid arrest and to unlock
their computers. Unfortunately, ransomware removal is not possible using removal

tools.
How to remove ransomware
CryptoLocker is a ransomware variant where malware often encrypts a users files
and often deletes the original copy. The attacker requests a ransom for the files to
be unencrypted. Not only are files on the local computer damaged, but also the
files on any shared or attached network drives to which the computer has write
access.
Video: Ransomware A Growing Menace
Organizations must respond to increasing threat of ransomware
Don't Pay That Ransom: Fighting Ransomware In A New Threat Landscape
Symantec Threat Landscape Round Up: Ransomware a US$34 million-a-year
business
5 steps for preventing ransomware

Video: Protect against Ransomware with Symantec Endpoint Protection
Hardening Your Environment Against Ransomware
To avoid ransomware infection, follow these steps:
1. Back up your computers and servers regularly.
Regularly back up the files on both the client computers and servers. Either
back up the files when the computers are offline or use a system that networked
computers and servers cannot write to. If you do not have dedicated backup
software, you can also copy the important files to removable media. Then eject
and unplug the removable media; do not leave the removable media plugged
in.
2. Lock down mapped network drives by securing them with a password
and access control restrictions.
Use read-only access for files on network drives, unless it is absolutely
necessary to have write access for these files. Restricting user permissions
limits which files the threats can encrypt.
3. Deploy and enable the following protections from Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager:
IPS
IPS blocks some threats that traditional virus definitions alone cannot stop.
IPS is the best defense against drive-by downloads, which occurs when
software is unintentionally downloaded from the Internet. Attackers often
use exploit kits to deliver a web-based attack like CryptoLocker through a

drive-by download.
on page 373.
SONAR
SONARs behavioral-based protection is another crucial defense against
malware. SONAR prevents the double executable file names of ransomware
variants like CryptoLocker from running.
In a Virus and Spyware Protection policy, click SONAR > Enable SONAR.
Download Insight
Modify Download Insight in a Virus and Spyware - High Security policy
to quarantine the files that have not yet been proven to be safe by the
Symantec customer base.
See Preventing ransomware attacks with Download Insight on page 397.
Recovering Ransomlocked Files Using Built-In Windows Tools
4. Download the latest patches for web application frameworks, web
browsers, and web browser plug-ins.
Attacking exploit kits cannot deliver drive-by downloads unless there is an old
version of a plug-in to exploit, such as Flash. Historically, attacks were delivered
through phishing and web browsers. Recently, more attacks are delivered
through vulnerable web applications, such as JBOSS, WordPress, and Joomla.
5. Use an email security product to handle email safely.
CryptoLocker is often spread through spam emails that contain malicious
attachments. Scanning inbound emails for threats with a dedicated mail security
product or service is critical to keep ransomware and other malware out of your
organization. For important advice and recommendations, see:
Support Perspective: W97M.Downloader Battle Plan
How to remove ransomware

There is no ransomware removal tool or CryptoLocker removal tool. Instead, if your
client computers do get infected with ransomware and your data is encrypted, follow
these steps:
1. Do not pay the ransom.
If you pay the ransom:
There is no guarantee that the attacker will supply a method to unlock your
computer or decrypt your files.
The attacker uses the ransom money to fund additional attacks against
other users.
2. Isolate the infected computer before the ransomware can attack network
drives to which it has access.
3. Use Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to update the virus definitions
and scan the client computers.
New definitions are likely to detect and remediate the ransomlockers. Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager automatically downloads virus definitions to the
client, as long as the client is managed and connected to the Symantec
In Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, click Clients, right-click the group,
and click Run a command on the group > Update Content and Scan.
4. Restore damaged files from a known good backup.
As with other security products, Symantec Endpoint Protection cannot decrypt
the files that ransomlockers have sabotaged.
5. Submit the malware to Symantec Security Response.
If you can identify the malicious email or executable, submit it to Symantec
Security Response. These samples enable Symantec to create new signatures
and improve defenses against ransomware.
Symantec Insider Tip: Successful Submissions!
For more information

For major ransomware incidents, engage the Symantec Global Incident
Response team. They can help you validate that you have been attacked and
help you to decide what to do next. See:
10 Ways Symantec Incident Response Can Help with Ransomware
For help with an incident now:
Email: incidentresponse@symantec.com
Incident Response Hotline: (855) 378-0073
Additional information about Ransomware threats
Preventing ransomware attacks with Download Insight

To prevent ransomware variants, configure Download Insight to quarantine the files
that the Symantec customer base knows are malicious or that haven't yet been
proven to be malicious.
See Ransomware removal and protection with Symantec Endpoint Protection
on page 394.
To prevent ransomware attacks with Download Insight

1 In the console, open the Virus and Spyware Protection policy - High Security
and click Download Protection.
2 On the Download Insight tab, make sure that Enable Download Insight to
detect potential risks in downloaded files based on file reputation is
checked.
3 Check the following default options:
Files with 5 or fewer users
Files known by users for 2 or fewer days
The low default values force the client to treat any file that has not been reported
to Symantec by more than five users or for less than 2 days to be treated as
unproven files. When unproven files meet this criteria, Download Insight detects
the files as malicious.
4 Make sure that Automatically trust any file downloaded from a trusted
Internet or intranet site is checked.
5 On the Actions tab, under Malicious Files, keep the first action as Quarantine
risk and the second action as Leave alone.
6 Under Unproven Files, click Quarantine risk.
7 Click OK.
How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses the

Intelligent Threat Cloud Service
Starting in 14, Symantec Endpoint Protection standard and embedded/VDI clients
provide real-time protection with definitions in the cloud. Earlier versions provided
some cloud protection with various features, such as Download Insight. Now, all
virus and spyware features use the cloud to evaluate files. Cloud content includes
the entire set of virus and spyware definitions as well as the latest information that
Symantec has about files and potential threats.
Note: The Intelligent Threat Cloud Service is supported on Windows clients only.
Clients support cloud-enabled content

Cloud-enabled content includes a reduced-sized set of definitions that provides full
protection. When the client requires new definitions, the client downloads or looks
up the definitions in the cloud for better performance and speed.
Starting in 14, standard clients and embedded/VDI clients support cloud-enabled

content.
See Comparison of Symantec Endpoint Protection Windows client type versions
on page 766.
See About Windows client installation packages on page 114.
All scans automatically use cloud lookups

Cloud lookups include queries to Symantec Insight for file reputation information
and definition checking in the cloud.
Scheduled and on-demand scans automatically perform cloud lookups.
Auto-Protect also automatically performs cloud lookups. Auto-Protect now runs
in user mode rather than kernel mode to reduce memory usage and provide
better performance.
In addition to leveraging a smaller footprint with definitions on disk, the Intelligent
Threat Cloud Service provides a 15-percent reduction in scan time.
Note: The 12.1.x Insight Lookup feature provides file reputation lookups for
scheduled and on-demand scans of portal files on legacy clients. The option can
be enabled or disabled. Previously, the option included a separate sensitivity level.
Now 12.1.x clients use the sensitivity level that is set for Download Insight.
Clients automatically send information about file reputation lookups to Symantec.

See Managing the anonymous or non-anonymous data that clients send to
Symantec on page 477.
How cloud lookups work in your network

Symantec Endpoint Protection sends cloud lookups directly to the cloud.
Note: If you use an ATP server, reputation lookups are routed through the ATP
server before they reach the cloud.
See Configuring client groups to use private servers for reputation queries and
submissions on page 448.
If you want to use a proxy server, you can specify an HTTPS proxy in the client's
browser Internet options. Or you can use the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console to specify the HTTPS proxy for clients in Policies > External
Communications.
See Specifying a proxy server for client submissions and other external
communications on page 479.
The amount of bandwidth that the Intelligent Threat Cloud Service clients use is
nearly identical to pre-14 clients, which use reputation lookups only with specific
features such as Download Insight.
How Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager alerts you about

cloud lookup errors
If clients try cloud lookups for 3 days without success, by default Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager sends an email notification to system administrators. You can
also view the alert in Monitors > Logs> System Logs > Client Activity. The
notification condition type is File Reputation Detection.
What are portal files?

Download Insight marks a file as a portal file when it examines a file that a user
downloads from a supported portal. Scheduled and on-demand scans, Auto-Protect,
and Download Insight evaluate the reputation of portal files using the sensitivity
level that is set for Download Insight.
Note: Download Insight must be enabled to mark files as portal files.
Supported portals include: Internet Explorer, Firefox, Microsoft Outlook, Outlook

Express, Google Chrome, Windows Live Messenger, and Yahoo Messenger. The
portal list (or Auto-Protect portal list) is part of the Virus and Spyware Protection
content that LiveUpdate downloads to the management server or the client.
Scans and Download Insight always evaluate non-portal files with a default internal
sensitivity level that Symantec sets. The internal default detects only the most
malicious files.
An example of cloud lookups in action

An example of the way the Intelligent Threat Cloud Service protects clients:
The client user runs Internet Explorer and tries to download a file. Download
Insight uses its sensitivity level and reputation information from Symantec Insight
in the cloud to determine that the file is not harmful.
Download Insight determines that the file's reputation is acceptable, allows the
file to download, and marks the file as a portal file.
Later, Symantec gets more information about the file from its extensive global
intelligence network. Symantec determines that the file might be harmful and
updates the Insight reputation database. Symantec might provide a late-breaking
signature for the file in its definitions in the cloud.
If the user opens the file or runs a scan, Auto-Protect or the scan gets the latest
information about the file from the cloud. Using the latest file reputation and the
Download Insight sensitivity level, or using a late-breaking file signature,
Auto-Protect or the scan now detects the file as potentially malicious.
Required and recommended settings

By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection uses the cloud. If you disable any of
these options, you limit or disable cloud protection.
Auto-Protect
Auto-Protect must be enabled. Auto-Protect is enabled by default.
Download Insight
Download Insight must be enabled so that it can examine file downloads, and
so that file downloads are marked as portal files for future scans. If you disable
Download Insight, all file downloads are treated as non-portal. Scans detect
only the most malicious non-portal files.
Insight lookups
Insight lookups must be enabled. The Insight lookups option controls reputation
lookups as well as cloud definition lookups. This option is enabled by default.
Warning: If you disable Insight lookups, cloud protection is completely disabled.
Product usage and client submissions

Symantec recommends that you allow your server and clients to share
information with Symantec. Data you share with Symantec improves the
performance of detection features. Information about the potential malware that
might attack your computers helps improve the security landscape and address
threats faster. Symantec makes every attempt to make the data anonymous to
prevent the transmission of personally identifiable information.
See Feature dependencies on Windows clients on page 748.

Some scans run by default, but you might want to change settings or set up your
own scheduled scans. You can also customize scans and change how much
protection they provide on your client computers.
Starting in 14, scans access the complete definitions set in the cloud.
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses the Intelligent Threat Cloud Service
on page 398.
Table 17-3 Modifying scans on client computers
Task Description
Review the types of scans and Check your scan settings. You can review the defaults and determine if you want
default settings to make changes.
See About the types of scans and real-time protection on page 404.
See About the default Virus and Spyware Protection policy scan settings
on page 414.
Create scheduled scans and run You use scheduled scans and on-demand scans to supplement the protection that
on-demand scans Auto-Protect provides. Auto-Protect provides protection when you read and write
files. Scheduled scans and on-demand scans can scan any files that exist on your
client computers. They can also protect memory, load points, and other important
locations on your client computers.
You can save your scheduled scan settings as a template. The scan templates
can save you time when you configure multiple policies. You can use any scan
that you save as a template as the basis for a new scan in a different policy.
Note: For managed clients, Symantec Endpoint Protection provides a default
scheduled scan that scans all files, folders, and locations on the client computers.

Table 17-3 Modifying scans on client computers (continued)
Task Description
Customize scan settings for your You can customize Auto-Protect settings as well as options in administrator-defined
environment scans. You might want to change scan settings to handle false positive detections,
optimize computer or scan performance, or change scan actions or notifications.
For scheduled scans, you can also set options for missed scans, randomized
scans, and whether to scan network drives.
See Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Windows computers
on page 452.
See Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Mac computers
on page 453.
See Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Linux computers
on page 454.
Adjust scans to improve client By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection provides a high level of security while
computer performance it minimizes the effect on your client computers' performance. You can change
some settings, however, to optimize the computer performance even more.
Optimization is important in virtualized environments.
Note: When you adjust settings to optimize client computer performance, you
might decrease some security on your client computers.
See Adjusting scans to improve computer performance on page 424.
Adjust scans to increase The default scan settings optimize your client computers' performance while still
protection on your client providing a high level of protection. You can increase the level of protection,
computers however.
See Adjusting scans to increase protection on your client computers on page 427.
Manage Download Insight Download Insight inspects files that users try to download through web browsers,
detections text messaging clients, and other portals. Download Insight uses reputation
information from Symantec Insight to make decisions about files.
Manage SONAR SONAR is part of Proactive Threat Protection on your client computers. However,
SONAR settings are part of a Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
See Managing SONAR on page 483.
Configure exceptions for scans You can create exceptions for the files and applications that you know are safe.
Symantec Endpoint Protection also excludes some files and folders automatically.
See About the files and folders that Symantec Endpoint Protection excludes from
virus and spyware scans on page 410.
Table 17-3 Modifying scans on client computers (continued)
Task Description
Manage files in the Quarantine You can monitor and delete the files that are quarantined on your client computers.
You can also specify settings for the Quarantine.
Allow clients to submit information By default, clients send information about detections to Symantec. You can turn
about detections to Symantec off submissions or choose which types of the information that clients submit.
Symantec recommends that you always allow clients to send submissions. The
information helps Symantec address threats.
Manage the virus and spyware You can decide whether or not notifications appear on client computers for virus
notifications that appear on client and spyware events.
computers
See Managing the virus and spyware notifications that appear on client computers
on page 441.
About the types of scans and real-time protection

Symantec Endpoint Protection includes different types of scans and real-time
protection to detect different types of viruses, threats, and risks.
Note: Starting in 14, scans access the complete definitions set in the cloud.
on page 398.
By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection runs an active scan every day at 12:30
P.M. Symantec Endpoint Protection also runs an active scan when new definitions
arrive on the client computer. On unmanaged computers, Symantec Endpoint
Protection also includes a default startup scan that is disabled.
Note: When a client computer is off or in hibernation or sleep mode, the computer
might miss a scheduled scan. When the computer starts up or wakes, by default
the scan is retried within a specified interval. If the interval already expired, Symantec
Endpoint Protection does not run the scan and waits until the next scheduled scan
time. You can modify the settings for missed scheduled scans.
You should make sure that you run an active scan every day on the computers in
your network. You might want to schedule a full scan once a week or once a month
if you suspect that you have an inactive threat in your network. Full scans consume
more computer resources and might affect computer performance.
Table 17-4 Scan types
Scan type Description
Auto-Protect Auto-Protect continuously inspects files and email data as they are written to or read from
a computer. Auto-Protect automatically neutralizes or eliminates detected viruses and
security risks. Mac clients and Linux clients support Auto-Protect for the file system only.
Starting in 14, on standard and embedded/VDI clients that are connected to the cloud,
Auto-Protect automatically looks up the latest definitions in the cloud.
See Customizing Auto-Protect for Linux clients on page 457.
Download Insight Download Insight boosts the security of Auto-Protect scans by inspecting files when users
try to download them from browsers and other portals. It uses reputation information from
(Windows only)
Symantec Insight to allow or block download attempts.
Download Insight functions as part of Auto-Protect and requires Auto-Protect to be enabled.
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses Symantec Insight to make decisions about
files on page 434.
Table 17-4 Scan types (continued)
Administrator-defined Administrator-defined scans detect viruses and security risks by examining all files and
scans processes on the client computer. Administrator-defined scans can also inspect memory
and load points.
The following types of administrator-defined scans are available:
Scheduled scans
A scheduled scan runs on the client computers at designated times. Any concurrently
scheduled scans run sequentially. If a computer is turned off or in hibernation or sleep
mode during a scheduled scan, the scan does not run unless it is configured to retry
missed scans. When the computer starts or wakes, Symantec Endpoint Protection
retries the scan until the scan starts or the retry interval expires.
You can schedule an active, full, or custom scan for Windows clients. You can schedule
only a custom scan for Mac clients or Linux clients.
You can save your scheduled scan settings as a template. You can use any scan that
you save as a template as the basis for a different scan. The scan templates can save
you time when you configure multiple policies. A scheduled scan template is included
by default in the policy. The default scheduled scan scans all files and directories.
Startup scans and triggered scans
Startup scans run when the users log on to the computers. Triggered scans run when
new virus definitions are downloaded to computers.
Note: Startup scans and triggered scans are available only for Windows clients.
On-demand scans
On-demand scans are the scans that run immediately when you select the scan
command in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
You can select the command from the Clients tab or from the logs.
If the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows detects a large number of viruses,
spyware, or high-risk threats, an aggressive scan mode engages. The scan restarts and
uses Insight lookups.
SONAR SONAR offers real-time protection against zero-day attacks. SONAR can stop attacks even
before traditional signature-based definitions detect a threat. SONAR uses heuristics as
(Windows only)
well as file reputation data to make decisions about applications or files.
Like proactive threat scans, SONAR detects keyloggers, spyware, and any other application
that might be malicious or potentially malicious.
See About SONAR on page 481.

Table 17-4 Scan types (continued)
Early launch Works with the Windows early launch anti-malware driver. Supported only on Windows 8
anti-malware (ELAM) and Windows Server 2012.
(Windows only) Early launch anti-malware provides protection for the computers in your network when they
start up and before third-party drivers initialize.
See Managing early launch anti-malware (ELAM) detections on page 444.
About the types of Auto-Protect

Auto-Protect scans files as well as certain types of email and email attachments.
By default, all types of Auto-Protect are enabled. If you use a server-based email
scanning solution such as Symantec Mail Security, you might not need to enable
Auto-Protect for email.
Mac clients and Linux clients do not support email Auto-Protect scans.
Table 17-5 Types of Auto-Protect
Type of Auto-Protect Description
Auto-Protect Continuously scans files as they are read from or written to the client
computer.
Auto-Protect is enabled by default for the file system. It loads at computer

startup. It inspects all files for viruses and security risks, and blocks the
security risks from being installed. It can optionally scan files by file extension,
scan files on remote computers, and scan floppies for boot viruses. It can
optionally back up files before it attempts to repair the files, and terminate
processes and stop services.
You can configure Auto-Protect to scan only selected file extensions. When
Auto-Protect scans the selected extensions, it can also determine a file's
type even if a virus changes the file's extension.
For those clients that do not run email Auto-Protect, your client computers
are still protected when Auto-Protect is enabled. Most email applications
save attachments to a temporary folder when users launch email attachments.
Auto-Protect scans the file as it is written to the temporary folder and detects
any virus or security risk. Auto-Protect also detects the virus if the user tries
to save an infected attachment to a local drive or network drive.
Table 17-5 Types of Auto-Protect (continued)
Type of Auto-Protect Description
Internet Email Auto-Protect Scans inbound Internet email body and email attachments for viruses and
security risks; also performs outbound email heuristics scanning.
(Windows only)
By default, Internet Email Auto-Protect supports encrypted passwords and
email over POP3 and SMTP connections. Internet Email Auto-Protect
supports 32-bit or 64-bit systems. If you use POP3 or SMTP with Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL), then the client detects secure connections but does
not scan encrypted messages.
Note: For performance reasons, Internet Email Auto-Protect for POP3 is
not supported on server operating systems.
Email scanning does not support IMAP, AOL, or HTTP-based email such
as Hotmail or Yahoo! Mail.
Microsoft Outlook Auto-Protect Downloads incoming Microsoft Outlook email attachments and scans for
viruses and security risks when the user reads the message and opens the
(Windows only)
attachment.
Microsoft Outlook Auto-Protect supports Microsoft Outlook 98 through Outlook

2013, for the MAPI or Internet protocols. Microsoft Outlook Auto-Protect
supports 32-bit and 64-bit systems.
During installation, Symantec Endpoint Protection installs Microsoft Outlook

Auto-Protect if you include it in the package and Microsoft Outlook is already
installed on the computer.
If a user downloads a large attachment over a slow connection, mail

performance is affected. You may want to disable this feature for users who
regularly receive large attachments.
Note: You should not install Microsoft Outlook Auto-Protect on a Microsoft
Exchange Server. Instead you should install Symantec Mail Security for
Microsoft Exchange.
Lotus Notes Auto-Protect Scans incoming Lotus Notes email attachments for viruses and security
risks.
(Windows only)
Lotus Notes Auto-Protect supports Lotus Notes 7.x or later.
During installation, Symantec Endpoint Protection installs Lotus Notes

Auto-Protect if you include it in the package and Lotus Notes is already
installed on the computer.
See About the types of scans and real-time protection on page 404.
About virus and security risks

Symantec Endpoint Protection scans for both viruses and for security risks. Viruses
and security risks can arrive through email messages or instant messenger
programs. Often a user unknowingly downloads a risk by accepting an End User
License Agreement from a software program.
Many viruses and security risks are installed as drive-by downloads. These
downloads usually occur when users visit malicious or infected Web sites, and the
application's downloader installs through a legitimate vulnerability on the computer.
You can change the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it detects
a virus or a security risk. For Windows clients, the security risk categories are
dynamic and change over time as Symantec collects information about risks.
See Changing the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it makes
a detection on page 468.
You can view information about specific virus and security risks on the Symantec
Security Response Web site.
Table 17-6 Viruses and security risks
Risk Description
Viruses Programs or code that attach a copy of themselves to another computer program or file
when it runs. When the infected program runs, the attached virus program activates and
attaches itself to other programs and files.
The following types of threats are included in the virus category:
Malicious Internet bots

Programs that run automated tasks over the Internet. Bots can be used to automate
attacks on computers or to collect information from Web sites.
Worms
Programs that replicate without infecting other programs. Some worms spread by copying
themselves from disk to disk, while others replicate in memory to reduce computer
performance.
Trojan horses
Programs that hide themselves in something benign, such as a game or utility.
Blended threats
Threats that blend the characteristics of viruses, worms, Trojan horses, and code with
server and Internet vulnerabilities to initiate, transmit, and spread an attack. Blended
threats use multiple methods and techniques to spread rapidly and cause widespread
damage.
Rootkits
Programs that hide themselves from a computer's operating system.
Adware Programs that deliver any advertising content.

Table 17-6 Viruses and security risks (continued)
Risk Description
Cookie Messages that Web servers send to Web browsers for the purpose of identifying the computer
or user.
Dialers Programs that use a computer, without the user's permission or knowledge, to dial out
through the Internet to a 900 number or FTP site. Typically, these numbers are dialed to
accrue charges.
Hacking tools Programs that hackers use to gain unauthorized access to a user's computer. For example,
one hacking tool is a keystroke logger, which tracks and records individual keystrokes and
sends this information back to the hacker. The hacker can then perform port scans or
vulnerability scans. Hacking tools may also be used to create viruses.
Joke programs Programs that alter or interrupt the operation of a computer in a way that is intended to be
humorous or frightening. For example, a joke program might move the recycle bin away
from the mouse when the user tries to delete an item.
Misleading applications Applications that intentionally misrepresent the security status of a computer. These
applications typically masquerade as security notifications about any fake infections that
must be removed.
Parental control Programs that monitor or limit computer usage. The programs can run undetected and
programs typically transmit monitoring information to another computer.
Remote access Programs that allow access over the Internet from another computer so that they can gain
programs information or attack or alter a user's computer.
Security assessment Programs that are used to gather information for unauthorized access to a computer.
tool
Spyware Stand-alone programs that can secretly monitor system activity and detect passwords and
other confidential information and relay it back to another computer.
Trackware Stand-alone or appended applications that trace a user's path on the Internet and send
information to the controller or hacker's system.
About the files and folders that Symantec Endpoint Protection

excludes from virus and spyware scans
When Symantec Endpoint Protection detects the presence of certain third-party
applications and some Symantec products, it automatically creates exclusions for
these files and folders. The client excludes these files and folders from all scans.
Note: The client does not exclude the system temporary folders from scans because
doing so can create a significant security vulnerability on a computer.
To improve scan performance or reduce false positive detections, you can exclude
files by adding a file or a folder exception to an Exceptions policy. You can also
specify the file extensions or the folders that you want to include in a particular
scan.
Warning: The files or folders that you exclude from scans are not protected from
viruses and security risks.
You can view the exclusions that the client automatically creates.
Look in the following locations of the Windows registry:
On 32-bit computers, see
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection\AV\Exclusions.
On 64-bit computers, see
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Wow6432Node\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection\AV\Exclusions.
Warning: Do not edit this registry directly.

Table 17-7 File and folder exclusions
Files Description
Microsoft Exchange The client software automatically creates file and folder scan exclusions for the following
Microsoft Exchange Server versions:
Exchange 5.5
Exchange 6.0
Exchange 2000
Exchange 2003
Exchange 2007
Exchange 2007 SP1
Exchange 2010
Exchange 2013
Exchange 2016
For Exchange 2007, see your user documentation for information about compatibility
with antivirus software. In a few circumstances, you might need to create scan
exclusions for some Exchange 2007 folders manually. For example, in a clustered
environment, you might need to create some exclusions.
The client software checks for changes in the location of the appropriate Microsoft
Exchange files and folders at regular intervals. If you install Microsoft Exchange on a
computer where the client software is already installed, the exclusions are created
when the client checks for changes. The client excludes both files and folders; if a
single file is moved from an excluded folder, the file remains excluded.
For more information, see the article, Preventing Symantec Endpoint Protection from
scanning the Microsoft Exchange 2007 directory structure.
Microsoft Forefront The client automatically creates file and folder exclusions for the following Microsoft
Forefront products:
Forefront Server Security for Exchange

Forefront Server Security for SharePoint
Forefront Threat Management Gateway
Check the Microsoft Web site for a list of recommended exclusions.
Also see the article, Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection exclusions for Microsoft
Forefront.
Active Directory domain The client automatically creates file and folder exclusions for the Active Directory
controller domain controller database, logs, and working files. The client monitors the applications
that are installed on the client computer. If the software detects Active Directory on the
client computer, the software automatically creates the exclusions.
Table 17-7 File and folder exclusions (continued)
Files Description
Symantec products The client automatically creates appropriate file and folder scan exclusions for certain
Symantec products when they are detected.
The client creates exclusions for the following Symantec products:
Symantec Mail Security 4.0, 4.5, 4.6, 5.0, and 6.0 for Microsoft Exchange
Symantec AntiVirus/Filtering 3.0 for Microsoft Exchange
Norton AntiVirus 2.x for Microsoft Exchange
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager embedded database and logs
Veritas products The client automatically creates appropriate file and folder scan exclusions for certain
Veritas products when they are detected.
Veritas Backup Exec

Veritas NetBackup
Veritas System Recovery
Selected extensions and For each type of administrator-defined scan or Auto-Protect, you can select files to
Microsoft folders include by extension. For administrator-defined scans, you can also select files to
include by folder. For example, you can specify that a scheduled scan only scans
certain extensions and that Auto-Protect scans all extensions.
For executable files and Microsoft Office files, Auto-Protect can determine a file's type
even if a virus changes the file's extension.
By default Symantec Endpoint Protection scans all extensions and folders. Any
extensions or folders that you deselect are excluded from that particular scan.
Symantec does not recommend that you exclude any extensions from scans. If you
decide to exclude files by extension and any Microsoft folders, however, you should
consider the amount of protection that your network requires. You should also consider
the amount of time and resources that your client computers require to complete the
scans.
Note: Any file extensions that you exclude from Auto-Protect scans of the file system
also excludes the extensions from Download Insight. If you are running Download
Insight, you should include extensions for common programs and documents in the
list of extensions that you want to scan. You should also make sure that you scan .msi
files.
Table 17-7 File and folder exclusions (continued)
Files Description
File and folder exceptions You use an Exceptions policy to create exceptions for the files or the folders that you
want Symantec Endpoint Protection to exclude from all virus and spyware scans.
Note: By default, users on client computers can also create file and folder exceptions.
For example, you might want to create file exclusions for an email application inbox.
If the client detects a virus in the Inbox file during an on-demand or scheduled scan,
the client quarantines the entire inbox. You can create an exception to exclude the
inbox file instead. If the client detects a virus when a user opens an email message,
however, the client still quarantines or deletes the message.
Trusted files Virus and spyware scans include a feature that is called Insight that lets scans skip
trusted files. You can choose the level of trust for the files that you want to skip, or you
can disable the option. If you disable the option, you might increase scan time.
Auto-Protect can also skip the files that are accessed by trusted processes such as
Windows Search.
See Excluding a file or a folder from scans on page 541.
About the default Virus and Spyware Protection policy scan settings
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager includes three default policies.
Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy
Virus and Spyware Protection High Security policy
The High Security policy is the most stringent of all the preconfigured policies.
You should be aware that it can affect the performance of other applications.
Virus and Spyware Protection High Performance policy
The High Performance policy provides better performance than the High Security
policy, but it does not provide the same safeguards. The policy relies primarily
on Auto-Protect to scan files with selected file extensions to detect threats.
The basic Virus and Spyware Protection policy provides a good balance between
security and performance.
Table 17-8 Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy scan settings
Setting Description
Auto-Protect for the file Enabled

system
Download Insight malicious file sensitivity is set to level 5.
The Download Insight action for unproven files is Ignore.

Auto-Protect includes the following settings:
Scans all files for viruses and security risks.

Blocks the security risks from being installed.
Cleans the virus-infected files. Backs up the files before it repairs
them. Quarantines the files that cannot be cleaned.
Quarantines the files with security risks. Logs the files that
cannot be quarantined.
Checks all floppies for boot viruses. Logs the boot viruses.
Notifies the computer users about viruses and security risks.
Auto-Protect for email Enabled

Other types of Auto-Protect include the following settings:
Scans all files, including the files that are inside compressed
files.
Cleans the virus-infected files. Quarantines the files that cannot
be cleaned.
Sends a message to the computer users about detected viruses
and security risks.
SONAR Enabled
High risk heuristic detections are quarantined

Logs any low risk heuristic detections
Aggressive mode is disabled
Show alert upon detection is enabled
System change detection actions are set to Ignore.
Suspicious behavior detection blocks high risk threats and
ignores low risk threats.
Table 17-8 Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy scan settings
(continued)
Setting Description
Administrator-defined The scheduled scan includes the following default settings:

scans
Performs an active scan every day at 12:30 P.M. The scan is
randomized.
Scans all files and folders, including the files that are contained
in compressed files.
Scans memory, common infection locations, and known virus
and security risk locations.
Retries missed scans within three days.
The on-demand scan provides the following protection:
Scans all files and folders, including the files that are contained
in compressed files.
Scans memory and common infection locations.
The default Virus and Spyware High Security policy provides high-level security,
and includes many of the settings from the Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
The policy provides increased scanning.
Table 17-9 Virus and Spyware Protection High Security policy settings
Setting Description
Auto-Protect for the file Same as Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy
system and email
Auto-Protect also inspects the files on the remote computers.
SONAR Same as Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy but with
the following changes:
Blocks any system change events.
Global settings Bloodhound is set to Aggressive.

The default Virus and Spyware Protection High Performance policy provides
high-level performance. The policy includes many of the settings from the Virus
and Spyware Protection policy. The policy provides reduced security.
Table 17-10 Virus and Spyware Protection High Performance policy settings
Setting Description
Auto-Protect for the file Same as Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy but with
system the following changes:
Download Insight malicious file sensitivity is set to level 1.
Internet Email Disabled

Auto-Protect
Microsoft Outlook
Auto-Protect
Lotus Notes
Auto-Protect
SONAR Same as Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy with the
following changes:
Ignores any system change events.

Ignores any behavioral policy enforcement events.
Administrator-defined Same as Virus and Spyware Protection Balanced policy.

scans
How Symantec Endpoint Protection handles detections of viruses

and security risks
Symantec Endpoint Protection uses default actions to handle the detection of viruses
and security risks. You can change some of the defaults.
Table 17-11 How Symantec Endpoint Protection handles the detection of viruses
and security risks
Detection Description
Viruses By default, the Symantec Endpoint Protection client first tries

to clean a file that a virus infects.
If the client software cannot clean the file, it does the following
actions:
Moves the file to the Quarantine on the infected computer

Denies any access to the file
Logs the event
Security risks By default, the client moves any files that security risks infect
to the Quarantine on the infected computer. The client also
tries to remove or repair the risk's side effects.
If a security risk cannot be quarantined and repaired, the

second action is to log the risk.
By default, the Quarantine contains a record of all actions

that the client performed. You can return the client computer
to the state that existed before the client tried the removal
and repair.
On Windows clients and Linux clients, you can disable

Auto-Protect scanning for security risks. You might want to
temporarily disable Auto-Protect scanning of security risks if
detection of a security risk could compromise a computer's
stability. Scheduled and on-demand scans continue to detect
the risk.
Detections by SONAR are considered suspicious events. You configure actions for
these detections as part of the SONAR configuration.
For Windows clients and Linux clients, you can assign a first and a second action
for Symantec Endpoint Protection to take when it finds risks. You can configure
different actions for viruses and security risks. You can use different actions for
scheduled, on-demand, or Auto-Protect scans.
Note: Risky cookies are always deleted unless you specify that you want to log
cookies instead. You can specify only one action for cookies, either Delete or Leave
alone (log only).
Note: On Windows clients, the list of the detection types for security risks is dynamic
and changes as Symantec discovers new categories. New categories are
downloaded to the console or the client computer when new definitions arrive.
For Mac clients, you can specify whether Symantec Endpoint Protection repairs
the infected files that it finds. You can also specify whether Symantec Endpoint
Protection moves the infected files that it cannot repair into the Quarantine. You
can use different actions for scheduled, on-demand, or Auto-Protect scans.
How Symantec Endpoint Protection handles detections on Windows

8 computers
Symantec Endpoint Protection protects both the Windows 8 style user interface as
well as the Windows 8 desktop. However, actions for the detections that are related
to Windows 8 style apps and files function differently than actions for other
detections.
The applications that are hosted on the Windows 8 style user interface are
implemented in containers that are isolated from other processes in the operating
system. Symantec Endpoint Protection does not clean or quarantine any detections
that affect Windows 8 style apps or files. For any detections that involve these apps
and files, Symantec Endpoint Protection only deletes or logs the detections.
For any detections that are not related to Windows 8 style apps and files, Symantec
Endpoint Protection can quarantine and repair the detections and functions as it
typically does on any other Windows operating system.
You should keep in mind the difference when setting up actions in Virus and Spyware
Protection policy and when you run reports.
See About the pop-up notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients on page 443.
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection handles detections of viruses and security
risks on page 417.
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Windows

computers
You configure scheduled scans as part of a Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
Consider the following important points when you set up a scheduled scan for the
Windows computers in your security network:
Multiple simultaneous scans If you schedule multiple scans to occur on the same computer
run serially and the scans start at the same time, the scans run serially.
After one scan finishes, another scan starts. For example,
you might schedule three separate scans on your computer
to occur at 1:00 P.M. Each scan scans a different drive. One
scan scans drive C. Another scan scans drive D. Another
scan scans drive E. In this example, a better solution is to
create one scheduled scan that scans drives C, D, and E.
Missed scheduled scans If your computer misses a scheduled scan for some reason,
might not run by default Symantec Endpoint Protection tries to perform the
scan until it starts or until a specific time interval expires. If
Symantec Endpoint Protection cannot start the missed scan
within the retry interval, it does not run the scan.
Scheduled scan time might Symantec Endpoint Protection might not use the scheduled
drift time if the last run of the scan occurred at a different time
because of the scan duration or missed scheduled scan
settings. For example, you might configure a weekly scan to
run every Sunday at midnight and a retry interval of one day.
If the computer misses the scan and starts up on Monday at
6 A.M., the scan runs at 6 A.M. The next scan is performed
one week from Monday at 6 A.M. rather than the next Sunday
at midnight.
If you did not restart your computer until Tuesday at 6 A.M.,

which is two days late and exceeds the retry interval,
Symantec Endpoint Protection does not retry the scan. It
waits until the next Sunday at midnight to try to run the scan.
In either case, if you randomize the scan start time you might
change the last run time of the scan.
Note: Windows settings include some options that are not available for clients that
run on other operating systems.
You can click Help for more information about the options that are used in this
procedure.
To set up scheduled scans that run on Windows computers
2 Under Windows Settings, click Administrator-defined Scans.
3 On the Scans tab, under Scheduled Scans, click Add.
4 In the Add Scheduled Scan dialog box, click Create a new scheduled scan.
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Mac computers
5 Click OK.
6 In the Add Scheduled Scan dialog box, on the Scan Details tab, type a name
and description for this scheduled scan.
7 Click Active Scan, Full Scan, or Custom Scan.
8 If you selected Custom, under Scanning, you can specify the folders to scan.
9 Under File types, click Scan all files or Scan only selected extensions.
Note: Scheduled scans always scan container files unless you disable the
Scan files inside compressed files option under Advanced Scanning
Options or you create specific exceptions for the container file extensions.
10 Under Enhance the scan by checking, check or uncheck Memory, Common

infection locations, or Well-known virus and security risk locations.
11 On the Schedule tab, under Scanning schedule, set the frequency and the
time at which the scan should run.
The retry setting under Missed Scheduled Scans changes automatically
according to whether you select Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.
12 Under Missed Scheduled Scans, you can disable the option to run a missed
scan or you can change the retry interval.
You can also specify a maximum scan duration before the scan pauses. You
can also randomize scan start time.
13 If you want to save this scan as a template, check Save a copy as a Scheduled
Scan Template.
14 Click OK.
See Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Windows
See Excluding file extensions from virus and spyware scans on Windows clients
and Linux clients on page 544.
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Mac

computers
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Linux computers
See Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Mac computers
on page 461.
Note: Mac settings do not include all the options that are available for clients that
run on Windows.
To set up scheduled scans that run on Mac computers

2 Under Mac Settings, click Administrator-defined Scans.
4 In the Add Scheduled Scan dialog box, click Create a new scheduled scan,
and then click OK.
and a description for the scan.
6 Under Scan drives and folders, specify the items to scan.
Scan Template.
9 Click OK.
Setting up scheduled scans that run on Linux

computers
To set up scheduled scans that run on Linux computers
2 Under Linux Settings, click Administrator-defined Scans.
4 In the Add Scheduled Scan dialog box, click Add Scheduled Scan.
and description for this scheduled scan.
6 Under Folder types, click Scan all folders or specify the folders to scan.
7 Under File types, click Scan all files or Scan only selected extensions.
Note: Scheduled scans always scan container files unless you disable the
Scan files inside compressed files option or you create specific exceptions
for the container file extensions.
8 Under Additional options, check or uncheck Scan for security risks.

The retry setting under Missed Scheduled Scans changes automatically
according to whether you select Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.
10 Under Missed Scheduled Scans, you can disable the option to run a missed
scan or you can change the retry interval.
Scan Template.
12 Click OK.

You can run a manual, or on-demand, scan on client computers remotely from the
management console. You might want to run an on-demand scan as part of your
strategy to prevent and handle virus and spyware attacks on your client computers.
By default, an active scan runs automatically after you update definitions. You can
configure an on-demand scan as a full scan or custom scan and then run the
on-demand scan for more extensive scanning.
Settings for on-demand scans are similar to the settings for scheduled scans.
For Windows client computers, you can run an active, full, or custom on-demand
scan. For Mac and Linux client computers, you can run only a custom on-demand
scan.
The custom scan uses the settings that are configured for on-demand scans in the
Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
Note: If you issue a restart command on a client computer that runs an on-demand
scan, the scan stops, and the client computer restarts. The scan does not restart.
You can run an on-demand scan from the Computer Status log or from the Clients
tab in the console.
You can cancel all scans in progress and queued for selected clients from the
Computer Status log. If you confirm the command, the table refreshes and you see
that the cancel command is added to the command status table.
To run on-demand scans on client computers
2 Under Clients, right-click the group or clients that you want to scan.
Click Run a command on the group > Scan.
Click Run command on computers > Scan.
Click Update Content and Scan to update definitions and then run the scan
in one step.
4 For Windows clients, select Active Scan, Full Scan, or Custom Scan, and
then click OK.
on page 388.

By default, virus and spyware scans minimize the effect on your client computers'
resources. You can change some scan settings to optimize the performance even
more. Many of the tasks that are suggested here are useful in the environments
that run Symantec Endpoint Protection in guest operating systems on virtual
machines (VMs).
Table 17-12 To adjust scans to improve computer performance on Windows

computers
Task Description
Modify tuning and compressed You can adjust the following options for scheduled and on-demand scans:
files options for scheduled and
Change tuning options
on-demand scans
You can change the scan tuning to Best Application Performance. When you
configure a scan with this setting, scans can start but they only run when the
client computer is idle. If you configure an Active Scan to run when new
definitions arrive, the scan might not run for up to 15 minutes if the user is using
the computer
Change the number of levels to scan compressed files
The default level is 3. You might want to change the level to 1 or 2 to reduce
scan time.

Use resumable scans For computers in your network that have large volumes, scheduled scans can be
configured as resumable scans.
A scan duration option provides a specified period to run a scan. If the scan does
not complete by the end of the specified duration, it resumes when the next
scheduled scan period occurs. The scan resumes at the place where it stopped
until the entire volume is scanned. Typically you use the scan duration option on
servers.
Note: Do not use a resumable scan if you suspect that the computer is infected.
You should perform a full scan that runs until it scans the entire computer. You
should also not use a resumable scan if a scan can complete before the specified
interval.
Adjust Auto-Protect settings You can adjust some settings for Auto-Protect scans of the file system that might
improve your client computers' performance.
You can set the following options:
File cache
Make sure that the file cache is enabled (the default is enabled). When the file
cache is enabled, Auto-Protect remembers the clean files that it scanned and
does not rescan them.
Network settings
When Auto-Protect scans of remote computers are enabled, make sure that
Only when files are executed is enabled.

Table 17-12 To adjust scans to improve computer performance on Windows

computers (continued)
Task Description
Allow all scans to skip trusted files Virus and spyware scans include an option called Insight that skips trusted files.
By default Insight is enabled. You can change the level of trust for the types of files
that scans skip:
Symantec and Community Trusted

This level skips files that are trusted by Symantec and the Symantec Community.
Symantec Trusted
This level skips only files that are trusted by Symantec.
See Modifying global scan settings for Windows clients on page 465.
Randomize scheduled scans In virtualized environments, where multiple virtual machines (VMs) are deployed,
simultaneous scans create resource problems. For example, a single server might
run 100 or more VMs. Simultaneous scans on those VMs drain resources on the
server.
You can randomize scans to limit the impact on your server.
See Randomizing scans to improve computer performance in virtualized

environments on Windows clients on page 464.
Use Shared Insight Cache in Shared Insight Cache eliminates the need to rescan the files that Symantec
virtualized environments Endpoint Protection has determined are clean. You can use Shared Insight Cache
for scheduled and manual scans on your clients computers. Shared Insight Cache
is a separate application that you install on a server or in a virtual environment.
See Enabling or disabling the use of a network-based Shared Insight Cache

on page 633.
Disable early launch anti-malware Symantec Endpoint Protection ELAM works with Windows ELAM to provide
(ELAM) detection protection against malicious startup drivers.
Table 17-13 To adjust scans to improve computer performance on Mac

computers
Task Description
Enable idle-time scan Applies to scheduled scans on clients that run on Mac computers.
This option configures scheduled scans to run only while the computer is idle.
See Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Mac

Table 17-13 To adjust scans to improve computer performance on Mac

computers (continued)
Task Description
Modify compressed files setting Applies to Auto-Protect and on-demand scans.
You can enable or disable the option, but you cannot specify the level of
compressed files to scan.
Table 17-14 To adjust scans to improve computer performance on Linux

computers
Task Description
Scan by type of folder The default is to scan all folder types. You can specify any of: Root, Home, Bin,
Usr, Etc, and Opt. If you know that a folder is safe, you can uncheck it in the list.
Scan by file type The default is to scan all files. If you know that a given extension is safe, you can
remove it from the list.
Scan files inside compressed files You can expand up to three levels to scan within compressed files. You might want
to change the level to 1 or 2 to reduce scan time.
Scan for security risks Lets you choose whether to scan for security risks. Security risks are updated
through LiveUpdate. Scanning for security risks slows the scan down, but increases
security. The default is to scan for security risks. To improve computer performance,
uncheck this option.
Adjusting scans to increase protection on your client

computers
Symantec Endpoint Protection provides a high level of security by default. You can
increase the protection even more.
The settings are different for clients that run on Windows computers and clients
that run on Mac and Linux computers.
Note: If you increase the protection on your client computers, you might affect
computer performance.
Table 17-15 Adjusting scans to increase protection on Windows computers
Task Description
Lock scan settings Some settings are locked by default; you can lock additional settings so that users
cannot change the protection on their computers.
Modify settings for You should check or modify the following options:
administrator-defined scans
Scan performance
Set the scan tuning to Best Scan Performance. The setting, however, might
affect your client computer performance. Scans run even if the computer is not
idle.
Scheduled scan duration
By default, scheduled scans run until the specified time interval expires and
then resume when the client computer is idle. You can set the scan duration
to Scan until finished.
Use Insight Lookup on legacy clients
For legacy clients, you should make sure that Insight Lookup is enabled.
Insight Lookup uses the latest definition set from the cloud and information from
the Insight reputation database to scan and make decisions about files that
were downloaded from a supported portal.
In previous versions, you could configure the Insight Lookup sensitivity as well
as enable or disable Insight Lookup. As of 14, you can only enable or disable
Insight Lookup for legacy clients.
Note:
In 14, scheduled and on-demand scans always use the cloud to evaluate portal
files. Auto-Protect also uses the cloud to evaluate portal files.

on page 398.
Specify stronger scan detection Specify Quarantine, Delete, or Terminate actions for detections.
actions
Note: Be careful when you use Delete or Terminate for security risk detections.
The action might cause some legitimate applications to lose functionality.
Increase the level of Bloodhound Bloodhound locates and isolates the logical regions of a file to detect virus-like
protection behavior. You can change the detection level from Automatic to Aggressive to
increase the protection on your computers. The Aggressive setting, however, is
likely to produce more false positives.
Table 17-15 Adjusting scans to increase protection on Windows computers

(continued)
Task Description
Adjust Auto-Protect settings You can change the following options:
File cache
You can disable the file cache so that Auto-Protect rescans good files.
Network settings
By default, files on network drives are scanned only when they are executed.
You can disable this option.
Table 17-16 Adjusting scans to increase protection on Mac and Linux computers
Task Description
Modify compressed file options The default is to scan 3 levels deep in compressed files. To increase protection,
for scans leave it at 3 levels, or change it to 3 if it is at a lower level.

See Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Linux

Lock Auto-Protect settings Some settings are locked by default; you can lock additional settings so that users
cannot change the protection on their computers. On the Mac client and the Linux
client, you can click Enable Auto-Protect, and then click the lock icon to lock the
setting.
Specify stronger scan detection Specify Quarantine or Delete (Linux only) actions for detections.
actions
Note: Be careful when you use Delete for security risk detections. The action
might cause some legitimate applications to lose functionality.

Auto-Protect includes a feature that is called Download Insight, which examines
the files that users try to download through Web browsers, text messaging clients,
and other portals.
Supported portals include Internet Explorer, Firefox, Microsoft Outlook, Outlook

Express, Google Chrome, Windows Live Messenger, and Yahoo Messenger.
Download Insight determines that a downloaded file might be a risk based on
evidence about the file's reputation. Download Insight is supported only for the
clients that run on Windows computers.
Note: If you install Auto-Protect for email on your client computers, Auto-Protect
also scans the files that users receive as email attachments.
Table 17-17 Managing Download Insight detections
Task Description
Learn how Download Insight uses Download Insight uses reputation information exclusively when it makes decisions
reputation data to make decisions about downloaded files. It does not use signatures or heuristics to make decisions.
about files If Download Insight allows a file, Auto-Protect or SONAR scans the file when the
user opens or runs the file.
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses Symantec Insight to make decisions
about files on page 434.
Table 17-17 Managing Download Insight detections (continued)
Task Description
View the Download Risk You can use the Download Risk Distribution report to view the files that Download
Distribution report to view Insight detected on your client computers. You can sort the report by URL, Web
Download Insight detections domain, or application. You can also see whether a user chose to allow a detected
file.
Note: Risk details for a Download Insight detection show only the first portal
application that attempted the download. For example, a user might use Internet
Explorer to try to download a file that Download Insight detects. If the user then
uses Firefox to try to download the file, the risk details show Internet Explorer as
the portal.
The user-allowed files that appear in the report might indicate false positive
detections.
You can also specify that you receive email notifications about new user-allowed
downloads.
Users can allow files by responding to notifications that appear for detections.
Administrators receive the report as part of a weekly report that Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager generates and emails. You must have specified an email
address for the administrator during installation or configured as part of the
administrator properties. You can also generate the report from the Reports tab
in the console.

Task Description
Create exceptions for specific files You can create an exception for an application that your users download. You can
or Web domains also create an exception for a specific Web domain that you believe is trustworthy.
See Specifying how Symantec Endpoint Protection handles monitored applications

on Windows clients on page 545.
See Excluding a trusted Web domain from scans on Windows clients on page 546.
Note: If your client computers use a proxy with authentication, you must specify
trusted Web domain exceptions for Symantec URLs. The exceptions let your client
computers communicate with Symantec Insight and other important Symantec
sites.
For information about the recommended exceptions, see the following articles:
How to test connectivity to Insight and Symantec licensing servers

Required exclusions for proxy servers to allow Symantec Endpoint Protection
to connect to Symantec reputation and licensing servers
By default, Download Insight does not examine any files that users download from
a trusted Internet or intranet site. You configure trusted sites and trusted local
intranet sites on the Windows Control Panel > Internet Options > Security tab.
When the Automatically trust any file downloaded from an intranet site option
is enabled, Symantec Endpoint Protection allows any file that a user downloads
from any sites in the lists.
Symantec Endpoint Protection checks for updates to the Internet Options trusted
sites list at user logon and every four hours.
Note: Download Insight recognizes only explicitly configured trusted sites. Wildcards
are allowed, but non-routable IP address ranges are not supported. For example,
Download Insight does not recognize 10.*.*.* as a trusted site. Download Insight
also does not support the sites that are discovered by the Internet Options >
Security > Automatically detect intranet network option.
Make sure that Insight lookups Download Insight requires reputation data from Symantec Insight to make decisions
are enabled about files. If you disable Insight lookups, Download Insight runs but detects only
the files with the worst reputations. Insight lookups are enabled by default.
Task Description
Customize Download Insight You might want to customize Download Insight settings for the following reasons:
settings
Increase or decrease the number of Download Insight detections.
You can adjust the malicious file sensitivity slider to increase or decrease the
number of detections. At lower sensitivity levels, Download Insight detects fewer
files as malicious and more files as unproven. Fewer detections are false positive
detections.
At higher sensitivity levels, Download Insight detects more files as malicious
and fewer files as unproven. More detections are false positive detections.
Change the action for malicious or unproven file detections.
You can change how Download Insight handles malicious or unproven files.
The specified action affects not only the detection but whether or not users can
interact with the detection.
For example, you might change the action for unproven files to Ignore. Then
Download Insight always allows unproven files and does not alert the user.
Alert users about Download Insight detections.
When notifications are enabled, the malicious file sensitivity setting affects the
number of notifications that users receive. If you increase the sensitivity, you
increase the number of user notifications because the total number of detections
increases.
You can turn off notifications so that users do not have a choice when Download
Insight makes a detection. If you keep notifications enabled, you can set the
action for unproven files to Ignore so that these detections are always allowed
and users are not notified.
Regardless of the notifications setting, when Download Insight detects an
unproven file and the action is Prompt, the user can allow or block the file. If
the user allows the file, the file runs automatically.
When notifications are enabled and Download Insight quarantines a file, the
user can undo the quarantine action and allow the file.
Note: If users allow a quarantined file, the file does not automatically run. The
user can run the file from the Temporary Internet Files folder. Typically, the
folder location is one of the following:
Windows 8 and later:
Drive:\Users\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\INetCache
Windows Vista / 7:
Drive:\Users\username\AppData\Local\Microsoft\Windows\Temporary
Internet Files
Windows XP (for legacy 12.1.x clients): Drive:\Documents and Settings
\username\Local Settings\Temporary Internet Files
See Customizing Download Insight settings on page 467.

How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses Symantec Insight to make decisions about files
Task Description
Allow clients to submit information By default, clients send information about reputation detections to Symantec.
about reputation detections to
Symantec recommends that you enable submissions for reputation detections.
Symantec
The information helps Symantec address threats.

How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses Symantec

Insight to make decisions about files
Symantec collects information about files from its global community of millions of
users and its Global Intelligence Network. The collected information is available to
Symantec products in the cloud through Symantec Insight. Symantec Insight
provides a file reputation database and the latest virus and spyware definitions.
Symantec products leverage Insight to protect client computers from new, targeted,
and mutating threats. The data is sometimes referred to as being in the cloud since
it does not reside on the client computer. Symantec Endpoint Protection must
request or query Insight for information. The queries are called reputation lookups,
cloud lookups, or Insight lookups.
Insight reputation ratings

Symantec Insight determines each file's level of risk or security rating. The rating
is also known as the file's reputation.
Insight determines a file's security rating by examining the following characteristics
of a file and its context:
The source of the file
How new the file is
How common the file is in the community
Other security metrics, such as how the file might be associated with malware
Insight lookups
Scanning features in Symantec Endpoint Protection leverage Insight to make
decisions about files and applications. Virus and Spyware Protection includes a
feature that is called Download Insight. Download Insight requires reputation
information to make detections. SONAR also uses reputation information to make
detections.
You can change the Insight lookups setting on the Clients tab. Go to Policies >
Settings > External Communications Settings > Client Submissions.
Starting in 14, on standard and embedded/VDI clients, the Insight lookups option
also allows Auto-Protect and scheduled and manual scans to look up file reputation
information as well as definitions in the cloud. Symantec recommends that you
keep the option enabled.
Warning: Download Insight, SONAR, and virus and spyware scans use Insight
lookups for threat detection. Symantec recommends that you always allow Insight
lookups. Disabling lookups disables Download Insight and impairs the functionality
of SONAR heuristics and virus and spyware scans.
See Feature dependencies on Windows clients on page 748.
File reputation submissions

By default, a client computer sends information about reputation detections to
Symantec Security Response for analysis. The information helps to refine Insight's
reputation database and the latest definitions in the cloud. The more clients that
submit information the more useful the reputation database becomes.
You can disable the client submission of reputation detections. Symantec
recommends, however, that you keep submissions enabled.
See Configuring a site to use a private Insight server for reputation queries
on page 447.

When virus and spyware scans detect a threat or SONAR detects a threat, Symantec
Endpoint Protection places the files in the client computer's local Quarantine.
Table 17-18 Managing the Quarantine
Task Description
Monitor files in the Quarantine You should periodically check the quarantined files to prevent accumulating large
numbers of files. Check the quarantined files when a new virus outbreak appears on
the network.
Leave files with unknown infections in the Quarantine. When the client receives new
definitions, it rescans the items in the Quarantine and might delete or repair the file.
Delete files in the Quarantine You can delete a quarantined file if a backup exists or if you have a copy of the file
from a trustworthy source.
You can delete a quarantined file directly on the infected computer, or by using the
Risk log in the Symantec Endpoint Protection console.
See Using the Risk log to delete quarantined files on your client computers on page 440.
Configure how Symantec By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection rescans items in the Quarantine when new
Endpoint Protection rescans definitions arrive. It automatically repairs and restores items silently. Typically you
items in the Quarantine when should keep the default setting, but you can change the rescan action based on your
new definitions arrive needs.
See Configuring how the Quarantine handles the rescanning of files after new
definitions arrive on page 439.
Specify how clients submit Symantec Endpoint Protection lets users submit infected or suspicious files and related
information about quarantined side effects to Symantec Security Response for further analysis. When users submit
items information, Symantec can refine its detection and repair.
You can enable signature-based detections in Quarantine to be forwarded from the

local Quarantine to an existing Central Quarantine Server. Reputation detections in
the local Quarantine cannot be sent to a Central Quarantine Server. You can configure
the client to forward items if you use a Central Quarantine Server in your security
network. The Central Quarantine Server can send the information to Symantec Security
Response. Information that clients submit helps Symantec determine if a detected
threat is real.
Files that are submitted to Symantec Security Response become the property of
Symantec Corporation. In some cases, files may be shared with the antivirus community.
If Symantec shares files, Symantec uses industry-standard encryption and may make
data anonymous to help protect the integrity of the content and your privacy.
See Configuring clients to submit quarantined items to a Central Quarantine Server

or Symantec Security Response on page 439.
Table 17-18 Managing the Quarantine (continued)
Task Description
Manage the storage of By default, the Quarantine stores backup, repaired, and quarantined files in a default
quarantined files folder. It automatically deletes files after 30 days.
You can manage the storage of quarantined items in the following ways:
Specify a local folder to store quarantined files.

You can use the default folder or a folder that you choose.
See Specifying a local Quarantine folder on page 437.
Specify when files are automatically deleted.
The Quarantine automatically deletes files after a specified number of days. You
can also configure the Quarantine to delete files when the folder where the files are
stored reaches a specified size. You can configure the settings individually for
repaired files, backup files, and quarantined files.
See Specifying when repaired files, backup files, and quarantined files are
automatically deleted on page 438.
Specifying a local Quarantine folder

If you do not want to use the default quarantine folder to store quarantined files on
client computers, you can specify a different local folder. You can use path expansion
by using the percent sign when you type the path. For example, you can type
%COMMON_APPDATA%. Relative paths are not allowed.
To specify a local Quarantine folder
1 On the Virus and Spyware Protection Policy page, under Windows Settings,
click Quarantine.
2 On the Miscellaneous tab, under Local Quarantine Options, click Specify
the quarantine folder.
3 In the text box, type the name of a local folder on the client computers. You
can use path expansion by using the percent sign when typing in the path. For
example, you can type %COMMON_APPDATA%, but relative paths are not
allowed.
4 If you are finished with the configuration for this policy, click OK.
Specifying when repaired files, backup files, and quarantined files

are automatically deleted
Symantec Endpoint Protection automatically deletes repaired files, backup files,
and quarantined files when they exceed a specified age. You can configure the
Quarantine to also delete files when the folder where they are stored reaches a
certain size. These options are in the Windows Settings menu.
You can use one of the settings, or you can use both together. If you set both types
of limits, then all files older than the time you have set are purged first. If the size
of the folder still exceeds the size limit that you set, then the oldest files are deleted
one by one. The files are deleted until the folder size falls below the specified limit.
To specify when repaired files, backup files, and quarantined files are automatically
deleted
1 In the console, open a Virus and Spyware Protection policy and under Windows
Settings, click Quarantine.
2 On the Cleanup tab, under Repaired files, check or uncheck Enable
automatic deleting of repaired files.
3 In the Delete after box, type a value or click an arrow to select the time interval
in days.
4 Check Delete oldest files to limit folder size at, and then type in the maximum
folder size, in megabytes. The default setting is 50 MB.
5 Under Backup Files, check or uncheck Enable automatic deleting of backup
files.
6 In the Delete after box, type or click an arrow to select the time interval in days.
7 Check Delete oldest files to limit folder size at, and then type the maximum
folder size, in megabytes. The default is 50 MB.
8 Under Quarantined Files, check or uncheck Enable automatic deleting of
quarantined files that could not be repaired.
9 In the Delete after box, type a value or click an arrow to select the time interval
in days.
10 Check Delete oldest files to limit folder size at, and then type in the maximum
folder size, in megabytes. The default is 50 MB.
Configuring clients to submit quarantined items to a Central

Quarantine Server or Symantec Security Response
In Symantec Endpoint Protection, you can configure clients to automatically submit
quarantine items to a Central Quarantine Server.
You can also let users on the client computers manually submit quarantine items
directly to Symantec Security Response.
Note: The Central Quarantine Server is not shipped with version 14.
To configure clients to submit quarantined items to a Central Quarantine Server

or Symantec Security Response
1 In the console, open a Virus and Spyware Protection policy and under Windows
Settings, click Quarantine.
2 Under Quarantined Items, do one or both of the following actions:
Check Allow client computers to automatically submit quarantined
items to a Quarantine Server.
Type the fully qualified domain name or IP address of the Quarantine Server.
Type the port number to use, and then select the number of seconds to
retry connecting.
Check Allow client computers to manually submit quarantined items
to Symantec Security Response.
3 Click OK.
Configuring how the Quarantine handles the rescanning of files after

new definitions arrive
You can configure the actions that you want to take when new definitions arrive on
client computers. By default, the client rescans items in the Quarantine and
automatically repairs and restores items silently. Typically, you should always use
this setting.
If you created an exception for a file or application in the Quarantine, Symantec
Endpoint Protection restores the file after new definitions arrive.
To configure how the Quarantine handles the rescanning of files after new
definitions arrive
1 In the console, open a Virus and Spyware Protection policy and click
Quarantine.
2 On the General tab, under When New Virus Definitions Arrive, click one of
the following options:
Automatically repair and restore files in Quarantine silently
Repair files in Quarantine silently without restoring
Prompt user
Do nothing
Using the Risk log to delete quarantined files on your client computers
You can use the Risk log in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
to delete quarantined files on your client computers. You run the Delete from
Quarantine command from the log for any quarantined file that you want to delete.
If Symantec Endpoint Protection detects risks in a compressed file, the compressed
file is quarantined as a whole. However, the Risk log contains a separate entry for
each file in the compressed file. To successfully delete all risks in a compressed
file, you must select all the files in the compressed file.
To use the Risk log to delete files from the Quarantine on your client computers
1 Click Monitors.
2 On the Logs tab, from the Log type list box, select the Risk log, and then click
View Log.
Select an entry in the log that has a file that has been quarantined.
Select all entries for files in the compressed file.
You must have all entries in the compressed file in the log view. You can
use the Limit option under Additional Settings to increase the number of
entries in the view.
4 From the Action list box, select Delete from Quarantine.

5 Click Start.
6 In the dialog box that appears, click Delete.

7 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click OK.
Managing the virus and spyware notifications that

appear on client computers
You can decide whether or not notifications appear on client computers for virus
and spyware events. You can customize messages about detections.
Table 17-19 Tasks for managing virus and spyware notifications that appear on
client computers
Task Description
Customize a scan detection For Windows and Linux client computers, you can configure a detection message
message for the following types of scans:
All types of Auto-Protect

Scheduled scans and on-demand scans
For scheduled scans, you can configure a separate message for each scan.
Note: If a process continually downloads the same security risk to a client computer,
Auto-Protect automatically stops sending notifications after three detections.
Auto-Protect also stops logging the event. In some situations, however, Auto-Protect
does not stop sending notifications and logging events. Auto-Protect continues to
send notifications and log events when the action for the detection is Leave alone
(log only).
For Mac client computers, you can configure a detection message that applies to
all scheduled scans, to on-demand scans, and to Auto-Protect detections. These
notification messages appear in the Mac OS X Notification Center. You cannot
customize the messages for Mac.


See Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Linux

client computers (continued)
Task Description
Change settings for user Applies to Windows client computers only.

notifications about Download
You can change the notifications that users receive about Download Insight
Insight detections
detections.
Change settings for user Applies to Windows client computers only.

notifications about SONAR
You can change the notifications that users receive about SONAR detections.
detections
Choose whether or not to display Applies to Windows client computers only.

the Auto-Protect results dialog
Applies to Auto-Protect for the file system only.

Set up Auto-Protect email Applies to Windows client computers only.

notifications
When Auto-Protect email scans find a risk, Auto-Protect can send email notifications
to alert the email sender and any other email address that you specify. You can
also insert a warning into the email message.
For Internet Email Auto-Protect, you can also specify that a notification appears
about scan progress when Auto-Protect scans an email.
See Customizing Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows computers on page 459.
Allow users to see scan progress Applies to Windows client computers only.
and start or stop scans
You can configure whether or not the scan progress dialog box appears. You can
configure whether or not users are allowed to pause or delay scans.
When you let users view scan progress, a link to the scan progress dialog appears
in the main pages of the client user interface. A link to reschedule the next
scheduled scan also appears.
See Allowing users to view scan progress and interact with scans on Windows
Configure warnings, errors, and Applies to Windows client computers only.

prompts
You can enable or disable several types of alerts that appear on client computers
about Virus and Spyware Protection events.
See Modifying log handling and notification settings on Windows computers

on page 466.
About the pop-up notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients
client computers (continued)
Task Description
Enable or disable popup Applies to clients that run on Windows 8.

notifications on the Windows 8
You can enable or disable the popup notifications that appear in the Windows 8
style user interface
style user interface for detections and other critical events.
See Enabling or disabling Symantec Endpoint Protection pop-up notifications that

appear on Windows 8 clients on page 444.
About the pop-up notifications that appear on

Windows 8 clients
On Windows 8 computers, pop-up notifications for malware detections and other
critical Symantec Endpoint Protection events appear on the Windows 8 style user
interface and the Windows 8 desktop. The notifications alert the user to an event
that occurred in either the Windows 8 style user interface or the Windows 8 desktop,
regardless of which interface the user is currently viewing.
You can enable or disable the pop-up notifications on your client computers.
Note: The Windows 8 configuration also includes settings to show or hide

notifications. Symantec Endpoint Protection pop-up notifications only appear if
Windows 8 is configured to show them. In the Windows 8 style user interface, the
Settings pane or the Change PC Settings option let you show or hide app
notifications. See the Windows 8 user documentation for more information.
If the user clicks a notification on the Windows 8 style user interface, the Windows
8 desktop appears. If the user clicks the notification on the Windows 8 desktop, the
notification disappears. For detections of malware or security risks, the user can
view information about the detections in the Detection Results dialog on the
Windows 8 desktop.
When Symantec Endpoint Protection notifies Windows 8 that it detected malware
or a security risk that affects a Windows 8 style app, an alert icon appears on the
app tile. When the user clicks the tile, the Windows App Store appears so that the
user can re-download the app.
See Enabling or disabling Symantec Endpoint Protection pop-up notifications that
appear on Windows 8 clients on page 444.
Enabling or disabling Symantec Endpoint Protection pop-up notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection handles detections on Windows 8

Enabling or disabling Symantec Endpoint Protection

pop-up notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients
By default pop-up notifications appear on the Windows 8 style user interface and
the Windows 8 desktop for malware detections and other critical Symantec Endpoint
Protection events.
The user can view the Windows desktop to see details about the event that produced
the notification. The user might need to take an action such as re-download an app.
In some cases, however, you might want to hide these pop-up notifications from
users. You can enable or disable this type of notification in the Symantec Endpoint
Protection configuration.
Note: The Windows 8 configuration also includes settings to show or hide

notifications. Symantec Endpoint Protection notifications only appear if Windows 8
is configured to show them. On the Windows 8 style user interface, the Settings
pane or the Change PC Settings option let you show or hide app notifications. See
the Windows 8 user documentation for more information.
To enable or disable Symantec Endpoint Protection notifications that appear on

Windows 8 clients
1 In the console, on the Clients tab, on the Policies tab, under Location-specific
settings, next to Client User Interface Control Settings, click Server Control.
2 Next to Server Control, click Customize.
3 In the Client User Interface Settings dialog, under General, check or uncheck
Enable Windows toast notifications.
4 Click OK.
See About the pop-up notifications that appear on Windows 8 clients on page 443.
Managing early launch anti-malware (ELAM)

detections
Early launch anti-malware (ELAM) provides protection for the computers in your
network when they start up and before third-party drivers initialize. Malicious software
can load as a driver or rootkits might attack before the operating system completely
Managing early launch anti-malware (ELAM) detections
loads and Symantec Endpoint Protection starts. Rootkits can sometimes hide
themselves from virus and spyware scans. Early launch anti-malware detects these
rootkits and bad drivers at startup.
Note: ELAM is only supported on Microsoft Windows 8 or later, and Windows Server
2012 or later.
Symantec Endpoint Protection provides an ELAM driver that works with the Windows
ELAM driver to provide the protection. The Windows ELAM driver must be enabled
for the Symantec ELAM driver to have any affect.
You use the Windows Group Policy editor to view and modify the Windows ELAM
settings. See your Windows documentation for more information.
Table 17-20 Managing ELAM detections
Task Description
View the status of ELAM on your client You can see whether Symantec Endpoint Protection ELAM is enabled in the
computers Computer Status log.
View ELAM detections You can view early launch anti-malware detections in the Risk log.
When Symantec Endpoint Protection ELAM is configured to report detections

of bad or bad critical drivers as unknown to Windows, Symantec Endpoint
Protection logs the detections as Log only. By default, Windows ELAM
allows unknown drivers to load.
Enable or disable ELAM You might want to disable Symantec Endpoint Protection ELAM to help
improve computer performance.
See Adjusting the Symantec Endpoint Protection early launch anti-malware

(ELAM) options on page 446.

Adjusting the Symantec Endpoint Protection early launch anti-malware (ELAM) options
Table 17-20 Managing ELAM detections (continued)
Task Description
Adjust ELAM detection settings if you The Symantec Endpoint Protection ELAM settings provide an option to treat
get false positives bad drivers and bad critical drivers as unknown. Bad critical drivers are the
drivers that are identified as malware but are required for computer startup.
You might want to select the override option if you get false positive
detections that block an important driver. If you block an important driver,
you might prevent client computers from starting up.
Note: ELAM does not support a specific exception for an individual driver.
The override option applies globally to ELAM detections.
See Adjusting the Symantec Endpoint Protection early launch anti-malware

(ELAM) options on page 446.
Run Power Eraser on ELAM detections In some cases, an ELAM detection requires Power Eraser. In those cases,
that Symantec Endpoint Protection a message appears in the log suggesting that you run Power Eraser. You
cannot remediate can run Power Eraser from the console. Power Eraser is also part of the
Symantec Help tool. You should run Power Eraser in rootkit mode.
See Starting Power Eraser analysis from Symantec Endpoint Protection


Adjusting the Symantec Endpoint Protection early

launch anti-malware (ELAM) options
Symantec Endpoint Protection provides an ELAM driver that works with the Microsoft
ELAM driver to provide protection for the computers in your network when they
start up. The settings are supported on Microsoft Windows 8 and Windows Server
2012.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection ELAM driver is a special type of driver that
initializes first and inspects other startup drivers for malicious code. When the driver
detects a startup driver, it determines whether the driver is good, bad, or unknown.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection driver then passes the information to Windows
to decide to allow or block the detected driver.
You cannot create exceptions for individual ELAM detections; however, you can
create a global exception to log all bad drivers as unknown. By default, unknown
drivers are allowed to load.
For some ELAM detections that require remediation, you might be required to run
Power Eraser. Power Eraser is part of the Symantec Help tool.
Configuring a site to use a private Insight server for reputation queries
Note: Auto-Protect scans any driver that loads.
To adjust the Symantec Endpoint Protection ELAM options

1 In the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console, on the Policies tab,
open a Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
2 Under Protection Technologies, select Early Launch Anti-Malware Driver.
3 Check or uncheck Enable Symantec early launch anti-malware.
The Windows ELAM driver must be enabled for this option to be enabled. You
use the Windows Group Policy editor or the registry editor to view and modify
the Windows ELAM settings. See your Windows documentation for more
information.
4 If you want to log the detections only, under Detection Settings, select Log
the detection as unknown so that Windows allows the driver to load.
5 Click OK.
Configuring a site to use a private Insight server for

reputation queries
Private Insight server settings let you direct client reputation queries to an intranet
server, if you have purchased and installed Symantec Insight for Private Clouds.
Symantec Insight for Private Clouds is typically installed in networks that lack Internet
connectivity. The private Insight server stores a copy of Symantec Insights reputation
database. Symantec Endpoint Protection reputation queries are handled by the
private Insight server rather than Symantecs Insight server.
The private server downloads the Symantec Insight data over an encrypted, secure
connection. You can manually update the Insight data or use third-party tools to
check for updates and download the data automatically. Your update method
depends on your network and the type of server on which you run Symantec Insight
for Private Clouds.
When you use a private Insight server, Symantec does not receive any queries or
submissions for file reputation.
Configuring client groups to use private servers for reputation queries and submissions
To configure a site to use a private Insight server for reputation queries

1 In the console, on the Admin page, select Servers.
2 Select the site, and then under Tasks, select Edit Site Properties.
3 On the Private Insight Server tab, make sure that you check Enable private
Insight server.
You must also enter the Name, Server URL, and Port number.
Note: If you change an existing Server URL to an invalid URL, clients use the
previously valid URL for the private Insight server. If the Server URL has never
been configured and you enter an invalid URL, clients use the default Symantec
Insight server.
At the next heartbeat, your clients start to use the specified private server for
reputation queries.
Configuring client groups to use private servers for

reputation queries and submissions
You can direct client reputation queries (Insight lookups) from a group to a private
intranet server. The private server can be the Symantec Advanced Threat Protection
appliance or the Symantec Insight for Private Clouds server that you purchase and
install separately in your network.
The following are the private server options for groups:
Symantec Advanced Threat Protection
Symantec ATP servers gather data about client detections and provide forensic
analysis. When you use a Symantec ATP server, Symantec Endpoint Protection
sends all reputation queries (lookups) and most types of client submissions to
Symantec ATP. Symantec ATP then sends the queries or submissions to
Symantec. Note that Symantec ATP receives antivirus, SONAR, and IPS
submissions, but it does not receive file reputation submissions. Symantec
Endpoint Protection always sends file reputation submissions directly to
Symantec.
Symantec Insight for Private Clouds
This option redirects the reputation queries from clients in the group to a private
Insight server. The private Insight server stores a copy of Symantec's Insight
reputation database. The private Insight server handles the reputation queries
rather than Symantecs Insight server. When you use a private Insight server,
clients continue to send submissions about detections to Symantec. Typically
you use a private Insight server in a dark network, which is a network that is
disconnected from the Internet. In that case, Symantec cannot receive any client
submissions.
You can also copy the private server configuration to other client groups.
You can specify multiple private servers to load balance network traffic. You can
also specify multiple groups of servers to manage failover.
When you choose to enable an ATP server, the ATP connection status appears in
the client user interface as well as the management console logs and reports. To
communicate with the ATP server, the Symantec Endpoint Protection client must
at a minimum run Virus and Spyware Protection.
Note: If you enable private servers for groups, 12.1.5 and earlier clients in those
groups cannot use Symantec servers if the designated private server is not available.
12.1.5 and earlier clients cannot use the priority list and must be configured to use
a single server.
To configure client groups to use a private server

1 In the console, go to Clients and select the group that should use the private
server list.
2 On the Policies tab, click External Communications Settings
3 On the Private Cloud tab, click Enable private servers to manage my data.
4 Depending on which type of server you use, click Use an Advanced Threat
Protection server for Insight lookups and submissions or Use a private
Insight server for Insight lookups.
You should not mix server types in the priority list.
5 Click Use Symantec servers when private servers are not available if you
want clients to use Symantec servers for reputation queries and client antivirus
and SONAR submissions.
Clients always send file reputation submissions to Symantec.
6 Under Private Servers, click Add > New Server.
7 In the Add Private Server dialog, select the protocol and then enter the host
name for the URL.
8 Specify the port number for the server.
9 To designate this server as the single server that 12.1.5 and earlier clients use,
click Use this server as the private Insight server for 12.1.5 clients and
earlier. The 12.1.5 and earlier clients cannot use a server list, so you must
specify which server these legacy clients should use.
10 To add a priority group, click Add > New Group.
11 To apply the settings to additional client groups, click Copy settings. Select
the groups and locations, and then click OK.
Chapter 18
Customizing scans
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Windows computers
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Mac computers
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Linux computers
Customizing Auto-Protect for Windows clients
Customizing Auto-Protect for Mac clients
Customizing Auto-Protect for Linux clients
Customizing Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows computers
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Windows

computers
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Mac computers
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Linux computers
Randomizing scans to improve computer performance in virtualized environments

on Windows clients
Modifying global scan settings for Windows clients
Modifying log handling and notification settings on Windows computers
Modifying log handling settings on Linux computers
Customizing Download Insight settings
Changing the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it makes a
detection
Customizing scans 452
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Windows computers
Allowing users to view scan progress and interact with scans on Windows
computers
Configuring Windows Security Center notifications to work with Symantec

Endpoint Protection clients
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on

Windows computers
You can customize options for administrator-defined scans (scheduled and
on-demand scans) that run on Windows computers. You can also customize options
for Auto-Protect.
Table 18-1 Customizing virus and spyware scans on Windows computers
Task Description
Customize Auto-Protect settings You can customize Auto-Protect in many ways, including the configuration
for the following settings:
The types of files that Auto-Protect scans

The actions that Auto-Protect takes when it makes a detection
The user notifications for Auto-Protect detections
You can also enable or disable the Scan Results dialog for Auto-Protect
scans of the file system.
See Customizing Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows computers

on page 459.
Customize administrator-defined scans You can customize the following types of options for scheduled and
on-demand scans.
Compressed files
Tuning options
Advanced schedule options
User notifications about detections

You can also customize scan actions.

Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Mac computers
Table 18-1 Customizing virus and spyware scans on Windows computers

(continued)
Task Description
Adjust ELAM settings You might want to enable or disable Symantec Endpoint Protection early
launch anti-malware (ELAM) detection if you think ELAM is affecting your
computers' performance. Or you might want to override the default detection
setting if you get many false positive ELAM detections.
Adjust Download Insight settings You might want to adjust the malicious file sensitivity to increase or decrease
the number of detections. You can also modify actions for detections and
user notifications for detections.
See Customizing Download Insight settings on page 467.
Customize scan actions You can change the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when
it makes a detection.
Customize global scan settings You might want to customize global scan settings to increase or decrease
the protection on your client computers.
Customize miscellaneous options for You can specify the types of risk events that clients send to Symantec
Virus and Spyware Protection Endpoint Protection Manager.

on page 466.

Mac computers
on-demand scans) that run on Mac computers. You can also customize options for
Auto-Protect.
Customizing the virus and spyware scans that run on Linux computers
Table 18-2 Customizing virus and spyware scans on Mac computers
Task Description
Customize Auto-Protect You can customize Auto-Protect settings for the clients that run on Mac computers.
Customize administrator-defined You can customize common settings and notifications as well as scan priority.
scans
You can also enable or disable a warning to alert the user when definitions are
out-of-date.


Linux computers
on-demand scans) that run on Linux computers. You can also customize options
for Auto-Protect.
Table 18-3 Customizing virus and spyware scans on Linux computers
Task Description
Customize Auto-Protect settings You can customize Auto-Protect in many ways, including the configuration
for the following settings:
The types of files that Auto-Protect scans

The actions that Auto-Protect takes when it makes a detection
The user notifications for Auto-Protect detections
You can also enable or disable the Scan Results dialog for Auto-Protect
scans of the file system.
Customize administrator-defined scans You can customize the following types of options for scheduled and
on-demand scans.
File and folder types

Compressed files
Security risks
Scheduling options
User notifications
You can also customize scan actions.

Table 18-3 Customizing virus and spyware scans on Linux computers

(continued)
Task Description
Customize scan actions You can change the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when
Customize miscellaneous options for You can specify the types of risk events that clients send to Symantec
Virus and Spyware Protection Endpoint Protection Manager.
See Modifying log handling settings on Linux computers on page 466.

You might want to customize Auto-Protect settings for Windows clients.
To configure Auto-Protect for Windows clients
2 Under Windows Settings, under Protection Technology, click Auto-Protect.
3 On the Scan Details tab, check or uncheck Enable Auto-Protect.
Note: If you disable Auto-Protect, Download Insight cannot function even if it

is enabled.
4 Under Scanning, under File types, select one of the following options:
Scan all files
This option is the default and is the most secure option.
Scan only selected extensions
You can improve scan performance by selecting this option, however, you
might decrease the protection on your computer.

6 Click Advanced Scanning and Monitoring to change options for the actions
that trigger Auto-Protect scans and how Auto-Protect handles scans of floppy
disks.
7 Click OK.
8 Under Network Settings, check or uncheck Scan files on remote computers

to enable or disable Auto-Protect scans of network files.
By default, Auto-Protect scans files on remote computers only when the files
are executed.
You might want to disable network scanning to improve scan and computer
performance.
9 When file scans on remote computers is enabled, click Network Settings to
modify network scanning options.
10 In the Network Settings dialog box, do any of the following actions:
Enable or disable Auto-Protect to trust files on the remote computers that
run Auto-Protect.
Configure network cache options for Auto-Protect scans.
11 Click OK.
12 On the Actions tab, set any of the options.
You can also set remediation options for Auto-Protect.
13 On the Notifications tab, set any of the notification options.
See Managing the virus and spyware notifications that appear on client
14 On the Advanced tab, set any of the following options:
Startup and shutdown
Reload options
15 Under Additional Options, click File Cache or Risk Tracer.

16 Configure the file cache or Risk Tracer settings, and then click OK.
on page 452.

You might want to customize Auto-Protect settings for the clients that run on Mac
computers.
To customize Auto-Protect for Mac clients

2 Under Mac Settings, under Protection Technology, click File System
Auto-Protect.
3 At the top of the Scan Details tab, click the lock icon to lock or unlock all
settings.
4 Check or uncheck any of the following options:
Enable File System Auto-Protect
Automatically repair infected files
Quarantine files that cannot be repaired
Scan compressed files
5 Under General Scan Details, specify the files that Auto-Protect scans.
Note: To exclude files from the scan, you must select Scan everywhere except
in specified folders, and then add an Exceptions policy to specify the files to
exclude.
6 Under Scan Mounted Disk Details, check or uncheck any of the available
options.
7 On the Notifications tab, set any of the notification options, and then click OK.
on page 453.
on page 441.

You might want to customize Auto-Protect settings for the clients that run on Linux
computers.
To customize Auto-Protect for Linux clients

2 Under Linux Settings, under Protection Technology, click Auto-Protect.
3 On the Scan Details tab, check or uncheck Enable Auto-Protect.
4 Under Scanning, under File types, click one of the following options:
Scan all files
This option is the default and is the most secure option.

6 Click Advanced Scanning and Monitoring to change options for the actions
that trigger Auto-Protect scans and how Auto-Protect handles scans of
compressed files.
7 Click OK.
8 Under Network Settings, check or uncheck Scan files on remote computers
to enable or disable Auto-Protect scans of network files.
By default, Auto-Protect scans files on remote computers only when the files
are executed.
You might want to disable network scanning to improve scan and computer
performance.
You can also set remediation options for Auto-Protect.
10 On the Notifications tab, set any of the notification options.
11 On the Advanced tab, check or uncheck Enable the cache. Set a cache size
or accept the default.
12 Click OK.
on page 454.
Customizing Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows computers
on page 441.
Customizing Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows

computers
You can customize Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows computers.
To customize Auto-Protect for email scans on Windows computers
2 Under Windows Settings, select one of the following options:
Internet Email Auto-Protect
Microsoft Outlook Auto-Protect
Lotus Notes Auto-Protect
3 On the Scan Details tab, check or uncheck Enable Internet Email

Auto-Protect.
4 Under Scanning, under File types, select one of the following options:
Scan all files
This option is the default and most secure option.
5 Check or uncheck Scan files inside compressed files.

7 On the Notifications tab, under Notifications, check or uncheck Display a
notification message on the infected computer. You can also customize
the message.
8 Under Email Notifications, check or uncheck any of the following options:
Insert a warning into the email message
Send email to the sender
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Windows computers
Send email to others

You can customize the message text and include a warning. For Internet Email
Auto-Protect you must also specify the mail server.
9 For Internet Email Auto-Protect only, on the Advanced tab, under Encrypted
Connections, enable or disable encrypted POP3 or SMTP connections.
10 Under Mass Mailing Worm Heuristics, check or uncheck Outbound worm
heuristics.
on page 452.
on page 441.
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients

that run on Windows computers
You might want to customize scheduled or on-demand scans for the clients that
run on Windows computers. You can set options for scans of compressed files and
optimize the scan for computer or scan performance.
To customize an administrator-defined scan for the clients that run on Windows
computers
2 Under Windows Settings, click Administrator-defined scans.
Under Scheduled Scans, select the scheduled scan that you want to
customize, or create a new scheduled scan.
Under Administrator On-demand Scan, click Edit.
4 On the Scan Details tab, select Advanced Scanning Options:

On the Compressed Files tab, you can reduce the number of levels to
scan compressed files. If you reduce the number of levels, you might
improve client computer performance.
On the Tuning tab, change the tuning level for the best client computer
performance or the best scan performance.
Click OK to save changes.
5 On the Scan Details tab, you can enable or disable Insight Lookup for legacy
12.1.x clients only.
6 For scheduled scans only, on the Schedule tab, set any of the following options:
Scan Duration
You can set how long the scan runs before it pauses and waits until the
client computer is idle. You can also randomize scan start time.
Missed Scheduled Scans
You can specify a retry interval for missed scans.
7 On the Actions tab, change any detection actions.

8 On the Notifications tab, enable or disable a notification that appears on client
computers when the scan makes a detection.
9 Click OK.
on page 452.

that run on Mac computers
You customize scheduled scans and on-demand scans separately. Some of the
options are different.
To customize a scheduled scan that runs on Mac computers
2 Under Mac Settings, select Administrator-Defined Scans.
3 Under Scheduled Scans, select the scheduled scan that you want to
For a new scan, you can create a new scan manually, or create a scheduled
scan from a template.
4 On the Scan Details tab, under Scan drives and folders, select the items
that you want to scan.
5 You can also enable or disable idle-time scans. Enabling the option improves
computer performance; disabling the option improves scan performance.
6 Click OK.
Edit the scan details for any other scan that is included in this policy.
7 On the Notifications tab, enable or disable notification messages about scan
detections. The setting applies to all scheduled scans that you include in this
policy.
8 On the Common Settings tab, set any of the following options:
Scan Options
Actions
Alerts
These options apply to all scheduled scans that you include in this policy.
9 Click OK.
To customize the on-demand scans that run on Mac computers
1 On the Virus and Spyware Protection Policy page, under Mac Settings, select
Administrator-Defined Scans.
2 Under Administrator On-demand Scan, click Edit.
3 On the Scan Details tab, under Scan drives and folders, select the items
that you want to scan.
You can also specify actions for scan detections and enable or disables scans
of compressed files.
4 On the Notifications tab, enable or disable notifications for detections.
You can also specify the message that appears on the client.
5 Click OK.
on page 453.
on page 441.
Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Linux computers

that run on Linux computers
You might want to customize scheduled or on-demand scans for the clients that
run on Linux computers. You can set options for scans of compressed files and
optimize the scan for computer or scan performance.
To customize an administrator-defined scan for the clients that run on Linux
computers
2 Under Linux Settings, click Administrator-defined scans.
Under Scheduled Scans, select the scheduled scan that you want to
Under Administrator On-demand Scan, click Edit.
4 On the Scan Details tab, check Scan all folders or specify the particular
folders you want to scan.
5 Click Scan all files or Scan only selected extensions and specify the
extensions you want to scan.
6 On the Scan files inside compressed files choice, you can reduce the number
of levels to scan compressed files. If you reduce the number of levels, you
might improve client computer performance.
7 Check or uncheck Scan for security risks.
8 For scheduled scans only, on the Schedule tab, set any of the following options:
Scanning schedule
You can set how often the scan runs, on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
Missed Scheduled Scans
You can specify a retry interval for missed scans.
9 On the Actions tab, change any detection actions.

Randomizing scans to improve computer performance in virtualized environments on Windows clients
10 On the Notifications tab, enable or disable a notification that appears on client

computers when the scan makes a detection.
11 Click OK.
on page 454.
on page 441.
Randomizing scans to improve computer performance

in virtualized environments on Windows clients
You can randomize scheduled scans to improve performance on Windows client
computers. Randomization is important in virtualized environments.
For example, you might schedule scans to run at 8:00 P.M. If you select a four-hour
time interval, scans on client computers start at a randomized time between 8:00
P.M. and 12:00 A.M.
To randomize scans to improve computer performance in virtualized environments
3 Create a new scheduled scan or select an existing scheduled scan to edit.
4 In the Add Scheduled Scan or Edit Scheduled Scan dialog box, click the
Schedule tab.
5 Under Scanning Schedule, select how often the scan should run.
6 Under Scan Duration, check Scan for up to and select the number of hours.
The number of hours controls the time interval during which scans are
randomized.
7 Make sure that you enable Randomize scan start time within this period
(recommended in VMs).
8 Click OK.
9 Make sure that you apply the policy to the group that includes the computers
that run Virtual Machines.

You can customize global settings for the scans that run on Windows client
computers. You might want to modify these options to increase security on your
client computers.
Note: If you increase the protection on your client computers by modifying these
options, you might affect client computer performance.

on page 452.
To modify global scan settings for Windows clients
2 Under Windows Settings, click Global Scan Options.
3 Configure any of the following options:
Insight Insight allows scans to skip the files that Symantec

trusts as good (more secure) or that the community
trusts as good (less secure).
Bloodhound Bloodhound isolates and locates the logical regions

of a file to detect a high percentage of unknown
viruses. Bloodhound then analyzes the program
logic for virus-like behavior. You can specify the
level of sensitivity for detection.
Password for mapped network Specifies whether or not clients prompt users for
drives a password when the client scans network drives.
4 Click OK.
Modifying log handling and notification settings on Windows computers
Modifying log handling and notification settings on

Windows computers
Each Virus and Spyware Protection policy includes the options that apply to all virus
and spyware scans that run on Windows client computers.
You can set the following options:
Specify a default URL that Symantec Endpoint Protection uses when it repairs
a security risk that changed a browser home page.
Specify Risk log handling options.
Warn users when definitions are out-of-date or missing.
Exclude virtual images from Auto-Protect or administrator-defined scans.
To modify log handling and notification settings on Windows computers
2 Under Windows Settings, click Miscellaneous.
Specify options for Internet Browser Protection.
3 On the Log Handling tab, set options for event filtering, log retention, and log
aggregation.
4 On the Notifications tab, configure global notifications.
on page 452.
5 Click OK.
on page 441.
Modifying log handling settings on Linux computers

Each Virus and Spyware Protection policy includes log handling settings that apply
to all virus and spyware scans that run on Linux client computers.
To log handling settings Linux computers
2 Under Linux Settings, click Miscellaneous.
3 On the Log Handling tab, set options for event filtering, log retention, and log
aggregation.

You might want to customize Download Insight settings to decrease false positive
detections on client computers. You can change how sensitive Download Insight
is to the file reputation data that it uses to characterize malicious files. You can also
change the notifications that Download Insight displays on client computers when
on page 452.
To customize Download Insight settings
1 In the console, open a Virus and Spyware Protection policy and select
Download Protection.
2 On the Download Insight tab, make sure that Enable Download Insight to
detect potential risks in downloaded files based on file reputation is
checked.
If Auto-Protect is disabled, Download Insight cannot function even if it is
enabled.
3 Move the slider for malicious file sensitivity to the appropriate level.
If you set the level higher, Download Insight detects more files as malicious
and fewer files as unproven. Higher settings, however, return more false
positives.
4 Check the following options to use as additional criteria for examining unproven
files:
Files with x or fewer users
Files known by users for x or fewer days
When unproven files meet this criteria, Download Insight detects the files as
malicious.
5 Make sure that Automatically trust any file downloaded from a trusted
Internet or intranet site is checked.
6 On the Actions tab, under Malicious Files, specify a first action and a second
action.
7 Under Unproven Files, specify the action.
Changing the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it makes a detection
8 On the Notifications tab, specify whether or not to display a message on client

computers when Download Insight makes a detection.
You can also customize the text of a warning message that appears when a
user allows a file that Download Insight detects.
9 Click OK.
Changing the action that Symantec Endpoint

Protection takes when it makes a detection
You can configure the action or actions that scans should take when they make a
detection. Each scan has its own set of actions, such as Clean, Quarantine, Delete,
or Leave alone (log only).
On Windows clients and Linux clients, each detection category can be configured
with a first action and a second action in case the first action is not possible.
By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection tries to clean a file that a virus infected.
If Symantec Endpoint Protection cannot clean a file, it performs the following actions:
Moves the file to the Quarantine on the infected computer and denies any access
to the file.
Logs the event.
By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection moves any files that security risks infect
into the Quarantine.
If you set the action to log only, by default if users create or save infected files,
Symantec Endpoint Protection deletes them.
On Windows computers, you can also configure remediation actions for administrator
scans, on-demand scans, and Auto-Protect scans of the file system.
You can lock actions so that users cannot change the action on the client computers
that use this policy.
Warning: For security risks, use the Delete action with caution. In some cases,
deleting security risks causes applications to lose functionality. If you configure the
client to delete the files that security risks affect, it cannot restore the files.
To back up the files that security risks affect, use the Quarantine action instead.
Changing the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it makes a detection
To change the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it makes a
detection on Windows or Linux clients
1 In the Virus and Spyware Protection policy, under Windows Settings or Linux
Settings, select the scan (any Auto-Protect scan, administrator scan, or
on-demand scan).
2 On the Actions tab, under Detection, select a type of malware or security risk.
By default, each subcategory is automatically configured to use the actions
that are set for the entire category.
Note: On Windows clients, the categories change dynamically over time as

Symantec gets new information about risks.
3 To configure actions for a subcategory only, do one of the following actions:

Check Override actions configured for Malware, and then set the actions
for that subcategory only.
Note: There might be a single subcategory under a category, depending

on how Symantec currently classifies risks. For example, under Malware,
there might be a single subcategory called Viruses.
Check Override actions configured for Security Risks, and then set the
actions for that subcategory only.
4 Under Actions for, select the first and second actions that the client software
takes when it detects that category of virus or security risk.
For security risks, use the Delete action with caution. In some cases, deleting
security risks causes applications to lose functionality.
5 Repeat these steps for each category for which you want to set actions (viruses
and security risks).
6 When you finish configuring this policy, click OK.
To change the action that Symantec Endpoint Protection takes when it makes a
detection on Mac clients
1 In the Virus and Spyware Protection policy, under Mac Settings, select
Administrator-Defined Scans.
For scheduled scans, select the Common Settings tab.
Allowing users to view scan progress and interact with scans on Windows computers
For on-demand scans, on the Scans tab, under Administrator On-demand

Scan, click Edit.
3 Under Actions, check either of the following options:

Automatically repair infected files
Quarantine files that cannot be repaired
4 For on-demand scans, click OK.

5 When you finish configuring this policy, click OK.
on page 452.
on page 453.
on page 454.
See Checking the scan action and rescanning the identified computers on page 393.
Allowing users to view scan progress and interact

with scans on Windows computers
You can configure whether or not the scan progress dialog box appears on Windows
client computers. If you allow the dialog box to appear on client computers, users
are always allowed to pause or delay an administrator-defined scan.
When you allow users to view scan progress, a link appears in the main pages of
the client UI to display scan progress for the currently running scan. A link to
reschedule the next scheduled scan also appears.
When you allow users to view scan progress, the following options appear in the
main pages of the client UI:
When a scan runs, the message link scan in progress appears.
The user can click the link to display the scan progress.
A link to reschedule the next scheduled scan also appears.
You can allow users to stop a scan entirely. You can also configure options for how
users pause or delay scans.
Allowing users to view scan progress and interact with scans on Windows computers
You can allow the user to perform the following scan actions:
Pause When a user pauses a scan, the Scan Results dialog box remains open
and waits for the user to either continue or abort the scan. If the
computer is turned off, the paused scan does not continue.
Snooze When a user snoozes a scheduled scan, the user has the option of
snoozing the scan for one hour or three hours. The number of snoozes
is configurable. When a scan snoozes, the Scan Results dialog box
closes; it reappears when the snooze period ends and the scan
resumes.
Stop When a user stops a scan, the scan usually stops immediately. If a user
stops a scan while the client software scans a compressed file, the
scan does not stop immediately. In this case, the scan stops as soon
as the compressed file has been scanned. A stopped scan does not
restart.
A paused scan automatically restarts after a specified time interval elapses.
Note: Users can stop a Power Eraser analysis but cannot pause or snooze it.
You can click Help for more information about the options that are used in this
procedure.
To allow users to view scan progress and interact with scans on Windows computers
3 On the Advanced tab, under Scan Progress Options, click Show scan
progress or Show scan progress if risk detected.
4 To automatically close the scan progress indicator after the scan completes,
check Close the scan progress window when done.
5 Check Allow user to stop scan.
6 Click Pause Options.
7 In the Scan Pause Options dialog box, do any of the following actions:
To limit the time that a user may pause a scan, check Limit the time the
scan may be paused, and then type a number of minutes. The range is 3
to 180.
To limit the number of times a user may delay (or snooze) a scan, in the
Maximum number of snooze opportunities box, type a number between
1 and 8.
Configuring Windows Security Center notifications to work with Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
By default, a user can delay a scan for one hour. To change this limit to
three hours, check Allow users to snooze the scan for 3 hours.
8 Click OK.
Configuring Windows Security Center notifications

to work with Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
You can use a Virus and Spyware Protection policy to configure Windows Security
Center settings on your client computers that run Windows XP Service Pack 3.
Note: You can configure all the Windows Security Center options on your client
computers that run Windows XP SP3 only. You can only configure the Display a
Windows Security Center message when definitions are outdated option or
Windows Vista and Windows 7 and later.
Table 18-4 Options to configure how Windows Security Center works with the
client
Option Description When to use
Disable Windows Security Lets you permanently or temporarily Disable Windows Security Center
Center disable Windows Security Center on your permanently if you do not want your client
client computers. users to receive the security alerts that it
provides. Client users can still receive
Available options:
Symantec Endpoint Protection alerts.
Never. Windows Security Center is
always enabled on the client computer. Enable Windows Security Center
permanently if you want your client users
Once. Windows Security Center is
to receive the security alerts that it
disabled only once. If a user enables
provides. You can set Windows Security
it, it is not disabled again.
Center to display Symantec Endpoint
Always. Windows Security Center is
Protection alerts.
permanently disabled on the client
computer. If a user enables it, it is
immediately disabled.
Restore. Windows Security Center is
enabled if the Virus and Spyware
Protection Policy previously disabled
it.
Configuring Windows Security Center notifications to work with Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
Table 18-4 Options to configure how Windows Security Center works with the
client (continued)
Option Description When to use
Display antivirus alerts Lets you set antivirus alerts from the Enable this setting if you want your users
within Windows Security Symantec Endpoint Protection client to to receive Symantec Endpoint Protection
Center appear in the Windows notification area. alerts with other security alerts in the
Windows notification area of their
computers.
Display a Windows Security Lets you set the number of days after Set this option if you want Windows
Center message when which Windows Security Center considers Security Center to notify your client users
definitions are outdated definitions to be outdated. By default, about outdated definitions more frequently
Windows Security Center sends this than the default time (30 days).
message after 30 days.
Note: On client computers, Symantec
Endpoint Protection checks every 15
minutes to compare the out-of-date time,
the date of the definitions, and the current
date. Typically, no out-of-date status is
reported to Windows Security Center
because definitions are usually updated
automatically. If you update definitions
manually you might have to wait up to 15
minutes to view an accurate status in
Windows Security Center.
To configure Windows Security Center to work with Symantec Endpoint Protection

clients
2 Under Windows Settings, click Miscellaneous.
3 On the Miscellaneous tab, specify options for the Windows Security Center.
4 Click OK.
Chapter 19
Managing the information
that the management
server and clients send to
Symantec
Understanding server data collection and client submissions and their importance
to the security of your network
Managing the anonymous or non-anonymous data that clients send to Symantec
How Symantec Endpoint Protection minimizes the impact of client submissions

on your network bandwidth
Specifying a proxy server for client submissions and other external

communications
Understanding server data collection and client

submissions and their importance to the security of
your network
By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection clients and Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager submit some types of anonymous information to Symantec. Clients can
also send non-anonymous data to Symantec to get customized analysis. You can
control whether or not your clients or Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager submit
information.
Managing the information that the management server and clients send to Symantec 475
Understanding server data collection and client submissions and their importance to the security of your network
Both server data and client submissions are critical to improving the security of your
network.
What is server data collection?
What are anonymous client submissions?
What are non-anonymous client submissions?
Concerns about privacy
Concerns about bandwidth usage
Manually submitting files to Symantec
What is server data collection?

Server data is part of the information that helps Symantec measure and improve
the efficacy of detection technologies.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager submits the following types of anonymous
information to Symantec:
Licensing information, which includes the name, version, language, and licensing
entitlement data
Usage of Symantec Endpoint Protection protection features
Information about Symantec Endpoint Protection configuration. The information
includes operating system information, server hardware and software
configuration, CPU size, memory size, and software version and features for
installed packages
You can change the server submissions setting during installation, or change the
setting on the server's Site Properties > Data Collection tab in the console.
Note: Symantec always recommends that you keep server data collection enabled.
For more information about privacy, see the following document:

Privacy statement
What are anonymous client submissions?

Symantec Endpoint Protection clients automatically submit anonymous information
about detections, network, and configuration to Symantec Security Response.
Symantec uses this anonymous information to address new and changing threats
as well as to improve product performance.
The detection information that clients send includes information about antivirus
detections, intrusion prevention, SONAR, and file reputation detections.
Understanding server data collection and client submissions and their importance to the security of your network
Note: Mac client submissions do not include SONAR or file reputation submissions.
Linux clients do not support any client submissions.
The anonymous information that clients send to Symantec benefits you by:
Increasing the security of your network
Optimizing product performance
In some cases, however, you might want to prevent your clients from submitting
some information. For example, your corporate policies might prevent your client
computers from sending any network information to outside entities. You can disable
a single type of submission, such as submission of network information, rather than
disabling all types of client submissions.
Note: Symantec recommends that you always keep client submissions enabled.
Disabling submissions might interfere with faster resolution of false positive
detections on the applications that are used exclusively in your organization. Without
information about the malware in your organization, product response and Symantec
response to threats might take longer.

See the section called File reputation submissions on page 435.
What are non-anonymous client submissions?

You can choose to submit non-anonymous client information to Symantec. This
type of information provides insight into your security challenges that helps Symantec
recommend customized solutions.
You should use this option only if you participate in a Symantec-sponsored
program that provides you custom analysis.
The option is disabled by default.
Concerns about privacy

Symantec makes every attempt to anonymize the client submission data.
Only suspicious executable files are submitted.
Managing the anonymous or non-anonymous data that clients send to Symantec
User names are removed from path names.

Computers and enterprises are identified by unique anonymized values.
IP addresses are used for geographic location and then discarded.
For more information about privacy, see the following document:
Privacy statement
Concerns about bandwidth usage

Symantec Endpoint Protection minimizes the impact of client submissions on your
network bandwidth.
You can check the Client Activity log to view the types of submissions that your
client computers send and to monitor bandwidth usage.
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection minimizes the impact of client submissions
on your network bandwidth on page 478.
Manually submitting files to Symantec

You can manually submit a file from the Quarantine to Symantec.
See Configuring clients to submit quarantined items to a Central Quarantine Server
or Symantec Security Response on page 439.
Managing the anonymous or non-anonymous data

that clients send to Symantec
Symantec Endpoint Protection can protect computers by submitting information
about detections to Symantec. Symantec uses this information to address new and
changing threats. Any data you submit improves Symantec's ability to respond to
threats and customize protection for your computers. Symantec recommends that
you choose to submit as much detection information as possible.
Client computers submit information anonymously about detections. You can specify
the types of detections for which clients submit information.
Note: Mac client submissions do not include SONAR or file reputation submissions.
Linux clients do not support any client submissions.
How Symantec Endpoint Protection minimizes the impact of client submissions on your network bandwidth
To change client submission settings

1 In the console, select Clients then click the Policies tab.
2 In the Settings pane, click External Communications Settings.
3 Select the Client Submissions tab.
4 Enable or disable the Send anonymous data to Symantec to receive
enhanced threat protection intelligence option.
5 Select More options if you want to enable or disable specific submission types,
such as file reputation.
6 If you participate in a Symantec-sponsored custom analysis program, select
Send client-identifiable data to Symantec for custom analysis.
Warning: This option sends non-anonymous information to Symantec. Only

use this option if you participate in a Symantec-sponsored program and want
to share client-identifiable data with Symantec.
7 Select OK.
Note: On Mac clients, you can also disable IPS ping submissions. See the following
article:
How to disable IPS data submission on Symantec Endpoint Protection for Mac
clients
How Symantec Endpoint Protection minimizes the

impact of client submissions on your network
bandwidth
Symantec Endpoint Protection throttles client computer submissions to minimize
any effect on your network. Symantec Endpoint Protection throttles submissions in
the following ways:
Client computers only send samples when the computer is idle. Idle submission
helps randomize the submissions traffic across the network.
Client computers send samples for unique files only. If Symantec has already
seen the file, the client computer does not send the information.
Specifying a proxy server for client submissions and other external communications
Symantec Endpoint Protection uses a Submission Control Data (SCD) file.

Symantec publishes the SCD file and includes it as part of a LiveUpdate package.
Each Symantec product has its own SCD file.
The SCD file controls the following settings:
How many submissions a client can submit in one day
How long to wait before the client software retries submissions
How many times to retry failed submissions
Which IP address of the Symantec Security Response server receives the
submission
If the SCD file becomes out-of-date, then clients stop sending submissions.
Symantec considers the SCD file out-of-date when a client computer has not
retrieved LiveUpdate content in 7 days. The client stops sending submissions after
14 days.
If clients stop the transmission of the submissions, the client software does not
collect the submission information and send it later. When clients start to transmit
submissions again, they only send the information about the events that occur after
the transmission restart.
Specifying a proxy server for client submissions and

other external communications
You can configure Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to use a proxy server
for submissions and other external communications that your Windows clients use.
Note: If your client computers use a proxy with authentication, you might need to
specify exceptions for Symantec URLs in your proxy server configuration. The
exceptions let your client computers communicate with Symantec Insight and other
important Symantec sites.
You need to include exceptions for Symantec URLs in your proxy server settings
if you use the following proxy configuration options:
You use a proxy server with authentication.
You select Use a proxy server specified by my client browser option in the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager External Communication Dialog.
Specifying a proxy server for client submissions and other external communications
You use auto-detection or auto-configuration in your browser's Internet Options.

You do not have to specify exceptions for Symantec URLs in your proxy server
settings if you do not use auto-detection or auto-configuration. You should select
Use custom proxy settings in the External Communication dialog and then
specify the authentication settings.
To specify a proxy server for client submissions and other external communications
1 In the console, on the Clients page, select the group and then click Policies.
2 Under Settings or Location-specific Settings, click External
Communications.
3 On the Proxy Server (Windows) tab, under HTTPS Proxy Configuration,
select Use custom proxy settings.
4 Enter the information about the proxy server that your clients use. See the
online Help for more information about the options.
5 Click OK.
For information about the recommended exceptions, see the following articles:
Required exclusions for proxy servers to allow Symantec Endpoint Protection
to connect to Symantec reputation and licensing servers
Chapter 20
Managing SONAR and
Tamper Protection
About SONAR
Managing SONAR
Handling and preventing SONAR false positive detections
Adjusting SONAR settings on your client computers
Monitoring SONAR detection results to check for false positives
Changing Tamper Protection settings
About SONAR
SONAR is a real-time protection that detects potentially malicious applications when
they run on your computers. SONAR provides "zero-day" protection because it
detects threats before traditional virus and spyware detection definitions have been
created to address the threats.
SONAR uses heuristics as well as reputation data to detect emerging and unknown
threats. SONAR provides an additional level of protection on your client computers
and complements your existing Virus and Spyware Protection, intrusion prevention,
Generic Exploit Mitigation, and firewall protection
SONAR uses a heuristics system that leverages Symantec's online intelligence
network with proactive local monitoring on your client computers to detect emerging
threats. SONAR also detects changes or behavior on your client computers that
you should monitor.
Managing SONAR and Tamper Protection 482
About SONAR
Note: Auto-Protect also uses a type of heuristic that is called Bloodhound to detect
suspicious behavior in files.
SONAR might inject some code into the applications that run in Windows user mode
to monitor them for suspicious activity. In some cases, the injection might affect the
application performance or cause problems with running the application. You can
create an exception to exclude the file, folder, or application from this type of
monitoring.
SONAR does not make detections on application type, but on how a process
behaves. SONAR acts on an application only if that application behaves maliciously,
regardless of its type. For example, if a Trojan horse or keylogger does not act
maliciously, SONAR does not detect it.
SONAR detects the following items:
Heuristic threats SONAR uses heuristics to determine if an unknown file

behaves suspiciously and might be a high risk or low risk. It
also uses reputation data to determine whether the threat is
a high risk or low risk.
System changes SONAR detects applications or the files that try to modify
DNS settings or a host file on a client computer.
Trusted applications that Some good trusted files might be associated with suspicious
exhibit bad behavior behavior. SONAR detects these files as suspicious behavior
events. For example, a well-known document sharing
application might create executable files.
If you disable Auto-Protect, you limit SONAR's ability to make detections of high
and low risk files. If you disable Insight lookups (reputation queries), you also limit
the SONAR's detection capability.
Note: SONAR does not inject code into applications on computers that run Symantec
Endpoint Protection earlier than 12.1.2. If you use Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager 12.1.2 or later to manage clients, a SONAR file exception in an Exceptions
policy is ignored on those legacy clients. If you use a legacy Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager to manage clients, the legacy policy does not support SONAR
file exceptions for your Symantec Endpoint Protection 12.1.2 clients. You can
prevent SONAR code injection into applications on these clients, however, by
creating an Application to monitor exception in the legacy policy. After the client
learns the application, you can configure an application exception in the policy.

Managing SONAR
Managing SONAR
SONAR is part of Proactive Threat Protection on your client computers and the
Virus and Spyware Protection policy in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Table 20-1 Managing SONAR
Task Description
Learn how SONAR works Learn how SONAR detects unknown threats. Information about how SONAR
works can help you make decisions about using SONAR in your security
network.
Check that SONAR is enabled To provide the most complete protection for your client computers you should
enable SONAR. SONAR interoperates with some other Symantec Endpoint
Protection features. SONAR requires Auto-Protect.
You can use the Clients tab to check whether Proactive Threat Protection is
enabled on your client computers.
Check the default settings for SONAR SONAR settings are part of a Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
See About the default Virus and Spyware Protection policy scan settings
on page 414.
Make sure that Insight lookups are SONAR uses reputation data in addition to heuristics to make detections. If
enabled you disable Insight lookups, SONAR makes detections by using heuristics
only. The rate of false positives might increase, and the protection that SONAR
provides is limited.
You enable or disable Insight Lookups in the Submissions dialog.
Monitor SONAR events to check for You can use the SONAR log to monitor events.
false positive detections
You can also view the SONAR Detection Results report (under Risk Reports)
to view information about detections.
See Monitoring SONAR detection results to check for false positives

on page 488.

Managing SONAR
Table 20-1 Managing SONAR (continued)
Task Description
Adjust SONAR settings You can change the detection action for some types of threats that SONAR
detects. You might want to change the detection action to reduce false positive
detections.
You also might want to enable or disable notifications for high or low risk
heuristic detections.
See Handling and preventing SONAR false positive detections on page 485.
Prevent SONAR from detecting the SONAR might detect the files or applications that you want to run on your client
applications that you know are safe computers. You can use an Exceptions policy to specify exceptions for the
specific files, folders, or applications that you want to allow. For the items that
SONAR quarantines, you can create an exception for the quarantined item
from the SONAR log.
You also might want to set SONAR actions to log and allow detections. You
can use application learning so that Symantec Endpoint Protection learns the
legitimate applications on your client computers. After Symantec Endpoint
Protection learns the applications that you use in your network, you can change
the SONAR action to Quarantine.
Note: If you set the action for high risk detections to log only, you might allow
potential threats on your client computers.
See Handling and preventing SONAR false positive detections on page 485.
Prevent SONAR from examining some In some cases an application might become unstable or cannot run when
applications SONAR injects code into the application to examine it. You can create a file,
folder, or application exception for the application.
Manage the way SONAR detects the You can use the SONAR policy settings to globally adjust the way SONAR
applications that make DNS or host handles detections of DNS or host file changes. You can use the Exceptions
file changes policy to configure exceptions for specific applications.
See Creating an exception for an application that makes a DNS or host file
change on page 548.
Handling and preventing SONAR false positive detections
Table 20-1 Managing SONAR (continued)
Task Description
Allow clients to submit information Symantec recommends that you enable submissions on your client computers.
about SONAR detections to Symantec The information that clients submit about detections helps Symantec address
threats. The information helps Symantec create better heuristics, which results
in fewer false positive detections.
Handling and preventing SONAR false positive

detections
SONAR might make false positive detections for certain internal custom applications.
Also, if you disable Insight lookups, the number of false positives from SONAR
increases.
You can change SONAR settings to mitigate false positive detections in general.
You can also create exceptions for a specific file or a specific application that SONAR
detects as a false positive.
Warning: If you set the action for high risk detections to log only, you might allow
potential threats on your client computers.
Table 20-2 Handling SONAR false positives
Task Description
Log SONAR high risk heuristic You might want to set detection action for high risk heuristic detections to
detections and use application learning Log for a short period of time. Let application learning run for the same period
of time. Symantec Endpoint Protection learns the legitimate processes that
you run in your network. Some true detections might not be quarantined,
however.
See Configuring the management server to collect information about the

applications that the client computers run on page 319.
After the period of time, you should set the detection action back to
Quarantine.
Note: If you use aggressive mode for low risk heuristic detections, you
increase the likelihood of false positive detections. Aggressive mode is
disabled by default.
Create exceptions for SONAR to allow You can create exceptions for SONAR in the following ways:
safe applications
Use the SONAR log to create an exception for an application that was
detected and quarantined
You can create an exception from the SONAR log for false positive
detections. If the item is quarantined, Symantec Endpoint Protection
restores the item after it rescans the item in the Quarantine. Items in the
Quarantine are rescanned after the client receives updated definitions.
See Creating exceptions from log events on page 549.
See Configuring how the Quarantine handles the rescanning of files
after new definitions arrive on page 439.
Use an Exceptions policy to specify an exception for a particular file name,
folder name, or application.
You can exclude an entire folder from SONAR detection. You might want
to exclude the folders where your custom applications reside.

You might want to change the SONAR actions to reduce the rate of false positive
detections. You might also want to change the SONAR actions to change the
number of detection notifications that appear on your client computers.
To adjust SONAR settings on your client computers

1 In the Virus and Spyware Protection policy, select SONAR.
2 Make sure that Enable SONAR is checked.
Note: When SONAR is enabled, Suspicious Behavior Detection automatically

turns on. You cannot turn off Suspicious Behavior Detection when SONAR is
enabled.
3 Under Scan Details, change the actions for high or low risk heuristic threats.
You can enable aggressive mode for low risk detections. This setting increases
SONAR sensitivity to low risk detections. It might increase the false positive
detections.
4 Optionally change the settings for the notifications that appear on your client
computers.
5 Under System Change Events, change the action for either DNS change
detected or Host file change detected.
Note: The Prompt action might result in many notifications on your client
computers. Any action other than Ignore might result in many log events in
the console and email notifications to administrators.
Warning: If you set the action to Block, you might block important applications
on your client computers.
For example, if you set the action to Block for DNS change detected, you
might block VPN clients. If you set the action to Block for Host file change
detected, you might block your applications that need to access the host file.
You can use a DNS or host file change exception to allow a specific application
to make DNS or host file changes.
change on page 548.
6 Under Suspicious Behavior Detection, you can change the action for high
or low risk detections.
If SONAR is disabled, you can also enable or disable Suspicious Behavior
Detection.
7 Click OK.
Monitoring SONAR detection results to check for false positives

Monitoring SONAR detection results to check for false

positives
The client collects and uploads SONAR detection results to the management server.
The results are saved in the SONAR log.
To determine which processes are legitimate and which are security risks, look at
the following columns in the log:
Event The event type and the action that the client has taken on the process,
such as cleaning it or logging it. Look for the following event types:
A possible legitimate process is listed as a Potential risk found

event.
A probable security risk is listed as a Security risk found event.
Application The process name.
Application type The type of malware that a SONAR scan detected.
File/Path The path name from where the process was launched.
The Event column tells you immediately whether a detected process is a security
risk or a possible legitimate process. However, a potential risk that is found may or
may not be a legitimate process, and a security risk that is found may or may not
be a malicious process. Therefore, you need to look at the Application type and
File/Path columns for more information. For example, you might recognize the
application name of a legitimate application that a third-party company has
developed.
To monitor SONAR detection results to check for false positives
1 In the console, click Monitors > Logs.
2 On the Logs tab, in the Log type drop-down list, click SONAR.
3 Select a time from the Time range list box closest to when you last changed
a scan setting.
4 Click Additional Settings.
5 In the Event type drop-down list, select one of the following log events:
To view all detected processes, make sure All is selected.
To view the processes that have been evaluated as security risks, click
Security risk found.
To view the processes that have been evaluated and logged as potential
risks, click Potential risk found.
6 Click View Log.

7 After you identify the legitimate applications and the security risks, create an
exception for them in an Exceptions policy.
You can create the exception directly from the SONAR Logs pane.

Tamper Protection provides real-time protection for Symantec applications that run
on servers and clients. It prevents non-Symantec processes such as worms, Trojan
horses, viruses, and security risks, from affecting Symantec resources. You can
configure the client to block or log attempts to modify Symantec resources. You
can create exceptions for the applications that Tamper Protection detects.
Tamper Protection settings are configured globally for a selected group.
To change Tamper Protection settings
2 On the Policies tab, under Settings, click General Settings.
3 On the Tamper Protection tab, check or uncheck Protect Symantec security
software from being tampered with or shut down.
4 In the list box under Actions to take if an application attempts to tamper
with or shut down Symantec security software, select one of the log actions.
5 Click OK.
See Creating a Tamper Protection exception on Windows clients on page 547.
Chapter 21
Managing application
control, device control, and
system lockdown
About application control, system lockdown, and device control
Setting up application control
Enabling and testing default application rules
About the structure of an Application Control and Device Control policy
Adding custom rules to Application Control
Testing application control rules
Configuring system lockdown
Managing device control
About application control, system lockdown, and

device control
To monitor and control the behavior of applications on client computers, you use
application control and system lockdown. Application control allows or blocks the
defined applications that try to access system resources on a client computer.
System lockdown allows only approved applications on client computers. To manage
hardware devices that access client computers, you use device control.
Managing application control, device control, and system lockdown 491
About application control, system lockdown, and device control
Warning: Application control and system lockdown are advanced security features
that only experienced administrators should configure.
You use application control, system lockdown, and device control for the following
tasks.
Application control Prevent malware from taking over applications.

Restrict the applications that can run.
Prevent users from changing configuration files.
Protect specific registry keys.
Protect particular folders, such as \WINDOWS\system.
You configure application control and device control using

an Application and Device Control policy.
System lockdown Control the applications on your client computers.

Block almost any Trojan horse, spyware, or malware that
tries to run or load itself into an existing application.
System lockdown ensures that your system stays in a known

and trusted state.
Note: If you do not implement system lockdown carefully, it
can cause serious problems in your network. Symantec
recommends that you implement system lockdown in specific
stages.
You configure system lockdown in the Policies tab on the

Clients page.
Device control Block or allow different types of devices that attach to

client computers, such as USB, infrared, and FireWire
devices.
Block or allow serial ports and parallel ports.
See Managing device control on page 528.
Both application control and device control are supported on 32-bit and 64-bit
Windows computers.
As of 14, Mac computers support device control.

Application control allows or blocks the defined applications that try to access system
resources on a client computer. You can allow or block access to certain registry
keys, files, and folders. You can also define which applications are allowed to run,
which applications that cannot be terminated through irregular processes, and which
applications can call DLLs.
Use the following steps to set up application control on a group of client computers.
Table 21-1 Setting up application control
Steps Description
Open a policy and enable default Application Control policies contain predefined rule sets, which are disabled
application control rule sets by default. You can enable any sets that you need, and apply the policy to
a group. The predefined rule sets are configured in production mode rather
than test mode. However, you should change the setting to test mode and
test the rules in your test network before you apply them to your production
network.
See Enabling and testing default application rules on page 493.
Add additional application control rules If the default rule sets do not meet your requirements, add new rule sets and
(optional) rules. Typically only advanced administrators should perform this task.
Add exceptions for applications Application control injects code in some applications to examine them, which
can slow applications that run on the computer. If necessary, you can exclude
some applications from application control. You use an Exceptions policy to
add file exceptions or folder exceptions for application control.

Table 21-1 Setting up application control (continued)
Steps Description
View the Application Control logs If you are testing a new policy or are troubleshooting an issue, you should
monitor application control events in the log.
In both test mode and production mode, application control events are in the
Application Control log in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. On the
client computer, application control and device control events appear in the
Control log.
You might see duplicate or multiple log entries for a single application control
action. For example, if explorer.exe tries to copy a file, it sets the write and
delete bits of the file's access mask. Symantec Endpoint Protection logs the
event. If the copy action fails because an application control rule blocks the
action, explorer.exe tries to copy the file by using only the delete bit in the
access mask. Symantec Endpoint Protection logs another event for the copy
attempt.
Prevent or allow users from enabling or In rare cases, application control might interfere with some safe applications
disabling application control (optional) that run on client computers. You might want to allow users to disable this
option to troubleshoot problems. In the mixed mode or client mode, use the
Allow user to enable and disable the application device control setting
in the Client User Interface Settings dialog.

on page 248.
You can also use system lockdown to allow approved applications or block
unapproved applications on the client computers.

Application control includes default rule sets that are made up of one or more rules.
Default application control rule sets are installed with the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. The default rule sets are disabled at installation. To use the
default rule sets in an Application Control policy, you must enable them and apply
the policy to a group of clients.
For a description of the common predefined rules, see: Hardening Symantec
Endpoint Protection (SEP) with an Application and Device Control Policy to increase
security
In the following task you can enable and test the Block writing to USB drives rule
set.
To enable a default application rule set
1 In the console, click Policies > Application and Device Control, and under
Tasks, click Add an Application Control Policy.
2 In the Overview pane, type a name and description for the policy.
3 Click Application Control.
4 In the Application Control pane, check the Enabled check box next to each
rule set that you want to implement.
For example, next to the Block writing to USB drives rule set, check the
check box in the Enabled column.
5 To review the rules for the rule set, select the rule, click Edit, and then click
OK.
6 Change Production to Test (log only).
7 Assign the policy to a group, and click OK.
To test the rule set Block writing to USB drives
1 On the client computer, attach a USB drive.
2 Open Windows Explorer and double-click the USB drive.
3 Right-click the window and click New > Folder.
If application control is in effect, an Unable to create folder error message
appears.
See About the structure of an Application Control and Device Control policy
on page 494.
About the structure of an Application Control and

Device Control policy
The Application and Device Control policy has two parts:
Application Control contains one or more rule sets. Each rule set contains one
or more rules. You configure properties, conditions, and actions for each rule:
Rules define the application(s) that you want to monitor.
Conditions monitor specified operations for the application(s) defined in the

rule. The condition also contains the actions to take when the specified
operation is observed.
As you add the rules and conditions, you need to specify the specific
properties of the condition and what actions to take when the condition is
met. Each condition type has different properties.
Device control consists of a list of blocked devices and a list of devices that are
excluded from blocking. You can add to these two lists and manage their
contents.
Figure 21-1 illustrates the application and device control components and how they
relate to each other.
Figure 21-1 Application and Device Control policy structure

If the default rule sets do not meet your requirements, add new rule sets and rules.
You can also modify the predefined rule sets that are installed with the policy.
The rule set is the container that holds one or more rules that allows or blocks
an action.
The rules in the rule sets define one or more processes or applications. You
can also exclude a process from being monitored.
Each rule includes the conditions and the actions that apply to a given process
or processes. For each condition, you can configure actions to take when the
condition is met. You configure rules to apply to only certain applications, and
you can optionally configure them to exclude other applications from having the
action applied.
See About the structure of an Application Control and Device Control policy
on page 494.
Use the following steps to add your own application rules:
Step 1: Add custom rule sets and rules
Step 2: Define the application or process for the rule
Step 3: Add conditions and actions to a rule
Step 4: Test the rules before you apply them to your production network.
See Testing application control rules on page 503.
Step 1: Add custom rule sets and rules

A best practice is to create a rule set that includes all of the actions that allow, block,
and monitor a given task. On the other hand, you should create multiple rule sets
if you have multiple tasks. For example, if you wanted to block write attempts to all
removable drives and also block applications from tampering with a specific
application, you should create two rules sets. You add and enable as many rule
sets and rules as you need.
For example, BitTorrent is a communications protocol that is used for peer-to-peer
file sharing and is not secure. BitTorrent distributes movies, games, music, and
other files. BitTorrent is one of the simplest methods to distribute threats. Malware
is hidden inside the files that are shared on peer-to-peer networks. You can use
application control to block access to the BitTorrent protocol. You can also use
peer-to-peer authentication and intrusion prevention. See Blocking a remote
computer by configuring peer-to-peer authentication on page 574.
Consider the order of the rules and their conditions when you configure them to
avoid unexpected consequences. Typically only advanced administrators should
perform this task.
See Best practices for adding application control rules on page 499.
To add custom rule sets and rules
1 Open an Application Control policy.
See Enabling and testing default application rules on page 493.
2 In the Application Control panel, under the list of default rule sets, click Add.
To modify a predefined rule set, select it and then click Edit. For example, to
monitor the applications that access the BitTorrent protocol, select Block
programs from running from removable drives [AC2].
3 In the Add Application Control Rule Set dialog box, type a name and
description for the rule set.
4 Under Rules, select Rule 1, and on the Properties tab, type a meaningful
name and description for the rule.
To add an additional rule, click Add > Add Rule.
Step 2: Define the application or process for the rule

Each rule must have at least one application or process that it monitors on the client
computer. You can also exclude certain applications from the rule. .
To define the application or process for the rule
1 With the rule selected, on the Properties tab, next to Apply this rule to the
following processes, click Add.
2 In the Add Process Definition dialog box, type the application name or process
name, such as bittorrent.exe.
If you apply the rule to all applications except for a given set of applications,
then define a wildcard for all (*) in this step. Then list the applications that need
to be exceptions next to Do not apply this rule to the following processes.
3 Click OK.
The Enable this rule check box is enabled by default. If you uncheck this option,
the rule does not apply.
Step 3: Add conditions and actions to a rule

The conditions control the behavior of the application or process that attempts to
run on the client computer. Each condition type has its own properties to specify
what the condition looks for.
Each condition has its own specific actions to take on the process when the condition
is true. Except for the Terminate process action, the actions always apply to the
process that you define for the rule, and not the condition.
Warning: The Terminate process action terminates the caller process, or the
application that made the request. The caller process is the process that you define
in the rule and not the condition. The other actions act on the target process, defined
in the condition.
See Best practices for choosing which condition to use for a rule on page 501.
Condition Description
Registry Access Attempts Allows or blocks access to a client computer's registry settings.
File and Folder Access Allows or blocks access to defined files or folders on a client
Attempts computer.
Launch Process Attempts Allows or blocks the ability to launch a process on a client
computer.
Terminate Process Allows or blocks the ability to terminate a process on a client

Attempts computer. For example, you may want to block a particular
application from being stopped.
Warning: The Terminate Process Attempt condition refers
to the target process. If you use the Terminate Process
Attempts condition on Symantec Endpoint Protection or
another important process and then use the Terminate
process action to kill the process that tries to kill Symantec
Load DLL Attempts Allows or blocks the ability to load a DLL on a client computer.
To add conditions and actions to a rule

1 Under Rules, select the rule you added, click Add > Add Condition, and
choose a condition.
For example, click Launch Process Attempts to add a condition for when the
client computer accesses the BitTorrent protocol.
2 On the Properties tab, select the process that should or should not be
launched:
To specify a process to launch:
Next to Apply to the following entity, click Add.

To exclude a process from being launched:
Next to Do not apply to the following processes, click Add.
3 In the Add entity Definition dialog box, type process name, DLL, or registry
key.
For example, to add BitTorrent, type its file path and executable, such as:
C:\Users\UserName\AppData\Roaming\BitTorrent
To apply a condition to all processes in a particular folder, a best practice is to

use folder_name\* or folder_name\*\*. One asterisk includes all the files and
folders in the named folder. Use folder_name\*\* to include every file and folder
in the named folder plus every file and folder in every subfolder.
4 Click OK.
5 On the Actions tab for the condition, select an action to take.
For example, to block Textpad if it tries to launch Firefox, click Block access.
6 Check Enable logging and Notify user, and add a message you want the
client computer user to see.
For example, type Textpad tries to launch Firefox.
7 Click OK.
The new rule set appears and is configured for test mode. You should test new
rule sets before you apply them to your client computers.
Best practices for adding application control rules

You should plan your custom application control rules carefully. When you add
application control rules, keep in mind the following best practices.
Table 21-2 Best practices for application control rules
Best practice Description Example
Consider the rule order Application control rules work similarly to You want to prevent all users from moving,
most network-based firewall rules in that copying, and creating files on USB drives.
both use the first rule match feature. When
You have an existing rule with a condition
multiple conditions are true, the first rule is
that allows write access to a file named
the only one that is applied unless the
Test.doc. You add a second condition to
action that is configured for the rule is to
this existing rule set to block all USB
Continue processing other rules.
drives. In this scenario, users are still able
to create and modify a Test.doc file on USB
drives. The Allow access to Test.doc
condition comes before the Block access
to USB drives condition in the rule set. The
Block access to USB drives condition
does not get processed when the condition
that precedes it in the list is true.
Use the right action The Terminate Process Attempts Process Explorer is a tool that displays the
condition allows or blocks an application's DLL processes that have opened or
ability to terminate the calling process on loaded, and what resources the processes
a client computer. use.
The condition does not allow or prevent You might want to terminate Process
users from stopping an application by the Explorer when it tries to terminate a
usual methods, such as clicking Quit from particular application.
the File menu.
Use the Terminate Process Attempts
condition and the Terminate process
action to create this type of rule. You apply
the condition to the Process Explorer
application. You apply the rule to the
application or applications that you do not
want Process Explorer to terminate.
Use one rule set per goal Create one rule set that includes all of the You want to block write attempts to all
actions that allow, block, or monitor a given removable drives and you want to block
task. applications from tampering with a
particular application.
To accomplish these goals, you should

create two different rule sets instead of one
rule set.
Table 21-2 Best practices for application control rules (continued)
Best practice Description Example
Use the Terminate process The Terminate process action kills the You want to terminate Winword.exe any
action sparingly calling process when the process meets time that any process launches
the configured condition. Winword.exe.
Only advanced administrators should use You create a rule and configure it with the
the Terminate process action. Typically, Launch Process Attempts condition and
you should use the Block access action the Terminate process action. You apply
instead. the condition to Winword.exe and apply
the rule to all processes.
You might expect this rule to terminate

Winword.exe, but that is not what the rule
does. If you try to start Winword.exe from
Windows Explorer, a rule with this
configuration terminates Explorer.exe, not
Winword.exe. Users can still run
Winword.exe if they launch it directly.
Instead, use the Block access action,
which blocks the target process, or
Winword.exe.
Test rules before you put The Test (log only) option for rule sets The test option reduces potential accidents
them into production logs the actions, and does not apply to the you might make by not considering all
actions to the client computer. Run rules possibilities of the rule.
in test mode for some acceptable period
See Testing application control rules
of time before you switch them back to
on page 503.
production mode. During this time period,
review the Application Control logs and
verify that the rules work as planned.

Best practices for choosing which condition to use for a rule

You add custom application control rules and conditions to prevent users from
opening applications, writing to files, or sharing files. You can look at the default
rule sets to help determine how to set up your rules. For example, you can edit the
Block applications from running rule set to view how you might use a Launch
Process Attempts condition.
Table 21-3 Typical conditions to use for a rule
Rule Condition
Prevent users from opening an You can block an application when it meets either of these conditions:
application
Launch Process Attempts
For example, to prevent users from transferring FTP files, you can add
a rule that blocks a user from launching an FTP client from the command
prompt.
Load DLL Attempts
For example, if you add a rule that blocks Msvcrt.dll on the client
computer, users cannot open Microsoft WordPad. The rule also blocks
any other application that uses the DLL.
Prevent users from writing to a particular You may want to let users open a file but not modify the file. For example,
file a file may include the financial data that employees should view but not edit.
You can create a rule to give users read-only access to a file. For example,
you can add a rule that lets you open a text file in Notepad but does not let
you edit it.
Use the File and Folder Access Attempts condition for this type of rule.
Block file shares on Windows computers You can disable local file and print sharing on Windows computers.
Include the following conditions:
Registry Access Attempts

Add all the relevant Windows security and sharing registry keys.
Launch Process Attempts
Specify the server service process (svchost.exe).
Load DLL Attempts
Specify the DLLs for the Security and Sharing tabs (rshx32.dll, ntshrui.dll).
Load DLL Attempts
Specify the server service DLL (srvsvc.dll).
You set the action for each condition to Block access.
You can also use firewall rules to prevent or allow client computers to share
files.
See Permitting clients to browse for files and printers in the network
on page 362.
Table 21-3 Typical conditions to use for a rule (continued)
Rule Condition
Prevent users from running peer-to-peer You can prevent users from running peer-to-peer applications on their
applications computers.
You can create a custom rule with a Launch Process Attempts condition.
In the condition, you must specify all peer-to-peer applications that you want
to block, such as LimeWire.exe or *.torrent. You can set the action for the
condition to Block access.
Use an Intrusion Prevention policy to block network traffic from peer-to-peer

applications. Use a Firewall policy to block the ports that send and receive
peer-to-peer application traffic.
Block write attempts to DVD drives Currently, application control does not have a default rule that blocks CD/DVD
writing directly. Instead, you create a rule that blocks the specific DLLs that
write to CD or DVD drives using the Add Condition and File and Folder
Access Attempts conditions.
You should also create a Host Integrity policy that sets the Windows registry
key to block write attempts to DVD drives.
See: How to block CD/DVD Writing in Windows 7

After you add application control rules, you should test them in your network.
Configuration errors in the rule sets that are used in an Application Control policy
can disable a computer or a server. The client computer can fail, or its
communication with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager can be blocked. After
you test the rules, apply them to your production network.
Step 1: Set the rule set to test mode

You test rule sets by setting the mode to test mode. Test mode creates a log entry
to indicate when rules in the rule set would be applied without actually applying the
rule.
Default rules use production mode by default. Custom rules use test mode by
default. You should test both default and custom rules sets.
You might want to test rules within the set individually. You can test individual rules
by enabling or disabling them in the rule set.
Changing a rule set to test mode

1 In the console, open an Application and Device Control policy.
2 Under Application Control Policy, click Application Control.
3 In the Application Control Rule Sets list, click the drop-down arrow in the
Test/Production column for the rule set, and click Test (log only).
Step 2: Apply the Application and Device Control policy to

computers in your test network
If you created a new Application and Device Control policy, apply the policy to
clients in your test network.
Step 3: Monitor the Application Control log

After you run your rule sets in test mode for a period of time, check the logs for any
errors. In both test mode and production mode, application control events are in
the Application Control log in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. On the client
computer, application control and device control events appear in the Control log.
You might see duplicate or multiple log entries for a single application control action.
For example, if explorer.exe tries to copy a file, it sets the write and delete bits of
the file's access mask. Symantec Endpoint Protection logs the event. If the copy
action fails because an application control rule blocks the action, explorer.exe tries
to copy the file by using only the delete bit in the access mask. Symantec Endpoint
Protection logs another event for the copy attempt.
Step 4: Change the rule set back to production mode

When the rules function like you expect them to, change the rule set back to
production mode.

System lockdown controls applications on a group of client computers by blocking
unapproved applications. You can set up system lockdown to allow only applications
on a specified list (whitelist). The whitelist includes all the approved applications;
any other applications are blocked on client computers. Or, you can set up system
lockdown to block only applications on a specified list (blacklist). The blacklist
comprises all the unapproved applications; any other applications are allowed on
client computers.
Note: Any applications that system lockdown allows are subject to other protection
features in Symantec Endpoint Protection.
A whitelist or blacklist can include file fingerprint lists and specific application names.
A file fingerprint list is a list of file checksums and computer path locations.
You can use an Application and Device Control policy to control specific applications
instead of or in addition to system lockdown.
You set up system lockdown for each group or location in your network.
Table 21-4 System lockdown steps
Action Description
Step 1: Create file fingerprint lists You can create a file fingerprint list that includes the applications that are
allowed or not allowed to run on your client computers. You use the file
fingerprint list as part of a whitelist or blacklist in system lockdown.
When you run system lockdown, you need a file fingerprint list that includes
all of the applications you want to whitelist or blacklist. For example, your
network might include Windows Vista 32-bit, Windows Vista 64-bit, and
Windows XP SP2 clients. You can create a file fingerprint list for each client
image that you want to whitelist.
You can create a file fingerprint list in the following ways:
Symantec Endpoint Protection provides a checksum utility to create a file

fingerprint list. The utility is installed along with Symantec Endpoint
Protection on the client computer.
Use the utility to create a checksum for a particular application or all the
applications in a specified path. Use this method to generate file fingerprints
to use when you run system lockdown in blacklist mode.
See Creating a file fingerprint list with checksum.exe on page 511.
Create a file fingerprint list on a single computer or small group of computers
using the Collect File Fingerprint List command.
In 12.1.6 or later, you can run the Collect File Fingerprint List command
from the console. The command collects a file fingerprint list that includes
every application on the targeted computers. For example, you might run
the command on a computer that runs a gold image. You can use this
method when you run system lockdown in whitelist mode. Note that the file
fingerprint list that you generate with the command cannot be modified.
When you re-run the command, the file fingerprint list is automatically
updated.
Create a file fingerprint list with any third-party checksum utility.
Note: In 12.1.6 or later, if you run Symantec ATP in your network, you might
see file fingerprint lists from Symantec ATP.
See Interaction between system lockdown and Symantec ATP blacklist rules
on page 515.
Table 21-4 System lockdown steps (continued)
Action Description
Step 2: Import file fingerprint lists into Before you can use a file fingerprint list in the system lockdown configuration,
Symantec Endpoint Protection the list must be available in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Manager
When you create file fingerprint lists with a checksum tool, you must manually
import the lists into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
See Importing or merging file fingerprint lists in Symantec Endpoint Protection

When you create a file fingerprint list with the Collect File Fingerprint List
command, the resulting list is automatically available in the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager console.
You can also export existing file fingerprint lists from Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
Step 3: Create application name lists You can use any text editor to create a text file that includes the file names of
for approved or unapproved the applications that you want to whitelist or blacklist. Unlike file fingerprint
applications lists, you import these files directly into the system lockdown configuration.
After you import the files, the applications appear as individual entries in the
system lockdown configuration.
You can also manually enter individual application names in the system
lockdown configuration.
Note: A large number of named applications might affect client computer
performance when system lockdown is enabled in blacklist mode.
See Creating an application name list to import into the system lockdown
Action Description
Step 4: Set up and test the system In test mode, system lockdown is disabled and does not block any applications.
lockdown configuration All unapproved applications are logged but not blocked. You use the Log
Unapproved Applications Only option in the System Lockdown dialog to
test the entire system lockdown configuration.
To set up and run the test, complete the following steps:
Add file fingerprint lists to the system lockdown configuration.

In whitelist mode, the file fingerprints are approved applications. In blacklist
mode, the file fingerprints are unapproved applications.
Add individual application names or import application name lists into the
system lockdown configuration.
You can import a list of application names rather than enter the names one
by one in the system lockdown configuration. In whitelist mode, the
applications are approved applications. In blacklist mode, the applications
are unapproved applications.
Run the test for a period of time.
Run system lockdown in test mode long enough so that clients run their
usual applications. A typical time frame might be one week.
See Setting up and testing the system lockdown configuration before you
enable system lockdown on page 521.
Step 5: View the unapproved After you run the test for a period of time, you can check the list of unapproved
applications and modify the system applications. You can view the list of unapproved applications by checking the
lockdown configuration if necessary status in the System Lockdown dialog box.
The logged events also appear in the Application Control log.
You can decide whether to add more applications to the file fingerprint or the
applications list. You can also add or remove file fingerprint lists or applications
if necessary before you enable system lockdown.
Action Description
Step 6: Enable system lockdown By default, system lockdown runs in whitelist mode. You can configure system
lockdown to run in blacklist mode instead.
When you enable system lockdown in whitelist mode, you block any application
that is not on the approved applications list. When you enable system lockdown
in blacklist mode, you block any application that is on the unapproved
applications list.
Note: Make sure that you test your configuration before you enable system
lockdown. If you block a needed application, your client computers might be
unable to restart.
See Running system lockdown in whitelist mode on page 524.
See Running system lockdown in blacklist mode on page 525.

Action Description
Step 7: Update file fingerprint lists for Over time, you might change the applications that run in your network. You
system lockdown can update your file fingerprint lists or remove lists as necessary.
You can update file fingerprint lists in the following ways:
Manually append, replace, or merge file fingerprint lists that you imported.
You cannot append file fingerprint lists to a fingerprint list that you generate
with the Collect File Fingerprint List command. You can append an imported
list with a command-generated list. In that case, if you re-run the fingerprint
command, you must recreate the appended list.
See Manually updating a file fingerprint list in Symantec Endpoint Protection
See Importing or merging file fingerprint lists in Symantec Endpoint
Automatically update existing file fingerprint lists that you imported.
You can also automatically update applications or the application name
lists that you import.
See Automatically updating whitelists or blacklists for system lockdown
on page 517.
Re-run the Collect File Fingerprint List command to automatically update
a command-generated fingerprint list.
When you re-run the command, the new list automatically replaces the
existing list.
Note: You might want to re-test the entire system lockdown configuration if
you add client computers to your network. You can move new clients to a
separate group or test network and disable system lockdown. Or you can keep
system lockdown enabled and run the configuration in log-only mode. You can
also test individual file fingerprints or applications as described in the next step.
Action Description
Step 8: Test selected items before you After system lockdown is enabled, you can test individual file fingerprints,
add or remove them when system application name lists, or specific applications before you add or remove them
lockdown is enabled to the system lockdown configuration.
You might want to remove file fingerprint lists if you have many lists and no
longer use some of them.
Note: Be careful when you add or remove a file fingerprint list or a specific
application from system lockdown. Adding or removing items from system
lockdown can be risky. You might block important applications on your client
computers.
Test selected items.

Use the Test Before Removal to log specific file fingerprint lists or specific
applications as unapproved.
When you run this test, system lockdown is enabled but does not block
any selected applications or any applications in the selected file fingerprint
lists. Instead, system lockdown logs the applications as unapproved.
Check the Application Control log.
The log entries appear in the Application Control log. If the log has no
entries for the tested applications, then you know that your clients do not
use those applications.
See Testing selected items before you add or remove them when system
lockdown is already enabled on page 526.
Creating a file fingerprint list with checksum.exe

You can use the checksum.exe utility to create a file fingerprint list. The list contains
the path and the file name and corresponding checksum for each executable file
or DLL that resides in a specified path on the computer. The utility is installed with
Symantec Endpoint Protection on the client computer.
You then import the file fingerprint list into Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
to use in your system lockdown configuration.
You can also use a third-party utility or the Collect File Fingerprint List command
to create a file fingerprint list.
To create a file fingerprint list with checksum.exe
1 Open a command prompt window on the computer that contains the image for
which you want to create a file fingerprint list.
The computer must have Symantec Endpoint Protection client software installed.
2 Navigate to the folder that contains the file checksum.exe. Typically, the file is
located in the following folder:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection\
3 Type the following command:
checksum.exe\ outputfile path
where outputfile is the name of the text file that contains the checksums for all
the applications that are located on the specified drive. The output file is a text
file (outputfile.txt).
The format of each line is checksum_of_the_file space
full_pathname_of_the_exe_or_DLL.
Note: To run a checksum against all files on the C: drive, you must add the
backslash at the end of the command. Otherwise, the command only runs in
the folder where checksum.exe is located.
An example of checksum.exe output is shown here:
0bb018fad1b244b6020a40d7c4eb58b7 c:\dell\openmanage\remind.exe
35162d98c2b445199fef95e838feae4b c:\dell\pnp\m\co\HSFCI008.dll
2f276c59243d3c051547888727d8cc78 c:\Nokia Video Manager\QtCore4.dll
Example syntax
The following is an example of the syntax you could use to create a fingerprint list
for an image:
checksum.exe cdrive.txt c:
This command creates a file that is called cdrive.txt. It contains the checksums and
file paths of all the executables and DLLs found on the C drive of the client computer
on which it was run.
The following is an example of the syntax that you could use to create a fingerprint
for a folder on the client computer:
checksum.exe blocklist.txt c:\Files
This command creates a file that is called blocklist.txt. It contains the checksums
and file paths of any executables and DLLs found in the Files folder.
Importing or merging file fingerprint lists in Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager
File fingerprint lists must be available in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console so that you can add them to the system lockdown configuration. When you
create file fingerprint lists with the checksum.exe utility or a third-party checksum
tool, you must manually import the lists. You can also merge file fingerprint lists.
File fingerprint lists that you create with the Collect File Fingerprint List command
are automatically available in the console. You do not need to import them. You
cannot modify file fingerprint lists that you created with the Collect File Fingerprint
List command. You can, however, merge a command-generated file fingerprint list
with another file fingerprint list. If you run the command again to re-generate the
list, you must manually merge the lists again.
Importing or merging file fingerprint lists
2 Under Policies, expand Policy Components, and then click File Fingerprint
Lists.
3 Under Tasks, click Add a File Fingerprint List.
4 In the Welcome to the Add File Fingerprint Wizard, click Next.
5 In the Information about New File Fingerprint panel, type a name and
description for the new list.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Create a File Fingerprint panel, select one of the following options:
Create the file fingerprint by importing a file fingerprint file
Create the file fingerprint by combining multiple existing file
fingerprints
This option is only available if you have already imported multiple file
fingerprint lists.
8 Click Next.
Specify the path to the file fingerprint that you created. You can browse to
find the file.
Select the fingerprint lists that you want to merge.
10 Click Next.
11 Click Close.
12 Click Finish.
The imported or merged fingerprint list appears under on the Policies tab under
Policies > Policy Components > File Fingerprint Lists.
Manually updating a file fingerprint list in Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager
You might want to update your file fingerprint lists after you run system lockdown
for a while. You can append, replace, or remove entries in an existing file fingerprint
list that you imported. You cannot directly edit any existing file fingerprint list in
If you want to merge fingerprint lists into a new list with a different name, use the
Add a File Fingerprint Wizard.
If you create a fingerprint list with the Collect File Fingerprint List command, you
cannot append, replace, or remove the entries. You can, however, append a
command-generated list to an imported list. If you re-run the command, you must
manually update the fingerprint list again.
You cannot modify any file fingerprint list that Symantec ATP sends to Symantec
To update a file fingerprint list in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
2 Under Policies, expand Policy Components, and then click File Fingerprint
Lists.
3 In the File Fingerprint Lists pane, select the fingerprint list that you want to
edit.
4 Click Edit.
5 In the Edit File Fingerprint Wizard, click Next.
Click Append a fingerprint file to this file fingerprint to add a new file to
an existing one.
Click Append another file fingerprint to this file fingerprint to merge file
fingerprint lists that you already imported.
Click Replace an existing list with a new one.
Click Remove any fingerprints that also appear on a new list.

Click Browse to locate the file or type the full path of the file fingerprint list
that you want to append, replace, or remove.
Select the file fingerprints that you want to merge.
8 Click Next > Close > Finish.
Interaction between system lockdown and Symantec ATP blacklist

rules
If your network includes Symantec ATP, you might see blacklists in the system
lockdown configuration from Symantec ATP.
Symantec ATP blacklists interact with the system lockdown configuration in the
following ways:
When Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager receives a blacklist rule from
Symantec ATP, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager enables system
lockdown in blacklist mode for all domains and groups.
The blacklist rule appears in the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager file
fingerprint list in the system lockdown configuration. You cannot modify a file
fingerprint list from Symantec ATP.
If you configured a client group with system lockdown enabled in whitelist mode,
the setting is preserved and Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager does not
use the Symantec ATP blacklist rule.
If you disable system lockdown and delete the Symantec ATP blacklist, Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager automatically re-enables system lockdown and
applies the blacklist.
If you disable system lockdown but do not delete the Symantec ATP blacklist,
system lockdown remains disabled until you re-enable it.
Note: Symantec ATP sends whitelist rules directly to Symantec Endpoint Protection
clients. Symantec ATP does not send whitelist file fingerprints to Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.

Creating an application name list to import into the system lockdown

configuration
You can import a list of application names into the system lockdown configuration.
You might want to import an application name list rather than adding application
names individually to the system lockdown configuration.
By default, 512 is the maximum number of applications that you can include in your
combined application name lists. You can change the maximum in the
conf.properties file.
You can create an application name list file with any text editor.
Each line of the file can contain the following items each separated by a space:
The file name
If you use a path name, it must be in quotes.
The test mode
The value should be 1 or Y for enabled or 0 or N for disabled. If you leave the
field blank, test mode is disabled. You must include a value if you want to specify
the matching mode.
The matching mode (wildcard or regular expression)
The value should be 1or Y for regular expression matching or 0 or N for wildcard
matching. If you leave the field blank, wildcard matching is used.
Note: The test mode field enables or disables the Test Before Addition or Test
Before Removal option for each application in the list. The test mode field is ignored
when you use the Log Applications Only option to test the entire system lockdown
configuration.
Each line should use the following syntax:
filename test_mode matching_mode

For example:
aa.exe
bb.exe 0 1
cc.exe 1
dd.exe 1 0
"c:\program files\ee.exe" 0 0
When you import this list into system lockdown, the individual applications appear
in the system lockdown configuration with the following settings:
Table 21-5 Example matching mode settings
Application Name Test Before Addition or Matching Mode

Test Before Removal
aa.exe Disabled Wildcard
bb.exe Disabled Regular expression
cc.exe Enabled Wildcard
dd.exe Enabled Wildcard
c:\program files\ee.exe Disabled Wildcard
Automatically updating whitelists or blacklists for system lockdown

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager can automatically update existing file
fingerprint lists and application name lists that you imported, merged, or appended.
File fingerprint lists that you generate from the Collect File Fingerprint List command
are automatically updated when you re-run the command on the same computer.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager can update existing lists. It cannot
automatically upload a new whitelist or blacklist.
You can also manually update existing file fingerprints.
Table 21-6 Updating whitelists or blacklists for system lockdown
Step Description
Step 1: Create updated file fingerprint You can use the checksum.exe utility or any third-party utility to create the
lists or application name lists and updated file fingerprint lists. You can use any text editor to update application
compress the files name lists. The lists must have the same names that already exist in
A fingerprint list that you generate from the Collect File Fingerprint List
command cannot be updated directly. You can merge a command-generated
list with another list, or append an imported list with a command-generated
list.
The automatic updates feature requires a compressed file (zip file) of the
file fingerprint and application name lists. You can use the file compression
feature in Windows or any compression utility to zip the files.
Step 2: Create an index.ini file The index.ini file specifies which file fingerprint lists and application names
lists Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager should update.
You can create an index.ini file with any text editor and copy the file to the
specified URL.
See Creating an index.ini file for automatic updates of whitelists and

blacklists that are used for system lockdown on page 519.
Step 3: Make the compressed file and Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses UNC, FTP, or HTTP/HTTPS
index.ini available to Symantec Endpoint to retrieve the index.ini file and zip file at the specified URL. Symantec
Protection Manager Endpoint Protection Manager uses the instructions in the index.ini file to
update the specified files. When you enable automatic updates, Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager periodically checks the URL for updated files
based on the schedule you set.
Note: If you cannot use UNC, FTP, or HTTP/HTTPS, you can copy the
index.ini and updated file fingerprint and application name files directly into
the following folder: C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager\data\inbox\WhitelistBlacklist\content. The files should
be unzipped. Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager checks this folder if it
cannot use UNC, FTP, or HTTP/HTTPS to update the files.
Step 4: Enable automatic whitelist and You must enable the automatic update of existing whitelists or blacklists in
blacklist updates in the management the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console.
console
You use the File Fingerprint Update dialog in Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager to enable the update feature and specify the schedule and the URL
information.
See Enabling automatic updates of whitelists and blacklists for system

lockdown on page 520.
Table 21-6 Updating whitelists or blacklists for system lockdown (continued)
Step Description
Step 5: Check the status of automatic You can make sure that Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager completes
updates for the whitelist or blacklist the updates by checking the status in the console.
See Checking the status of automatic whitelist or blacklist updates for system
lockdown on page 521.
See Manually updating a file fingerprint list in Symantec Endpoint Protection

Creating an index.ini file for automatic updates of whitelists

and blacklists that are used for system lockdown
The automatic updates feature requires an index.ini file. You can create the file with
any text editor.
Note: If you use non-English characters in the text file, you should use UTF-8 without
a byte order mark (BOM) character to edit and save the file.
The index.ini file specifies the following items:

The revision and name of the compressed file that includes your updated file
fingerprint lists and application name lists.
The names of the file fingerprint lists and application name lists that you want
to update.
The names of the client groups that use the application name lists.
The existing file fingerprint list or group must currently exist in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. The group must have system lockdown enabled. The file
fingerprint lists and application name lists must be available in the specified
compressed file.
You must structure the index.ini file with the following syntax:
[Revision]
Revision=YYYYMMDD RXXX
SourceFile=zip file name
Description=optional description
[FingerprintList - domain name or Default]

existing fingerprint list="updated list" REPLACE/APPEND/REMOVE
[ApplicationNameList - domain name or Default]

existing group path="updated list" REPLACE/APPEND/REMOVE
For example, you could use the following lines in an index.ini file:
[Revision]
Revision=20111014 R001
SourceFile=20110901 R001.zip
Description=NewUpdates
[FingerprintList - Default]
FingerprintListName 1="FingerprintList1.txt" REPLACE
[ApplicationNameList - Default]
My Company\Group AA\Group AA 1="ApplicationNameList1.txt" REPLACE
[FingerprintList - DomainABC]
[ApplicationNameList - DomainABC]
See Automatically updating whitelists or blacklists for system lockdown on page 517.
Enabling automatic updates of whitelists and blacklists for

system lockdown
You can configure Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to automatically update
whitelists and blacklists that you use for system lockdown.
To automatically update a file fingerprint list that you generated with the Collect File
Fingerprint List command, run the command again.
To enable automatic whitelist and blacklist updates in the management console
1 In the console, on the Admin tab, click Servers.
2 Right-click the relevant server, and select Edit the server properties.
3 In the Server Properties dialog box, select the File Fingerprint Update tab.
4 On the File Fingerprint Update tab, check Automatically update the whitelist
or blacklist.
5 Enter the URL for the location of the index.ini and the compressed file.
If you want to use UNC or FTP, you must also specify a user name and
password for both the index.ini and the content.
6 Under Schedule, you can specify how often Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager should try to update the whitelist or blacklist or you can use the default
setting.
7 Click OK.
Checking the status of automatic whitelist or blacklist updates

for system lockdown
After Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager updates a whitelist or blacklist, you
can check the status of the update in several ways.
To check the status of automatic whitelist or blacklist updates for system lockdown
In the console, do one of the following actions:
On the Admin tab, select the site. A message appears similar to the
following message: Update whitelist and blacklist for revision 20120528
R016 description succeeded.
On the Monitors tab, view System Logs: Server Activity. The event type
typically appears similar to File fingerprint update.
On the Policies tab, under Policy Components, check the file fingerprint
list description. The description appears similar to Revision: 20120528
R016 description.
Setting up and testing the system lockdown configuration before you

enable system lockdown
Typically, you run system lockdown in test mode for a week, or enough time for
clients to run their typical applications. After you determine that your system
lockdown settings do not cause problems for users, you can enable system
lockdown.
When you run system lockdown in test mode, system lockdown is disabled. System
lockdown does not block any applications. Instead, unapproved applications are
logged rather than blocked so that you can review the list before you enable system
lockdown. You can view the log entries in the Control log. You can also view the
unapproved applications in the System Lockdown dialog box.
Note: You can also create firewall rules to allow approved applications on the client.
To set up and test the system lockdown configuration before you enable system
lockdown
1 In the console, click Clients, then under Clients, locate the group for which
you want to set up system lockdown.
2 On the Policies tab, click System Lockdown.
3 Click Log Unapproved Applications Only to run system lockdown in test
mode.
This option logs the unapproved applications that clients are currently running.
4 Select Whitelist Mode or Blacklist Mode.
5 Under Application File Lists, under File Fingerprint List, add or remove file
fingerprint lists.
To add a list, the list must available in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
6 To add an application name list, under Application File Lists, under File
Name, click Import.
Specify the application name list that you want to import and click Import. The
applications in the list appear as individual entries in the system lockdown
configuration.
Note: The application name list must be a text file that specifies the file name,
test mode, and matching mode.
7 To add an individual application, under Application File Lists, under File
Name, click Add.
8 In the Add File Definition dialog box, specify the full path name of the file
(.exe or .dll).
Names can be specified using a normal string or regular expression syntax.
Names can include wildcard characters (* for any characters and ? for one
character). The name can also include environment variables such as
%ProgramFiles% to represent the location of your Program Files directory or
%windir% for the Windows installation directory.
9 Either leave Use wildcard matching (* and ? supported) selected by default,
or click Use regular expression matching if you used regular expressions in
the file name instead.
10 If you want to allow the file only when it is executed on a particular drive type,
click Only match files on the following drive types.
Unselect the drive types you do not want to include. By default, all drive types
are selected.
11 If you want to match by device ID type, check Only match files on the
following device id type, and then click Select.
12 Click the device you want in the list, and then click OK.
13 Click OK to start the test.
After a period of time, you can view the list of unapproved applications. If you re-open
the System Lockdown for name of group dialog box, you can see how long the
test has been running.
To view the unapproved applications that the test logged but did not block
1 In the System Lockdown name of group dialog box, click View Unapproved
Applications.
2 In the Unapproved Applications dialog box, review the applications.
This list includes information about the time that the application was run, the
computer host name, the client user name, and the executable file name.
3 Determine how you want to handle the unapproved applications.
For whitelist mode, you can add the names of applications that you want to
allow to the list of approved applications. For blacklist mode, you can remove
the names of applications that you want to allow.
4 In the Unapproved Applications dialog, click Reset the Test if you changed
the file fingerprint lists or individual applications and want to run the test again.
Otherwise, click Close.
5 After you finish testing, you can enable system lockdown.
Running system lockdown in whitelist mode

You can configure system lockdown to allow only approved applications on your
client computers. Only applications in the approved list are allowed to run. All other
applications are blocked. The approved list is called a whitelist. Approved
applications are subject to Symantec Endpoint Protection's other protection features.
Note: By default, system lockdown runs in whitelist mode when you enable it.
You should configure system lockdown to run in whitelist mode only after the
following conditions are true:
You tested the system lockdown configuration with the Log Unapproved
Applications Only option.
You are sure that all the applications that your client computers need to run are
listed in the approved applications list.
Warning: Be careful when you add or remove a file fingerprint list or a specific
application from system lockdown. Adding or removing items from system lockdown
can be risky. You might block important applications on your client computers.
See Setting up and testing the system lockdown configuration before you enable
system lockdown on page 521.
Note: If you run system lockdown enabled in whitelist mode, Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager does not apply any blacklist rules from Symantec ATP.
on page 515.
Running system lockdown in whitelist mode
1 On the console, click Clients.
2 Under Clients, select the group for which you want to set up system lockdown.
If you select a subgroup, the parent group must have inheritance turned off.
4 Under System Lockdown, select Enable System Lockdown to block any
unapproved applications that clients try to run.
5 Under Application File Lists, select Whitelist Mode.

6 Under Approved Applications, make sure that you have included all the
applications that your client computers run.
Warning: You must include all the applications that your client computers run
in the approved applications list. If you do not, you could make some client
computers unable to restart or prevent users from running important
applications.
7 To display a message on the client computer when the client blocks an

application, check Notify the user if an application is blocked.
8 Click OK.
Running system lockdown in blacklist mode

You can enable system lockdown to block a list of unapproved applications on your
client computers. All applications in the unapproved list are blocked. The unapproved
list is called a blacklist. Any other applications are allowed. Allowed applications
are subject to Symantec Endpoint Protection's other protection features.
Note: If you run Symantec ATP in your network, the Symantec ATP configuration
affects the system lockdown blacklist configuration.
on page 515.
You should configure system lockdown to block unapproved applications only after
the following conditions are true:
You tested the system lockdown configuration with the Log Unapproved
Applications Only option.
You are sure that all of the applications that your client computers should block
are listed in the unapproved applications list.
Warning: Be careful when you add or remove a file fingerprint list or a specific
application from system lockdown. Adding or removing items from system lockdown
can be risky. You might block important applications on your client computers.
Running system lockdown in blacklist mode

1 On the console, click Clients.
2 Under Clients, select the group for which you want to set up system lockdown.
If you select a subgroup, the parent group must have inheritance turned off.
3 On the Policies tab, select System Lockdown.
4 Under System Lockdown dialog box, select Enable System Lockdown.
5 Under Application File Lists, select Blacklist Mode.
6 Under Unapproved Applications, make sure that you have included all the
applications that your client computers should block.
Note: A large number of named applications might decrease your client

7 To display a message on the client computer when the client blocks an

application, check Notify the user if an application is blocked.
8 Click OK.
Testing selected items before you add or remove them when system
lockdown is already enabled
After system lockdown is enabled for a period of time, you might want to add or
remove file fingerprint lists or specific applications. Over time you might accumulate
many file fingerprint lists that you no longer use. Or the applications that your users
need might change.
You test specific items before you add or remove them so that your client computers
do not block important applications. In blacklist mode, system lockdown blocks any
new items that you add to the configuration. In whitelist mode, system lockdown
blocks any existing items that you remove. System lockdown runs in whitelist mode
by default.
Note: When you test individual items, system lockdown is enabled. System lockdown
continues to block the applications that are not part of the test.
You can test individual file fingerprint lists to make sure that your client computers
no longer use the applications in the list. You can also test the individual applications
that are specified in the system lockdown configuration.
You can test the entire system lockdown configuration, rather than specific items,
when system lockdown is disabled.
To test selected items before you add or remove them when system lockdown is
already enabled
2 Under Clients, locate the group for which you want to remove items from
system lockdown.
The system lockdown configuration should already be enabled.
For whitelist mode, you should know which existing file fingerprint list or
the specific application name that you want to test.
For blacklist mode you should add a new file fingerprint list or application
name that you want to test.
4 In whitelist mode, under Application File Lists, check Test Before Removal
next to an existing file fingerprint list or application that you want to test.
System lockdown continues to allow these applications, but they are logged
as unapproved applications.
If you imported an application name list, the Test Before Removal field is
already populated.
5 Click OK to start the test.
If you re-open the System Lockdown for name of group dialog box, you can see
how long the test has been running. Typically, you might want to run this test for a
week or more.
After the test, you can check the Application Control log. If the applications that you
tested appear in the Application Control log, you know that your users run the
applications. You can decide whether to keep the tested item as part of the system
lockdown configuration.
If you decide that you now want to block the items that you tested, do one of the
following actions:
In the System Lockdown for name of group dialog box, when whitelist mode
is enabled, select the tested item and click Remove.
In the System Lockdown for name of group dialog box, when blacklist mode
is enabled, unselect Test Before Addition.
Warning: In whitelist mode, system lockdown blocks any applications on file

fingerprint lists and the specific application names that you remove from the
configuration. In blacklist mode, system lockdown blocks any applications on file
fingerprint lists and the specific application names that you add to the configuration.

Device control specifies what hardware devices are allowed or blocked on your
client computers. You use the default hardware devices list and a Device Control
policy to manage device control. You can also add your own.
Table 21-7 Managing device control
Step Description
Review the default hardware devices list By default, Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager includes a list of hardware
in Symantec Endpoint Protection devices. The list appears on the Policies tab in Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager Manager under Policy Components. You use this list to select the devices
that you want to control on your client computers.
If you want to control a device that is not included in the list, you must add
the device first.
See About the hardware devices list on page 530.

Table 21-7 Managing device control (continued)
Step Description
Add devices to the hardware device list When you add a device to the device list, you need a class ID or device ID
(if necessary) for the device.
You cannot add a customized device for Mac. You can only use the device
types that are provided.
See Adding a hardware device to the Hardware Devices list on page 532.
See Obtaining a device vendor or model for Windows computers with

DevViewer on page 531.
Allow or block a device in the Device Specify the devices that you want to allow or block from being accessed on
Control policy the client.
See Allowing or blocking devices on client computers on page 529.
For Mac clients, device control is part of SymDaemon service. You do not need to
restart the Windows client or the Mac client for device control to work.
See Device Control differences based on platform on page 764.
Allowing or blocking devices on client computers

You use an Application and Device Control policy to configure device control. You
have already added any devices you need to the Hardware Devices list.
As of 14, you can configure both Windows and Mac device control.
To configure device control for Windows clients
2 Click Device Control.
3 Under Blocked Devices, click Add.
4 In the Device Selection window, select one or more devices. Make sure that
if you block specific ports, then you exclude devices if necessary.
Note: Typically, you should never block a keyboard.
5 Click OK.
6 Under Devices Excluded From Blocking, click Add.
7 In the Device Selection window, select one or more devices.
8 Check Notify users when devices are blocked if you want to notify the user.
9 Click OK.
To configure device control for Mac clients (as of 14)
2 Under Mac Settings, click Device Control.
3 Under Blocked Devices, click Add.
4 In the Device Selection window, select a device from the list. You can only
add one device at a time.
Fill in the fields at the bottom of the window, if available. If you leave the fields
blank, all devices of this type are blocked.
You can also use regular expressions to define device vendor, device model,
or serial number. See the Help in the Mac Device Control window for more
information.
To obtain the serial number, model number, or vendor name from a
Mac-connected device, use the DeviceInfo tool from the installation file. You
can find this tool and its instructions under Tools/DeviceInfo.
5 Click OK.
6 Under Devices Excluded From Blocking, click Add.
7 In the Device Selection window, select a device from the list, define the
excluded devices, and then click OK.
8 Check Notify users when devices are blocked if you want to notify the user.
9 Click OK.
About the hardware devices list

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager includes a hardware devices list. Some
devices are included in the list by default. You use the devices when you configure
device control.
You can add devices to the list. You cannot edit or delete any default devices.
You cannot add a customized hardware device for Mac.
Devices are identified by a device ID or class ID. You use either of these values to
add a device to the list. You can use a tool to determine the device ID or the class
ID. For Windows, go to Tools\DevViewer. For the Mac, go to Tools\DeviceInfo.
See Obtaining a device vendor or model for Windows computers with DevViewer
on page 531.
class ID The class ID refers to the Windows GUID. Each device type has both a Class and a
ClassGuid associated with it. The ClassGuid is a hexadecimal value with the following
format:
{00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000}
device ID A device ID is the most specific ID for a device. The syntax of a device ID includes some
descriptive strings that make it easier to read than the class ID.
When you add a device ID, you can use a device's specific ID. Alternately, you can use
a wildcard character in the device ID string to indicate a less specific group of devices.
You can use an asterisk (*) to indicate zero or more additional characters or a question
mark (?) to indicate a single character of any value.
The following is a device ID for a specific USB SanDisk device:
USBSTOR\DISK&VEN_SANDISK&PROD_CRUZER_MICRO&REV_2033\0002071406&0
The following is a device ID with a wildcard that indicates any USB SanDisk device:
USBSTOR\DISK&VEN_SANDISK*
The following is a device ID with a wildcard that indicates any USB disk device:
USBSTOR\DISK*
The following is a device ID with a wildcard that indicates any USB storage device:
USBSTOR*
Obtaining a device vendor or model for Windows computers with

DevViewer
You can use the Symantec DevViewer tool to obtain either the class ID (GUID) or
the device ID. You can use Windows Device Manager to obtain the device ID.
After you obtain a device ID, you can modify it with a wildcard character to indicate
a less specific group of devices.
To obtain a class ID or device ID by using the DevViewer tool

1 In the full product installation file from FileConnect, locate the Tools\DevViewer
folder, and then copy the DevViewer.exe tool to the client computer.
See A guide to Endpoint Protection files on FileConnect.
2 On the client computer, run DevViewer.exe.
3 Expand the Device Tree and locate the device for which you want the device
ID or the GUID.
For example, expand Disk drives and select the device within that category.
4 In the right-hand pane, right-click the device ID (which begins with [device ID]),
and then click Copy Device ID.
5 Click Exit.
6 On the management server, paste the device ID into the list of hardware
devices.
To obtain a device ID from Control Panel
1 Open the Device Manager from the Control Panel.
The path to the Device Manager depends on the Windows operating system.
For example, in Windows 7, click Start > Control Panel > System > Device
Manager.
2 In the Device Manager dialog box, right-click the device, and click Properties.
3 In the device's Properties dialog box, on the Details tab, select the Device
ID.
By default, the Device ID is the first value displayed.
4 Copy the ID string.
5 Click OK.
Adding a hardware device to the Hardware Devices list

After you obtain a class ID or device ID for a hardware device, you can add the
hardware device to the default Hardware Devices list. You can then access this
default list from the device control part of the Application and Device Control policy.
See About the hardware devices list on page 530.
To add hardware devices to the Hardware Devices list

2 Under Policies, expand Policy Components and click Hardware Devices.
3 Under Tasks, click Add a Hardware Device.
4 Enter the name of the device you want to add.
Both Class IDs and Device IDs are enclosed in curly braces by convention.
5 Select either Class ID or Device ID, and paste the ID that you copied from the
Windows Device Manager or the DevViewer tool.
6 You can use wildcard characters to define a set of device IDs. For example,
you can use the following string: *IDE\DVDROM*.
See Obtaining a device vendor or model for Windows computers with
DevViewer on page 531.
7 Click OK.
Chapter 22
Managing exceptions
Managing exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection
About exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection to Virus and Spyware scans
Creating exceptions for Virus and Spyware scans
Restricting the types of exceptions that users can configure on client computers
Creating exceptions from log events
Managing exceptions in Symantec Endpoint

Protection
You can manage exceptions for Symantec Endpoint Protection in the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager console.
Table 22-1 Managing exceptions
Task Description
Learn about exceptions You use exceptions to exclude items from being
scanned on your client computers.
See About exceptions in Symantec Endpoint

Protection to Virus and Spyware scans
on page 536.
Managing exceptions 535
Managing exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection
Table 22-1 Managing exceptions (continued)
Task Description
Review the types of files and folders that Symantec Endpoint Protection automatically
Symantec Endpoint Protection creates exceptions, or exclusions, for some
automatically excludes from scans third-party applications and some Symantec
products.
You can also configure individual scans to scan

only certain extensions and skip any other
extensions.
See About the files and folders that Symantec

Endpoint Protection excludes from virus and
spyware scans on page 410.
Create exceptions for scans You add exceptions in an Exceptions policy

directly. Or you can add exceptions from log events
on the Monitors page.
See Creating exceptions for Virus and Spyware

scans on page 537.
See Creating exceptions from log events

on page 549.
Restricting the types of exceptions that By default, users on client computers have limited
users can configure on client computers configuration rights for exceptions. You can restrict
(Windows only) users further so that they cannot create exceptions
for virus and spyware scans or for SONAR.
Users can never force an application detection and

they never have permission to create Tamper
Protection exceptions.
Users also cannot create a file exception for

application control.
See Restricting the types of exceptions that users

can configure on client computers on page 549.
Check the logs for detections for which After Symantec Endpoint Protection makes a
you might want to create exceptions detection, you can create an exception for the
detection from the log event.
For example, you might want to create an

exception for a file that scans detect but that your
users request to download.
See Creating exceptions from log events

on page 549.
About exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection to Virus and Spyware scans
Table 22-1 Managing exceptions (continued)
Task Description
Create exceptions for intrusion You can specify exceptions for intrusion prevention.
prevention signatures
You can also set up a list of excluded hosts for
intrusion prevention.
Intrusion prevention exceptions are configured in

an Intrusion Prevention policy.
See Creating exceptions for IPS signatures

on page 374.
About exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection

to Virus and Spyware scans
Typically exceptions are items, such as files or Web domains, that you want to
exclude from scans.
Symantec Endpoint Protection automatically excludes some files from virus and
spyware scans.
You might want to use exceptions to reduce the amount of time that scans run. For
example, you can exclude files, folders, and extensions from scans. If you reduce
the scan time, you might increase the system performance on client computers.
You can also use exceptions to detect an application or to change the default
behavior when Symantec Endpoint Protection detects an application or when the
application launches.
Note: You cannot create exceptions for an individual virus and spyware scan. For
example, if you create a file exception, Symantec Endpoint Protection applies the
exception to all virus and spyware scans (Auto-Protect, Download Insight, and any
administrator-defined or user-defined scan).
Exceptions apply to a particular client type (Windows, Mac, or Linux). You configure
the exceptions for each client type separately.
Table 22-2 Client type and scan exceptions
Client Type Exception
Windows clients File

Folder
Known risk
Extension
Trusted Web domain
Application to monitor
Application
Tamper Protection
Mac clients File or folder exception
Linux clients Folder or extension exception
See About the files and folders that Symantec Endpoint Protection excludes from
virus and spyware scans on page 410.

You can create different types of exceptions for Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Any exception that you create takes precedence over any exception that a user
might define. On client computers, users cannot view the exceptions that you create.
A user can view only the exceptions that the user creates.
Exceptions for virus and spyware scans also apply to Download Insight.
Table 22-3 Creating exceptions for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Task Description
Exclude a file from virus and spyware Supported on Windows and Mac clients.
scans
Excludes a file by name from virus and spyware scans, SONAR, or
application control on Windows clients.

Table 22-3 Creating exceptions for Symantec Endpoint Protection (continued)
Task Description
Exclude a folder from virus and spyware Supported on Windows, Mac, and Linux clients.
scans
Excludes a folder from virus and spyware scans, SONAR, or all scans on
Windows clients.
On Windows and Linux clients, you can choose to limit an exception for virus
and spyware scans to Auto-Protect or scheduled and on-demand scans only.
If you run an application that writes many temp files to a folder, you might
want to exclude the folder from Auto-Protect. Auto-Protect scans files as
they are written so you can increase computer performance by limiting the
exception to scheduled and on-demand scans.
You might want to exclude the folders that are not often used or that contain
archived or packed files from scheduled and on-demand scans. For example,
scheduled or on-demand scans of deeply archived files that are not often
used might decrease computer performance. Auto-Protect still protects the
folder by scanning only when any files are accessed or written to the folder.
Exclude a known risk from virus and Supported on Windows clients.

spyware scans
Excludes a known risk from virus and spyware scans. The scans ignore the
risk, but you can configure the exception so that the scans log the detection.
In either case, the client software does not notify users when it detects the
specified risks.
If a user configures custom actions for a known risk that you configure to
ignore, Symantec Endpoint Protection ignores the custom actions.
Security risk exceptions do not apply to SONAR.
See Excluding known risks from virus and spyware scans on Windows
Exclude file extensions from virus and Supported on Windows and Linux clients.
spyware scans
Excludes any files with the specified extensions from virus and spyware
scans.
Extension exceptions do not apply to SONAR or to Power Eraser.
See Excluding file extensions from virus and spyware scans on Windows
clients and Linux clients on page 544.
Task Description
Monitor an application to create an Supported on Windows clients.

exception for the application
Use the Application to monitor exception to monitor a particular application.
When Symantec Endpoint Protection learns the application, you can create
an exception to specify how Symantec Endpoint Protection handles the
application.
If you disable application learning, the Application to monitor exception forces

application learning for the application that you specify.
See Monitoring an application to create an exception for the application on

Windows clients on page 545.
Specify how virus and spyware scans Supported on Windows clients.

handle monitored applications
Use an application exception to specify an action for Symantec Endpoint
Protection to apply to a monitored application. The type of action determines
whether Symantec Endpoint Protection applies the action when it detects
the application or when the application runs. Symantec Endpoint Protection
applies the Terminate, Quarantine, or Remove action to an application when
it launches or runs. It applies the Log only or Ignore action when it detects
the application.
Unlike a file name exception, an application exception is a hash-based

exception. Different files can have the same name, but a file hash uniquely
identifies an application.
The application exception is a SHA-2 hash-based exception.
Applications for which you can create exceptions appear in the Exceptions
dialog after Symantec Endpoint Protection learns the application. You can
request that Symantec Endpoint Protection monitors a specific application
to learn.
See Specifying how Symantec Endpoint Protection handles monitored

applications on Windows clients on page 545.
See Configuring the management server to collect information about the

applications that the client computers run on page 319.
Task Description
Exclude a web domain from virus and Supported on Windows clients.

spyware scans
Download Insight scans the files that users try to download from websites
and other portals. Download Insight runs as part of a virus and spyware
scan. You can configure an exception for a specific web domain that you
know is safe.
Download Insight must be enabled for the exception to have any effect.
Note: If your client computers use a proxy with authentication, you must
specify trusted web domain exceptions for Symantec URLs. The exceptions
let your client computers communicate with Symantec Insight and other
important Symantec sites.
See the following articles:

Required exclusions for proxy servers to allow Symantec Endpoint
Protection to connect to Symantec reputation and licensing servers
See Excluding a trusted Web domain from scans on Windows clients

on page 546.
Create file exceptions for Tamper Supported on Windows clients.

Protection
Tamper Protection protects client computers from the processes that tamper
with Symantec processes and internal objects. When Tamper Protection
detects a process that might modify the Symantec configuration settings or
Windows registry values, it blocks the process.
Some third-party applications inadvertently try to modify Symantec processes

or settings. You might need to allow a safe application to modify Symantec
settings. You might want to stop Tamper Protection for certain areas of the
registry or certain files on the client computer.
In some cases, Tamper Protection might block a screen reader or some

other assistive technology application. You can create a file exception so
that the application can run on client computers. Folder exceptions are not
supported for Tamper Protection.
See Creating a Tamper Protection exception on Windows clients

on page 547.
Task Description
Allow applications to make DNS or host Supported on Windows clients

file changes
You can create an exception for an application to make a DNS or host file
change. SONAR typically prevents system changes like DNS or host file
changes. You might need to make an exception for a VPN application, for
example.
change on page 548.

Excluding a file or a folder from scans

You add exceptions for files or folders individually. If you want to create exceptions
for more than one file, repeat the procedure.
You can configure file or folder exceptions on both Windows and Mac clients. On
Windows clients, file exceptions can apply to virus and spyware scans, SONAR,
and application control. Folder exceptions apply to virus and spyware scans and
SONAR.
To exclude a file from scans on Windows clients
1 On the Exceptions Policy page, click Exceptions.
2 Under Exceptions, click Add > Windows Exceptions > File.
3 In the Prefix variable drop-down box, select a common folder.
Select [NONE] to enter the absolute path and file name.
When you select a prefix, the exception can be used on different Windows
operating systems.
4 In the File text box, type the name of the file.
If you select a prefix variable, the path should be relative to the prefix. If you
select [NONE], type the full path name.
Note: Paths must be denoted by using a backward slash.

5 Under Specify the types of scans that will exclude this file, select the type
of scan (Security Risk, SONAR, or Application control).
You must select at least one type.
6 For security risk scans, under Specify the type of security risk scan, select
Auto-Protect, Scheduled and on-demand, or All Scans.
See the help for information about why you might want to limit the exception
to a specific type of security risk scan.
7 Click OK.
To exclude a folder from scans on Windows clients
2 Under Exceptions, click Add > Windows Exceptions > Folder.
3 In the Prefix variable drop-down box, select a common folder.
operating systems.
4 In the Folder text box, type the name of the folder.
Note: Paths must be denoted by using a backward slash.
5 Under Specify the type of scan that excludes this folder, select the type of
scan (Security Risk, SONAR, Application control, or All).
You must select at least one type.
6 For security risk scans, under Specify the type of security risk scan, select
Auto-Protect, Scheduled and on-demand, or All Scans.
See the help for information about why you might want to limit the exception
to a specific type of security risk scan.
7 Click OK.
To exclude a file or folder from scans on Mac clients
2 Under Exceptions, click Add > Mac Exceptions > Security Risk Exceptions
for File or Folder.
3 Under Security Risk File or Folder Exception, in the Prefix variable

drop-down box, select a common folder.
4 In the File or Folder text box, type the name of the file or folder.
Note: Folder paths must be denoted by using a forward slash.
5 Click OK.
To exclude a folder from scans on Linux clients
2 Under Exceptions, click Add > Linux Exceptions.
3 Click Folder.
4 In the Add Folder Exception dialog box, you can choose a prefix variable,
type a folder name, and either include subfolders or not.
Note: Folder paths must be denoted by using a forward slash.
5 Specify the type of security risk scan. Select Auto-Protect, Scheduled and
on-demand, or All scans, and then click OK.
See Excluding file extensions from virus and spyware scans on Windows clients
and Linux clients on page 544.
Excluding known risks from virus and spyware scans on Windows

clients
The security risks that the client software detects appear in the Known Security
Risk Exceptions dialog box.
The known security risks list includes information about the severity of the risk.
To exclude known risks from virus and spyware scans on Windows clients
2 Under Exceptions, click Add > Windows Exceptions > Known Risks.
3 In the Add Known Security Risk Exceptions dialog box, select one or more
security risks that you want to exclude from virus and spyware scans.
4 Check Log when the security risk is detected if you want to log the detection.
If you do not check this option, the client ignores the risk when it detects the
selected risks. The client therefore does not log the detection.
5 Click OK.
Excluding file extensions from virus and spyware scans on Windows

clients and Linux clients
You can add multiple file extensions to an exception. After you create the exception,
you cannot create another extensions exception for the same policy. You must edit
the existing exception.
You can add only one extension at a time. If you enter multiple extension names
in the Add text box, the policy treats the entry as a single extension name.
To exclude file extensions from virus and spyware scans on Windows clients and
Linux clients
2 Under Exceptions, click Add > Windows Exceptions > Extensions or Add
> Linux Exceptions > Extensions.
3 In the text box, type the extension that you want to exclude, and then click
Add.
4 Under Specify the type of security risk scan, select Auto-Protect,
Scheduled and on-demand, or All Scans.
5 Add any other extensions to the exception.
6 Click OK.
Monitoring an application to create an exception for the application

on Windows clients
When Symantec Endpoint Protection learns a monitored application, the application
appears in the Application Exception dialog. You can create an exception action
for the application in the Exceptions policy. The application also appears in the
relevant log, and you can create an exception from the log.
If you disable application learning, the Application to Monitor exception forces
application learning for the specified application.
To monitor an application to create an exception for the application on Windows
clients
2 Click Add > Windows Exceptions > Application to Monitor.
3 In the dialog box, type the application name.
For example, you might type the name of an executable file as follows:
foo.exe
4 Click Add.
5 Click OK.
on page 318.
Specifying how Symantec Endpoint Protection handles monitored

applications on Windows clients
You can monitor a particular application so that you can create an exception for
how Symantec Endpoint Protection handles the application. After Symantec Endpoint
Protection learns the application and the management console receives the event,
the application appears in the application list in the Application Exception dialog.
The application list appears empty if the client computers in your network have not
yet learned any applications.
The applications list includes the applications that you monitor as well as the files
that your users download. Symantec Endpoint Protection applies the action when
either Symantec Endpoint Protection detects the application or the application runs.
The applications also appear in the list for DNS and Host File Change Exception.
To specify how Symantec Endpoint Protection handles monitored applications on
Windows clients
2 Click Add > Windows Exceptions > Application.
3 In the View drop-down box, select All, Watched Applications, or User-allowed
Applications.
4 Select the applications for which you want to create an exception.
5 In the Action drop-down box, select Ignore, Log only, Quarantine, Terminate,
or Remove.
The Ignore and Log only actions apply when scans detect the application.
The Terminate, Quarantine, and Remove actions apply when the application
launches.
6 Click OK.
See Monitoring an application to create an exception for the application on Windows
on page 318.
See Creating an exception for an application that makes a DNS or host file change
on page 548.
Excluding a trusted Web domain from scans on Windows clients

You can exclude a Web domain from virus and spyware scans and SONAR.
You must enter a single domain or IP address when you specify a trusted Web
domain exception. You can specify only one domain at a time. Port numbers are
not supported. You must specify an IP address for an FTP location.
When you specify an IP address, the exception applies to both the specified IP
address and its corresponding host name. If a user navigates to a location through
its URL, Symantec Endpoint Protection resolves the host name to the IP address
and applies the exception.
Note: If Download Insight or Auto-Protect is disabled, trusted Web domain exceptions

are disabled as well.
To exclude a trusted Web domain from scans on Windows clients

1 On the Exceptions Policy page, click Add > Windows Exceptions > Trusted
Web Domain.
2 In the Add Trusted Web Domain Exception dialog box, enter the domain
name or IP address that you want to exclude.
Note: You can specify a URL, but the exception uses only the domain name
portion of a URL. If you specify a URL, you can pre-pend the URL with either
HTTP or HTTPS (case-insensitive), but the exception applies to both.
Regardless of whether a user navigates to the domain through HTTP or HTTPS,
both Download Insight and SONAR exclude the domain. If the user navigates
to any location within the domain, the user can download files from that location.
You can specify an IP address, but it must be HTTP. For HTTPS, you can only
specify a URL.
3 Click OK.
4 Repeat the procedure to add more Web domain exceptions.
Creating a Tamper Protection exception on Windows clients

You can create file exceptions for Tamper Protection. You might want to create a
Tamper Protection exception if Tamper Protection interferes with a known safe
application on your client computers. For example, Tamper Protection might block
an assistive technology application, such as a screen reader.
You need to know the name of the file that is associated with the assistive technology
application. Then you can create an exception to allow the application to run.
Note: Tamper Protection does not support folder exceptions.
To create Tamper Protection exception on Windows clients

2 Click Add > Windows Exceptions > Tamper Protection Exception.
3 In the Add Tamper Protection Exception dialog box, in the Prefix variable
drop-down box, select a common folder.
operating systems.
Select [NONE] if you want to enter the absolute path and file name.
4 In the File text box, type the name of the file.
If you selected a prefix, the path should be relative to the prefix. If you selected
[NONE] for the prefix, type the full path name.
You must specify a file name. Tamper Protection does not support folder
exceptions. If you enter a folder name, Tamper Protection does not exclude
all the files in a folder with that name. It only excludes a file with that specified
name.
5 Click OK.
See How to collect the Tamper Protection log from Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager in Symantec Endpoint Protection 12.1.
Creating an exception for an application that makes a DNS or host

file change
You can create an exception for a specific application that makes a DNS or host
file change. SONAR might prevent system changes like DNS or host file changes.
You might need to make an exception for a VPN application, for example.
You can monitor a particular application so that you can create a DNS or host file
change exception. After Symantec Endpoint Protection learns the application and
the management console receives the event, the application appears in the
application list. The application list appears empty if the client computers in your
network have not yet learned any applications.
Use the SONAR settings to control how SONAR detects DNS or host file changes
globally.
To create an exception for an application that makes a DNS or host file change
2 Click Add > Windows Exceptions > DNS or Host File Change Exception.
3 Select the applications for which you want to create an exception.
Restricting the types of exceptions that users can configure on client computers
4 In the Action drop-down box, select Ignore, Log only, Prompt, or Block.
The actions apply when scans detect the application making a DNS or host
file change.
5 Click OK.
Restricting the types of exceptions that users can

configure on client computers
You can configure restrictions so that users on client computers cannot create
exceptions for virus and spyware scans or for SONAR. By default, users are
permitted to configure exceptions.
Users on client computers can never create exceptions for Tamper Protection,
regardless of the restriction settings.
Users also cannot create file exceptions for application control.
To restrict the types of exceptions that users can configure on client computers
1 On the Exceptions Policy page, click Client Restrictions.
2 Under Client Restrictions, uncheck any exception that you do not want users
on client computers to configure.

You can create exceptions from log events for virus and spyware scans, SONAR,
application control, and Tamper Protection.
Note: You cannot create exceptions from log events for early launch anti-malware
detections.
Table 22-4 Exceptions and log types
Exception Type Log Type
File Risk log
Folder Risk log
SONAR log
Known risk Risk log
Extension Risk log
Application Risk log
SONAR log
Trusted Web domain Risk log
SONAR log
Tamper Protection Application Control log
DNS or host file change SONAR log
Symantec Endpoint Protection must have already detected the item for which you
want to create an exception. When you use a log event to create an exception, you
specify the Exceptions policy that should include the exception.
To create exceptions from log events
1 On the Monitors tab, click the Logs tab.
2 In the Log type drop-down list, select the Risk log, SONAR log, or Application
and Device Control log.
3 If you selected Application and Device Control, select Application Control
from the Log content list.
4 Click View Log.
5 Next to Time range, select the time interval to filter the log.
6 Select the entry or entries for which you want to create an exception.
7 Next to Action, select the type of exception that you want to create.
The exception type that you select must be valid for the item or items that you
selected.
8 Click Apply or Start.
9 In the dialog box, remove any items that you do not want to include in the
exception.
10 For security risks, check Log when the security risk is detected if you want
Symantec Endpoint Protection to log the detection.
11 Select all of the Exceptions policies that should use the exception.
12 Click OK.
Chapter 23
Testing security policies
Testing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager policies
Testing a Virus and Spyware Protection policy
Blocking a process from starting on client computers
Preventing users from writing to the registry on client computers
Preventing users from writing to a particular file
Adding and testing a rule that blocks a DLL
Adding and testing a rule that terminates a process
Testing a default IPS policy
Testing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

policies
You may need to evaluate Symantec Endpoint Protection or you may need to test
the policies before you download them to the client computers. You can test the
following functionality using the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager policies
to make sure the product works correctly on the client computers.
Testing security policies 553
Table 23-1 Features that you can test
Feature See this topic
Virus and Spyware To test a default Virus and Spyware Protection policy, download
Protection the EICAR test virus from:
http://www.eicar.org/86-0-Intended-use.html
See Testing a Virus and Spyware Protection policy on page 553.
SONAR Download the Socar.exe test file to verify that SONAR works
correctly
Insight How to test connectivity with Insight and Symantec Licensing

servers
Intrusion Prevention Testing a default IPS policy
Application Control See Blocking a process from starting on client computers

on page 554.
See Preventing users from writing to the registry on client

See Preventing users from writing to a particular file on page 556.
See Adding and testing a rule that blocks a DLL on page 557.
See Adding and testing a rule that terminates a process

on page 558.

To test to see that the Virus and Spyware policy works, you can use the test virus
file eicar.com. The EICAR test virus is a text file that the European Institute for
Computer Antivirus Research (EICAR) developed. It provides an easy way and
safe way to test most antivirus software. You can use it to verify that the antivirus
portion of the client works.
To test a Virus and Spyware Protection policy
1 On the client computer, download the antivirus test file from the EICAR website
at the following location:
http://www.eicar.org/86-0-Intended-use.html
2 Run the EICAR test file.
A notification appears that tells you that a risk is found.
3 In Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, on the Monitors page, click Logs.
4 On the Logs tab, in the Log type drop-down list, click Risk, and then click
View Log.
5 On the Risk Logs page, the Virus found event appears.

The FTP client is a common way to transfer files from a server to a client computer.
To prevent users from transferring files, you can add a rule that blocks a user from
launching an FTP client from the command prompt.
To add a rule that blocks a process from starting on the client computer
1 Open an Application Control policy, and on the Application Control pane,
click Add.
2 In the Application Control Rule Set dialog box, in the Rules list, select a rule,
and on the Properties tab, in the Rule name text box, type ftp_
blocked_from_cmd.
3 To the right of Apply this rule to the following processes, click Add.
4 In the Add Process Definition dialog box, under Processes name to match,
type cmd.exe, and then click OK.
5 In the Application Control Rule Set dialog box, under the Rules list, click
Add Condition > Launch Process Attempts.
6 On the Properties tab, in the Description text box, type no ftp from cmd.
type ftp.exe, and then click OK.
9 In the Application Control Rule Set dialog box, on the Actions tab, click
Block access, Enable logging, and Notify user.
10 Under Notify user, type ftp is blocked if launched from the cmd.
11 Click OK twice, and assign the policy to a group.
Test the rule.
To test a rule that blocks a process from starting on the client computer
1 On the client computer, open a command prompt.
2 In the command prompt window, type ftp, and then press Enter.
As the rule has specified, the FTP client does not open.
Preventing users from writing to the registry on client computers
Preventing users from writing to the registry on client

computers
You can protect a specific registry key by preventing the user from accessing or
from modifying any registry keys or values in the registry. You can allow users to
view the registry key, but not rename or modify the registry key.
To test the functionality:
Add a test registry key.
Add a rule to read but not write to the registry key.
Try to add a new value to the registry key.
To add a test registry key
1 On the client computer, open the Registry Editor by opening a command line,
then by typing regedit.
2 In the Registry Editor, expand HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software, and then
create a new registry key called test.
To prevent users from writing to the registry on client computers
click Add.
2 In the Application Control Rule Set, under the Rules list, click Add > Add
Rule.
3 On the Properties tab, in the Rule name text box, type
HKLM_write_not_allowed_from_regedit.
5 In the Add Process Definition dialog box, under Process name to match,
type regedit.exe, and then click OK.
Add > Add Condition > Registry Access Attempts.
7 On the Properties tab, in the Description text box, type registry access.
9 In the Add Registry Key Definition dialog box, in the Registry key text box,
type HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\software\test, and then click OK.
10 In the Application Control Rule Set dialog box, on the Actions tab, in the
Read Attempt group box, click Allow access, Enable logging, and Notify
user.
11 Under Notify user, type reading is allowed.

12 In the Create, Delete, or Write Attempt group box, click Block access, Enable
logging, and Notify user.
13 Under Notify user, type writing is blocked.
Test the rule.
To test a rule that blocks you from writing to the registry
1 After you have applied the policy, on the client computer, in the Registry Editor,
expand HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software.
2 Click the registry key that you created earlier, called test.
3 Right-click the test key, click New, and then click String Value.
You should not be able to add a new value to the test registry key.

You may want users to view but not modify a file. For example, a file may include
the financial data that employees should view but not edit.
You can create an Application and Device Control rule to give users read-only
access to a file. For example, you can add a rule that lets you open a text file in
Notepad but does not let you edit it.
To add a rule that prevents users from writing to a particular file
click Add.
Add > Add Rule.
3 On the Properties tab, in the Rule name text box, type 1.txt in c read allowed
write terminate.
type notepad.exe, and then click OK.
Add > Add Condition > File and Folder Access Attempts.
7 On the Properties tab, in the Description text box, type file access launched.
9 In the Add File or Folder Definition dialog box, in the text box in the File or
Folder Name To Match group box, type c:\1.txt, and then click OK.
10 In the Application Control Rule Set dialog box, on the Actions tab, in the
Read Attempt group box, select Allow access, and then check Enable
logging and Notify user.
11 Under Notify user, type reading is allowed.
12 In the Create, Delete, or Write Attempt group box, click Block access, Enable
logging, and Notify user.
13 Under Notify user, type writing to block Notepad.
14 Click OK twice and assign the policy to the client computer group.
Test the rule.
To test a rule that prevents users from writing to a particular file
1 On the client computer, open File Explorer, locate the c:\ drive, and then click
File > New > Text Document.
If you create the file by using Notepad, the file is a read-only file.
2 Rename the file as 1.txt.
Make sure that the file is saved to the c:\ folder.
3 In Notepad, open the c:\1.txt file.
You can open the file but you cannot edit it.

You may want to prevent the user from opening a specific application. One way to
block a user from opening an application is to block a DLL that the application uses
to run. To block the DLL, you can create a rule that blocks the DLL from loading.
When the user tries to open the application, they cannot.
For example, the Msvcrt.dll file contains the program code that is used to run various
Windows applications such as Microsoft WordPad. If you add a rule that blocks
Msvcrt.dll on the client computer, you cannot open Microsoft WordPad
Note: Some applications that are written to be "security conscious may interpret
the DLL injection as a malicious act. Take counter measures to block the injection
or remove the DLL.
To add a rule that blocks a DLL

click Add.
Add > Add Rule.
3 On the Properties tab, in the Rule name text box, type Block user from
opening Microsoft WordPad.
type C:\Program Files\Windows NT\Accessories\wordpad.exe, and then
click OK.
Add > Add Condition > Load DLL Attempts.
7 On the Properties tab, in the Description text box, type dll blocked.
8 To the right of Apply to the following DLLs, click Add.
9 In the Add DLL Definition dialog box, in the text box in the DLL name to
match group box, type MSVCRT.dll, and then click OK.
Block access, Enable logging, and Notify user.
11 Under Notify user, type Should not be able to load WordPad.
12 Click OK twice and assign the policy to the client computer group.
Test the rule.
To test a rule that blocks a DLL
On the client computer, try to open Microsoft WordPad.

Process Explorer is a tool that displays the DLL processes that have opened or
loaded, and what resources the processes use. You can also use the Process
Explorer to terminate a process. You can add a rule to terminate the Process
Explorer if the user uses Process Explorer to try to terminate the Calculator
application.
To add a rule that terminates a process

click Add.
Add > Add Rule.
3 On the Properties tab, in the Rule name text box, type Terminates Process
Explorer if Process Explorer tries to terminate calc.exe.
type procexp.exe, and then click OK.
Add > Add Condition > Terminate Process Attempts.
7 On the Properties tab, in the Description text box, type dll stopped.
9 In the Add Process Definition dialog box, in the text box in the Process name
to match group box, type calc.exe, and then click OK.
Terminate process, Enable logging, and Notify user.
11 Under Notify user, type If you try to terminate the calc from procexp,
procexp terminates.
Test the rule.
To test a rule that terminates a process
1 On the client computer, download and run a free version of the Process Explorer
from the following URL:
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals/bb896653.aspx
2 In Windows, open the Calculator.
3 Open the Process Explorer.
4 In the Process Explorer window, right-click the calc.exe process, and then
click Kill Process.
The Process Explorer is terminated.

To test the default IPS policy, you must first trigger an event on the client computer.
To test a default IPS policy
1 Rename an executable file (.exe) to a jpeg (.jpg).
2 Upload the .jpg file to a web server\site.
3 On the client computer, use a web browser to open the renamed executable
file.
Note: To open the renamed executable file, you must access the web server\site
using the IP address. For example, you would type: http://web server IP
address/renamed executable.jpg
4 On the client, open the Traffic log and check that the client computer blocked
the renamed executable file.
If you see this type of event, the default IPS policy correctly blocked the
executable file.
Section 5
Monitoring, reporting, and
enforcing compliance
Chapter 24. Managing Host Integrity to enforce security policies
Chapter 25. Monitoring protection with reports and logs
Chapter 26. Managing notifications

Chapter 24
Managing Host Integrity to
enforce security policies
How Host Integrity works
Setting up Host Integrity
About Host Integrity requirements
Adding predefined requirements to a Host Integrity policy
Setting up remediation for a predefined Host Integrity requirement
Configuring the frequency of Host Integrity check settings
Allowing the Host Integrity check to pass if a requirement fails
Configuring notifications for Host Integrity checks
Creating a Quarantine policy for a failed Host Integrity check
Blocking a remote computer by configuring peer-to-peer authentication
Adding a custom requirement from a template
Writing a customized requirement script
Creating a test Host Integrity policy with a custom requirement script

Managing Host Integrity to enforce security policies 563

Host Integrity ensures that client computers are protected and compliant with your
company's security policies. You use Host Integrity policies to define, enforce, and
restore the security of clients to secure enterprise networks and data.
Table 24-1 Process for enforcing security compliance on the client computer
Step Description
Step 1: The client computer runs a The management server downloads the Host Integrity policy to the client
Host Integrity check on the client computers in the assigned group. The client computers run the Host Integrity
computer. check, which compares each computer's configuration with the requirements
that you add to the Host Integrity policy.
The Host Integrity policy checks for the existence for antivirus software, patches,
hot fixes, and other security requirements. For example, the policy may check
whether the latest patches have been applied to the operating system.
Step 2: The Host Integrity check If the computer meets all of the policy's requirements, the Host Integrity
passes or fails check passes.
If the computer does not meet all of the policy's requirements, the Host
Integrity check fails. You can also set up the policy to ignore a failed
requirement so that the check passes.
See Allowing the Host Integrity check to pass if a requirement fails
on page 571.
You can also set up peer-to-peer authentication in the Firewall policy, which
can grant or block inbound access to the remote computers that have the client
installed.

on page 574.
Table 24-1 Process for enforcing security compliance on the client computer
(continued)
Step Description
Step 3: Non-compliant computers If the Host Integrity check fails, you can configure the client to remediate.
remediate a failed Host Integrity check To remediate, the client downloads and installs the missing software. You
(optional) can configure either the client to remediate or the end user to remediate in
a predefined requirement or a custom requirement. Host Integrity then
rechecks that the client computer installed the software.
See Setting up remediation for a predefined Host Integrity requirement
on page 568.
If the Host Integrity check that verifies remediation still fails, the client applies
a Quarantine policy. You can use a Quarantine policy to apply stricter
restrictions to the failed computers.
See Creating a Quarantine policy for a failed Host Integrity check
on page 573.
While the client is in the Quarantine location, the Host Integrity check
continues to run and to try to remediate. The frequency of the check and
remediation settings are based on how you configure the Host Integrity
policy. Once the client is remediated and passes the Host Integrity check,
the client moves out of the Quarantine location automatically.
In some cases, you may need to remediate the client computer manually.
Step 4: The client continues to monitor The Host Integrity check actively monitors each client's compliance status. If
compliance at any time the clients compliance status changes, so do the privileges of the
computer.
If you change a Host Integrity policy, it is downloaded to the client at the

next heartbeat. The client then runs a Host Integrity check.
If the client switches to a location with a different Host Integrity policy while
a Host Integrity check is in progress, the client stops checking. The stop
includes any remediation attempts. The user may see a timeout message
if a remediation server connection is not available in the new location. When
the check is complete, the client discards the results. Then the client
immediately runs a new Host Integrity check based on the new policy for
the location.
You can view the results of the Host Integrity check in the Compliance log.

Use Host Integrity policies to make sure that the client computers in your network
meet your organization's security policies.
Table 24-2 lists the steps you need to perform to set up security compliance using
Host Integrity policies.
Table 24-2 Tasks to set up Host Integrity policies
Step Description
Step 1: Add a Host Integrity policy that When you add a new policy, perform the following tasks:
checks for a requirement on the client
1 Choose which types of requirements you want the client computer to
computer and enforces a remediation
check. Create a separate requirement for each type of software (such
action for non-compliant computers
as applications, files, and patches).
See About Host Integrity requirements on page 566.
See Adding predefined requirements to a Host Integrity policy

on page 567.
2 Configure the remediation actions for non-compliant client computers.
Remediation requires that the client computer installs or requests the

client user to install the required software.

on page 568.
3 Set the order in which requirements are checked and the remediation
is tried. For example, updates should be completed in a specific order
so that all updates are applied before the user has to restart the client
computer.
Step 2: Set the options for the Host Configure how often the Host Integrity check runs.
Integrity check and notifications See Configuring the frequency of Host Integrity check settings
on page 571.
Configure whether or not users can cancel remediation.
See Allowing users to delay or cancel Host Integrity remediation
on page 569.
Set up a notification to appear on the client computer when the Host
Integrity check either passes or fails. Use the notification to tell the end
user what to do next. For example, the end user may need to allow a
new patch to download and install on the client computer.
See Configuring notifications for Host Integrity checks on page 572.
Step 3: Set up peer-to-peer enforcement If the client computers being tested for Host Integrity compliance are on the
same network as already-compliant client computers, you can set up
peer-to-peer enforcement. You primarily use peer-to-peer enforcement for
file sharing.

on page 574.
Table 24-2 Tasks to set up Host Integrity policies (continued)
Step Description
Step 4: Set up a Quarantine policy for If the client computer fails the Host Integrity check and does not perform
non-compliant and unremediated remediation, you can quarantine the computer using a Quarantine policy.
computers (optional)
See Creating a Quarantine policy for a failed Host Integrity check
on page 573.

When you create a new Host Integrity policy, decide which type of requirements to
add.
Each requirement specifies the following items:
What conditions to check
For example, a requirement would check whether the latest set of virus definitions
is installed on the client computer.
What remediation actions the client takes if the client fails to pass the condition's
requirements
For example, the remediation action can include a URL where the client can
download and install the missing virus definitions.
Table 24-3 lists the types of requirements you can use.
Table 24-3 Requirement types for Host Integrity policies
Type Description
Predefined requirements Use a predefined requirement to check that a specific application or file is installed and
runs on the client. A predefined requirement checks for the status of any of the following
types of applications: antivirus software, antispyware software, a firewall, a patch, or a
service pack. For example, a patch requirement checks that the client computers run a
specific operating system patch.
If the predefined requirement does not have enough detail, add a custom requirement and
write a script.
See Adding predefined requirements to a Host Integrity policy on page 567.

Adding predefined requirements to a Host Integrity policy
Table 24-3 Requirement types for Host Integrity policies (continued)
Type Description
Custom requirements Templates are predefined custom requirements that Symantec wrote for commonly
from templates performed tasks. For example, the client can check that a password has been changed in
the last 42 days. You can also use the templates as a basis for writing a custom requirement
script.
Template requirements are available through the Host Integrity policy LiveUpdate service.
You must first set up LiveUpdate to download the Host Integrity templates to the
management server.
See Adding a custom requirement from a template on page 575.
on page 179.
Custom requirements Use a custom requirement if neither a predefined requirement nor the templates provide
the kind of check that you need. Custom requirements include the same fields as predefined
requirements, but provide more flexibility. For example, you can include an antispyware
application that is not included in the predefined list of antispyware applications.
You can simplify the management of required applications by including similar applications
in one custom requirement. For example, you can include Internet browsers such as Internet
Explorer and Mozilla Firefox in one requirement.
See Writing a customized requirement script on page 576.
Adding predefined requirements to a Host Integrity

policy
A predefined requirement in a Host Integrity policy checks that the client computer
runs any of several types of applications such as: antivirus, antispyware, firewall,
and so on.
You determine the particular application, such as specific patches for the Windows
7 operating system. You then specify the path where the client computers should
get the patch.
To add predefined requirements to a Host Integrity policy
1 In the console, open a Host Integrity policy.
2 On the Host Integrity policy page, click Requirements > Add.
3 In the Add Requirement dialog box, click either the Windows or Mac client
platform.
4 In the Select requirement drop-down list, select a predefined requirement,

and then click OK.
5 Configure the settings and remediation options for the requirement, and then
click OK.
on page 568.
For more information, click Help.
6 Click OK.
7 Assign the policy to groups or locations.
8 Click OK.
See Adding a custom requirement from a template on page 575.
Enabling and disabling Host Integrity requirements

When you add requirements to a Host Integrity policy, the requirements are enabled
by default. You must disable them from being used until they are needed. For
example, you can disable a requirement temporarily while you test your Host Integrity
policy.
To enable and disable Host Integrity requirements
1 In the console, open a Host Integrity policy and click Requirements.
2 On the Requirements page, do one of the following tasks:
To enable a requirement, check the Enable check box for the selected
requirement.
To disable a requirement, uncheck the Enable check box for the selected
requirement.
3 Click OK.
Setting up remediation for a predefined Host Integrity

requirement
If the Host Integrity check on a client shows that a requirement failed, you can
configure the policy to restore the necessary files. The client restores files by
downloading, installing, or running the required applications to meet the requirement.

The client computer can then pass the Host Integrity check.
You set up remediation in the same dialog box in which you add a predefined
requirement. You specify both the path from which the client downloads the
remediation files and how the remediation process is implemented.
You can also enable users to have some control over when they remediate their
computers. For example, a restart may cause users to lose their work, so users
may want to delay remediation until the end of the day.
After the download, installation, or execution of a command to restore a requirement,
the client always retests the requirement. Also, the client logs the results as pass
or fail.
To set up remediation for a predefined Host Integrity requirement
1 In the console, open a Host Integrity policy, and add a predefined requirement.
2 In the Add Requirement dialog box, click Install the <requirement type> if
it has not been installed on the client.
3 Click Download the installation package.
4 In the Download URL text box, type the URL from where the installation file
gets downloaded to the client computer.
5 In the Execute the command text box, do one of the following tasks:
If you want the client user to run the installation, leave the text box blank.
If you want the installation to run automatically, type %F%.
The %F% variable represents the last downloaded file. You can use any
command that can be run from Start > Run. For example, to install a patch
for Vista, type the command %Systemroot%\system32\wusa.exe /quiet
/norestart %F%.
6 Optionally set the options to delay or cancel remediation, and then click OK.
See Allowing users to delay or cancel Host Integrity remediation on page 569.
7 Click OK.
See Allowing the Host Integrity check to pass if a requirement fails on page 571.
Allowing users to delay or cancel Host Integrity remediation

You can allow the user to delay remediation to a more convenient time. If users
must restart their computers after they install the software for a requirement, they
may want to wait to restart their computers until later.
If the user delays remediation, any of the following events can happen:
The client logs the event. The Host Integrity status is shown as failed because
the requirement is not met. The user can manually run a new Host Integrity
check at any time from the client.
The Host Integrity check remediation message window does not appear again
until the client runs another Host Integrity check. If the user has chosen to be
reminded in five minutes, but the Host Integrity check runs every 30 minutes,
the message window does not appear until 30 minutes. To avoid confusion for
the user, you may want to synchronize the minimum time setting with the Host
Integrity check frequency setting.
If the user delays the remediation before the next Host Integrity check, the user
selection is overridden.
If the user delays a remediation action and the client receives an updated policy,
the amount of time available for remediation is reset to the new maximum.
To allow users to delay or cancel Host Integrity remediation
1 In the console, open a Host Integrity policy and add a requirement.
2 In the Add Requirement dialog box, set up remediation.
on page 568.
3 On the dialog box for the requirement, do one of the following tasks, and then
click OK:
To let the client user delay a file from being downloaded, check Specify
wait time before attempting the download again if the download fails.
To let the client user cancel remediation, check Allow the user to cancel
the download for Host Integrity remediation.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Advanced Settings.
6 On the Advanced Settings page, under Remediation Dialog Options,
configure the options for canceling the remediation.
7 To add a custom message on the client computer, click Set Additional Text.
The message you type appears on the client remediation window if the user
clicks Details.
8 Click OK.
Configuring the frequency of Host Integrity check settings
Configuring the frequency of Host Integrity check

settings
You can configure how the Host Integrity check is carried out and how the results
are handled.
After you add or update a Host Integrity policy, the policy is downloaded to the client
at the next heartbeat. The client then runs the Host Integrity check.
If the user switches to a location with a different policy while a Host Integrity check
is in progress, the client stops the check. The stop includes remediation attempts,
if required by the policy. The user may get a timeout message if a remediation
server connection is not available in the new location. When the check is complete,
the client discards the results. Then the client immediately runs a new Host Integrity
check based on the new policy for the location.
If the policy is the same in the new location, the client maintains any Host Integrity
timer settings. The client runs a new Host Integrity check only when required by
the policy settings.
To configure the frequency of Host Integrity check settings
1 In the console, open a Host Integrity policy, and click Advanced Settings.
2 On the Advanced Settings page, under Host Integrity Checking Options,
set the Host Integrity check frequency.
3 Click OK.
See Allowing the Host Integrity check to pass if a requirement fails on page 571.
Allowing the Host Integrity check to pass if a

requirement fails
Users may need to continue working even if their computers fail the Host Integrity
check. You can let the Host Integrity check pass even if a specific requirement fails.
The client logs the results but ignores the results.
You apply this setting for a specific requirement. If you want to apply this setting to
all requirements, you must enable the setting on each requirement separately. The
setting is disabled by default.
To allow the Host Integrity check to pass if a requirement fails

2 Add a predefined requirement or a custom requirement, and then click OK.
3 On the dialog box for the requirement, check Allow the Host Integrity check
to pass even if this requirement fails, and then click OK.
4 Click OK.

When the client runs a Host Integrity check, you can configure notifications to appear
when the following conditions occur:
A Host Integrity check fails.
A Host Integrity check passes after it previously failed.
The results of the Host Integrity check appear in the client's Security log. They are
uploaded to the Compliance log on the Monitors page of the management server.
The client's Security log contains several panes. If you select a Host Integrity check
event type, the lower left-hand pane lists whether the individual requirement has
passed or failed. The lower right-hand pane lists the conditions of the requirement.
You can configure the client to suppress the information in the lower right-hand
pane. Although you may need this information when troubleshooting, you may not
want users to view the information. For example, you may write a custom
requirement that specifies a registry value or a file name. The details are still
recorded in the Security log.
You can also enable a notification that gives the user the choice to download the
software immediately or delay the remediation.
See Allowing users to delay or cancel Host Integrity remediation on page 569.
To configure notifications for Host Integrity checks
2 On the Host Integrity page, click Advanced Settings.
3 On the Advanced Settings page, under Notifications, to show detailed
requirement information, check Show verbose Host Integrity Logging.
The lower right-hand pane of the client's Security log displays complete
information about a Host Integrity requirement.
Creating a Quarantine policy for a failed Host Integrity check
4 Check any of the following options:

Display a notification message when a Host Integrity check fails.
Display a notification message when a Host Integrity check passes
after previously failing.
5 To add a custom message, click Set Additional Text, type up to 512 characters
of additional text, and then click OK.
6 When you are finished with the configuration of this policy, click OK.
Creating a Quarantine policy for a failed Host Integrity

check
You use a Quarantine policy for the client computers that fail the Host Integrity
check, try to remediate, and then fail remediation again. After the client computer
fails remediation, it automatically switches to a Quarantine location, where a
Quarantine policy is applied to the computer. You use a Quarantine policy to apply
stricter restrictions to the failed computers. You can use any type of protection policy
for the Quarantine policy. For example, you can apply a Quarantine Firewall policy
that blocks a computer's access to the Internet.
While the client computer is in the Quarantine location, you can configure the Host
Integrity check to continue to run and try to remediate the computer. You may also
need to remediate the computer manually.
To create a Quarantine policy for a failed Host Integrity check
1 In the console, click Clients, and then click the Policies tab.
2 On the Policies tab, next to Quarantine Policies when Host Integrity Fails,
click Add a policy.
3 In the Add Quarantine Policy dialog box, choose a policy type and then click
Next.
4 Choose whether to use an existing policy, create a new policy, or import a
policy file, and then click Next.
In the Add Policy dialog box, choose the policy, and click OK.
In the Policy Type dialog box, configure the policy, and click OK.
In the Import Policy dialog box, locate the .dat file and click Import.
See Setting up remediation for a predefined Host Integrity requirement on page 568.
Blocking a remote computer by configuring peer-to-peer authentication
Blocking a remote computer by configuring

peer-to-peer authentication
You can use peer-to-peer authentication to allow a remote client computer (peer)
to connect to another client computer (authenticator) within the same corporate
network. The authenticator temporarily blocks inbound TCP and UDP traffic from
the remote computer until the remote computer passes the Host Integrity check.
You can use this enforcement technique when the remote computer is physically
remote. The technique leverages advanced capabilities of the Symantec Endpoint
Protection firewall to enhance access to shared files.
The Host Integrity check verifies the following characteristics of the remote computer:
The remote computer has Symantec Endpoint Protection installed.
The remote computer passed the Host Integrity check.
If the remote computer passes the Host Integrity check, the authenticator allows
inbound connections from the remote computer.
If the remote computer fails the Host Integrity check, the authenticator continues
to block the remote computer. You can specify how long the remote computer is
blocked before it can try to connect to the authenticator again. You can also specify
certain remote computers to always be allowed, even if they do not pass the Host
Integrity check. If you do not enable a Host Integrity policy for the remote computer,
the remote computer passes the Host Integrity check.
Peer-to-peer authentication information appears in the Network and Host Exploit
Mitigation Traffic log
Note: Peer-to-peer authentication works in server control and mixed control, but
not in client control.
To block a remote computer by configuring peer-to-peer authentication

2 On the Firewall policy page, click Peer-to-Peer Authentication Settings.
3 On the Peer-to-Peer Authentication Settings page, check Enable
peer-to-peer authentication.
4 Configure each value that is listed on the page.
For more information about these options, click Help.
5 To allow remote computers to connect to the client computer without being

authenticated, check Exclude hosts from authentication, and then click
Excluded Hosts.
The client computer allows traffic to the computers that are listed in the Host
list.
6 In the Excluded Hosts dialog box, click Add to add the remote computers that
do not have to be authenticated.
7 In the Host dialog box, define the host by IP address, IP range, or the subnet,
and then click OK.
8 In the Excluded Hosts dialog box, click OK.
9 Click OK.
10 If you are prompted, assign the policy to a group.

Instead of writing custom requirements from scratch, you can add common custom
requirements that Symantec created. You use LiveUpdate to download Host Integrity
content to the management server. The Host Integrity content includes templates.
You then add the custom requirements from the templates to the Host Integrity
policy.
To get the latest Host Integrity templates, you must configure a LiveUpdate Content
policy to download Host Integrity content.
If you import a requirement a second time and a requirement with the same name
exists, the imported requirement does not overwrite the existing requirement. Instead,
the imported requirement is shown with the number 2 next to its name on the
Requirements table.
To add a custom requirement from a template
platform.
4 In the Select requirement drop-down list, click Use existing templates, and
then click OK.
5 In the Host Integrity Online Updating dialog box, expand Templates, and
then select a template category.
6 Next to each template you want to add, click Add.
7 Click Import.
8 Click OK.

Custom requirements provide more flexibility than a predefined requirement. For
example, you can add an application that is not included in the predefined lists of
applications.
To build a custom requirement, you add one or more functions or IF..THEN
statements to a script. When you run the script, the Host Integrity check looks for
the condition that is listed under the IF node. Depending upon the condition, the
action that is listed under the THEN node is executed. The result (pass or fail) is
returned.
When you add many different conditions in one script to check for, this setting
applies to the entire custom requirement script. This choice may affect whether you
want to create several small custom requirements or a longer one that includes
multiple steps.
To write a customized requirement script
platform.
4 In the Select requirement drop-down list, select Custom requirement, and
then click OK.
5 In the Custom Requirement dialog box, type a name for the requirement.
The requirement name appears on the client computer. The name notifies the
user whether the requirement has passed or the requirement has failed or
prompts the user to download the software.
6 To add a condition, under Customized Requirement Script, click Add, and

then click IF..THEN.
Note: If you first add a function or an IF..THEN statement without filling out the
fields, an error appears. If you do not want to add the statement, right-click the
statement and click Delete.
7 With the highlight on the empty condition under the IF node, in the right pane,
select a condition.
The Host Integrity check looks for the condition on the client computer.
8 Under the Select a condition drop-down list, specify the additional information
that is required.
9 Under Customized Requirement Script, click THEN, and then click Add.
The THEN statement provides the action that should be taken if the condition
is true.
10 Click any of the following options:
IF..THEN
Use a nested IF..THEN statement to define conditions to check and actions
to take if the condition is evaluated as true.
Function
Use a function to define a remediation action, such as downloading a file.
Return
Use a return statement to specify whether the results of the evaluation of
the condition pass or fail. Every custom requirement must end with a pass
or fail statement.
Comment (optional)
Use a comment to explain the functionality of the conditions, functions, or
statements that you add.
11 In the right-hand pane, define the criteria that you added.

For more information on these options, click Help.
12 To add more nested statements, conditions, or functions, under Customized
Requirement Script, right-click the node, and then click Add.
13 Repeat steps 10 to 12 as needed.
14 To allow the Host Integrity check to pass no matter what the result, check Allow
the Host Integrity check to pass even if this requirement fails.
15 Click OK.
See Creating a test Host Integrity policy with a custom requirement script
on page 581.
About registry conditions

You can specify which Windows registry settings to check as part of an IF..THEN
statement for a customized requirement. You can also specify ways to change
registry values. Only HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT, HKEY_CURRENT_USER,
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, HKEY_USERS, and HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG are supported
registry settings.
When you specify registry keys, remember the following considerations:
The key name is limited to 255 characters.
If the registry key has a backslash (\) at the end, it is interpreted as a registry
key. For example: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\
If the registry key has no backslash at the end, then it is interpreted as a registry
name. For example: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ActiveTouch
When you specify registry values, remember the following considerations:
The value name is limited to 255 characters.
You can check for values as DWORD (decimal), Binary (hexadecimal), or String.
For DWORD values, you can check whether the value is less than, equal to,
not equal to, or greater than the specified value.
For string values, you can check whether the value data equals or contains a
given string. If you want the string comparison to be case-sensitive, check the
Match case check box.
For binary values, you can check whether the value data equals or contains a
given piece of binary data. Hexadecimal bytes represent the data. If you specify
value contains, you can also specify the offset for this data. If the offset is left
blank, it searches the value for the given binary data. Allowed values for the
hexadecimal edit box are 0 through 9 and a through f.
The following are examples of registry values:
DWORD 12345 (in decimal)

Binary 31 AF BF 69 74 A3 69 (in hexadecimal)
String ef4adf4a9d933b747361157b8ce7a22f
Writing a custom requirement to run a script on the client

In a custom Host Integrity requirement, you can specify a function that causes the
client to run a script. You can use a scripting language, such as JScript or VBScript,
which you can run with the Microsoft Windows Script Host.
To write a custom requirement to run a script on the client
platform.
then click OK.
5 In the Custom Requirement dialog box, under Customized Requirement
Script, select the node where you want to add the function.
6 Click Add, and then click Function.
7 Click Utility: Run a script.
8 Enter a file name for the script, such as myscript.js.
9 Type the content of the script.
10 In the Execute the command text field, type the command to use to execute
the script.
Use %F to specify the script file name. The script executes in system context.
11 To specify the amount of time to allow the Execute command to complete,
select one of the following options:
Do not wait
The action returns true if the execution is successful but it does not wait
until the execution is completed.
Wait until execution completes
Enter maximum time
Enter a time in seconds. If the Execute command does not complete in the
specified time, the file execution is terminated.
12 Optionally, uncheck Delete the temporary file after execution is completed

or terminated if you no longer need it.
This option is disabled and unavailable if Do not wait is selected.
13 Optionally, uncheck Show new process window if you do not want to see a
window that shows the requirement running the script.
Writing a custom requirement to set the timestamp of a file

In the custom Host Integrity requirement, you can specify the Set Timestamp
function to create a Windows registry setting to store the current date and time.
You can then use the Check Timestamp condition to find out if a specified amount
of time has passed since that timestamp was created.
For example, if the Host Integrity check runs every 2 minutes, you can specify an
action to occur at a longer interval such as a day. In this case, the stored time value
is removed. You could set the script to run as follows:
When the client receives a new profile
When the user manually runs a Host Integrity check
To write a custom requirement to set the timestamp of a file
platform.
then click OK.
7 Click Utility: Set Timestamp.
8 Type a name up to 255 characters long for the registry setting that stores the
date and the time information.
For example, enter Date and time of last file update:
To compare the current time to the stored time value

1 Write a custom requirement script.
Script, select the node where you want to add the condition.
3 Click Add, and then click IF..THEN.
4 Click Utility: Check Timestamp.
5 Type the name you entered for the saved time registry setting.
6 Specify an amount of time in minutes, hours, days, or weeks.
If the specified amount of time has passed, or if the value of the registry setting
is empty, the Set Timestamp function returns a value of True.
Writing a custom requirement to increment a registry DWORD value

For a custom requirement, you can increment the Windows registry DWORD value.
The Increment registry DWORD value function creates the key if it does not exist.
To write a custom requirement to increment the registry DWORD value
1 In the console, add a Host Integrity policy with a custom requirement script.
4 Click Registry: Increment registry DWORD value.
5 Enter the registry key to check in the Registry key field.
6 Enter a value name to be checked in the Value name field.
7 Click OK.
Creating a test Host Integrity policy with a custom

requirement script
The policy that you create for this test is for demonstration purposes only. The policy
detects the existence of an operating system and, when detected, generates a fail
event. Normally, you would generate fail events for other reasons.
Complete the following tasks:
Add a Host Integrity policy with a custom requirement script that checks for the
operating system on the client computer.
See To create a test Host Integrity policy with a custom requirement script
on page 582.
Test the Host Integrity policy you have created.
See To test the Host Integrity policy on the client computer on page 583.
To create a test Host Integrity policy with a custom requirement script
3 In the Add Requirement dialog box, click either Windows or Mac.
4 In the Select requirement drop-down list, click Custom requirement, and
then click OK.
5 In the Name box, type a name for the custom requirement.
Script, right-click Insert statements below, and then click Add > IF..THEN.
7 In the right pane, in the Select a condition drop-down list, click Utility:
Operating System is.
8 Under Operating system, check one or more operating systems that your
client computers run and that you can test.
9 Under Customized Requirement Script, right-click THEN //Insert statements
here, and then click Add > Function > Utility: Show message dialog.
10 In the Caption of the message box field, type a name to appear in the
message title.
11 In the Text of the message box field, type the text that you want the message
to display.
12 In the left pane, under Customized Requirement Script, click Pass.
13 In the right pane, under As the result of the requirement, return, check Fail,
and then click OK.
14 Click OK.
15 In the Host Integrity Policies dialog box, in the left panel, click Assign the
policy.
16 In the Assign Host Integrity Policy dialog box, select the groups to which
you want to assign the policy, and click Assign.
In the Assign Host Integrity Policy dialog box, click Yes to assign the Host
Integrity policy changes.
Note: One Host Integrity policy can be assigned to multiple groups, while a
single group can only have a single Host Integrity policy. You can replace an
existing policy with a different policy.
To test the Host Integrity policy on the client computer

1 In the console, click Clients > Clients.
2 Under Clients, click and highlight the group that contains the client computers
to which you applied the Host Integrity policy.
3 Under Tasks, click Run a command on the group > Update Content, and
then click OK.
4 Log on to the computer that runs the client and note the message box that
appears.
Because the rule triggered the fail test, the message box appears. After
testing, disable or delete the test policy.
See Writing a custom requirement to increment a registry DWORD value
on page 581.
See Writing a custom requirement to run a script on the client on page 579.
Chapter 25
Monitoring protection with
reports and logs
Monitoring endpoint protection
Configuring reporting preferences
Logging on to reporting from a standalone web browser
About the types of reports
Running and customizing quick reports
Saving and deleting custom reports
How to generate scheduled reports
Editing the filter used for a scheduled report
Printing and saving a copy of a report
Viewing logs

Symantec Endpoint Protection collects information about the security events in your
network. You can use log and reports to view these events, and you can use
notifications to stay informed about the events as they occur.
You can use the reports and logs to determine the answers to the following kinds
of questions:
Which computers are infected?
Monitoring protection with reports and logs 585
Which computers need scanning?

What risks were detected in the network?
Table 25-1 Tasks for monitoring endpoint protection
Task Description
Review the security The following list describes some of the tasks that you can perform to monitor the security
status of your network status of your client computers.
View the number of clients that did not get installed.

View the number of computers that are offline.
See Finding offline computers on page 589.
Obtain a count of detected viruses and other security risks and view details for each
virus and security risk.
See Viewing risks on page 590.
Obtain a count of unprotected computers in your network and view the details for each
computer.
See Viewing system protection on page 588.
View the number of computers with up-to-date virus and spyware definitions.
View the real-time operational status of your client computers.
Review the processes that run in your network.
See Monitoring SONAR detection results to check for false positives on page 488.
Locate which computers are assigned to which groups.
View a list of the Symantec Endpoint Protection software versions that are installed on
the clients and Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager servers in your network.
See Generating a list of the Symantec Endpoint Protection versions installed in your
network on page 593.
View the licensing information on the client computers, which includes the number of
valid seats, over-deployed seats, expired seats, and expiration date.
See Checking the license status in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on page 98.
See Viewing a daily or weekly status report on page 588.

Table 25-1 Tasks for monitoring endpoint protection (continued)
Task Description
Locate which client You can perform the following tasks to view or find which computers need additional
computers need protection:
protection
View the number of computers with Symantec Endpoint Protection disabled.
View the number of computers with out-of-date virus and spyware definitions.
Find the computers that have not been scanned recently.
See Finding unscanned computers on page 589.
View attack targets and sources.
See Viewing attack targets and sources on page 592.
View event logs.
Protect your client You can run commands from the console to protect the client computers.
computers
For example, you can eliminate security risks on client computers.
See Checking the scan action and rescanning the identified computers on page 393.
Configure notifications You can create and configure notifications to be triggered when certain security-related
to alert you when events occur. For example, you can set a notification to occur when an intrusion attempt
security events occur occurs on a client computer.
Create custom quick You can create and generate customized quick reports and you can schedule custom reports
reports and scheduled to run regularly with the information that you want to see.
reports for ongoing
monitoring
See Saving and deleting custom reports on page 599.
See Configuring reporting preferences on page 593.

Table 25-1 Tasks for monitoring endpoint protection (continued)
Task Description
Minimize the amount of For security purposes, you might need to retain log records for a longer period of time.
space that client logs However, if you have a large number of clients, you may have a large volume of client log
take data.
If your management server runs low on space, you might need to decrease the log sizes,
and the amount of time the database keeps the logs.
You can reduce the volume of log data by performing the following tasks:
Upload only some of the client logs to the server, and change the frequency with which
the client logs are uploaded.
See Specifying client log size and which logs to upload to the management server
on page 678.
Specify how many log entries the client computer can keep in the database, and how
long to keep them.
See Specifying the log size and how long to keep log entries in the database on page 679.
Filter the less important risk events and system events out so that less data is forwarded
to the server.
See Modifying log handling and notification settings on Windows computers on page 466.
Reduce the number of clients that each management server manages.
Reduce the heartbeat frequency, which controls how often the client logs are uploaded
to the server.
on page 162.
Reduce the amount of space in the directory where the log data is stored before being
inserted into the database.
See About increasing the disk space on the server for client log data on page 680.
Export log data to a Log data export is useful if you want to accumulate all logs from your entire network in a
centralized location centralized location. Log data export is also useful if you want to use a third-party program
such as a spreadsheet to organize or manipulate the data. You also might want to export
the data in your logs before you delete log records.
You can export the data in some logs to a comma-delimited text file. You can export other
logs' data to a tab-delimited text file that is called a dump file or to a Syslog server.
See Exporting log data to a text file on page 677.
See Exporting data to a Syslog server on page 676.
See Viewing logs from other sites on page 608.
Troubleshoot issues with You can troubleshoot some issues with reporting.
reports and logs
See Troubleshooting reporting issues on page 731.
Note: Symantec Endpoint Protection pulls the events that appear in the reports
from the event logs on your management servers. The event logs contain
time-stamps in the client computers' time zones. When the management server
receives the events, it converts the event time-stamps to Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT) for insertion into the database. When you create reports, the reporting
software displays information about events in the local time of the computer on
which you view the reports.
Viewing a daily or weekly status report

The Daily Status Report provides the following information:
Virus detection counts for cleaned, suspicious, blocked, quarantined, deleted,
newly infected, and still infected actions.
Virus definition distribution timeline
Top ten risks and infections
The Weekly Status Report provides the following information:
Computer status
Virus detection
Protection status snapshot
Virus definition distribution timeline
Risk distribution by day
Top ten risks and infections
To view the daily status report
2 On the Home page, in the Favorite Reports pane, click Symantec Endpoint
Protection Daily Status or Symantec Endpoint Protection Weekly Status.
Viewing system protection

System protection comprises the following information:
The number of computers with up-to-date virus definitions.
The number of computers with out-of-date virus definitions.
The number of computers that are offline.
The number of computers that are disabled.

To view system protection
System protection is shown in the Endpoint Status pane.
2 In the Endpoint Status pane, click View Details to view more system protection
information.
Finding offline computers

You can list the computers that are offline.
A client may be offline for a number of reasons. You can identify the computers
that are offline and remediate these problems in a number of ways.
To find offline computers
2 On the Home page, in the Endpoint Status pane, click the link that represents
the number of offline computers.
3 To get more information about offline computers, click the View Details link.
To view offline client computers in the Computer Status log
2 On the Logs tab, from the Log type list box, click Computer Status.
3 Click Additional Settings.
4 In the Online status list box, click Offline.
5 Click View Log.
By default, a list of the computers that have been offline for the past 24 hours
appears. The list includes each computer's name, IP address, and the last time
that it checked in with its server. You can adjust the time range to display offline
computers for any time range you want to see.
Finding unscanned computers

You can list the computers that need scanning.
To find unscanned computers

2 On the Quick Reports tab, specify the following information:
Report type You select Scan.
Selected report You select Computers Not Scanned.
3 Click Create Report.
Viewing risks
You can get information about the risks in your network.
To view infected and at risk computers
Report type Risk
Selected report Infected and At Risk Computers

To better understand the benefits and risks of not enabling certain features, you
can run the Risk Distribution by Protection Technology report. This report provides
the following information:
Signature-based detections of virus and spyware
SONAR detections
Download Insight detections
Intrusion Prevention and browser protection detections
To view the risks detected by the types of protection technology

Report type Risk
Selected report Risk Distribution by Protection Technology

To view newly detected risks
Report type Risk
Selected report New Risks Detected in the Network

To view a comprehensive risk report
Report type Risk
Select a report Comprehensive Risk Report
Running a report on the deployment status of clients

You can run several reports on the deployment status of your clients. For example,
you can see how many clients were successfully or unsuccessfully installed. You
can also see which clients have which protection technologies installed on them,
along with system information about the client computers.
To view the status of deployed clients

2 On the Quick Reports tab, click the Computer Status report type, and then
click one of the following reports:
For the deployment status of the clients, click Deployment Report.
For the protection status of the clients, click Client Inventory Details.
Viewing attack targets and sources

You can view attack targets and sources.
To view the top targets that were attacked
Report type You select Network and Host Exploit Mitigation.
Select a report You select Top Targets Attacked.

To view top attack sources
Select a report You select Top Sources of Attack.

A full report contains the following statistics:
Top attack types
Top targets of attack
Top sources of attack
Top traffic notifications
To view a full report on attack targets and sources

Select a report You select Full Report.
Configure option You can optionally select the reports to include in the full
report.
Generating a list of the Symantec Endpoint Protection versions

installed in your network
You can run a quick report from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager that
provides a list of the Symantec Endpoint Protection software versions that are
installed in your network. This list can be useful when you want to upgrade or migrate
your software from a previous version of Symantec Endpoint Protection. The list
includes local and remote computers.
You can save the report using MHTML webpage archive format.
See Printing and saving a copy of a report on page 602.
To generate a report that lists the Symantec Endpoint Protection software versions
2 For Report type, select Computer Status.
3 For Select a report, select Symantec Endpoint Protection Product Versions.
See Upgrade resources for Symantec Endpoint Protection on page 138.

You can configure the following reporting preferences:
The Home and Monitors pages display options
The Security Status thresholds
Logging on to reporting from a standalone web browser
The display options that are used for the logs and the reports, as well as legacy
log file uploading
The security status thresholds that you set determine when the Security Status
message on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Home page is considered
Poor. Thresholds are expressed as a percentage and reflect when your network is
considered to be out of compliance with your security policies.
For example, you can set the percentage of computers with out-of-date virus
definitions that triggers a poor security status. You can also set how many days old
the definitions need to be to qualify as out of date. Symantec Endpoint Protection
determines what is current when it calculates whether signatures or definitions are
out of date as follows. Its standard is the most current virus definitions and IPS
signature dates that are available on the management server on which the console
runs.
For information about the preference options that you can set, you can click Help
on each tab in the Preferences dialog box.
To configure reporting preferences
1 In the console, on the Home page, click Preferences.
2 Click one of the following tabs, depending on the type of preferences that you
want to set:
Home and Monitors
Security Status
Logs and Reports
3 Set the values for the options that you want to change.
4 Click OK.
Logging on to reporting from a standalone web

browser
You can access the Home, Monitors, and Reports pages from a standalone web
browser that is connected to your management server. However, all of the other
console functions are not available when you use a standalone browser.
Report pages and log pages always display in the language that the management
server was installed with. To display these pages when you use a remote console
or browser, you must have the appropriate font installed on the computer that you
use.
To access reporting from a web browser, you must have the following information:
The host name of the management server.

Your user name and password for the management server.
Note: You must have Internet Explorer 6.0 or later installed. Other web browsers
are not supported.
To log on to reporting from a standalone web browser

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type the default reporting URL into the address text box in the following format:
https://SEPMServer:8445/reporting
Note: When you enter the HTTPS standalone reporting URL in your browser,
the browser might display a warning. The warning appears because the
certificate that the management server uses is self-signed. To work around
this issue, you can install the certificate in your browsers trusted certificate
store. The certificate supports host names only, so use the host name in the
URL. If you use localhost, IP address, or the fully qualified domain name, a
warning still appears.
3 When the logon dialog box appears, type your user name and password, and
then click Log On.
If you have more than one domain, in the Domain text box, type your domain
name.

The following categories of reports are available:
Quick reports, which you run on demand.
Scheduled reports, which run automatically based on a schedule that you
configure.
Reports include the event data that is collected from your management servers as
well as from the client computers that communicate with those servers. You can
customize reports to provide the information that you want to see.
The quick reports are predefined, but you can customize them and save the filters
that you used to create the customized reports. You can use the custom filters to
create custom scheduled reports. When you schedule a report to run, you can
configure it to be emailed to one or more recipients.
A scheduled report always runs by default. You can change the settings for any
scheduled report that has not yet run. You can also delete a single scheduled report
or all of the scheduled reports.
Table 25-2 Report types available as quick reports and scheduled reports
Report type Description
Audit Displays the information about the policies that clients and
locations use currently. It includes information about policy
modification activities, such as the event times and types,
policy modifications, domains, sites, administrators, and
descriptions.
Application and Device Displays the information about events where some type of
Control behavior was blocked. These reports include information
about application security alerts, blocked targets, and blocked
devices. Blocked targets can be Windows registry keys, DLLs,
files, and processes.
Compliance Displays the information about the how many client passed
or failed the Host Integrity check.
Computer Status Displays the information about the operational status of the
computers in your network, such as which computers have
security features turned off. These reports include information
about versions, the clients that have not checked in to the
server, client inventory, and online status.
Network and Host Exploit Displays the information about intrusion prevention, attacks
Mitigation on the firewall, firewall traffic and packets, and attacks on
vulnerabilities in your network.
The Network and Host Exploit Mitigation reports let you track
a computers activity and its interaction with other computers
and networks. They record information about the traffic that
tries to enter or exit the computers through their network
connections. They also provide information about Generic
Exploit Mitigation events.
Risk Displays the information about risk events on your

management servers and their clients. It includes information
about SONAR scans.
Scan Displays the information about virus and spyware scan

activity.
Table 25-2 Report types available as quick reports and scheduled reports
(continued)
Report type Description
System Displays the information about event times, event types, sites,
domains, servers, and severity levels. The System reports
contain information that is useful for troubleshooting client
problems.
If you have multiple domains in your network, many reports let you view data for
all domains, one site, or a few sites. The default for all quick reports is to show all
domains, groups, servers, and so on, as appropriate for the report you select to
create.

Quick reports are predefined, customizable reports. These reports include event
data collected from your management servers as well as the client computers that
communicate with those servers. Quick reports provide information on events
specific to the settings you configure for the report. You can save the report settings
so that you can run the same report at a later date, and you can print and save
reports.
Quick reports are static; they provide information specific to the time frame you
specify for the report. Alternately, you can monitor events in real time using the
logs.
To run a quick report
2 On the Quick Reports tab, in the Report type list box, select the type of report
that you want to run.
3 In the Select a report list box, select the name of the report you want to run.
To customize a quick report
2 On the Quick Reports tab, in the Report type list box, select the type of report
that you want to customize.
3 In the Select a report list box, select the name of the report you want to
customize.
For the Network Compliance Status report and the Compliance Status
report, in the Status list box, select a saved filter configuration that you want
to use, or leave the default filter.
For the Top Risk Detections Correlation report, you can select values for
the X-axis and Y-axis list boxes to specify how you want to view the report.
For the Scan Statistics Histogram Scan report, you can select values for Bin
width and Number of bins.
For some reports, you can specify how to group the report results in the Group
list box. For other reports, you can select a target in the Target field on which
to filter report results.
4 In the Use a saved filter list box, select a saved filter configuration that you
want to use, or leave the default filter.
5 Under What filter settings would you like to use?, in the Time range list
box, select the time range for the report.
6 If you select Set specific dates, then use the Start date and End date list
boxes. These options set the time interval that you want to view information
about.
When you generate a Computer Status report and select Set specific dates,
you specify that you want to see all entries that involve a computer that has
not checked in with its server since the time you specify in the date and time
fields.
7 If you want to configure additional settings for the report, click Additional
Settings and set the options that you want.
You can click Tell me more to see descriptions of the filter options in the
context-sensitive help.
Note: The filter option text boxes that accept wildcard characters and search
for matches are not case-sensitive. The ASCII asterisk character is the only
asterisk character that can be used as a wildcard character.
You can save the report configuration settings if you think you will want to run
this report again in the future.
See Printing and saving a copy of a report on page 602.

You can save custom report settings in a filter so that you can generate the report
again at a later date. When you save your settings, they are saved in the database.
The name that you give to the filter appears in the Use a saved filter list box for
that type of logs and reports.
Note: The filter configuration settings that you save are available for your user logon
account only. Other users with reporting privileges do not have access to your saved
settings.
See Editing the filter used for a scheduled report on page 601.
You can delete any report configuration that you create. When you delete a
configuration, the report is no longer available. The default report configuration
name appears in the Use a saved report list box and the screen is repopulated
with the default configuration settings.
Note: If you delete an administrator from the management server, you have the
option to save the reports that were created by the deleted administrator. The
ownership of the reports is changed, and the report names are changed. The new
report name is in the format "OriginalName('AdminName')". For example, a report
that was created by administrator JSmith, named Monday_risk_reports, would
be renamed Monday_risk_reports(JSmith).

To save a custom report
2 On the Quick Reports tab, select a report type from the list box.
3 Change any basic settings or additional settings for the report.
4 Click Save Filter.
5 In the Filter name text box, type a descriptive name for this report filter. Only
the first 32 characters of the name that you give display when the filter is added
to the Use a saved filter list.
6 Click OK.
7 When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK.
After you save a filter, it appears in the Use a saved filter list box for related
reports and logs.
To delete a custom report
2 On the Quick Reports tab, select a report type.
3 In the Use saved filter list box, select the name of the filter that you want to
delete.
4 Click the Delete icon beside the Use a saved filter list box.
5 When the confirmation dialog box appears, click Yes.

Scheduled reports are the reports that run automatically based on the schedule
that you configure. Scheduled reports are emailed to recipients, so you must include
the email address of at least one recipient. After a report runs, the report is emailed
to the recipients that you configure as an .mht file attachment.
The data that appears in the scheduled reports is updated in the database every
hour. At the time that the management server emails a scheduled report, the data
in the report is current to within one hour.
The other reports that contain data over time are updated in the database based
on the upload interval that you configured for the client logs.
on page 678.
Note: If you have multiple servers within a site that share a database, only the
first-installed server runs the reports scheduled for the site. This default ensures
that all the servers in the site do not run the same scheduled scans simultaneously.
If you want to designate a different server to run scheduled reports, you can
configure this option in the local site properties.
To generate scheduled reports

2 On the Scheduled Reports tab, click Add.
3 In the Report name text box, type a descriptive name and optionally, type a
longer description.
Although you can paste more than 255 characters into the description text box,
only 255 characters are saved in the description.
4 If you do not want this report to run until another time, uncheck the Enable
this scheduled report check box.
5 Select the report type that you want to schedule from the list box.
6 Select the name of the specific report that you want to schedule from the list
box.
7 Select the name of the saved filter that you want to use from the list box.
8 In the Run every text box, select the time interval at which you want the report
to be emailed to recipients (hours, days, weeks, months). Then, type the value
for the time interval you selected. For example, if you want the report to be
sent to you every other day, select days and then type 2.
9 In the Start after text box, type the date that you want the report to start or
click the calendar icon and select the date. Then, select the hour and minute
from the list boxes.
10 Under Report Recipients, type one or more comma-separated email
addresses.
You must already have set up mail server properties for email notifications to
work.
11 Click OK to save the scheduled report configuration.

You can change the settings for any report that you have already scheduled. The
next time the report runs it uses the new filter settings. You can also create additional
scheduled reports, which you can base on a previously saved report filter.
Filter storage is based in part on the creator, so problems do not occur when two
different users create a filter with the same name. However, an individual user or
two users who log on to the default admin account should not create filters with the
same name.
If users create filters with the same name, a conflict can occur under two conditions:
Two users are logged on to the default admin account on different sites and
each creates a filter with the same name.
One user creates a filter, logs on to a different site, and immediately creates a
filter with the same name.
If either condition occurs before site replication takes place, the user subsequently
sees two filters with the same name in the filter list. Only one of the filters is usable.
If this problem occurs, it is a best practice to delete the usable filter and recreate it
with a different name. When you delete the usable filter, you also delete the unusable
filter.
Note: When you associate a saved filter with a scheduled report, make sure that
the filter does not contain custom dates. If the filter specifies a custom date, you
get the same report every time the report runs.

To edit the filter used for a scheduled report
2 Click Scheduled Reports.
3 In the list of reports, click the scheduled report that you want to edit.
4 Click Edit Filter.
5 Make the filter changes that you want.
If you want to retain the original report filter, give this edited filter a new name.
7 Click OK.

You can print a report or save a copy of a Quick Report. You cannot print scheduled
reports. A saved file or printed report provides a snapshot of the current data in
your reporting database so that you can retain a historical record.
Note: By default, Internet Explorer does not print background colors and images.
If this printing option is disabled, the printed report may look different from the report
that you created. You can change the settings in your browser to print background
colors and images.

Viewing logs
To print a copy of a report

1 In the report window, click Print.
2 In the Print dialog box, select the printer you want, if necessary, and then click
Print.
When you save a report, you save a snapshot of your security environment that is
based on the current data in your reporting database. If you run the same report
later, based on the same filter configuration, the new report shows different data.
To save a copy of a report
1 In the report window, click Save.
2 In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
3 In the Save As dialog box, in the Save in selection dialog box, browse to the
location where you want to save the file.
4 In the File name list box, change the default file name, if desired.
5 Click Save.
The report is saved in MHTML Web page archive format in the location you
selected.
6 In the Download complete dialog box, click Close.
Viewing logs
You can generate a list of events to view from your logs that are based on a
collection of filter settings that you select. Each log type and content type have a
default filter configuration that you can use as-is or modify. You can also create
and save new filter configurations. These new filters can be based on the default
filter or on an existing filter that you created previously. If you save the filter
configuration, you can generate the same log view at a later date without having
to configure the settings each time. You can delete your customized filter
configurations if you no longer need them.
Note: If database errors occur when you view the logs that include a large amount
of data, you might want to change the database timeout parameters.
If you get CGI or terminated process errors, you might want to change other timeout
parameters.
See Changing timeout parameters for reviewing reports and logs on page 732.
Viewing logs
Because logs contain some information that is collected at intervals, you can refresh
your log views. To configure the log refresh rate, display the log and select from
the Auto-Refresh list box at the top right on that log's view.
Note: If you view log data by using specific dates, the data stays the same when
you click Auto-Refresh.
Reports and logs always display in the language that the management server was
installed with. To display these when you use a remote Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager console or browser, you must have the appropriate font installed
on the computer that you use.
See About log types on page 605.
See Saving and deleting custom logs by using filters on page 607.
To view a log
1 In the main window, click Monitors.
2 On the Logs tab, from the Log type list box, select the type of log that you
want to view.
3 For some types of logs, a Log content list box appears. If it appears, select
the log content that you want to view.
4 In the Use a saved filter list box, select a saved filter or leave the value Default.
5 Select a time from the Time range list box or leave the default value. If you
select Set specific dates, then set the date or dates and time from which you
want to display entries.
6 Click Additional Settings to limit the number of entries you display.
You can also set any other available Additional Settings for the type of log
that you selected.
Note: The filter option fields that accept wildcard characters and search for
matches are not case-sensitive. The ASCII asterisk character is the only asterisk
character that can be used as a wildcard character.
7 After you have the view configuration that you want, click View Log.
The log view appears in the same window.
Viewing logs
About log types

Logs contain records about client configuration changes, security-related activities,
and errors. These records are called events. The logs display these events with
any relevant additional information. Security-related activities include information
about virus detections, computer status, and the traffic that enters or exits the client
computer.
Logs are an important method for tracking each client computers activity and its
interaction with other computers and networks. You can use this data to analyze
the overall security status of the network and modify the protection on the client
computers. You can track the trends that relate to viruses, security risks, and attacks.
If several people use the same computer, you might be able to identify who
introduces risks, and help that person to use better precautions.
You can view the log data on the Logs tab of the Monitors page.
The management server regularly uploads the information in the logs from the
clients to the management server. You can view this information in the logs or in
reports. Because reports are static and do not include as much detail as the logs,
you might prefer to monitor the network by using logs.
In addition to using the logs to monitor your network, you can take the following
actions from various logs:
Run commands on client computers.
Add several kinds of exceptions.
Delete files from the Quarantine.
See Using the Risk log to delete quarantined files on your client computers
on page 440.
Table 25-3 describes the different types of content that you can view and the actions
that you can take from each log.
Table 25-3 Log types
Log type Contents and actions
Audit The Audit log contains information about policy modification activity.
Available information includes the event time and type; the policy modified; the domain,
site, and user name involved; and a description.
No actions are associated with this log.

Viewing logs
Table 25-3 Log types (continued)
Application and Device The Application Control log and the Device Control log contain information about events
Control where some type of behavior was blocked.
The following Application and Device Control logs are available:
Application Control, which includes information about Tamper Protection

Device Control
Available information includes the time the event occurred, the action taken, and the
domain and computer that were involved. It also includes the user that was involved,
the severity, the rule that was involved, the caller process, and the target.
You can create an application control or Tamper Protection exception from the
Application Control log.

Compliance The compliance logs contain information about client Host Integrity.
No actions are associated with these logs.
Computer Status The Computer Status log contains information about the real-time operational status
of the client computers in the network.
Available information includes the computer name, IP address, infected status,

protection technologies, Auto-Protect status, versions, and definitions date. It also
includes the user, last check-in time, policy, group, domain, and restart required status.
You can also clear the infected status of computers from this log.
Note: This log contains information that is collected from both Windows clients and
Mac clients.
Network and Host Exploit The Network and Host Exploit Mitigation logs contain information about intrusion
Mitigation prevention, the firewall, and Generic Exploit Mitigation.
The logs contain information about attacks on the firewall and on intrusion prevention.
Information is available about denial-of-service attacks, port scans, and the changes
that were made to executable files. They also contain information about the connections
that are made through the firewall (traffic), and the data packets that pass through.
These logs also contain some of the operational changes that are made to computers,
such as detecting network applications, and configuring software.
The logs also show information about Generic Exploit Mitigation events.
Viewing logs
Table 25-3 Log types (continued)
SONAR The SONAR log contains information about the threats that have been detected during
SONAR threat scanning. These are real-time scans that detect potentially malicious
applications when they run on your client computers.
The information includes items such as the time of occurrence, event actual action,
user name, Web domain, application, application type, file, and path.
Risk The Risk log contains information about risk events. Available information includes the
event time, event actual action, user name, computer, and domain, risk name and
source, count, and file and path.
Scan The Scan log contains information about virus and spyware scan activity from both
Windows clients and Mac clients.
Available information includes items such as the scan start, computer, IP address,
status, duration, detections, scanned, omitted, and domain.
System The system logs contain information about events such as when services start and
stop.
Saving and deleting custom logs by using filters

You can construct custom filters by using the Basic Settings and Additional
Settings to change the information that you want to see. You can save your filter
settings to the database so that you can generate the same view again in the future.
When you save your settings, they are saved in the database. The name you give
to the filter appears in the Use a saved filter list box for that type of logs and reports.
Note: If you selected Past 24 hours as the time range for a log filter, the 24-hour
time range begins when you first select the filter. If you refresh the page, the start
of the 24-hour range does not reset. If you select the filter, and wait to view a log,
the time range starts when you select the filter. It does not start when you view the
log.
If you want to make sure the past 24-hour range starts now, select a different time
range and then reselect Past 24 hours.
Viewing logs
To save a custom log by using a filter

1 In the main window, click Monitors.
2 On the Logs tab, select the type of log view that you want to configure a filter
for from the Log type list box.
3 For some types of logs, a Log content list box appears. If it appears, select
the log content that you want to configure a filter for.
4 In the Use a saved filter list box, select the filter that you want to start from.
For example, select the default filter.
5 Under What filter settings would you like to use, click Additional Settings.
6 Change any of the settings.
8 In the dialog box that appears, in the Filter name box, type the name that you
want to use for this log filter configuration. Only the first 32 characters of the
name that you give display when the saved filter is added to the filter list.
9 Click OK and your new filter name is added to the Use a saved filter list box.
To delete a saved filter
1 In the Use a saved filter list box, select the name of the log filter that you want
to delete.
2 Beside the Use a saved filter list box, click the Delete icon.
3 When you are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the filter, click Yes.
Viewing logs from other sites

If you want to view the logs from another site, you must log on to a server at the
remote site from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console. If you have
an account on a server at the remote site, you can log on remotely and view that
site's logs.
If you have configured replication partners, you can choose to have all the logs
from the replication partners copied to the local partner and vice versa. If you choose
to replicate logs, by default you see the information from both your site and the
replicated sites when you view any log. If you want to see a single site, you must
filter the data to limit it to the location you want to view. If you choose to replicate
logs, be sure that you have sufficient disk space for the additional logs on all the
replication partners.
Viewing logs
To view the logs from another site

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type the following in the address text box as follows:
Where SEPMServer is the server name or IP address.
The console then downloads. The computer from which you log on must have
the Java Runtime Environment (JRE) installed. If it does not, you are prompted
to download and install it. Follow the prompts to install the JRE.
3 In the console logon dialog box, type your user name and password.
4 In the Server text box, if it does not fill automatically, type the server name or
IP address and port number 8443 as follows:
5 Click Log On.
Chapter 26
Managing notifications
Establishing communication between the management server and email servers
Viewing and acknowledging notifications
Saving and deleting administrative notification filters
Setting up administrator notifications
How upgrades from another version affect notification conditions
Notifications alert administrators and computer users about potential security
problems.
Some notification types contain default values when you configure them. These
guidelines provide reasonable starting points depending on the size of your
environment, but they may need to be adjusted. Trial and error may be required to
find the right balance between too many and too few notifications for your
environment. Set the threshold to an initial limit, then wait for a few days. After a
few days, you can adjust the notifications settings.
For virus, security risk, and firewall event detection, suppose that you have fewer
than 100 computers in a network. A reasonable starting point in this network is to
configure a notification when two risk events are detected within one minute. If you
have 100 to 1000 computers, detecting five risk events within one minute may be
a more useful starting point.
You manage notifications on the Monitors page. You can use the Home page to
determine the number of unacknowledged notifications that need your attention.
Managing notifications 611
Table 26-1 lists the tasks you can perform to manage notifications.
Table 26-1 Notification management
Task Description
Learn about notifications Learn how notifications work.
See How notifications work on page 611.
Confirm that the email Notifications sent by email require that the Symantec Endpoint
server is configured to Protection Manager and the email server are properly
enable email notifications configured.
See Establishing communication between the management

server and email servers on page 618.
Review preconfigured Review the preconfigured notifications provided by Symantec

notifications Endpoint Protection.
See What are the types of notifications and when are they
sent? on page 612.
View unacknowledged View and respond to unacknowledged notifications.

notifications
See Viewing and acknowledging notifications on page 618.
Configure new notifications Optionally create notifications to remind you and other
administrators about important issues.
See About turning on notifications for remote clients

on page 269.
Create notification filters Optionally create filters to expand or limit your view of all of the
notifications that have been triggered.
See Saving and deleting administrative notification filters

on page 619.
How notifications work

Notifications alert administrators and users about potential security problems. For
example, a notification can alert administrators about an expired license or a virus
infection.
Events trigger a notification. A new security risk, a hardware change to a client
computer, or a trial license expiration can trigger a notification. Actions can then be
taken by the system once a notification is triggered. An action might record the
notification in a log, or run a batch file or an executable file, or send an email.
Note: Email notifications require that communications between the Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager and the email server are properly configured.
You can set a damper period for notifications. The damper period specifies the time
that must pass before the notification condition is checked for new data. When a
notification condition has a damper period, the notification is only issued on the first
occurrence of the trigger condition within that period. For example, suppose a
large-scale virus attack occurs, and that there is a notification condition configured
to send an email whenever viruses infect five computers on the network. If you set
a one hour damper period for that notification condition, the server sends only one
notification email each hour during the attack.
Note: If you set the Damper period to None for notifications about critical events,
you should make sure that clients can upload critical events immediately. The Let
clients upload critical events immediately option is enabled by default and
configured in the Communications Settings dialog box.

What are the types of notifications and when are they sent?
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager provides notifications for administrators.
You can customize most of these notifications to meet your particular needs. For
example, you can add filters to limit a trigger condition only to specific computers.
Or you can set notifications to take specific actions when they are triggered.
By default, some of these notifications are enabled when you install Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. Notifications that are enabled by default are configured
to log to the server and send email to system administrators.
See How upgrades from another version affect notification conditions on page 622.
Table 26-2 Preconfigured notifications
Notification Description
Authentication failure A configurable number of logon failures in a defined

period of time triggers the Authentication failure
notification. You can set the number of logon failures
and the time period within which they must occur to
trigger the notification.
Client list changed This notification triggers when there is a change to the
existing client list. This notification condition is enabled
by default.
Client list changes can include:
The addition of a client

A change in the name of a client
The deletion of a client
A change in the hardware of a client
A change in the Unmanaged Detector status of a
client
A client mode change
Client security alert This notification triggers upon any of the following
security events:
Compliance events
Network and Host Exploit Mitigation events
Traffic events
Packet events
Device control events
Application control events
You can modify this notification to specify the type,

severity, and frequency of events that determine when
these notifications are triggered.
Some of these occurrence types require that you also

enable logging in the associated policy.
Note: If you set the notification damper period to None,
you should make sure that clients can upload critical
events immediately. The Let clients upload critical
events immediately option is enabled by default and
configured in the Communications Settings dialog
box.
Table 26-2 Preconfigured notifications (continued)
Download Protection content Alerts the administrators about out-of-date Download

out-of-date Protection content. You can specify the age at which
the definitions trigger the notification.
File reputation lookup alert Alerts the administrators when a file is submitted to
Symantec for a reputation check. SONAR and Download
Insight use file reputation lookups and submit files to
Symantec automatically.
The File Reputation Detection notification is enabled

by default.
Forced application detected This notification triggers when an application on the

commercial application list is detected or when an
application on the list of applications that the
administrator monitors is detected.
Generic Exploit Mitigation This notification triggers when a Windows vulnerability

Detection attack is detected.
IPS signature out-of-date Alerts the administrators about out-of-date IPS

signatures. You can specify the age at which the
definitions trigger the notification.
Licensing issue Paid license expiration
This notification alerts administrators and, optionally,

partners, about the paid licenses that have expired or
that are about to expire.
This notification is enabled by default.
Over-deployment
This notification alerts administrators and, optionally,

partners, about over-deployed paid licenses.
Trial license expiration
This notification alerts administrators about expired trial

licenses and the trial licenses that are due to expire in
60, 30, and 7 days.
This notification is enabled by default if there is a trial

license. It is not enabled by default if your license is due
for an upgrade or has been paid.
Network load alert: requests for Alerts the administrators when too many clients request
virus and spyware full a full definition set, and to potential network bandwidth
definitions issues.
New learned application This notification triggers when application learning

detects a new application.
New risk detected This notification triggers whenever virus and spyware
scans detect a new risk.
box.
New software package This notification triggers when a new software package
downloads or the following occurs:
LiveUpdate downloads a client package.

The management server is upgraded.
The console manually imports client packages.
You can specify whether the notification is triggered

only by new security definitions, only by new client
packages, or by both. By default, the Client package
setting option is enabled and the Security definitions
option is disabled for this condition.
New user-allowed download This notification triggers when a client computer allows
an application that Download Insight detected. An
administrator can use this information to help evaluate
whether to block or allow the application.
Power Eraser recommended Alerts the administrators when a regular scan cannot
repair an infection, so the administrators can use Power
Eraser.

Risk outbreak This notification alerts administrators about security risk

outbreaks. You set the number and type of occurrences
of new risks and the time period within which they must
occur to trigger the notification. Types of occurrences
include occurrences on any computer, occurrences on
a single computer, or occurrences on distinct computers.
This notification condition is enabled by default.

box.
Server health Server health issues trigger the notification. The

notification lists the server name, the health status, the
reason, and the last online or offline status.
Single risk event This notification triggers upon the detection of a single
risk event and provides details about the risk. The details
include the user and the computer involved, and the
actions that the management server took.
box.
SONAR definitions out-of-date Alerts the administrators about out-of-date SONAR

definitions. You can specify the age at which the
System event This notification triggers upon certain system events

and provides the number of such events that were
detected. System events include management server
activities, replication failures, backups, and system
errors.
Unmanaged computers This notification triggers when the management server

detects unmanaged computers on the network. The
notification provides details including the IP address,
the MAC address, and the operating system of each
unmanaged computer.
Upgrade license expiration Upgrades from previous versions of Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager to the current version are granted
an upgrade license. This notification triggers when the
upgrade license is due to expire.
This notification appears only after an upgrade.
Virus definitions out-of-date Alerts the administrators about out-of-date virus

definitions. You can specify the age at which the
About partner notifications

When the management server detects that clients have paid licenses that are about
to expire or that have expired, it can send a notification to the system administrator.
Similarly, the management server can send a notification to the administrator when
it detects that licenses are over-deployed.
However, in both of these cases, the resolution of the problem may require the
purchase of new licenses or renewals. In many installations the server administrator
may not have the authority to make such purchases, but instead relies upon a
Symantec partner to perform this task.
The management server provides the ability to maintain the contact information for
the partner. This information can be supplied when the server is installed. The
system administrator can also supply or edit the partner information at any time
after the installation in the Licenses pane of the console.
When the partner contact information is available to the management server, paid
license-related notifications and over-deployed license notifications are sent
automatically both to the administrator and to the partner.
Establishing communication between the management server and email servers
Establishing communication between the

management server and email servers
For the management server to send automatic email notifications, you must configure
the connection between the management server and the email server.
To establish communication between the management server and email servers
2 Under Servers, select the management server for which you want to establish
a connection to the email server.
4 In the Server Properties dialog box, click the Email Server tab.
5 Enter the email server settings.
For details about setting options in this dialog box, click Help.
6 Click OK.
Viewing and acknowledging notifications

You can view unacknowledged notifications or all notifications. You can acknowledge
an unacknowledged notification. You can view all the notification conditions that
are currently configured in the console.
The Security Status pane on the Home page indicates the number of
unacknowledged notifications that have occurred during the last 24 hours.
To view recent unacknowledged notifications
2 On the Home page, in the Security Status pane, click View Notifications.
A list of recent unacknowledged notifications appears under the Notifications
tab.
3 Optionally, in the list of notifications, in the Report column, click the document
icon if it exists.
The notification report appears in a separate browser window. If there is no
document icon, all of the notification information appears in the Message
column in the list of notifications.
To view all notifications

1 In the console, click Monitors and then click the Notifications tab.
2 Optionally, on the Notifications tab, from the Use a saved filter menu, select
a saved filter.
See Saving and deleting administrative notification filters on page 619.
3 Optionally, on the Notifications tab, from the Time range menu, select a time
range.
4 On the Notifications tab, click View Notifications.
To acknowledge a notification
1 View notifications.
See To view recent unacknowledged notifications on page 618.
See To view all notifications on page 619.
2 On the Notifications tab, in the list of notifications, in the Ack column, click
the red icon to acknowledge the notification.
To view all configured notification conditions
2 On the Monitors page, on the Notifications tab, click Notification Conditions.
All the notification conditions that are configured in the console are shown. You
can filter the list by selecting a notification type from the Show notification
type menu.

You can use filters to expand or limit your view of administrative notifications in the
console. You can save new filters and you can delete previously saved filters.
You can create a saved filter that uses any combination of the following criteria:
Time range
Acknowledged status
Notification type
Created by
Notification name
For example, you can create a filter that only displays unacknowledged risk outbreak
notifications posted during the past 24 hours.
To add a notification filter
2 On the Monitors page, on the Notifications tab, click Additional Settings.
3 Under the What filter settings would you like to use? heading, set the criteria
for the filter.
5 On the Notifications tab, in the Filter name box, type a filter name, and then
click OK.
To delete a saved notification filter
2 On the Monitors page, on the Notifications tab, on the Use a saved filter
menu, choose a filter.
3 At the right of the Use a saved filter menu, click the X icon.
4 In the Delete Filter dialog box, click Yes.

You can configure notifications to alert you and other administrators when particular
kinds of events occur. You can also add the conditions that trigger notifications to
remind you to perform important tasks. For example, you can add a notification
condition to inform you when a license has expired, or when a security risk has
been detected.
When a notification triggers, it can perform specific actions, such as the following:
Log the notification to the database.
Send an email to one or more individuals.
Run a batch file.
Note: To send email notifications, you must configure a mail server to communicate
with the management server.

You choose the notification condition from a list of available notification types.
Once you choose the notification type, you then configure it as follows:
Specify filters.
Not all notification types provide filters. When they do, you can use the filters to
limit the conditions that trigger the notification. For example, you can restrict a
notification to trigger only when computers in a specific group are affected.
Specify settings.
All notification types provide settings, but the specific settings vary from type to
type. For example, a risk notification may let you specify what type of scan
triggers the notification.
Specify actions.
All notification types provide actions you can specify.
Note: If you set the Damper period to None for notifications about critical events,
you should make sure that clients can upload critical events immediately. The
relevant notifications include the following: Client security alert, Single risk event,
New risk detected, and Risk outbreak. The Let clients upload critical events
immediately option is enabled by default and configured in the Communications
Settings dialog box.
To set up an administrator notification

2 On the Monitors page, on the Notifications tab, click Notification Conditions.
3 On the Notifications tab, click Add, and then click a notification type.
4 In the Add Notification Condition dialog box, provide the following information:
In the Notification name text box, type a name to label the notification
condition.
Under What filter settings would you like to use, if it is present, specify
the filter settings for the notification condition.
Under What settings would you like for this notification, specify the
conditions that trigger the notification.
Under What should happen when this notification is triggered, specify
the actions that are taken when the notification is triggered.
5 Click OK.
How upgrades from another version affect

notification conditions
When Symantec Endpoint Protection is installed on a new server, many of the
preconfigured notification conditions are enabled by default. An upgrade to Symantec
Endpoint Protection from a previous version, however, can affect which notification
conditions are enabled by default. It can also affect their default settings.
The following notification conditions are enabled by default in a new installation of
Symantec Endpoint Protection:
Client list changed
New client software
Over deployment issue
Paid license issue
Risk outbreak
Server health
Trialware license expiration
Virus definitions out-of-date
When an administrator upgrades the software from a previous version, all existing
notification conditions from the previous version are preserved. However, existing
New software package notification conditions become New client software
notification conditions. The New client software condition has two settings that
are not present in the New software package condition: Client package and
Security definitions. When the software is upgraded, both of these settings are
enabled for notification conditions of this type that are preserved across the upgrade.
New client software notifications that are conditions created after the upgrade,
however, have the Client package setting enabled and the Security definitions
setting disabled by default.
Note: When the Security definitions setting in the New client software notification
condition is enabled, it may cause a large number of notifications to be sent. This
situation can occur when there are many clients or when there are frequently
scheduled security definition updates. If you do not want to receive frequent
notifications about security definition updates, you can edit the notification condition
to disable the Security definitions setting
Several notification conditions may have a new setting that did not appear in earlier
versions: Send email to system administrators. If that setting is new for a
notification condition, it is disabled by default for any existing condition of that type
following the upgrade.
When a default notification condition type has not been added in a previous
installation, that notification condition is added in the upgraded installation. However,
the upgrade process cannot determine which default notification conditions may
have been deleted deliberately by the administrator in the previous installation. With
one exception, therefore, all of the following action settings are disabled in each
default notification condition in an upgraded installation: Send email to system
administrators, Log the notification, Run batch file, and Send email to. When
all four of these actions are disabled, the notification condition is not processed,
even though the condition itself is present. Administrators can edit the notification
conditions to enable any or all of these settings.
Note that the New client software notification condition is an exception: it can
produce notifications by default when it is added during the upgrade process. Unlike
the other default notification conditions, both the Log the notification and the Send
email to system administrators action settings are enabled for this condition.
If the previous version of the software does not support licenses, an Upgrade
license expiration notification condition is enabled.
Some notification condition types are not available in previous versions of the
software. Those notification conditions are enabled by default when the software
is upgraded.
Section 6
Protecting clients in virtual
environments
Chapter 27. Overview of Symantec Endpoint Protection and virtual infrastructures
Chapter 28. Installing and using a network-based Shared Insight Cache
Chapter 29. Using Virtual Image Exception
Chapter 30. Non-persistent virtual desktop infrastructures

Chapter 27
Overview of Symantec
Endpoint Protection and
virtual infrastructures
Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in virtual infrastructures
About Shared Insight Cache
About the Virtual Image Exception tool
Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in virtual

infrastructures
Symantec Endpoint Protection provides the Shared Insight Cache and Virtual Image
Exception features for virtual infrastructures, which you can enable to improve
performance. You need to perform some additional installation and configuration
tasks to enable these features.
Overview of Symantec Endpoint Protection and virtual infrastructures 626
Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in virtual infrastructures
Table 27-1 Virtual infrastructure features and their use
Feature and use Description
Use Shared Insight Cache to skip the Shared Insight Cache keeps track of the files that are known to be clean.
scanning of files that are known to be Shared Insight Cache can reduce the scan load by eliminating the need to
clean. rescan those files.
You can set up the following types of Shared Insight Cache:
A network-based Shared Insight Cache

Virtual clients that use any kind of virtual infrastructure can use a
network-based Shared Insight Cache to reduce scan loads.
Note: As of 14.0, a vShield-enabled Shared Insight Cache is no longer

supported.
See About Shared Insight Cache on page 627.
See What do I need to do to use a network-based Shared Insight Cache?

on page 629.
Use the Virtual Image Exception tool so The Virtual Image Exception tool lets you mark base image files as safe so
that clients can skip the scanning of that scans skip those files to reduce scan loads.
base image files.
The Virtual Image Exception tool runs in a virtual environment only.
See About the Virtual Image Exception tool on page 627.
Configure the non-persistent virtual Symantec Endpoint Protection clients have a configuration setting to indicate
desktop infrastructures feature. that they are non-persistent virtual clients. You can configure a separate
aging period for the offline GVMs in non-persistent virtual desktop
infrastructures. Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager removes
non-persistent GVM clients that have been offline longer than the specified
time period.
See Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in non-persistent virtual desktop

infrastructures on page 646.
See Purging obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to free up licenses

on page 648.
The protection technologies in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and

Symantec Endpoint Protection typically function the same way in virtual
infrastructures as they do in physical infrastructures. You can install, configure, and
use Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and Symantec Endpoint Protection
clients in virtual infrastructures in the same way as in physical infrastructures.

Shared Insight Cache use improves performance in virtual infrastructures. Files
that Symantec Endpoint Protection clients have determined to be clean are added
to the cache. The subsequent scans that use the same virus definitions version
can ignore the files that are in the Shared Insight Cache. Shared Insight Cache is
used only for scheduled and manual scans.
The network-based Shared Insight Cache runs as a Web service that is independent
of the Symantec Endpoint Protection client. Shared Insight Cache uses a voting
system. After a client uses the latest content to scan a file and determines that it is
clean, the client submits a vote to the cache. If the file is not clean, the client does
not submit a vote. When the vote count for a file is greater than or equal to the vote
count threshold, then Shared Insight Cache considers the file clean. When another
client subsequently needs to scan the same file, that client first queries Shared
Insight Cache. If the file is marked clean for their current content, then the client
does not scan that file.
When a client sends a vote to Shared Insight Cache, the cache checks the version
of content that the client used to scan the file. If the client does not have the latest
content, Shared Insight Cache ignores the vote. If newer content is available, the
newer content becomes the latest known content and Shared Insight sets the vote
count back to one.
To keep the cache size manageable, Shared Insight Cache uses a pruning algorithm.
The algorithm removes the oldest cache entries, which are those with the oldest
timestamp, first. This algorithm ensures that the cache size does not exceed the
memory usage threshold.
on page 629.
See Customizing Shared Insight Cache settings on page 634.

The Virtual Image Exception tool lets clients bypass the scanning of the base image
files for threats. This feature reduces the resource load on disk I/O and on the CPU.
Symantec Endpoint Protection supports the use of Virtual Image Exceptions for
both managed clients and unmanaged clients.
Note: Symantec does not support the use of the Virtual Image Exception tool in
physical environments.
See Using the Virtual Image Exception tool on a base image on page 642.
Chapter 28
Installing and using a
network-based Shared
Insight Cache
What do I need to do to use a network-based Shared Insight Cache?
System requirements for implementing a network-based Shared Insight Cache
Installing and uninstalling a network-based Shared Insight Cache
Enabling or disabling the use of a network-based Shared Insight Cache
Customizing Shared Insight Cache settings
About stopping and starting the network-based Shared Insight Cache service
Viewing network-based Shared Insight Cache log events
Monitoring network-based Shared Insight Cache performance counters
Troubleshooting issues with Shared Insight Cache
What do I need to do to use a network-based Shared

Insight Cache?
You can use a network-based Shared Insight Cache to improve scan performance.
Installing and using a network-based Shared Insight Cache 630
System requirements for implementing a network-based Shared Insight Cache
Table 28-1 Tasks to install and use a network-based Shared Insight Cache
Step Task
Step 1: Install Shared Insight See System requirements for implementing a

Cache. network-based Shared Insight Cache on page 630.
See Installing and uninstalling a network-based Shared

Insight Cache on page 631.
Step 2: In the Virus and Spyware See Enabling or disabling the use of a network-based
policy in Symantec Endpoint Shared Insight Cache on page 633.
Protection Manager, enable your
virtual clients to use Shared
Insight Cache
After you have installed a Shared Insight Cache, you can optionally do the following
tasks:
Customize any of the service, cache, or log settings for Shared Insight Cache.
View related events in the log.
See Viewing network-based Shared Insight Cache log events on page 638.
Use the Windows Performance Manager to monitor its performance.
See Monitoring network-based Shared Insight Cache performance counters
on page 640.
System requirements for implementing a

network-based Shared Insight Cache
The network-based Shared Insight Cache server is designed to run on a standalone
physical or virtual machine. Shared Insight Cache should not be installed to a system
running other database applications or high-availability server applications, such
as Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager or Microsoft SQL Server.
Table 28-2 describes the minimum system requirements that a virtual infrastructure
needs to run Shared Insight Cache.
Table 28-2 Network-based Shared Insight Cache system requirements
Requirement Description
Software Windows Server 2008 and later

Windows Server 2012 and Windows Server 2012 R2
.NET Framework 4
Table 28-2 Network-based Shared Insight Cache system requirements

(continued)
Requirement Description
CPU Shared Insight Cache must be installed on a dedicated server or a virtual

machine.
Memory 2 GB minimum
Available disk 100 MB minimum

space
See About Shared Insight Cache on page 627.

See Installing and uninstalling a network-based Shared Insight Cache on page 631.
Installing and uninstalling a network-based Shared

Insight Cache
Before you install the network-based Shared Insight Cache, ensure that you have
met all the system requirements and that you are logged on as a Windows
administrator. You install and run the Shared Insight Cache on a standalone physical
or virtual machine.
Note: You should not use DBCS or high-ASCII characters in the host name of the
server on which you install a Shared Insight Cache. You should also refrain from
using DBCS or high-ASCII characters in the user name that you use to access it.
These characters cause the Shared Insight Cache service to fail to start.
See System requirements for implementing a network-based Shared Insight Cache

on page 630.
To install a network-based Shared Insight Cache

1 On the Symantec Endpoint Protection installation file, navigate to the
Tools/Virtualization/SharedInsightCache folder.
2 Double-click the following file to launch the installation program:

SharedInsightCacheInstallation.msi
Note: You can type the following command instead, to launch the same
installation program:
msiexec /i SharedInsightCacheInstallation.msi
3 In the Shared Insight Cache Setup wizard pane, click Next.

4 Read through the Symantec Software license agreement, check I accept the
terms of the License Agreement, and then click Next.
5 On the Destination Folder pane, do one of the following tasks:
Click Next to accept the default location for Shared Insight Cache.
Click Change, browse to and select a different destination folder, click OK,
6 On the Shared Insight Cache Settings pane, specify the following Shared
Insight Cache settings:
Cache Usage (% of Physical Memory) The maximum size of the cache.

When the cache exceeds this threshold,
Shared Insight Cache prunes the cache size.
Listening Port The port on which the server listens.
Status Listening Port The port that the server uses to communicate
status about the server.
7 Click Install.
8 When the installation has completed, click Finish.
Uninstalling Shared Insight Cache has the same effect as stopping the Shared
Insight Cache service. If you are uncertain as to whether you want to permanently
uninstall Shared Insight Cache, you can stop the service instead.
Enabling or disabling the use of a network-based Shared Insight Cache
See About stopping and starting the network-based Shared Insight Cache service
on page 638.
Note: To uninstall the Shared Insight Cache, use the appropriate Windows control
panel, such as Add or Remove Programs. You must have Windows administrator
rights to uninstall Shared Insight Cache.
If you uninstall Shared Insight Cache, you may also want to disable the Shared
Insight Cache in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. Disabling Shared Insight
Cache prevents the Windows Event log from receiving notifications each time clients
cannot contact the cache.
Enabling or disabling the use of a network-based

Shared Insight Cache
For communication with Symantec Endpoint Protection clients over the network,
by default Shared Insight Cache uses no authentication and no SSL. If you change
Shared Insight Cache settings to Basic authentication with SSL or Basic
authentication with no SSL, you must specify a user name and password that can
access Shared Insight Cache.
To enable the use of a network-based Shared Insight Cache
1 In the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console, open the appropriate
Virus and Spyware Protection policy and click Miscellaneous.
2 On the Shared Insight Cache tab, check Shared Insight Cache using
Network.
3 Click Require SSL if you enabled SSL authentication in the configuration file.
4 In the Hostname box, type the host name of the host on which you installed
Shared Insight Cache.
5 In the Port box, type the port number of Shared Insight Cache.
6 Optionally, if you configured authentication for Shared Insight Cache:
In the Username box, type the user name.
Optionally, click Change Password to change the default password (null)
to the password that you created for authentication.
Leave these fields empty if you do not want to use a password.
7 Click OK.

on page 629.
To disable the use of a network-based Shared Insight Cache
1 In the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console, open the appropriate
Virus and Spyware Protection policy and click Miscellaneous.
2 Click the Shared Insight Cache tab.
3 On the Shared Insight Cache tab, uncheck Shared Insight Cache using
Network.
4 Click OK.

After you install Shared Insight Cache, you can customize its settings in the
configuration file.
The configuration file is an XML file that follows .NET Framework application
configuration standards. Shared Insight Cache does not start if there is an invalid
configuration, such as invalid XML, incorrect value types, or missing required values.
For more information, see:
Configuration Editor Tool (SvcConfigEditor.exe)
Table 28-3 describes the options that you can configure.
Table 28-3 Shared Insight Cache configuration options
Option and default Description and comments

value
Cache Service Listening Port on which the service listens. The listening port is used by clients to submit scan results
Port for files and to make requests to determine if the client should scan a file.
The default value is If the range for the port is not between 0 - 65535, the service does not start.
9005.
The service does not start if it cannot listen on the specified port.
<endpoint address="http://localhost:9005/1"
By default, the Shared Insight Cache server listens on all IP addresses. To configure the
listening IP addresses for HTTP or HTTPS services, you must use Netsh.exe. The Shared
Insight Cache server listens on the IP addresses that you specified in the IP Listen List
modified by those tools.
Netsh.exe is included with Windows Server 2008.
For more information, see:
Configuring HTTP and HTTPS
Status Service Listening Port the server uses to communicate status about the server. The status listening port uses
Port a SOAP-based interface on the port specified in the configuration section. This interface
provides a mechanism by which an administrator can query information and status about
The default value is
the Cache Server.
9006.
The service does not start if the range is not between 0 - 65535.
The service does not start if it cannot listen on the specified port.
Vote Count Number of the clients that must verify that the file is clean before Shared Insight Cache uses
the results.
The default value is 1.
The value must be less than or equal to 15. If the value is greater than 15, the server uses
the default value.
<cache.configuration vote.count="1" />
Prune Size Percentage of memory usage to remove from the cache when the cache hits the memory
usage limit.
The default value is 10.
The value must be between 10 and 100. If the value is not between 10 and 100, the server
uses the default value.
Note: Symantec recommends that you keep the default prune size.
<prune.size="10" />
Table 28-3 Shared Insight Cache configuration options (continued)

value
Memory Usage Percentage of size of the cache before Shared Insight Cache starts pruning the cache.
The default value is 50. Must be greater than or equal to 10.
<mem.usage="50" />
Log File A file for the Shared Insight Cache log.
The default value is <filevalue="CacheServer.log" />

install_folder/
CacheServer.log
Log Level ALL
The default value is DEBUG

ERROR.
INFO
WARN
ERROR
FATAL
OFF
A value of OFF indicates that Shared Insight Cache does not log any messages.
<level value="ERROR" />
Log Size Size of the log (in bytes) until Shared Insight Cache rolls the log over.
The default value is <maximumFileSizevalue="10000" />

10000.
Log Backups Number of rolled over logs to keep before the oldest log is deleted.
The default value is 1. A value of 0 indicates that Shared Insight Cache retains no backups. A negative value
indicates that Shared Insight Cache retains an unlimited number of backups.
<maxSizeRollBackupsvalue="1" />
Table 28-3 Shared Insight Cache configuration options (continued)

value
Enable SSL By default, Shared Insight Cache is set up with no authentication and no SSL. It can be
changed to Basic authentication with SSL, no authentication with SSL, or Basic authentication
Enable authentication
with no SSL.
<webHttpBinding>
<bindingname="CacheServerBinding">





<securitymode="None">
<transportclientCredentialType="Basic"/>
</security>
</binding>
</webHttpBinding>
See Enabling or disabling the use of a network-based Shared Insight Cache on page 633.
To customize Shared Insight Cache settings

1 Navigate to and open the following file:
Manager\SharedInsightCacheInstallation.exe.config
2 Make the modifications as needed.

About stopping and starting the network-based Shared Insight Cache service
3 Save your changes and close the file.

4 Restart the Shared Insight Cache service.
You must restart the Shared Insight Cache service for changes to all
configuration settings except the log level to take effect.
See About stopping and starting the network-based Shared Insight Cache
service on page 638.
on page 629.
About stopping and starting the network-based

Shared Insight Cache service
You may need to stop the Shared Insight Cache service temporarily to troubleshoot
an issue. After you have resolved the issue, you can restart the service. You can
start and stop the service from the Service Control Manager.
Uninstalling Shared Insight Cache has the same effect as stopping the Shared
Insight Cache service. If you are uncertain as to whether you want to permanently
uninstall Shared Insight Cache, you can stop the service instead.
You must have Windows administrator rights to stop and start the Shared Insight
Cache service.
See Troubleshooting issues with Shared Insight Cache on page 641.
Viewing network-based Shared Insight Cache log

events
You can view the Shared Insight Cache log file to see any events that Shared Insight
Cache creates. The log file is located in the installation folder and is named
CacheServer.log.
Shared Insight Cache prints logs in the following format:
[|] %thread | %d{MM/dd/yyyyHH:mm:ss} | %level | %logger{2} | %message [-]%newline
For example:
[|] 4 | 12/15/2010 10:51:37 | INFO | CacheServerService.Service | Started service [-]
Modify the configuration file to specify the log level that you want to use for
network-based Shared Insight Cache.
Viewing network-based Shared Insight Cache log events
Table 28-4 describes the levels that you can set.
Table 28-4 Network-based Shared Insight Cache log levels
Log level Description
OFF OFF indicates that no incidents are logged.
FATAL FATAL messages require you to take action. These messages are the
errors that cause Shared Insight Cache to stop.
For example, a FATAL message may indicate that the server IP address
is not available, which means that Shared Insight Cache cannot run.
ERROR ERROR messages require you to take action, but the process continues
to run. They are errors in the system that cause Shared Insight Cache to
fail or lose functionality.
You also receive all log entries for FATAL messages.
This level is the default logging level.
WARN WARN messages indicate Shared Insight Cache behavior that may be
undesirable, but do not cause it to fail.
You also receive all log entries for FATAL messages and ERROR messages.
INFO INFO messages describe the general actions of or give information about
Shared Insight Cache. They may indicate the state of the system and help
validate behavior or track down issues. However, alone they are not intended
to report actionable items.
For example, an information message may indicate that cache pruning is

complete. The message does not detail a problem. It only logs behavior.
You also receive all log entries for FATAL messages, ERROR messages,
and WARN messages.
DEBUG DEBUG and ALL log level messages produce the same results. These log
levels are intended for Support to troubleshoot problems with Shared Insight
ALL
Cache.
You also receive all log entries for all other log levels.
Increase the log level only when you need to troubleshoot issues with Shared Insight
Cache. When you increase the log level, you begin to significantly increase the size
of the log file. When you resolve the issue, return to the default log level of ERROR.
To view Shared Insight Cache events in the log
Go to the following location:
Installation folder/CacheServer.log
Monitoring network-based Shared Insight Cache performance counters
Monitoring network-based Shared Insight Cache

performance counters
You can view network-based Shared Insight Cache statistics in the Windows
Performance Monitor. The Shared Insight Cache service must be running to view
its performance counters.
Table 28-5 Shared Insight Cache statistics
Statistic Description
The number of items in the cache This number represents the current number of
items in the cache.
The number of items in the cache that This number represents the current number of
have been voted clean items in the cache, which have been voted clean.
Number of cache requests The number of cache requests that have been
made to the Shared Insight Cache service.
This number includes only the number of valid

requests that received a 200 response. This
counter does not persist across restarts of the
service.
Number of update requests The number of update requests that have been
made to the service.
This number is only the valid requests that received

a 200 response. This counter does not persist
across restarts of the service.
To monitor network-based Shared Insight Cache performance counters

1 At the command prompt, type the following command:
perfmon
2 In the Performance window, right-click the graph.

3 Select Add Counters.
4 In the Performance object drop-down list, select Shared Insight Cache.
5 Select the counters that you want to view, and click Add.
6 Click Close.
The Shared Insight Cache counters that you selected appear in the Performance
graph.
For more information about using the Windows performance monitor, see your
Windows documentation.
See Troubleshooting issues with Shared Insight Cache on page 641.
on page 629.

Table 28-6 provides suggestions for how to troubleshoot issues with Shared Insight
Cache.
Table 28-6 Troubleshooting Shared Insight Cache
Issue Explanation/Resolution
Experiencing problems with the Restart the service.

cache results
See About stopping and starting the network-based Shared Insight Cache service
on page 638.
Shared Insight Cache returns a Shared Insight Cache returns a no result response when it fails to successfully
"no result" response perform a cache lookup. If the client requests a cache lookup, a no result means
that the file must be scanned.
Note: Shared Insight Cache returns a success response even when it fails to
successfully perform a cache update. The reason is because the client is not
required to perform a different action when a failure occurs.
Suspected issues with HTTP View the HTTP traffic error log. The HTTP traffic errors are logged in the following
traffic location:
%Windir%\System32\Logfiles\HTTPERR
See Monitoring network-based Shared Insight Cache performance counters
on page 640.
Chapter 29
Using Virtual Image
Exception
Using the Virtual Image Exception tool on a base image
System requirements for the Virtual Image Exception tool
Running the Virtual Image Exception tool
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection to bypass the scanning of base

image files
Using the Virtual Image Exception tool on a base

image
You can use the Virtual Image Exception tool on a base image before you build out
your virtual machines. The Virtual Image Exception tool lets your clients bypass
the scanning of base image files for threats, which reduces the resource load on
disk I/O. It also improves CPU scanning process performance in your virtual desktop
infrastructure.
Symantec Endpoint Protection supports the use of the Virtual Image Exception tool
for managed clients and unmanaged clients
Note: You cannot use the Virtual Image Exception tool in a non-virtual environment.
Using Virtual Image Exception 643
System requirements for the Virtual Image Exception tool
Table 29-1 Process for using the Virtual Image Exception tool on a base image
Step Action
Step 1 On the base image, perform a full scan all of the files to ensure that the
files are clean.
If the Symantec Endpoint Protection client quarantines infected files, you

must repair or delete the quarantined files to remove them from quarantine.
See Specifying when repaired files, backup files, and quarantined files
are automatically deleted on page 438.
Step 2 Ensure that the client's quarantine is empty.
See Using the Risk log to delete quarantined files on your client computers
on page 440.
Step 3 Run the Virtual Image Exception tool from the command line to mark the
base image files.
See Running the Virtual Image Exception tool on page 644.
See vietool on page 801.
Step 4 Enable the feature in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager so that your
clients know to look for and bypass the marked files when a scan runs.
See Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection to bypass the scanning

of base image files on page 644.
Step 5 Remove the Virtual Image Exception tool from the base image.
The Virtual Image Exception tool supports fixed, local drives. It works with the files
that conform to the New Technology File System (NTFS) standard.
See System requirements for the Virtual Image Exception tool on page 643.
System requirements for the Virtual Image Exception

tool
The Virtual Image Exception tool is supported for use on VMware ESX, Microsoft
Hyper-V, and Citrix Zen desktop platforms.
The client must meet all of the following requirements:
The client must be installed in one of the supported virtual environments.
The client must run Symantec Endpoint Protection client software version 12.1
or later.
Warning: The client must be the same version as the Virtual Image Exception tool.
For the most up-to-date information about requirements and supported platforms,
see the following Web page:
Release notes, new fixes, and system requirements for all versions of Endpoint
Protection

Before you run the Virtual Image Exception tool, ensure that you have met all of
the system requirements.
Warning: The client must be the same version as the Virtual Image Exception tool.
See System requirements for the Virtual Image Exception tool on page 643.
To run the Virtual Image Exception tool
1 From the Symantec Endpoint Protection Tools folder of the installation file,
download the following file to the base image:
/Virtualization/VirtualImageException/vietool.exe
2 Open a command prompt with administrative privileges.

3 Run the Virtual Image Exception tool with the proper arguments.
For example, type: vietool c: --generate
See vietool on page 801.
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection to bypass

the scanning of base image files
After you run the Virtual Image Exception tool on base image files, you can enable
the use of Virtual Image Exceptions in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Once the feature is enabled, virtual clients look for the attribute that the tool inserted.
Symantec Endpoint Protection then skips the scanning of base image files that
contain the attribute.
You can bypass the scanning of unchanged base image files for Auto-Protect
scanning or administrator-defined scans (such as manual scans or scheduled
scans).
Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection to bypass the scanning of base image files
To configure Symantec Endpoint Protection to use Virtual Image Exception to bypass

the scanning of base image files
1 On the console, open the appropriate Virus and Spyware Protection policy.
2 Under Advanced Options, click Miscellaneous.
3 On the Virtual Images tab, check the options that you want to enable.
4 Click OK.
Chapter 30
Non-persistent virtual
desktop infrastructures
Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in non-persistent virtual desktop

infrastructures
Setting up the base image for non-persistent guest virtual machines in VDIs
Counting the number of licenses for non-persistent VDI clients
Purging obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to free up licenses
Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in non-persistent

virtual desktop infrastructures
Table 30-1 Tasks to use Symantec Endpoint Protection in non-persistent virtual
desktop infrastructures
Step Description
Step 1: Set up the base image. You configure the Symantec Endpoint Protection client
in your base image to indicate that it is a non-persistent
virtual client.
See Setting up the base image for non-persistent
guest virtual machines in VDIs on page 647.
Non-persistent virtual desktop infrastructures 647
Setting up the base image for non-persistent guest virtual machines in VDIs
Table 30-1 Tasks to use Symantec Endpoint Protection in non-persistent virtual

desktop infrastructures (continued)
Step Description
Step 2: In Symantec Endpoint Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager removes the

Protection Manager, configure a non-persistent GVM clients that have been offline
separate purge interval for offline longer than the specified time period. This feature
non-persistent VDI clients. makes it simpler to manage the GVMs in Symantec
See Purging obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to

free up licenses on page 648.
Setting up the base image for non-persistent guest

virtual machines in VDIs
You can set your base image up to make it simpler to use Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager to manage GVMs in non-persistent virtual desktop
infrastructures.
Table 30-2 Tasks to set up the base image for non-persistent GVMs
Step Description
Step 1: Install Symantec Endpoint See Choosing a method to install the client using the
Protection on the base image. Client Deployment Wizard on page 115.
Step 2: Disable Tamper Protection See Changing Tamper Protection settings

in the management server so that on page 489.
you can modify the registry.
Step 3: Correctly count the number The advantage of non-persistent clients is that offline
of licenses for non-persistent virtual non-persistent clients do not count toward the number
clients. of deployed licenses. Only online clients count. To
mark a virtual client as a non-persistent client, you must
create a registry key in the base image.
See Counting the number of licenses for

non-persistent VDI clients on page 648.
Step 4: In Symantec Endpoint See Changing Tamper Protection settings

Protection Manager, re-enable on page 489.
Tamper Protection.
After you have finished setting up the base image, you can configure a separate
purge interval for non-persistent clients in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Counting the number of licenses for non-persistent VDI clients
Counting the number of licenses for non-persistent

VDI clients
The management server counts each license for clients on physical computers,
whether the computer is online or offline. For virtual clients, the management server
counts the licenses of online non-persistent clients only. Offline non-persistent
clients do not count. Make your virtual clients non-persistent if you have more users
than you have clients.
To mark a virtual client as a non-persistent client, you must create a registry key in
the base image.
To count the number of licenses for non-persistent VDI clients
1 After you have installed the Symantec Endpoint Protection client and disabled
Tamper Protection, open the registry editor on the base image.
See Changing Tamper Protection settings on page 489.
2 Navigate to one of the following registry keys:
On 32-bit systems:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection\SMC\
On 64-bit systems:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection\SMC\
3 Create a new key named Virtualization.

4 Under Virtualization, create a key of type DWORD named IsNPVDIClient
and set it to a value of 1.
See Setting up the base image for non-persistent guest virtual machines in VDIs
on page 647.
Purging obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to free

up licenses
Over time, obsolete clients can accumulate in the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager database. Obsolete clients are those clients that have not connected to
Purging obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to free up licenses
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager for 30 days. Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager purges obsolete clients every 30 days by default.
If you do not want to wait the same number of days to purge obsolete non-persistent
clients, you can configure a separate interval for them. If you do not configure a
separate interval, then offline non-persistent virtual clients are purged at the same
interval that obsolete physical clients are purged.
Online non-persistent clients count toward the number of deployed licenses; offline
non-persistent clients do not.
See Counting the number of licenses for non-persistent VDI clients on page 648.
You can also filter the offline non-persistent clients out of the view on the Clients
page.
To purge obsolete non-persistent VDI clients to free up licenses
1 In the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console, on the Admin page,
click Domains.
2 In the Domains tree, click the desired domain.
3 Under Tasks, click Edit Domain Properties.
4 On the Edit Domain Properties > General tab, check the Delete
non-persistent VDI clients that have not connected for specified time
check box and change the days value to the desired number.
The Delete clients that have not connected for specified time option must
be checked to access the option for offline non-persistent VDI clients.
5 Click OK.
See Using Symantec Endpoint Protection in non-persistent virtual desktop
infrastructures on page 646.
Section 7
Configuring and managing
the management server
Chapter 31. Configuring the connection between the management server and
the clients
Chapter 32. Configuring the management server
Chapter 33. Managing databases
Chapter 34. Managing failover and load balancing
Chapter 35. Managing sites and replication
Chapter 36. Preparing for disaster recovery

Chapter 31
Configuring the connection
between the management
server and the clients
Setting up HTTPS communications between a Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager and the clients
Improving client and server performance
About server certificates
Best practices for updating server certificates and maintaining the client-server
connection
Setting up HTTPS communications between a

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and the
clients
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses an Apache web server to communicate
with clients and provide reporting services. For new installations of Symantec
Endpoint Protection 14, HTTPS communications are enabled by default. HTTPS
is a secure protocol that uses a certificate to sign and encrypt data, which provides
for the confidentiality and the integrity of the communications.
The web server in version 12.1 uses the unencrypted protocol HTTP for all
communications by default. If you upgrade to Symantec Endpoint Protection 14
from version 12.1, the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager retains the settings
during the upgrade. If you had not enabled HTTPS in version 12.1, you can configure
Configuring the connection between the management server and the clients 652
Setting up HTTPS communications between a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and the clients
the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Apache web server to use an HTTPS
connection after the upgrade.
Table 31-1 Configuring HTTPS communication to the client
Step Description
Step 1: Check that the default HTTPS By default, HTTPS traffic uses port 443. In some networks, port 443 may
port is available already be bound to another application or service. Before you enable HTTPS
communication, you must check to see if the default port is available.
See Verifying port availability on page 652.
Step 2: Change the default HTTPS port If port 443 is not available, choose an unused port from the high port range
as needed (49152-65535). Configure the management server to use the new port.
Update the management server list to reflect the new port.
See Changing the HTTPS port for Apache for client communication
on page 653.
Step 3: Enable HTTPS communication Edit the Apache httpd.conf file to allow HTTPS communication to the client.
to the client Test the connection, and then switch the clients to HTTPS communication.
See Enabling HTTPS client-server communications on page 654.
Verifying port availability

Some Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager configurations require that you
change a default port assignment to prevent a conflict with other applications or
services. Before you assign a new port, you must check to be sure that another
application or service does not use the new port.
To verify port availability
Open a command prompt and enter the following case-sensitive command:
netstat -an | find ":port" | find "LISTENING"
Where port represents the port number for which you want to check availability.
For example, to see if port 443 is available, enter:
netstat -an | find ":443" | find "LISTENING"
If the netstat command returns a result, you must find an unused port. You
use the same command, but replace port with the port of your choice. If this
command yields no results, then the port is free to use.
See Changing the HTTPS port for Apache for client communication on page 653.
See Setting up HTTPS communications between a Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager and the clients on page 651.
Changing the HTTPS port for Apache for client communication

The default HTTPS port for Apache is port 443. If Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager hosts other HTTPS websites, port 443 may already be assigned to one
of these websites. You should use a different port for new installations to minimize
conflict with any applications that already use the default port 443. If you want clients
to use the default port to communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager,
you should first verify that port is available.
Note: If you customize the HTTPS port number after you deploy the client software,
the clients lose communication with the management server. They reestablish
communication after the next client update from the server, which contains the new
connection information. You can also use a Communication Update Package.
Restoring client-server communications with Communication Update Package
Deployment
After you complete this procedure, you enable HTTPS client-server communications.
To change the HTTPS port for Apache for client communication
1 In a text editor, open the following file:
Manager\apache\conf\ssl\sslForClients.conf
The enclosing folder C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager\apache\conf\ssl\ may be read-only. In that case, you may
need to uncheck Read-only in the folder properties.
2 Edit the following lines and replace the default of 443 with the new port number:
Listen 443
<VirtualHost_default_: 443>
3 Save the file and close the text editor.

See Verifying port availability on page 652.
See Enabling HTTPS client-server communications on page 654.
Enabling HTTPS client-server communications

You edit the httpd.conf file to enable secure communication between the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager server and the clients using the HTTPS protocol.
If you need to use an alternate port for secure communication, you must change
the port assignment in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager first.
For new installations of Symantec Endpoint Protection 14, HTTPS client-server
communications is enabled by default. If you upgrade to version 14 from a version
of 12.1, then the settings for client-server communication carry over. HTTPS
client-server communications is not enabled by default for version 12.1.
To enable HTTPS for the Apache web server
1 In a text editor, open the following file:
Manager\apache\conf\httpd.conf
2 Find the following text string and remove the hash mark (#):
#Include conf/ssl/sslForClients.conf
3 Save and then close the file.

4 Restart the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Webserver service.
Stopping and restarting the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Webserver
service also stops and restarts the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
service.
See Stopping and starting the Apache Web server on page 721.
To verify HTTPS works correctly
1 Enter the following URL in a web browser:
https://SEPMServer:port/secars/secars.dll?hello,secars
Where SEPMServer is the server host name for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager and port is the HTTPS port number. By default, HTTPS traffic uses
port 443.
2 If the browser displays the word OK, the HTTPS connection is successful.
If a page error displays, repeat the previous steps and check that you formatted
all strings correctly. Also check that you entered the URL correctly.
If you did not update the management server with a certificate authority-signed
certificate and private key pair, the web browser displays a warning that the
certificate is not trusted. The same warning appears when you access the
website from a URL that is different than the subject name on the management
server certificate, which is expected.
To switch the clients to use HTTPS for communication with Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager
1 In the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console, on the Policies tab,
click Policy Components > Management Server Lists.
2 Double-click the management server list that your client groups and locations
use. If you only have the default management server list, duplicate it, and then
double-click the new list to edit it.
You can also click Add a Management Server List, under Tasks. Add the
server information under Management Servers, Add > New Server. You can
add one New Server entry for server IP address, and one for server name.
3 Click Use HTTPS protocol.
Only click Verify certificate when using HTTPS protocol if you have
previously updated the management server with a Certificate Authority-signed
certificate and a private key pair.
See Best practices for updating server certificates and maintaining the
client-server connection on page 660.
Note: If you used a custom HTTPS port number in the sslForClients.conf

file, edit the server from the list of management servers. Click Customize
HTTPS port, and then edit the port to match the number you previously used.
Click OK to save the custom port.
4 Click OK to save your management server list.

5 If you edited a copy of the default management server list, right-click it, click
Assign, and then assign it to every group and location.
See Assigning a management server list to a group and location on page 689.
As the clients receive the updated management server list, the clients switch to
HTTPS for communication with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. The change
on the client side can take up to three heartbeat intervals to complete.
Confirm client communication to the management server

1 On the Symantec Endpoint Protection client, click Help > Troubleshooting >
Server Connection Status.
2 Under Last Attempted Connection and Last Successful Connection, confirm
the display of both the server address and the port number for HTTPS
communications.
3 Click Connect Now to force an immediate connection, if desired.
See Changing the HTTPS port for Apache for client communication on page 653.

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager includes various features that enable you
to increase the client performance and server performance while still maintaining
a high level of security.
Table 31-2 Tasks to improve performance on the server and on the client
Task Description
Change client-server Use pull mode instead of push mode to control how often the management server
communication settings downloads policies and content updates to the client computers. In pull mode, the
management server can support more clients.
Increase the heartbeat interval so that the client and the server communicate less
frequently. For fewer than 100 clients per server, increase the heartbeat to 15-30
minutes. For 100 to 1,000 clients, increase the heartbeat to 30-60 minutes. Larger
networks might need a longer heartbeat interval. Increase the download randomization
to between one and three times the heartbeat interval.
on page 162.
For more information about setting heartbeat intervals, see the Symantec Endpoint
Sizing and Scalability Best Practiceswhite paper.
(continued)
Task Description
Randomize and reduce the Content updates vary in size and frequency, depending on the content type and
number of content updates availability. You can reduce the effect of downloading and importing a full set of content
updates by using the following methods:
Distribute the client load across multiple management servers.

Use alternative methods to distribute the content, such as a Group Update Provider
or third-party distribution tools.
A Group Update Provider helps you conserve bandwidth by offloading processing
power from the server to a client that downloads the content.
Randomize the time when LiveUpdate downloads content to the client computers.
Download content updates when users are not actively using the client computer.
on page 194.
Adjust scans to improve You can change some scan settings to improve the computers' performance without
computer performance reducing protection.
For example, you can configure scans to ignore trusted files or to run when the computer
is idle.

(continued)
Task Description
Reduce database client log You can configure the logging options to optimize storage requirements and comply
volume with company policies that control retention of logged data.
The database receives and stores a constant flow of entries into its log files. You must
manage the data that is stored in the database so that the stored data does not consume
all the available disk space. Too much data can cause the computer on which the
database runs to crash.
Upload only some of the client logs to the server, and change the frequency with
which the client logs are uploaded.
on page 678.
Specify how many log entries the client computer can keep in the database, and
how long to keep them.
See Specifying the log size and how long to keep log entries in the database
on page 679.
Filter the less important risk events and system events out so that less data is
forwarded to the server.
on page 466.
Reduce the heartbeat frequency, which controls how often the client logs are
uploaded to the server.
on page 162.
Increase the amount of hard disk space in the directory where the log data is stored
before being written to the database.
See About increasing the disk space on the server for client log data on page 680.
Perform database To increase the speed of communication between the client and the server, you should
maintenance tasks schedule regular database maintenance tasks.
See Scheduling automatic database maintenance tasks on page 674.


Certificates are the industry standard for authenticating and encrypting sensitive
data. To prevent the reading of information as it passes through routers in the
network, data should be encrypted.
To communicate with the clients, the management server uses a server certificate.
For the management server to identify and authenticate itself with a server certificate,
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager encrypts the data by default. However,
there are situations where you must disable encryption between the server and the
client.
See Best practices for updating server certificates and maintaining the client-server
connection on page 660.
See Enabling or disabling secure communications between the management server
and the client on page 661.
You may also want to back up the certificate as a safety precaution. If the
management server is damaged or you forget the keystore password, you can
easily retrieve the password.
See Backing up a server certificate on page 708.
See Updating or restoring a server certificate on page 662.
The management server supports the following types of certificates:
JKS Keystore file (.jks) (default)
A Java tool that is called keytool.exe generates the keystore file. The Java
Cryptography Extension (.jceks) format requires a specific version of the Java
Runtime Environment (JRE). The management server supports only a .jceks
keystore file that is generated with the same version as the Java Development
Kit on the management server.
The keystore file must contain both a certificate and a private key. The keystore
password must be the same as the key password. You can locate the password
in the following file:
Manager\Server Private Key Backup\recovery_timestamp.zip
The password appears in the keystore.password= line.
PKCS12 keystore file (.pfx and .p12)
Certificate and private key file (.der and .pem format)
Symantec supports unencrypted certificates and private keys in the .der or the
.pem format. .Pkcs8-encrypted private keys are not supported.
Best practices for updating server certificates and maintaining the client-server connection
Best practices for updating server certificates and

maintaining the client-server connection
You may need to update the security certificate in the following situations:
You restore a previous security certificate that the clients already use.
You want to use a different security certificate than the default certificate (.jks).
When clients use secure communication with the server, the server certificate is
exchanged between the server and the clients. This exchange establishes a trust
relationship between the server and clients. When the certificate changes on the
server, the trust relationship is broken and clients no longer can communicate. This
problem is called orphaning clients.
Note: Use this process to update either one management server or multiple
management servers at the same time.
Table 31-3 lists the steps to update the certificate without orphaning the clients that
the server manages.
Table 31-3 Steps to update server certificates
Step Description
Step 1: Break the replication relationship If the management server you want to update replicates with other
(optional) management servers, break the replication relationship.

Step 2: Disable server certificate Disable secure communications between the server and the clients. When
verification you disable the verification, the clients stay connected while the server
updates the server certificate.

Step 3: Wait for all clients to receive the The process of deploying the updated policy may take a week or longer,
updated policy depending on the following factors:
The number of clients that connect to the management server. Large

installations may take several days to complete the process because the
managed computers must be online to receive the new policy.
Some users may be on vacation with their computers offline.

on page 163.
Table 31-3 Steps to update server certificates (continued)
Step Description
Step 4: Update the server certificate Update the server certificate. If you also plan to upgrade the management
server, upgrade the certificate first.
Step 5: Enable server certificate Enable secure communications between the server and the clients again.
verification again
Step 6: Wait for all clients to receive the The client computers must receive the policy changes from the previous
updated policy step.
Step 7: Restore the replication If the management server you updated replicates with other management
relationship (optional) servers, restore the replication relationship.

Enabling or disabling secure communications between the

management server and the client
To authenticate communication between the management server and the client,
the server uses a certificate. If the certificate is corrupted or invalid, the clients
cannot communicate with the server. If you disable secure communications, then
the clients can still communicate with the server. However, the clients do not
authenticate communications from the management server.
You should temporarily disable secure communications between the clients and
server for the following reasons:
To move a large number of clients from one site to another site without needing
to use the Sylink.xml file.
To update a corrupted certificate or invalid certificate. You can update multiple
management servers at the same time. As a best practice, you should perform
disaster recovery instead.
Make sure that you configure this setting for the groups that do not inherit from a
parent group.
After you move the clients or update the certificate, you enable secure
communications again.
Enabling or disabling secure communications between the management server and
the client
1 On the console, click Clients > Policies > General Settings.
2 On the Security Settings tab, check or uncheck Enable secure
communications between the management server and clients by using
digital certificates for authentication.
3 Click OK.
See About server certificates on page 659.
Updating or restoring a server certificate

The server certificate encrypts and decrypts files between the server and the client.
The client connects to the server with an encryption key, downloads a file, and then
decrypts the key to verify its authenticity. If you change the certificate on the server
without manually updating the client, the encrypted connection between the server
and the client breaks.
You must update the server certificate in the following situations:
You reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager without using the recovery
file. You update the certificate to restore a previous certificate that clients already
use.
You replace one management server with another management server and use
the same IP and server name.
You apply the wrong server certificate (.JKS) after disaster recovery.
You purchased a different certificate and want to use that certificate instead of
the default .JKS certificate.
To update or restore a server certificate
2 Under Servers, under Local Site, click the management server for which you
want to update the server certificate.
3 Under Tasks, click Manage Server Certificate, and then click Next.
4 In the Manage Server Certificate panel, click Update the server certificate,
click Next, and then click Yes.
To maintain the server-client connection, disable secure connections.
5 In the Update Server Certificate panel, choose the certificate you want to
update to, and then click Next.
6 For each certificate type, following the instructions on the panels, and click
Finish.
Backup server certificates are in C:\Program Files
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\Server Private
Key Backup\recovery_timestamp.zip. You can locate the password for the
keystore file in the settings.properties file within the same .zip file. The
password appears in the keystore.password= line.
7 You must restart the following services to use the new certificate:
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager service
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Webserver service
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager API service
Chapter 32
Configuring the
management server
Managing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager servers and third-party

servers
About the types of Symantec Endpoint Protection servers
Exporting and importing server settings
Managing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

servers and third-party servers
You can configure Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to integrate with many
of the different types of servers in your network environment.
Table 32-1 Server management
Task Description
Learn about servers Decide which types of servers you need to set up.
See About the types of Symantec Endpoint Protection

Set server communication You can allow or deny access to the remote console. You
permissions manage access by adding exceptions based on the IP
address of a single computer or a group of computers.
See Granting or blocking access to remote Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager consoles on page 292.
Configuring the management server 665
Managing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager servers and third-party servers
Table 32-1 Server management (continued)
Task Description
Modify server settings To modify database settings, or to restore your database

on a different computer, you can modify server settings.
See Reinstalling or reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint

Configure the mail server To work with a specific mail server in your network, you
need to configure the mail server.
See Establishing communication between the management

server and email servers on page 618.
Manage directory servers You can integrate Symantec Endpoint Protection with
directory servers to help manage administrator accounts
or to create organizational units.
See Connecting Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

to a directory server on page 226.
Configure proxy settings if you To set up the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to
use a proxy server to connect connect to the Internet through a proxy server, you must
to Symantec LiveUpdate configure the proxy server connection.
servers
See Configuring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
to connect to a proxy server to access the Internet and
download content from Symantec LiveUpdate on page 186.
Import or export server You can export server settings to an xml file, and you can
properties re-import the same settings.
See Exporting and importing server settings on page 667.
Manage server certificates The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server uses
a server certificate to encrypt data for the communication
between all servers, and clients in a network. The server
identifies and authenticates itself with a server certificate.
You may need to back up, update, or generate a new server
certificate.
See Generating a new server certificate on page 710.

About the types of Symantec Endpoint Protection servers
Table 32-1 Server management (continued)
Task Description
Configure SecurID If you choose to authenticate administrator accounts by

Authentication for a server using RSA SecurID, you must also configure the
management server to communicate with the RSA server.
See Configuring the management server to authenticate

administrators who use RSA SecurID to log on on page 278.
Move the server to a different You may need to move the management server software
computer from one computer to another for the following reasons:
You must move the management server from a test

environment to a production environment.
The computer on which the management server runs
has a hardware failure.
You can move the management server software in the

following ways:
Install the management server on another computer

and perform replication.
See How to install a second site for replication
on page 700.
Install the management server on another computer
using the recovery file.
See Reinstalling or reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint
Start and stop the management The management server runs as an automatic service. You
server must stop the management server service when you
upgrade, or perform disaster recovery.
See Stopping and starting the management server service

on page 145.
About the types of Symantec Endpoint Protection

servers
The following definitions may be helpful to understand when managing servers:
Site
A site consists of one or more management servers and one database (the
embedded database or Microsoft SQL Server) typically located together at the
same business location. The site to which you log on is the local site, and you
can modify it directly. Any site other than the local site is referred to as a remote
site. You connect sites by using replication.
Management server
The computer on which the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager software
is installed. From the management server, policies can be created and assigned
to different organizational groups. You can monitor clients, view reports, logs,
and alerts, and configure servers and administrator accounts. Multiple
management servers at a single site provide failover and load balancing
capabilities.
Database server
The database used by Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. There is one
database per site. The database can be on the same computer as the
management server or on a different computer if you use a SQL Server database.
See Maintaining the database on page 669.
Replication partner
A relationship created between two sites to enable data replication between
them.

The server properties file includes the server settings for Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. You may need to export and import the server properties file
in the following situations:
You use the disaster recovery file to reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
The disaster recovery file does not include the server settings. When you reinstall
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you lose any default server settings
that you had previously changed. You can use the exported server properties
file to reimport the changed server settings.
You install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager in a test environment and
later install the management server in a production environment. You can import
the exported server properties file to the production environment.
See Managing Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager servers and third-party
To export server settings

2 Under Servers, expand Local Site (Site site_name), and then select the
management server you want to export.
3 Click Export Server Properties.
4 Select a location in which to save the file and specify a file name.
5 Click Export.
To import server settings
2 Under Servers, expand Local Site (Site site_name), and then select the
management server for which you want to import settings.
3 Click Import Server Properties.
4 Select the file you want to import, and then click Import.
5 Click Yes.
Chapter 33
Managing databases
Maintaining the database
Scheduling automatic database backups
Scheduling automatic database maintenance tasks
Exporting data to a Syslog server
Exporting log data to a text file
Specifying client log size and which logs to upload to the management server
Specifying the log size and how long to keep log entries in the database
About increasing the disk space on the server for client log data
Clearing log data from the database manually

Symantec Endpoint Protection supports both an embedded database and the
Microsoft SQL Server database. If you have more than 5,000 clients, you should
use a Microsoft SQL Server database.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager automatically installs an embedded
database. The database contains information about security policies, configuration
settings, attack data, logs, and reports.
After you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, the management server
may start to slow down after a few weeks or a few months. To improve the
management server performance, you may need to reduce the database storage
space and schedule various database maintenance tasks.
Managing databases 670
Table 33-1 Database management tasks
Task Description
Schedule regular database You should schedule regular database backups in case the database gets
backups corrupted.
See Scheduling automatic database backups on page 673.
Optionally, to prevent an automatic sweep of the database until after a backup

occurs, you can manually sweep data from the database.
See Clearing log data from the database manually on page 681.
Schedule database maintenance You can speed up the interaction time between the management server and the
tasks database by scheduling database maintenance tasks. You can schedule the
management server to perform the following maintenance tasks immediately or
when users are not on the client computers.
Remove unused data from the transaction log.

Rebuild the database table indexes to improve the database's sorting and
searching capabilities.
Periodically check the database If you use the Microsoft SQL Server database rather than the embedded database,
file size make sure that the database does not reach the maximum file size.
See Increasing the Microsoft SQL Server database file size on page 675.
Table 33-1 Database management tasks (continued)
Task Description
Calculate the database storage Before you can decide how to reduce the amount of storage space, calculate the
space that you need total amount of disk space that you need.
The database storage is based on the following factors:
Log size and expiration time period.

The number of client computers.
The average number of viruses per month.
The number of events you need to retain for each log.
The number of content updates.
The content updates require about 300 MB each.
The number of client versions you need to retain for each language.
For example, if you have both 32-bit clients and 64-bit clients, you need twice
the number of language versions.
The number of backups you need to keep.
The backup size is approximately 75 percent of the database size, and then
multiplied by the number of backup copies that you keep.
For more information on how to calculate the hard disk space you need, see the
Symantec white paper, Symantec Endpoint Protection Sizing and Scalability Best
Practices White Paper.
Task Description
Reduce the volume of log data The database receives and stores a constant flow of entries into its log files. You
must manage the data that is stored in the database so that the stored data does
not consume all the available disk space. Too much data can cause the computer
on which the database runs to crash.
Upload only some of the client logs to the server, and change the frequency
with which the client logs are uploaded.
See Specifying client log size and which logs to upload to the management
server on page 678.
Specify how many log entries the client computer can keep in the database,
and how long to keep them.
on page 679.
Filter the less important risk events and system events out so that less data is
forwarded to the server.
on page 466.
Reduce the amount of space in the directory where the log data is stored before
being inserted into the database.
See About increasing the disk space on the server for client log data
on page 680.
Reduce the heartbeat frequency, which controls how often the client logs are
uploaded to the server.
on page 162.
Export log data to another server For security purposes, you might need to retain the number of log records for a
longer period of time. To keep the client log data volume low, you can export the
log data to another server.
See Exporting data to a Syslog server on page 676.
Create client installation packages The more protection features that you install with the client, the more space that
with only the protection that you the client information takes in the database. Create the client installation package
need with only the appropriate level of protection the client computer needs. The more
groups you add, the more space the client information takes in the database.

Task Description
Use the Group Update Provider If you have low bandwidth or more than 100 client computers, use Group Update
to download content Providers to download content. For example, 2,000 clients using a Group Update
Provider is the equivalent of using four to five management servers to download
content.
To reduce disk space and database size, you can reduce the number of content
revisions that are kept on the server.

Restore the database You can recover a corrupted database by restoring the database on the same
computer on which it was installed originally. Or, you can install the database on
a different computer.
See Restoring the database on page 710.
See Verifying the connection with the database on page 727.

The information in the database is stored in tables, also called the database schema.
You might need the schema to write queries for customized reports. For more
information, see the:
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Database Schema Reference

You can schedule database backups to occur at a time when fewer users are logged
on to the network.
You can also back up the database at any time.
To schedule automatic database backups
2 Under Servers, click Local Site (My Site) > localhost.
3 Under Tasks, click Edit Database Properties.
4 In the Database Properties dialog box, on the Backup Settings tab, do the
following tasks.
In the Backup server drop-down list, specify on which management server
you want to save the backup.
Check Back up logs if you need to save a copy of the logs for security
purposes or company policy.
Otherwise, leave this option disabled, as logs use a lot of disk space.
Specify the number of backups if your company policy requires it.
5 Make sure Schedule Backups is checked, and set the schedule.

6 Click OK.

After you install the management server, the space in the database grows
continually. The management server slows down after a few weeks or months. To
reduce the database size and to improve the response time with the database, the
management server performs the following database maintenance tasks:
Truncates the transaction log.
The transaction log records almost every change that takes place within the
database. The management server removes unused data from the transaction
log.
Rebuilds the index.
The management server defragments the database table indexes to improve
the time it takes to sort and search the database.
By default, the management server performs these tasks on a schedule. You can
perform the maintenance tasks immediately, or adjust the schedule so that it occurs
when users are not on their computers.
Note: You can also perform the database maintenance tasks in Microsoft SQL
Server Management Studio. However, you should perform these tasks in either
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager or Management Studio, but not both.
To run database maintenance tasks on demand

2 Under Servers, click the icon that represents the database.
3 Under Tasks, select either of the following options:
Truncate Transaction Log Now
Rebuild Indexes Now
4 Click Run.
5 After the task completes, click Close.
To schedule database maintenance tasks to run automatically

2 Under Servers, click the icon that represents the database.
4 On the General tab, check either or both of the following options, then click
Schedule Task and specify the schedule for each task.
Truncate the database transaction logs. The default schedule for this
task is every four hours.
Rebuild Indexes. The default schedule for this task is every Sunday at
2:00.
Warning: If you perform these tasks in SQL Server Management Studio,

uncheck these options.
Increasing the Microsoft SQL Server database file size

If you use the SQL Server database, periodically check the database size to make
sure that the database does not reach its maximum size. If you can, increase the
maximum size that the SQL Server database holds.
To increase the Microsoft SQL Server database size
1 On the Microsoft SQL server computer, open the SQL Server Management
Studio.
2 In the Object Explorer, Expand the "Databases" folder, right-click sem5, and
click Properties.
3 In the Database Properties dialog box, select Files.
4 Under Database files, select sem5_log1, and scroll to the right to view the
Autogrowth column.
5 In the Autogrowth column, click the ... button.
6 In the Change Autogrowth for sem5_log1 dialog box, click Unrestricted
File Growth, and then click OK.
7 Click OK.

To increase the space in the database, you can configure the management server
to send the log data to a Syslog server.
When you export log data to a Syslog server, you must configure the Syslog server
to receive the logs.
To export log data to a Syslog server
2 Click Servers.
3 Click the local site or remote site that you want to export log data from.
4 Click Configure External Logging.
5 On the General tab, in the Update Frequency list box, select how often to
send the log data to the file.
6 In the Master Logging Server list box, select the management server to send
the logs to.
If you use SQL Server and connect multiple management servers to the
database, specify only one server as the Master Logging Server.
7 Check Enable Transmission of Logs to a Syslog Server.
8 Provide the following information:
Syslog Server
Type the IP address or domain name of the Syslog server that you want to
receive the log data.
Destination Port
Select the protocol to use, and type the destination port that the Syslog
server uses to listen for Syslog messages.
Log Facility
Type the number of the log facility that you want to the Syslog configuration
file to use, or use the default. Valid values range from 0 to 23.
9 On the Log Filter tab, check which logs to export.

10 Click OK.

When you export data from the logs to a text file, by default the files are placed in
a folder. That folder path is C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager\data\dump. Entries are placed in a .tmp file until the records
are transferred to the text file.
Note: You cannot restore the database by using exported log data.
Table 33-2 shows the correspondence of the types of log data to the names of the
exported log data files. The log names do not correspond one-to-one to the log
names that are used on the Logs tab of the Monitors page.
Table 33-2 Log text file names for Symantec Endpoint Protection
Log Data Text File Name
Server Administration scm_admin.log
Application and Device Control agt_behavior.log
Server Client scm_agent_act.log
Server Policy scm_policy.log
Server System scm_system.log
Client Packet agt_packet.log
Client Proactive Threat agt_proactive.log
Client Risk agt_risk.log
Client Scan agt_scan.log
Client Security agt_security.log
Client System agt_system.log
Client Traffic agt_traffic.log

Specifying client log size and which logs to upload to the management server
Note: When you export to a text file, the number of exported records can differ from
the number that you set in the External Logging dialog box. This situation arises
when you restart the management server. After you restart the management server,
the log entry count resets to zero, but there may already be entries in the temporary
log files. In this situation, the first *.log file of each type that is generated after the
restart contains more entries than the specified value. Any log files that are
subsequently exported contain the correct number of entries.
To export log data to a text file

2 Click Servers.
3 Click the local site or remote site that you want to configure external logging
for.
4 Click Configure External Logging.
5 On the General tab, select how often you want the log data to be sent to the
file.
6 In the Master Logging Server list box, select the server that you want to send
logs to.
If you use Microsoft SQL with more than one management server connecting
to the database, only one server needs to be a Master Logging Server.
7 Check Export Logs to a Dump File.
8 If necessary, check Limit Dump File Records and type in the number of entries
that you want to send at a time to the text file.
9 On the Log Filter tab, select all of the logs that you want to send to text files.
If a log type that you select lets you select the severity level, you must check
the severity levels that you want to export.
10 Click OK.
Specifying client log size and which logs to upload to

the management server
Company policy might require you to increase the time and type of log events that
the database keeps. You can specify the number of entries kept in the logs and the
number of days that each entry is kept on the client.
Specifying the log size and how long to keep log entries in the database
You can configure whether to upload each type of client log to the server. You can
also configure the maximum size of the uploads. If you choose not to upload the
client logs, you cannot perform the following tasks:
You cannot view the client log data from the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager console by using the Logs tab on the Monitors page.
You cannot back up the client logs when you back up the database.
You cannot export the client log data to a file or a centralized log server.
Note: Some client log settings are group-specific and some are set in the Virus and
Spyware Protection policy, which can be applied to a location. If you want all remote
client log and office client log settings to differ, you must use groups instead of
locations to manage remote clients.
on page 679.
To specify client log size and which logs to upload to the management server
1 On the console, click Clients, and select a group.
click Client Log Settings.
3 In the Client Log Settings for group name dialog box, set the maximum file
size and the number of days to keep log entries.
4 Check Upload to management server for any logs that you want the clients
to forward to the server.
5 For the Security log and Traffic log, set the damper period and the damper
idle period.
These settings determine how frequently Network and Host Exploit Mitigation
events are aggregated
6 Click OK.
Specifying the log size and how long to keep log

entries in the database
To help control hard disk space, you can decrease the number of log entries that
the database keeps. You can also configure the number of days the entries are
kept.
About increasing the disk space on the server for client log data
Note: Log information on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console Logs
tab on the Monitors page is presented in logical groups for you to view. The log
names on the Site Properties Log Settings tab correspond to log content rather
than to log types on the Monitors page Logs tab.
on page 678.
To specify the log size and how long to keep log entries in the database
2 Under Servers, expand Local Site, and click the database.
4 On the Log Settings tab, set the number of entries and number of days to
keep log entries for each type of log.
5 Click OK.
About increasing the disk space on the server for

client log data
A configuration that uploads a large volume of client log data to the server at frequent
intervals can cause disk space problems on the server. If you must upload a large
volume of client log data, you may have to adjust some default values to avoid
these space problems. As you deploy to clients, you should monitor the space on
the server in the log insertion directory and adjust these values as needed.
The default directory where the logs are converted to .dat files and then written to
the database is in the following default location:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\
data\inbox\log.
To adjust the values that control the space available on the server, you must change
these values in the Windows registry. The Windows registry keys that you need to
change are located on the server in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\
Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection\SEPM.
Table 33-3 lists the Windows registry keys and their default values and describes
what they do.
Table 33-3 Windows registry keys that contain log upload settings
Value name Description
MaxInboxSpace Specifies the space that is allotted for the directory

where log files are converted to .dat files before
they are stored in the database.
The default value is 8 GB.
MinDataFreeSpace Specifies the minimum amount of space that should

be kept free in this directory. This key is useful to
ensure that other applications that use the same
directory have enough space to run without an
adverse effect on performance.
The default value is 200 MB.
IntervalOfInboxSpaceChecking Specifies how long the management server waits

before it checks on the amount of space in the
inbox that is available for log data.
The default value is 30 seconds.

You can perform a manual log sweep after backing up the database, if you prefer
to use this method as part of routine database maintenance.
If you allow an automatic sweep to occur, you may lose some log data if your
database backups do not occur frequently enough. If you regularly perform a manual
log sweep after you have performed a database backup, it ensures that you retain
all your log data. This procedure is very useful if you must retain your logs for a
relatively long period of time, such as a year. You can manually clear the logs, but
this procedure is optional and you do not have to do it.
on page 679.
To clear log data from the database manually
1 To prevent an automatic sweep of the database until after a backup occurs,
increase a site's log size to their maximums.
2 Perform the backup, as appropriate.
3 On the computer where the manager is installed, open a Web browser and
type the following URL:
https://localhost:8443/servlet/ConsoleServlet?ActionType=ConfigServer&action
=SweepLogs
After you have performed this task, the log entries for all types of logs are saved
in the alternate database table. The original table is kept until the next sweep
is initiated.
4 To empty all but the most current entries, perform a second sweep. The original
table is cleared and entries then start to be stored there again.
5 Return the settings on the Log Settings tab of the Site Properties dialog box
to your preferred settings.
Chapter 34
Managing failover and load
balancing
Setting up failover and load balancing
About failover and load balancing
Installing a management server for failover or load balancing
Configuring a management server list for load balancing
Assigning a management server list to a group and location
Setting up failover and load balancing

The client computers must be able to connect to a management server at all times
to download the security policy and to receive log events.
Failover is used to maintain communication with a Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager when the management server becomes unavailable. Load balancing is
used to distribute client management between multiple management servers using
a management server list
You can set up failover and load balancing if you use a Microsoft SQL Server
database. You can set up failover with the embedded database, but only if you use
replication. When you use replication with an embedded database, Symantec
recommends that you do not configure load balancing, as data inconsistency and
loss may result.
Table 34-1 lists the tasks that you should perform to set up failover and load
balancing.
Managing failover and load balancing 684
Table 34-1 Process for setting up failover and load balancing
Tasks Description
Read about failover You should understand if and when you need to set up management
and load balancing. servers for failover and load balancing.
See About failover and load balancing on page 684.
Install additional See Installing a management server for failover or load balancing
management servers. on page 686.
The number of clients for each management server depends on

several factors, such as the log sizes.
To calculate how many management servers you need, see:
Symantec Endpoint Protection Sizing and Scalability Best Practices

White Paper
Add management To set up load balancing, you add multiple management servers
servers to a to a management server list. You can either use the default
management server management server list or add management servers to a new
list. management server list. A management server list includes the IP
addresses or host names of management servers to which clients
can connect.
See Configuring a management server list for load balancing

on page 688.
Assign the custom After you have created a custom management server list, you must
management server list assign the management server list to a group.
to a group.
See Assigning a management server list to a group and location
on page 689.

If the management server goes offline, or the client and the management server
do not communicate, you should also troubleshoot the problem.

You can install two or more management servers that communicate with one
Microsoft SQL Server database and configure them for failover or load balancing.
Since you can install only one Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to
communicate with the embedded database, you can set up failover only if you
replicate with another site. When you use replication with an embedded database,
Symantec recommends that you do not configure load balancing, as data
inconsistency and loss may result.
Load balancing occurs with a prioritized list of management servers that is assigned
to a group. You should add at least two management servers to a site to
automatically distribute the load among them. You can install more management
servers than are required to handle your clients to protect against the failure of an
individual management server. In a custom management server list, each server
is assigned to a priority level. A client that comes onto the network selects a priority
one server to connect to at random. If the first server it tries is unavailable and there
are other priority one servers in the list, it randomly tries to connect to another. If
no priority one servers are available, then the client tries to connect to one of the
priority two servers in the list. This method of distributing client connections randomly
distributes the client load among your management servers.
Figure 34-1 shows components on different subnets. Management servers and
database servers can be on the same subnets. The servers are identified with the
numbers 1 and 2, which signify a failover configuration.
Figure 34-1 Failover configuration
Clients
1 2
Symantec Endpoint Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager Protection Manager
Microsoft SQL Server

In a failover configuration, all clients send traffic to and receive traffic from server
1. If server 1 goes offline, all clients send traffic to and receive traffic from server 2
until server 1 comes back online. The database is illustrated as a remote installation,
but it also can be installed on a computer that runs the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
You may also want to consider failover for content updates, if you intend to use
local servers. All the components that run LiveUpdate can also use a prioritized list
of update sources. Your management servers can use a local LiveUpdate server
and failover to LiveUpdate servers in other physical locations.
Note: The use of internal LiveUpdate servers, Group Update Providers, and site
replication does not provide load balancing functionality. You should not set up
multiple sites for load balancing.

Installing a management server for failover or load

balancing
Failover configurations are used to maintain communication when clients cannot
communicate with a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. Load balancing is
used to distribute client management between management servers. You can
configure failover and load balancing by assigning priorities to management servers
in management server lists.
Failover and load balancing installations are supported only when the original
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager that uses Microsoft SQL Server. The SQL
Server Native Client files also must be installed on the computer on which you install
a site for failover or load balancing. You do not install servers for failover or load
balancing when the first site is configured to use the embedded database.
To install a management server for failover or load balancing

1 Install a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
2 In the Management Server Configuration Wizard panel, check Custom
Configuration, and then click Next.
on page 44.
3 Select the number of clients you expect the server to manage, and then click
Next.
4 Check Install an additional management server to an existing site, and
then click Next.
5 In the server information panel, accept or change the default values, and then
click Next.
6 In the Microsoft SQL Server Information dialog box, click OK in the message
about installing the SQL Server client tools.
7 Enter the remote server values for the following text boxes:
Step One tells the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager where to find the
SQL Server on the network, which includes host name, instance name, and
port.
You also pick the authentication type, including Windows Authentication or
SQL authentication.
Database server\instance_name
SQL server port
Database name
SQL client folder (on the local computer)
If this text box does not automatically populate with the correct path, the
Microsoft SQL Client Utility is not installed or it is not installed correctly.
8 Step Two tells the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager how to authenticate
to the SQL Server and includes the database name, database user, and
database user's password.
You should have had this information available already for when you installed
the first management server for that site.
9 Click Next.
10 Specify and confirm a password for the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
admin account.
Optionally, provide an administrator email address.
Configuring a management server list for load balancing
11 Click Next.
12 At the warning, read the text message, and then click OK.
13 In Management Server Completed panel, click Finish.
Configuring a management server list for load

balancing
By default, the management servers are assigned the same priority when configured
for failover and load balancing. If you want to change the default priority after
installation, you can do so by using the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console. You can only configure load balancing when a site includes more than
one management server.
Load balancing occurs between the servers that are assigned to priority 1 in a
management server list. If more than one server is assigned to priority 1, the clients
randomly choose one of the servers and establish communication with it. If all
priority 1 servers fail, clients connect with the server assigned to priority 2.
To provide both load balancing and roaming:
Enable DNS and put a domain name as the only entry in a custom management
server list.
Enable the Symantec Endpoint Protection location awareness feature and use
a custom management server list for each location. Create at least one location
for each of your sites.
Use a hardware device that provides failover or load balancing. Many of these
devices also offer a setup for roaming.
See About failover and load balancing on page 684.
To configure a management server list for load balancing
2 Expand Policy Components, and then click Management Server Lists.
3 Under Tasks, click Add a Management Server List.
4 In the Management Server Lists dialog box, click Add > New Server.
5 In the Add Management Server dialog box, in the Server Address box, type
the fully qualified domain name or IP address of a management server.
If you type an IP address, be sure that it is static, and that all clients can resolve
it.
6 Click OK.
7 Add any additional servers.

8 To configure load balancing with another management server, click Add >
New Priority.
9 To change the priority of a server for load balancing, select a server, and then
do one of the following tasks:
To get clients to connect to that particular server first, click Move Up.
To give a server lower priority, click Move Down.
10 Click OK.
You must then apply the management server list to a group.
See Assigning a management server list to a group and location on page 689.
Assigning a management server list to a group and

location
After you add a policy, you must assign it to a group or a location or both. You can
also use the management server list to move a group of clients from one
management server to another.
You must have finished adding or editing a management server list before you can
assign the list.
To assign a management server list to a group and location
2 In the Policies page, expand Policy Components, and then click Management
Server Lists.
3 In the Management Server Lists pane, select the management server list you
want to assign.
4 Under Tasks, click Assign the List.
5 In the Apply Management Server List dialog box, check the groups and
locations to which you want to apply the management server list.
6 Click Assign.
7 Click Yes.
To assign a management server list to a group or location on the Clients page

1 In the console, click Clients > Policies
2 On the Policies tab, select the group, and then uncheck Inherit policies and
settings from parent group.
You cannot set any communication settings for a group unless the group no
longer inherits any policies and settings from a parent group.
3 Under Location-independent Policies and Settings, click Communication
Settings.
4 In the Communication Settings for group name dialog box, under
Management Server List, select the management server list.
The group that you select then uses this management server list when
communicating with the management server.
5 Click OK.
Chapter 35
Managing sites and
replication
What are sites and how does replication work?
Deciding whether or not to set up multiple sites and replication
Determining how many sites you need
How to install a second site for replication
Replicating data immediately
Deleting sites

A site consists of one database, one or more management servers, and clients. By
default, you deploy Symantec Endpoint Protection as a single site. Organizations
with more than one data center or physical location generally use multiple sites.
Replication configurations are used for redundancy. Data from one database is
duplicated, or replicated, on another database. If one database fails, you can still
manage and control all clients because the other database contains the client
information.
Managing sites and replication 692
See What are sites and how does replication work? on page 693.
Table 35-1 Process for setting up sites and replication
Tasks Description
Step 1: Determine whether you need to add Before you set up multiple sites and replication, make sure that it is
another site necessary. Symantec recommends that you set up multiple sites
only in specific circumstances and that you add a maximum of five
sites in each site farm. If you do add an additional site, decide which
site design works for your organization.
See Deciding whether or not to set up multiple sites and replication

on page 696.
Step 2: Install Symantec Endpoint Protection When you install Symantec Endpoint Protection for the first time, by
Manager on the first site default you have installed the first site, or the local site.
Step 3: Install Symantec Endpoint Protection You create a second site by installing a second management server.
Manager on the second site The second site is classified as a remote site and the management
server is called a replication partner. Replication occurs according
to the default schedule that when you added the second site during
the initial installation. After you have added a replication partner,
you can change the replication schedule and what data is replicated.
The first time that the databases between the two sites replicate, let
the replication finish completely. The replication may take a long
time because the entire database gets replicated.
You may want to replicate the data immediately, rather than waiting
until the database are scheduled to replicate. You can also change
the replication schedule to occur earlier or later.
See Replicating data immediately on page 702.
Step 4: Check the history for replication events If you need to check that replication occurred or to troubleshoot the
(optional) replication events, look at the System log.
In the second management server, click Monitors > Logs > System
> Administrative >Additional Settings, and under Event type, click
Replication events.
You can also reconfigure a management server to replicate the data with a currently
existing site in your network. Or, if you have two non-replicating sites, you can
convert one of the sites into a site that replicates with the second site.

on page 708.
After you configure the Symantec Endpoint Protection, you should back up the
database, which contains all your configuration changes.
If you disable a replication partner to upgrade to the latest version of the
management server, you must re-add the replication partner.
See Disabling replication and restoring replication before and after an upgrade
on page 147.
See Connecting to a directory server on a replicated site on page 227.

Sites and replication partners
Determining the size of the replication server
Sites and replication partners

A site is a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager database with one or more
Symantec Endpoint Protection Managers attached to that database. Replication
enables data to be duplicated between databases on separate sites so that both
databases contain the same information. If one database fails, you can manage
each site by using the information on the database from the second site.
A replication partner is an individual management server within the second site, or
remote site. A site may have as many replication partners as needed. Each partner
connects to the main site or local site, which is the site that you are logged on to.
All sites that are set up as partners are considered to be in the same site farm.
Each site you replicate data with is either a replication partner or a site partner.
Both replication partners and site partners use multiple management servers, but
the database they use and the way in which they communicate is different:
Replication partners can use either an embedded database or a Microsoft SQL
Server database. The management servers do not share the database. All
replication partners share a common license key.
If you use an embedded database, you can only connect one Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. If you use the Microsoft SQL Server database, you can
connect multiple management servers that share one database. Only one of
the management servers needs to be set up as a replication partner.
Site partners share a single Microsoft SQL Server database.
How does replication work?

The changes that you make on any partner are duplicated to all other partners. For
example, you may want to set up one site at your main office (site 1) and a second
site (site 2). Site 2 is a partner to site 1. The databases on site 1 and site 2 are
reconciled by using the replication schedule. If a change is made on site 1, it
automatically appears on site 2 after replication occurs. If a change is made on site
2, it automatically appears on site 1 after replication occurs. You can also install a
third site (site 3) that can replicate data from either site 1 or site 2.
After replication occurs, the database on site 1 and the database on site 2 are the
same. Only computer identification information for the servers differs.
Figure 35-1 How replication works between the main site and two remote sites
Site 1 Site 2
Symantec Endpoint Symantec

Protection Manager Endpoint
Protection
Manager
MS SQL MS SQL
database database
Replication
Replication
Site 3
Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager
MS SQL
database
For more information on how often to replicate, see the following article: The
Philosophy of SEPM Replication Setup
See Deciding whether or not to set up multiple sites and replication on page 696.
See How to resolve data conflicts between sites during replication on page 695.

A replication partner requires a larger database than a single management server
installation. The increased size requirements for the replication server include the
following factors:
Number of managed clients
Client installation package sizes retained in the database
Number of log files retained
Database maintenance settings
Log size and expiration timeframes
Definition update sizes
Database backup information requirements
In general, the hard disk requirements for the replication server should be at least
three times the hard disk space used by the original Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager for the initial replication.
Replication considerations and best practices
Symantec Endpoint Protection Sizing and Scalability Best Practices White Paper
How to resolve data conflicts between sites during replication

Replication causes data to be transferred or forwarded to another management
server. Sites can have multiple replication partners, and any changes made on one
partner are replicated to all sites.
What data is duplicated?

Neither replication site overrides the other. Instead they compare what each site
has, and if one site has a package or piece of content the other does not, then it is
shared. If all LiveUpdate content and client packages match up, then nothing is
exchanged.
The replication partners duplicate the following data:
Policies and groups (required bidirectional)
LiveUpdate content and client installation packages, if you specify these options
(optional bidirectional)
Logs (optional bidirectional or unidirectional)
Replication does not occur if the database schema versions do not match.
Table 35-2 describes how the management server resolves conflicts if administrators
change settings on the sites in a site farm.
Table 35-2 How the management server resolves conflicts between sites
Conflict type Example Resolution
Two differences cannot Administrators for site 1 and site The management server retains only the most recently
exist together. 2 both configure an identical made change.
Firewall policy setting. On site 1,
For example, if you made a change on site 1 first, and
the setting is enabled. On site 2,
site 2 second, then the site 2 change is retained.
the setting is disabled.
The same variable is Administrators on site 1 and site The management server retains both changes, adding a
created for both sites. 2 both add a group with the same tilde and the numeral 1 (~1) after the more recently made
name. variable.
For example, with two groups named as Sales, the most

recently named Sales group becomes Sales ~1.
Data can merge without The administrator for site 1 adds The management server merges the changes.
conflict. two Firewall policies and the
For example, the management server displays all seven
administrator for site 2 adds five
Firewall policies on both sites.
Firewall policies.
Deciding whether or not to set up multiple sites and

replication
Before you install a second site, you should decide whether or not multiple sites
and replication are a good choice in your network. Setting up more than one site
adds a complexity that you may not need. Multiple sites can cause certain tasks
such as viewing client logs and reports more difficult. Generally, you should install
only one site.
The main purposes to set up multiple sites and replication are:
If your network has a slow WAN link.
Multiple sites provide a second management server to which clients in multiple
geographical areas can connect locally. For example, suppose a company has
several large offices in both Germany and in the United States. If the connection
between Germany and the United States is slow, then the company should
create one site in Germany and one site in the United States. The Germany
clients can connect to the Germany site and the United States clients can connect
to the United States site. This distribution reduces the number of clients that
have to communicate over the slow WAN link.
For database redundancy.
Replication ensures that if one datacenter was corrupted or lost, you would have
backed up the database in a different datacenter.
In some situations, you should use a Group Update Provider (GUP) instead of
multiple sites and replication. Use a GUP when you have either a lot of clients, or
clients that are distributed over several geographical locations.
Note: You should not set up more than five replicated sites.
Table 35-3 Deciding whether to use more than one site with replication, a GUP,
or neither
Question Answer Use multiple sites with replication

or use a GUP
Do you have more than 45,000 Yes. Yes.

clients?
Do you have either multiple locations For a slow WAN link, consider using
or a slow WAN link that connects to replication.
a location with more than 1,000 For multiple locations, consider using
clients? a GUP.
No. You do not need either replication

or a GUP.
No. Yes. Consider using replication.
Do you have a slow WAN link that No. You do not need either replication
connects to a location with more or a GUP.
than 1,000 clients?
Do you have a slow WAN link? Yes. Yes. Consider using replication.
Do you have multiple locations with No. Consider using a GUP.

more than 1,000 clients per location?
No. Yes. Consider using replication.
Do you have multiple locations with No. You do not need either replication
more than 1,000 clients per location? or a GUP.
Table 35-3 Deciding whether to use more than one site with replication, a GUP,
or neither (continued)
Question Answer Use multiple sites with replication

or use a GUP
Do you have multiple locations with Yes. Yes. Consider using a GUP.
more than 1,000 clients per location?
than 1,000 clients?
No Yes. Consider using a GUP.
than 1,000 clients?
When to use replication with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager


A majority of small and medium-sized organizations need only a single site to
centrally manage network security. Since each site has only one database, all data
is centrally located.
Even a large organization with a single geographic location typically needs only
needs one site. But for the organizations that are too complex to manage centrally,
you should use a distributed management architecture with multiple sites.
You should consider multiple sites for any of the following factors:
A large number of clients.
The number of geographical locations and the type of communications links
between them.
The number of functional divisions or administrative groups.
The number of datacenters. A best practice is to set up one Symantec Endpoint
Protection site for each datacenter.
How frequently you want to update the content.
How much client log data you need to retain, how long you need to retain it, and
where it should be stored.
A slow WAN link between multiple physical locations with thousands of clients.
If you set up a second site with its own management server, you can minimize
the client-server traffic over that slow link. With fewer clients, you should use a
Group Update Provider.
Any miscellaneous corporate management and IT security management
considerations that are unique.
Use the following size guidelines to decide how many sites to install:
Install as few sites as possible, up to a maximum of 20 sites. You should keep
the number of replicated sites under five.
Connect up to ten management servers to a database.
Connect up to 45,000 to 50,000 clients to a management server.
After you add a site, you should duplicate site information across multiple sites by
replication. Replication is the process of sharing information between databases
to ensure that the content is consistent.
Table 35-4 Multi-site designs
Site design Description
Distributed Each site performs replication bi-directionally for groups and policies, but not logs and content. To
view the site reports, you use the console to connect to a management server in the remote site.
Use this design when you do not need immediate access to remote site data.
Centralized All logs are forwarded from the other sites to a central site.
logging
Use this design when you require centralized reporting.
High availability Each site has multiple management server installations and database clustering.
To handle additional clients, you add multiple management servers rather than adding multiple
sites. You then use a management server list to configure client computers to automatically switch
to an alternative management server if the primary management server becomes unavailable.
You use this design to provide redundancy, failover, and disaster recovery.
Note: When you use replication with an embedded database, Symantec recommends that you do
not add load balancing, as data inconsistency and loss may result.
For more information on whether or not to set up replication, see the following
article: When to use replication with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager


Installing a second site for replication is a two-part process:
Install a second Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and database to
replicate with a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and database that is
already installed.
Log on to the second Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and change the
schedule and the items that you want to replicate (optional).
Changing the replication frequency and content
Installing a second site for replication

To install a second site for replication
1 Install a second Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
The Management Server Configuration Wizard automatically starts after the
management server installation.
2 In the Management Server Configuration Wizard, click Custom
configuration for new installation (more than 500 clients, or custom
settings), and then click Next.
3 Click Install an additional site, and then click Next.
4 In the next panel, type the following information, and then click Next:
Replication server
The name or IP address of the management server that is already installed
and that this management server replicates with.
System Administrator name and Password.
The system administrator's user name is admin by default. You must use
a system administrator account, and not a limited administrator account or
domain administrator account.
Check Replicate client packages and LiveUpdate content between the
local site and this partner site (Optional).
If you don't check this option now, you can check it later.
5 If a warning message about accepting the certificate appears, click Yes.

6 In the site information pane, accept or change the default values, and then
click Next.
7 In the database choice pane, click either the Default Embedded database or
Microsoft SQL Server database, and then click Next.
The site that you replicate with must use the same type of database.
Complete the installation based on the database that you choose.
8 In the Run LiveUpdate pane, click Next.
Optionally add the partner information.
9 Optionally accept the data collection feature, and then click Next.
The database gets created. This step takes some time.
The Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager launches.
Changing the replication frequency and content

By default, replication is scheduled to occur automatically after you install the second
site and management server. Replication occurs according to the default schedule
as part of installing the second management server. However, you may need to
change the frequency based on how long replication takes. You can change the
frequency on either the local site or the new site, but Symantec recommends that
you configure replication on the new site first. The schedule on both sites is the
same the next time the two sites replicate. The site with the smaller ID number
initiates the scheduled replication. Whichever site is configured as the new replication
partner always has its database overwritten by the database from the local site that
the new site points to.
Both sites automatically share groups and policies. You can choose whether to
replicate logs, client installation packages, or LiveUpdate content based on the
amount of disk space that is available.
The time that it takes to replicate depends on the size of the database as well as
network connection between the sites. First, test a replication cycle to see how long
it takes. You should schedule your replication based on that time period, and make
sure that the time when the management servers duplicate data does not overlap.
Both the client packages and LiveUpdate content can include a large volume of
data. The data in a client package might be as large as 5 GB. The client installation
packages may require as much as 500 MB of disk space. If you plan to replicate
logs, make sure that you have sufficient disk space for the additional logs on all the
replication partner servers.
After the initial, full database replication, subsequent replications are fairly small, if
you only replicate policies, clients, and groups, and not logs. Make sure that the
management servers have enough available disk space to replicate based on the
frequency and content.
To change the replication frequency and schedule
2 Under Servers > Local Site, expand Replication Partners, and select the
site you want to replicate with.
3 Under Tasks, click Edit Replication Partner Properties.
4 Choose the content you want to replicate.
5 To change the schedule, do one of the following tasks:
Check Auto-replicate to let the management server choose when to
replicate the data.
This option causes frequent and automatic replication to occur between
two sites, about every 2 hours.
Check Replicate on a schedule to set up a custom schedule.
6 Click OK.
Replication considerations and best practices
See Replicating data immediately on page 702.
on page 147.

Replication normally occurs according to the default schedule when you set up an
additional site. You might want replication to occur immediately. The site with the
smaller ID number initiates the scheduled replication.
If you use the Microsoft SQL Server database with more than one server, you can
only initiate replication from the first server at that site.
Deleting sites
To replicate data at any time

2 Under Servers > Local Site, expand Replication Partners and select the
site.
3 Under Tasks, click Replicate Now.
4 Click Yes.
5 Click OK.
Deleting sites
Deleting a replication partner disconnects the partnership in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager, but does not uninstall the management server software or
delete the second site.
If you remove the management server at a remote site, you need to manually delete
it from all sites. Uninstalling the software from one management server console
does not make the icon disappear from the Servers pane on other consoles.
on page 147.
To delete a site
1 In the console, click Admin > Servers > Local Site, expand Replication
Partners, right-click the replication partner, and click Delete Replication
Partner.
2 Under Remote Sites, right-click the site and click Delete Remote Site.
3 Click Yes.
Chapter 36
Preparing for disaster
recovery
Disaster recovery best practices
Backing up the database and logs
Backing up a server certificate
Reinstalling or reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Generating a new server certificate
Restoring the database

To prepare for recovery after a hardware failure or database corruption, you should
back up the information that is collected after you install Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
Preparing for disaster recovery
Performing disaster recovery
Preparing for disaster recovery 705
Preparing for disaster recovery

Table 36-1 High-level steps to prepare for disaster recovery
Step Description
Step 1: Back up the database Back up the database regularly, preferably weekly.
By default, the database backup folder is saved to the following default

location:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager\data\backup
The backup file is called date_timestamp.zip.
Step 2: Back up the disaster recovery The recovery file includes the encryption password, keystore files domain
file ID, certificate files, license files, and port numbers. By default, the file is
located in the following directory:

Protection Manager\Server Private Key
Backup\recovery_timestamp.zip
The recovery file only stores the default domain ID. If you have multiple
domains, the recovery file does not store that information. If you need to
perform disaster recovery, you must re-add the domains.
Step 3: Update or back up the server If you update the self-signed certificate to a different certificate type, the
certificate (optional) management server creates a new recovery file. Because the recovery file
has a timestamp, you can tell which file is the latest one.
Step 4: Save the IP address and host If you have a catastrophic hardware failure, you must reinstall the
name of the management server to a management server using the IP address and host name of the original
text file (optional) management server.
Add the IP address and host name to a text file, such as: Backup.txt.
Step 5: Store the backup data in a Copy the files you backed up in the previous steps to another computer
secure location off-site
Performing disaster recovery

Table 36-2 lists the steps to recover your Symantec Endpoint Protection environment
in the event of hardware failure or database corruption.
Before you follow these steps, make sure that you made backups and recovery
files.
Table 36-2 Process for performing disaster recovery
Step Action
Step 1: Reinstall Symantec Endpoint By reinstalling the management server, you can recover the files that were
Protection Manager using a disaster saved after initial installation.
recovery file.
on page 708.
If you reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on a different

computer and without using the disaster recovery file, you must generate a
new server certificate.
See Generating a new server certificate on page 710.
Step 2: Restore the database. You can restore the database with or without a database backup.
Step 3: Re-enable Federal Information If you use a FIPS-compliant version of Symantec Endpoint Protection and
Processing Standards (FIPS) 140-2 have FIPS compliance enabled, after you recover Symantec Endpoint
compliance. (optional) Protection Manager, you must reenable FIPS compliance.
This setting is not stored in the disaster recovery file.
See Backing up your license files on page 100.

See Exporting and importing server settings on page 667.
See: Disaster recovery best practices for Symantec Endpoint Protection 12.1.

Symantec recommends that you back up the database at least weekly. You should
store the backup file on another computer.
By default, the backup file is saved in the following folder: C:\Program Files
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\data\backup.
The backups are placed in a .zip file. By default, the backup database file is named
date_timestamp.zip, the date on which the backup occurs.
Note: Avoid saving the backup file in the product installation directory. Otherwise,
the backup file is removed when the product is uninstalled.
Log data is not backed up unless you configure Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager to back it up. If you do not back up the logs, then only your log configuration
options are saved during a backup. You can use the backup to restore your
database, but the logs in the database are empty of data when they are restored.
You can keep up to 10 versions of site backups. You should ensure that you have
adequate disk space to keep all your data if you choose to keep multiple versions.
You can check the System log as well as the backup folder for the status during
and after the backup.
You can back up the database immediately, or schedule the backup to occur
automatically. You can back up an embedded database or a Microsoft SQL Server
database that is configured as the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager database.
To back up the database and logs
1 On the computer that runs Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, on the
Start menu, click All Programs > Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
> Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Tools > Database Back Up and
Restore.
2 In the Database Back Up and Restore dialog box, click Back Up.
3 In the Back Up Database dialog box, optionally check Backup logs, and then
click Yes.
4 Click OK.
5 When the database backup completes, click Exit.
6 Copy the backup database file to another computer.
To back up the database and logs from within the console
2 Under Servers, click Local Site (My Site) > localhost.
3 Under Tasks, click Back Up Database Now.
4 In the Back Up Database dialog box, optionally check Backup logs, and then
click Yes.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Close.

In case the computer on which the management server is installed gets corrupted,
you should back up the private key and the certificate.
The JKS Keystore file is backed up during the initial installation. A file that is called
server_timestamp.xml is also backed up. The JKS Keystore file includes the
server's private and public key pair and the self-signed certificate.
To back up a server certificate
2 Under Servers, click the management server whose server certificate you want
to back up.
4 In the Manage Server Certificate panel, click Back up the server certificate
5 In the Back Up Server Certificate panel, click Browse to specify a backup
folder, and then click Open.
Note that you back up the management server certificate into the same folder.
6 In the Backup Server Certificate panel, click Next.
7 Click Finish.
Reinstalling or reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager
If you need to reinstall or reconfigure the management server, you can import all
your settings by using a disaster recovery file. You can reinstall the software on the
same computer, in the same installation directory. Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager creates a recovery file during installation. You can also use this procedure
to reconfigure the existing site, or to install an additional site for replication.
To reinstall the management server
1 Uninstall the existing management server.
2 Install the server from the installation file.
Reinstalling or reconfiguring Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
3 In the Welcome panel, make sure that the Use a recovery file to restore
communication with previously deployed clients option is checked, and
then click Next.
By default, the recovery file is located in: C:\Program Files
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\Server Private
Key Backup.
4 Follow the instructions in each panel. The default settings work for most cases.
If the reinstalled server connects to an existing database, you change the
database settings to those of the existing database.
You can also restore the database if necessary. However, if the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager database resides on another computer or is otherwise not
affected, you do not need to restore your database.
To reconfigure the management server
1 To reconfigure the management server, click Start > All Programs > Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager > Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Tools > Management Server Configuration Wizard.
2 Select one of the following options:
To reconfigure the management server on the existing site, click
Reconfigure the management server.
To reconfigure the management server to replicate data with an existing
site, click Reconfigure the management server to replicate with a
different site.
This option reconfigures the locally installed management server to create
a new site and to replicate the data with another existing site in your network.
Also, if you have two non-replicating sites, use this option to convert one
of the sites into a site that replicates with the second site.
Note: If you leave Use a recovery file to restore communication with

previously deployed clients checked, the installation proceeds. However,
it ignores the default domain ID in the recovery file and uses the domain
ID of the replication partner. After reconfiguration completes, existing clients
may fail to connect due to the change in domain ID.
3 Follow the instructions in each panel.


If you reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on a different computer,
you must generate a new server certificate.
If the original computer is corrupted or you upgrade the management server from
a previous version, you must reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on
a different computer. To reinstall Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on a
different computer, you install the management server as if for the first time, rather
than with the recovery file.
You reinstall the database settings on a different computer by using the database
backup and restore utility. However, the server certificate that the new management
server uses does not match the existing server certificate in the restored database.
Because client-server communication uses the server certificate, you must generate
a new server certificate.
on page 708.
To generate a new server certificate
2 Under Servers, click the management server.
4 In the Manage Server Certificate panel, click Generate new server certificate
5 Click Yes, and then click Next.
After you log on to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, you are asked to trust
the new certificate.

If the database gets corrupted or you need to perform disaster recovery, you can
restore the database. To restore the database, you must first have backed it up.
You must restore the database using the same version of Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager that you used to back up the database. You can restore the
database on the same computer on which it was installed originally or on a different
computer.
The database restore might take several minutes to complete.

You can still perform disaster recovery without a database backup, but the following
points apply in this case:
You must recreate or import all policies from other backups, such as exported
policy files.
Clients can communicate with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, but only
re-appear in the console only after their next check-in.
Clients reappear in the default group as they check in, unless you enable
automatic creation of client groups on the reinstalled Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager. You edit "scm.agent.groupcreation=true" in the
conf.properties file, which is located in: <drive>Program files
or(x86)/Symantec/Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager/tomcat/etc.
If you originally had multiple Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager domains

beyond the default domain, you must re-create them using the domain IDs in
SEPBackup.txt.
To restore the database
1 Stop the management server service.
2 On the Start menu, click All Programs > Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager > Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager Tools > Database
Back Up and Restore.
3 In the Database Back Up and Restore dialog box, click Restore.
4 Click Yes to confirm the database restoration.
5 In the Restore Site dialog box, select the backup database file, and then click
OK.
Locate the copy of the backup database file that you made when you backed
up the database. By default, the backup database file is named
date_timestamp.zip.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Exit.
8 Restart the management server service.
Section 8
Troubleshooting Symantec
Chapter 37. Troubleshooting installation and communication problems
Chapter 38. Troubleshooting reporting issues
Chapter 39. Using Power Eraser to troubleshoot difficult and persistent threats
Chapter 37
Troubleshooting
installation and
communication problems
Troubleshooting Symantec Endpoint Protection
Troubleshooting computer issues with the Symantec Diagnostic Tool (SymDiag)
Identifying the point of failure of an installation
Troubleshooting connectivity problems between Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager and the Symantec Endpoint Protection client
Troubleshooting communication problems between Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager and the console or the database
Client and server communication files
Enabling the management server to send information to Symantec about a client

that crashed

Table 37-1 displays the most common issues that you might encounter when you
install and use Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Troubleshooting installation and communication problems 714
Table 37-1 Common issues you can troubleshoot
Task Description
Fixing installation problems You can download and run the Symantec Diagnostic Tool (SymDiag) to verify that your
computers are ready for installation. The tool is provided from the Symantec Support
website through Help on the management server and the client.
See Troubleshooting computer issues with the Symantec Diagnostic Tool (SymDiag)
on page 715.
See Identifying the point of failure of an installation on page 715.
Handling virus outbreaks You can prevent threats from attacking computers on your network.
on page 388.
If a threat does attack a client computer, you can identify and respond to the threat.
Virus removal and troubleshooting on a network
Troubleshooting content If the latest virus definitions do not update correctly on Symantec Endpoint Protection
update problems Manager or the clients, see the following article:
Troubleshoot LiveUpdate and definition issues with Endpoint Protection Manager
Symantec Endpoint Protection: LiveUpdate Troubleshooting Flowchart
Fixing communication The communication channels must be open between all of the Symantec Endpoint
problems Protection components. These channels include the following: server to client, server
to database, and server and client to the content delivery component, such as
LiveUpdate.

See Troubleshooting communication problems between Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager and the console or the database on page 726.
Best Practices and Troubleshooting for Group Update Providers
Performing disaster recovery In case of database corruption or hardware failure, you can restore the latest snapshot
of the database if you have a database backup file.
Reducing the space in the You can make more space available on the database if the database size gets too
database large.

Troubleshooting computer issues with the Symantec Diagnostic Tool (SymDiag)
Table 37-1 Common issues you can troubleshoot (continued)
Task Description
Troubleshooting reporting You can solve various report and log issues.
issues
See Troubleshooting reporting issues on page 731.
Troubleshooting replication Replication Troubleshooting Flowchart for Symantec Endpoint Protection

issues
Troubleshooting computer issues with the Symantec

Diagnostic Tool (SymDiag)
You can download a utility to diagnose common issues you encounter with installing
and using Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager or the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client.
The support tool helps you with the following issues:
Lets you quickly and accurately identify known issues.
When the tool recognizes an issue, the tool redirects you to the resources to
resolve the issue yourself.
When an issue is not resolved, the tool lets you easily submit data to Support
for further diagnostics.
To troubleshoot computer issues with the Symantec Diagnostic Tool (SymDiag)
See: Download the Symantec Diagnostic Tool (SymDiag) to detect
Symantec product issues
In either the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager or the client, click
Help > Download Symantec Diagnostic Tool
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Identifying the point of failure of an installation

The Windows Installer and Push Deployment Wizard create log files that can be
used to verify whether or not an installation was successful. The log files list the
components that were successfully installed and provide a variety of details that
are related to the installation package. You can use the log file to help identify the
component or the action that caused an installation to fail. If you cannot determine
Troubleshooting connectivity problems between Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client
the reason for the failed installation, you should retain the log file. Provide the file
to Symantec Technical Support if it is requested.
Note: Each time the installation package is executed, the log file is overwritten.
To identify the point of failure of an installation

1 In a text editor, open the log file that the installation generated.
2 To find failures, search for the following entry:
Value 3
The action that occurred before the line that contains this entry is most likely
the action that caused the failure. The lines that appear after this entry are the
installation components that have been rolled back because the installation
was unsuccessful.
on page 115.
Troubleshooting connectivity problems between

Symantec Endpoint Protection client
If you have trouble with client and server communication, you should first check to
make sure that there are no network problems. You should also check network
connectivity before you call Symantec Technical Support.
You can check the communication between the client and the management server
in several ways.
Protection client
Table 37-2 Checking the connection between the management server and the
client
What to check Solution
Look on the client to see if the You can download and view the troubleshooting file on the
client connects to the client to verify the communication settings.
management server
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client status icons
on page 160.
See Checking the connection to the management server on

the client computer on page 719.
See Investigating protection problems using the

troubleshooting file on the client on page 720.
Test the connectivity between You can perform several tasks to check the connectivity
the client and the between the client and the management server.
management server
See Enabling and viewing the Access log to check
whether the client connects to the management server
on page 720.
Ping the management server from the client computer.
See Using the ping command to test the connectivity to
the management server on page 722.
Use a Web browser on the client computer to connect to
the management server.
See Using a browser to test the connectivity to Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager on the Symantec Endpoint
Protection client on page 722.
Protection client
client (continued)
Check that the management If you reinstalled Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager,
server uses the correct server check that the correct server certificate was applied. If the
certificate management server uses a different server certificate, the
server still downloads content, but the client cannot read the
content. If the management server uses the wrong server
certificate, you must update it.
See Best practices for updating server certificates and

maintaining the client-server connection on page 660.
You can verify that the management server uses the wrong
server certificate by checking the following items:
The client does not display the green dot in the taskbar,
which indicates that it does not communicate with the
management server.
See Checking whether the client is connected to the
management server and is protected on page 158.
The client does not receive policy updates from the
management server.
The management server shows that it does connect with
the client.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection client status icons
on page 160.
Check for any network You should verify that there are no network problems by
problems checking the following items:
Test the connectivity between the client and the

management server first. If the client computer cannot
ping or Telnet to the management server, you should
verify the DNS service for the client.
Check the client's routing path.
Check that the management server does not have a
network problem.
Check that the Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall (or
any third-party firewall) does not cause any network
problems.
Protection client
client (continued)
Check the debug logs on the You can use the debug log on the client to determine if the
client client has communication problems.
See Checking the debug log on the client computer

on page 723.
See Checking the inbox logs on the management server

on page 723.
Recover lost client If the clients have lost the communication with a management
communication server, you can use a tool to recover the communication file.
See Restoring client-server communication settings by using

the SylinkDrop tool on page 724.
If Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager displays logging errors or HTTP error

codes, see the following article: Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Communication Troubleshooting.
Checking the connection to the management server on the client

computer
If you have a managed client, you can check your connection to the management
server. If you are not connected to the management server, you can request that
your client connect.
Checking the connection to the management server on the client computer
1 On the Status page, click Help > Troubleshooting.
2 In the Troubleshooting dialog box, click Connection Status.
3 In the Connection Status pane, you can see the last attempted connection
and the last successful connection.
4 To reestablish a connection with the management server, click Connect Now.
Protection client
Investigating protection problems using the troubleshooting file on

the client
To investigate client problems, you can examine the Troubleshooting.txt file on
the client computer. The Troubleshooting.txt file contains information about
policies, virus definitions, and other client-related data.
Symantec Technical Support might request that you email the Troubleshooting.txt
file.
To export the troubleshooting file from the client
1 On the client computer, open the client.
2 In the client, click Help > Troubleshooting.
3 In the Management pane, under Troubleshooting Data, click Export.
4 In the Save As dialog box, accept the default troubleshooting file name or type
a new file name, and then click Save.
You can save the file on the desktop or in a folder of your choice.
5 Using a text editor, open Troubleshooting.txt to examine the contents.
Enabling and viewing the Access log to check whether the client
connects to the management server
You can view the Apache HTTP server Access log on the management server to
check whether the client connects to the management server. If the client connects,
the client's connection problem is probably not a network issue. Network issues
include the firewall blocking access, or networks not connecting to each other.
You must first enable the Apache HTTP server Access log before you can view the
log.
Note: Disable the log after you view it because the log uses unnecessary CPU
resources and hard disk space.

Protection client
To enable the Apache HTTP server Access log

1 In a text editor, open the file C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager\apache\conf\httpd.conf.
2 In the httpd.conf file, remove the hash mark (#) from the following text string
and then save the file:
#CustomLog "logs/access.log" combined
3 Stop and restart the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager service and
Apache HTTP server:
See Stopping and starting the Apache Web server on page 721.
To view the Apache HTTP server Access log
1 On the management server, open the file C:\Program Files
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager\apache\logs\access.log.
2 Look for a client computer's IP address or host name, which indicates that
clients connect to the Apache HTTP server.
3 Disable the Apache HTTP server Access log.
Stopping and starting the Apache Web server

When you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, it installs the Apache
Web server. The Apache Web server runs as an automatic service. You may need
to stop and restart the Web server to enable the Apache HTTP Server Access log.
See Enabling and viewing the Access log to check whether the client connects to
the management server on page 720.
To stop the Apache Web server
net stop semwebsrv
To start the Apache Web server

net start semwebsrv
Protection client
Using the ping command to test the connectivity to the management

server
You can try to ping the management server from the client computer to test
connectivity.
To use the ping command to test the connectivity to the management server
1 On the client, open a command prompt.
2 Type the ping command. For example:
ping name
where name is the computer name of the management server. You can use
the server IP address in place of the computer name. In either case, the
command should return the server's correct IP address.
If the ping command does not return the correct address, verify the DNS service
for the client and check its routing path.
Using a browser to test the connectivity to Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager on the Symantec Endpoint Protection client
You can use a web browser on the client computer to test the connectivity between
the management server and the client. This method helps determine whether the
problem is with the connection or network, or with the client itself.
You can also check the connection between the management server and the client
computer by using the following methods:
Checking whether the Symantec Endpoint Protection client status icon shows
a green dot.
Checking the connection status on the Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
See Checking the connection to the management server on the client computer
on page 719.
Protection client
To use a browser to test the connectivity to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager

on the Symantec Endpoint Protection client
1 On the client computer, open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer.
2 In the browser command line, type the following command:
http://SEPMServer:8014/secars/secars.dll?hello,secars
where SEPMServer is the management server's DNS name, NetBIOS name,
or IP address.
3 When the webpage appears, look for one of the following results:
If the word OK appears, the client computer connects to the management
server. Check the client for a problem.
If the word OK does not appear, the client computer does not connect to
the management server. Check the client's network connections and that
network services are running on the client computer. Verify the DNS service
for the client and check its routing path.
See Troubleshooting connectivity problems between Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager and the Symantec Endpoint Protection client
on page 716.
Checking the debug log on the client computer

You can check the debug log on the client. If the client has communication problems
with the management server, status messages about the connection problem appear
in the log.
You can check the debug log by using the following methods:
In the client, on the Help and Support menu, in the Troubleshooting dialog box,
you can click Edit Debug Log Settings and type a name for the log. You can
then click View Log.
You can use the Windows registry to turn on debugging in the client.
You can find the Windows registry key in the following location:
Protection\SMC\smc_debuglog_on
Checking the inbox logs on the management server

You can use a Windows registry key to generate logs about activity in the
management server inbox. When you modify the Windows registry key, the
Protection client
management server generates the logs (ersecreg.log and exsecars.log). You can
view these logs to troubleshoot client and server communication.
See Checking the debug log on the client computer on page 723.
To check the inbox logs on the management server
1 On the management server, under
Protection\SEPM, set the DebugLevel value to 3.
The inbox appears in the following default location on the management server
computer: C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager\data\inbox\log
2 Open the log with Notepad.
Restoring client-server communication settings by using the

SylinkDrop tool
The Sylink.xml file includes communication settings between the client and a
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server. If the clients have lost the
communication with a management server, you must replace the old Sylink.xml file
with a new Sylink.xml file. The SylinkDrop tool automatically replaces the Sylink.xml
file on the client computer with a new Sylink.xml file.
Note: You can also replace the Sylink.xml file by redeploying a client installation
package. Use this method for a large number of computers, for computers that you
cannot physically access easily or computers that require administrative access.
When you run the SylinkDrop tool, it can also perform the following tasks:
Migrates or moves clients to a new domain or management server.
Restores the communication breakages to the client that cannot be corrected
on the management server.
Moves a client from one server to another server that is not a replication partner.
Moves a client from one domain to another.
Converts an unmanaged client to a managed client.
Protection client
You can write a script with the tool to modify communication settings for large
numbers of clients.
To restore client-server communication settings by using the SylinkDrop tool for
Windows
1 In the console, export the communications file from the group that connects to
the management server to which you want the client computer to connect. The
communications file is the Sylink.xml file.
on page 168.
2 Copy the communication file to the client computer.
You can either save the file to a network location, email it to the user on the
client computer, or copy it to removable media.
In the full product installation file from FileConnect, locate
Tools\SylinkDrop\SylinkDrop.exe.
See A guide to Endpoint Protection files on FileConnect.
On the computer that runs the management server, locate C:\Program
Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection\Version.Number\Bin\SylinkDrop.exe
You can run the tool remotely or save it and then run it on the client computer.
For information on the command-line options, in the \Tools\SylinkDrop
folder, click the readme file.
4 In the Sylink Drop dialog box, click Browse, and locate the .xml file you
deployed in step 2 to the client computer.
5 Click Update Sylink.
6 When you see a confirmation dialog box, click OK.
7 In the Sylink Drop dialog box, click Exit.
Troubleshooting communication problems between Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager and the console or the
database
Troubleshooting communication problems between

console or the database
If you have a connection problem with the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console or the database, you may see one of the following symptoms:
The management server service (semsrv) stops.
The management server service does not stay in a started state.
The Home, Monitors, and Reports pages display an HTTP error.
The Home, Monitors, and Reports pages are blank.
The Home, Monitors, and Reports pages display a continuously loading progress
bar, without displaying any content.
All of these issues display a Java -1 error in the Windows Event log. To find the
specific cause for the Java -1 error, look in the scm-server log. The scm-server log
is located by default in the following location:
Manager\tomcat\logs\scm-server-0.log
Table 37-3 Checking the communication with the console or database
What to check Description
Test the connectivity You can verify that the management server and the database
between the database and communicate properly.
See Verifying the connection with the database on page 727.
Check that the management If you cannot log on to the management server's remote
server heap size is correct. console, you may need to increase the Java heap size. You
may also see an out-of-memory message in the scm-server
log.
For more information on the default heap sizes, see:

Determining the default settings for the network sizes that you
select during installation of the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager
database
Table 37-3 Checking the communication with the console or database

(continued)
What to check Description
Check that the management You can check whether the management server runs multiple
server is not running multiple software packages that use different versions of PHP. PHP
versions of PHP. checks for a global configuration file (php.ini). If there are
multiple configuration files, you must force each product to
use its own interpreter. When each product uses the correct
version of PHP associated with it, the management server
operates properly.
Check the system You can check whether both the client and the management
requirements. server run the minimum or the recommended system
requirements.
For the most current system requirements, see: Release notes,

new fixes, and system requirements for all versions of Endpoint
Protection
Verifying the connection with the database

The management server and the database may not communicate properly. You
should verify that the database runs and then test the connection between the
server and the database.
If the management server runs the embedded Sybase database, perform the
following steps:
Verify that the Symantec Embedded Database service runs and that the
dbsrv9.exe process listens to TCP port 2638.
Test the ODBC connection.
If the management server runs the remote SQL database, perform the following
actions:
Verify that you have specified a named instance when you installed and
configured Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
Verify that SQL Server runs and is properly configured.
Verify that the network connection between management server and the SQL
database is correct.
Test the ODBC connection.
database
To verify communication with the embedded database

1 On the management server, click Start > Control Panel > Administrative
Tools.
2 In the Administrative Tools dialog box, double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
3 In the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click System DSN.
4 On the System DSN tab, double-click SymantecEndpointSecurityDSN.
5 On the ODBC tab, verify that the Data source name drop-down list is
SymantecEndpointSecurityDSN and type an optional description.
6 Click Login.
7 On the Login tab, in the User ID text box, type dba.
8 In the Password text box, type the password for the database.
This password is the one that you entered for the database when you installed
9 Click Database.
10 On the Database tab, in the Server name text box, type
<\\servername\instancename>.
If you use the English version of Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, type
the default, sem5. Otherwise, leave the Server name text box blank.
11 On the ODBC tab, click Test Connection and verify that it succeeds.
12 Click OK.
13 Click OK.
To verify communication to the SQL database
1 On the management server, click Start > Control Panel > Administrative
Tools.
2 In the Administrative Tools dialog box, double-click Data Sources (ODBC).
3 In the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click System DSN.
4 On the System DSN tab, double-click SymantecEndpointSecurityDSN.
5 In the Server drop-down list, verify that the correct server and instance is
selected.
6 Click Next.
7 For Login ID, type sa.
8 In the Password text box, type the password for the database.
This password is the one that you entered for the database when you installed
9 Click Next and make sure that sem5 is selected for the default database.
10 Click Next.
11 Click Finish.
12 Click Test Data Source and look for the result that states:
TESTS COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY!

The communication settings between the client and server and other client settings
are stored in files on the client computer.
Table 37-4 Client files
File name Description
SerDef.dat An encrypted file that stores communication settings by location. Each

time the user changes locations, the SerDef.dat file is read and the
appropriate communication settings for the new location are applied to
the client.
sylink.xml Stores the global communication settings. This file is for internal use
only and should not be edited. It contains settings from the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. If you edit this file, most settings will be
overwritten by the settings from the management server the next time
the client connects to the management server.
SerState.dat An encrypted file that stores information about the user interface, such
as the client's screen size, whether the client's console for Network and
Host Exploit Mitigation appears, and whether Windows services appear.
When the client starts, it reads this file and returns to the same user
interface state as before it was stopped.
Enabling the management server to send information

to Symantec about a client that crashed
If Symantec Endpoint Protection clients or third-party processes that interact with
the client crashes or behaves unexpectedly, the client sends logs about the event
to a Symantec server. This information includes the product name and version
Enabling the management server to send information to Symantec about a client that crashed
name, module, and other error details. Symantec uses this information to help
resolve product issues.
In 12.1.6 and earlier, you had to physically or remotely access the client to collect
the logs and send them to Technical Support if requested.
To enable the management server to send information to Symantec about a client
that crashed
1 In the console, click Admin > Servers > Local Site (My Site) > Edit Site
Properties.
2 On the Data Collection tab, make sure that Let clients send troubleshooting
information to Symantec to resolve product issues faster is checked, and
then click OK.
Chapter 38
Troubleshooting reporting
issues
Troubleshooting reporting issues
Changing timeout parameters for reviewing reports and logs
Accessing reporting pages when the use of loopback addresses is disabled
Troubleshooting reporting issues

You should be aware of the following information when you use reports:
Timestamps, including client scan times, in reports and logs are given in the
user's local time. The reporting database contains events in Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT). When you create a report, the GMT values are converted to the
local time of the computer on which you view the reports.
If managed clients are in a different time zone from the management server,
and you use the Set specific dates filter option, you may see unexpected results
The accuracy of the data and the time on both the client and the management
server may be affected.
If you change the time zone on the server, log off of the console and log on
again to see accurate times in logs and reports.
In some cases, the report data does not have a one-to-one correspondence
with what appears in your security products. This lack of correspondence occurs
because the reporting software aggregates security events.
You can use SSL with the reporting functions for increased security. SSL provides
confidentiality, the integrity of your data, and authentication between the client
and the server.
Troubleshooting reporting issues 732
See the article: Enabling SSL communications between a Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager and its clients
Risk category information in the reports is obtained from the Symantec Security
Response Web site. Until the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
is able to retrieve this information, any reports that you generate show Unknown
in the risk category fields.
The reports that you generate give an accurate picture of compromised
computers in your network. Reports are based on log data, not the Windows
registry data.
If you get database errors when you run a report that includes a large amount
of data, you might want to change database timeout parameters.
See Changing timeout parameters for reviewing reports and logs on page 732.
If you get CGI or terminated process errors, you might want to change other
timeout parameters.
For more information, see the following document in the following article: SEPM
Reporting does not respond or shows a timeout error message when querying
large amounts of data.
If you have disabled the use of loopback addresses on the computer, the
reporting pages do not display.
See Accessing reporting pages when the use of loopback addresses is disabled
on page 734.
Changing timeout parameters for reviewing reports

and logs
If database errors occur when you view either reports or logs that contain a lot of
data, you can make the following changes:
Change the database connection timeout
Change the database command timeout
The reporting defaults for these values are as follows:
Connection timeout is 300 seconds (5 minutes)
Command timeout is 300 seconds (5 minutes)
To change database timeout values in Reporter.php

1 Browse to the following default folder on the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager server:
Manager\Php\Include\Resources
2 Open the Reporter.php file with a plain-text editor, such as Notepad.
3 Find the $CommandTimeout line and increase the value (in seconds). If the
line does not exist, create it. For example, to increase the timeout period to 10
minutes, change the line to the following value:
$CommandTimeout = 600;
You must create the new line before the following characters: ?>
4 Find the $ConnectionTimeout line and increase the value (in seconds). If the
line does not exist, create it. For example, to increase the timeout period to 10
minutes, change the line to the following value:
$ConnectionTimeout = 600;
5 Save and close the Reporter.php file.
Note: If you specify zero, or leave the fields blank, the default setting is used.
If you get CGI or terminated process errors, you might want to change the following
parameters:
max_execution_time parameter in the Php.ini file
The Apache timeout parameters, FcgidIOTimeout, FcgidBusyTimeout, and
FcgidIdleTimeout, in the httpd.conf file
To change the max_execution_time parameter in Php.ini
1 Browse to following default folder on the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
server:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\Php
2 Right-click the Php.ini file, and then click Properties.
3 On the General tab, uncheck Read-only.
4 Click OK.
5 Open the Php.ini file with a plain-text editor, such as Notepad.
6 Locate the max_execution_time entry and increase the value (in seconds).
For example, to increase the timeout to 10 minutes, change the line to the
following value:
max_execution_time=600
7 Save and close the Php.ini file.
8 Right-click the Php.ini file, and then click Properties.
9 On the General tab, check Read-only.
10 Click OK.
To change Apache timeout parameters in httpd.conf
1 Browse to the following default folder on the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager server:
Manager\apache\conf
2 Open the httpd.conf file with a plain-text editor, such as Notepad.
3 Locate the following lines and increase the values (in seconds):
FcgidIOTimeout 1800
FcgidBusyTimeout 1800
FcgidIdleTimeout 1800
4 Save and close the httpd.conf file.
Accessing reporting pages when the use of loopback

addresses is disabled
If you have disabled the use of loopback addresses on the computer, the reporting
pages do not display. If you try to log on to the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager console or to access the reporting functions, you see the following error
message:
Unable to communicate with Reporting component
The Home, Monitors, and Reports pages are blank; the Policies, Clients, and
Admin pages look and function normally.
To get the Reports components to display when you have disabled loopback
addresses, you must associate the word localhost with your computer's IP address.
You can edit the Windows hosts file to associate localhost with an IP address.
See Logging on to reporting from a standalone web browser on page 594.
To associate localhost with the IP address on computers running Windows

1 Change directory to the location of your hosts file.
By default, the hosts file is located in %SystemRoot%\system32\drivers\etc
2 Open the hosts file with an editor.
3 Add the following line to the hosts file:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx localhost #to log on to reporting functions
where you replace xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with your computer's IP address. You can
add any comment you want after the pound sign (#). For example, you can
type the following line:
192.168.1.100 localhost # this entry is for my console computer
4 Save and close the file.
Chapter 39
Using Power Eraser to
troubleshoot difficult and
persistent threats
What you should know before you run Power Eraser from the Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager console
Tasks to perform when you need to run Power Eraser from the Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager console
Starting Power Eraser analysis from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Responding to Power Eraser detections
What you should know before you run Power Eraser

from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console
Power Eraser provides aggressive scanning and analysis to help resolve issues
with heavily infected Windows computers. Because Power Eraser analysis is
aggressive, it sometimes flags the critical files that you might need. Power Eraser
can produce more false positives than virus and spyware scans.
Using Power Eraser to troubleshoot difficult and persistent threats 737
What you should know before you run Power Eraser from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
Warning: You should run Power Eraser only in emergency situations, such as when
computers exhibit instability or have a persistent problem. Typically, you run Power
Eraser on a single computer or small group of computers. You should not run other
applications at the same time. In some cases, a regular scan event alerts you to
run a Power Eraser analysis.
Differences between using Power Eraser from Symantec

Endpoint Protection Manager or locally with the SymDiag tool
You can run Power Eraser remotely from the management console on your Windows
clients. Symantec Endpoint Protection does not include an option to launch Power
Eraser directly from the client. However, a user on the client computer can download
the SymDiag tool and run Power Eraser from the tool.
If you use the SymDiag tool, Power Eraser detections do not appear in the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logs.
When you run Power Eraser from the console, Power Eraser does not examine
the user-specific load points, registrations, and folders that the SymDiag tool
examines.
Note: Make sure that you do not run Power Eraser from the console and locally
with the SymDiag tool at the same time. Otherwise, you might negatively affect the
Power Eraser consumes a large amount of computer resources. Power Eraser files
can also consume a large amount of space on the computer if you run Power Eraser
on a computer multiple times. During each analysis, Power Eraser saves detection
information in the files that it stores in the Symantec Endpoint Protection application
folder. The files are purged when the client purges the logs.
How Power Eraser is different from virus and spyware scans

Power Eraser is different from regular scans in the following ways:
Unlike a full scan, Power Eraser does not scan every file on the computer. Power
Eraser examines load points and load point disk locations as well as running
processes and installed services.
Power Eraser detections do not appear in the Quarantine.
Power Eraser takes precedence over virus and spyware scans. When you run
Power Eraser, Symantec Endpoint Protection cancels any virus and spyware
scan in progress.
Power Eraser does not automatically remediate detections. You must review
the detection list in the Scan log or Risk log and select an action from the log.
What you should know before you run Power Eraser from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
You can choose to remove the detection or mark the detection as safe (leave
alone). You can also restore (undo) a removed detection.
Power Eraser can run in regular mode or in rootkit mode. The rootkit mode requires
a restart before the scan launches. Also, if you choose to remove any Power Eraser
detection, the computer must be restarted for the remediation to complete.
Overview of the high-level steps that you perform when you

need to run Power Eraser
You perform two high-level steps when you run Power Eraser from the console:
Start a Power Eraser analysis on one computer or a small group of computers.
Power Eraser does not automatically remediate any detections because of the
potential for false positives.
Use the Risk log or Scan log to review Power Eraser detections and manually
request that Power Eraser remove any detections that you determine are threats.
You can also acknowledge the detections that you want to ignore and leave
alone.
Review the workflow for details about how to run Power Eraser from the console
and how to make sure that you configure the console settings correctly.
See Tasks to perform when you need to run Power Eraser from the Symantec
Overview of the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager policy

settings that affect Power Eraser
The following are the policy settings that affect Power Eraser:
Scan settings for user interaction
When you let users cancel any virus and spyware scan, you also let them cancel
any Power Eraser analysis. However, users cannot pause or snooze Power
Eraser.
See Allowing users to view scan progress and interact with scans on Windows
Exceptions policy
Power Eraser honors the following virus and spyware exceptions: file, folder,
known risk, application, and trusted web domain. Power Eraser does not honor
extension exceptions.
Log retention settings
You can take action on Power Eraser detections as long as the detections appear
in the logs. The logs are purged after the period of time that is specified in the
Virus and Spyware Protection policy. By default, log events are available for 14
Tasks to perform when you need to run Power Eraser from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
days. You can modify the log retention setting, or after the events expire, you
can run another scan and re-populate the logs.
on page 466.
Restart options
You can configure the restart settings specifically for rootkit analysis when you
choose to run Power Eraser in rootkit detection mode. The administrator must
have restart privileges. After you choose to remove a Power Eraser detection,
the computer uses the group restart settings. Power Eraser does not use the
rootkit restart settings to restart and complete a remediation.
Reputation queries
Power Eraser uses the Symantec Insight server in the cloud when it scans and
makes decisions about files. If you disable reputation queries, or if the client
computer cannot connect to the Insight server, Power Eraser cannot use
Symantec Insight. Without Symantec Insight, Power Eraser makes fewer
detections, and the detections it makes are more likely to be false positives.
Reputation queries are enabled when the Allow Insight lookups for threat
detection option is enabled. The option is enabled by default.
Submissions
Symantec Endpoint Protection sends the information about Power Eraser
detections to Symantec when the Antivirus detections option is enabled. The
option is enabled by default.
Tasks to perform when you need to run Power Eraser

from the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console
Typically you need to run a Power Eraser analysis when the Risk log shows a failed
repair and recommends that you run Power Eraser. You also might run Power
Eraser when a computer becomes unstable and appears to have malware or a
virus that cannot be removed.
Warning: Use Power Eraser carefully. The analysis is aggressive and prone to false
positives.
You can run Power Eraser from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager on Windows
client computers only.
Note: Power Eraser runs in one of two modes: without rootkit detection or with
rootkit detection. The rootkit detection analysis requires a restart. The administrator
must have restart privileges to run Power Eraser with rootkit detection.
Table 39-1 Tasks to perform when you need to run Power Eraser from the
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console
Task Description
Set administrator privileges to run Power To run Power Eraser on client computers, administrators must have the
Eraser following command access rights:
Start Power Eraser Analysis

Restart Client Computers (required to run Power Eraser with rootkit
detection)
Set the log retention policy The log retention setting affects how long the events are available for you
to perform the Power Eraser remediate and restore actions. You can modify
the log retention setting if you want more time to consider these actions.
Alternately, you can run Power Eraser again to re-populate the logs.
The log retention setting is part of the miscellaneous options in the Virus and
Spyware Protection policy.

on page 466.
Make sure that your clients have Internet Your client computers require Internet access so that Power Eraser can use
connectivity Symantec Insight reputation data to make decisions about potential threats.
Intermittent or non-existent Internet access means that Power Eraser cannot
use Symantec Insight. Without Symantec Insight, Power Eraser makes fewer
detections, and the detections it produces are more likely to be false positives.
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager console (continued)
Task Description
Start a Power Eraser analysis on a client Choose whether to run Power Eraser in regular mode or rootkit mode.
computer from Symantec Endpoint You can issue the Power Eraser command from several places in Symantec
Protection Manager Endpoint Protection Manager:
Clients page
Computer Status log
Risk log
Note: A user on the client computer cannot run Power Eraser directly from
the client user interface. Power Eraser is available as part of the SymDiag
tool. However, if a client user runs the tool, the resulting logs that include
Power Eraser detections are not sent to Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager.
See Starting Power Eraser analysis from Symantec Endpoint Protection

You can view the status of the command in the Computer Status log. You
can filter the log so that only Power Eraser commands appear for ease of
viewing.
After you run Power Eraser, you view the results in the Scan log or the Risk
log. The Scan log shows whether or not scan results are pending.
Cancel a Power Eraser command or To cancel the Power Eraser command, use the Command Status log.
action on a client computer
Note: You cannot cancel Power Eraser running in rootkit mode after the
restart prompt appears on the client computer. After the restart, only the
computer user can cancel Power Eraser if the Virus and Spyware Protection
policy lets users cancel scans.
If you cancel the Power Eraser command, you also cancel any pending
actions that are associated with any Power Eraser analysis, including any
remediation or undo actions.
Task Description
View Power Eraser detections from the You can view Power Eraser detections from the following logs in Symantec
logs Endpoint Protection Manager:
Scan log
The Scan log has a Scan type filter to display only Power Eraser results.
The view also indicates whether or not scan results are pending. You
can select Detections in the filtered view to display the Power Eraser
Detections view.
Risk log
The Risk log provides a similar filter for Power Eraser detections.
However, the Risk log does not show whether or not scan results are
pending.
Computer Status log
The Computer Status log might include report icons in the Infected
column. The event details icon links to a report that shows all current
threats that cannot be remediated. The report includes log-only detections
and unresolved detections. The report might recommend that you run
Power Eraser on some computers.
A Power Eraser icon links to a report that shows any Power Eraser
detections on the computer that require administrator action.
These icons also appear in the Health State column on the Clients page.
Check for the notifications that By default, the administrator receives a notification when a regular scan
recommend that you run Power Eraser cannot repair an infection and Power Eraser is recommended. You can check
on client computers for the Power Eraser recommended notification on the Monitors >
Notifications page.
View Power Eraser detections on the You can access reports about Power Eraser detections on the Command
Command Status page Status page.
An event details icon appears in the Completion Status column. The icon
links to a report that shows information about detections that were made by
the Start Power Eraser Analysis command and any other scan command.
The command status details option gives you information about a particular
scan. You can click on the event details icon to get information about a
particular client computer.
Task Description
View Power Eraser detections from the You can access reports about Power Eraser detections from the Clients tab
Clients tab on the Clients page.
Report icons appear in the Health State column if information is available.

The event details icon links to a report that shows all current threats that
cannot be remediated. The report includes any Power Eraser detections.
A Power Eraser icon links to a report that shows any Power Eraser detections
on the computer that require administrator action.
The icons also appear in the Computer Status log.
Remediate or restore Power Eraser Unlike other Symantec Endpoint Protection scans, Power Eraser does not
detections from the Scan log or Risk log automatically remediate detected threats. Power Eraser analysis is aggressive
in Symantec Endpoint Protection and might detect many false positives. After you determine that the detection
Manager requires remediation, you must initiate a remediation manually.
You can also undo (restore) a Power Eraser detection that you remediated.
See Responding to Power Eraser detections on page 745.
Starting Power Eraser analysis from Symantec

You can run Power Eraser to analyze and detect persistent threats on a single
computer or a small group of computers.
After Power Eraser detects potential risks, you view the risks and determine which
risks are threats. Power Eraser does not automatically remediate risks. You must
manually run Power Eraser to remediate the risks that you determine are threats.
You can also run Power Eraser on a particular threat or threats that other protection
features detect. Power Eraser runs on the computers that are associated with the
detection.
See Responding to Power Eraser detections on page 745.
Note: When you run Power Eraser in rootkit mode, and the restart option message
appears on the client computer, the administrator or the user cannot cancel Power
Eraser. After the restart, the user can cancel Power Eraser if the Virus and Spyware
Protection policy lets users cancel scans.
To start Power Eraser analysis from the Clients page in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager
1 On the Clients page, on the Clients tab, select the computers that you want
to analyze.
If you select many computers, you might adversely affect the performance of
your network.
2 Under Tasks, click Run command on computers, and then click Start Power
Eraser Analysis.
3 In the Choose Power Eraser dialog, select whether or not you want Power
Eraser to run in rootkit mode. For rootkit mode, you can set the restart options.
You must have administrator privileges to set restart options and run a rootkit
scan.
4 Click OK.
Power Eraser runs on the select computers. You can cancel the command on
the Command Status tab on the Monitors page.
To start Power Eraser analysis from the Computer Status log in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager
1 In the console, in the sidebar, click Monitors and select the Logs tab.
2 In the Log type list box, select the Computer Status log, and then click View
Log.
3 Select the computers on which you want to run Power Eraser and select Start
Power Eraser Analysis from the Commands drop-down box.
If you select many computers, you might adversely affect the performance of
your network.
4 Click Start.
scan.
6 Click OK.
Power Eraser runs on the selected computers. You can cancel the command
on the Command Status tab.
To start Power Eraser analysis from the Risk log in Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager
1 In the console, in the sidebar, click Monitors and select the Logs tab.
2 In the Log type list box, select the Risk log, and then click View Log
3 Select the risks on which you want to run Power Eraser. In the Event Action
column, you might see an alert to run Power Eraser.
You can run Power Eraser on any risk in the log.
4 Select Start Power Eraser Analysis from the Action drop-down or the Action
column.
5 Click Start.
scan.
7 Click OK.
Power Eraser runs on the computers that are infected with the selected risks.
You can cancel the command on the Command Status tab.

Power Eraser does not remediate any detections during a scan because its
aggressive detection capability is prone to false positives. You must request
remediation for detected events from the logs after you review the detections and
decide whether to remediate them or leave them alone. If you choose remediation,
Power Eraser removes the files that are associated with the detection. However,
you can restore the removed files until the logs are purged.
The log retention policy determines how long Power Eraser events are available.
By default, the events are available for 14 days.
To respond to Power Eraser detections
1 Make sure that the Power Eraser analysis completed.
The Computer Status log includes an icon that indicates the scan is
complete.
The Scan log shows whether or not Power Eraser finished the analysis.
2 In the Risk log or on the Scan log > View detections page, select a single
detection or multiple detections to which to apply an action.
Next to a particular risk that is labeled Potential risk found (Pending
admin action), click the plus icon in the Action column.
Select multiple risks that are labeled Potential risk found (Pending admin
action), and then select the action from the Action drop-down menu.
3 Choose one of the following actions:

Delete risk that Power Eraser detected
Remediates the risk by removing it from the computer. Power Eraser saves
a safe backup file that can be restored.
Ignore risk that Power Eraser detected
Acknowledges that you reviewed the detection and do not want to remediate
the risk.
Note: This action changes the event action to Left alone by Admin in the
management console logs only. The acknowledgement does not update
the corresponding event action on the client. The client log view continues
to show the event action as Pending analysis.
4 If you selected an action from the Action drop-down menu, click Apply.
If you selected Ignore risk that Power Eraser detected, the detection now appears
as Potential risk found (left alone).
You can restore a removed detection that is labeled Potential risk found
(Removed) by selecting the Restore risk that Power Eraser deleted action.
Table 39-2 Summary of Power Eraser detection states
Detection state Description
Pending admin action Power Eraser detected the risk as a potential

threat. You should review the risk and decide if
Power Eraser should remediate the risk or
acknowledge the risk and leave it alone.
Restored An administrator restored any files that were moved

when an administrator requested that Power Eraser
remediate the risk.
Deleted An administrator requested that Power Eraser

remediate and delete the risk. When Power Eraser
deletes a risk, it deletes the files that are
associated with the risk but makes safe backup
copies that can be restored. You might want to
restore a deleted risk that you later determine is
not a risk. You can restore the files until the log
events are purged.
Left alone by admin An administrator requested that Power Eraser

leave the risk alone.
Appendix A
Client feature comparison
tables
This appendix includes the following topics:
Feature dependencies on Windows clients
Client protection features based on platform
Management features based on platform
Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings based on platform
Intrusion Prevention policy settings based on platform
LiveUpdate policy settings based on platform
Exceptions policy settings based on platform
Device Control differences based on platform
Comparison of Symantec Endpoint Protection Windows client type versions

Some policy features require each other to provide complete protection on Windows
client computers.
Warning: Symantec recommends that you do not disable Insight lookups.

Client feature comparison tables 749
Table A-1 Dependencies of protection features
Feature Interoperability Notes
Download Protection Download Protection is part of Auto-Protect and gives Symantec Endpoint
Protection the ability to track URLs. The URL tracking is required for several
policy features.
If you install Symantec Endpoint Protection without Download Protection,

Download Insight has limited capability. Browser Intrusion Prevention and
SONAR require Download Protection.
The Automatically trust any file downloaded from an intranet website

option also requires Download Protection.
Download Insight Download Insight has the following dependencies:
Auto-Protect must be enabled

If you disable Auto-Protect, Download Insight cannot function even if
Download Insight is enabled.
Insight lookups must be enabled
Symantec recommends that you keep the Insight lookups option enabled.
If you disable the option, you disable Download Insight completely.
Note: If basic Download Protection is not installed, Download Insight runs

on the client at level 1. Any level that you set in the policy is not applied. The
user also cannot adjust the sensitivity level.
Even if you disable Download Insight, the Automatically trust any file
downloaded from an intranet website option continues to function.
If you disable Download Insight, you disable portal detections. This means
that Auto-Protect and scheduled and on-demand scans evaluate all files as
non-portal files and use a sensitivity level that is determined by Symantec.

Table A-1 Dependencies of protection features (continued)
Insight Lookup (12.1.x clients) and cloud Insight Lookup uses the Symantec Insight reputation database in the cloud
protection to make decisions about files that were downloaded from a supported portal.
Starting in 14:
The Insight Lookup functionality runs automatically as part of Auto-Protect,

scheduled scans, and on-demand scans on standard and embedded/VDI
clients. The standard and embedded/VDI clients support cloud-enabled
content.
You can enable or disable Insight Lookup in the scan settings for any
12.1.x clients you have, but you can no longer configure a specific
sensitivity level for Insight Lookup. Legacy Insight Lookup now uses the
sensitivity level that is set in the Download Insight policy.
See How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses the Intelligent Threat Cloud
Service on page 398.
Cloud scans and 12.1.x Insight Lookup have the following feature
dependencies:
Insight lookups must be enabled. Otherwise, cloud scans and Insight

Lookup cannot function.
Download Insight must be enabled so that files can be marked as portal
files.
If Download Insight is disabled, cloud scans and Insight Lookup continue
to function. They use a sensitivity level that is automatically set by
Symantec that detects only the most malicious files.
Note: (12.1.x clients only) Cloud lookups do not apply to right-click scans
of folders or drives on your client computers. However, cloud lookups do
apply to right-click scans of selected portal files.
SONAR SONAR has the following dependencies:
Download Protection must be installed.

Auto-Protect must be enabled.
If Auto-Protect is disabled, SONAR loses some detection functionality
and appears to malfunction on the client. SONAR can detect heuristic
threats, however, even if Auto-Protect is disabled.
Insight lookups must be enabled.
Without Insight lookups, SONAR can run but cannot make detections.
In some rare cases, SONAR can make detections without Insight lookups.
If Symantec Endpoint Protection has previously cached reputation
information about particular files, SONAR might use the cached
information.

Table A-1 Dependencies of protection features (continued)
Browser Intrusion Prevention Download Protection must be installed. Download Insight can be enabled
or disabled.
Trusted Web Domain exception The exception is only applied if Download Protection is installed.
Custom IPS signatures Uses the firewall.
Power Eraser Uses Insight lookups.
Power Eraser uses reputation information to examine files. Power Eraser

has a default reputation sensitivity setting that you cannot modify. If you
disable the option Allow Insight lookups for threat detection, Power Eraser
cannot use reputation information from Symantec Insight. Without Insight,
Power Eraser makes fewer detections, and the detections are more likely
to be false positives.
Note: Power Eraser uses its own reputation thresholds that are not
configurable in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. Power Eraser does
not use the Download Insight settings.
Generic Exploit Mitigation Intrusion prevention must be installed. Intrusion prevention can be enabled
or disabled.

Table A-2 lists which protection features are available on Windows clients, Mac
clients, and Linux clients.
Table A-2 Client protection features based on platform
Client feature Windows Mac Linux
Virus and Spyware Protection Yes Yes Yes

Table A-2 Client protection features based on platform (continued)
Client feature Windows Mac Linux
Network and Host Exploit Mitigation Yes Yes (Intrusion prevention No

only; 12.1.4 and later)
Network Threat Protection
(intrusion prevention and firewall) Note: Intrusion
Generic Exploit Mitigation (14) prevention for the Mac
does not support custom
signatures.
Proactive Threat Protection Yes Device Control only (as No

of 14)
Application and Device Control
SONAR
Host Integrity Yes No No
Other protections Yes No No
System lockdown
Tamper Protection
See Device Control differences based on platform on page 764.

See How Host Integrity works on page 563.

Table A-3 lists the management features that are available on Windows clients,
Table A-3 Management features based on platform
Management feature Windows Mac Linux
Deploy clients remotely from

Manager
Web link and email

Remote push Yes (Web link and email,
Save package Yes Yes Save package only)
Table A-3 Management features based on platform (continued)
Run commands on clients from Scan Scan Scan

the management server Update content Update content Update content
Update content and Update content and Update content and
scan scan scan
Start Power Eraser Restart client Enable Auto-Protect
analysis (12.1.5) computers (hard restart
Restart client only)
computers Enable Auto-Protect
Enable Auto-Protect Enable Network Threat
Enable Network Threat Protection (12.1.4)
Protection Disable Network Threat
Disable Network Threat Protection (12.1.4)
Protection
Enable Download
Insight
Disable Download
Insight
Collect File Fingerprint
List (12.1.6)
Delete from
Quarantine**
Cancel all scans**
Enable learned applications and Yes No No

Network Application Monitoring
Create locations and set Yes Yes No

security policies that apply by
You can view the client's
location
location by the command
line, but the client does not
automatically switch
locations based on specific
criteria.
Set restart options for clients Yes No No

Quick reports and Scheduled Audit Computer status Audit

reports Application and Device Network and Host Computer status
Control Exploit Mitigation Risk
Compliance Risk Scan
Computer status Scan System
Network and Host
Exploit Mitigation
Risk
Scan
System
Set size and retention options System System System

for logs that are maintained on Security and risk Security and risk Security and risk
the client computers Security Security
Traffic
Packet
Control
Password protecting the client Yes No No
Move clients to a different Yes Yes No

management server by running
the SylinkDrop tool
Move clients to a different Yes Yes No

management server by
redeploying a client package
with the Communication
update package deployment
option
Configure client submissions of Yes (12.1.4 and later) No

anonymous security information
The Submissions setting
to Symantec
only controls antivirus
detection information.
You can manually disable

or enable intrusion
prevention submissions on
the clients.
How to disable IPS data

submission on Symantec
Endpoint Protection for
Mac clients
Configure clients to securely Yes No No

submit anonymous system and
usage information
Manage the external Yes For LiveUpdate only No

communication between the
management server and the
clients
Manage client communication Management server Management server Management server

settings lists lists lists
Communication mode Communication mode Communication mode
(push or pull) (push or pull) (push or pull)
Set heartbeat interval Set heartbeat interval Set heartbeat interval
Upload learned Set download
applications randomization
Upload critical events Set reconnection
immediately preferences
Set download
randomization
Set reconnection
preferences
Configure clients to use private Yes No No

servers (12.1.6)
Advanced Threat Protection

server for Insight lookups
and submissions
Private Insight server for
Insight lookups
Automatically upgrade the Yes Yes (14) No

client with AutoUpgrade
Automatically uninstall existing Yes No No

third-party security software
Automatically uninstall a Yes No No

problem Symantec Endpoint
Protection client (14)
**You can only run these commands when viewing logs in Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
See Using Intelligent Updater files to update content on Windows computers
on page 209.
on page 318.
AutoUpgrade differences based on platform

Table A-4 lists the differences in the AutoUpgrade feature between Mac and
Windows.
Table A-4 AutoUpgrade differences based on platform
Windows Mac
Standard clients receive a delta upgrade package that Mac clients always receive a full install package for
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager generates. upgrade.
Embedded and dark network clients receive the full install
package for an upgrade.
Windows client installation settings offer more configuration Mac client installation settings offer configuration options
options, such as a custom installation folder, and the option only for restart and upgrade. You cannot customize the
to uninstall existing security software. installation folder. Installation logging always writes to
/tmp/sepinstall.log.
In the restart options for Client Install Settings, you can The restart options for Client Install Settings do not
choose not to restart the Windows client computer after include an option to not restart. Mac client computers
the upgrade completes. always restart after the upgrade completes.
When you run the Upgrade Clients with Package wizard, You cannot modify the feature set on the Mac client.
you can modify the feature set on the Windows client.
You can upgrade to the latest version of Symantec AutoUpgrade is not supported for an upgrade from version
Endpoint Protection from any earlier version, based on the 12.1.6 or earlier. For example, you cannot upgrade from
supported upgrade path. 12.1.6 to 14 using AutoUpgrade.

See on page 138.
Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings based

on platform
Table A-5 lists the differences in the settings that are available for Windows clients,
Table A-5 Virus and Spyware Protection policy settings based on platform
Policy setting Windows Mac Linux
Administrator-defined scans Scheduled scans Scheduled scans Scheduled scans

(Active, Full, Custom) (Custom) (Custom)
On-demand scans On-demand scans On-demand scans
Triggered scans Retry missed scheduled Retry missed scheduled
Startup scans scans scans
Retry missed scheduled
scans
Randomized scheduled
scans
Auto-Protect Enable Auto-Protect Enable Auto-Protect Enable Auto-Protect

Scan all files Automatically repair Scan all files
Scan only selected infected files Scan only selected
extensions Quarantine files that extensions
Determine file types by cannot be repaired Scan removable media
examining file contents Scan compressed files Scan for security risks
Scan for security risks Scan all files Scan files on remote
Scan files on remote Scan only selected computers
computers (14) folders Scan when files are
Scan when files are Scan everywhere accessed or modified
accessed, modified, or except in selected Scan inside
backed up folders compressed files
Scan floppies for boot Scan for security risks
viruses, with the option
Scan on mount, current
to delete the boot virus
clients:
or log it only
Always delete newly Data disks
created infected files or All other disks and
security risks devices
Preserve file times Scan on mount, legacy
Tune scan performance clients (12.1.3 and earlier):
for scan speed or
Music or video disks
application speed
iPod players
Show progress during
scan
(continued)
Email scans Internet email No No

Auto-Protect
Microsoft Outlook
Auto-Protect
Lotus Notes
Auto-Protect
What to scan Additional locations All or selected folders All files

Memory Hard drives and All or selected folders
Selected folders removable drives Selected extensions
Selected extensions Files inside Files inside
Storage migration compressed files compressed files
locations Security risks
Files inside
compressed files
Security risks
User-defined scans (client) Active scan Full scan Full scan

Full scan Custom scan of Custom scan of
Custom scan of individual folders and individual folders and
individual folders, files, files files
and extensions
Define remediation actions for Clean (only applies to Repair infected files Clean (only applies to
detections malware) Quarantine files that malware)
Quarantine cannot be repaired Quarantine
Delete Delete
Leave alone (log only) Leave alone (log only)
The actions apply to

categories of malware and
security risks that
Symantec periodically
updates.
(continued)
Set actions to take while a scan Stop the scan (12.1.4) No

is running Pause a scan Stop a scan
Snooze a scan Pause a scan
Scan only when the Snooze a scan before
computer is idle it begins
Snooze a scan that is
in progress (through
12.1.6x only)
Scan only when the
computer is idle
Download Insight Yes No No
Insight lookups for threat Yes No No

detection
Bloodhound Yes No No
SONAR Yes No No
Scans of remote computers

(14)
Suspicious Behavior
Detection (14)
Early Launch Anti-Malware Windows 8 and later, and No No

Driver Windows Server 2012 and
later
Power Eraser (12.1.5) Yes No No
Advanced Threat Protection Yes No No

enablement (12.1.6)
Shared Insight Cache Yes No No
vShield-enabled (12.1.6
and earlier)
Virtual Image Exception Yes No No
on page 388.
Intrusion Prevention policy settings based on platform
Intrusion Prevention policy settings based on

platform
Table A-6 displays the differences in the settings that are available for Windows
clients and Mac clients
Table A-6 Intrusion Prevention policy settings based on platform
Policy setting Windows Mac (12.1.4)
Exceptions for intrusion prevention Yes Yes

signatures
Note: Custom exceptions are not
supported for Browser Protection
signatures.
Show or hide user notifications Yes Yes
Enable or disable excluded hosts Yes Yes
Custom IPS signatures Yes No
Enable or disable Network Intrusion Yes Yes

Prevention
LiveUpdate updates IPS content Yes Yes
The management server updates IPS Yes No **

content
Client package includes IPS Yes Yes
Network intrusion prevention Yes Yes
Browser intrusion prevention Yes No
Log-only mode (12.1.6)
Excluded hosts (network intrusion Yes Yes

prevention)
Generic Exploit Mitigation Yes No
**You can set up the Apache web server that installs with Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager as a reverse proxy for LiveUpdate content. See:

Table A-7 displays the differences in the LiveUpdate settings that are available for
Windows clients, Mac clients, and Linux clients.
Table A-7 LiveUpdate policy settings based on platform
Use the default management Yes No ** No **

server
Use a LiveUpdate server Yes Yes Yes

(internal or external)
Use a Group Update Provider Yes No No
Enable third-party content Yes No No

management
Enable/disable definitions Yes Yes No
Reduced-size definitions Yes No No

(12.1.6)
Run Intelligent Updater to Virus and spyware Virus and spyware Virus and spyware
update content definitions definitions definitions
SONAR (12.1.3) Only for legacy clients
IPS definitions (12.1.3) (12.1.3 and earlier)
LiveUpdate proxy Yes Yes, but it is not configured Yes

configuration in the LiveUpdate policy. To
configure this setting, click
Clients > Policies, and
then click External
Communications
Settings.
Table A-7 LiveUpdate policy settings based on platform (continued)
LiveUpdate schedule settings Frequency Frequency Frequency

Retry window Download randomization Retry window
Download randomization Download randomization
Run when computer is
idle
Options for skipping
LiveUpdate
Use standard HTTP headers Yes, by default Yes, by default Yes, by default
(12.1.6 and earlier)
Client security patches (14) Yes No No
** You can set up the Apache web server that installs with Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager as a reverse proxy for LiveUpdate content. See:
See Comparison of Symantec Endpoint Protection Windows client type versions
on page 766.
See Using Intelligent Updater files to update content on Windows computers
on page 209.

Table A-8 displays the Exceptions policy settings.
Table A-8 Exceptions policy settings based on platform
Server-based exceptions Applications Security risk exceptions Folders

Applications to monitor for files or folders Extensions
Extensions
Files
Folders
Known risks
Trusted web domains
Tamper Protection
exceptions
DNS or Host file change
exceptions
Client restrictions (Controls Yes No No

which restrictions end users
can add on the client
computer)

Table A-9 lists the differences in the Device Control feature between Mac and
Windows.
Table A-9 Device Control differences based on platform
Windows Mac
Device control works based only on Class ID (GUID) and Device control works at the file system level. Volume-level
Device ID. tasks (such as those that can be performed via command
line or Disk Utility) are unaffected.
Device control performs wildcard matches on Class ID or Device control performs regular expression (regexp)
Device ID with the star character or asterisk (*). matches, and are limited to the following specific
operations:
. (dot)
\ (backslash)
[set], [^Set] (set)
* (star character or asterisk)
+ (plus)
Table A-9 Device Control differences based on platform (continued)
Windows Mac
The Hardware Device list includes many common device You can choose from only five device types:
types by default.
Thunderbolt
CD/DVD
USB
FireWire
Secure Digital (SD) Card
You do not use the Hardware Device list.
You can add additional custom devices to the Hardware You cannot add additional custom devices.
Device list by Class ID or Device ID.
Devices to block (or to exclude from blocking) are derived Devices to block (or exclude from blocking) are selected
only from the Hardware Device list. The list includes those from the device types noted above. The vendor, model,
default common device types, as well as custom devices and serial number can be left blank, or can be defined by
you may have added. regular expression (regexp) queries. You can use regular
expressions to define a range of similar devices, such as
from different vendors, model, serial number ranges, and
so on.
You can add more than one device type at a time. You can only add one device type at a time.
The actions to take are to block, or to exclude from The actions to take are to block, or to exclude from
blocking (allow). blocking (allow) with mount permissions.
The following mount permissions are supported:
Read only
Read and write
Read and execute
Read, write, and execute
You can customize the client notification for device control. You cannot customize the client notification for device
control.

Comparison of Symantec Endpoint Protection Windows client type versions
Comparison of Symantec Endpoint Protection

Windows client type versions
Standard client (as of 14) Standard client (12.1.x)
Uses virus and spyware definitions in the cloud. Cannot use virus and spyware definitions in the cloud,
Installs only the latest virus and spyware definitions on but uses reputation lookups for Download Insight and
disk. SONAR.
The standard client is approximately 80 percent to 90 Installs the full set of virus and spyware definitions.
percent smaller on disk than legacy standard or dark Handles AutoUpgrade with deltas rather than full
network Windows clients. installation.
Handles AutoUpgrade with deltas rather than full
installation.
Dark network client (as of 14)
Cannot use definitions in the cloud.

Intended for clients with intermittent or no access to
the cloud.
Installs the full set of virus and spyware definitions.
Similar to legacy standard-size client; uses reputation
lookups for Download Insight and SONAR if connected
to the cloud.
Embedded/VDI client (as of 14) Embedded/VDI client (as of 12.1.6)
Uses virus and spyware definitions in the cloud. Cannot use virus and spyware definitions in the cloud.
Installs only the latest virus and spyware definitions. Installs only the latest virus and spyware definitions.
The client is approximately 80 percent to 90 percent The legacy client is approximately 80 percent to 90
smaller on disk than dark network Windows clients. percent smaller on disk than legacy standard Windows
The embedded/VDI client includes more size clients.
optimizations than the standard client: This client provides slightly less protection than the
The installer cache does not save after installation 12.1.x standard client. Symantec recommends that you
completes. This change means you cannot remove install and enable all protection features, which include
or modify the installation through the Control Panel the firewall, Download Insight, Generic Exploit
unless you first copy the installation package to the Mitigation, intrusion prevention, and SONAR. For the
client computer. highest level of security, use the system lockdown
The embedded client employs NTFS compression feature.
on more folders than the standard client. Includes the same size optimizations as the newer
Handles AutoUpgrade with full installation packages; embedded client.
cannot use deltas. Handles AutoUpgrade with full installation packages;
cannot use deltas
Introduced in 12.1.6.
Appendix B
Customizing and deploying
the Windows client
installation by using
third-party tools
Installing Windows client software using third-party tools
About client installation features and properties
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client installation properties
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client features
Windows Installer parameters
Windows Security Center properties
Command-line examples for installing the Windows client
Installing Windows clients with Microsoft SCCM/SMS
Installing Windows clients with an Active Directory Group Policy Object (GPO)
Uninstalling client software with an Active Directory Group Policy Object

Customizing and deploying the Windows client installation by using third-party tools 768
Installing Windows client software using third-party tools
Installing Windows client software using third-party

tools
You can install the client using third-party tools instead of the tools that are installed
with the management server. If you have a large network, you are more likely to
benefit by using these options to install Symantec client software.
You can install the client by using a variety of third-party products. These products
include Microsoft Active Directory, Tivoli, Microsoft Systems Management Server
(SMS), and Novell ZENworks. Symantec Endpoint Protection supports Novell
ZENworks, Microsoft Active Directory, and Microsoft SMS.
You can also deploy Symantec Endpoint Protection in an environment that you
manage with a Symantec Software Management Solution powered by Altiris.
You can deploy Symantec Endpoint Protection from one of the Software
Management Solution suites with one of the following policies:
A Managed Software Delivery policy
A Quick Delivery policy
For more information, refer to the Software Management Solution suite product
Help, or see:
Symantec Software Management Solution product landing page
Table B-1 Third-party tools to install the client
Tool Description
Windows Installer command-line The Symantec client software installation packages are Windows Installer (MSI)
tools files that you can configure by using the standard Windows Installer options. You
can use the environment management tools that support MSI deployment, such
as Active Directory or Tivoli, to install clients on your network. You can configure
how the Windows Security Center interacts with the unmanaged client.
See About client installation features and properties on page 769.
See About configuring MSI command strings on page 769.
See About configuring Setaid.ini on page 770.
See Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client features on page 772.

See Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client installation properties
on page 771.
See Windows Installer parameters on page 773.
See Command-line examples for installing the Windows client on page 777.
See Windows Security Center properties on page 775.

Table B-1 Third-party tools to install the client (continued)
Tool Description
Microsoft SMS 2003 You can install the client by using Microsoft Systems Management Server.
See Installing Windows clients with Microsoft SCCM/SMS on page 777.
Windows Active Directory You can use a Windows Active Directory Group Policy Object if the client
computers and are members of a Windows Active Directory domain. The client
computers must also use a supported Windows operating system.
See Installing Windows clients with an Active Directory Group Policy Object
(GPO) on page 778.
See Uninstalling client software with an Active Directory Group Policy Object
on page 783.
Virtualization software You can install the client in virtual environments.

Installation features and properties appear as strings in text files and command
lines. Text files and command lines are processed during all client software
installations. Installation features control which components get installed. Installation
properties control which subcomponents are enabled or disabled after installation.
Installation features and properties are available for Symantec Endpoint Protection
client software only and are also available for the Windows operating system.
Installation features and properties are not available for the installation of Symantec
Installation features and properties are specified in the following ways: as lines in
the Setaid.ini file and as values in Windows Installer (MSI) commands. MSI
commands can be specified in Windows Installer strings and in Setaid.ini for a
customized deployment. Windows Installer commands and Setaid.ini are always
processed for all managed client software installations. If different values are
specified, the values in Setaid.ini always take precedence.
About configuring MSI command strings

Symantec Endpoint Protection installation software uses Windows Installer (MSI)
3.1 or later packages for installation and deployment. If you use the command line
to deploy a package, you can customize the installation. You can use the standard
Windows Installer parameters and the Symantec-specific features and properties.
To use the Windows Installer, elevated privileges are required. If you try the
installation without elevated privileges, the installation may fail without notice.
For the most up-to-date list of Symantec installation commands and parameters,
see the article: MSI command line reference for Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Note: The Windows Installer advertise function is unsupported. Setaid.ini-specified

features and properties take precedence over MSI-specified features and properties.
Feature and property names in MSI commands are case-sensitive.
See About configuring Setaid.ini on page 770.
About configuring Setaid.ini

Setaid.ini appears in all installation packages and controls many of the aspects of
the installation, such as which features are installed. Setaid.ini always takes
precedence over any setting that may appear in an MSI command string that is
used to start the installation. Setaid.ini appears in the same directory as setup.exe.
If you export to a single .exe file, you cannot configure Setaid.ini. However, the file
is automatically configured when you export Symantec Endpoint Protection client
installation files from the console.
The following lines show some of the options that you can configure in Setaid.ini.
[CUSTOM_SMC_CONFIG]
InstallationLogDir=
DestinationDirectory=
[FEATURE_SELECTION]
Core=1
SAVMain=1
Download=1
OutlookSnapin=1
Pop3Smtp=0
NotesSnapin=0
PTPMain=1
DCMain=1
TruScan=1
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client installation properties
Note: The features are indented to show hierarchy. The features are not indented
inside the Setaid.ini file. Feature names in Setaid.ini are case-sensitive.
Feature values that are set to 1 install the features. Feature values that are set to
0 do not install the features. You must specify and install the parent features to
successfully install the client features.
Be aware of the following additional setaid.ini settings that map to MSI properties
for Symantec Endpoint Protection client installation:
DestinationDirectory maps to PRODUCTINSTALLDIR
KeepPreviousSetting maps to MIGRATESETTINGS
AddProgramIntoStartMenu maps to ADDSTARTMENUICON
See Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client installation properties
on page 771.
See Windows Installer parameters on page 773.
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client

installation properties
These installation properties are for use with MSI command line installations.
Table B-2 Symantec Endpoint Protection client installation properties
Property Description
RUNLIVEUPDATE=val Determines whether LiveUpdate is run as part of the installation, where val is one of the
following values:
1: Runs LiveUpdate during installation (default).

0: Does not run LiveUpdate during installation.
By default, all Symantec Endpoint Protection clients in a group receive the latest versions
of all content and all product updates. If the clients are configured to get updates from a
management server, the clients receive only the updates that the server downloads. If the
LiveUpdate Content policy allows all updates, but the management server does not download
all updates, the clients receive only what the server downloads.
ENABLEAUTOPROTECT= Determines whether File System Auto-Protect is enabled after the installation is complete,
val where val is one of the following values:
1: Enables Auto-Protect after installation (default).

0: Disables Auto-Protect after installation.
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client features
Table B-2 Symantec Endpoint Protection client installation properties

(continued)
CACHE_INSTALLER=val Determines whether the installation files cache on the client, where val is one of the following
values:
1: Caches the installation files (default).

0: Does not cache the installation files.
MIGRATESETTINGS= Determines the status of preserved settings in an upgrade scenario, where val is one of
val the following values:
0: Does not preserve the settings or logs.

1: Preserves all settings and logs.
2: Preserves Sylink.xml and logs only.
ADDSTARTMENUICON= Determines whether or not to add the program to the Start Menu folder, where val is one
val of the following values:
0: Does not add the program to the Start Menu folder.

1: Adds the program to the Start Menu folder (default).
Symantec Endpoint Protection command-line client

features
You can install the protection features by specifying them in Setaid.ini files and in
MSI commands. Most features have a parent-child relationship. If you want to install
a child feature that has a parent feature, you must also install the parent feature.
For example, if you specify to install the Firewall feature but do not specify to install
NTPMain, the firewall is not installed.
Table B-3 Symantec Endpoint Protection client features
Feature Description Required parent features
Core Installs the files that are used for none

communications between clients and Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. This feature is
required.
SAVMain Installs the virus, spyware, and basic download Core

protection. Subfeatures install additional
protection.
Table B-3 Symantec Endpoint Protection client features (continued)
Feature Description Required parent features
Download Installs the complete protection for downloaded SAVMain

files. Includes fully functional reputation
scanning by Download Insight.
NotesSnapin Installs the Lotus Notes Auto-Protect email SAVMain

feature.
OutlookSnapin Installs the Microsoft Exchange Auto-Protect SAVMain

email feature.
Pop3Smtp Installs the protection for POP3 and SMTP mail. SAVMain
Available only on 32-bit systems.
PTPMain Installs the Proactive Threat Protection Core

components.
TruScan Installs the SONAR scanning feature. PTPMain
DCMain Installs the Application Control and Device PTPMain

Control feature.
NTPMain Installs the Network and Host Exploit Mitigation Core

components.
ITPMain Installs the Network and Intrusion Prevention NTPMain

and Browser Intrusion Prevention feature.
Firewall Installs the firewall feature. NTPMain
LANG1033 Installs English resources. Core

Symantec Endpoint Protection client installation packages use the standard Windows
Installer parameters, as well as a set of extensions for command-line installation
and deployment.
See the Windows Installer documentation for further information about the usage
of standard Windows Installer parameters. You can also execute msiexec.exe from
a command line to see the complete list of parameters.
Table B-4 Windows Installer parameters
Parameter Description
Sep.msi (32-bit) The installation file for the Symantec Endpoint Protection client. If the file name contains
spaces, enclose the file name in quotations when used with /I and /x.
Sep64.msi (64-bit)
Required
Msiexec Windows Installer executable.
Required
/I ".msi file name" Install the specified file. If the file name contains spaces, enclose the file name in
quotations. If the file is not in the same directory from which you execute Msiexec,
specify the path name. If the path name contains spaces, enclose the path name in
quotations. For example, msiexec.exe /I "C:\path to\Sep.msi"
Required
/qn Install silently.

Note: When a silent deployment is used, the applications that plug into Symantec
Endpoint Protection, such as Microsoft Outlook and Lotus Notes, must be restarted
after installation.
/x ".msi file name" Uninstall the specified components.
Optional
/qb Install with a basic user interface that shows the installation progress.
Optional
/l*v logfilename Create a verbose log file, where logfilename is the name of the log file you want to
create.
Optional
PRODUCTINSTALLDIR=path Designate a custom path on the target computer where path is the specified target
directory. If the path includes spaces, enclose the path in quotation marks.
Note: The default directory for 32-bit computers is C:\Program
Files\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection. The default directory for 64-bit
computers is C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection.
Optional
Table B-4 Windows Installer parameters (continued)
SYMREBOOT=value Controls a computer restart after installation, where value is a valid argument.
The valid arguments include the following:
Force: Requires that the computer is restarted. Required for uninstallation.

Suppress: Prevents most restarts.
ReallySuppress: Prevents all restarts as part of the installation process, even a
silent installation.
Optional
Note: Use ReallySuppress to suppress a restart when you perform a silent uninstallation
of Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
ADDLOCAL= feature Select the custom features to be installed, where feature is a specified component or
list of components. If this property is not used, all applicable features are installed by
default, and Auto-Protect email clients are installed only for detected email programs.
To add all appropriate features for the client installations, use the ALL command as in
ADDLOCAL=ALL.

Note: When you specify a new feature to install, you must include the names of the
features that are already installed that you want to keep. If you do not specify the
features that you want to keep, Windows Installer removes them. By specifying existing
features, you do not overwrite the installed features. To uninstall an existing feature,
use the REMOVE command.
Optional
REMOVE=feature Uninstall the previously installed program or a specific feature from the installed
program, where feature is one of the following:
Feature: Uninstalls the feature or list of features from the target computer.
ALL: Uninstalls the program and all of the installed features. All is the default if a
feature is not specified.
Optional

You can customize Windows Security Center (WSC) properties during Symantec
Endpoint Protection client installation. These properties apply to unmanaged clients
only. Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager controls these properties for the
managed clients.
Note: These properties apply to Windows XP Service Pack 3 only. They do not
apply to clients that run Windows Vista, or Windows 7 or later, except for the
WSCAVUPTODATE property.
Windows Security Center was renamed to Action Center in Windows 7/8 and
Security and Maintenance in Windows 10.
Table B-5 Windows Security Center properties
WSCCONTROL=val Controls WSC where val is one of the following values:
0: Do not control (default).

1: Disable one time, the first time it is detected.
2: Disable always.
3: Restore if disabled.
WSCAVALERT=val Configures the antivirus alerts for WSC where val is one of the following values:
0: Enable.
1: Disable (default).
2: Do not control.
WSCFWALERT=val Configures the firewall alerts for WSC where val is one of the following values:
0: Enable.
1: Disable (default).
2: Do not control.
WSCAVUPTODATE=val Configures the WSC out-of-date time for antivirus definitions where val is one of the
following values:
1 - 90: Number of days (default is 30).
DISABLEDEFENDER=val Determines whether to disable Windows Defender during installation, where val is one
of the following values:
1: Disables Windows Defender (default).

0: Does not disable Windows Defender.
Command-line examples for installing the Windows client
Command-line examples for installing the Windows

client
Table B-6 Command-line examples
Task Command line
Silently install all of the Symantec Endpoint Protection msiexec /I SEP.msi PRODUCTINSTALLDIR=C:\SFN
client components with default settings to the directory SYMREBOOT=ReallySuppress /qn /l*v
C:\SFN. c:\temp\msi.log
Suppress a computer restart, and create a verbose log
file.
Silently install the Symantec Endpoint Protection client msiexec /I SEP.msi

with Virus and Spyware Protection, and with intrusion ADDLOCAL=Core,SAVMain,OutlookSnapin,
prevention and firewall. Pop3Smtp,ITPMain,Firewall SYMREBOOT=Force
Force a computer restart, and create a verbose log file. /qn /l*v c:\temp\msi.log
Installing Windows clients with Microsoft SCCM/SMS

You can use Microsoft System Center Configuration Manager (SCCM) to install
Symantec client software. We assume that system administrators who use SCCM
have previously installed software with SCCM. As a result, we assume that you do
not need detailed information about installing Symantec client software with SCCM.
Note: This topic also applies to Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS).
Note: This note applies to SMS version 2.0 and earlier: If you use SMS, turn off the
Show Status Icon On The Toolbar For All System Activity feature on the clients
in the Advertised Programs Monitor. In some situations, Setup.exe might need
to update a shared file that is in use by the Advertised Programs Monitor. If the file
is in use, the installation fails.
Symantec recommends that SCCM/SMS packages launch Setup.exe rather than

the MSI directly. This method enables installer logging. Use the custom package
creation feature in SCCM/SMS to create custom packages instead of the package
wizard feature.
Warning: You should use a managed client installation package that you exported
from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. If you use the client installation
packages from the product download or the installation file, you deploy unmanaged
clients. Unmanaged clients install with default settings and do not communicate
with a management server.
Table B-7 Process for installing the client using Microsoft System Center
Configuration Manager / Systems Management Server
Step Description
Step 1 Export a managed client installation package from Symantec Endpoint

Protection Manager that contains the software and policies to install on your
client computers. By default, a managed client installation package contains a
file named Sylink.xml, which identifies the server that manages the clients.
Step 2 Create a source directory and copy the Symantec client installation package
into that source directory. For example, you would create a source directory
and copy the Setup.exe file that you exported from Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager.
Step 3 In SCCM/SMS, create a custom package, name the package, and identify the
source directory as part of the package.
Step 4 Configure the Program dialog box for the package to specify the executable
that starts the installation process, and possibly specify the MSI with parameters.
Step 5 Distribute the software to specific Collections with Advertising.
For more information on using SCCM/SMS, see the Microsoft documentation that
is appropriate for your version.
Installing Windows clients with an Active Directory

Group Policy Object (GPO)
You can install the Windows client by using a Windows Active Directory Group
Policy Object. The procedures assume that you have installed this software and
use Windows Active Directory to install client software with an Active Directory
Group Policy Object.
The Symantec client installation uses standard Windows Installer (MSI) files. As a
result, you can customize the client installation with MSI properties.
See About configuring MSI command strings on page 769.
You should confirm that your DNS server is set up correctly before deployment.
The correct setup is required because Active Directory relies on your DNS server
for computer communication. To test the setup, you can ping the Windows Active
Directory computer, and then ping in the opposite direction. Use the fully qualified
domain name. The use of the computer name alone does not call for a new DNS
lookup. Use the following format:
ping computername.fullyqualifieddomainname.com
Warning: You should use a managed client installation package that you exported
from Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. If you use the client installation
packages from the product download or the installation file, you deploy unmanaged
clients. Unmanaged clients install with default settings and do not communicate
with a management server.
Table B-8 Steps for installing the client software by using Active Directory
Group Policy Object
Step Action
Step 1 Export the managed client installation package with the option Separate
files (required for .MSI).
Step 2 Stage the folder of installation files. For example, copy the managed client
installation package into a shared folder on which you have set the correct
permissions to allow access.
Step 3 Create a GPO software distribution.
You should also test GPO installation with a small number of computers
before the production deployment. If you do not configure DNS properly,
GPO installations can take an hour or more.
See Creating a GPO software distribution on page 780.
Step 4 Add computers to the organizational unit.
See Adding computers to an organizational unit to install software

on page 782.
See Uninstalling client software with an Active Directory Group Policy Object
on page 783.
Creating a GPO software distribution

If you use Microsoft Active Directory in your environment, you can use a GPO to
deploy the Symantec Endpoint Protection client package to Windows computers.
You create a software distribution then configure a GPO administrative template
for the software packages.
This process assumes that you have installed Microsoft's Group Policy Management
Console with Service Pack 1 or later. The Windows interface may be slightly different
depending on the version of Windows you use.
This process also assumes that you have computers in the Computers group or
some other group to which you want to install client software. Optionally, you can
drag these computers into a new group that you create.
See Installing Windows clients with an Active Directory Group Policy Object (GPO)
on page 778.
To create a GPO software distribution
1 On the Windows Taskbar, click Start > All Programs > Administrative Tools
> Group Policy Management.
2 In the Active Directory Users and Computers window, in the console tree,
right-click the domain, and then click Active Directory Users and Computers.
3 In the Active Directory Users and Computers window, select a target
organizational unit (OU) under the appropriate domain.
You can also create a new OU for testing or other purposes. See Active
Directory documentation by Microsoft for more information on how to create a
new OU.
4 In the Group Policy Management window, in the console tree, right-click the
organizational unit that you chose or created, and then click Create and Link
a GPO Here.
You may need to refresh the domain to see a new OU.
5 In the New GPO dialog box, in the Name box, type a name for your GPO, and
then click OK.
6 In the right pane, right-click the GPO that you created, and then click Edit.
7 In the Group Policy Object Editor window, in the left pane, under Computer
Configuration, expand Software Settings.
8 Right-click Software installation, and then click New > Package.
9 In the Open dialog box, type the Universal Naming Convention (UNC) path
that points to and contains the MSI package.
Use the format as shown in the following example:
\\server name\SharedDir\Sep.msi
10 Click Open.
11 In the Deploy Software dialog box, click Assigned, and then click OK.
The package appears in the right pane of the Group Policy Object Editor window
if you select Software Installation.
To configure administrative templates for the software package
1 In the Group Policy Object Editor window, in the console tree, display and
enable the following settings:
Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > System > Logon
> Always wait for the network at computer startup and logon
Computer Configuration > Administrative Templates > System > Group
Policy > Software Installation policy processing
User Configuration > Administrative Templates > Windows
Components > Windows Installer > Always install with elevated
privileges
Note: If you enabled User Account Control (UAC) on the client computers,
you must also enable Computer Configuration > Administrative
Templates > Windows Components > Windows Installer > Always
install with elevated privileges to install Symantec client software with a
GPO. You set these options to allow all Windows users to install Symantec
client software.
2 Close the Group Policy Object Editor window.

3 In the Group Policy Management window, in the left pane, right-click the GPO
that you edited, and then click Enforced.
4 In the right pane, under Security Filtering, click Add.
5 In the dialog box, under Enter the object name to select, type Domain
Computers, and then click OK.
Adding computers to an organizational unit to install software

You can add computers to an organizational unit to which Symantec Endpoint
Protection installs by GPO. When the computers restart, the client software
installation process begins. When users log on to the computers, the client software
installation process completes. The group policy update, however, is not
instantaneous, so it may take time for this policy to propagate. The following process
contains the commands that you can run on the client computers to update the
policy on demand.
See Installing Windows clients with an Active Directory Group Policy Object (GPO)
on page 778.
To add computers to the organizational unit to install software
> Active Directory Users and Computers.
2 In the Active Directory Users and Computers window, in the console tree,
locate one or more computers to add to the organizational unit that you chose
for GPO installation.
Computers first appear in the Computers organizational unit.
3 Drag and drop the computers into the organization unit that you chose or
created for the installation.
4 Close the Active Directory Users and Computers window.
To update the GPO on demand on the client computers
1 To quickly apply the changes to the client computers, open a command prompt
on the client computers.
2 Type gpupdate, and then press Enter.
When complete, the command prompt window displays a message to let you
know the policy update completed successfully. If an error message displays,
follow the on-screen instructions for more information.
3 Close the command prompt window.
Copying a Sylink.xml file to make a managed installation package

When you install Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, it creates a file named
Sylink.xml for each client group. Symantec Endpoint Protection clients read the
contents of this file to know which management server manages the client. If you
install the client from the installation file you get from Symantec, you install
unmanaged clients. However, you can copy the Sylink.xml file to this folder before
installation to install managed clients.
Note: Packages that are exported with the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
console are managed and already include a Sylink.xml file. To export a new
managed package that you can deploy with a Group Policy Object, use the Client
Deployment Wizard. Click Save Package, and check Separate Files (required
for .MSI) when prompted.
To copy a Sylink.xml file to the product installation files to make a managed

installation package
1 From Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, export the Sylink.xml file from
the correct client group and copy it to your computer.
Note: You should create at least one new group with the management console
before you export the Sylink.xml file. If you do not, the clients appear in the
Default group.

on page 168.
2 Copy the installation folder from the installation file you download to a folder
on your computer. The folder SEP contains the 32-bit client, and the folder
SEPx64 contains the 64-bit client.
You can also use the installation folder for an unmanaged client package that
you previously exported as separate files.
3 Copy Sylink.xml to the installation folder. Replace the existing Sylink.xml file
when prompted.
Uninstalling client software with an Active Directory

Group Policy Object
You can uninstall the client software that you installed with Active Directory.
See Uninstalling the Symantec Endpoint Protection client for Windows on page 129.
To uninstall client software with an Active Directory Group Policy Object

> Group Policy Management.
The version of Windows that you use may display Programs instead of All
Programs in the Start menu.
2 In the Group Policy Management window, in the console tree, expand the
domain, expand Computer Configuration, expand Software Settings,
right-click Software Installation, and then click Properties.
3 On the Advanced tab, check Uninstall this application when it falls out of
the scope of management, and then click OK.
4 In the right pane, right-click the software package, and then click Remove.
5 In the Remove Software dialog box, check Immediately uninstall the
software from users and computers, and then click OK.
6 Close the Group Policy Object Editor window, and then close the Group
Policy Management window.
The software uninstalls when the client computers are restarted.
Appendix C
Command-line options for
the Windows client
Windows commands for the client service smc
smc command error codes

You can run the Windows client service using the smc command-line interface. You
can use the smc command in a script that runs the client remotely. For example,
you may need to stop the client to install an application on multiple clients. You can
then use the script to stop and restart all clients at one time.
The client service must be running for you to use the command-line parameters,
with the exception of smc -start parameter. The command-line parameters are
not case-sensitive. For some parameters, you may need the password. The client
does not support UNC paths.
Table C-1 smc parameters
smc -start* Starts the client service.
Returns 0, -1
smc -stop* Stops the client service and unloads it from memory.
Returns 0, -1
Command-line options for the Windows client 786
Table C-1 smc parameters (continued)
smc -checkinstallation Checks whether the smc client service is installed.
Returns 0, -3
smc -checkrunning Checks whether the smc client service is running.
Returns 0, -4
smc -disable -ntp Disables the Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall and intrusion prevent system.
smc -dismissgui Closes the client user interface.
The client still runs and protects the client computer.
Returns 0
smc -enable -ntp Enables the Symantec Endpoint Protection firewall and Intrusion Prevention System.
smc -exportconfig* Exports the client's configuration file to an .xml file. The configuration file includes
all the settings on the management server, such as policies, groups, log settings,
security settings, and user interface settings.
You must specify the path name and file name. For example, you can type the
following command:
smc -exportconfig C:\My Documents\MyCompanyprofile.xml
Returns 0, -1, -5, -6

smc -exportlog Exports the entire contents of a log to a .txt file.
To export a log, you use the following syntax:
smc -exportlog log_type 0 -1 output_file
where:
log_type is:
0 = System Log
1 = Security Log
2 = Traffic Log
3 = Packet Log
4 = Control Log
For example, you might type the following syntax:
smc -exportlog 2 0 -1 c:\temp\TrafficLog
Where:
0 is the beginning of the file
-1 is the end of the file
You can export only the Control log, Packet log, Security log, System log, and
Traffic log.
output_file is the path name and file name that you assign to the exported file.
Returns 0, -2, -5
smc -exportadvrule* Exports the client's firewall rules to a .sar file. The exported rules can only be imported
into an unmanaged client or a managed client in client control mode or mixed mode.
The managed client ignores these rules in server control mode.
following command:
smc -exportadvrule C:\myrules.sar
Returns 0, -1, -5, -6

When you import configuration files and firewall rules, note that the following rules
apply:
You cannot import configuration files or firewall rule files directly from a mapped
network drive.
smc -importadvrule* Adds the imported firewall rules to the client's list of existing firewall rules. These
rules do not overwrite the existing rules. The client lists both existing rules and
imported rules, even if each rule has the same name and parameters.
You can import only firewall rules into an unmanaged client or a managed client in
client control mode or mixed mode. The managed client ignores these rules in server
control mode.
To import firewall rules, you import a .sar file. For example, you can type the following
command:
smc -importadvrule C:\myrules.sar
An entry is added to the System log after you import the rules.
Returns 0, -1, -5, -6
smc -importconfig* Replaces the contents of the client's current configuration file with an imported
configuration file and updates the client's policy. The client must run to import the
configuration file's contents.
following command:
smc -importconfig C:\My Documents\MyCompanyprofile.xml.
Returns 0, -1, -5, -6
smc -importsylink Imports the client communications file (sylink.exe).
smc -p [password] Used in conjunction with a command that requires a password, where [password] is
the required password. For example:
smc -p [password] -importconfig
smc -report Creates a dump file (.dmp) that includes crashes and logical errors that occurred on
the client. The file is sent automatically to Symantec Technical Support. Call Technical
Support to ask for help in diagnosing the error.
The dump file is located at:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\...\Data\LocalDumps
smc -runhi Runs a Host Integrity check.
Returns 0
smc -showgui Displays the client user interface.
Returns 0
smc -updateconfig Initiates a client-server communication to ensure that the client's configuration file is
up-to-date.
If the client's configuration file is out-of-date, updateconfig downloads the most

recent configuration file and replaces the existing configuration file, which is serdef.dat.
Returns 0
* Parameters that only members of the Administrators group can use if the following
conditions are met:
The client runs Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, and users are members
of the Windows Administrators group.
If the client runs Windows Vista and the User Account Control is enabled, the
user automatically becomes a member of both the Administrators group and
Users group.
Parameters that need a password. You password-protect the client in Symantec
To run the Windows client using the smc command-line interface
1 On the client computer, click Start > Run, and then type cmd.
2 In the MS-DOS prompt, do one of the following tasks:
If the parameter does not need a password, type:
smc -p
Where: p is a parameter
Type the installation path to the smc service before the command. For
example, on a 64-bit Windows system, type:
Protection\smc.exe
If the parameter needs a password, type one of the following lines:

smc -p password -parameter
smc -parameter -p password

For example: smc -p password -exportconfig c:\profile.xml
See smc command error codes on page 790.


Table C-2 displays the error codes that the smc command returns when the required
parameters are invalid or missing.
Table C-2 smc command error codes
Error Description
code
0 Command was successful.
-1 User is not in the Windows Administrators or Windows Power Users group. If

the client runs Windows Vista, the user is not a member of the Windows
Administrators group.
-2 Invalid parameter.
You may have typed the parameter incorrectly, or you may have added an
incorrect switch after the parameter.
-3 smc client service is not installed.
-4 smc client service is not running.
-5 Invalid input file.
For example, the importconfig, exportconfig, updateconfig,

importadv, exportadvrule, and exportlog parameters require the correct
path name and file name.
-6 Input file does not exist.
For example, the importconfig, updateconfig, and importadvrule

parameters require the correct path name, configuration file name (.xml) or
firewall rules file name (.sar).
See Windows commands for the client service smc on page 785.
Appendix D
Symantec Endpoint
Protection tools
What are the tools included with Symantec Endpoint Protection?
What are the tools included with Symantec Endpoint

Protection?
This article describes the tools that are included with Symantec Endpoint Protection
and what you use the tools for.
Tools that are located on the installation file on FileConnect
Tools that are installed with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
Tools that are located on the installation file on FileConnect

The following tools and documentation are located in the \Tools folder of the
Symantec Endpoint Protection installation file that you download from FileConnect.
ApacheReverseProxy (12.1.4 and later)
CentralQ (12.1.6 and earlier)
CleanWipe
ContentDistributionMonitor (SEPMMonitor)
DeviceInfo (14), DevViewer
Integration (WebServicesDocumentation)
ITAnalytics
JAWS
Symantec Endpoint Protection tools 792
LiveUpdate Administrator (12.1.4 and earlier)

No Support > MoveClient
No Support > Qextract
No Support > SEPprep (12.1.6 and earlier)
OfflineImageScanner (12.1.6 and earlier)
PushDeploymentWizard
SylinkDrop
SymDiag (SymHelp)
Virtualization
WebServicesDocumentation (Integration)
Product guides for all versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection
ApacheReverseProxy (12.1.4 and later)

This tool sets up the Apache webserver in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
to allow Mac clients and Linux clients to download LiveUpdate content through the
web server. The Apache webserver works with the Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager to download and cache the LiveUpdate content for Mac and Linux clients
locally whenever new content is published.
This tool is appropriate for networks with a smaller number of clients.
CentralQ (12.1.6 and earlier)

Symantec Endpoint Protection can automatically forward the quarantine packages
that contain the infected files and related side effects from a local quarantine to the
Central Quarantine. You can gather forensic information more easily by using
Central Quarantine. This tool lets you retrieve a sample from an infected computer
without having to directly access that computer.
Use the Quarantine Server in a Symantec Endpoint Protection environment in the
following cases:
To receive suspected threat samples from Symantec Endpoint Protection clients.
To submit these samples to Security Response automatically.
To download the rapid release definitions that are specific to the suspected
threats that have been submitted only to the Quarantine Server. These definitions
are not pushed to the Symantec Endpoint Protection clients where the threat
originated from.
Rapid Release Virus Definitions
For more information, see: Best Practices for using Quarantine Server in a Symantec
Endpoint Protection environment
CleanWipe
CleanWipe uninstalls the Symantec Endpoint Protection product. Only use
CleanWipe as a last resort after you have unsuccessfully tried other uninstallation
methods, such as the Windows Control Panel.
Uninstall Symantec Endpoint Protection
You can also find this tool in the following location (64-bit): C:\Program Files
(x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager\Tools
ContentDistributionMonitor (SEPMMonitor)
The ContentDistributionMonitor tool helps you manage and monitor multiple Group
Update Providers (GUPs) in your environment. The tool presents a graphical display
of the GUPs' health and content distribution status.
In 12.1.6 and earlier, ContentDistributionMonitor was named SEPMMonitor. In
12.1.5 and earlier, ContentDistributionMonitor was in the NoSupport folder.
See: Symantec Endpoint Protection Content Distribution Monitor tool
DeviceInfo (14), DevViewer

DeviceInfo (for Mac; as of version 14) and DevViewer (for Windows) obtains the
device vendor, model, or serial number for a specific device. You add this information
to the Hardware Devices list. You can then add the device ID to a Device Control
policy to allow or block a device on client computers.
Block or allow devices in Endpoint Protection
Integration (WebServicesDocumentation)
In version 14, the Integration folder was renamed to WebServicesDocumentation.
ITAnalytics
The IT Analytics Solution software expands the reporting that Symantec Endpoint
Protection offers. It brings multi-dimensional analysis and graphical reporting features
from the data that is contained within the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
database(s). This functionality allows users to explore data on their own, without
advanced knowledge of databases or third-party reporting tools.
JAWS
The JAWS screen reader program and a set of scripts make it easier to read the
Symantec Endpoint Protection menus and dialogs. JAWS is an assistive technology
that provides compliance with Section 508 product accessibility.
LiveUpdate Administrator (12.1.4 and earlier)

Symantec LiveUpdate Administrator is a standalone web application that is separate
from Symantec Endpoint Protection. LiveUpdate Administrator mirrors the content
of the public LiveUpdate servers and then offers the content to Symantec products
internally through a built-in web server.
LiveUpdate Administrator is an optional component for Symantec Endpoint Protection
and is not required to update the Symantec Endpoint Protection clients. By default,
the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager uses the LiveUpdate technology rather
than LiveUpdate Administrator to download contents directly from the Symantec
public LiveUpdate servers.
You may want to use LiveUpdate Administrator in some circumstances. For example,
you may need to download content to a large number of non-Windows clients or
to clients if Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager cannot download the content.
Therefore, you can install a LiveUpdate Administrator server and then configure
the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager to download from it.
When to use LiveUpdate Administrator
To download LiveUpdate Administrator and the documentation, see: Download
LiveUpdate Administrator (LUA)
LiveUpdate Administrator 2.3.x Release Notes
No Support > MoveClient

MoveClient is a Visual Basic script that moves clients from one Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager group to another group based on the client's host name, user
name, IP address, or operating system. It also can switch clients from user mode
to computer mode and vice versa.
See Switching a Windows client between user mode and computer mode
on page 245.
No Support > Qextract

Qextract extracts and restores files from the client's local quarantine. You might
need this tool if the client quarantines a file that you determine is a false positive.
No Support > SEPprep (12.1.6 and earlier)

SEPprep is an unsupported tool that uninstalls competitors' antivirus products
automatically. SEPprep also uninstalls Symantec Norton products if you want to
migrate from Norton to Symantec Endpoint Protection.
You can package SEPprep in a script which uninstalls the competitor's product,
and then launches the Symantec Endpoint Protection installer automatically and
silently.
Instead of SEPPrep, use the Client Deployment Wizard to uninstall competitors'
products. On the Client Install Settings tab in the wizard, click Automatically
uninstall existing third-party security software.
Uninstall third-party security software using SEPprep
For a list of products that the Client Deployment Wizard uninstalls, see:
Third-party security software removal in Endpoint Protection 12.1
SEPPrep does not uninstall any Symantec products. However, as of version 14,
Cleanwipe is built into the Client Deployment Wizard to remove other Symantec
products, including the Symantec Endpoint Protection client.
OfflineImageScanner (12.1.6 and earlier)

This tool scans and detects threats in offline VMware virtual disks (.vmdk files).
About the Symantec Offline Image Scanner tool
PushDeploymentWizard
You use the Push Deployment Wizard to deploy the Symantec Endpoint Protection
client installation package to target computers. Push Deployment Wizard is the
same as the Client Deployment Wizard in Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager.
You typically use it to deploy to smaller groups of computers or remote computers.
For more information, see: Overview of the Push Deployment Wizard in Symantec
Endpoint Protection
SEPIntegrationComponent (12.1.5 and earlier)

The Symantec Endpoint Integration Component (SEPIC) combines Symantec
Endpoint Protection with other Symantec Management Platform solutions using a
single, web-based Symantec Management Console. You use SEPIC to inventory
computers, update patches, deliver software, and deploy new computers. You can
also back up and restore your systems and data, manage DLP agents, and manage
Symantec Endpoint Protection clients.
SylinkDrop
The Sylink.xml file includes communication settings between the Windows client
or Mac client and a Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager. If the clients have lost
the communication with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager, use the SylinkDrop
tool to automatically replace the existing Sylink.xml file with a new Sylink.xml file
Replacing the Sylink.xml file does the following tasks:
Converts an unmanaged client to a managed client.
Migrates or moves clients to a new domain or management server.
Restores the communication breakages to the client that cannot be corrected
on the management server.
Moves a client from one server to another server that is not a replication partner.
Moves a client from one domain to another.
You can also use this tool for Windows clients only; the tool is located in the following
location (64-bit): C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint
Protection Manager\Tools
See Restoring client-server communication settings by using the SylinkDrop tool

on page 724.
SymDiag (SymHelp)
In version 14, the SymHelp tool was renamed as Symantec Diagnostic (SymDiag).
SymDiag is a multi-product diagnostic tool that identifies common issues, gathers
data for support-assisted troubleshooting, and provides links to other customer
self-help and support resources. SymDiag also provides licensing and maintenance
status for some Symantec products as well as the Threat Analysis Scan, which
helps to find potential malware.
Virtualization
The virtualization tools improve scan performance for the clients that are installed
in virtual desktop infrastructure (VDI) environments.
SecurityVirtualAppliance (12.1.6 and earlier)
The Symantec Security Virtual Appliance contains the vShield-enabled Shared
Insight Cache for VMware vShield infrastructures.
What do I need to do to install a Security Virtual Appliance?
Installing a Symantec Endpoint Protection Security Virtual Appliance
SharedInsightCache
The Shared Insight Cache tool improves scan performance in virtualized

environments by not scanning the files that a Symantec Endpoint Protection
client has determined are clean. When the client scans a file for threats and
determines it is clean, the client submits information about the file to Shared
Insight Cache.
When another client subsequently attempts to scan the same file, that client
can query Shared Insight Cache to determine if the file is clean. If the file is
clean, the client does not scan that particular file. If the file is not clean, the client
scans the file for viruses and submits those results to Shared Insight Cache.
Shared Insight Cache is a web service that runs independently of the client.
However, Symantec Endpoint Protection must be configured to specify the
location of Shared Insight Cache so that the clients can communicate with it.
Shared Insight Cache communicates with the clients through HTTP or HTTPS.
The client's HTTP connection is maintained until the scan is finished.
Installation and Configuration of SEP Shared Insight Cache
Virtual Image Exception
To increase performance and security in a VDI environment, a common practice
is to leverage base images to build virtual machine sessions as needed. The
Symantec Virtual Image Exception tool lets Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
bypass scanning base image files for threats, which reduces the resource load
on disk I/O. It also improves CPU scanning process performance in a VDI
environment.
About the Symantec Virtual Image Exception tool
In 12.1.6 and earlier, this tool is located in the \Tools\Integration folder.
Symantec Endpoint Protection includes a set of public APIs in the form of web
services to provide support for remote monitoring and management (RMM)
applications. The web services provide functions on the client and on the
management server. All calls to Symantec Endpoint Protection web services are
authenticated using OAuth and allow access only by authorized Symantec Endpoint
Protection administrators. Developers use these APIs to integrate their company's
third-party network security solution with the Symantec Endpoint Protection
management server and client.
Provides the support for remote management and remote monitoring. Remote
management is provided by means of public APIs in the form of web services that
let you integrate your third-party solution or custom console with basic client and
management server functionality. Remote monitoring is provided by means of
publicly supported registry keys and Windows event logging.
Web services for remote management can do the following tasks:
Reports the license status and content status on the management server by
web service calls, in addition to reporting the license status to the Windows
Event Log.
Issues commands to the client, such as Update, Update and Scan, and Restart.
Manages the policies that are delivered to the client. Policies can be imported
from another management server, and they can be assigned to groups or
locations at another management server.
Tools that are installed with Symantec Endpoint Protection

Manager
The following tools are installed with the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
in the following default location: C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager\Tools.
CleanWipe
CollectLog
Database Validator
SetSQLServerTLSEncryption (14)
SylinkDrop
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager API reference (14)
CollectLog
CollectLog.cmd places the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager logs in a
compressed .zip file. You send the .zip file to Symantec Support or another
administrator for troubleshooting purposes.
You find this tool in the following location (64-bit): C:\Program Files
Database Validator
You use dbvalidator.bat to help Support diagnose a problem with the database that
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager runs.
You find this tool in the following location (64-bit): C:\Program Files
SetSQLServerTLSEncryption (14)
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager communicates with the Microsoft SQL
Server over an encrypted channel by default. This tool lets you disable or enable
TLS encryption between the management server and the Microsoft SQL Server
communication. As of version 14, it can be used with the management server

installations that are configured to use the Microsoft SQL Server database.
This tool is installed with Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager in the following
location (64-bit): C:\Program Files (x86)\Symantec\Symantec Endpoint Protection
Manager\Tools
Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager API reference (14)

Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager includes a set of REST APIs that connect
to and perform Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager operations from Advanced
Threat Protection (ATP). You use the APIs if you do not have access to Symantec
Endpoint Protection Manager. The documentation is located in the following places:
On the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager server at the following address,
where SEPM-IP is the IP address of the Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
server:
https://SEPM-IP:8446/sepm/restapidocs.html
Product guides for all versions of Symantec Endpoint Protection
Appendix E
Command-line options for
the Virtual Image Exception
tool
vietool
Command-line options for the Virtual Image Exception tool 801
vietool
vietool
vietool Runs the Virtual Image Exception tool
SYNOPSIS
vietool.exe volume: --generate|clear|verify|hash [options ...]
DESCRIPTION
The vietool command marks the base image files on the volume that you specify
by adding an attribute.
OPTIONS
--generate
Runs the Virtual Image Exception tool on all files on the volume specified. You
cannot use this option with --clear.
For example: vietool c: --generate
--verify
Verifies that the Virtual Image Exception is set on all files on the specified
volume. You cannot use this option with --clear.
For example: vietool c: --verify
--clear
Removes the Virtual Image Exception on all files on the volume specified.
For example: vietool.exe c: --clear
To delete a specific file: vietool.exe c:\Users\Administrator\target.file
--clear
You can use a fully qualified path in place of the volume identifier to clear the
Virtual Image Exception on a single file or the contents of a folder. Only one
file name, folder name, or volume identifier per command line is allowed. You
cannot use this command with --generate, --verify, or --hash.
You must restart the client after you run the --clear command.
--hash
Generates the hash value on all files on the volume specified.
Command-line options for the Virtual Image Exception tool 802
vietool
The Virtual Image Exception tool uses the hashes to exclude local files from
future scans. The clients compute file hashes separately to send to the Shared
Insight Cache to store scan results. You cannot use this option with --clear.
For example: vietool.exe c: --generate --hash
--volume arg
Specifies the volume the tool scans.
This option can be a file when you use the --clear option. You must specify
the volume, and it can be specified either with the volume flag or alone. For
example, with the flag vietool.exe --volume c: --generate, or alone
vietool.exe c: --generate.
--verbose
Outputs to the console the maximum amount of program execution information.
--stop
Stops on the first error that the tool encounters. Otherwise the tool writes error
information to the console and continues.
--help
Displays this help message.
Index
A Application and Device Control policies

actions structure 494
scan detections 468 application control
Active Directory servers about 490
connecting to 226 adding rules 496
importing organizational units 228 best practices 499
importing user information from 223, 225 conditions 497
active response 331 default rule sets 493
active scans setting up 492
when to run 404 testing 503
adapters. See network adapters typical rules 501
adding application name list 516
groups 223 application triggers
administrator accounts firewall rules 342
locking or unlocking 294 applications 343
managing 272 See also learned applications
administrator-defined scan searching for 320
customizing 460 assistive technology
administrator-defined scans 452454 creating exceptions for 540
See also customizing attacks
See also on-demand scans blocking 331
See also scheduled scans audit log 605
on Linux computers 454 authentication
on Mac computers 453 peer-to-peer 574
administrators setting up for administrators 276, 278
add account 276 testing administrator accounts 282
change password 286 Auto-Protect
rename 276 customizing for email scans 459
setting up authentication 276 customizing for Linux computers 457
testing account authentication 282 customizing for Mac computers 456
types of 274 customizing for Windows clients 455
Advanced Threat Protection 448 enabling 243
adware 409 enabling or disabling 239
Apache automatic exclusions
log 720 about 410
stopping and starting 721 for Microsoft Exchange server 412
application for Symantec products 413
using an except to allow or block 545 AutoUpgrade
using an exception to detect 545 client 150
application and device control log 606 availability
for databases and management servers 684
avoiding a restart 245
Index 804
B client computer (continued)

blacklist policy updates 161
updating automatically 517, 521 preparing for installation 105
updating for system lockdown 520 status 588
blacklist mode system protection 588
enabling for system lockdown 525 troubleshooting 720
blended threats 409 unmanaged on Windows 127
blocking unscanned 589
attacking computers 331 upgrading to a new release 135
clients from groups 231 client connection
Bloodhound status icon 158
modifying settings 465 client control 249
bots 409 client crashing
browser intrusion prevention troubleshooting 729
about 370 client features
feature dependencies 748 comparison 748
client installation packages
about 131
C collecting user information 252
certificate configuring 120
generating new 710 exporting 118
JKS keystore file 659 importing 133
keystore file 659 Client installation settings 120
update 662 client software installed
CGI errors displaying 237
database 733 client status
client viewing 236
commands 785, 789 client-server communication settings
install features 116 exporting 168
installation 59, 61 importing 169
installation methods 115 client-server communications
installing on Linux 57 fixing 165
installing on Mac 55 clients
managed and unmanaged 126 deployment status 237
password protection 253 disabling protection on 239
remote deployment 108 installation 53
uninstalling on Linux 130 MSI features 772
uninstalling on Mac 130 purging obsolete non-persistent virtual clients 648
uninstalling on Windows 129 cloud protection 398
updates collect user information 252
Intelligent Updater 209 command line 801
third-party distribution tools 210 commands 801
user interface client 785, 789
configuring 250 running from logs 244
client computer running on clients from the console 244
disabled 588 communication
installation settings 119 client-management server 158
moving to group 231 problems between the client and the server 716
offline 588589
online 588
Index 805
communication (continued) database (continued)

problems with the server and the console or the restoring 710
database 726 terminated process errors 733
communication and required ports 110 databases
communication settings availability 684
client and server 729 dba password
communications file change 286
replacing 165 debug logs. See logs
compliance log 606 Default Group 220
components definitions
product 33 updating 172
computer status definitions files
logs 606 configuring actions for new definitions 439
viewing 236 deleting
computers sites 703
search for 238 dependencies
conditions of policy features 748
application control 497 deploying
connectivity clients 53, 59, 61, 115
communication between the client and the deployment status 237, 591
server 716 device control
using a browser to test 722 about 490
using ping to test 722 configuring
verifying communication with the database 727 for Mac 530
console for Windows 529
timeout 295 hardware devices list 530
content device ID
about storing revisions 181 obtaining 531
how clients receive updates 173, 178 DHCP traffic 329
managing updates 172 dialers 410
randomizing 191 directory servers
revisions that are not the latest version 187 connecting to 226
converting an unmanaged client to a managed disable
client 164, 168 Auto-Protect 239
cookies 410 disaster recovery
custom IPS signatures performing 705
managing 378 preparing for 704
testing 384 reinstalling server 708
DNS queries
D based on location 350
DNS traffic 329
dark network client
domain
client installation package 114
log on banner 291
database
domain administrator 274
backing up 673, 706
domains
CGI errors 733
about 296
changing timeout parameters 732
adding 298
errors 732
copying clients and policies 297
maintaining 669
disabling 297
Microsoft SQL Server 85
Index 806
domains (continued) exporting

managing 272 client installation packages 118
Download Insight firewall rules 355
changing settings 467 policies 312
feature dependencies 748 external logging 677
managing detections 429
preventing ransomware 397 F
reputation data 434
failover
downloading content
defined 684
to Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager 179
failover and load balancing
configuring 688
E feature dependencies 748
early launch anti-malware file fingerprint list
adjusting options 446 importing or merging 513
detections 445 updating manually 514
ELAM. See early launch anti-malware file sharing 362
disable to improve computer performance 424 filters
email application inbox saving in logs 607
exclusion for 414 firewall 323, 325
email messages about 324
for firewall rules 364 configuring for mixed control 330
email server disabling Windows Firewall 334
link to management server 618 enabling and disabling 329
embedded client notifications 346
client installation package 114 policies 326
embedded database stateful inspection 341
installation settings 83 traffic settings 332333
endpoint protection firewall rules 356
monitoring 588, 590 about 335, 337
status 588589 adding 354
event logs 603 allowing traffic to local subnet 361
past 24-hours filter 607 applications 342
exceptions 536 adding 343
client restrictions 549 block by IP address
creating 537 adding 360
DNS or host file change 548 email messages 364
excluding a file or folder 541 host groups
file extensions 544 creating 349
from log events 550 hosts 347
known risks 543 importing and exporting 355
managing 534 inheriting 339340
platform comparison 763 network adapter triggers 352
Tamper Protection 547 network adapters
excluded hosts 376 adding 353, 365
exclusions network service triggers 350
created automatically 410 network services 351
expiring passwords adding 362
enabling 289 processing order
about 338
Index 807
firewall rules (continued) Host Integrity policies (continued)

processing order (continued) requirements 568
changing 341 custom 575576, 579581
scheduling 366 predefined 567
setting up 353 templates 575
forgotten password settings 571
reset 289 testing 581
full scans host triggers
when to run 404 firewall rules 347
hosts
G excluding from intrusion prevention 376
Generic Exploit Mitigation 370
configuring 385 I
platform comparison 761 icons
global scan settings 465 shield 160
Group Update Provider importing
configuring 205 client installation packages 133
legacy clients 202 firewall rules 355
managing 201 Host Integrity Policy requirements
searching for 207 templates and 575
types 202 organizational units 228
groups policies 312
adding 223 index.ini
assigning management server list 689 automatic update of whitelists and blacklists 517
blocking 231 creating file 519
importing from a directory server 223, 225, 228 infected computers
inheritance 230 identifying 393
moving 231 rescanning 393
organizing 222 inheritance 262
search for 238 enabling 230
firewall rules 339340
H Insight 414, 434
modifying settings 465
hack tools 410
Insight Lookup
Hardware Devices list
feature dependencies 748
adding a device 532
installation
using with device control 529
client through Active Directory 778
hardware devices list 530
communications ports 110
Host Integrity
embedded database 83
explained 563
internationalization 77
requirements 566
Microsoft SQL Server configuration settings 85
setting up 564
MSI command line examples 777
Host Integrity policies
planning 81
notifications 572
Symantec Software Management Solution
peer-to-peer authentication 574
powered by Altiris 768
postpone Host Integrity check 569
third-party software 768
Quarantine 573
through Active Directory Group Policy Object 778
remediation 568, 571
using msi commands 769
installation status 591
Index 808
installing license (continued)

clients 53, 59, 61, 115 expired 98
multiple sites 700 over-deployed 98
Intelligent Threat Cloud Service 398 purchasing 95
Intelligent Updater 209 renewing 51, 98
Internet bots 409 requirements 78
Internet Browser Protection 466 Symantec Licensing Portal 97
intrusion prevention license issues
about 367 notifications for 612
blocking attacking computers 331 licenses
disabling on specified computers 376 for non-persistent clients 648
enabling in policy 373 limited administrator 274
how it works 370 Linux
locking and unlocking settings 317 handling Risk log events 466
managing custom signatures 378 Linux client
notifications 377 features 748
platform comparison 761 installing 57
signatures 371 management features 752
testing custom signatures 384 protection features 751
IPS signatures LiveUpdate
custom about 172173, 178
assigning libraries to a group 382 checking server activity 185
changing the order 382 client proxy settings for internal LiveUpdate
libraries 382 server 186
variables 383 configuring an external LiveUpdate server 197
custom library 379 configuring an internal LiveUpdate server 197
exceptions for 374 configuring update content for clients 187
content revisions 181
J downloading to server 184
Group Update Provider 201, 205
JKS keystore file 659
Intelligent Updater 209
joke programs 410
Mac 173
Mac, Linux 178
L platform comparison 762
LDAP directory servers updating whitelists and blacklists 520
connecting to 226 using third-party distribution tools instead of 210
importing organizational units 228 whitelists and blacklists for system lockdown 517
LDAP servers load balancing
importing user information from 223, 225 defined 684
learned applications 343 management server list 688
about 318 local subnet traffic 361
enabling 319 locations
searching for 320 associated with DNS queries 350
license locking
about 92 administrator account 294
activating 51 log on banner
backing up 100 adding 291
checking status 98 log on screen
deployed 98 timing out 295
Index 809
logs Microsoft Active Directory (continued)

Apache 720 installing client software with Group Policy
application and device control 606 Object 778
audit 605 Microsoft Exchange server
checking the debug log on the client 723 automatic exclusions 412
checking the inbox logs 724 Microsoft SCCM/SMS
clearing from database 681 rolling out Package Definition Files 777
compliance 606 Microsoft SQL Server
computer status 606 database configuration settings 85
database errors 603 misleading applications 410
deleting configuration settings 608 mixed control 249
exporting data 587 configuring firewall settings 330
filtering 607 MSI
Network and Host Exploit Mitigation 606 Command line examples 777
past 24-hours filter 607 features and properties 769
reducing space in database 658, 672 installing using command-line parameters 769
refreshing 604 processing precedence with setaid.ini 770
replicating 608 My Company group 220
Risk 607
running commands from 244 N
saving filter configurations 607
NetBIOS 329
Scan 607
network adapters
sending to Symantec 729
adding to a rule 365
server
adding to default list 353
configuring size 679
triggers 352
SONAR 488
Network and Host Exploit Mitigation
System 607
logs 606
types 605
network application monitoring 344
viewing 603
network architecture 81
viewing remotely 608
network intrusion prevention
lost password
about 370
reset 289
network services
triggers 350
M Network Threat Protection
Mac client platform comparison 761
features 748 notification area icon
installing 55 about 160
management features 752 notifications
protection features 751 about 610611
management server acknowledging 618
downloading content to 179 creating 620
uninstalling 90 default 612
management server list Do not show this message again 308
assigning to group and location 689 filtering 619
management servers Host Integrity 572
sites 698 intrusion prevention 377
Microsoft Active Directory licensing 617
configuring templates 781 partner 617
preconfigured 612
Index 810
notifications (continued) Power Eraser

remote clients 269 about 736
upgrades from another version 622 comparison to other scans 737
virus and spyware events on client differences between running locally and
computers 441 remotely 737
responding to detections 745
O running a scan 743
using to detect and remove difficult threats 739
on-demand scans
print sharing 362
running 423
private Insight server 447
scan progress options 470
private server
OS fingerprint masquerading 333
for groups 448
overview
product
sites 698
components 33
sites and replication 691
protection
enabling or disabling 239
P proxy
parental control programs 410 client external communication 479
password client submissions 479
.jks keystore file 659 required exceptions when using
change 286 authentication 432
resetting 287 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
password protection connection to Symantec LiveUpdate 186
client 253
passwords
expiring 289
Q
Quarantine
resetting 289
clean-up options 438
saving 291
deleting files 440
patches
Host Integrity failure 573
security vulnerabilities 216
local folder 437
peer-to-peer authentication 574
managing 435
policies
Quarantine Server
types 305
submissions 439
policy
quick reports
assign to a group 310
creating 597
creating 307
editing 307
import and export 312 R
inheritance 230 randomization
non-shared 314 content downloads 191193
shared 314 ransomware
user locks 317 about 395
withdraw 316 preventing 395, 397
policy serial number registry conditions
viewing on the client 163 Host Integrity custom requirement 578
ports remediation
communication requirements 110 Host Integrity 569, 571
installation requirements 110 remote access programs 410
Index 811
remote clients RSA server (continued)

monitoring 269 using with Symantec Endpoint Protection
policies for 267 Manager 279
remote consoles
granting access 292 S
replication
saving passwords
defined 698
logon screen 291
frequency 701
Scan log 607
on demand scheduling 702
scans 465
overview 691
about 404
setting up 700
customizing administrator-defined 460
report
managing 402
Comprehensive Risk 590
paused 471
Computers Not Scanned 589
rescanning computers 393
Daily Status 588
Risk log events 466
favorite 588
running on demand 423
Infected and At Risk Computers 590
New Risks Detected in the Network 590
snoozed 471
Top Sources of Attack 592
stopped 471
Top Targets Attacked 592
schedule
Top Traffic Notifications 592
automatic database backup 673
Weekly Status 588
scheduled reports
reporting
creating 600
language 731
modifying 600
logs 605
scheduled scans
SSL 731
adding to a policy 419, 421422
timestamps 731
Mac clients 421422
troubleshooting 731
missed scans 420
reports
multiple 420
deleting configuration settings 599
saving as template 402
printing 602
saving 602
screen reader
saving configuration settings 599
application blocked by Tamper Protection 540
types 595
search for
reputation data 434
groups, users, and computers 238
Reset Copy Policy Reminder 308
SecurID authentication
restart
configuring on the management server 278
avoiding 245
security assessment tool 410
command 244
security patches
risk
downloading to clients 216
reports 590
security risks
risk log 607
detections of 417
deleting files from the Quarantine 440
serial number. See policy serial number
risks
server
removing 390
configuring 44
rootkits 409
heartbeat 161
RSA server
logs 679
configuring SecurID authentication 278
management 664
uninstalling 90
Index 812
server control 249 submissions 479

servers quarantined items 439
using a private Insight server 447 sylink.xml
setaid.ini converting an unmanaged client to a managed
configuring 770 client 164, 782
settings Symantec Endpoint Protection
firewall 325, 330, 333 about 28
share files and printers 362 Symantec Endpoint Protection clients
Shared Insight Cache 625, 627 MSI properties 771
configuring network clients 633 Symantec Endpoint Protection Manager
customizing settings 634 downloading content to 179
network-based 629 Symantec Insight for Private Clouds 447
cache results, issues 641 Symantec Licensing Portal. See license
installing 631 Symantec products
log 638 automatic exclusions 413
no result response 641 Symantec Security Response 392
performance counters 640 submissions 479
stopping and starting the service 638 system administrator 274
system requirements 630 system lockdown
uninstalling 632, 638 about 490
viewing events 638 application name list 516
shield icon 160 checking the status of automatic updates 521
sites configuring 504
defined 698 enabling whitelist mode 524
deleting 703 interaction with Symantec ATP 515
overview 691 running in blacklist mode 525
Smart taffic 329 running in test mode 521
smc command 785, 789 testing selected items 526
SONAR system log 607
about 481 system requirements
about detections 482 network-based Shared Insight Cache 630
adjusting settings 486 system tray icon 160
exceptions for code injection 482
false positives 485 T
feature dependencies 748
Tamper Protection
managing 483
enabling and disabling 489
monitoring scan events 488
locking and unlocking settings 317
spyware 410
when to disable 241
standard client
TCP port 139 110
TCP resequencing 333
stateful inspection 341
templates for scheduled scans 402
status
terminated process errors
client deployment 591
database 733
clients and computers 236
third-party content distribution
status icon. See client connection
about 210
stealth settings 333
enabling with a LiveUpdate Policy 211
Submissions
to managed clients 211
locking and unlocking settings 317
Windows registry key requirement for
unmanaged 212
Index 813
third-party software users

installing client software 768 search for 238
threats
blended 409 V
timeout parameters
variables in signatures 383
console 295
Virtual Image Exception tool 625, 644
database 732
running 644
trackware 410
system requirements 643
trial
using on a base image 642
license 78
virtual images
trialware
exceptions 466
license 51, 98
virtual machine
Trojan horses 344, 409
adjusting scans for 424
troubleshooting
randomizing simultaneous content
client crashes 729
downloads 191
client problems 720
virtualization 625, 627
network-based Shared Insight Cache 641
adjusting scans for 424
SymDiag 715
base image for non-persistent GVMs 647
User Account Control and GPO 780
network-based Shared Insight Cache 633
trusted Web domain
randomizing scans 464
creating an exception for 546
supported 80
Virtual Image Exception tool 642, 644
U Virus and Spyware Protection
uninstalling platform comparison 757
client software with Active Directory GPO 783 preventing attacks 388
existing Symantec Endpoint Protection client Virus and Spyware Protection policy
software 121 locking and unlocking settings 317
Linux client 130 scheduled scans 419
Mac client 130 virus definitions
management server 90 updating 172
third-party security software 121 viruses 409
Windows client 129 detections of 417
unlocking
administrator account 294 W
unmanaged client
whitelist
converting to managed 168
updating automatically 517, 521
unmanaged clients
updating for system lockdown 520
distributing updates with third-party tools 212
whitelist mode
update
running system lockdown in 524
definitions 172
Windows 8
updating
detections in 419
content 187
notifications 443
upgrading
pop-up notifications 444
Symantec Endpoint Protection 135
Windows client
user information
features 748
collect 252
management features 752
user interface
protection features 751
configuring 250
user mode and computer mode 245
Index 814
Windows Embedded client

Windows Installer
commands 769
features and properties 769
parameters 773
Windows Security Center 466, 472
client installation 775
WINS traffic 329
withdrawing a policy 316
worms 409

Installation and Administration Guide SEP14

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationGuide d'installation et d'administration de Symantec EndPoint Protection.

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Administration Guide SEP14

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Administration Guide SEP14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Symantec Endpoint

This document was last updated on: December 14, 2016

Contacting Technical Support

Licensing and registration

Asia-Pacific and Japan customercare_apj@symantec.com

Europe, Middle-East, and Africa semea@symantec.com

North America and Latin America supportsolutions@symantec.com

Technical Support ............................................................................................... 4

Chapter 2 Getting Started with Symantec Endpoint

Getting up and running on Symantec Endpoint Protection for the first

Section 1 Installing Symantec Endpoint

Chapter 4 Managing product licenses ............................................... 92

Purging obsolete clients from the database to make more licenses

Chapter 5 Managing the client installation .................................... 104

Chapter 6 Upgrading Symantec Endpoint Protection .................. 135

Upgrading an environment that uses multiple embedded databases

Section 2 Managing client-server communication

Chapter 8 Updating content on the clients ..................................... 171

Choose a distribution method to update content on clients based

Configuring a LiveUpdate Settings policy to allow third-party

Section 3 Managing groups, clients, and

Chapter 10 Managing clients ............................................................... 233

Switching a Windows client between user mode and computer

Chapter 11 Managing remote clients ................................................. 254

Chapter 12 Managing administrator accounts and

About accepting the self-signed server certificate for Symantec

Chapter 13 Managing domains ............................................................ 296

Section 4 Managing protection with security

Searching for information about the applications that the computers

Chapter 15 Managing firewall protection .......................................... 323

Chapter 16 Managing intrusion prevention and Generic Exploit

Configuring client intrusion prevention notifications ............................ 377

Chapter 17 Managing Virus and Spyware Protection ..................... 387

How Symantec Endpoint Protection uses Symantec Insight to make

Chapter 18 Customizing scans ............................................................ 451

Customizing administrator-defined scans for clients that run on Linux

Chapter 19 Managing the information that the management

Chapter 20 Managing SONAR and Tamper Protection ................... 481

Chapter 21 Managing application control, device control, and

About the structure of an Application Control and Device Control

Chapter 22 Managing exceptions ........................................................ 534

Monitoring an application to create an exception for the application

Chapter 23 Testing security policies .................................................. 552

Section 5 Monitoring, reporting, and enforcing

Blocking a remote computer by configuring peer-to-peer

Chapter 25 Monitoring protection with reports and logs ............... 584

Chapter 26 Managing notifications .................................................... 610

Establishing communication between the management server and

Section 6 Protecting clients in virtual

Chapter 28 Installing and using a network-based Shared Insight

What do I need to do to use a network-based Shared Insight

Chapter 29 Using Virtual Image Exception ....................................... 642

Chapter 30 Non-persistent virtual desktop infrastructures .......... 646

Section 7 Configuring and managing the

Chapter 32 Configuring the management server ............................ 664

Chapter 33 Managing databases ......................................................... 669

Exporting log data to a text file ....................................................... 677

Chapter 34 Managing failover and load balancing .......................... 683